KSOB
ion
Ï19J XJWVMtWKiMKW
C. SNOUCK HURGRONJH!
TID: ACTOHDSE
VOI.
MillffllHM
mm na
HM in
SNOURK HURGKONB!
TID:
ACTO1N0SE VOI.
ACEHNESE
lY
1.CSNOUCKHURGRONJE
LATE E. J ERILL
LIEYDEN
Bibliotheel < Universiteit van Amsterdam
01 2923 1353
THE ACHEHNESE
| TL'ANKU MUIIAMAT | DAWOT. 1'RL'.TKNI>I'.R | TO TUK SL I.TANA IT. | 1878 I902. |
|---|---|---|---|
| SIT.MITTEI) | TO TUK IIUK II GOVERNMKNT | JANTARY 1903. |
THE ACHEHNESE
BV
Dr C. SNOUCK HURGRONJE
Adviser for Native Affairs, Netherlands India,
TRANSLATED
BY
the late A. W. S. O'SULLIVAN
Assistant Colonial Secrctary, Straits Settlements,
WIT II AN INDEX
BY
R. J. WILKINSON
Inspcctor of Schools, Federated Malay States,
VOL. I.
LATE E. J. BRILL
LEYDEN, 1906.
TIANKU Ml'HAM AT DAW'oT. I'RIII.NDKR TO IIII. SULTAN ATI'. 1S78 1902. sritMITTEI) TO THK IH'TCH GnVliRNMKNT JAM'AKV I903.
THE ACÏÏEHNESE
BV
Dr C. SNOUCK HURGRONJE
Adviser for Native Aflfairs, Netherlands India,
T RANS L A T E I)
BY the late A. W. S. O'SULLIVAN Assistant Colonial Secretary, Straits Settlemcnts,
WIT II AN INDEX
BY
R. J. WILKINSON
Inspector of Schools, 1'ederated Malay States,
VOL. I.
LATE E. J. BRILL LEYDEN, 1906.
E. J. Brill, publishers and printers, Leyden.
INTRODUCTION.
In July, 1891, I proceeded to Acheh in pursuance of instructions from the Netherlands-India Government to make a special study of the religious element in the political conditions of that country. During a residence in Arabia (1884—85) 1 had been in a position — especially at Mecca — to obtain an intimate knowledge of the influencc of Mohammedan fanaticism upon the obstinate resistance of the Achehnese to Dutch rule; some time spent in direct relations with Achehnese 011 their own soil was required to round oft" the knowledge gained by me from literature and from my experience in the sacred city of the Arabs. I11 Acheh I soon saw that the available data regarding the language, country and people feil far short of what was wanted, so I extended my enquiry beyonds the limits of my commission. In order to get at the very foundations of a knowledge of the influence of Islam upon the political, social and domestic life of the Achehnese, I took (so far as local conditions allowed me) that life in its en.tire range as the subject of my research. In February, 1892, I had got together enough pre- liminary matter for compiling a book; I worked up my materials at Batavia; and so, in 1893—94, first appeared the treatise which is now being again offered to the public in the form of an English translation. When Mr. ü'Sui.l IVAN, early in 1899, informed me of his project of translating the book and requested me to look through his version and give him the benefit of any amendments in the text which might seem to be needed, it was just the very time that the real conquest of Acheh was being commenced; and I — spending a great deal of my time in that country — was in an incomparably better position to investigate that old pirate-state than I had been in 1891 and 1892. Certainly iiad I begun to write my book in 1899, it would have differed in many respects from its actual form. Stil 1, as the book was definitely
VI INTRODUCTION.
out, there was 110 justification for re-writing it and there were some serious reasons for not doing so. The Second Volume had dealt with the religious life of the people; the more abundant data which were afterwards forthcoming had only confirmed in all particulars the account that I had given. Kesides, in the First Volume, there was only the first chapter which would be less useful than one written in 1899, since tnat latter could so deal with the general political situation as to lay more clearly before the reader the alteration in the state of affairs since
- Much of wliat had then been important, had come to lose its practical significance, — new factors and persons had brought their influences to bear. Any one writing a new introductory chapter with his eye on the altered situation would have broken, more or less, the thread of connection which ran through the component portions of my work. Moreover the state of affairs in 1891—92 long remained un- changed, while in 1899 the march of events was so rapid that the situation might almost be said to be changing from day to day. Last of all, the undertaking might have been seriously delayed owing to the fact that the translator and the author were separatcd — one in the Straits Settlements, the other in Netherlands India — and that both, wrapped up in ollicial duties, would already find it as much as they could do to get through their self-appointed task, especially as the l'-nglish edition would have to be printed in Europe. All these considerations led up to the decision that the text should be left substantially unaltered, and that only occasionally would some improvements and fuller explanations be included in it, that isolated additions to the text regarding individuals mentioned in it, should be put in brackets after the names referred to, and, finally, that in an introductory aiticle as much should be said regarding the course of recent events in Acheh as would suffice to give the reader some idea of their significance. This last seemed specially needful in an edition destined for readers outside Holland as \j'dl as in it, since foreigners had constructed for themselves a legend of the Acheh War which, though completely refuted by Dutch writings, continues stil], outside Holland, to be accepted. as history. Speaking generally, the most absurd
errors are accepted in Europe for the truth regarding events that concern the minor states; even in Gerrnany, the land of learning, savants take each other more seriously to task over an error in an edition of a I'ushtu text or in an essay on the ethnography of Corea
INTKODUCTION. VII
than over a tissue of injustices to their neighbours and kin in the Netherlands. Holland — so runs the European legend — has been engaged in war against Acheh for a period which has extended to about thirty years without having led to the subjugation of that native kingdom. Shaking their heads solemnly over it, many learned people outside the frontiers of Holland see in this worthy fable — to which naturally they do not devote any long investigation — a definite indication of Holland's inability to govern her colonies, whether this be due to faulty policy or to ignorance or to faithlessness on the part of those to whom the task of the subjugation of Acheh has been confided. Now there is certainly no nation more disposed to learn from foreigners than the Dutch; and no Dutchman will deny that in the conduct of Achehnese affairs it is often hard to see how the admini- stration can be considered to have been either adequate or suitable for what was needed. But the obstacles in the path of conquest were very, very great; with far more wisdom and power than little Holland pos- sesses, the difficulties would have taken a long spell of time to overcome. And Holland has spent no thirty years in the effort; her error rather has been that slie has continually suspended the action she lias begun and that she has indulged in long periods of quiescence, — while the most serious trouble of all has lain in the fact that the strings of policy were pulled by ignorant majorities in the Mother-country, who did not discover the best path from the outset but learnt through a period of disaster and discredit the course that they should pursue. Is Holland the only colony-governing country that has now and then had cause to suffer from twinges of that complaint, or that has failed to immediately lay hands 011 the man appointed by destiny to put through an arduous enterprise ? Acheh was to be brought into the comity of civilized states or at least to be rendered innoxious to it. From Mohammedanism (which for centuries she is reputed to have accepted) she really only learnt a large number of dogmas relating to hatred of the infidel without any of their mitigating concomitants; so that the Achehnese made a regular business of piracy and man-hunting at the expense of the neighbouring non-Mohammedan countries and islands, and considered that they were justified in any act of treachery or violence to European (and latterly to American) traders who came in search of pepper, the staple product
VIH INTRODUCTION.
of the country. Complaints of robbery and murder on board ships trading in Achehnese parts thus grew to be chronic. Of central authority there had never been any for some centuries back; and the country was practically split up into countless miniature states under chiefs whose power depended on personal energy and who were generally in a state of warfare with their neighbours unless in peace and alliance with them for the joint perpetration of their national oflfences. The foreigner, who had dealings with the Achehnese, as soon as he found himself in difficulties, sought vainly for some authority that might redress his wrongs. Such indeed has been the situation since the seven- teenth Ccntury when the Sultanate of Acheh lost its control over the great chiefs of the State and over their dependents; but even when the power of the Achehnese princes was at its height the foreigner could find no security for life or property in the country. The arrangements whicli the British Kast India Company made with Acheh at the close of the XVIII.h and the beginning of the XIXth ( entury for the establishment of friendly relations, were overridden in the most insulting way; we can satisfy ourselves upon this point by refernng to a recent essay upon the treaty made with Acheh') by KAI KI.ES in 1819, in which long extracts have been quoted from the archives of the India Office a). In 1786 Warren Hastings received from the then Sultan of Acheh a discourteous letter in reply to an expression of goodwill. In that same year, Captain FKANCIS LlGHT pointed out to the Governor-General of Bengal that a settlement at Pulau Pinang possessed greater advantages than one on the Achehnese coast: «Acheen is a good road but no place of security against an enemy there. The country is fertile beyond description and very populous. The inhabitants rigid mul superstitious Mohammedans, sullen, fickle and treacherous. To form a settlement there of safety and advantage, a force sufficiënt to subdue all the chiefs would be necessary". In the same spirit wrote JAMES PRICE to the chairman
| the Company | wrote to üengal on the 4.1. August | -that chief | so far as | we can collect | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| from your | correspondente, not | having | possessed | authority | in the country which | ||
| he assumed | to represent, | has never | heen in a situation | to maintain | the relations | into which | |
| he ent er cd | . | ||||||
| Essay | of P. | in Bijdragen | van het | Koninklijk Instituut | voor | de | |
| raat-land- en | l Mande van Nedertandsch | Indie, vol. LI, | pp. | (the Hague, |
1) <>1 ratlier with Johor AUum as king of Achecn", coneeming whom the Chairman of
1900). In the English documents qnote.1 there are many writer's or printers errors
1824: an established
2) H. VAN der Kemp
,59-240
INTRODUCTION. lx
of the Company in London : "I prefer Penang to the Port of Acheen as being more healthy and entirely free from that oppression, war and confusion which have ever ') distressed and at length driven out every European nation who lias attempted to settle there". And in 1825 Governor
R. FULLERTON wrote: "With respect to the future establishment of European influence over Acheen, it may be observed that such an arrangement 011 our part was long considered a desirable object, but it has been found utterly impracticable without employing a largc military force to overawe the inhabitants". As the one power which was settled in Sumatra and had brought the other territories in the island under its suzerainty or control, Holland, during the second decennial period of the XIXt>» Century, was compelled to take measures to ensure the safety of foreign trade in Aclieh. In 1824, the Dutch Government, with great lack of foresight, entered into a treaty with Great Britain, under which it guaranteed the security of trade and shipping in Aclieh — with its fanatical and treacherous population, turbulent and warlike to a degree unknown among the other races of the Archipelago, as well as hopelessly divided against itself, — and made the further stipulation (which rendered its undertaking impossible to carry out) that it would respect the inde- pendence of the country. No wonder then that in the following half-century the complaints of wrongs of every sort suffered at the hands of the Achehnese by Euro pean and American traders became more and more plentiful, and that these ultimately led up in 1871 to a new treaty with England, under which Holland was Ieft with more freedom of action in the control of Acheh. Ihe British experience of 1786 — that to effect the security of trade and shipping in Acheh it would be absolutely necessary "to subdue a'1 the chiefs" and "to overawe the inhabitants" — was now, after a long struggle, to be acquired by the Dutch as well. People flattered themselves quite seriously with the hope that a treaty with the Sultan
of Acheh forced out of him, if need be, by menaces and by the despatch of a small force, — would succeed in doing all that was wanted; they did not trouble thcir minds in the least degree with the internal condition of the country. Even after the war had actually begun
1) Obviously this is the correct reading, and nut "however'
X INTRODUCTION.
in 1873 they continued to entertain the vain hope that a treaty of this sort might be the basis of a solution of our Achehnese diftïculties. After the abolition of the royal authority and the death of the last Sultan, the Netherlands India Government came forward as his suc- cessor and claimed the allegiance of the chiefs of the dependent king- doms. Many chiefs of Achehnese coast-dependencies formally gave in their submission in order to protect their commerce from injury, but the number who vvithheld their allegiance was greater; and many chiefs in the interior did not consider themselves bound by the promises of the raja of the coast. Furthermore the state of war — as may be learnt from our first chapter — added to the many chiefs who already dis- puted authority in Acheh a countless number of others: adventurers, religious leaders, military chiefs of every type. For years the Dutch authorities remained under the illusion that by taking up certain strong positions (one having the former Sultan's residence as its centre and others being important harbours in the dependencies) the rest of the country could be forced to submit, and that by the submission of certain of the principal Chiefs the other headmen and the rest of the people would be brought under Dutch authority. At last under the governorship of General van der Heyden (1877—
1881) they learnt by experience that while a defensive policy in no way advanced Dutch dominion, a vigorous offensive would make the enemy come to his senses. All Great-Acheh was conquered in this way. The coast-dependencies which, in parts, were densely populated and supplied the ttervus rerum, money, to the war-party, were of greater real importance than the mother-state from which the colonies of pepperplanters had spread out. This fact the politicians forgot when in 1881 they thought that now that the war seemed virtually at an end they could fall back upon a more defensive attitude and introducé a purely civil government. The years 1881 to 1884 were necessary to enable them to see that the establishment of widely extended military posts in Great-Acheh and the introduction of a settled administration could never lead to the breaking down of the opposition in the depen dencies; and that, 011 the contrary, so long as one did not oneself take the offensive against the Coast-states, the military posts in Great-Acheh would be the target of continual attacks by the Achehnese. The Government and the House of Representatives in the Netherlands came to the decision — alas, an erroneous decision, — that the expenditure
INTRODUCTION. XI
on Great-Acheh must be curtailed, that the resistance in the Coast-states must be overcome by naval coercion alone, and fïnally that develop- ments must be awaited and that time would reconcile the Achehnese to their Over-lords. In 1884 this "concentration-scheme" was taken up and a beginning was made by the construction of a "concentrated line" of forts stretching about the old seat of the Sultanate. A widespread opinion exists that the statesman who inaugurated this so-called scheme, besides being entirely unversed in Achehnese affairs, was cynical and sceptical and only sought for some temporary way of shelving the burden of the Achehnese question, and that Parliament followed him. I am not in a position to controvert this belief. Certainly 110 one ever rendered a greater service to the War-party in Acheh than the inventor of "concentration". The Achehnese were free, at whatever time and in whatever way suited them best and without heavy expenditure or loss, to harrass the line anti the coast-stations, as often as they pleased; the troops within the line were as little able to prevent them as they were to punish them when the thing was done. I11 the presence of a quite harmiess enemy within the country, the religious party and the ener- getic adventurers had a most desirable opportunity of establishing war- chests and, with them, imperia in imperio. There was no reason what ever why this most enjoyable state of affairs — for the Achehnese — should ever come to an end. Moreover all Acheh and its dependencies, including the headmen in nominal subjection to the Dutch Government, remained imder the influence of the Government's foes; and these latter everywhere derived more profit than injury from the presence of the Dutch forts in the country. Coercive measures dealing with Achehnese trade and shipping failed to be effective not only because they were not pushed 011 with suffi ciënt energy, but still more because it is always possible for an Acheh nese to supply himself with his own limited requirements even without the aid of foreign trade, so long as lie is left (as the "concentration scheme left him) in undisturbed possession of the whole land. No wonder tlien that 110 one with any knowledge of local conditions expected any good from this "scheme". A child could grasp that it offered either too much or too little. If one hoped to effect the sub- jugation of Acheh, it offered little help, — in fact none at all; if one only desired so much conquest as would permit of the Dutch flag flying ovei the village of the old Sultans, then the tenure of a very small
XII INTRODUCTION.
area would have sufficed, and one might have been spared the trouble and expense incurred in the holding of the "line" which necessitated a considerable military force to do a work of the Danaides under the continuous harassing of the Achehnese. From the commencement too, every one whose duty it was to supervise the working of this "scheme" found it necessary to do either more or less than it implied; the Governors of Acheh themselves ex- pressed such cpinions sometimes by action sometimes by recommen- dation. We need not trouble the reader vvith the dozens of different schemes proposed by officials or unofficials. It may however be borne in mind tliat firstly the trial of a purely civil government (based on the theory that Acheh had been sufficiently subdued), and afterwards the "concentration" (really intended to save statesmen at home from troubling their heads about these questions, but nominally based upon the theory that Acheh would ultimately submit of its own accord) take out fifteen years from the tale of the legendary thirty first referred to by us. The last three years of the "concentration" time have earncd an unhappy notoriety under the name of the "Uma"-period. This adven- turer, whose character is depicted in our first volume, came from the Meulaböh country; he was a typical Achehnese in his complete untrust- worthiness and in his slavery to opium and gambling, but he differed from most Achehnese headmen in his energy and consummate tact in his relations with all sorts and conditions of men. As he had acquired a commanding influence over the West coast and in one of the three sagis of great Acheh by cunning and intrigue and by violence of all sorts — and the "concentration" theory debarred any idea of depriving him of his ill-gotten authority — he was a troublesome enemy to the Dutch Government and he could become by prudent policy on the part of those in authority, a useful ally of that Government. It is true that he had many crimes standing to his debit and had more than once been guilty of double-dealing — but these are offences which can be laid to the charge of all "friendly" Achehnese chiefs, and although in Uma's case the proportions in both respects were greater than in the case of other treacherous allies, this was only due to the fact that the others were less subtle and energetic than he. Thus in 1893 when Uma, intending to advance his own interests had repeatedly asked for the forgiveness of his past offences, the acceptance
INTRODUCTION. XIII
| of his submission | could not | bc censured | from the | point of view of the | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| concentration | scheme. | With | a prudent | endeavour | to reconcile | Uma's | |
| private | interests | with those | of peace and order | throughout | the terri- | ||
| tories | he ruled, | there would | have been much | to gain and | nothing | to | |
| lose. tor even | if the fickle | cliief once more | had changed | his mind, one | |||
| would | still have | been as far advanced | as before | and would | have had | ||
| some | chance of increasing | one's knowledge | of | the proper | course to | ||
| pursue influence. But inexcusable | in matters | concerning it was that a Governor absolutely unacquainted | the condition | of the districts | under | his | |
| with native | aftairs | should, | immediately | after Uma's submission, | have | ||
| given | his entire | confidence | to this adventurer | and, in defiance | of all | ||
| warnings, | should | have persisted | in strengthening | Uma | by generous | ||
| subsidies | of Dutch assisted, | weapons Uma overcame | and Dutch his | money. own enemies | — | for partizan | |
| struggles | and civil | war raged | even | after the Dutch | power | was esta- | |
| blished | in Acheh | — and, | under the guise of fighting | against | the foes | ||
| of the | Dutch regime, | he | dealt out, as his own, | plentiful | subsidies | to | |
| his friends | in the | War-party | and tried | by all means | in his power to | ||
| acquire | the maximum | of | influence | both over | the Dutch | and | their |
| opponents. | Of course | this | could not | go on for | long; as | soon as it | |
| ceased | to be possible | for Uma | to continue | to combine | the satisfaction | ||
| of the wishes of the | War-party | with the appearance | of advancing | the | |||
| interests | of the Government, | the barrel | would burst | — and | there | was | |
| not much | doubt | 011 which side | Uma | the very | |||
| first he set himself to winning substantial | gains for the | War-party | and | ||||
| nominal | advantages | for the | Dutch, | which last | advantages | however | |
| seriously | taken had | 110 real value | whatever. | A "line" of | greater extent | ||
| than the original | „concentrated" | line, could effect nothing | whatever in | ||||
| the way | of terminating | an | insurrection | that had | its centres | and its | |
| granaries | outside | Great Acheh | in the dependencies. | Yet this extension | |||
| of the line was the only apparcnt | gain which | Uma, | appointed | a com- | |||
| mander | of friendly | Achehnese | forces and considered | by the | Governor | ||
| as a trusty | councillor, | brought | to his protector; | and this | gain | was | |
| due to good-will. | — and continued | to | depend | 011 — the | slender thread | of his | |
| In March, | 1896, | Uma thought | that | the time | had come | to remove | |
| the scales from the eyes of the | blindly-trusting | General | DEYKEKHOFF. | ||||
| He had then | sufficiënt money | and arms | to play a leading | part among |
rhus
would elect to be. From
Xiv INTRODUCTION.
the War-party, and the claims which his friend DEYKERHOFK pressed upon him began to be burdensome. Ilis secret opposition to Dutch rule thus changed to open hostility, but since the real purport of his actions had long been as obvions as the day, wc cannot speak — except in a highly specialized sense — of Uraa's " defection". The Uma episode, however melancholy in itself, indirectly exercised a healthy influcnce upon the management of Achehnese aflfairs. lts termination opened all cyes to the necd of vigorous action if one did not wish to abandon altogether the subjugation of Acheh. In 1896, the war against the Achehnese, which had been allowed to be suspended since 1881 without any real resultant gain, was resumed. Above all since Governor \ AN HEUTSZ in 1898 took the direction of atfairs every- thing lias been methodically done to make the necessary end, once and for all, of this insurrection. T he enemy, by nature more warlike and from of old more devoted to war than any race in the neighbouring islands, was by this time far better equipped than at the outset of the Dutch invasion of Acheh. He had a superfluity <»f arms and munitions; he possessed a better knowledge of the tactics of European troops and the difficulties that they had to overcome; and he had, during the concentration-time, formed no high estimate of his foe's intelligence. Thus then his self- confidence stood higher than ever. Whenever the Dutch troops encountered the Achehnese in the open field the die was soon cast; these latter could not — owing to lack of unity and organization — keep in the field anything like a military force for long. On the other hand the Achehnese have an advantage in guerilla warfare which makes tlieir subjugation a gigantic task and through which the combatant numbers at tlieir foe's disposal are of even less avail than his superior strategy and organization. Between the populated districts the Achehnese finds sometimes jungles and some- tinies swamps in which he can conceal himself; from the central higli- lands of North Sumatra where the Gayös and Alassers live, a huge ring of forest separates liini. I11 ordinary times he makes clearings for pepper and rice fields in the jungle; in time of need sucli clearings offer themselves as excellent hiding-places over which bands can scatter themselves. For gampong-dwellers who do not wish to submit, the abandonment of tlieir habitations is thereby rendered less distressing; they settic in
INTRODUCTION. XV
the ladangs or open up new clearings in the jungle, — for preference, in out-of-the-vvay corners. Thus then the gampöngs of Acheh and its dependencies became partly depopulated, and the illimitable virgin forest became dotted, here and there, with temporary clearings used as the settlements sometimes of large communities, sometimes of petty bands, — situated as far as possible from any common path, very difficult to tracé and as good as inaccessible for large military forces. The people remaining in the gampöngs in apparent submission really sided with the expelled section so tliat the ladang-dwellers always found a cordial reception awaiting them in the gampöngs, while the gampöng-dwellers, when they had anything to their discredit, knew where they could safely retire to. Furthermore bands could count on safe hiding-places when they wished among the Gayös and Alassers, Mohammedan subjects of Acheh. Achehnese bands had to gather together and act for short periods only wherever through enquiries or the reports of tlieir spies, they had reason to believe that they stood a good chance of winning some advantage or another. They were rarely exposed to attack on any large scale, for the almost inaccessible country that they understood in every detail helped them as an ally and enabled them to break up into small paities or even singly to bctake themselves to their tem porary places of refuge whenever necessary. The question of provisions troubled them but little; they found on the spot pretty nearly every- thing necessary to satisfy their modest requirements. For scrious attacks they made use of fanatics who, fortified by the assurance of tlieir teachers that any one who feil in a war against infidels would go straight to heavcn, eagerly went to their death, and of assassins who pretended ^ to be friendly so as to help the cause by gaining admission to some camp and there plunging into slaughter. Is it wonderful then that many a man, shrugging his shoulders, asked himself how all this was to end, and believed that the troops, to accomplish their task, would have to be not only brave and resourceful but ubiquitous? Iruly FRANCIS LLGHT and JAMES PRICE, whom we have alrcady quoted, had grasped the situation in its most literal sense. It was necessary "to subdue all the chiefs", — and their name was legion! Only as guerillas against guerillas, by using the most lightly equipped native troops under the leadership of fïrst-rate European officers with non-commissioned ofïicers of like quality, and by operating in small
XVI INTRODUCTION.
detachments, could any real results be arrived at. In lcss tlian six ycars General VAN HEÜTSZ made such progress tliat now even the most sceptical must admit tliat we have come to the beginning of the end. I he traitor Uma and numbers of adventurers, fanatical leaders and guerilla chiefs perished; the chiefs of dependent states, the members of the Sultan's family, and finally their head himself who in 1878 as a chilel had been proclaimed 1'retender-Sultan, submitted almost without exception; and thousands of refugees came back to their gampöngs under the authority of Government. The continuance of the revolt is now censured by all chiefs of mark except a limited number of uni- versally respected religious leaders. This exception — and in fact the whole attitude of the teungkus (men learned in the scriptures) during the closing years of the war — confirms anew the accuracy of what was said in this book in 1892 regarding the significance of the religious factor in the war; at tliat time no one believed it, but for the last tvvo years every one lias accepted it as a trutli that he acknowledged from the first. If one casts a glance over the map so as to form some idea of the extent and desolate character of the country in which, by day and still more by night, operations had to be continually carried on; if one knows that several military expeditions lasting weeks, — yes, and months were necessary towards the central highlands of the Gayös in order to track down the enemy; that from 1898 the rule was enforced that all houses and settlements should be spared — in the case of enemies as well as in the case of tliose who submitted; that one should always behave witli the greatest indulgence towards hereditary chiefs, and that even repeated evidence of treachery formed no sufficiënt reason for not receiving them back into favour when they repented; — one then can understand what an efTort must have been made to attain the position in which matters stand today. Truly, although this guerilla warfare gave no place to feats of arms generally called famous, the courage, the devotion, the foresight and local knowledge necessary to enable officers with their small detachments of troops to march tens of miles a day over very hilly ground, often pathless, through forest, swamp, and riverbed, to reach some liidden destination, were greater tlian one can picture from the plain military reports; and the hardships and privations which they and their subordinates had to patiently undergo would have caused any less sober nation tlian the Dutch to blow their own trumpet very loudly.
INTRODUCTION. Wil
1 he whole former kingdom of Acheh vvith the dependencies connected with it is now subject to Dutch rule; all the districts are administcred by hereditary chiefs under the constant supervision of Dutch Civil Servants and officials, and the military force is engaged in hunting down and reducing to impotence the last elements of disorder — the irreconcilable fanatics and the incorrigible plunderers — in their own selected hiding-places. The very reciprocal dissensions of the Achehnese, their efïtorts to impede the subjection of their opponents among their fellow-countrymen, make this work laborious and slow, but no one has any doubt about the ultimate issue, and even the surviving bands no longer delude themselves with the hope of baffling the Dutch for long. 1 his commentary on the above-debated events of the last few years does not aim at giving the reader an extract of Acheh's most recent history; the treatment of history lies outside the scope of my work. Hut just as in 1892, for a proper comprehension of the political, domestic, social and religious life of the Achehnese it was necessary now and again to recall certain historical events in order to explain the present by the past, so now it seems desirable not to leave the reader unac- quainted with the important changes which have taken place 011 the political stage at Acheh since the appearance of the Dutch edition of my work. '1 his further thought occurs to me as its writer: that the period separating the two editions of the work has, in all material details, placed the seal of truth upon the diagnosis of the disease made by me in 1892, when many doubted me, while other doctors thought that the complaint was beyond healing. Now 110 one any longer doübts that the dogmas of Islam on the subject of religious war, so fanatical in their terms, supplied the principal stimulus to this obstinate rebellion; that the teungkus, or religious leaders, came more and more during the war to be masters of the country and terrorizcd the hereditary chiefs as well as the populace wherever these last were disposed to peace; that only a forcible subjugation followed by orderly contro! over the administration could bring about peace; that the Dutch Government in Acheh could effect nothing by pressure from outside; that the control of the country through controlling its harbours was impracticable; and that I uanku Muhamat Dawöt who had been made Sultan as a child, however much he enjoyed the homage mingled with fear that natives are apt to give to the descendants of their tyrants, was a nonentity in a political sense and was in a position neither to do the Dutch much
XVIII INTRODUCTION.
harm nor to give them any serious assistance in the pacification of the country. It was precisely during the most important years of the Acheh War tliat the work of translation was going 011, with many pauses and at a slow pace. \ hen the book was at last completed in manuscript, and when the first volume had been printed in full and the second to the extent of some pages, Mr. O**'SULLIVAN** was, in August 1903, carried by a most sudden death. Shortly before his death it had been arranged between us tliat he should compile an alphabetical index rerum which would take the place of the lists of contents of chapters as well as of the list of Achehnese words attached to the original edition. Besides this, Mr. O**'SÜLUVAN** planned a translator's preface to follow mine. This last feature must now be lost to the reader; the compilation of the index as well as the translation of this introduction was kindly undertaken by Mr. W'iI.KINSON who was intimately acquainted with Mr. O'SuLUVAN's project. Besides the above-mentioned ditferences the Knglish translation (lifters from the original edition in the following respects. Mr. O'Suu**.IVAN** lias appended some notes, marked as coming from the translator and dealing especially with the aspect of the phenomena cognate to those in the text whenever they are also met with in the Malay Peninsula. The two geographical maps which accompanied the Dutch edition have been entirly re-cast, as the expeditions which traversed the country during the last years of the war were extremely useful for topographical pur- poses. The portions still unsurveyed we are able to fill in by means of outline-sketches and reliable data from native sources. All tliat could be gathered from all the above-mentioned sources of information up to 1903 lias been embodied in our two maps which were prepared in the topographical bureau at Batavia. Of the photographic plates which ïllustrated the first edition, some have been omitted, others replaced by better, and many are inserted for the first time. Some texts in the Achehnese language, of which a summary or translation appeared in the course of descriptions (e. g. regarding the conclusion of a marriage in Vol. I, and regarding the W^/Z-games in Vol. II), were given in the Dutch text as appendices to the first edition; these appendices are now omitted. Finally the spelling of Achehnese words lias been some- wliat modified to suit Knglish eyes and ears. 1 he Achehnese language of which the consonants as well as the
1NTRODUCTION. XIX
vowels present great difficulties to foreigners and of which a correct grasp and imitation can only be acquired by Non-Achehnese after great labour, is written by the Achehnese tliemselves in the Arabic character. This character is inadequate for representing the consonants and wholly incapable of representing the vowels of the Achehnese. Thus it comes about that the Achehnese adhere to the spelling which represented their language in a bygone age when many sounds now lost or modified occurred in it; thus for instance they write an r at the end of syllables but do not sound it; they write l at the end of syllables but sound it as y or i;; s is changed in the same position to h or i/i. For all these reasons one can hardly read Achehnese as written by Achehnese without having previously mastered the colloquial. There can thus be 110 question of transliterating the native tongue. We must treat Achehnese according to phonetic systems of spelling. The system drawn up by me for the purpose is now generally followed and is here employed with the necessary modifications for English use. Here follow some remarks 011 the phonetic value of the letters used, though they can only serve to give the reader a rough idea of the true sound. The ' in words likc atieu, ba, seuöt, stands for a consonant which European orthographical systems usually neglect although it occurs among us. It is that consonant with which all words begin that are incorrectly written with an initial vowel; it arises out of the rush of breath after a sudden opening of the larynx. When this consonant occurs in English between two vowels (e. g. in be 'out, too 'old when such words are uttered without the use of the connecting semi-vowels y and w), it is called the "hiatus", and in some words — usually interjections — where it occurs as a final, it is altogether omitted in writing just as it is omitted as an initial. In Achehnese (which knows no diphthongs) this consonant plays too great a part to be omitted; it also frequently occurs in this as well as in many other native lan- guages as a final, and is sometimes a weakened form of X-, t, etc. We write it as ' in the middle and at the end of a word but we leave it unwritten as an initial; this latter concession to European orthographical methods can cause no confusion. A peculiar nasal variant of ' we write as c; the reader must infer that the vowel following this symbol is pronounced very nasally. The letters d, t, l and n are uttered (more delicately than in English)
A INTRODUCTION.
by a short blow with the tip of the tongue against the base of the teeth. g is approximately the English g in gun. j and ch approach the sound of those letters in English but are enunciated in a drier way. h is the well-known aspirate, but it is also very distinctly sounded at the end of a syllable, e. g. in bb/i, sah, sahbat, however much the untrained European ear may miss it. The h lias also its full sound when it occurs after another consonant; in pha, kaphé, dhoè, that, Iheë, it is sounded as distinctly as in uphold, red-heat, out-house, etc., at the beginning as well as in the middle of words. ng is sounded as in bring but it also used as an initial, e**.g.** in ngeu. 1 his consonant, as also the m, is pronounced very nasally. ny usually stands for the single sound wlucli in French is represented by gn, e. g., in oignon. r in the predominant dialect is sounded as a very soft guttural, so that this letter dwindles avvay at the end of a word and is not marked by us in our system. sounds like the English th in tlunk, but it is uttered in a very palatal way by the pressure of the front part of the tongue against the roof of the mouth. Untrained ears often confuse this sound with t. 1 he reniaining consonants need no explanation.
- is sounded as in French; i as ea in sea and beat; u as ™ in too
and soort -, é as ay in say or ai in sail; è as in the French père or (in closed syllables) as in set; ö as in boat, home-, o as in the French sort but this vowel often occurs in open syllables and is then pronounced very long. en is a vowel very difficult for European organs of speech to exactly reproduced; it approaches closest to the French eu and the German ó, but one should try to utter it with firmly closed teeth and without pushing the lips forward in the least, so that the distance between the corners of the mouth is rather increased tlian decreased. The back of the tongue must be pressed against the palate and between these two one should force out the breath steadily with the least possible opening of the glottis. Unaccented, this vowel resembles the indeterminate vowel in the French je, le, se. e is a very slightly marked vowel which only appears in the pro- longation of others, e. g„ of /, è, u, b and en (thus ië, èë, uë, oë, euë, in wlucli the soft connecting semi-vowel y is heard in the case of the
INTRODUCTION. XXI
first two and the soft connecting semi-vowel zi> in the case of the last three) and it sounds then like the final vowel-sound in the French amie or in the Dutcli harmonieën. 'i is almost as furtive; it only appears aftcr other vowels (all except i, é, è) and separates them from a final h, e. g. alöih, bagaih. The ik is only the corrupted sound of an original s. e is the protracted and accented pronunciation of the vovvel in the French je, le, se; in Achehnese verses make it rhyme vvith o.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
VOLUME I.
INTRODUCTION. PP. V—xxi. CHAPTER I. Distribution of the people, forms of government and administration of justice; Pp. i —193.
(1) Introduction; p. 1. (2) Elements of population; p. 16. (3) Drcss,
food, luxuries, dwellings, liousehold equipment; p. 25. (4) Distribution of the people; clans and tribes; p. 44. (5) The Gampöng, its government and adats; p. 58. (6) The mukim and its administration; p. 80. (7) The ulèëbalangships and their constitution; p. 88. (8) The Rajas (Sultans) of Acheh; p. 120. (9) Rivals of the traditional authorities; political adventurers and representatives of religion; p. 151. Appendix; p. 190.
CHAPTER II. Achehnese Calendars, festivals and seaso/is. Agriculture, navigation and jishery. Laws relating to land and water; Pp. 194—294.
(1) The Achehno-Mohammedan divisions of time; p. 194. (2) Feasts
and appointed times and seasons; p. 202. (3) The civil or Season Calendar; p. 245. (4) Agriculture, tenths and sugar-cane planting; p. 258.
(5) Navigation and fisheries; p. 275. (6) Rights 011 land and water; p. 285. CHAPTER III. Domestic life and law; 1'[). 295—439.
(1) l'roposal, betrothal and marriage contract; p. 329. (3) Early days
of married life; polygamy and concubinage; financial relations of husband and wife; p. 356. (4) Divorce; p. 367. (5) Pregnancy and birth; early years of childhood; p. 371. (6) The parents as bringers-up of their children; p. 401. (7) Sicknesses; their origin and cure; p. 408. (8) Death and the disposal of the dead; p. 418. (9) Distribution of Effects; p. 434.
CORRIGENDA.
Vol. I, p. 19, line 21: ureu'engdagattg, read: ttreuèng dagang. „ „ „ 76, line 18: statescraft, read: statecraft. » 11 „ [45, line 12: negligable, read: negligible. r » » 152> l'ne 23: heriditary, read: hereditary. n 71 '6o> lint 25: strategem, read: stratagem. vvv 161, line 25: rigourously, read: rigorously. vvv '62, line 33: strategem, read: stratagem. v v v '631 line 9: mustache, read: moustache. vvv l7°: line 9' irresistable, read: irresistible. v v v 177» li tic 14 ; negligable, read: negligible. v v B iSj, note i: died ipor, read: died /poj. vvv [9°» line us Sultan, read: 16: as Sultan. v v v v line 4: from below: Maltnut, read: Mahmut. vvv 191» 'ine in Ach, read: 10: in Achehnese. v v v v line 5: from below: Abu Bahr, read: Abu Bakt v v v v note 4: Qadir iyyah, read: Qadiriyyah. vvv 192, line Merey, read: ii: mercy. v v v '97. üne 17: Ihalathiyyah, read: Thalathiyyah. v v v 205, line 10: mohammedons, read: mohammedans. v v v 219, line 24: Abdarrhaman, read: Abdarrahman. vvv 272, line toosed, read: 17: tossed. vvv 272, note 3, line 3: menstruc/ion, read: menstruation. vvv 273, line 2: sinaleh, read: sinaléh. vvv 280, note : geureupnk, read: 1 geurenpn/i. vvv 29 7, note : tnauchari, read 1 : 1 natte har i. vvv 304. line 15: sambc, read: sratnoë. vvv 33°> note: pref er, read: profer. v v * 33'. 'ine 15: unmaried, read: unmarried.
CORRIGENDA.
V°l. 1> P- 33^. note 4: oncii, read: aneu.
- v v 37^> note 3: al-aili, read: ai-laili. v v » 3°6, line 7: teumpèë, read: teumpè. v-* 4°5> note 3: undiko, read: andiko. " "-409, line 14 and notes 4 and 5: baleuëm, read: baluëm. » v » 4-0, note 2: scisson, read : scissov.
| CHAPTER | I. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| OF THE | I'EOPI.E, | FORMS | OF GOVERNMENT |
| AND ADM1N1STRATION | OF JUSTICE. |
DISTRIBUTION
§ i. Introduction.
The limits of the kingdom of Acheh') in Sumatra are placed by the Boundaries of Achehnese themselves at 'feumiëng (Tamiang) on the East Coast, but (:reat"Ac'letl- far more to the Soutli 011 the Western Coast, viz. at Baros or whatever other point they regard as marking the boundary between the territory of the princes of Menangkabau and that of the Sultans of Acheh. Far more restricted, however, is the territory they describe as "Acheh" proper, or as we are wont to term it, "Great Acheh". lhis kernei of the kingdom, which has supplied the outlying districts with a considerable portion of their inhabitants, and lias constantly striven to exercise more or less dominion over them, is according to
the Achehnese idea bounded by a line extending from Kluang 011 the West, to Kruëng Raya 011 the North Coast, and passing through Reuëng- rcuëng, Pancha and Janthóë₂).
| thcir own | country may be found | in Van | I.angen's | De Inrichting van | het Atjchsche | Staats | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| bestuur onder | het Sultanaat | in the | Bijdragen van | het Kon. Inst. | voor de Taal-, | Land- | en |
| Volkenkunde | van Nedcrlandsch-Indie | for the year | 1888, p. 386. | There are | various other | ||
| explanations | of the | in vogue, | but not a single | onc is reliable. | We find | in Acheh | |
| but one | more repetition | of the phenomenon, | that | the names of countries, | races and peoples | ' | |
| present insoluble | riddles | to the etymologist, | while | those of villages | and hamiets | are as a | |
| rule fairly | easy of analysis. | We must | thus rest content | with knowing | that the | word Acheh, | |
| which is | of unknown | origin, is applied | as the designation | both | of the whole | country and | |
| of its chief | town, and also | of the entire | population. | ||||
| (vuig. Fedir). | We find | the boundaries | somewhat | diflerently marked | in the ordinary | maps | |
| and in the | above quoted | brochure of Van | I.angen | p. 382. |
1) Some examples of the etymological lore of the Achehnese in respect to the name of
2) 1 hese three places he on the footpaths uniting Acheh wilh the territory of Pidië
name
O
I he form of this, the truc Acheh, the Achehnese delight to com- pare to that of a vvinnowing-basket (jeu'ec), as may hc seen in the
JEU'ftic (WINNOWING BASKET). THE ACHEHNESE Co.MI'AKE THE FORM OF TRI JE ACHEH TO TUIS,
ïllustration '). The debouchement of the Acheh river (kuala Acheh) suggests to their fancy the soniewhat sharply pointed mouth of the winnower, whence all unclean particles adhering to the husked rice are shaken out. Proceeding down stream, we have the territory of the XXV Mukims») on the left and that of the XXVI Mukims on the right, the intervening space up to the broad belt of outlying country being oc-
1) I hese baskets are made of strips of the bark of a smal! tree called biti plaited together.
2) For the derivatie and meaning of the word mukim see § 6. In I'cnang and Pro-
vince Wellesley the English Government has adopted the word to designate the minor subdivisions of a district for administrative purposes. In its stricter sense it corresponds almost exactly to the English word "parish". (Translate»).
3
cupied by the XXII Mukims. A comparison with the thrcc angles of a triangle has still more deeply engrafted itself into the lan- guage; these three confederations or congeries of mukims are called tlie Ihcc sagbë (Mal. tiga sagi) i. e. the three angles of Acheh, and the three ulèëbalangs or chieftains who stand or are supposed to stand at the head of these three districts, are called panglima sagbë, or heads of sagi or angles. The history of this "triangular kingdom" and of the coast-states and liistoryof islands which constituted its dependencies remains yet to be written. European sources of information, such as accounts of travels and extracts from old archives, can only furnish us with very fragmentary materials; yet it is to these that we should have to look for the basis of such a work. Malayan chronicles and the native oral tradition, though furnishing us with much of interest as regards the methods of thought of the writers and their coëvals, cannot be relied on as the groundwork of history. They are but collections of fabulous genealogies, legends and tales dressed up to suit the author's fancy, which must be subjected to a careful process of filtration before they can be brought into unison with more solid materials. Our present purpose is to describe how the Achehnese live and how they are governed, what they think and what they believe. As the present has ever its roots in the past, a retrospective glance over the earlier history of Acheh miglit be of great service to us in this enquiry were it not that, for the reasons just stated, this history is to a great extent wrapped in obscurity. As regards history, then, we limit ourselves to what our discussion of existing institutions brings to liglit cn passant and for further information refer our readers to Prof. Veth's Atchin pp. 60 et seq., where the principal historical traditions are set forth in detail. I11 the present chapter we propose to give a review of the distribu- tion of population, the government and administration of justice as they existed before the Achehnese war introduced an clement of confusion. As a matter of fact, however, the disorder thus created has left the main features untouched, and anyone who has some knowledge of the public institutions of other kindred nations will if hc follow our de- scription be brought to the conclusion that these institutions in Acheh are in a large measure genuinely indigenous and of very great antiquity.
of the manu-',r PUrP°Se differS fr°m that aimed at b>' Mr-K-F. H. Van Langen script 'n llis of government under the Sul-
| (locu- | essay | on the | system | in Acheh | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| speeüng | tanate manuSCri | He t | takes | as | ||
| country. | ey |
^he')• his chief sources of information one or two T P documents, known in Acheh under the name of sarakata. 1 h contain decrees having the force of law and are ascribed to Sultans Meukuta Alam or Iskandar Muda (1607—1636) and to Shamsul- alam, who reigned for a period of one month only (1726— 27) according to the Achehnese chronicles. The writer has illustrated and completed the contents of these documents from the oral tradition of the Achehnese. To assign their true value to these documents wc must allovv our- selves a slight digression. It is abundantly clear from all the sources of Axhehnese history, bc they native or European, that there has never been an opportunity in Acheh for a regulated and normal development of forms of government or administration of justice. In vain do we seek in any period of her history for order and repose. It is not to be found even during the reigns of those princes who shed the greatest prosperity and lustre over the land, such as Alaudin al-QaharJ), known also as Sidi Mukamil or Mukamal (1540—67), Eseukanda (Iskandar) Muda or Meukuta Alam (1607 36) 3)i not to mention their successors. Kxamined closely, this show of royal grandeur is found to consist in some enlargements of territory, increase of authority over the ports (which are the seats of civilization and wealth in all Malayan countries) and consequent increase of revenue, which gave rise to greater splendour at court, but no serious effort towards the establishment of solid insti- tutions such as survive the overthrow of dynasties. 1 he only attempts at centralization of authority, or reformation whether social, polttical or religious, are precisely these very edicts which wc have just referred to. üf the contents of these by no means ample
| at the Hague | for the | year 1888 | pp. 381 et | seq. In referring | to this essay | in future | we |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| shall cal 1 it | the Atjehsch | Staatsbestuur, | and | give the pages | of the above | number | of the |
| «ij dragen | . | ||||||
| the pand,t | Raniri in his treatise | O^J! | (printed | at Mekka in 13.1 | |||
| Heg. on the 1637 «hilc | margin Iskandar Thani | of the edition was king. | of dUU | K) for he | says that he came | to Acheh in |
1) I'rinted in the Bijdragen van het Kon. Instituut voor de Taal-, I.and- en Volkenkunde
2) I11 Achehnese Alaédin A'ha.
3) Hie year 1636 is confirmed as the correct date of the death of Meukuta Alam by
5
political fragments it may be said that hardly a single one of the inno- vations they comprise lias passed from document into actuality, but simply that the state of things they reveal as already in being lias continued its existence. It is not difficult to distinguish in these edicts the old and already established conditions from the new ones which they purport to introducé. 1 lie principal features of tliis old status were the great independence of the numerous chiefs and the all-prevailing influence of traditional custom. The new elements may bc classified as follows: i". Attempts at an extension of the authority of the Sultan by allotting to liim, the king of the port, a certain control over the suc- cession of the otlier chieftains of the land — a matter which for the rest is treated in these edicts as inviolable — over the disputes of these chiefs with one another, or tliose between the subjects of different ciiiefs, and over the interests of strangers. In a word, some very moderate eflorts at centralization of authority, having it for their object to make the Sultan primus inter pares; the establishment of a kind of indication of fealty, meant to serve as an open and visible reminder of the existence of sucli a relation between Sultan and chiefs. 2". Certain rules intended to bring about a stricter observance of Muhammedan law. 3". Regulations dealing with trade (then confined to the capital) the sliares of certain otticials established in the capital in the profits drawn from tliis trade by the king of the port, the court ceremonial, the celebration of great religious festivals etc. During my residence in Acheh I obtained copies of a numbcr of other sarakatas not included among tliose published by Van Langen. They were as a rule lengthy documents and most of them bore dates. The following are examples: one of Meukuta Alam or Eseukanda (Is-Muda, dated 1607, revived by the princess Sapiatödin in 1645, intended kandar) to regulate the court ceremonial and solemnities at festivals (very ricli in details); two of Meukuta Alam = Eseukanda (Iskandar) Muda, dated respectively 1635 and 1640 (sic)-, one of Jamalul-Alam (in Achehnese yeutnalöj) dated 1689, revived by Alaédin Juhan, the second prince of the latest dynasty, in 1752; one of Alaédin Mahmut dated 1766; and certain undated edicts of Sapiatödin, Amat Shah Juhan (the first prince of the latest dynasty) and Badrudin Asem (Hashim), all
| dealing | with commercial | and port | regulations | as affecting | different | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| nationalities | and | different | kinds of merchandise, | and the | |||
| distribution | of taxes. | In these | we even find | detailed | customs-tariffs '). | ||
| These | documents | are identical | in | spirit and | intention | with | those |
| published | by Van | Langen; | but they | contain | much more | information | |
| as regards | the ceremonial | of court and | festival | and the collection | and | ||
| disposal latter | of taxes as regards | on imports, details. | and are | occasionally | at variance | with | the |
| What introduced | has been by these | the practical edicts? | development | of | the tliree | new clements | |
| I he | rules noticed | under | heading | 3" above | are those | which | have |
| had most | significance in | actual | practice. Of | these | we may say that | they | |
| exercised, | during | the reign | of their | promulgator | at least, | some degree | |
| of authority | over | life and | trade in | the seaport | town. To assert | more | |
| tlian tliis | is to go | outside | the bounds | of probability | and | come | into |
| conflict | with unimpeachable | data. Perpetual | dynastie | struggles | leading | ||
| to the | death or | downfall of | the rulers, | the unstable | character | of these | |
| rulers | themselves, | the endeavours | of | chiefs and | officials | even in | the |
| capital | to promote | their own | authority and | profit, | the want | of a proper | |
| machinery | of government | based on | other principles | than | "miglit | is | |
| right", | all tliis and | much more | serves | to establish | the fact | that in | the |
| history | of Acheh | 110 period | can be | pointed out | in which | even these | |
| regulations | affecting | the capital | have | passed current | as the | living | law |
| of the | land. | ||||||
| llie | religious clements | mentioned | under heading | 2" were | certainly | ||
| not introduced | into | the edicts | through | the zeal | of the princes of | Acheh, | |
| any more | than the | proclamations | of appointments | of Achehnesc | chiefs | ||
| (as drawn | at the | Court down | to the | present time) | can be | said to | owe |
| their al most | entirely | religious | contents | to the | piety of the | princes | or |
| of the | appointed | chiefs themselves. | A Moslim | prince augments | liis | ||
| prestige | vastly by | sucli concessions | to the law | of his creed, | albeit | a | |
| serious | and strict | application | of the | latter would | greatly | curtail | his |
collection and
to
| I) IIow | little reliance 'can | be placed | on Achehnesc | data in | to the origin | of such |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| «ritten laws, | may bc | deduced from | the mention | of the tomb | Anjöng | in the |
| bO-caUed laws | of Meukuta | Alam (Van | Langen, | Atjehsch Staatsbestuur | p. 442). | Teungku |
| Anjong (f | i₇b2 A. D.) | was not even | bom in the | reign of Meukuta | Alam (f 1636 | A. DA |
| he genera! | tendeney | is to refer | all that has | become customary | law to the | Sultans in |
| genera 1 («at/ai | poteu mcunu/iöm"), and | to Meukuta | Alam in particular. |
respect of Teungku
7
power and impede his actions. Bcsides (and tliis is a most important factor) the supporters of the sacred law have in such countries no inconsiderable influence over the people, so that it might be dangerous for the princes and chiefs to disregard their wishes and requirements'). Tliis is fu 11 y understood by these potentates, most of whom, while they follow their own devices in the actual administration of government, are wont outwardly to show all possible honour to the upholders of religion, to declare vcrbally that they set the highest value 011 their wisdom, and now and then, merely as a matter of form, to grant them access to their councils. Such has been the system of the Achehnesc sovereigns. Ulamas and other more or less sacred persons enjoyed considerable distinction in their country and at their court. They uscd even to "give orders" for the compiling of manuals of theology and law, which in plain language meant that they made a money payment to the writer of such a book. They would even allow themselves occasionally to be persuaded by some person of unusual influence to undertake a persecution of heretics, which however generally proved quite abortive. In their legislative edicts, which are almost all devoted to questions of trade and court affairs, they have in a fashion of their own rendered unto God the tliings that are God's, and so far as these ordinances confine themselves to what we should call a purely religious sphere, we have no reason to doubt the good intentions of the law-givers. Though their fleshly weakness was apparent from their irreligious life, their spirit was willing enough to remember the life hereafter, when the question came up of the building of mosques, the apportioning of money for religious pur- poses, the dispensing of admonitions or even the threatening of punisli- ment for neglect of religious duties. Hut of any effort to introducé a system of government and administration of justice in harmony with the Mohammedan law we can gather nothing from the language of the edicts. They render in a purely formal marnier due homage to the institutions ordained of Allah, which are everywhere as sincerely received in tlieory as they are ill-observed in practice ').
| discuss the | part playeil | i» Achehncse | life t>y the | mystics, | ulamas and | sayyids. | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| of almost tittle inakcs | evcry commandment him a kafir | of (infidel). | the law, whcrcas | doubt | or disbclief | in one single | jot or |
1) That tliis is particularly truc of Acheh will be more clcarly secn wheu wc comc to
2) It is wcll known that a mail can remain a faithful Moslim in spitc of transgression
s
- 1 more exclus.vely formal are the admonitions dispensed to the
1 !" ";C ;°f' l'CïJS °f aPI'r""""t,U- °nc mi8'» almost assert that the raja of Aeheh who sanetioned the form of these doeumcnts most
Thtl**Th'**I 't!, '" '"' ' ° ""'S »P-
| Wi | thC 0CCC | ablL | aSk | f dr |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| wh crc | ||||
| araas | and ot]lcr | pioM | persons |
after th H ° "'» the skies, especially the,, death, by „l ^ _ the sun of thc.r good deeds
| and who actually | saw some of their | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| zed: yct | rdisio had | m,k | infl,Kncc |
| 1 | CSS VCn | tha m sht | bc |
| to | s |
«oITf h"" ,> ! " °" th« dcad 1 tt T- T r'" "' ' ° " ' »ssumed froni the dead letter of isolated edicts of the port-kings. It requires „o proof how that „ot o„e of these cautious etfort, eentralization of authority mentioned above under head ,» scriously enough with succes"
| meant | though | they were, „as | eventually | erowoed | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| po f | ful su | tan | dMed | M go | furthcr | thM toclaimaccrtaiij |
c m„,,
[ '"<" "c'ncc, eonstituting themselves as it were a supreme cour o ar D.trat.on It may at once bc concludcd how far the rest of
- **** I" i Uiers of botli sexcs progressed in this direetion, weak and
indoen, as they were in dispositie,, and fully taken up with anxiety 0 maintaui ,he„ authority i„ their „w„ immediate eircle. S„ far from ording ,t „ver the Aehehnese ehiefs, they were eompclled to seek «hei, favou, so as „o, losc their „„ ^ ^ ^
1 " T th3t "'°U!;h "" A=h^»<--«= sovereigns
m.ght have ga.ned s„mc inerease of prestige from the establishment of e,r authority ,„ the interior, still this was not „f sufficiënt importante mi uit
| i, | , | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| cm | makc | srca 8acrifices | to | win j(]( | js (hc | i or(s | i t |
| Pea | constitate |
as thesc!' ««.Itl, a,„i strength „f state, sueh
PTSSCS thC n,cans and "•= cnergy to ex,end
liis eovctous hand towards
| ' " | prefers to stretcl, | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ,nC | iVe ,heir raJc | ||
| ary c sources | "u" | U Ch be Cr | hc dis |
trib t ' Ti 1; " " ' re'nier them dësert' h "' "' "^ crt and inhospitable both in a spiritual and material sense, whieh of his kualas or river-mouths. Nor do these rulers endeavour to ensure the permanente of tl,ei, dominion in othe, ports whieh they have subdued by taking as its basis he .„„„duction ofan orclcrIy fom of govcrnmc|,t Theconquerorsare
content with the reeognition of their snpremaey and the payment of dues II,us ,t ,s very easy to show how the rajas „f Aeheh during the
","1 i'u,uu piuspuruy 01 uieir Kingaom, kcpt tne trading ports within a wide compass in subjugation with their fleets, hut never got any further in the control of the intcrior than the issue of a few edicts on paper. We must not then allow ourselves to be misled by these edicts, valuable as they are as sources of information as to the history of the kings of Acheh. I he danger of such error presents itself in two ways. In the first place, the Achehnese himself, when questioned as to the institutions of liis country, vvill refer with some pride to these docu- ments, notwithstanding tliat most Achehnese liave never seen copies of them and are almost entirely unacquainted with their contents. 1 he ordinary Achehnese does tliis, because all that recalls to him the greatness of his country is closely connected with the names of those very princes who are generally regarded as the authors of the sarakatas. He firmly believes that all that he reveres as the sacred institutions of his country (albeit not mentioned in a single onc of the edicts) is adat ') Meukuta Alam or at any rate adat poten meureuhom, adat of defunct royalties, and he is convinced that information respecting them is of a certainty contained in some onc or other of the sarakatas. 1 he Achehnese chiefs have a secondary aim when they refer with a certain emphasis to these edicts as the laws of Acheh. All that is contained therein respecting court ceremonial, festivals, religion etc., they i egard w ith complete indifference; but every onc of them is skilful in making quotations from the adats of the old sovercigns handed down in writing or by word of mouth, which may go to show that his power, his territory, or his privileges should in rcality bc much greater than what he enjoys at the present time. Die European who comes into contact only superficially with the native community, is too apt to think that the adat among them is an almost unchangeable factor of their lives, surrounded on cvcry side with religious veneration. Yet it does not require much philosophic or historical knowledge to be convinced that such invariable clements subsist just as little in the native world as in our own, although among them the conscious reverence for all that is regarded as old and
"custom",
| i) Adat | is an Arabic | word adopted | in most | Malayan | lanjjuagcs. | It means |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| *Ui>age, customary | law | as opposed | to hukum | or religious | law'\ (Translator). |
tt u
IO
traditional is stronger than in our own modern societies. In contrast to the changeableness of the individual, the adat presents itself as something abiding and incontrovertible. with which that individual may not meddle; yet the adat changes like all other worldly things with every successive generation, — nay, it never remains stationary for a moment. Even natives, whose intelligence is above the ordinary, know this well and use it to further their own purposes. The slowly but surely changing institutions of their society are thus revered as fixed and unchangeable by its individual units. But it is precisely in this connection that opportunity is given for continual disputes as to the contents of the adat ')• What is, in fact, the real and genuine adat, that which according to unimpeachable witnesses was formerly so esteemed, or that which the majority follow in practice at the present day, or that which many, by an interpretation opposed to that of the majority, hold to be lawful and permitted? Most questions of importance give rise to this three-fold query, and the answer is, as may be readily supposed, prompted by the personal interest of him who frames it. üur object being to arrivé at some knowledge of the institutions of the country, it is impossible for us to accept the reference of the Achehnese to the edicts of the kings of olden times, which are ab solute mysteries to most of them, whilst others construe them to suit themselves. Even apart from the danger of accepting such reference as gospel, the European is exposed to a further risk, namely of misunderstanding the true signification of such edicts. Accustomed to the idea that all law should be suitably drawn in writing, he is apt to be overjoyed at coming on the track o. a collection of written ordinances, especially in a place characterized by such hopeless confusion as the Achehnese states. So when he perceives that there is now little or no actual ob- seivance of these laws, he rushes to the conclusion that at an earlier period order and unity preceded the present misrule. The very contrary of this can be proved to be the case as far as Acheh is concerned. As a gene ral rule we do not sufficiently reflect that in countries of the Standard of civilization reached by the Malayan races*, the most important* laws are those-which are not set down in -writing, but find their ex-
') Cf. the remarks on the adat of the ruiers of Mekka in mj Mekka, Vol. I. p. 110 et seq-
I I
pression, sometimes in proverbs and familiar sayings, but always and abovc all in the actual occurrences of daily life which appeal to the comprehension of all. Speaking of Acheh only, there will be found described hereafter laws which control the relation of chief to subject, of man to wife and children, laws which everyone in Acheh observes and every village headman has at his fingers' ends; and yet of all these living laws no single written document testifies '), though every single sentence of an Achehnese judge bears witness to their existencc. Such has been the case all over the Kast Indian Archipelago. Who- ever would introducé by force an alteration in existing legal institutions found it necessary to reduce his innovation to writing, but those who were content to leave things as they were, seldom resorted to codification of the customary law. Whether changes such as these are abiding or disappear after a brief show of life, the writing remains as their witness; it is the life of the people alone that testifies of institutions which have withstood the attack of external change and modify them selves intrinsically by almost imperceptible degrees. One might even assert that where codification of the customary law has been purposely resorted to (as in the undang-undangJ) of certain Malay statos) this embodiment in writing is a token that the institutions in question are beginning to fall into decay 3). Collections of documents of this sort ofier to the conscientious enquirer a string of conundrums impossible of solution, unless he be thoroughly conversant with the actual daily life of native society, of the traditions of which such legal maxims form but a small part. What we have said above perhaps renders it superfluous to add that
| administration of | justice | among the native | poputation | of Great | with an e.vpta/iatory | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| memorandum its birth, the Achehnese | by Mr. T. | 11. der A"indcrcn'\ have never feit | Batavia its elïects. | 1881. As this ordinance | perished | at | |
| the decrees | of sovercigns | in regaicl | to a limited | number of subjects, | such as the | Hukum | |
| Kanun of | Malacca and | otherh. 1 hese are | expressive | not of | but of | a temporary | |
| desire for | order and reform, | ut these | the sanie | holds truc as of the | Adat Mcukuta | Alani | |
| in Acheh; | the real living | adats are | therein for | the most part | silently taken | for granted | |
| and not committed | to writing; | while | the new matter | which the books | contain | must | have |
| had a very brief | existence | in view of the | constant | changes of government. | They principally | ||
| consist, as a rule, | of regulations | regarding | the court | of the sultan | and maritime | commerce. |
1) In entire contrast with the *Ordinance of the ijth Mitrch 1SS1 with respect to the
2) "Laws", "code uf laws" (Translator).
3) I he case is of course somewhat different with regard to certain codes dealing with
Acheh
decay,
I 2
we should be wandcnng altogcther off the right track in seeking for he laws and institutions of countries such as Acheh in lawbooks of foreign (e. g Arabic) origin. Such works are it is truc, translate,,, compiled and stud.ed in the country, but their contents have only a hmitcd influence on the lifc of its pcoplc •)• It is owing to a miscon- cept.on of this very obv.ous truth that the cntircly superficial enquiry of Mr. der kmderen (or his secretary Mr. L. W. C. Van den Bern) as proved abortive, as may be seen from his «explanatory memoran- cum just refcrred to. To any one who has made himself acquainted
w.th the pohtical and social lifc of the Achehnese, his remarks on PP- 17-ib of his memorandum will sound as audacious as they are untrue: "Nor indeed is there any tracé of ancient popular customs in conflict w,th Islam, at least in the sense that would indicate acustomary law having its cxistence in the consciousness of the people, as is the case for example with the characteristic institutions regarding the law of person and inheritance which we meet with among the Malays on >e west coast of Sumatra. The native chiefs when questioned as to such popular customs, either gave cvasive answers, or quoted as such certain rules for the ceremonial in the Kraton, the distinctive appella tion, of various chiefs etc., all of course institutions of a wholly different
•sor from what was intended by the enquire, Apparently they mis- understood the drift of the question and confused the mater J with the formal and administrative law. Only one of them, who, it may be remarked was no Achehnese by birth, but of Afghan descent, abso- ely demed the existence of any legal institutions conflicting with the Alohammedan law.
'L 'ü'6,, "U,h "f this is a,so cntire,y overlooked in Mr. I.. W. C Van den llera'. n
i!7
| for | "insUtutions'of | J^'va^regufati'ons | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| onl*V^agine | ^ ' ' | '" | ," °-' ° PP | the folly | such'^mcthalTe | have" |
| revolution | exchanged | for"'onc^"toAlTy | 'lifferen^Th | °- | y « |
U e a 1 11Ut C r a reciate Of f the ,avanese was h
' ••wlsHSS KTS ;lm— r ;;££r rr ~ M"
"We find in existence utidang-undang or collcctions of such public ordinances attributed to various Achehnese rulers, all dealing with trade, navigation, import and export duties, administration and cere- monial. Sultan Iskandar Muda (1607—1636) in particular appears to have applied himself to calling into existence a system of rules 011 these subjects. His code, if we may so term it, is called Makota Alam') or Adat Kanun, but copies of this are rare." No one could have recorded in a more naive manner the want of intelligence which he brought to bear on his enquiry. The Achehnese in general and their chiefs in particular will have themselves Mohammedans and nothing else. Within a few years pre- vious to the visit of Mr. der Kinderen to Acheh, they had for the first time come under the control of a non-Mohammedan power, and regarded their new masters with distrust, all the more as a rumour had gone abroad that the "Gömpeuni"2) was everywhere endeavouring to introducé its Christian laws and to draw the Mohammedans away from their own religion. No wonder then that the chiefs "gave an evasive answer", or imparted little pertinent information in reply to the foolish query of Mr. der Kinderen and his friends (who had never come into contact with the people) as to whether there were ancient customs prevalent in Acheh conflicting with the law of Islam. Sup- posing it to be true that they "did not understand the meaning of the question", the blame for this rests on him who asked it. It is undoub- tedly the easiest way to conduct an enquiry to address a sort of catechism to some individuals, and then to accept as of solid worth any follies they may choose to retail to you in reply, but to do so is to trifle with a serious subject. The chiefs were naturally afraid that an affirmative answer might give rise to all kinds of new enactments "in conflict with the law of Islam". Besides, they would be very slow to admit that any of their institutions was in conflict with Islam, and indeed are as a rule quite ignorant as to whether such is the case or not, being neither jurists
| ordinances | are thus known | r.s Adat Meukuta | Alam. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| such root | in the native | mind that it is still | used to designate | the Government | even | after | |
| the "Company" | proper | ceased to exist. | Similarly | in the Straits | Settlements | "Kompani" | |
| (— the Kast | India Company) | has survived | the decease | of that | trading association | and | is |
| still universally | used to denote | the British | Government. | (Translator). |
1) This is incorrect. IIc was himself called Meukuta Alam after his death, and his
2) Company. This appellation is taken from the Dutch E. India Company and has taken
has
'4
nor theologians. They are all trainee! up in the doctrine that adat (custom law) and hu kom (religious law) should take their places side y si de in agood Mohammedan country _ not in the sense inculcated by the Moslim law-books'), that they should fall back on the adat whenever the huköm is silent or directs them to do so but in such a way that a very great portion of their lives is governed by adat and only a small part by huköm. They are well aware that the ulamas») ° ten complam of the excessive influence of the adat and of its conflict
w.th the kitabs or sacred books, but they do not forget that they have themselves cause to complain of the ambition of these ulamas They account for this conflict by the natural passion all men feel fa extending the.r authonty, a passion they believe would be reduced to a minimum or altogether extinguished if all men tried to be just They sec herein no conflict between Mohammedan and non-Mohammedan c ements, but between Moslim rulers who «maintain the adat" accord- ;ng to the w.11 of God, and Moslim pandits who «expound the huköm", " o u „ch parties, however, sometimes overstep their proper limits. y haVC "° touchstone to distinguish exactly between what is in accordance w.th Islam and what conflicts therewith. All their institu- tions they regard as those of a Mohammedan people and thus also M^ammedan, and these they wish to guard against the encroachments
ot the kafir ). I'hat Mr. Der
| Kinderen | and l.is friend, | tracé | of | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| an thc Sa ,e | a he pcopk | is | as | au | ra | K as | ||
| bl | P | a llOSma,iC | juriStS | d | ||||
| thcy | are owl,trc | to bo | r ainstaki |
customs conflict with Mam" or of-custonrary law h,vin its cxtstcnce the conscintisnes, „f ,.-,
"ics to catch salmon in a wash-tub " y. "' they control the politica! and of fecilc ^ " ~ "" " »" lampion, d i w-" °""" « "»»•»'»ihek relrch, T ^ P "S «"» «ientitic ^ carch and not through the putting „f qucMions „ hiel, thc queslioned apparently do not understand". To be expheit misunderstanding, uld add that
| and avoid | aH | wc sho | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| a ater | part of | hjs memorandum | (pp | io |
Mr. Der K,„deren in l ^ ^
^ ^ "" Kin
| in ,^V« | ^\dfer | ° " | |
|---|---|---|---|
| case n | h (!) | SPCdaUSt | C nSU Cl1 |
2) Religious pandits. (Translater).
3) Infidel.
states the case as though tliis faithful observance of Mohammcdan law had existed originally in Acheh at an earlier cpoch, while the few adats conflicting therewith had crept in later on during the period of anarchy and corruption. "The Achehnese chiefs", he goes on to say, "with whom we conferred, unanimously desired the maintenance of Islam and nothing more". We shall see later on, when we come to examine the question in detail, that this comparison between an orderly past resting on the basis of the Mohammedan law and a disorderly present, is entirely chimerical and rests on false or inexactly stated data. These premisses for instance are false, that in earlier times many works on Mohammedan law were composed by Achehnese, that general ignorance now prevails as to the contents of these or that the wholly unlettered Teuku Malikon Adé was supreme judge of the kingdom of Acheh. The ignorance of the chiefs in regard to Mohammedan law is wrongly explained; it is in fact an ignorance which they share with the rulers of most Moham medan countries. We postpone for the present the closer refutation of these extra-Nature of the vagances. Let us now fix our attention on the fact that the non-a"nd Mohammedan institutions of the Achehnese, which we are now aboutstitutions "f Acheh. to describe, and which taken together form a well-rounded whole, exhibit themselves to the scientific observer after comparison with those of other kindred peoples, as really indigenous and wholly suitable to the state of civilization in which the Achehnese have moved as long as we have known them. In vain shall we seek for any period in the history of Acheh in which we should be justified in surmising the existence of a different state of things. All that wc know further of that history makes it patent that neither the efiforts of the ulamas to extend the influence of the Mohammedan law, nor the edicts of certain princes whose authority over the interior was very limited and of short duration, were able to exercise more than a partial or passing influence on the genuinely national and really living unwritten laws. rhe golden age of Acheh in which "the Mohammedan law prevailed" (see p. 16 of Mr. Der Kinderen's memorandum), or in which the Adat Meukuta Alam may be regarded as the fundamental law of the king dom, belongs to the realms of legend. If we wish to become acquainted with the institutions of Acheh we must, in default of any written sources o*" information, devote ourselves to the study of their political
and judicia! ,«t« and family üfe as they subsi* at the present time. n these we can easdy d.scovcr some traces of the centralizing activity o ont or two powerful pr.nces, an important measure of influence
adaMaw ' "* S''" in, m°re Portai,t of indigenous
I. mus, be borne in mind that even the mos. primitive socicties and
the law, that govern them „ever remain stationary. Kceping this i„ view ,, beeomes easy to tracé here and there edbrts after change, and elscwherc agai,, institutions which have alrcady passed iuto disusc and owe the.r continued existcnce i„ a rudin.cntary form simply to ,hc force of human conservatism. This makes us careful in forming j„dgments
- to the ant.qu.ty of any given institution taken by itself, as we are
not fully acqua.nted with the factors which ,nay in earlier time» have exerc.sed a modifying influence. Still we are able with one glancc over .e «hole ex.3t.ng custon.ary law of Acheh assert without fear of error that the mstitutions of that country do date from yesterday ut that, (d.sregard.ng alterations in details), thcy have in all n.ain cssentials existed for centuries past.
§ 2. Elements of Population.
I" Acheh we have to deal, not with an originally powerful monarchy which gradually spl.t up mto small parcels, but with a number oflittle s ates barcly held together by the community of origin of their citizens and the nom.nal supremacy of the port-king. We must obviously there- fore, describing the political fabric of Acheh, work upwards from clow; and as m that country all authority of the higher classes over he lower ,s exceedingly limited, we must first devote our attention to the people who inhabit Great Acheh '). Origin of the
| , | '; | ° P° | «gle |
|---|---|---|---|
| Wcj v r | avc at | ur dis sal | 110 si |
Achehnese.historical datum from which we cail Cl cd ure rinv 1iL*#»Kr : ... ., ' as to the origin of the Achehnese We can only allege on various grounds that it must have been of a very mixed description.
| 0 We find | in Van | I.angen's | Atjehsch | Staatsbest,,,,,- | •,&. ,Sn |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| traditions | and conjectures | respectine | the ori in | „f |
P,1 ,• ™ nat,ve
'7
A comparison of the Achehnese language (which exhibits noteworthy points of difference from the kindred tongues of neiglibouring peoples), with those of Cham and Bahnar 2) has at the very outset given im portant results, but we must for the present refrain from deciding what may be deduced therefrom as regards the kinship or historical con- nection bctween the peoples. Of the information supplied by the Achehnese themselves as to their descent, wc furnish hcre only such particulars as may be classed as popular tradition. Outside the limits of this tradition every Achehnese chief and ulama who takes any interest in the question has his own con- jcctures, partly in conflict with the traditions and partly grafted 011 to them. lo the sphere of these conjectures belongs almost all that can be Achehnese gathered from the Achehnese as to the Hindu element in their origin. thcoiies-It is past all doubt that llinduism exercised for a considerable time a direct or indirect influence 011 the language and civilization of Acheh, though there is but little tracé of such influence remaining in her present popular traditions and institutions. Tlven in Mohammedan times there are numerous indications of contact with the inhabitants of India; it is indeed more than probable that Acheh, like other countries of the Indian Archipelago, was mohammedanizcd from Hindostan. Not only Mohammedan Klings and people from Madras and Malabar, but also heathen Klings, Chetties₂) and other Ilindus, have carried 011 trade in Acheh down to the present time, and there has been from first to last 110 serious opposition to the permanent establishment in the country of such kafirs, harmiess as they were from a political point of view. For all that, the question as to what Hindus or people with Hindu civilization₃) thcy were, who exercised a special influence in Achch, or what the period was when this influence made itself feit, remains enveloped in doubt. Still less is it certain in what degree Hindu blood flows in the veins of the Achehnese.
1) Sec "Bijdrage tot de kennis der verhouding van het Tjam tot de talen van Indonesië"
by <;. K. Niemann in the Bijdragen van het Kon. Inst. voor de Taal/.and-en Volken kunde van Nederlandseh Indie for 1891 at the Ilagiic p. 27 et seq., aml the Bibliographi- sehe Bijdragen at the same place p. 339 et seq.
2) The money-lending caste of Southern India. (Translator).
3) Compare again the treatise of G. K. Niemann quoted above, p. 44. The theory of
van I.angcn citcd by him, according to which the kawöni of the /me,mi feuet is of Hindu origin, does not rest on popular tradition, but must be ranked among the learned conjectures of certain of the Achehnese. 2 2
Jiow these conjectures sometimes originate and gain credit in Acheh may be illustrated by an experience of my own in that country. Ihe well-known leungku Kutakarang, an ulama and leader in war [died November 1895] upholds, among other still more extraordinary notions, the view that the Achehnese are composed of clements derived from thrce peoples, the Arabs, the Persians and the Turks. Both in conversation and in his fanatical pamphlets against the "Gömpeuni" he constantly refers to tliis theory. 1 hough he lias absolutely 110 grounds for this absurd idea, those who look up to him as a great scholar think that he must have a good foundation for it, and accept his ethnological theories without hesitation. \ hile I was engaged in collecting Achehnese writings and was making special efiforts to secure copies of one or two epic poems based on historie facts, an Achehnese chief suggested to me that I should not find what I wanted in these. He declared himself ready to write me out a short abstract of the history of Acheh containing a clear account of the origin of the Achehnese from Arab, Persian and luikish elements! "Of this", said he, "you will find 110 mention in the poems you seek for". I he only fact that popular wisdom can point to as regards the 11111 dus, is that the inhabitants of the highlands of the interior are manifestly of Hindu origin, since they wear their hair long and twist it into a top-knot {sanggay) 011 the back of the head in the Hindu fashion. ante. 1 here are other storics in circulation about the Mantc or Mantras '), but these are equally undependable. They remind 111e of what I once heard said of the tailed Dyaks reputed to exist in Bornco; the existence of these people, my informant remarked, appeared quite probable from what one heard of them all over Borneo, but they always seem to live one day further inland from the point reached by the traveller. These Mantes are supposed to go naked and to have the whole of their bodics thickly covered with hair, and are believed to inhabit the mountains of the XXII Mukims; but all our informaiits knowthem only by hearsay. One here and there will teil you that in his graiul- fathers time a pair of Mantes, man and wife, wcre brought captive to
ij See also \ an Langen s Atjehsch Staatsbestuur r»n .Kc
'9
the Sultan of Acheh. 1 hese wild denizens of the woods, however, in spite of all efforts, refused either to speak or eat and finally starved themselves to death. In Achehnese writings and also in the speech of everyday life, rough clownish and awkward people are compared with the Mante. I he word is also used in the lowlands as a nickname for the less civilized highlanders, and is applied in the same sense to the people of mixed descent on the West Coast. Another contemptuous appellation of the West Coast people is Malay and ancu ja m ié (descendants of strangers or guests), or ancu' Rawa, (people men tl ^ from the province of Rawa), to which Iatter nickname the epithet "tailed (ineu ikiï) is also added '). Ihat these tailed or tail-less strangers contributed their quota to the composition of the Achehnese race is as little doubtcd as that the multitude of Klings {Klètig, ureueng dagang^ in Great Acheh and 011 the Kast Coast have brought more half-caste progeny into the world than now commands recógnition as such. I here have been within the memory of man a large number of Klings in the highlands of Great Acheh (XXII Mukims) living entirely as Achehnese and engaged in agriculture. There vvere even gatnpöngs, such as Kam Aliëng, the entire population of which consisted of such hybrid Klings. Iti (ireat-Acheh the word iirciit'iigdagiïiig =: stranger is employed w ith out any further addition to indicate a Kling. I he shares contributed by all these foreign clements and also the Arabs, Egyptians and Javanese are rightly regarded as having a merely incidental influence 011 the Achehnese race. In the capital and the coast towns of tributary states, they form an item of greater importance, for it is prccisely the most influential families that are of foreign origin. All the holy men and most of the noted scholars of the law in Acheh were foreigners. So too with many great trailers, shahbandars, writers and the trusted agents of princes and chiefs; nay, the very line of kings which has ruled with some interruptions since 1723 is according to tradition of Hu«jisooricin.O Slaves are a factor of importance in the development of the Acheh-Nias slaves. nese race. Most of these slaves come from Nias (Nieh), whence they
1) I here is a play on the common meaning of the word rawa = the tail of an Acheh-
nese kite.
2) Mal. "orang dagang ', a stranger, foreigner. (Translater).
were kidnapped in hundreds up to a few years ago, and are still surreptitiously purchased in smaller numbers. It is worthy of note that the story current in Achch as to the ong.n of the Niasese resembles that which prevails among the Javanese as to the Kalangs '). The same story in a modified form is popular >" Banten, but in the absence of Kalangs it is there applied to the Dutch. princess who suffered from a horrible skin-disease was for this cause banished to Niëh (Achehnese pronunciation of Nias), with only a dog to bear her company. On that island she found many peundang plants, and gradually became acquainted with the curative properties of the peundang root 2). It is not clearly stated what the circumstances were which induced liu to mairy her dog-1); but we are informed that from this wedlock a son was bom. When he grew up he wished to marry; but Nias was uninhabited. His mother gave him a ring to guide him in his search °r a bnde; tl"-' first woman he met whom the ring fitted was to be his destincd wife. He wandered throughout the whole island without meeting a single woman; finally he found his mother again and the ring fitted her! So they wedded and from this incestuous union is descended the whole population of Nias. In this legend typifying the vileness of the origin of the Niasese there is wanting one feature which characterizes the Javanese myth of the Kalangs. Both have in common the dog and the incestuous mar- nagC' but the Kalangs have in addition to this as their ancestress the most unclean of all animals, the swine. The princess who lived in the wikknicss is in the Kalang legend the offspring of a wild sow, which became her mother in a miraculous manncr 4).
P 580 C S q; a VCrS,n f the stor of which 1 madc otes
| in | "J' ' | ' ° ' | " ° | y | " | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ILwhÏe | . ° | ' ! ° '- | ' «««ritta. | We find | the same story | |
| . | , " '"" | ° | " "; | sec for instance | Ihe Tijdschrift | van het |
| hataviaasch | Genootschap | vol. XXIV | pp. 257-8 | an | ||
| 2 Ihe | Aehelmese | derive from Nias | their knowledge of | the highly | pri.cd feunjang treatment. | |
| clined to r | ? | ° '' ' | ° | "g | t>' »" | |
| wed her | Th,' H 7T | T | > | ° ° | P P | should |
| 1 I' i | _ | ed to fetch | the shuttle | and thus became | her husband. | |
| 4; Katu | liaka rex, | ut aiunt, quondam | venando | fatigatus, | dum quietis eausa | consistebat, |
| n cort.cem | nuc.s eoeonensis | minxit, | quo facto | cort.cem in | terram deposuit. | Nee tarnen |
| Icta r, lacla i | est 't et e,filiam " " | peperit. ' | " | > q'"' | cum forte |
S mC ha f W Vcth s aS re r ,ess nl dlfied f rm
J DeSe St r thC ,rinCeSS dr PS hCr Shutt,e While weavï and bein disi t,mt Wh CVer sh U,d ick U her e astcn
1Um 6 31 Se nCn VirilE ïn VasCul manebat d sus fera 1,ibisset
Tlius although no swine appears in the genealogical logend as form- ing part of the family tree of the Niasese, the story goes that they are the descendants of dogs and swine, and there is a doggerei verse in ridicule of the Niasese or persons of mixed Nias descent which runs as follows; — "Nick kumudèë — uroc bit buy, malam bc'c asïc ' i. e. "Niasese, that eats bengkudu fruits '), smells like a pig in the daytime and like a dog at night". In spite of all these sayings and stories (to which may be added the fact that kurab or ringworm is still very prevalent among the Niasese), the Achehnese set a high value on these people as slaves. They describe them as tractable, obedient, zealous and trustworthy. The women are more highly prized for their beauty than those of the dominant race, and many of the boys who as sadati (dancers) or otherwise are made to minister to the unnatural lusts of the Achehnese are of Niasese origin. Later on when we come to describe the family life of the Achehnese, we shall see that he lays great stress on descent from the mother's side. Thus 110 Achehnese willingly becomes the father of children by his female slaves, although such a practice is freely admitted by Moslim law. It is for this reason that the intercourse of masters with their female slaves is very limited in comparison with other Moham- medan countries, and where it does take place, recourse is had to various methods to avert or nullify its natural consequences. All the same there is a certain proportion of children born of such con- cubinage. There are, however, other channels through which Niasese blood has found its way into the veins of the Achehnese. For instance it not uncomrnonly occurs that a man who makes a long stay in a particular place, marries the slave of one of his friends or patrons. It even happens at times that an Achehnese makes such a marriage at or in the neighbourhood of his own home, setting at defiance the reproaches and hatred of his next of kin for the sake of the beauty of the woman he has chosen.
made chinichah
| boiled with | arèn-juice | and sugar. | The Niasese | are fond of them | in the raw | state. Another | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| saying is race that | A is ashamed | of nothing₁'. | 1 | i. e. Niasese, | lover of the | bengkudu-fruit, |
1) These fruits are eaten by the Achehnese after being into rujaq ( ) or
U icli kttmndi'c — bie h w
According to the Moslim law childrcn born of such unions are the slaves of the ovvner of the mother, for vvhen the question is one of slavery or freedom the children follow the mother as a matter of course. The Achehnese adat, on the other hand, treats them as free; but their origin is indicated by the name aneit tneu'ih ("children of gold", i. e. of proprietorship), and thus not at once lost sight of. A generation or two later the name aneti meiïih is dropped, and their descendants become Achehnese. Children born of marriages betvveen slaves (generally of the same master) are themselves slaves in Acheh; but many owners set their slaves free in later life. Such free Niasese do not except in rare cases intermarry vvith Achehnese women; their children, however, may take wives of mixed Achehnese and Niasese descent, and in the third gene ration tliey too are Achehnese, though with a slight Nias taint. 'lhose who can only keep one or two male slaves generally let these remain unmarried their whole life long, the supposition being that they vvill find frequent opportunities of intercourse with their own countrywomen. 1 he Achehnese are on their own confession indolent and little fitted for regular work. 1 his is the reason they give for the occasional importation of rice into a country possessing vast tracts of uncultivated ground '). 1 here is no doubt that in days gone by they used to get their work done for them by the Niasese. Not only did they employ them for ordinary tillage and for pepper cultivation, but also as soldiers in the endless little wars that divided the country against itself. Thus it is said that during the civil war of 1854—58 ofbetween Raja Sulóyman (Suléman) and his guardian Raja Ibrahim 2), the supporters of the latter in particular usually employed Niasese to carry out all operations against the enemy. Bataks. In comparison with the Niasese, the number of slaves of other races in Acheh is inconsiderable. Male Bataks(but very seldom females)
| increased | greatly when | most of the | padi fields | had long | lain untilled. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| and little | blood was | spilt. A very | correct | estimate of the | weight to be attachcd | to civil | |
| wars in Acheh | will be found | in | the Atjeh | en de Atjehers" | of J. A. Kruyt | (p. 144). | |
| Bata' Ka ree (= h'araif) | as being | the wildest | and most | vicious. Ilence | they apply | this as | |
| a nicknamc the Bata" | of evil import Maloylietig | to all (Mandaïling). | Hata's, including | the Bat(C | Pa?pa|the Batar' Tuba | and |
1) Before the war tliis importation seems to have been very limited; but it of course
2) See Van I.angen's Atjehsch Staatsbestuur p. 397. The war was of small importance
3) Most of these are imported from Singkel and Trumon. The Achehnese distinguish the
a
23
are occasionally kept as slaves, but the character given them is as bad as that of the Niasese is good. The Bataks are spoken of as un- willing, lazy and revengeful. Every Achehnese can furnish plentiful examples of this either from his own experience or vvhat he has heard from others — how one Batak has treacherously murdered his master through anger at a trifling chastisement, and another after having been treated with the utmost kindness has made himself scarce after putting his masters children to death, and so on '). Some few persons of position have permitted themselves the luxury other eie- of importing Chinese female slaves from the Straits Settlements as mLnts- concubines 2). Still more common is it to see slaves brought home from Mekka by those who have performed the Hajj. These Africans art- known by the Achehnese under the generic name of Abeusi •1) (Abys- sinians) irrespectively of what may be the land of their birtli. Concu- binage with female slaves of such origin is extremely rare; they are allowed to marry among themselves or with Niasese slaves. It is con- sidered a mark of distinction to have such Abeusis as household servants 4). As we noticed above, the Achehnese slave-law is not wanting in Achehnese departures from the Mohammedan code. To these may be added the b,aNL"law- fact that it is everywhere thought natural and permissible for all who acquire slaves at once to violate their female captives. Even in Arabia the prescribed period of abstention in regard to purchased female slaves is seldom or never observed '), but in Acheh no disgrace whatever attachés to its violation, and most of the transgressors are absolutely ignorant that they are sinning against that very law which they look upon as sanctioning kidnapping. In the highlands far fewer slaves are kept than in the lowlands, as in the former tliere is less to be found ol all that tends to make life easy or pleasant.
| the character | here given | of them. | I have secn | two very had cases | of amok | by l»ataks | in |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1'cnang, apparently | originating | from | quite trilling | and inadequate | motives | (Translater). | |
| in the Ze it schrift ( Translator). | der deutsehen | morgenlcindisehen | Gesel/schaft, | 1891, p. 395 et seq. | |||
| property cases are, | of Habib Abdurrahman, however, rare. | who also imported | Hindus | as slaves | into Acheh. | Such |
1) Very few l»ataks find their way to the Straits Settlements but those who do l>ear out
2) As to the slave trade in the Straits see my article on Sklavenhandel in Singapore"
3) The word Habshi" is similarly used in Malaya to designate all African negroes
4) There still lives at Ulèe Lheuë (Olehleh) a freed Circassian slave, formerly the
5) See my Mekka vol. II, p. 135.
u
M
24
What lias been said suffices to indicate the races which have in historie times contributed to ennoble or degrade the people of Acheh. Apart from this wc must accept tliat people as an established unity and conjectures regarding its remoter origin vvould at this point be premature. !4daiüw.rS Thc PcoPlc °f the various divisions of Great Acheh differ from one landers. another, as may well be imagined, in numerous local peculiarities of language, manners, superstition, dress etc. Most of these local distinc- tions, wlien compared with the agreement in essential features are too insignificant to be noticed liere. We should however note the differences between the highlanders {ureuëng tunong), by which must be especially understood the people of the Sagi of the XXII Mukims, and the lowlanders {ureuëng barok) who inhabit the greater part of the two re- maining sagis, including thc capital. Some portions of these last two sagis liave almost the same language and customs as the ureuëng tunong, as for instance the ureuëng Buëng inhabiting the VII Mukims Buëng ') in the Sagi of the XXVI Mukims BduSa5nnd AS rCgardS Ia"gUage and manners the lowlanders have followed the people ()f the capital-). I he Dalam or residence of the Sultan, which we incorrectly term Kraton, and which is also known as Kuta Raja or "the king's fort" (a name which we improperly apply to the whole capital) formed before our war with Acheh the nucleus of a number of fine and prosperous gampöngs. The centre of these with its mosque and market-place was called Banda Acheh i. e. the capital or trading mart of Acheh, and gave the tone to the whole country in matters of custom, dress etc. The most important of these gampöngs were cuimpong Jawa, Pandê, Peunayöng, Lam Bhu', Luëng Bata, Lam Seu- peuëng, Ateueng, Batoh and Meura"sa. The inhabitants of these and the neighbouring villages together with their language and customs were distinguished by the epithet banda, tl,at is, town-bred or civilized, and the people of other districts who conformed as much as possiblé to thc tone of the capital enjoyed the same title. In contrast with these, all otliers who spoke in their own local dialects and were un- acquainted with the manners of the town, were called duson (like dusun in Sundanese) i. e. countrified, uncivilized. From their position the low-
1) The word buëng itself belongs to their pcculiar dialect. It means «swamp" which in
other parts of Acheh is known as paya.
2) Cf. my essay Studiën over Atjihschc klank-en schriftleer in the Tijdschrift van
net hatav. Genootschap, vol. XXXV, p. 365.
25
landers in general came most closely into contact with the influence of the trading centre, whilst ureuéng duson and ureuéng Tunöng became practically synonymous; but with tliis distinction, that families of standing in the Tunóng conformed as far as possible to the manners of the capital, whilst in the more distant of the lowland districts the influence of the Banda Acheh is scarcely traceable.
S 3. Dress, Food, Luxuries, Dwellings and Household equipment.
In dress and deportment to begin with, there is a difference between Clothing. the true lunong folk and those of the lowland districts₁). 1 he peculiar Achehnese trousers (silueiié or luciiè Achè/i) of prodi- gious width are characteristic of both, and both alike regard the fullness in the fo.k of this garnient as an indication of Mohammedan dress in contradistinction with the tight forks of the trousers of infidels. 1 hose worn by the lowlanders on the other hand are longer, anti the materials most in use differ from those employed in the Tunöng. The loin-cloth (ija pinggang) is similarly in the eyes of both a shibboleth of Islam, as it is only infidels that feel 110 shame in ex- hibiting themselves in close-fitting trousers without further covering of the space between navel and knee. Hut while the Tunöng man Iets his loincloth hang down to below the knees with a flap in the centre, with the lowlander it barely extends to just above the knees and its lower edge is aslant. 1 he lowlanders usually wear bajus or jackets {bajte), either the bajeè Achèh 2) with long narrow sleeves and a big gold button (dn'uia) in the middle, or the bajèë Vv sapay (short-sleeved baju) the do*ma of which is at the neck. The highlanders make comparatively little use of this garment and wear in its place simply a kerchief (ija) thrown over the shoulder or fastened round the middle or else laid on the
| Westkust | in the 'J ijdschrift | v. h. | Neder/. | Aardrijksk. | Genootschap | 2nd series, vol. V. p. 447 | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| et seq. tor | an account | of the | Achehnese | weapons | see the | same, p. 450, J. | A. Kruyt's |
| Atjeh en de Atjehers | p. 56 and | ihe Notulen | van het | Batav. Genootschap | 1892 appx | II. 1. | |
| Lsually kaycè (= bark). | of cloth | (sukaleuet) | or other | European | materials | which are known | as kulct |
1) 1 he best data as regards Achehnese dress are to be found in Van 1 .angen's AtjeICs
2)
26
head. The hcad, howcver, is not always covered, for the Achehnes* carry loads almost exclusively thereon, which method of transport the- call seu'on,
GROUl' OK MEN IROM THE XXV MUKIMS.
Ihe usual form of headgear is the kupiah₁), which greatly resem bles the Mekka cap in colour. The body of the cap, which is cylindrical in shape, is made of close-pressed tree-cotton divided into narrow vertical ribs by stitching on the lining. On this tliin strips of silk or cotton stuffs of various colours are worked together in such a manner
quality than
| I) lhese | are made by | the Achehnese | women | themselves | and are of finer |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| those of Mekka. | The price | of a kupiah | varies from | 7—12 | dollars. |
27
as to give the imprcssion when secn from a distance of a picce of coarse European worsted-work. Between these ribs is often fastened gold thread spreading at the top into ornamental designs. The centre of the crown is adorned with a prettily-shaped knot of gold or silver thread. In contradistinction to the Mekka cap, which is much lower in the crown, the Achehnese call theirs kupiah menkeutöb; a kerchief is sometimes wound round its lower edge as turban (tangkulo), but it is just as often left uncovered. The highlander draws his long hair into a knot on the top of his head, and covers it with his cap, while the lowlander, if he do not shave his head from pious motives, Iets his hair hang down loose on his neck from beneath it. In the lowland districts, too, the single headcloth or tangkulo is more worn tlian in the Tunöng, and as in Java the origin of the wearer may be inferred from the manner of fokling it. The prevailing fashion in such matters is however very liable to change. During my stay in Acheh a new method of wearing the headcloth was in vogue amongst the younger men. It was carried forward in the form of a cornucopia, a fashion said to have been set by the young pretender to the sultanate. The reunchöng or rinchöng, a dagger with one sharp edge, and the bungkö'ih ranub or folded kerchief are alike indispensable to the Achehnese when he walks abroad. In the latter are placed all requisites for betel-leaf chewing, in ornamental and often costly little boxes or cases. Its four corners are held together by gold or copper boh ru '), and it also forms the receptacle of sundry pretty little toilet requisites, keys etc. Persons of position or those who are going on a journey carry in addition the Achehnese sword (sikin panyang) which is the ordinary weapon used in fighting. It is of uniform vvidth from end to end, and is placed in a sheath. The gliwang (klewang) which is carried for show by the followers of chiefs, or taken on expeditions to market or nightly walks in the gampong, is worn without a sheath. The Tunöng folk take with them 011 a journey in addition to the above, tvvo javelins (kapa') and a spear (/itmba'), as well as a firearm of some description -). The dress of the women, while in the main identical in the Tunöng
| which the | tips of the | are passed. | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| rule forbidden | by government. |
1) This is an acorn-shaped ornament perforated from end to end with a hole through
2) Weapons are now worn by a few of the chiefs, the carrying of arms bcing as a
bungkdïh only
28
and Baroh, presents one or two points of difference. In both districts they wear over the Achehnese trousers an ija pinggang, but in the
I'EOI'LE KROM THE XXVI MUKIMS.
lowlands this hangs down to the feet, while in the highland districts it comes hardly lower than that of the men. Women in general wear a bajir, but its sleeves are comparatively narrower in the Tunóng, and the edging (keureuyay) at neck and sleeves is more ornamental in the lowlands. A cloth (i/a sawa') is thrown over the shoulders in the same way as the Javanese slendang or scarf. The women of the lowlands use another cloth (ija tül> ulcé) of the same description to cover the head when going out of doors. Locks of hair (kunde) are generally worn hanging in front of both ears. The chignon (sanggöy) is among the lowland women placed 011 the centre of the crown, and divided int° tvvo portions suggesting a pair of horns '), while the Tunóng women either carry the topknot entirely to one side, or let it hang down behind in the form of a sausage 2).
mcukipaïh China fan".
muboh guda
The remaining articles of personal adornment exhibit few differences. 'iiris and women who have not yet had more than one child, wear
MAN KROM THE XXII MUKIMS WITlt 1IIS W!KE.
arm Iets and ankiets (glcu'cng jaroé and gaki) made of suasa, which are forged 011 to their limbs; also chain bracelets of silver or suasa on their arms (taloé jaroé). On their necks tliey have metal collars, the separate portions of which closely rcsemble the almost circular bok ru on the four corners of the betel-leaf kerchief, and necklaces hangin" down over the breast (s> api) composed of srnall diamond-shaped gold plates. In their ears they wear large subangs (earrings) of gold or of buffalo-horn with a little piece of gold in the centre, by the weight of which the holes pierced in the ears are gradually widencd to the
3°
greatest possible extcnt. Round the waist, either next the skin or over the ija pinggang they wear a chain formed of several layers (talbe kiicng) fastened in front with a handsome clasp (peundéng) '); and on their fingers a number of rings (eunchiën or nchïéti). >od. In the remaining material necessaries of life also, the chief distinction between the Tunong and the Barok lies in the fact that the higli- landers are more frugal and simple in their requirements. We need not here go into exact details. The staple form of food, eatén twice a day at 8—9 a. m. and at 5—6 p. m„ is rice (bu) well cooked in water. With the rice is taken guit-(the sayur of the Malays), of which there are three kinds in common use; i°. gu/è masam keiiencng (half-sour, half-pungent gu/è) consisting of leaves or fruits ') boiled in water mixed with onions, pepper, chilis (champli), salt, broken rice and as sour constituents bbh slimbig (blimbing) or sunti; 2". gull- lat ma (rich gull-, from the cocoanut milk used in preparing it). With this is mixed a larger quantity of fragrant herbs, (such as ha/ia or ginger and sreui')-, lts basis is either dried fish •1) (aingkot thn) or karéng (small fisli of the kinds biléh or au>o, also dried), or the stockfish imported from the Maldives (keumamaïli) or sliced plantains or brinjals. The sour clements are the same as 111 1". above. Teumcuruy leaves are also frequently mixed with it, and cocoanut milk (santan) is an indispensable ingre diënt. 30. ***(htlè pi u {gull-***of decayed cocoanut). In this the sour clements and herbs are the same as in the other kinds, but an important ad- ditional ingrediënt is rotten cocoanut, from which the oil has been expressed; also some unripe nangka or jackfruit (bbh panaih), unripe plantain, dry fish and haring. Hesides rice and vegetables a principal article of food with the Achehnese is the stockfish (kcumamaili) imported in large quantities from the Maldives. This is prepared in two different ways; 1". Kat- ***viamdih cheunichah;***4) the kcumamdih is cut up into small pieces and
| ompare | me notes | on the bndal | toilet in our | description | of marriage | III). |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| I he leaves and black or Maldives or | or fruits red bbh truc/tg. the karéng. | most commonly | used | are dn mu/ieng, | bbh mu/iëng, ön | mm dng |
| of the whole name cheunichah | in the compost or chinichah. | called | rujaq, which | is also known | to the Achehnese | by the |
3) 1 bis includes dried fish of the large varieties, not the stockfish (keumamaih) of the
4) I he verb chichah has reference to the pounding up of fruits etc. and mixing up
(Chapter
2)
the
3'
with these are mixed ripe slimhig (blimbing) ') pounded fine, cliilis, onions and sreu'c (sërai)2); 2". keuviamaih reundang or tumch, the in- gredients of which differ little from those just described, but which is not eaten raw but fried in oil. A fourth article of food, which is greatly relished by the Achehnese is boiled fresh fish from the sea or the rivers (eungköt teunaguën). To this is added a considerable quantity of the juice of various sorts of linies (e. g. bbh munteue, kriïct, kuyuë//, maken and sréng), with cliilis and various savoury herbs. The whole is set on the fire in a pot with water, and not taken off until the water boils. At kanduris (religious feasts) and suchlike occasions glutinous rice (l'n kunyi't) coloured yellow with turmeric is a favourite disli. To this are always added either tmnpbV (a sort of pancakes, six or seven of which are laid on top of the rice) and chcuncuruët, a gelatinous network formed of the same kind of rice, or else grated cocoanut mixed with red sugar (u mirah), or long strips of stockfish boiled in cocoanut milk, called keumamaih teunagiicn. At weddings, funeral feasts, receptions of distinguished guests and other ceremonious occasions, it is customary to serve up the rice and its accessories in a definite traditional manner 011 dalongs or trays. This manner of service is called mcu idang, and we sliall have occasion to notice it more fully later 011. An adjunct of every idang, after the rice, fish and gulè, is the tray of sweetmeats, containing a disli of glutinous rice (bu leukat), this time without turmeric, and a disli of pisang pcungat — ripe plantains sliced thin and boiled with cloves, cinnamon, sugar and some pandan-leaves. To these is often added srbykaya — eggs with cocoanut milk and herbs well cooked by steaming. 1' ruits (boh kayi-ë) are constantly eaten, but do not form the special accessories of any feast. After a funeral those who are present at the burial ground eat plantains and such other fruits as are for sale in the market. Sweetmeats are called pcunajóh (which properly means simply „vic- tuals"), anti are as in Java very various in form and name 4), thougli
| size. It is very | popular with | the Malays | as a relish | or sambal | in curry. (Translator). | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Sërai is Malay | for the | lemon-grass. | Andropogon | Schoenanthus. | (Translator). |
1) The blimbing is an acid fruit (one of the Oxalidacea;) growing on a tree of moderate
3) All that with the rice is called tawan bu or teumbn bu.
4) For instance böv, halua Mtuseukat, pasisa, Jdy-ddy, feunajSh thö, halua u. halua
2) goes
32
they diffcr but iittle in actual ingredients. The constituent* of these are almost always grated cocoanut or cocoanut milk, glutinous rice or flour made therefrom, sugar and certain herbs, eggs and oil. They are eaten at odd times and are only set before guests when (as for example at recitations of the Quran) they are assembled for hours together, so that a single great nieal is insufficiënt to while away the time. On such occasions tea and coflee are also served, though the use of these beverages is generally restricted to invalids. Small kanduris or religious feasts are of very common occurrence. At these yellow glutinous rice forms the picce dc resistance, though a goat is sometimes slaughtered for the guests. Otherwise buffaloes, oxen, goats and sheep are seldom killed cxcept at the great annual festivals or in fulfilment of a vovv. I hc use of the betel-leaf (ranub) with its accessories
| •uxunes. | (pineung, gapn, | |
|---|---|---|
| gambé '), | baköng |
and sundry odoriferous herbs) is absolutcly universal. Many both in the highland and lowland districts make an intemperate use of opium, but to nothing like the same extent as in the colonies of pepper-planters 011 the Kast and West Coasts, where all the vices of the Achehnese reach their culminating point. The prepared opium or cliandu is smoked (pivb) from the (go chandit)
| ordinary | opium-pipes | |
|---|---|---|
| panyot. | ||
| (jarnbn | chandu) |
with the aid of little lamps called panyot. I11 the days of Habib Ab- durrahman and similar religious zealots, the smoking went on only in- doors and by stealth. 1 he opium-sheds which certain persons in the more clistant plantations had built in order to enjoy tliis luxury in company, were burnt down by that sayyid. On the West Loast especially, the practice of smoking opium in company still prevailed, and was marked by some characteristic customs. I he votaries of the habit sit together in a prescribed position, and the pipe passes round. Each must in his turn take two pulls so strong as to extinguish the lamp; he then hands the pipe to his right-hand ncighbour with a scionbah or respectful salute. The opium used in such
«1 i ~ 1.-1... • r r > >.. ...
| mcugeunta, | ha/na pisang, | halua | lcungong, halua | fulöt, seupét | kuit, kuta'kan, | seusagön etc. | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Swcetmeats | and cakes | unsuited | for keeping | are called l)y the | collective | name of dahcueh | |
| peuk-tin, | i. e. "market-wares", | even | though | made. The | following | are some of | them; |
| />" | bada pisang, | gula | ta\ gula tari\ karang | seumbt, kcukaraih, | blita talam, | ||
| röm-röm, no lack of quid' of | eungkuy, (hitlöy, variety. the Malays. | kripit, (Translator). | apam, sroykaya, | /»/«, tape. | This list | shows that | therc is |
1) lietel-nut, limc and gambir. These threc with the pungent betel-leaf (sirih) form the
home
M
33
assemblages is mixed with tobacco or other leaves and is called madat'). The Achehnese (of course wrongly) try to associate this word with adat, and assert that it means "the smoking of opium in conformity with certain adat or customs'. In Great-Acheh, however, such public opium smoking has always been exceptional. Every opium-smoker, be he small or great, is sure to be known as such, yet he prefers to perpetrate the actual deed in the solitude of his inner chamber. Some Achehnese smoke opium in order, as they assert, to prolong the pleasure of coition. The use of strong drink, which usually degenerates into excess, is especially to be met with among the lowlanders, but is restricted to the upper classes or those who come much into contact with Europeans. 1'or the ordinary Achehnese water is almost his only drink; occasion- ally he takes some sugarcane juice, squeezed out of the cane by means of a very primitive press. Hence it comes that ngbn blbë ië teubèë uto buy sugarcane juice" is the ordinary name for a douceur. It was an honoured tradition in Acheh that a member of the Sultan's family who had the reputation ot being even a moderate opium-smoker should be excluded from the succession. Intoxicating liquors on the other hand were, as is well known, always to be found in the Dalam. I learned from a widow of Sultan Ibrahim Mansur Shah₁), (1858—70) that the latter had once murdered his own child in a fit of drunken frenzy'). The Achehnese colonists on the East and West Coasts who live there sometimes for years at a time in a society where there are 110 women, develop every vice of the nation to its highest pitch. The true highlanders are reputed not indeed more virtuous (for with them theft and ïobbery are the order of the day) but less weak and effeminate than the lowlanders. Among them opium, drink and unnatural crime exercise less influence than in the coast provinces. Unreasoning fana- ticism, contempt for all strangers and self conceit are ail more strongly marked in the upper country than in the lowland districts, which have
| euphemistic | expression | for the | prohibited drug. | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| would appear | to | have assumed | great proportions | previous | to the commencement | of the |
| Achehnese | war. | |||||
| 3 |
1) From the Arabic O-Vc = spiritual or bodily refreshment. It was at first used as an
2) The Achehnese pronunciation is Mansd Chah.
3) The intemperate use of strong drink in the neighbourhood of the royal stronghold
grown somewhat ''civilized" through contact with foreigners. The highlanders esteem themselves (and the lowlanders do not deny it)
OROl'P OH MEN FROM THE XXII MUKIMS.
braver men than their brcthren of the two remaining "angles" {sago?) of the country. A hero is in common speech aswellasin literature, often spoken of as aneu tunbng kranig 14 a son of the upper reaches of the river." The house In t,lc arrangement of their dwellings there is but little difference equipm'ent. between Tunóng and Baröh. The plate and explanation given at the end of this volume show clearly the principal features of the Achehnese dwelling-house '). It must be remembered that these houses are com-
| 0 The | drawing | was made | by Mr. M. Donk, | and 1 owe | the full explanatory | notes to |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Mi. L. J. C. van | Rs, Engineer. |
posed of eithcr thrcc or (as in the plate) fivc rueuëngs or divisions between the main rafters. In the first case the number of pillars sup- porting the main body of the house is 16, in the second 24. To form an idea of a house of three rueuëngs it is only necessary to cut off from that depicted in the plate all that lies to one side or the other of the central passage (rambat). It has further to be noted that the back verandah [srambë liköt) sometimes also serves as kitchen, and in that case the extension of the house for this purpose as shown in our plate is omitted. The gable- ends always face Kast and West, so that the main door and the steps leading up to it must have a northerly or southerly aspect. Further additions are often made to the house 011 its Kast or West side, when the family is enlarged by the marriage of a daughter. These are as regards their floor-level (aleuë) tached 011 as annexes to the back verandah. Some new posts are set up along the side of the ver andah to support an auxiliary roof, the inner edge of which projects from the edge of the main roof. Parents who are not wealthy enough to build for their daughters a separate house close by, retire, as far as their private life is concerned, into the temporary building we have just described (anjöng) ') and leave the inside room (jurèë) to the young married couple. We shall now make a survey of the Achehnese house and its be- longings, not witli the object of giving a full description of its subor- dinate parts (which may be found in the plate), or a complete inven- tory of all its equipment, but to show the part played by the various portions of the house in the lives of its inmates 2). Round about each dweiling is a court-yard, generally supplied with the necessary fruit-trees etc. and sometimes cultivated so as to deserve the name of a garden (lampviih). Regular gardens, in which are planted sugarcane, betelnuts, cocoanuts etc., are sometimes to be found in this enclosure, sometimes in other parts of the gampöng. The courtyard is surrounded by a strong fence (pageuë) through which a door leads out 011 to the narrow gampöng-path (juröng); this in its turn leads
| Jawa, is generally | known | as T'eungku | Anjöng | owing to | his having | during bis lifetime |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| dwelt in a house | which was separated | from the | neighbouring | house by sucli an anjöng. | ||
| the 'I jJschrift | van het Ncd. | Aardrijksk. | Genootschap, | second | series, Vol. | V. p. 450 et scq. |
1) 1 he great saint uf Achch, a sayyid of the stock of Bilfaqïh, whose tomb is in Gampöng
2) The description we give here is practically supplementary to that of Van I.angen
in
through the gampöng to the main road ') (rèt), which runs through ricc- fields, gardens and uncultivated spaces, and unites one gampöng with another. The whole gampöng, like each courtyard, is surrounded with a fence. A good fence is generally formed of two rows of g/undöng or kcu- •lundang trees or the like, set at a uniform distance apart, leaving a slight intervening space which is filled with tri'êng or thorny bamboo. The two rows are united firmly together by bamboos fastened horizontally From tree to tree as crosspieces. There are usually from three to five af these cross bamboos in the Iength of the fence. Somctimes trees or bushes of other sorts which are themselves fur- ïishcd with thorns, such as the darch, are employed to fence in gardens, :ourtyards or gampöngs. In many courtyards₂), as appears from what wc have said above, nore than a single dwclling house is to be found. As a rule each idditional liouse is the habitation of one of the married daughters ot hc same family or in any case belongs to women descended from the ?ame ancestress. An indispensable item is tlic well (mbn), from which the women draw vater for household use in buckets (tima) made of the spathe of the DCtel-palm (seutu'c), where they wash their clothes and utensils, bathe so far as the uncleanly Achehnese deein it necessary to do so) and iciform other needs. A gutter (salöran) carries off the water etc. to m earthenware conduit, which conducts both water and dung to a nanure-heap (aden or jeu a) which is always very wet. Into this also alls by means of another glitter ail the wet refuse that is thrown out rom the back part of the house and kitchen. A screen (pupalang) huts off those who are using the well from the gaze of the passers-by. 1 he space undemeath the house (yub wbh or yub rumoh) serves as he receptacle of various articles. 1 he jeungki or see-saw rice-pounder o! husking rice; the kcupo 3), a space between four or six posts, sepa- ated off by a partition of plaited cocoanut leaves (bleuït) or similar
ba bah rit =
| louth of | the road. | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ï | (the last | is short for | ) and the spaces | at the sides | of the | two gables |
| olidly constructed | wooden | storehouses | either | under the house | or close | beside it. |
1) The point of junction of the gampöng-path with the main road is called
2) The part of the in front the house is called that behind it
3) Sometimes, espccially in the highlands, there are found in place of the 1 more
courtyard of lenen, liköt li lot moh rumoh al'ong. kcupo (brandeitig)
material thrown round the posts, and in vvhich the newly harvested rice is kopt till threshed, and the threshing itself takes place; the krotigs, great tun-shaped barrels made of the bark of trees or plaited bamboo or rattan, wherein is kept the unhusked rice after threshing, which barrels are also sometimes placed in separate open buildings outside the house; the press (peuneurah) for extracting the oil ') from decayed cocoanuts (pi u), and a bamboo or wooden rack (prat dik or panteuê) on vvhich lies the firewood cleft by the women; these are the principal inanimate objects to be met with in the yub nioh. Should the space beneath the house happen to be flooded in the rainy season, the store of rice is of course removed indoors. Dogs, goats, sheep, ducks and fowls are also housed in the yub mok. The brooding hens are kept under a cage-shaped seureukab -), the others at night in a sriweuën or eumpung (fowl-run), while the fighting- cocks are in the daytime fastened up here by strings to the posts, though at night these favourite animals are brought into the front verandah 3).
Cows and buftaloes are housed in separate stalls or weuë, while ponies
are tied up here and there to trees. The Achehnese however seldom
possess the latter animals; those vvlio have them use them but little and treat them with scant care 4).
All the small live stock huddled together in the yub mbh naturally
| culinary purposes | is first boiled | and | prepared so as | to remove | the smell and | is then callcd |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| minyeu masa|The | Achehnese seldom | boil out | the oil from | the fresh santan | (cocoanut | |
| milk) since | the quantity | obtainable | in this way is smaller. | Such | oil is called | minyeu leuté\ |
| similar basket | which | they use to | catch fish | wet padi-fields | and standing | pools. The |
| sluggish fish | are caught | by plunging | the basket | down into the water, | and the fish | are then |
| withdrawn | through an aperture | at the | top. (Translator). | |||
| in the evening | and placed | on a bamboo | or plank | platform projecting | outwards horizontally | |
| from the | house and | unprovided | with any covering | or fence. | This is a precaution | against |
| the perpetual | thefts | of fowls. If | the birds are | gathered together | in a coop, | the thieves |
| coine and | besprinkle | them with | water; this artificial | rain makes | them keep | still, and the |
| plunderers | can carry off their | booty | unnoticed. | Hut when the fowls are sitting | on an open | |
| surface, they | will fly in all directions | at the first | attempt the thief | makes to catch | them. | |
| without any | shelter. | Their owners | often forget | to water them | for one or two days | at a |
| time, so | that the expression | to | water a horse" | {bri ie gut/a) | is used proverbially | as a |
| reproaeh | to someone | who puts oflf the | performance | of a duty, | as one who should | pay a |
| daily visit, | but only puts | in an appearance | one | day in three |
1) This foul-smclling oil (minyeu' />rö') is used for lamps etc. What is icquired for
2) The Malay sè'rkap, a conical cage or basket. The Malays give the same name to a
3) With regard to the fowls it should be added that thcy also are generally collected
4) They are let loose in the fields by day and tied up to trees at night, generally
in
tt
or four.
render the place somewhat the reverse of wholesome. To this it must be added that much of the refuse from the house is simply thrown in there instead of being conveyed to the dung-heap by the gutter above referred to. Most contributions of this sort come through the guha '), a hole pierced in the floor of the back verandah to receive odds and ends of refuse wet and dry, but which also serves as a latrine for children and invalids! Besides this, the floor of every inner room (jurèe) is furnished with a long open fissure over which the dead are laid to be washed, so as to let the water used in the ablution flow off easily. Notwithstanding all this, the yub mok is also used as a temporary resting-place for human beings. If there are children in the house, a largo swinging cradlo is hung here for their use. Here too the women set up their cloth on the loom and perform othor housohold duties, for which purpose a certain portion is partitioned off by a screen (pupalang). At festivals some of the guests are entertained in thesame place; and here it is customary to receive visits of condolence for a death. Some cliiefs keep imprisoned in the yub mok those who refuse to pay the fines imposed on them. At the foot of the steps leading up to the house (gakt reunyeun) there always stands a great earthenware water-jar (guchi). Close to this is a hooked stick plantod in the ground to hold a bucket (seu- neulat timet) and a number of stones rathor neatly arrangod. Anyone who wishes to enter the house places his dusty or muddy feet on these stones and pours water over them from the bucket till they are clean. Where there is a separate kitchen (rumbh dapu), a flight of steps leading down from this allows the inmates to quit the house from the back, but as a rule the steps in front are the only means of egress, so that the women must traverse the front verandah every time'they go out of doors. Some houses have a wooden platform surrounding the foot of the steps and protected by the penthouse roof which covers the latter. It is set against the side of the house and stands a little lovver than the floor of the front verandah. This serves the inmates as an occasional place to sit and laze in and also for the pursuit of parasites in one
| I) The word | also signifies | «grotto" | or «cave", | but the expression | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| guha (Van and not "in | Langen, Achehnese the ca^e". | Dictionary | p. 471) | means "go | and make | water at the hole" |
ja' töh 'ie' keudih M
another's hair, a practice as necessary and popular among the Achehnese as among the Javanese'). Here too the little children play. By the house door access is gained to the front verandali or as the Achehnese call it, the stair verandali (srarnoë reunyeiin) which is separated from the rest of the house by a partition in which are the doors of the inner chambers (jurèë) and the aperturi leading into the central passage, filled generally either by a curtain or a door. rhis is the portion of the Achehnese dwelling to which the unin- itiated are admitted. Here guests are received, kanduris or religious feasts are given and business discussed. Part of the floor (aleuë) iï covered vvith matting; 011 ceremonial occasions carpets (plumadani ot peureumadanï) are spread over this, and on top of these again eacli guest finds an ornamentally vvorked square sitting-mat (tika iiuë'] placed ready for him. A sort of bench made of wood or bamboo called pratdih sometimes serves the master of the house as a bedstead duriny part of the night, when he finds the heat excessive within. Here too are to be found a number of objects which betray the calling or favourite sport of their owner, some 011 shelves or bamboo racks (san- déng) against the wall, some stuck in the crevices of the wall itself. There the fisherman hangs his nets (jeuë or nyaréng), the huntsman his snares (tarön), all alike their weapons; there too are kept certain kinds of birds such as the leuë' (Mal. tikukur, a kind of small dove), which are much used for fighting-matches. The passage (rambat) is at one side in a house of three sections, hut in one of live it is right in the middle between the two bedrooms. It is entered by none but women, members of the household or the family, or men 011 very intimate ternis of acquaintanceship, as it only gives access to the back verandali, the usual abode of the women, wlio there perform their daily household tasks. Some provisions are stored in the rambat, as for instance a gnchi or earthenware jar of decayed cocoanut (pi 11) for making oil, and a jat of vinegar made from the juice of the arèn (ië /<>') or the nipah. Here too stands the tayciicn, a smaller portable earthenware jar in which the mistress of the house or her maidservant fetches water from the
| as the Javanese, | whom they | nickname | Jaiva | pajöh guteë — "luuse-eating | Javanese". |
|---|
1) The however do not perform this operation in the same unsavoury manner
Achehnese
we to fi» the guchi which stands in the back verandali and contains the supply of water for household use. Some short posts (rang) cxtending only from the roof to the floor are furnished with small pieces of plank 011 which are hung the brass plates with stands of the same metal on which food is served to guests, the trays (dalong) big enough to liold an idang for four or five persons and the smaller ones (krikay) on which are dished the special viands for the most distinguished visitors. Either in the rambat or the sramöë likot stands a chest (peutbe) containing the requisite china and earthenware. Porcelain dishes (pingan) and plates or small dishes (chipé) are to be found in these chests almost everywhere in the lowland districts, but when there are no guests the simpler ware common in the Tunong is here also used, viz. large earthenware or wooden plates called chapah and smaller ones known as chue. 1 lii- back verandali serves as it were as a sitting-room and as we have seen often answers the purpose of a kitchen as well. It contains a sitting mattress (tilam duë) with a mat 011 it especially intended for the use of the master, when he comes here to eat his meals or to repose; while a low bench (prataïh) similarly covered with a mat serves as a resting-place for small children. Here are to be found, 011 shelves or racks fïxed against the wall, plates, earthen cooking-pots (blangöng), circular earthen or brass saucepans (kanct)') in which rice is boiled '-), earthen frying-pans with handles (sudtt) for frying fish etc., the curry- stonc (batec neupêh) for grinding spices etc., with the grater (aneu') tliat appertains to it, and earthenware or brass lamps (panyöt) in the form of round dishes with four or seven mouths (mata) in each of which a wiek is placed. Some of these lamps are suspended by cords from above (panyöt gantung), others rest on a stand (panybt dong). From the rafters and beams hang at intervals little nets called salang, neatly plaited of rattan, for holding dishes which contain food, so as to protect their contents to some extent from the attacks of various domestic animals. Drinking vessels of brass (mundatn) or earthenware (peunuman) are
| These | pots are | used | in Acheh | for cooking | rice 'with | water | Stea- |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| K | is only | resorted to | in the case | of gelatinous | rice (/<« | certain | ground |
| fruits and | a few sweetmeats | such | as | or | For this | are employed | utensils |
| called | y similar | in shape | to the | of Java. | As a matter | of fact | the cooking |
| of rice in supposed. | water ( | is the rule | in Java | also in many | more districts | than is generally |
1) Hence the collectivc name in Acheh for pottery,
kanct-blangong.
2) generally (tapten).
mm (seu'oi) leukat), sroykaya apam. puncheue kukusans liwlt)
to be found in all the different apartments. They have as covers brass drinking-cups which are inverted and replaced after use. Cooking is performed in a very simple manner. Five stones arranged almost exactly in this form • constitute two teunungkèës') or pri- mitive chafing-dishes in which wood fires are lit, one for the rice and the other for the vegetables (gulè). The use of iron chafing-dishes (Jcraii) on three legs is a mark of a certain degree of luxury. 1 he holy of holies in the house is the one part of it that may be really called a room, the jurèë, to which access is had by a door leading out on to the back verandah. Here the married couple sleep, here takes place the first meeting of bride and bridegroom at the niampleuï (inf. chapter III, ij i) and here the dead are washed. These rooms are seldom entered by any save the parents, children and servants. 1 he floor is as a rule entirely covered with matting. The roofing is hidden by a white cloth (tirè dilangèt) and the walls are in like manner covered with tirè or hangings. Round the topmost edge of the tirè runs a border formed of diamond-shaped pieces of cloth of various colours; these when stitched together form the pattern called in Acheh chradi or mirahpati. Such disguising of roof and walls is resorted to in the other parts of the house only on festive occasions. On a low bench or platform (prataïh) is placed a mattress (tilam éh) with a mat over it, and this couch is usually surrounded with a mos- quitonet [kleumbu). Besides this there is spread on the floor a sitting-mattress (tilam diic) of considerable size, but intended only for the man's use, and thus provided with a sitting mat. On both mattresses are piles of cushions (bantay susön) shaped like bolsters and adorned at either end with pretty and often costly trimming. A sitting mattress has about four, a sleeping mattress as many as fifteen cushions of this description. 1 he clothing and personal ornaments are kept in a chest which stands in the jurè'è. Well-to-do people generally have for this purpose chests the front of which is formed of two little doors opening out- wards. 1 hese are called peutöé dong or standing chests to distinguish them from the chests with covers. When the Achehnese learned to use European cupboards, they gave them the same name.
i) Tungku in Mal.^and Jav.
Along the small posts (rang) inside the house there is usually fastened a plank set on edge on the floor. This serves as a specious screen for al' manner of untidiness, concealing all such rubbish as the inmates may choose to throw between it and the wall. I he women as well as the men are dirty and slovenly, and but few of the objects forming the household equipment have a settled place. All manner of things are piled on the upper beams or on the small platforms (para) which rest thereon, access to which is gained by climbing up steps made of pieces of plank fastened to the walls or posts. Vanous objects are to be seen hanging against the wall, or when lts structure admits, stuck into its crevices (l/iat). Lamps and drinking-cups are of course not lacking in the jurcc, still less the requisites for chewing betel. The betel-leaves in neat little piles witli pieces of betelnut on the top are contained in a little brass cup of almost the same form as the drinking-cups and like them called bate with the word ranub added to show their purpose. The cup is covered inside witli a clotli lining, which, like the tire-borders, exhibits the variegated pattern known as mirahpati or chradi. On top of the betel are placed two small boxes, the krandam and cheuleupa containing respectively linie and tobacco mixed with spices. The outfit is in fact the same as the pedestrian carries with him in his bungkïnh, or if he be a person of distinction, lias carried for him by his attendants. 1 l.e whole house belongs in Acheh to the category of movable property. hvery peg is made much too small for its hole and is kept in its place by means of large wedges. For anyone who understands the uniform structure of the Achehnese house and every native of the country is an adept in this — the task of taking a house to pieces and setting it up again elsewhere is but the work of a moment. So when an Achehnese sells his house, this means tliat the purchaser removes it to his own place of abode; a change of residence by the propnetor or ratlier the proprietress to another gampöng is quite a rare occurrence among the Achehnese. Houses are transported in large numbers from the highlands to the owlands, but seldom vice versa, since the Tunóng possesses a greater ibundancc of building materials. It is to be understood that even the most solidly built Achehnese ïouse shakes if anyone pulls at the posts. Thieves and burglars begin jy shaking the house to discover whether the inmates are sound
enough asleep to admit of their carrying out their nefarious purposes. If they hear from the jureé or the front verandah the cry "who is that shaking the house.'" they know that the time is unfavourable for their task. Men who have forbidden intrigues with the wife or daughter of the house make known their presence in the same way, so that the object of their affections may come out to them if opportunity occurs. The same course is adopted by the revengeful, who seek treacher- ously to slay the master of the house. Having ascertained that the latter is sound asleep in the jureé they can generally ascertain, as they stand underneath the house, on what part of the floor he is lying. I hen follow one or two rapid spear-thrusts through the thin planks, and all is over. 1o force one's way into the house at night is difficult, as the doors are fastened with wooden bolts (gancheng, tuien' ganchéng) and besides every movement inside the house would be likely owing to the insta- bility of the floor, to wake the inmates up. Many houses are regarded as possessed, because their inmates are continually falling sick. lo protect a house from such malign influences various expedients are adopted. A favourable time for commencing to build is carefully chosen. The work always begins with the setting up of the two principal posts with the cross-beams that unite them; while this is in progress, sundry prayers and formulas are repeated. These two posts which when the house is completed stand in the jureé, are called the ra/a and the putrbé (prince and princess). For them the soundest and best wood is selected; the raja is first set up and then the putröë. At a wedding the bridegroom takes his place next the "prince" post, while the bride occupies a seat under the "princess". Should the ceremonies at the setting up of the principal pillars prove propitious for continuing to build, then as soon as the house is finished a lucky day is again chosen for moving into it. On this occasion a kanduri or religious feast is given, to which the teungku of the meunasah (vide inf. § 5) and some leubès are invited. After this gathering there commences the customary "cooling" ') (/>eu-
| house, house-warming". | To natives | of warm climates | coolness | and not warmth | appears the | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| desideratum | (Trans/utor). |
1) An odd contrast is to be found in the English name for the initiation of a new
tt
sijue),* which consists in sprinkling all the posts with flour and water (teupong taweuc) by means of a broom formed of plants and twigs having a "cooling", that is an evil-dispelling influence. The same pro- cess is resorted to whenever there lias been any unusual feast or ceremony in the house, since such occurrences are supposed to set the heat, that is the powers of evil, in motion. Of all the pillars the ra ja and the putröë receive most attention on such occasions. Ihe two "royal" pillars and sometimes others as well are at the time of building covered at the top with a piece of white cloth, over which again is placed a piece of red, so that they look as though they had turbans on their heads. This is also supposed to contribute to the protection of the inmates from evil influences.
| § 4- Distribution | of the people; | clans and tribes. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| famÜy Wh SC | dwellin | |||
| are all | dealt wjth | jn a atc>r chapter | we shaU | gee how |
andtribes ^ '. ° g-pl*« is the Achehnese house just de- (kawöm, scribed, its origin and the customs and laws that control its daily life
sukèü)., There
many genuine patriarchal institutions, survivals are not wanting of the former prevalence of what the Germans call " Mutterrecht", or to which tliev apply the curious hybrid name u Matriarchat." 1 he child never ceases to regard the house and gampöng of his mother as lus own. The daughters continue after marriage to reside in their mother's house (in which case a jureé is vacated in their favour) or obtain another house in its immediate neighbourhood. The sons when married are said to «go home" (wöë) to their wives, yet they remain, except when visiting their wives, citizens of their mother's gampöng, where in common with all whose wives do not reside in that gampöng or who are still unmarried, they pass their nights in the meunasah. Ihus descendants of a common ancestress through the female line are usually to be found living as relatives in the same neighbourhood, while tliose derived from a common ancestor are scattered about in different villages. Ihese and similar facts, however, interesting though they may be, have at the present time only a rudimentary signification for the Achehnese community. When mention is made of a family in the more
extended scnse of a tribe (kawnm), this is taken to include all the descendants of a common ancestor in the male line, however far apart from one another they may happen to reside. And this is no new conception, nor should it in all probability be ascribed to the influence of Mohammedanism alone, though no doubt greatly strengthened thereby; most of the old Achehnese adats and institutions bear witness' to and confirm this patriarchal origin. Thus a kawöm') includes all whose pedigrees follovved up in the male line coincide in a single ancestor. Even where the line cannot be clearly traced (and few Achehnese know their descent for more than three generations) they still hail one another as fellow-tribesmen as long as the feeling survives that they are connected in the manner indicated with a common ancestor. Van Langen 2) lias very properly represented the division of the Achehnese people into kawötns as the ancient and patriarchal, as opposed to the territorial distribution, the latter being a more recent and higher phase of the political development of Acheh. Even now, after government and jitdicial administration have been for centuries based on the territorial distribution, the kawötns, those genealogical units which flourished at a period when might was superior to right and wlien there was no central authority controlling parties, have by 110 means lost all significance. I11 connection with this fact it follows naturally that the kawötns have maintained most force in those parts of the country where the political development is most backward, as in the Tunóng (the XXII Mukims), in Pidië (Pedir) and in the VII Mukims Buëng (the part of the XXVI Mukims that lias most in common with the highlands in language and manners). In the lowlands 011 the other hand, and especially in the neighbourliood of the Dalam, where blood-feuds (bila) are not so much the order of the day, and where the upholders of territorial authority depend less 011 their kawöm than 011 their own energy and other personal characteristics, the distribution into kawöms
| that this | distribution | was introduced | on a sudden | during | the reign of a certain | Sultan | of |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the lóth | century is | unworthy | of acceptance | and 's also at | variance | with tradition. | The |
| transition | took place | naturally, | growing with | the growth | of the people. | What the | writer |
| puts forward conjectures | as Achehnese and the | tradition theories of certain | is to an Achehnese. | undesirable | degree mixed | up with | modern |
1) From the Arab. kaum = people, tribe.
2) In his Atjehscli Staatsbestuur, pp. 384—390. The theory there propounded (p. 387)
w Of continually diminishing import. Everything tcnds to show that even ,f the country were Ieft entirely to itself, the development of cheh would gradually result in the entire dissolution of the influence of the kawotn.
None the less it lias occasionally come to pass in more recent times hat a lowland tr.be which has greatly increased in numbers, has cherished the desire of seeing a panglima kawöm •) established more majorum at its liead. Ihe fulfilment of such a wish has however for a long time past depended on the concurrence of the territorial chief, the nVeèbalang. ie latter first considers whether it is desirable to acquiesce in the rcquest of the "family" whose proportions have so mucli increased, and further whether the proposed candidate is to be depended on to iipio d the interests of his kawöm, and especially those which relate °°d feuds °r lnla' A territorial functionary is never selected as panglima kawom, since the two-fold office would bring him at times "ito conflict with himself. If the ulèëbalang concurs in the rcquest, the appointment ,s made in the presence of a solemn assembly of certain ollice-bearers and a number of members of the kawöm or tribe. The nevv leader of the tribe receives from the ulèëbalang a seunalén, that is an outfit of clothing and another of weapons, and this present binds hun as ,t were expressly to fealty to the ruler of the country. The "Ictbalang or an experienced speaker on his behalf announces the ap pointment of the panglima kawom to the assembled crowd, and finally the newly-appointed chief is smeared bchind the ears [sunténg) with ye OW glutmous nee, a ceremony resorted to on all sorts af solemn occasions to ward oft' evil influences. Ihe appointment of a panglima kawöm takes place in the lowland districts whenever there are satisfactory reasons for it, even though the tribe has no traditional appellation and though its connection with of the. four gieat tribes (kawom or sukèë) presently to be noticed » entirely unverified. But as already observed, such appointments are of uncommon occurrence, and the fact that they belong to one of the four great kawoms is as a rule only brought home to the lowlanders by occasional troublesome demands for help and support from their un- known brethren of the highlands.
I) Chief or leader of the kawom.
The demand for blood-vengeance (bila) or a blood-price (diet) by the next of kin of a slain man, which is very common in the lowlands, need not be gone into here in our description of institutions strictly Achehnese, as it is universal in all Mohammedan communities. The Tunong or highlands of Great-Acheh are, comparatively speaking, up to the present time the true sphere of the kawöm. Here we find the four great tribes (kawom or stikte) to one or other of which every true highlander regards himself as belonging, and from which it is generally asserted that every Achehnese must be descended '). Here a strained relation between two tribes may result in a hostile attitude, be it only such as that of the Bedouins, a war without battles, but marked by many thievish raids and treacherous attacks, and sometimes actual homicide. To learn for himself all that there is still to find out about these kawötns the enquirer should devote a considerable time to personal investigation in the 1 unóng. From the actual popular traditions of the place he would be able to deduce — not how the four tribes originated, for that is known to none, and still less the course of their history even in modern times — but what the mutual relations are which subsist between the tribes themselves. By examining actually existing disputes and the manncr of their settlement, he would come to know what the adats are which really control the tribal life — which never can be learnt from the answers of the highlanders to the questions put to them, since each one is apt to try and show off by his answers his own wisdom and the greatness of his own kawöm or stikte. 1 here are many arguments against the theory of the descent of all Achehnese from the four sukti's, leaving aside the question as to how these latter originated. For instance we find that many of the low- landers are absolutely ignorant as to which of the suktës they can claim to belong to; then again we know that there has been from early times a considerable intermixture with foreign elements in spite of all racial pride. The Sultans of Acheh were in part Malayan, in part
| that the sukus | (the word | actually | indicates | the fraction | of the Mïnangkabau | people | are |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| also based | on the number | four. | Anyone | at all versed | in genealogical | legends | is aware |
| that all such | tables of | descent are | as regards | their uppermost | part artificial | or mythical | or |
| in brief fictitious, | while | the really | traditional | or more | clements | must be sought | for |
| in the most | recent branches. | In | the earlier | portions | we find represented | in genealogical | |
| fbrm units | which history | shows t(I have | really | been gathered | from the | four winds. |
1) Ihe number four is a favourite one in these genealogical subdivisions. It is known
reliable
Arab, and in part -as with the linc of princes who have now occu- picd the throne for more than a century and a half— of Bugis origin-The great literati or holy men werc almost without exception foreigners, and the same is true of many of the rich traders and high officials. The Klings and Arabs settled in Acheh, nay even some of the slaves have after several generations become an integral part of the Achehnese peoplc. From tliis it may be readily concluded that the four great tribes, while comprehending the whole of the Tunóng people, who owing to the nature of their environment were least ofall exposed to foreign influcnce or admixture, never included all the Achehnese. This remains probable even in view of the indubitable fact that the tribal relations which did actually prevail, are in the lowlands fading away and gradually disappearing under the pressure of the superior power of the chiefs. The shglit Information which we here furnish as to the four kawöms, their tradition and adat is from the nature of the subject merely prehminary, and will we hope be improved or better still completed by others. All that can be gathered of the origin of the four kawöms or sukèës, even with respect to their names is thus to a hazardous degree mixed up with modern Achehnese philosophy and conjecture. These materials though they wcar the outward appearance of having been handed down from distant ages, exhibit manifest tracés of having been thought out in a period much too remote for accuracy from the origin of the tribes, or concocted to suit the rcal or supposed meanings of the names₁). The very circumstance that these kawöm-legends diverge as widely as the poles should cause us to abandon as hopeless the search among them for "gemis of history."
Atjchsch Staatsbestuur kawöms
| .) Sec also | Van I.angen, | pp. 387 et | seq. The explanation | there | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| g.ven of the | distnbution | of the people | into | as bascd | on difference | of race, | thus |
| giving us | a Mante-Batak, | a Ilindu | and a half-caste | and | also one | of more recent | |
| origin, rests | again on modern | Achehnese | theory and | is as littlc | trustworthy | as the doctrine | |
| O eungku | Kutakarang | (see p. r8 | above) according | to which | the people | of Acheh | was |
| composed of | Arabs, 1'ersians | and Turks. | The flights | of fancy indulged | in by | the Achehnese | |
| expositors are | shown by | the explanation | of the name | of the kawöm | on p. 388 | ||
| of the above | work. They | dcrive it from | the circumstance | that on | one occasion | through | ihe |
| help of this | tribe «stones | enough" | were found. | the first place, | the proper | meaning | of |
| is to | arrivé and | not "to be | enough." Besides | this, however, | the | word | is a |
| common abbreviation | of | /W which | like mcans | ancestor, | and as a matter | of fact | the |
| tnbe in (juestion | is just | as often called |
tawBm,
7V Batec
In To Ja Ja Bateé as TB' /lal'cc.
Thus much is, however, certain, that from the earliest time three of the four kawöms were even when taken together inferior in numbers and strengh to the fourth, and therefore combined in opposition to the latter. Through this conjunction and also perhaps through attendant political circumstances the nature of which we can now hardly con- jecture, this trio of tribes succeeded, at the time when the Achehnese passed from what we have termed the genealogical or patriarchal to the territorial distribution, in retaining for themselves the highest positions and excluding their common rival therefrom. Thus the united three restored the balance of power and even made it turn in their favour, but not before they had transferred the conflict to another sphere than that of the kawöms. While the tribes Lhec reutóik, Chut (also known as Ja or *To') San-***The three** ,, cv »>-ii i i i i r i-kawöms and dang and Jo or Ja hatcc all contnbuteu members to the families ot t|lc imeum the territorial chiefs or high officials to the chief town of the kingdom, I euct' no single member of the fourth tribe, the Imcum Peurt lias attained to more tlian the modest rank of chief of a mukim. The names of the kawöms teacli us little; let us however recapi- tulate them. i". Lhec reutdih, i. e. the Three Hundred, without doubt a peculiar title for a genealogical unit. If it may be assumed that three hundred families or three hundred fighting men were originally intended by the name, it is probable that we have to do with an ancient federation called into existence at some crisis of public necessity or conflict and afterwards remaining united and increasing in numbers chietly if not altogether by propagation. Hut who can vouch for the correctness of this supposition ? 2°. Chut, Ja or To' Sandang. Ja or To' as we have seen, means forefather. Both names, like eumpec (Mal. nu pit) are also applied to revered and personified objects, such as sacred trees, wells, rocks and cliffs, the worship of which clearly dates from heathenish times, but lias here survived in spite of Islam. Chut properly means "little". It is used as a prefix to the names of children and (at least in more recent times) of men and women of position. Sandang, which properly means "to carry something under the arm suspended to a rope or strap passing over the shoulder", is also sometimes used as a male proper name ').
the cousin Teuku
| i) For instance | and banta | of the present | Nè' is called Teuku | Sandang. |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 4 |
Van Langen notices a tradition according to which the name ofthis tribe was originally that of an individual from Lampanaïh in the XXII Mukims, who used to bring every year to the Sultans of Acheh in token of fealty a bamboo filled vvith palm-wine fastened to a cord passing over his shoulder '). Another legend which I have heard, while equally unreliable from a historical point of view, is much more generally current among the Achehnese and serves to illustrate an adat which prevailed up to the latest times at the installation of a new Sultan. According to this story, one of the Sultans of Acheh once found himself constrained to go and enforce in person his authority over the district of Pidië. His route thither Iay through Lam Panaïh in the XXII Mukims. Here he suffered from th.rst, but none was found to bring him anything to drink, till at last a man of humble rank brought him milk in a bamboo vessel (ƒ*)ac/iö'*), which he carried in the way ex- pressed by the word sandang. 1 he Sultan was extremely grateful and invited him to come to him when the war was over and His Majesty had returned to the Dalam, as he wished to give him an earnest of the honour and favour in which he held him. "But how", objected the old man, "shall an insignificant person like myself be recognized as he who helpee! to assuage your thirst, and admission to the Dalam be accorded me"? «You must", replied the Sultan, "twist a white cocoanut spathe round your head by way of sign, and hang your bamboo vessel over your shoulder as it now is". Ja Sandang did so, and both he and his descendants enjoyed the utmost consideration at the Court. I'euku Kali. Later on the ruler of Acheh who reformed or endeavoured to reform the administration of justice, chose his court judge from the tribe of 7a Sandang, which had meantime greatly increased in dignity. This official received the title of Kali Malikul-adil (Malikön Adé) and the judicial otlice or at least the title appertaining to it remained hereditary in his family. The later bearers of this title gradually acquired the positions of masters of ceremonies at the Court. Those who have seen them in the exercise of their functions at the installation of a new Sultan, can testify that on such occasions the Teuku Kali wore a white cocoanut
i) Atjehsch Staatsbestuur, pp. 388 389.
5'
spathe under his head-cloth, and a blunderbuss attached to a leathern belt passing over his shoulder. The reason given for adhering to this adat is that the titular "judge" appeared also in the character of the representative of his tribe the Ja Sandang, As, however, custonis change with lapse of time, the later Sultans had permitted the holders of this otuce to exchange the bamboo vessel for a blunderbuss and to hide the cocoanut spathe to some extent beneath their head-cloth. We let this legend pass for what it is worth, merely adding that the members of this tribe are not allowed to eat the flesh of white buftaloes 01 the salt watei fisli alu-alu, both of which are tabooed (pantang) for them. There is of course no lack of stories to account for this prohibition. Similar rules aftecting particular families or tribes are very common in Java; among the Sundanese they are known as buyut or in some cases chadu. Such pantang-rules, even though strictly observed by Mohammedans, date of course from pre-Mohammedan times, and in so far they per- haps argue a much greater antiquity for the sukèë of Ja Sandan"• Ja or To' Batèë ~ Forefather or Grandfather Stone. It may be conjectured that the tribe so named regarded its individuality as em- bodied in the common worship of a sacred stone '). 4". Imeum peurt or the four imams, evidently a very modern appel lation as compared with 2° and 30 above. It seems to indicate that this tribe or confederacy existed or was formed under the leadership of four chiefs called imams. As we know, the office of imam (Ach. imemn) stands entirely apart from the organization of the kawöms. We have in Acheh imeums who take the lead in devotional exercises without deriving from this function any particular rank in the comniu- nity. Again we find imeums in the position of headmen of districts (mukims), whose oftice was according to the intent of its founder without doubt closely connected with religion, but lias degenerated into one of purely worldly authority. Neither of the two seems to suggest the constitution or appellation of a snkïc. It appears to me not improbable that a number of smaller kawöms
1) Compare Ju Karieng, a ilreaded tree on I'uló Lam Puyang, the subject ofmanyvows,
Eumph /.,ttn, a mountain on the eoast of the IV Mukims which plays a part in tlic rain- making superstition, Eumfc !1/icng, a holy well in the IX Mukims, which also hclps to :ausc rain, etc.
52
each with a name of its ovvn but without any collectivc appellation used to band themselves together in time of danger; and that at the time when the greatest efiforts towards centralization of control were being made in Acheh, this confederacy obtained four imeums to look after their mosques and maintain their connection with the territorial miers. Later on then, when this tribe had greatly increased in numbers and spread itself throughout every district, the name survived. Many however take the view that the name points to an original quartet of tribes, united to one another in the same way and for the same reasons as the three sukècs first mentioned {Lhee reutoih, Ju Sandang and 'Ja hater). Such a supposition finds some support in the description of the Achehnese people as the seven kawötns or bangsas, which is to be met with occasionally in their literature. This expression however, the meaning of which even the most intelligent Achehnese declare themselves unable to understand, is just as likely to have onginated in a totally different manner, nor have I met with any popular tradition according to which these «seven tribes" might be taken to be composed of four clans of the Imeum peiïét and the other three tribes. Be this as it may, human memory discloses nothing with respect to this fourfold division, and if it ever did exist, the fusion is now quite complete. Original even though not originally restintr on
| 1 he distribution | into kawötns, | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| significance | a urcI | ||
| l d, kawoms. | cance S1I1CC doubt | the increase ther | of |
territorial,., ^ significance a PurcIy genealogical basis, afterwards obtained a genealogical signifi- "bu tion into ' each kawötn was due in the first place to natural propagation, and that too exclusively in the male line. Beyond aH e was nothing territorial in this distribution; for no matter where a man may choose to take up his abode, the bond which attachés him to his kawötn remains unsevered. Still we may readily suppose that the kawötns were more or less territorially distinguished from one another by position, like the tribes of Israël or the liedouins of Arabia botli past and present. Indeed the instinct of mutual self-support that was unquestionably the weightiest factor 111 the formation of the kawoms, was most intimately connected with community of the place of abode. Concentration was especially resorted to against threatened danger from the other clans; and it follows as a matter of course that there could be no community of residence with an enemy. A manifest sur vival of this separation of clans, which was undoubtedly much more
53
markcd in ancicnt times, is to be found in the adat-rule, often trans- gresscd yct always recognized in theory, that marriage while permitted between members of the first three confederated tribes is forbidden between these and the Imeum Pciict. Had the territorial chiefs succeeded fully in carrying out their pur- pose, such a prohibition would of course have lost all its force. Indeed, where the kawöms have been constrained to live at peace with onc another and to submit their disputes to the arbitration of third parties, there lias been an end of all impulse to such a social separation, vvhich is besides opposed to the teaching of Islam. It is, however, equally certain that such severance and isolation were very much more preva lent prior to the time when the ulèëbalangs and other chiefs began to exert control over all alike without distinction of kawöm. Free intermarriage between the three allied kawöms dates of course from their federation. It does not require a great stretch of the imagination to realize the peculiar consequences of free intermixture of the kawoms, where the tribal distribution still retains its truc significance. We have already seen that the adat-prohibition just noticed is very frequently transgressed. When once the wall of separation between two families is thrown down, a feeling of kinship arises between them and they no longer trouble themselves over the circumstance that the one belongs to the Imeum 1'euet, and the other to one of the three allied tribes. Now all goes well as long as nothing occurs to disturb the peace between the kawoms. Suppose however that a blood-feud springs up between the two and is not at once amicably settled; suppose, as often happens, that such a />//kawöm of his mother, against his ovvn uncles and cousins, where he belongs say to the 7o' Hater and they to the Imeum Pciict. Or let us take the case of two sisters whose family belongs to the 'To Batic, and suppose that one manies a member of the Imeum Pciict (thus transgressing the theoretical rule), and the other a member of the Lhec Reutóih. The usual place of residence of the two husbands, if they do not neglect their wives, will, in accordance with the Aclieh- nese adat be in the same house or at least in the same courtyard. Should a conflict such as we have just supposed arise, the brothers-
WOUIÜ nave to avoid each other as enemies until peace wa; concluded. Such a state of things is not merely hypothetical, but often actuallj anses. It is true, most civil conflicts among the Achehnese express themselves rather in high words, empty burning of powder and un- executed plans than in sanguinary battles. Yet blood-feuds are distin- guished by a certain degree of violence, and it is these in particular which give rise to tribal dissensions.
W e can thus understand the rationale of this adat-rule, and perceive
that it must in earlier times have had a wider influence and been more strongly enforced than at present.
If the social separation of the kawöms is gradually ceasing to cxist,
their territorial severance lias long been a thing of the past. Even in the highlands the three allied kawöms do not live apart from one another, but reside peacefully side by side in the same districts or gampongs. Natural as it now appears, this gathering together within the same village enclosure and under the same territorial chiefs must at
one time have been a gigantic stride along the road of political deve- lopment. This reform cannot be ascribed to the influence of the sultans, since everything points to the fact that the ulccbalangs had made good their territorial power long before they were compelled to recog- niZe the supremacy of the port-king. We may assume that the efforts
<>f certain energetic individuals towards the establishment of territorial authority were crovvned with success because the time was ripe for political reform, and because all men, however disinclined they might be to leave the decisions of their bloodfeuds to others, saw that it was for their interest to adopt a regulated social system in which the kawom played but a secondary part.
This reformation has virtually abolished the clan system. In the lowlands as time goes on it is becoming entirely forgotten. In the highlands it still possesses considerable significance; but this must gra dually decrease unless unforeseen events arise to annihilate the compa-
rative order that now prevails there. Ihe most important panglimas of the Imeum Peuct are those in the \ II Mukims Ba et, and outside these at Lam Leu'ót. There are how ever chiefs of this most numerous clan to be found in other places as well» and in like manner the other three kawöms have their panglima in every place where they are at all well represented as regards num-
55
aers. The post of panglima kawom, like all Achehnese offices, devolves :>y inheritance, but as we have seen above, the holder of tliis office
TEUKU CIIUT EUMl'f f. AKA (XXII MUKIMS).
may take no share in the territorial government. As regards the panglimaship, the three allied tribes count as one; vvhere there exists a panglima of any one of them, he luis 110 colleagues from the other tvvo and attends to the interests of all alike. A blood-debt of any one of these kawöms is also regarded as resting 011 all three. Settlement of blood-feuds seems in ancient times to have been made Vengeance almost exclusively by the exacting of vengeance. While the latter isful expressed by a word of Indian origin (bila) the milder custom of bloed-money. money is only denoted by the Arabic appellation dict. Although the
56
a of a blood-price is not foreign to nativc customary Iaw in othc parts of the Eastern Archipelago, this method of settlement seems t( have been introduced into Achch through the medium of Islam, - though not without modifications. It is not necessary here to go into the rules of Mohammedan law in respect of the jus talionis and blood-money. It need only be bornc in mind that in case of wilful murder or hurt, the Moslim law give« the right of retributive vengeance to none but the heir of the victim or (in case of hurt) to the wounded man himself. The execution ol this vengeance is made subject to the supervision of the public authorities. At the same time the injured party is left free, nay in many cases advised to content himself with the blood-price fixed by law instead of exacting a personal vengeance. In Acheh however it has remained an etablished rule that blood- feuds are dccided without any interference on the part of the territorial authorities, simply under the direction of the panglimas of the kawöm, who are tribal and not territorial chiefs. Exceptions occur now and then through the authority of some unusually energetic ulèëbalan" or unusually influential ulama. Here again we find all the members of a kaW',m J°lntly and «everally liable as concerns bila, so that a blood-feud may keep two clans for years in a state of mutual hostility '). Should, however, the influence of the panglima kawöm or the pressure of the higher powers be ablc to prevent the feud and induce the in jured party to accept blood-money, then the guilty party, who is in most cases unable to make up the required sum \ considers himself more or less entitled to demand contributions from all his well-to-do fellow-tribesmen, or if he belongs to one of the three allied kawöms from all the members of these three tribes. Thus the highland blood- debtor, to whom a period of one or two years is granted for paying oft the dict, goes on a journey "to collect subscriptions" (cho ripb). Such debtors often comc down into the lowlands and apply for con tributions to those of wliose connection with their tribe the recol-
| 0 In the highlands | also | vengeance | is more | under the | control | of the adat than | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| where iT'ï | t |r' ' | ^ " | ' > | ° with eertainty, | but | ||
| reven JJ | ' ' ^ | '« ^ | his | ||||
| ., | ' ° .7» | »>e | '«ember of | the family. | Vengeance | for blood | also |
| the deed | "anrp.e | bribed | or instigated | others | to |
2) The ordinary blood-money for causing death in Acheh is 500 Spanish (Mexican) dollars.
for blood 1 r re 1C gl iUy Ca n0t >C K>intcd ut >el,,nBS inJUred is cntitled t y ay,nk r nd co JU
5 7
lcction still survives. The lowlanders even say that their highland brethren are in the habit of making a profit from their murders by collecting several times the amount due from the fellowtribesmen whose existence they only remember on such occasions. rhe relation of the Imeum Peuët to the three united kawonis lias Rhymes c found expression in a popular doggerel of a somewhat partial descrip- vclaüons o ti°n. As appears from the conclusion, which is the same in every thctribes- version, the verses may be considered to have originated with the Imeum Peuct, as this clan is therein celebrated as the most powerful of all. But the other sukèës have, partly by giving a special explanation of wliat is said of them in this popular ditty and partly by giving a difïtercnt version, extracted the sting so that they are able to quote it in honour of themselves '). Sukèc Lhèë Reutöïh ban aneu drang Sukèc Ja Sandang jra haletiba. Sukèc Ja Ba tic na bachut-bachut; Sukèc Imeum Peuct nyang gö'-gö' detnya. If we translate the verses in the sense originally given them by the Imeum Peuët, the meaning is: "The tribe of the Three Hundred is (insignificant) as the seeds of the drang (a bush which grows like a weed along fences); the people of the clan Ja Sandang are even as anise and cummin (thus a little more valuable); those of the Ja Batèë (count) for something; the Imeum Peuct it is which makes the world to tremble." When a member of any of the three united tribes explains these verses, he prefers to ascribe the comparison of the Lhèë Reutoïh with *drang-*seeds to their numbers and the cummin and anise to the choice flavour of the Ja Sandang, who though not great in point of numbers
| I) Van | Langen has | quotcd this | doggerel | in his Atjehsch | Staatsbestuur | and in his | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Achehnese | Dictionary | under £ jO, | with sonie | different | readings | and not without | errors. |
| Every verse | of an Achehnese | poem | consists | of 4 lines | of 2 feet | each. The | pair in the |
| middle rhyme | with one | auother | (like drang | with Sandang | abovc, | and also | bachut with |
| peuët allowing | for the | customary | poetic license). | The | last syllable | of each | verse rhymes |
| with the | last syllable | of the next | ('halcuba | with ddnya). | It must | be understood | that the |
| necessities | of rhyme and | metre exercise | some | constraint | on the contents | of the | verses; the |
| sense is clear | enough, | but too much | stress not | be laid on | the exact | wording. |
58
yet as holders of important offices impregnate all Acheh vvitli their savour. Still more does he prefer to offer you another edition which clearly shows how the Imcittn Pcuct has through the united power of the other three clans been excluded from all high offices and has thus become subject to the latter so far as territorial supremacy is con- cerned. In this version the first verse runs as follows: Sukcc Lhec Reutoih ulecbalang. Sukèë Ja Satidang jcuct keuraja. I he clan of the 1 hree Hundred are uiïëbalangs, that of Ja Sandang may become rajas" '). Hefore taking leave of the lazvoms, the survivals of the Bedouin- period of the Achehnese people, we must notice one other important alteration introduced in their mutual relations by the territorial sub- division of Acheh which has gradually come into being. Although the members of a kawöm are and remain united for the purposes of ex- acting vengeance for blood, of protection against others who demand such vengeance or for the collection of the blood-money — in territorial or political contests the importance of the kazubms is entirely driven out of the field. We now find members of the Imcum Pcuct fightin»' side by side like brothers with those of the other clans, and vice versa, in two forces hostile to one another men can be found who belong to one and the same kawöm 2).
S 5- The Gampong, its Government and Adats.
TheGam-Next to the house and its enclosure, the smallest territorial unit is the Gampong (Malay kampang) or village, the external appearance of which we have to some extent described above. There are the court- yards, part of which are utilized as gardens, containing one or more
| exactly the | same meaning | as uiïibalang. | We shall | presently | see that the | uiïëbalangs | are as |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| a matter | of fact the | rajaS of Acheh. | |||||
| its force | to a great | extent in the | XXII Mukims | also. In the quarrels | and petty | wars of | |
| the highlands | in the | last century | the kawdms | have playcd | but a secondary | part. | It is a |
| suggestive hc belongs | fact that as regards is a matter | more of controversy.] | than one chief | in this district | the very kawöin to which |
1) 1 he word raja which is chosen for the sake of the rhyme and of variety has here
2) [An official enquiry recently made has elicited the fact that the tribal life has lost
houses separated from one another and from the gampong-paths (jurong) by fences; then the whole gampong surrounded by a fence of its own, and connected by a gate vvith the main road (rct or rut) which leads through fields and gardens (blang and lampoih) and tertiary jungle (tamah) to other similar gampöngs. Real forest (uteiicn) is less often to be found in the neighbourhood of gampöngs in the lowlands than in the Tunóng, and virgin jungle (rimba) in the Tunóng only. Accepting as accurate our hypothesis with regard to the kawöms, namely that tliey were originally separate in a territorial as well as a tiibal sense, we may then assume that in former times each gampong comprised a kawöm or a subdivision of one, which added to its num- bers only by marriages within its own enclosure, or at most with the women of neighbouring fellow-tribesmen. The former headmen of the gampöngs would in this case have been the panglimas of the kawöms. Later on, however, came the great step in the advance of political development, by which chiefs or princes (tilecbalangs) were made rulers over the inhabihants of a certain district, without distinction of kawöm or suki'i'. lo this was added the residence together in one and the same village of people of different kawöms, their intermixture by marriage etc. So soon as this had come to pass, the liead of the tribe had to give place to the head of the village, and depended for his authority as much 011 the will of the lord of the province as on the recognition of his fellow-villagers. Many usages and customary laws may have succeeded in surviving this reform, and that sucli was the case appears probable from the primitive nature of adats which are still observed. In one respect, however, a change must gradually have crept in; the chief of the village naturally found duty coincide with inclination in wresting for himself as much as possible of the authority of the panglima kawöm, and the ulèebalang whose deputy he was, was certain to letul him his full support in this. Much, in fact most of the old adat kawöm was thus transformed to adat gampong, and the enforcement of this adat became the task of the headman of the gampong. Only the blood-feuds, which according to Achehnese ideas are matters of a most private nature, yet cannot be confined to the circle of a single family, remained in the hands of the chiefs of the kawöms. Such is, briefly stated, the most probable history of the formation
GAMPÖNG-FOLK IN THE MARKET OF KUTARADJA.
6i
of the present Achehnese gampöng; though all that we can know with entire certainty is the final result, which we must now proceed to describe. Before approaching the method of administration we must add to our sketch of the village itself a word respecting the meunasah '). In the gampöng or in its immediate neighbourhood there is always The meu- to be found a building constructed in the same way as an ordinary dwelling-house, but without windows, passage or any kind of division. Close to the steps leading to this building is a water-tank either simply dug in the ground or built of masonry. A pipe or gutter of bamboo sloping downwards from the mouth of the nearest well opens into the tank, so as to make it easy to draw the water daily from the former. 1 hese meunasahs serve as the nightly resting-place of all the fitll- grown youths of the gampöng, and of all men who are temporarily residing there and have no wife in the gampöng. This category includes both strangers and those whose mother for example lives in the gampöng, and who are not for the moment desirous of visiting tlieir wives who reside elsewhere. 1* or all such it would be regarded as improper except in case of illness to lodge in a house. Scapegraces who carry 011 intrigues with the women are shortly called ureuëng tamong gam pöng i. e. "men who come into the gampöng", in which expression night-time is meant to be understood, and the gampöng is supposed to mean all the dwelling-houses as opposed to the meunasah. It may be concluded witli certainty that this institution is of great antiquity, much more so than the present name applied to the building itself, which is derived from the Arabic. We find indeed amongst neighbouring peoples heathen as well as Mohammedan the same noc- turnal separation, and a balè or some such building in which the young
| l) 1 his word | which | also appears | in the forms | beuttasah, meulasah | and beu ld sa h is derived | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| from the | Arabic madrasah, | meaning | a teaching | institute; | it has also | other secondary | |
| significations. | The statement | made | by Van Langen | in his | Atjehsch Staatsbestuur | p. 391, | |
| that the teungku | (who | is in charge | of the meunasah) | is a kind | of subordinate | village hcad- | |
| man, is erroneous. | It | sometimes | occurs indeed, | that 011e gampöng | has | more than | one |
| meunasah | (in rare cases | as many | as four), | but in every | case the relation | between | the |
| teungku and | the keuchi | within | the sphere | of each meunasah | is indicated | by the compa- | |
| rison the | keuchi is | the father, | the teungku | the mother', | and each has his own limit | of | |
| action and | his own | appointed duties. | Where | the number | of meunasahs | in a gampöng | is |
| too great | for the keuchi's | control, | he is represented | by wakis | in one or more meunasahs. | ||
| Where a single | keuchi | is placed | in charge of more | than one | gampöng, | as often happened | |
| in former | times, such | representation | is the rule. |
tt
men sleep and in which meetings are occasionally held for the discus sion of matters of public interest '). When Islam established itself as the rule of life in Acheh, this resting-place for men became also a house of prayer or chapel for the gampong, such as are to be found in Java under the appellations ar> boh ) or tajug. There are however few gampöngs in which rehgious zeal is strong enough to cause the assemblage of a consider- able number in the meunasah for the five obligatory daily prayers. AH are at work or employed in their own affairs, and whoever wishes to perform the appointed prayers (seumayang) does so at home or wherever he may chance to be at the time. The most that is done at the meunasah is to beat at sunset the great drum (fambu) made of a hollowed tree-trunk witli buffalo-leather stretched over one end. This is beaten to announce the time for the mugréb prayer which in all Mohammedan countries is more strictly observed than the other four and^ is ^enerally begun punctually at sunset, its appointed time. The da> s woik is then as a rule finished and the young men assemble at that hour in the meunasah in any case, albeit not for the purpose of performing the seumayang. lf the heads of the village are not particularly zealous and devout, the young m sh.ime or thiough fear of some religious teacher, it not unfrequently happens that few or none of thosc present perform the seumayang. It is only in the fasting month that prayers are ofifered up with regularity, at least in the evenings; but as we shall see in a later chapter the proceedings at these are of such a nature that really pious people avoid the neighbourhood of the meunasah as much as possible. In some gampöngs, however, the meunasah responds better to the rehgious purposes for which it is intended. Not only are the obligatory uligious exercises held there by a congregation of men under the leadership of a teungku, but tliey sometimes also while away the ^evenings or nights with non-obligatory acts of devotion. Prominent
| M^ays call | it, is to be | found in some | Malay kampongs | but | by no | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Ïtans in a | , it is however | devoted | entirely to religious | uses | and is not, like | the Achehnese | |
| meunasah, | a sort of «club» | or common | lodging-house | as well | as a «chapel". | The balei | or |
| pub 'c meeting origin to that | house .s also of the meunasah. | a common | feature | of the Malay | kampong. (Translater). |
1) Among the Malays. of the Peninsula such nocturnal separation is practieally unknown.
2) In Bantcn the villagc chapel is callcd fiale desa, which seems to to a similar
the
point
among these is the simultaneous intoning of the terribly noisy ratéb saman (Ar. ratib Samman, from the saint of that name who lived at Medina a couple of centuries ago). This litany is also popular in Java and may be heard almost every week in many Batavian kampongs. The young people, however, delight more in the chanting of other ratébs which have in common with the religious litanies only the name and the noise, such as the ratéb pulèt and the ratéb sadati, which wc shall notice under the heading of games and recreations. Thus there are always to be found among the furniture of the meunasah, in addi- tion to the tambu aforesaid, certain objects required for these ratébs, such as the kettledrums called rapai or rapana, the wooden rings knovvn as pulèt etc. With these exceptions the furniture of the meunasah is butscanty; a large lamp (kandé) only lighted on the nights of the fasting month, it being left at other times to those who use the meunasah to bring their own lamps if tliey require them; sleeping-mats which eacli lays down for himself, and an occasional mosquito-curtain (kleumbn) form its entire equipment. Where the heads of the village *are not both pious and watchful, the meunasah it apt to become the sccne of all marmer of Achehnese ini- cjuities. In its courtyard fights of cocks and other fighting birds are held, while within the building gambling goes on and paederasty is shamelessly practised at night. Besides being a sleeping-place for the men, a rest-house for strangers and a house of prayer or chapel, the meunasah also serves as a place of assemblage on various special occasions. The affairs of the gampöng are there debated, village festivals held, contracts of marriage concluded etc. A person of rank who comes from elsewhere to pay an unexpected visit to the people of the gampöng, usually goes in the first place to the meunasah, and from thence sends someone to announce his arrival. Some gampöng-chapels are built not on posts but 011 a raised stone Déahs. foundation finished on the top with cement. A stone stairs gives access to the building which is itself generally of wood, with a masonry niche [mèhrab or mèrab) to indicate the direction of Mecca. lts courtyard is sometimes surrounded by a low stone wall forming a square. Such more imposing structures are called déah '), and fulfil the same purposes
1) This word, which is also pronounced deah and dt\' ah, is derivcd from the Arab.
zawiyah.
as the meunasah. 1 here are also howevcr certain teachers of notc who for their own use and that of their pupils construct a meunasah or dêah in their own courtyard. Similar chapels may also bc found near sacred graves, but the purpose of such buildings is obviously different from that of the meunasah or dêah of the gampöng. The Friday services are never held in these chapels any more tlian in the langgar in Java. In the neighbourhood of the meunasah or dé ah there often stands a ba/è i. e. a raised covered platform, which serves as auxiliary to the former. 1 headminis-i>0t us novv consider the administration of the gampöne. This is tration of the o r t» gampöng. composed of three elements:
I. The keuchhï with one or more wakis at his disposal. II. The teungku.
III. The ureuëng tuha. All three are worthy of closer remark. Ihe keuchi I. l he keuchi '), the headman or father of the gampöng, borrows his authority from the ulèëbalang of the province to which his village belongs. I his office, like almost all others in Acheh, has become hereditary, and even an infant son (under the guardianship of a male relation) often succeeds his father therein; but every keuchi' is aware that the first of his forefathers who held the post was appointed by the ulèëbalang and that the latter can at any moment deprive him of it. VVhere the appointment of keuchi's is, as occasionally happens, in the hands of the imeum of their district, this simply testifies to the great personal influence of such imeum, to whom the ulèëbalang lias delegated a portion of his own authority. 1 he fact that the keuchi' can as a rule exercise his authority without opposition is however due not so much to the support he enjoys at the hands of his chief, as to his being always the representative of the interests and as far as possible the wishes of the whole gampöng against the ulèëbalang himself as well as against other gampöngs, or against the exaggérated demands of some of his own subjects. It is no empty saying which the'Achehnese quote to one another in their councils —
| i) This | word, which | is in its other | uses generally | abbreviated | into | chhi\ signifies | "old". |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Ureuëng | chhï is the exact | equivalent | of "elders". | Teungku | or Teuku Chhi' | with | the name |
| of the district | added | is a very common | title of chiefs | in the dependencies | of Acheh. |
keuchi' eumbah, teungku ma = "the keuchi' is (our) father and the teungku (our) mother". All peace-loving inhabitants of a gampöng are convinced of the necessity for having one person to speak or negotiate in the name of all; the more so because as we shall presently see, sundry family matters such as marriage, divorce, the bringing up of orphans or changes of residence are treated in Acheh as matters affecting the whole gampöng. Equally convinced are all, that this representative of their common interest should be someone who finds favour in the syes of the ulèëbalang. At the same time he is not likely to become too willing a tooi in the latter's hands, for he too is an inhabitant of the gampöng. His office is essentially an honorary one. It is no doubt much sought after, but is only desirable when the holder can hit it :>fil well with his own people. The devolution from father to son is also regarded as natural and ight, not only because other dignities are hereditary, but also because here is in the nature of things storcd up in an ancient family of ceuchi s a collection of traditional knowledge with regard to the laws ind usages of the country that might in vain bc sought for amone >thers. The best of keuchi's would fail to compel his people to obey un- easonable commands. Vain would be his interference with all trifling natters not classified in accordance with the adat as "interest of the [ampöng". This he knows too well to run the risk of burning his fin- ;ers. But when the keuchi' emphatically lays down that one of his ïllow-villagers shall not sell his rice-field to A or marry lus daughter o B, or himself not wed in gampöng X, or must yield to his neigh- '°ur somc disputed right, so little suspicion is entertained of the 'urity of his mtentions, that disobedience to his word is rendered ractically impossible by the agreement of the majority. Acheh is certainly to an exceptional degree a land of polyarchy nd misrule; in vain do we seek for discipline, whilst we meet with quarrelsome and capricious spirit at every step. Taking this into ccount, and disregarding tliose few individuals of unusual strength of ïll and capacity to lead whom one meets with as exceptions in every ink, we can safely assert that the authority of the keuchi' rests on a rmer basis than that of any other chief. Most keuchi's exercise control over a single gampöng only; tbere 5
are, however, somc who have from two to four gampongs in their charge. We have already noticed and shall presently deal with in greater detail the Achehnese adat according to which the husband takes up his abode with the family of his wife. In connection with this custom it will be understood that it is par- ticularly desirable for a future keuchi' to marry in his own gampöng as otherwise his place of abode as a married man would lie within the sphere of another keuchi', and he would appear in his own territory as a stranger and be obliged to lodge in the meunasah. Ihere are however exceptions to the rule that the husband follows the wife, and to these belong such cases as that of a keuchi' who finds himself constrained by circumstances to rr.arry a woman from a difterent villagc. With the approval of the family or rather of the authorities of the gampöng of the woman, the latter may then accom- pany her husband to the scene of his official labours. Sources of We have called the office of a village headman an honorary one,
incomeofthe 1:11.1 c • ....
keuchi'. indeed the sources of income to which he may lay claim according to the adat are scarcely worth mentioning. They are in fact confined to what is called the ha katib or ha chupéng, the fees for his indis- pensable help in the arrangement of the marriage of a woman of his gampöng. Even though everyone adds what his means allow to the amount, absurdly small for these timcs, of J of a dollar (samath — one mas) allowed by the adat, the total income derivable from tliis source remains extremely small. As the keuchi' lias no real judicial power, the only profit he can obtain from the fines and costs of process which the administration of justice brings in to the ulèëbalang takes the form of a present for his trouble in bringing the parties from his gampöng and collecting the requisite evidence for the questions at issue. The same holds good of the percentages levied by the ulèëbalang on the division of heritages and other similar sources of income. lliere are however other methods — part permitted, part under- hand, by which the keuchi can derive some slight profit from an office as burdensome as it is honourable. It is no part of his duty to augment the number of lawsuits between the people of his gampöng; on the contrary lie must try, like a good father, to bring every difterence to an amicable settlement. Suppose now that a case presents itself in regard to which he can say with certainty that if biought before the ulèëbalang it would involve payment of a
67
considerable fine by the party found to be in the wrong; or suppose again that his mediation is called in for the collection of a debt, and he can prove by examples that the ulèëbalang would not assist the creditor to recover his due without a deduction of one-third or one- half of the amount. Is it to be wondered at that the father of the gampöng impresses emphatically upon his children the advantage of submitting themselves to his decision, and the fairness of giving him for his trouble a small share of what tliey would otherwise undoubtedly lose ? An estecmed and intelligent keuchi' is able to give to these arbi- trative decisions (for which he is endowed with full powers) a very wide range, to his own great advantage and yet not to the detriment of the suitors, who know only too well that the judgments tliey would obtain by resorting to chiefs who have less sympathy in their interests, would be more costly but no whit better than those of the keuchi'. Other services which the keuchi' renders to his dependants are performed by him with greater or less readiness and zeal in proportion to the amount of the presents ') which "cement friendship"2). The father on his part can always make such claims on the good-nature of his "childreif" as are recognized as lawful. At all gampöng-festivals — and these include the most important family feasts as well the place of honour is allotted to the keuchi'. He has thus no lack of meals for which he has nothing to pay, and in Acheh such trifles form a serious part of the emoluments of office. Thus we may say upon the whole that the office of the Achehnese keuchi', the " father of the community", is held in high esteem chiefly on account of the honour, but also because of the more solid advant- ages connected with it. As subordinates, who are more properly at the keuchi's disposition than the people of the gampöng in general, he has his wakis •1), liter- al 1 y attorneys or deputies.
ensure
| balang are called | ngon bloc ranub | i. e. (money) | to buy-betel-leaf. | Fees to persons of | humbler | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| rank are called beverage of the | ngon bloc ié teubec = "(money) Achehnese. | to buy sugar-cane | juice" the | usual harmiess | ||
| friendship". cadeaux entretiennent general sense. | It is not a genuine 1'amitié". | Dutch ( Trans/ator). | proverb but | is adopted | from the French | "les petits |
1) Presents made to a keuchi' to the proper presentation of a suit to the ulèë
2) 1 he Dutch provcrb is kleine geschenken onderhouden de vriendschap "little presents cement
3) From the Arab. wakil = attorney or agent. Waki is used in Achehnese in the same
Every keuchi' has at least one such subordinate, and where he exercises control over more than one gampöng, one for each gampöng. 1 he position taken by the vvakis greatly depends on their personal characteristics. Some are not much more than the messengers of their keuchi's, while others actually take the place of the father of the community in many cases, or even govern him to some extent through their greater strength of character.The profits enjoyed by them may be described as the gleanings of those which the keuchi' reaps from his office. In the dialects of the highlands (XXII Mukims) and of the VII Mukims Buëng '), which as wc have seen have so much in common with the Tunóng, the father of the community is called waki and his subordinate keuchi, or geuc/ü' as it is there pronounced. Authority of It is the duty of the keuchi', assisted by the other authorities of the the keuchi'. _, gampöng whom he can always summon to his aid, to maintain to the best of his ability the good order and safety, and also the material prosperity of his domain. Of this prosperity abundance of population is regarded as an important factor; and thus a closc supervision 011 the part of the "father" over the comings and goings of his "children", so far as these might tend to dispersal of the united body, is considered as amply justified. The keuchi' cannot without difficulty prevent a full-grown man from straying avvay as a pepper-planter to the Kast or West Coast or else- where, hovvever much he may deplore the gap caused by his absence. But the wanderer must leave his wife at home; the adat vvill not perniit her to accompany her husband except in performing the pil- grimage to Mecca or in the rare cases where the wife, after due deliberation of the two gampöngs concerned, leaves her ovvn house and gampöng for that of her husband. Change of residence of a family to another gampöng does not takc place without the consent of the keuchi', which is equally required for a strange household to establish themselves for the first time in his gampöng. No marriage can be concluded without the consent of the keuchi'. Only where the population is superabundant and the supply of marria- geable girls and women without husbands by no means excessive, will
| exactly | four wakis | or fathers of communities, | each of whom with | his gampöng is responsible | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| for one-fourth | <>f the | common interests | of the | district, such | as repair | of mosques | etc. |
1) In Buëng we find a further peculiarity. Under each imeum of a mukim there are
GROUP OF PEOPLE FROM THE MUKIM OF LUÈNG BATA.
he agree offhand to a man of his gampong marrying outside it. uThere are plenty of womcn here", he objects, "why should you go and scatter your seed elsewhere?" This hampering of the freedom of marriage, which is based alone on the adat and is positively in conflict with the hu kom or religious law, has at present much greater practical significance than the adat-theory forbidding intermarriage between certain kawöms, which we noticed some time back. The keuchi will rarcly raise objections to the marriage of girls of his gampong to men from elsewhere; the increase of population due to such unions is half of it pure gain. As we see, the Achehnese are far from being afraid of over-population. The gampong as a whole takes all the more trouble to keep its com ponent parts together and ensure increase of numbers, because the individuals aie often too little disposed to contribute their share. The Achehnese themselves assert that married couples with a number of children are very much in the minority; by their own confession they make much use both in and out of wedlock of expedients for preventing pregnancy or causing miscarriage '). ie teungku. II- 1 he teungku, says the proverb, is the mother of the gampong. Teungku is the title given in general to all in Great-Acheh who either hold an office in connection with religion or distinguish them selves fiom the common herd by superior knowledge or more striet observance of religious law. In Pidie and on the Kast Coast the holders of worldly offices or worldly distinctions also enjoy the title of teungku, but such persons are in Great-Acheh distinguished by that of teuku. The keuchi₁, the panglima, the uneum and the ulecbalang are all called by the latter title, and so also are wealthy people, elders and even persons without any real claim to distinction, by those who regard them as their superiors or wish to flatter them. In the case of ulèe- balangs or distinguished imeums the word ampon is affixed 2) both in the
| Achehnese. | These recipes | sometimes | consist | merely in tangkays | (formulas) | to be recited | on |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| certain occasions, | but | more material | methods | are also recommended | in great | variety. | The |
| following | is one of | the commonest: | choose | a ripe pineapple, | and cut | ofT a piece | from |
| the top, | letting the | fruit still | remain attached | to the stalk. | Then take out a little | of the | |
| inside and fill | up the space | so made | with yeast. | Close the | fruit up again | by replacing | the |
| piece cut | off; fasten | it up tight | and let it hang | for another | day or two. The | fruit | is then |
| plucked and | it is said | that the | woman who eats | it will find it a sure preventive of pregnancy. | |||
| has beaten me"; | and in the and person: | Teuku | ampon be' mar ah = "1 | pray thee be not angry". |
1) Recipes for this purpose are to be found in all the books of memoranda of literate
2) l or example : Teuku amfön ka geupoh Ion = "Teuku
ampön (the ulèëbalang for instance)
7'
secontl ) and third persons. Both the words teungku and teuku appear to be originally contractions of tuanku (my lord) which in its full form, with or without the addition of ampon (always with it in the presence of the person meant) is only applied to the descendants of sultans. 1 he title of teungku 2) is applied both to the leubè 3) who, even though he be 110 scholar, observes his religious obligations faithfully, the haji who has performed the pilgrimage to Mekka, the malém₄) who has some knowledge of the kitabs or holy books, the alêm₅) who has brought his studies to perfection, the u/ama 5), who is looked upon as an authority on the subject of religious law and doctrine, and the sayyid (sayét) or descendant of Mohammed. It is also applied to both men and women who give elementary instruction (even if it be only in reciting the Quran) and to the kalis who act as ecclesiastical judges in an ulèëbalangship, as well as to the male " mother of the gampong" with whom we are now concerned. 1 his last teungku, when it is necessary to distinguish him from all the others who enjoy the same title, is called the teungku mennasah, using the latter word not so much in the sense of the mens' lodging as that of the chapel of the gampong. From this it may be seen that this office is connected with religion. Just as the keuchi devotes himself more especially to maintaining the adat, though the promotion of godly living among his people is also regarded as a part of his duty, so is the upholding of the huköm (religious law) the special province of the teungku, though a knowledge of and regard for the customary laws is in his case also regarded as indispensable.
| pelago, to employ | titles | for the 2ncl per.son. We | tan say: ban huköm | Teuku | or ban huköm | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Teuku amfön | = "as Teuku | or Teuku | ampön wills"; | but it is equally | commonly | expressed | |
| by ban huköm | dr'ocneu = "by | your | will". In assenting | politely | or submissively | to what | |
| some one | has said, the title | is simply | uscd by itself | teungku! | or teuku! or teuku | ampön! | |
| etc. = exactly | so!" | ||||||
| Among | the Malays | the word tungku | is only | applied to those | of royal | blood. Sultans | |
| are addressed | both thus | and as | which | is more honorific. | The | 2nd personal | |
| pronoun is | never used | in addressing | persons of | distinction; | and ampun | (= pardon) | is |
| never used | as an aflix | to tungku, | it is sometimes | prefixed | to it as a humble | form | |
| of address. | The form teuku | has no equivalent | in Malay. | (Transistor). | |||
| From | the Arab. | W/>«, learned | man or pandit. | The plural | u/ama | is also used | as |
| iingular with Archipelago. | a slight | change of | in Achehnese | and | other languages | of the | E. |
1) In Achehnese it is less common than in many other native languages of the Archi-
3) Leubè thus means the same as the Sundanese li'be and the Javancse santri.
4) Krom the Arab. mu allim = teacher, master.
u
2)
tuanku,
though
5) c
meaning
7 2
Huköm and «Hukom and adat are inseparable, even as God's essence and his attributes' '), says the Achehnese proverb. To make the sense com plete we may well add, "but the greatest of these is adat". This may indeed be seen from the attitude of the representaties of these two inseparable clements. In most cases, it is true, vvhere a matter affecting the interests of the gampöng or its inhabitants has to be decided, father keuchi and mother teungku botli appear on the stage, but the teungku has as a rule little to say, and appears to be present rather honoris causa except in matters relating to marriage. We shall see presently that the relation between the ulèëbalang and his kali exhibits many points of resemblance to the above, but is if possible still less favourable to the huköm. As teungku meunasah it would naturally be the duty of the "mother" of the gampöng to see that this building answered to some extent the religious objects for which it is intended. Such however is very rarely the case, and in these exceptional instances it is more due to the piety of the keuchï than to the faithful fulfilment of his duty by the teungku. Not every teungku is able (and few indeed have even the inclination) to appear in the meunasah and lead the service, at the times appointcd for the five daily prayers; it is much if he does so faiily regularly at sunset (see p. 62 above). As regards the furniture of the meunasah he need take little trouble, since as we have seen it is exceedingly sparse and most of it is private property. 1 he task of sweeping the floor and keeping the kulam (water tank) full devolves 011 the younger occupants of the meunasah. This kulam is used for washing the feet or for ritual ablutions by all who enter the building and for bathing by the young men. Should the latter prove neglectful in the fulfilment of their duties they are remin- ded of them by their seniors. It is only in the fasting month (Puasa) that the teungku is notice- ably the man of the meunasah. When we come to review the calendar of feasts we shall see that during the nights of this month there is a great deal of vitality in the meunasah and that the presence of the teungku is indispensable for various matters, but especially for the performance
| ngon adat | logee mata | itam ngbn | mata futéh; | huköm | hukömölah | adat adatölah. | i. e. "Huköm | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| and adat the adat | are like Allah's adat." | the pupil | and the white | of the eye; | the huköm | is Allah's | huköm | and |
1) Huköm ttg'on adat Aan jeuët chré, lageé dat ngbn sipheuet. Another version is huköm
71
of the trawèh service (see Chapter II § 2). The popular idea of the Achehnese is that the pitrah which the teungku receives from all at the end of the fasting month is a sort of payment for this trawèh! If the teungku is more or less malêm (skilied in booklore), this will tend greatly to increase his revenues, as he will then be called in to give his help in all kinds of sickness or other misfortune, and receive payment for his ministrations. Sick children will be brought to him that he may blow on thcir heads after muttering a tangkay (prayer or formula to lay evil spirits), or else he will be requested to charm some water. On sucli occasions no great demands are made upon the skill of the exorcist; women are often heard to say to those who refuse to render such a service 011 the ground of absolute want of skill, "oh, do just blow a little!" 1 he teungku is also occasionally the recipient of votive gifts, either some flowers from the market, such as the Achehnese delight in attach- ing to their head-gear, or dishes with good things of various sorts. When a gift of this sort has been vowed to the Prophet, to the saint Mirah Sab or Meurasab (who lies buried at Nagore in British India) or even to Teungku Anjöng, whose tomb is in Gampöng Jawa, the vow may be fulfilled by handing over the thing promised to a teungku for his own use. All that the latter need do is to recite over the gift the first chapter of the Quran (the fatihah), and dedicate the celestial recom- pense for that recitation to him to whom the vow was made. Beyond these special sources of income (which in cases of total in- competence are withheld from the teungku and fall to the share of some leubè or malém) he has no lack of other more or less obligatory presents in kind. For instance, not only is it adat to invite the teungku to every kanduri or religious feast, but thcre are many kinds of kan- duris which cannot be held without his presence, even such as do not require the attendancc of the keuchi'. Where the teungku gives religious instruction this again brings him in no inconsiderable profit; though hcre of course some grasp of his subject is indispensable. The most certain sources of the income of the teungku are: i°. The pitrah, paid by almost every householder for himself and Sources of his faniily at the conclusion of the fast. It consists of two arcs 0fincomeof th teungku. husked rice for every person so taxable, which includes almost the whole community. This tax is, however, sometimes commuted for a
74
| money | payment | in the | following | marnier. The | teungku | sells his own | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| nee to | lus debtor, | who then | hands back | the quantity | due as pitrah, tlius | ||
| paying | the tax according | to law "in the staple | grain of the country". | ||||
| 2". | The jakeuct | is not so regularly | paid as the | pitrah, | |||
| many | contnbuting | a portion | only | and some | none at | all. We speak | |
| only of the | rice-zakat | (jakeuct | of the | ||||
| har\ est. who pay it on gold, silver or merchandise | of cattle | is seldom | or never do so entirely | contributed, | and of their own | those | |
| accord | and are equally | free in the | manner of its distribution. | In many | |||
| districts | the teungku | himself | goes | to the fields | where | the | erop is |
| standing | to remind | the owners | of their obligations. | The | latter then set | ||
| apart | the smallest | sheaves | and give a portion of these to the | teungku, | |||
| keeping | the rest who are | for the wandering wont | to come | poor strangers, and beg | hajis and dole. | converts We | shall |
| again | allude to this custom | in dealing | with the subject | of agriculture. | |||
| In some | provinces | a considerable | portion of the | and | |||
| falls into | the hands | of the | ulèebalang | while | the teungku | only gets | |
| the share | elsewhere | allotted | to the | "poor and | necessitous" | ||
| 3". | Money presents | for the arrangement | of marriages. | The fee fixed | |||
| for this | purpose / of a dollar | by the | theoretical for the keuchi; but as a matter | adat is merely | the | of fact the | |
| keuchi | gets more | and the | teungku | hardly | less | than a | dollar. |
| I' urther 4- Ihe ha | mention | of this will be found | under the | heading to the theoretical adat | of marriage. | ||
| this amounts | to | '/ of a dollar | for each | interment | but in practice | it is | |
| generally | a dollar | or more. cloth wherewith | The teungku the | is also body is dried | presented after | with the the ablution, | |
| and a certain | sum for tahlils '). Ilis | help is also required | for the cere | ||||
| monies | which take | place during | the first | 40 days | after the death, | and | |
| for tlus | he receives a further | remuneration. | All this will be described | ||||
| in greater | detail | when we come | to treat | of funeral ceremonies. | |||
| 5". Various | gleanings | from the fees of the keuchi' when | the teungku | ||||
| accompanies ment of profitable | the | latter on suits. | his visits | to the ulèebalang | for the settic- | ||
| the theie deceased. is no | God but God." | The merit | of this act | of piety is supposed to | be communicated to |
1) Continuous repetitions of the Mohammedan confession of faith "la ilaha illa'llah" =
(;zakat). This pailé), which consists of one-tenth Jakeuct
(mualah) for this jakeuct pitrah (pakt and meuseukin). ha' kaüb or chupen^ of 4 ever teuleukm or burial fee. According 4 ija peukréng or
There are no doubt some teungkus of capacity, but on the whole their ignorance is proverbial. Thus in the common speech of the Acheh- nese, when a teungku is specially referred to as teungku meunasah (in contradistinction to leubcs, maléms, etc.) there is generally a covert allusion to his lack of learning. This is not to be wondered at, as the office in most cases devolves on the son or nearest male heir oi a deceased holder of the post. A child is, however, seldom or never made teungku, and the ulèebalang more often diverges from the rule of devolution in the appointment of a teungku than in that of a keuchi'. Still hereditary succession remains the rule. It may be well imagined how much more scandalous are the results of adhering to this principle in the case of an office for the proper discharge of the duties of which some study of Mohammedan law is indispensable, than in that of appointments connected with adat, for which a practical knowledge of the world is more requisite than scholarly lore. A keuchi' of scant experience is merely a less useful man than others of his class, and finds in his gampöng plenty of people who can supply the gap by advice and practical help; but an unlettered teungku is absolutely useless. Many teungkus then simply hand over the discharge of all their functions to some better instructed fellow-villager. At the same time they make no abdication of their office, and none dares to perform their duties without their express authority or invitation. 1 hey take delivery of the profits themselves, giving some small recompense for their trouble to the leubès or maléms who act for them. The sphere within which the teungku exercises his functions is usually a single gampöng, or if the gampöng lias more than one meunasah, a single meunasah. III. The ureui'ng tuha, which is the exact equivalent of our word The elders, "elders". They are the men of experience, worldly wisdom, good man- ners and knowledge of adat in the gampöng. They are generally per sons who have reached a certain time of life, but if a younger man is distinguished by the above characteristics, he is equally eligible as an ureuëng tuhaand is reckoned as one of the body of elders, which lends an indispensable support to the keuchi' and teungku.
w 1 tt
| i) Uretténg | tuha properly | means old | people". | Like keuchi | which also means | old'\ |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| it conveys | in this connection | no idea | of the actual | age of the | persons spoken | of. [The |
| Malays u*:e oratig | tua in exactly | the same | way.] (Translator.) |
76
The number of the members of this body is uncertain; thcy are neither appointed nor regularly chosen but so to speak silently acknow- ledged by common assent. When the teungku and keuchi' meet to discuss important gampöng affairs (including most family matters), the e ers are also to be found whether summoned or not. No unauthorized person vcntures to take part in these debates, as by doing so he would exposé himself to ridicule; but when calls have once or twice been made on the tact, experience and knowledge of adat of any individual,. e °ccomes known as an ureuéng tuha and his voice has its weight in all future deliberations. The Achehnese are great lovers of mupakat '), in form at least if not in actuahty. The most insignificant subjects give rise to diffuse ex- c lange of opin.ons. The more important chiefs are loth to deal with questions affecting their districts and their dependants except in the presence of some persons who as it vvere represent the latter; did they nc-Lct to-dehberate" with these delegates they would quickly lose ie.r influence. Habib Abdurrahman once told me that the mupakat forms the strongest factor in the statescraft of an administrator ') among the Achehnese; such deliberative gatherings are the instrument by w nel, he ensures the carrying out of many a scheme. By this device his weaker opponent* are terrorized, while the stronger are flattered, and finally many are won over and even persuaded tliat they tliem- selves were the originators of the proposed plan. I' thu. follows a., a mattcr of course that in thc gan]p0iigj that grïat lousohold of father keuchi' and mother teungku, the eldcst sons at
| I) From | the Arab. | muuT.faka,, | which word | thc Achehnese | have naturally | mistaken | for |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| a verbal form | derivcd | from a root | fakat to which | they give | the meaning | of "plan | deliS- |
| ZZ :, | " ° | <=q»ivalent of the | Malay tlr. Thus | from | |||
| Pat-place | we have sa | „ = " | one and the | samc place" | and meusafat | = «to come | to |
| cm | the same place, | to assemble | together.» | In the | abortive ordinance | of Mr. Der | |
| Kinderen | (p par 'Mr" D K | etc.) he has ' | made this ° " "' | latter word ' " | a substantive | and has at the o'whoseexistence | |
| n Acheh | Mr. Der Kmderen | assures | us) bear | the name of | Musapat". | These «musapats" | |
| in^ Acheh | f' '"h | , ° / • t | government | has become established | |||
| Acheh, | justice has been | m fact administered | by native tribunals | under | the guidance | of | |
| ^uropean | ofhc.als, and | these courts | have been called | by the name | manufactured | by Mr. Der | |
| thlïr tnen fun functions 't | f from the creattons " | " of Mr. Der | e y Kinderen], | ^e manner | of their constitution | and | |
| Abdurih | i!-°, | J | ° Arab | of distinction | such as Sayyid | ||
| U | Sdf | Düt | Verl r<1 | * |
D ( r bCfüre labials) iS aImOSt the P t ln
2 2
r il 7 VOW£ in, U UTheS£ ( hC atiVe tl!bunaIs
realm f ancy Si,lce the
n mUSapaU differ reat, both in
mmean f fCÜUrSe an Achchnesc ra a r an iemp ::, pXer ' ° ° ^ ^ ™
77
any rate, and such of the citizens as may be regardcd as brothers of the two parents, have a voice in every discussion. In the orations which the Achehnese addresses either directly or by proxy to the authorities of his gampöng, the prelude alvvays runs thus Aozv, oh Teuku Keuchi, Teungku and ye who are elders of tliis gam pöng. To these are also addressed the notices employed on some few occasions to announce certain events (such as a divorce for instance) to the whole gampöng. These tliree components of the governing body of the gampöng are deputed to make proposals of marriagc, it is they that receive the bridegroom in the name of the gampöng and help to decide questions as to the bringing up of orphans, and in their presence all important bargains are concluded. Among them also are to be found the speech-makers of the gampöng. We shall meet later on some specimens of Achehnese speeches for particular occasions, which though tedious are sometimes not ungrace- ful» anc' arc very full of interest from an ethnological point of view as a storehouse of old formulas. They are almost invariable in form although there is 110 lack of local differences and individual embellishments. I he keuchi' or whoever may be acting as president of the assembly does not always know these long formal orations by heart, and it is thought quite the correct thing for a cliief to transfer the task of speech-making to another by a nod. In such cases the speaker is usually one of the ureuëng tit/ia. We have seen that the keuchi' and his colleagues take the position The adat of arbitrators in the widest sense of the word, but possess 110 judici.il mcu'ansga- authority properly so called. 1 here are, however, individual cases which are controlled by an adat of native growth, which has clearly lost much of its original severity, called the adat meulangga. In these cases the keuchi's appear in form as the representatives of the two parties, but as a matter of fact as settlers of the dispute. Occasion for the application of the adat meulangga is generally given by an actual injury or slight. For example, someone in gampöng A has without just cause maltreated or injured a child or rclative of someone in gampöng B, or has laid hands 011 something belonging to the latter in a manner clearly indicative of contempt for the owner. Independently of all rights of blood-vengeance or blood-money (which according to huköm and adat are the natural consequences of the deed, and are entirely unafïfected by the adat meulangga) something must at
once De none to vvipe out tlie insult, io this end the injured party calls upon the authorities of his gampöng, and the latter summon all who are able to bear arms to help their brother. The party vvho lias given the offencc knows that hc has this to expect, either from hearing the rumour of the preparations or because it is an obvious consequence that the ofïfended one should not let the matter pass without meidangga. Here too the authorities of the gampöng are notifïed and prepare for resistance. In due time the men of the ofïfended gampöng appear in the vicinity of the other, and the keuchi' of the latter goes forth to meet the uninvited guests and after greeting them respectfully (seumbah) asks what they require. "We have come" they reply, "to uproot by force the trees and courtyard-fence of your fellow-villager X, by reason of the injury he has done to one of our people". Thereupon the other keuchi says that he feels bound to acknowledge the fairness of the complaint, but that this just demand can be satisfied without having recourse to deeds of violence. 1 he father of the oftending community then brings to the other one or two plantain-stems from the courtyard and a glundöng-tree from the fence of the guilty party, saying "Ht*re is what you ask for". Sometimes, where the injury is a very serious one, he grants them permission to enter upon the courtyard of the offenders and cut down a certain numbcr of trees. Should the atone- ment offered by the keuchi not suffice for the satisfaction of honour according to the adat controlling quarrels, long-continued hostilities between two neighbouring gampöngs may supervene; but for the most part the mediation efifccted under the auspices of the two keuchi's is found sufficiënt. The day after this symbolical satisfaction the parties meet again to consult as to the guarantees for the establishment of peace. An idang of yellow gelatinous rice (bu kunyèt) and a piece of white cloth must without fail be offered by the oflfender for "cooling of the blood of others" (pcusijtie dar ah gbb) which he has shed, as the saying is. To this is often added a money present of some considerable amount. This method of. settling a quarrel is never applied to real cases of theft, adultery or homicide, or even of bodily hurt of a serious do scription. I he wounds inflicted must be healed before recourse is had to meulangga. If the injured party is a person of position or a member of the
muiuy ui bucu a one, or nis ionower, -li. tlien J i something lurthcr must b< done, as the injury is regarded as more serious in proportion to tlu high standing of him who is the subject of it. The ulèëbalang himsel when one of his folk is the injured party enters the lists not as chic or judge but as avenger. Either in person or by one of his next ofkii as deputy, he goes forth at the head of a host of followers to th< gampöng of the offenders, vvhere he is received with special tokens o humility and prayers for pardon. In addition to the traditional plantain-stalks and glundöng-trees whicl represent the destruction of the plantation of the guilty party, tin latter's house must in this case be symbolically burnt. Accordingly; hut (jambö) is constructcd of sliglit materials and set 011 fire amid th< plaudits (sura') of the avengers. Though all are aware that this burnim is the veriest farce, great insistence is laid upon its performance ii serious cases. The dependants of the chief can afterwards proudly saj to the people of the surrounding gampöngs: "Saw ye not the smok< rise from the burning of the house of X? Yes, we are no Niasese slave: or Klings to let ourselves be injured without exacting vengeance, o: to content ourselves with a mere indemnity!" Destruction of house and courtyard, probably accompanied by bodil) hurt or even death to the owner ') was the original meulangga as the word itself (cf. the Malay langgar) implies. More peaceful times and calnier manners have substituted for thi: the dramatic exhibition we have just described, a sort of gampöng duel, usually of quite a harmiess character. Meulangga may take place vvithin the gampöng also, when anyont has injured his fellow-villager. It is then the male relatives of the in jured party that proceed to make the demand, and those of the offen der who satisfy it, wliile the gampöng authorities merely take care tlia no excess is committed. In conclusion, it sometimes happens that one ulèëbalang has tc meulangga upon the territory of another. Suppose for instance that; servant (rakan) of ulèëbalang A has wounded a dependant of ulèëba lang B without clear proof of strong provocation. After preliminarj notice B proceeds with his followers to some place within A's territor)
| I) This | may he concluded | from the | words | in which | those who come | to meulangga | stil |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| announce and galden | their demands: to the ground". | "We come | to slay | X, to burn | his house and | to raze his | hedg< |
80
and demands of him that the house of his guilty dependant be burned down. A small hut brought thither for the purpose is generally burnt to satisfy the claim, and thus honour is appeased; for the rest the case is dealt with in the ordinary manner, the blood-debt being made good in accordance with the adat.
§ 6. The Mukim and its Administration.
The Mukim. Between the gampöng-authorities and the ulèëbalang or territorial ruler stand the imeums, the chiefs of the nlukims. We have already concluded in regard to a certain portion of the political structure of Acheh, that it owes its origin to the centralizing activity of one or more port-kings. I he same analogy holds good beyond question as regards the distribution of the territory of an ulèëbalang into the districts known as mukims and the office of imeum or district chief. V\ e might even go further and assert that this institution has sprung from the influence of the ulamas and other representatives of religion at which we have already hinted (see p. 7 above). In this way alone c
| r) We | may remark | in passing | that as soon | as the I.aw | began to make | a technical | use of |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| this word, | it became | necessary | to define | closely the length | of residence | which | sufficcs to |
8l
those assembled must liold in place of the Friday service an ordinary midday prayer. In places where the number of forty can never bc reckoned on, no arrangements whatever are made for the Friday ser vice; hence in the gampöng chapels in Aclieh as well as other part* of the Archipelago the requisite apparatus for this service is never to be found. On the other hand the Moslim law requires of every free male be- liever of full age that he should attend the Friday service if such be held within a certain distance of his abode, unless circumstances (which in theii tuin are clearly defined) prevent him from doing so. From this personal duty he is by no means excused on the ground that there is, for example, a full congregation of forty without him. Thus pious and influential Mohammedans must make it their object to multiply the opportunities for attending this service, and to further the erection of mosques for Friday prayer ') in all places where a congregation of forty or upwards can be reckoned on. In Acheh as well as elsewhere the dcvotees of religion have un- doubtedly laboured in this direction since the time that the creed of Islam began to take root there. \ liere a number of gampöngs lay sufficiently close to one another to admit of their being united into a single Friday association (if we may so term itj in accordance with the above-mentioned behests of the religious law, they constructed a mosque (meuseugit), choosing for the purpose the most central possible site. 1 his might sometimes fall within one of the gampöngs so united, where this gampöng happened to form the central point of the union, or again a place lying without all the gampöng enclosures might be con- sidered the most suitable position. For some of these associations the gampöngs of which are most widely dispersed and at the same time most numerous (some include from 10 to 12) "district" would be the most applicable name. Others, whose gampöngs rather resemble " wards"
| constitute | a man a | mukim of any given | place. | Thus we find | some | persons who according | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| to our ideas | are not | in any sense inhabitants | of a community, | regarded | by the Mohammedan | ||
| law as | its mukïms. | This word | lias in Kedah | the same | modified | meaning | as in Acheh |
| (Newbold, | Hritish Settlements | in the Straits | of Malacca | II: 20); and | the peculiarity | that in | |
| the former | place each | mukini consisted | origiually | of at least | 44 families, | is a clear indication | |
| of the original | intent | of this territorial | subdivision. | ||||
| I) Called | jamï or masjid | jam? | in Arabic, | to distinguish | them from the | smaller | mosques. |
| In the Indian | Archipelago | they are | usually termed | masjid | (W^iVetc.; Achehnese meuseugit | ||
| or seumeugit) | in contradistinction | with langgar, | taju\ balé, | surau etc. (Ach. | meunasah). | ||
| 6 |
lying si de by side and do not gcncrally exceed four, the normal number in Acheh, might more fitly be termed "townships". The Achehnese ca" them a11 "tukim; such distortion of the original meaning of Arabic words is no rare phenomenon in the native languages of the Indian Archipelago. The imeums. At first the chiefs of the mukims had without doubt a wholly or largely rehgious task to fulfil, namely to provide that God's Iaw should be enforced and especially that the prescribed rites should not be neglected. Tlieir official title of imeum (Ar. imam), brings them into close connection with the meuseugit, which forms the centre of their sphere of action, and with the religious worship held therein '). They should be for the mosque what the teungku is for the meunasah. The Achehnese mosque differs little from the déah described above (see P- 63). Like the latter it is built of planks and rests not 011 posts but on a raised stone foundation, and is provided with a stone niche. Close to the niche stands a pulpit (Inmba from Ar. mimbar). There is also the traditional staff (tungkat) which the preacher liolds in his hand, and some mats for those who perform the seumayang or service of prayer. Certain mosques the erection of which is among the institutions ascribed to the Sultan Meukuta Alam (1607—36) were recognized as "great mosques" {meuseugit raya) both on account of their size and the fact of their being erected by a sovereign prince, and also because they were regarded as being the liead mosques of a great number of mukims. Such is the great mosque par excellence, the Meuseugit Raya of the capital, from which the whole district surrounding the ancient seat of royalty takes lts name. Besides this there was 011c for each of the three sagis of Great Acheh viz. that of Indrapuri, which still exists, for the XXII Mukims, that of Indrapeurua (in the VI Mukims of the XXV) for the XXV, and that of Indrapatra, almost in the very place where Ladöng now stands, for the XXVI Mukims. Of the last two scarcely any tracé remains. In Pidië too there were a number of mosques which enjoyed the reputation of having been erected by Meukuta Alam and which were thus also called meuseugit raya. It is impossible now to tracé the extent of the supervision over the
| The | word imam | in the | sense of the | chief of a state | community is almost | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| entirely limited | to books. | Where used | it always | means the supreme | authority. | It is quite |
| out of the question in this sense. | that | name of the | Achehnese | office should | have been on | inally used |
1) use of the or
the K
THE MEUSEUGIT (MOSQUE) OF INDRAPURI.
gampongs allotted to the imeums according to the original intent of the distribution into mukims. In Acheh as in other Mohammedan countries, so soon as a degree of religious supervision is permitted to any individual, a wide field is opened to his ambition, since in theory everything can be brought within the scope of religion and religious law. At the same time the door is opened to manifold competition and strife, since the existing chiefs naturally set their faces against any unwonted invasion of their sphere of authority. So much is certain, that the imeums were necessarily always subor- dinate to the ulèëbalangs, to whom they owed their election, while they stood superior in some respects at least to the authorities of the gampöng. Dcgencration Their office, however, speedily degenerated; it went the wav of all of the office. J of imeum. Achehnese offices which have not sprung up of their own accord from native sources, but have been naturalized in the country at the will of individuals. In the times of some sultans of unusual power and cneigy, the central authority undoubtedly proved strong enough to carry out the ruler's wish to reform existing institutions. But to ensure the durability of such reforms, the moving power should have been less short-lived, and there should have been more continuity in the action and methods of the various rulers. Apart from the small interest which the port-kings were wont to display in the attairs of the interior, their government was always based on rapacity, and disorder was its only constant feature.
I.vtry office instituted by them showed a tendency soon after coming
into being, to assimilate itself with one of true Achehnese origin, preferably such as carried with it social influence and opportunities for enrichment. No office was more distinguished by these characteristics than that of uleëbalang, and thus we see all holders of offices so arti- ficially created endeavouring by every means in their power to assume the róle of uleëbalang. This was done by the imeums among the rest, and they succeeded pretty well in their object. We have unequivocal proofs to show that nioie than half a century ago, the imeums were already minor ulèëbalangs. A celebrated Achehnese heroic poem, the hikayat Pöchut Muhamat, depicts with 110 small skill the conflict waged by that prince in behalf of his brother Alaédin Juhan Shah (1756—60) against the latter's Arab ïival Jamalul-alam. In spite of sundry embroideries which characterize
this poem, it is to bc noted that it was composed shortly aftcr the war which it describes, and gives upon the whole an accurate descrip- ti°n °f the events and condition of things at that period. Here, then, we find the imeums appearing as military leaders among whom the prince seeks his supporters, and as chiefs who of their own initiative take the part of the hero or oppose him. It is clear from this epic that even at that time some of the imeums troubled themselves little about the uleëbalang, to whom they were nominally subordinate, whilst others appear in the retinue of their chiefs as minor ulèëbalangs. So it lias continued. I he imeums are all adat-chiefs without any presentcha- religious character. Some of them have attained to the independence racter of lhe of ulèëbalangs and Iack the name only; wc nced only instance the imeuni. well-known imeum of Liieng Bata who played so distinguished a part in the war with the Dutch as a military leader, or the imeum of Chadé who in the last conflict for royal honours before the Achehnese war was the most powerful supporter of the finally defeated candidate. lhe majority are, howevcr, actually subordinate to their ulèëbalangs, though the energy of individuals may reduce their subordination to a minimum. With the mosques, which were the cause of their first creation, they The 0_ either do not concern themselves at all (this depends on their personal nelle ofthe 1, V 1 mosque. cnaracterj or only just as much as any uleëbalang who interests him-self in religion. I he personelle of the mosque in Acheh when complete, consists of the self-same group of three '), which we find elsewhere in Sumatra; the imeum₂) who should properly preside at all the daily prayers as well as at the Friday service, the hatib (cliatib), who takes the lead in the I'riday prayers and the bileue (bilal) who intones the call to prayer (at/au, bang) and keeps the furniture of the mosque in order.
| i) The | Malays have | besides | the three here | named, a fourth | mosque | official called | the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Siak, I enghulu | Mukim | or Pënghulu | Mesjid. | His duties are | the last of those | assigned | to |
| the bilal | in the text; | those of the | latter are according | to Newbold | (Hritish | settlements | in |
| the Straits | of Malacca' | p. 249) | mainly sacrificial, | but as | a matter of fact the | bilal | only |
| intones the | bang or call | to prayer, | and it is the imam | who recites the talkin orfuneral service | |||
| over the grave. | 1 he bilal | often performs | the du'ies | of shrouding | and washing | the dead, but | |
| he does this rules in these mosque who derives | only as matters 110 influence | an eligible may perform | elder, as any the task. (Translator.) whatever from | devout person his office. | who knows | the ceremonial |
2) Imeum here does not of course mean chief of the mukim, but a servant of the
the
The officials of the mosque are usually ignorant men, and whenever t ey can find others more devout and learned in the law they gladly makc over their duties to them. Should such be wanting, thcpersone/le of the mosque is often insufficiënt and it rests on chance from week to week whether the Friday service shall be held or replaced by an ordinary m.dday prayer. Sometimes again the congregation of 40 males d 10rt' and sometimes no one can be found who is able to read a sermon. service. Complaints of ulamas and other pious persons as to the lack of interest in public worship are universal. Should a mosque fall into disrepair, the greatest difficulty is experienced in collecting the neces- sary funds and building materials for its restoration. The general co- operat.on for the re-building of the Meuseugit Raya or principal mosque o Acheh, which took place in the prime of Habib Abdurrahman's activity, 1S always quoted as an exception to the rule. Such an unusual personahty, revered by many and dreaded by the rest, is required in order that even the most moderate demands of religion may be satis- fied. rhe true Achehnese, if he does not entirely neglect the calls of ns creed, takes part with more zeai in the religious or quasi-religious gathenngs m the meunasah than in the assemblages at the mosque, where he feels himself but half at home. Kanduris (religieus feast.,) W gives „„,1 attcub with pleasure, at
I.. • or recitations, whether real or only imitative like thtr,a,w,„, and „B, he can exeite himself to the highest pi,el,; b,„ the ritual prescribed by the law fails to rouse his enthusiasm. It is not surprising then that an imeum who tries to assume the part of leube or theologian is from his very rarity an almost ludicrous «>Jjcct m Acheh. 1 he real imeum goes armed like the ulèëbalang, with an armed following. His position is at once to be gathered from his distmctive appellation which is tcuku and not teungku, the latter being » Great Acheh the title of all who borrow their rank to some extent from religion. By his own dependents in his capacity of chief of the mukim, he is even exalted to the dignity of tcuku ampön when ad- dressed directly: I lus office also is generally hereditary '), subject to the power of
V *•'*appointment and dismissal vested in the ulèëbalanir.
I) See p. 65 above.
1 laving seen that hardly anything still survives of the original func- tions of the imeum, it novv remains for us to describe those which have arisen in its place. The imeum is regarded by the gampöngs subject to him as a sort of acting ulèèbalang, and the latter employs him as his deputy in making known and helping to carry out his commands and decisions ivithin his (the imeum's) jurisdiction. In some parts of the XXII Mukims which are situated too far from the headquarters of the ulèë- aalang to admit of all matters of importance being subjected to his lecision, the adat lias assigned a measure of judicial authority to spe- -ified boards of imeums. Groups of three or four mukims are united or tlus purpose, and the decision of the three or four imeums lias the ;ame force as that of the ulèëbalang '). This is however exceptional; as a rule the imeum lias just as little udicial authority as the heads of the gampöngs, hut in the quality >f arbitrator he can deal with questions that lie outside the reach of he village authorities, inasmuch as more tlian one gampöng is con- erned in them. As his income depends entirely 011 chance profits, lie laturally makes it his object to bring as many such questions as pos- ible vvithin his own scope, always 011 the pretext of acting as mediator, 0 that his clients may avoid the heavy fines and costs exacted by he ulèëbalang. Under a powerful ulèëbalang the imeum is not much more than a o-between; under a weak ulèëbalang an energetic imeum can withi 11 he limits of his own jurisdiction entirely supplant his chief. Not un- requently an imeum wlicn cal led 011 by the ulèëbalang to conie to is assistance with his followers in time of war, simply remains inactive 1 even categorically refuses. In times of disorder especially, such as he present, when parties are being formed by others than the tradi- ional chiefs, considerable independence is attained by many imeums.. is we have already shown, however, many of them succeeded in mancipating themselves from control in earlier times as well.
| i) Examples | of such | unions are | Lam Lheuë, | Lam Kra', | Kruëng | Ma' and Ateuë'; |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Ba ét and | a part of I.am | Ara; another | part of | Lam Ara, | Aneu' Glé | and Jruë'. |
Sibréë,
S 7• The ulèëbalangships and their constitution.
bahngs!6" 1 he ulocbalangs, as we have repeatedly said, are the lords of the country, the territorial chiefs par excellence. They are thus called the rajas (in Achehnese parlance chiefs) of their territories in writings as wel' as in the «Poken language. As the word ulèëbalang signifies mili tary leader, it is not inconceivable that this name was given them under one of the most powerful of the port-kings, who endeavoured to ronder them subordinate and allowed them the command over the fighting men in their districts, while he tried gradually to monopolie the supreme power for himself. This eflfort however, was unsuccessful, for the uleebalangs have always continued governors, judges and military leaders in their own country, in which as a matter of fact they admit no higher authority. Ihe territory of an ulèëbalang has distinctive no name Achehnese, in like "mukim" and "gampöng". The expression "ulèëbalangschap" has been adopted by the Dutch, while the Achehnese speak of "the country [nanggroé] of ulèëbalang so and so" or of "the so many mukims". For the sake of clearness and distinction they sometimes unite the two expressions as in*-the seven Mukivts Ba ét"* i. e. the ulèëbalangship cons.st.ng of seven mukims, whose chief is called Teuku Muda Ba'ét. Although the title borne by these chiefs may have been derived from the court at Banda-Acheh, their authority is beyond all doubt of more anc.ent origin and dependant on no royal letters-patent. Their position was confirmed, not created, by the port-kings. Even the edicts of the most powerful rajas of Acheh express themselves with much circumspection touching the ulèëbalangs, which shows that these rajas wh.le endeavouring to establish a kind of hegemony, understood that they would do better to respect the powerful position of these poten- tates of the interior. I he ruling of the adat Meukuta Alam ') that the ulèëbalangs should receive no letters-patent of appointment from the sultan, was prompted by the consideration that they received their office as an inheritance :rom their forefathers. This rule however appears to have been forgotten later on; at least now-a-days botli ulèëbalangs and chiefs of depen-
i) See Van Langen's Atjchsch Staatsbestuur, pp. 4o, and 437.
dcncies rcgard their rights as by no means dependen! on such letters- patent, though both one and the other set some value 011 them as an embellishment of their rank. Kefore leaving the subject of the relation of the ulèëbalangs to the Confedera tions. Th( threc saizis
TEUKU MUDA DAVVÖT, ULÈËBAI.ANG OF SEULIMEUM (XXII MUKIMs).
sultanate, which will be dealt with more fully when wc come to spcak of the sultans themselves, we must make one or two remarks on the confederacies of the ulèëbalangs. We have seen tliat Acheh proper, outside the limits of the actual sultanate, is divided into threc sagöës (sagis) or «angles, eacli of which is composed of a certain number of mukims whence they derive their names viz. Dua plöh dua (the XXII Mukims), Dua plok nam (the XXVI Mukims) and Teungoh Iheé plok
9°
(the XXV Mukims). We may notice in passing that the gradual in- crease of population gave rise here and there (and especially in the XXII Mukims) to the formation of new mukims within the limits of •sucli a sagi ), so that ïts name does not alvvays correspond vvith its actual proportions. The question that excites our special interest is — to what are we to ascribe the origin of this distribution and what has been its significance in regard to the political life of Acheh ? The first question, like most enquiries into the history of Acheh, does not admit of a decisive answer. In the historical notes in the' possession of some of the Achehnese chiefs, we meet with the state ment that the distribution into sagis came into being in the reign of the sultana Nurul-alam Nakiatödin (1675— 77) ')• But such traditions are of very httle value. To judge of their reliability we have only to reflect that many Achehnese at the present time attribute the intro- duction of Islam into their country to the saint Chèli Abdöra'öh (Ab- dura'uf — Teungku di Kuala), although it is clearly established that this man lived no earlier than the i₇th Century. If we might assume that the institution of panglimas of sagis was brought about by a royal edict with. the view of emphasizing the authority of the sovereign over all the ulèëbalangs 3), it would appear very extraordinary that it should have attained its consummation under the weak rule of a sultana. The highest significance which I should venture to ascribe to the historical note in question is this, that under the weak female rule which was highly favoured by the ulèëbalangs for reasons easy to conceive, the latter were able to bring it to pass that every succession to the t irone should take place in conformity with the decision of the repre sentaties of the three sagis. Sagis, that is to say confederations of uleebalangsh.ps, had however undoubtedly been long in existence before they succeeded in bringing the sultanate like an infant under their joint guardianship. Wcrc it otherwise, and had the sagis been artificially constituted by the sultans or sultanas, they would have fallen into disuse again after the lapse of the shortlived period of prosperity of the port-kingship. This has not taken place. It is true-that there has been no lack —
M h S f he XXH Mukims now con a
| ,'?• ' p. | ° ' | ' *ns 37, or 46 if we include | the VII | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Mukims Iidie | {Mukwt 7ujgh)-, | the latter | are really | 9 in number. |
2) See also Van I.angen's Atjehsch Staatsbestuur p. 393.
3) Van I.angen, Atjehsch Staatsies/uur r> 10^
- •
9'
WIIAI TISC couiu DC expected in Acheh — of quarrels and even petty wars between ulèëbalangs and imeums belonging to the sarae confe- deracy, and the people under the jurisdiction of the same ulèëbalang have always feit more united in mind and purpose with one another tlian with their other brethren of the same sagi. Still the great mass of chiefs and dependants of any one sagi are understood to form a single united body. Ihis may be regarded as due to propinquity, similarity of manners and dialect and above all community of interest. The origin of such confederacies is to be ascribed to the force of circumstances. I' roni ancient times, and still more in former years tlian at the present day, internal conflicts and wars of every description have been the order of the day in Acheh. Just as the gampöngs which standing alone would have lain at the mercy of the first freebooter, protccted themselves by uniting under a single ulèëbalang, so must the ulèëbalangs in their mutual strife have perceived the usefulness of offensive and defensive alliances with their neighbours. It of course remained open to all of them in case of need to scek their allies where they would. Nor was the federation so close as to prevent an occasional defection, or an absence of readiness to burn their fingers on behalf of their allies — a characteristic by no means confmed to Acheh. Self-interest has always been the ruling motive, but for this very reason we must admit that the ulèëbalangships which united themselves into sagis had in reality abiding communities of in terest; othervvise the very name of the institution would scarce have survived '). 1 hat each federation feit the necessity for a single head, and chose The pang to this end the most powerful and influential ulèëbalang from their n,a saBi' midst, is an obvious result of what has been said. The authority of such a panglima sagi extended however only to matters of general interest. I-'or the rest the remaining ulèëbalangs governed their own territories just as though there were no sagi in existence. All authority in Acheh is in the highest degree personal. Rank is acquired by inheritance, but whether its possessor exercises the in- fluence that attachés to it depends on his individual characteristics. Thus although the rank of panglima sagi became heritable in the
| 0 There | are in | Pidië also | federations | of the | same sort. | Just as Acheh | has | its XXII |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Mukims | of Panglima | Pólém, so | we find | in Pidie the | XXII Mukims of Béntara | Keumangan, etc. |
92
family of him vvho at the conclusion of the alliance was recognized by his fellows as chief, this could not prevent the inheritors of the office from being outvied by others at a later period. Still the feeling ol respect for tradition in Acheh is great enough to leave the name and certain outward forms intact. I here was besides the usual conflict between one who is endowed vvith a loosely defined supremacy and those who find themselves sub- jected to it; on the one hand eagerness to shake ofif the yoke as far as possible, and on the other efforts after extended power '). W ars and other such special crises always showed whether the panglima sagi had inherited the influence as well as the rank of his forefathers; in times of comparative order and repose he was and still is a mere ulèëbalang like the rest. l lcebalangs \ e may here make cursory inention of two other sorts of ulèëba- of the Sultan. langs, who exercise no authority within the three sagis. The first is the ulèëbalang poten, i. e. "ulèëbalangs of our lord (the Sultan)", who either held a position of trust within the Sultan's own territory, or filled a high post at Court, or else owed their titles simply to the royal favour. Such offices are hereditary like the rest. The second is to be found among certain of the chiefs in the outlying dependencies who take some pride in adopting the title of ulèëbalang as a general designation of their rank. 1 he chiefs in Acheh proper who rather look down on these aspirants, are wont to remark in contradiction of their claims, that the rulers of the dependencies are really only keujrucns (këjuruan) or nnuntr'oës (mantri) no matter what titles they may have gained from chance, royal favour or their own arrogance. Attendants To return to the ulèëbalangs of Acheh proper, we find then that they of the ulèë-,, balang. are botn rajas, military conimanders and judges in their own territories. I"or the exercise of their authority they have the following helpers: Hantas. a. Their younger brothers or more distant next-of-kin, generally known by the name of bantas. Of these one is the banta 2) par excel- letice, the ulèëbalang's right-hand man. Mis duties are something like those of the patih of a Javanese princedom or regency.
| proper name | or official | title of a | chief, that the | latter is acting | or has | acted as a banta. | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| In conscquence | of the | devolution | of titles by | inheritance, | it often happens | that | a man |
| whose ancestor | was a banta | bears this | title without | any respect | to his present | rank. |
1) As to this sec also Van Langen's Atjehsch Staatsbestuur, p. 398.
2) It must not however be always assumed from the of this word in the
occurrence
b. Their rakans (prop. "companions") i. e. the followers who live Rakans.
in their house or its immediate neighbourhood and receive from them food and clothing for themselves and their families. To these are sometimes added the ureiïèng salah as they are called, persons who have been enrolled in the following of the ulèëbalang by way of pu- nishment for some offence or for debt.
c. The panglima prang also ranks to some extent as a momber of
the ulèëbalang's suite. Anyone who has distinguished himself on some few occasions as a warrior is raised (in just the same way as the panghma kawóm '), to the rank of panglima prang, a rather empty dignity if considered alone. The weapons (sikin panjang and reunchöng) which he receives from the ulèëbalang on his appointment, he must return to him again if he should ever embrace the cause of an enemy of the latter. In times of peace these officers have no share in the government or administration of justice; in war the amount of confidence reposed by the ulèëbalang in his panglima prang as leaders of his fighting men depends 011 the personal qualities of the chief himself. In ordinary life the title panglima is given to anyone who is known to have taken a share in warlike operations on some few occasions; the abbreviation pang serves as a minor distinction. In Acheh proper as well as the subordinate districts there is in most gampöngs of im- portance 011e person who bears the title of panglima prang, but these so-called "war-chiefs" have really nothing to do witli war, being only the messengers or attendants of the chiefs. 'I' A further measure of help is derived by the uleëbalangs from the imcums aiul imenms and keuchis within his jurisdiction. These however represent ^l"''" other interests also besides those of their ulèëbalang, and are thus only conditionally at his disposal.
c. 1'or the administration of justice the ulèëbalang avails himself of
the services of a kali (kadhi), whom he himself nominates. The juris diction of this ofticer, as we shall immediately see, is limited to certain minor portions of the family law, and he does nothing except at the command or with the approval of his chief. A more important section of judicial work, which rests almost entirely on adat, is taken out of
| the panglima | sagi, who | is in name | at least | one of the | principal | uleëbalangs, | the panglima |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| kawöm or | chief of a tribe, | and the | panglima | prang here | described. |
1) See p. 46 above. We have thus three kinds of panglimas of vastly different position :
the hands of the ulèëbalang by the so-called friendly settlements efifected by his imeums and keuchi's. How far the ulèëbalang can, in the event for example of a hostile invasion of his territory, reckon upon the help of the above-mentioned officials and of his subjects in general, depends entirely 011 his personal tact and energy and the influence of his family connections. Though the bantas are his relatives, he must find means to attach them to his cause; the rakans elope if sufficiënt attention is not paid to their maintenance; the imeums and keuchi s in times of difficulty and danger vvill only follovv an ulèëbalang who is able to inspire them witli fear or with affection, and otherwise remain inactive or even lend their support to the enemy. Furthermore, the chief who has powerful allies outside his own territory can always exert more influence over his own people. 1 here is hardly any tracé of systematic management in regard to afïfairs of general interest. The maintenance of public order is efifected by the punishment of open offenders, unless the offence has been already avenged either privately (as in most cases of manslaughter, hurt or other personal acts of violence) or through the adats controll- ing the dwellers in the gampöngs. Administra-We now come to the administration of justice. We know that the tion of justice,,, inAcheh. Mohammedan law requires independent judges (kadhis or their depu- tics) who are indeed appointed by the licad of the community but who, though liable to dismissal for neglect of duty, need never conform to the will of temporal authorities but alone to the all-ruling law of Allah. I have repeatedly drawn attention to the fact that this ideal is never even approximately attained. Administra-This may be partly ascribable to the desire of all Mohammedan tionofjustice i 4. %• in Moham-kuiers monopolize power, which makes it impossible for them to "1L1 tries'"tölemte in their neighbourhood independent judges with so wide a generally. jurisdiction. But there is more than this: the Mohammedan law is unfitted for the practical administration of justice '), among other
| in the schools, | out | reach of all | close connection | with | the real requirements | of daily | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| life, has | been described | by the author | in MohammedaaHsch | recht en rechtswetenschap | (In | ||
| dische Gids | 18S6) and | en de vergelijkende | rechtswetenschap | (Rechtsgeleerd | Magazijn | ||
| (Zeitschrift | für vergleichende | Rechtswissenschaft, | vol. VIII). | A further striking | example | of |
1) The ideal character of the Mohammedan law, developed as it was for the most part
1886) and by Dr. Ign. Goldziher in Muhammcdanischcs Recht in Theorie und Wirklichkeit
of
De fiqh
rcasons because it greatly hampers the detection of crime, imposes impossible demands on witnesses and fails to takc cognizance of histo- rical changes. As the Mohammedan law itself excludes on principle all intrinsic reform, rulers have everywhere found themselves compelled to provide a practical method of administering justice, and this they have done by constituting themselves the judges in all cases, following partly the prevailing custom of the country and partly their own inclination. Respect for the admittedly perfect religious law (described in self- justification as too good for modern society) made a twofold concession desirable; first the admission of an appeal to the divine law, of which license it is well known that advantage will hardly ever be taken, and secondly the handing over to the kadlii of the decision of such cases as are more especially regarded as being of a religious nature, including the law relating to families. 1 he first of these two concessions is wanting in the judicial institu-Adat and tions of most peoples of the Indian Archipelago. 1 « In its 1 place it 10 is 1 law rell. 111 gun' the s represented as being God's will that the adat (conceived as the ancient lnd.ian Ar~ law of the land in the broadest sense of the word, altered but little ' by the spirit of Mohammedanism) and the hui-om or religious law should govern side by side '), though in practice the former plays by far the larger part. But in Acheh even the jurisdiction in matters affecting the family lias not been entirely made over to the kali. The latter's most usual duties are:
a. 1 he declaration of the pasah (fasch), the judicial dissolution of a
marriage at the instancc of 011e of the parties. Even tliis is only done by the kali by the authority of the ulèebalang specially given in each case. I he usual recompense to the kali for such a sentence is four dollars, lo this is sometimes added a handsome fee for the ulèebalang, especially when the grounds of a woman's request for />asa/i are of doubtful sufficiency.
b. Acting as the wali of maidens who wish to get married, and whose
| directly | contradictory | rules in regard | to questions | of the | highest importance, | which find | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| authoritative | supporters | even within | each of the | four orthodox | schools, | is supplied | by the |
| admiiahle | description | of the Waqf-law | of the Hanafites | by J. | Krcsniarik | in the Zeitschrift | |
| i/er Deutschen | Morgenland. | Gesellschaft, | liand XI,V. | 511 et seq. |
1) See pp. 14 and 72 above.
walis dead (the
| proper | by kinship | are either | or reside at a distance | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| limits Of which are fixed | by the law) from the | home of | the bride. |
1 he fees for this service vary according to circumstances, just like that given to the teungku meunasah for concluding marriages, one of his duties under the adat.
c. 1 aking the lead in the very customary balc meudeuhab, a cnrious
evasion of the law, through which the Achehnese consider themselves justified in marrying girls who are not of age, even though the autho ritative walis (those in the ascending line) are wanting. Further details on this head will be found in our description of the marriage law. In this case again the regular fee is four dollars.
d. Making the requisite calculations for the division of inheritances,
a task which the ulèebalang is of course unable to perform for him- self. I he latter hovvever in such cases uses his kali simply as an ac countant, as he wishes to keep the control of such matters in his own hands. The ulèebalang receives the 10°/„ commission allowed him by the adat as ha pra c or succession duty, and even assumes control of the shares of absent heirs and some of those under age, the usual result being that these shares are considerably diminished or entirely disappear. For making these calculations, which are in all essentials worked out in accordance with the Mohammedan law (v. inf. in our description of customs connected with decease) the kali gets simply such recompense as the ulèebalang may choose to allow him. In all other cases or suits brought before the ulèebalang, the kali as a rule holds aloof. This is because not only the system of evidence adopted, but also the sentences passed, are in such direct conflict with the sacred law that the presence of the representatives of this law would only bring it into contempt. Yet there are some ulèëbalangs who summon their kali on such occasions for form's sake, and after enquiring of him with much apparent solicitude, what would be the fiat of the huköm in the case under consideration, beg of him to allow the decision in this one instance to be given in accordance with the adat; whereto the kali assents with a respectful seumbah. Some few pious ulèèbalangs, who of their own accord allowed their The kali kalis a larger sliare in the administration of justice, or conformed to rabon jalé their advice, are cited as rare exceptions. ld the kali alikönadé. dikönadé. The I he panglima panglima sagi sagi was was the the chief chief ulèebalang ulèebalang of of his his confederation, confederation, and and
Iiis kali was in likc manner the chief kali of the sagi. We may perhaps iscribe to the centralizing efforts of certain of the port-kings an attempt ivhich was made to reduce all the other kalis to the position of mere ieputies of the chief kali, nominated by him or at least with his con- :urrence, whilst the chief kali of eacli sagi received his appointment lirect from the hands of the sultan. The bombastic title of these kalis )f the sagis, Kali Rabön Jalé (from the Arab. Qadhi Rabbul Jalll) = Judge of the Almighty Lord '), undoubtedly dates from the times of ictive organization in the capital. Writers on Acheh have accustomed us to the idea that above the calis of the ulèëbalangs and of the panglima sagi there was enthroned n the capital a supreme hereditary judge who bore the title of Kali Malikon Adê (Qad/ü Malikul Adil) i. e. "Judge of the righteous King". Tor this notion it appears that we have again to thank Mr. Der Kin leren, whose chief guide in forming this conclusion was the bearer of he title himself. I he latter appears (for reasons not difficult to surmise) o have told Mr. Der Kinderen tales regarding his exalted position in lagrant conflict with the truth. Ile painted an idealized picture of the mportance of that position as it was at the time of its fïrst establish- nent, some two and a half centuries ago, and furbisjied this up as epresenting the actual state of things at the present day *). The original intention of the powerful port-king (whether Meukuta Uam or an earlier sovereign) who instituted the title of Kali Malikon ^dé, was undoubtedly to have a president of the royal court ofjustice iossessed of an adequate knowledge of the religious law. In making liis appointment it was of course never intended to apply this law in .s full extent. Such a scheme could have been realized in no Moham- ïedan country in the world within the last twelve centuries. The whole ohtical system of the port-town even at the zenith of its prosperity 'as in conflict with the law of Islam. 1 erhaps those Achehnese chiefs are not entirely wrong who assert lat the wish of the prince who created the office was that his kali
u
| lmighty Lord" — | God, e. g. in | Ganjamara, Singapore | Kdition p. 159 | As ,3 | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | a | ||||||
| 'Iking van itavia 1881, | met 18, 22 seqq. | een memorie | van toelichting | van | Mr. T. //. | Der Kinderen, | |
| 7 |
1) 1 his expression is also to be found in Malay works in the sense of The Judge, the
2) Ordonnantie van 14 Maart 1SS1 betrekkelijk de rechtspleging onder de inheemsche be•
V; sUJO As vjUij--LLiU stf
Groot-Atjeh, pp.
should apply the adat as vvell as the hukom, and on this account gave him, in contradistinction to the "judges of the Almighty Lord" in the three sagis, the title of "judge of the righteous king". In fact it is in this way that the difference in nomenclature can be best explained '). Degene»-Whether the sultan who established the office in question wished at tion of the, t 1 ofticeofKali s^nie time to endovv liis own judge with a measure of supremacy
| ofticeofKali | ||
|---|---|---|
| ikonAdt. over | t le | 0 er |
a j th three chief kalis, remains uncertain. We only know that if such a scheme existed, nothing carae of it. In the first place the great independence of the three sagis would have resisted any such attempt, and in practice a higher appeal from the sentences of the judges of the Almighty Lord, ' to the royal court of justice would have miscarried owing to sundry insurmountable difficulties. Hut besides this the office of "judges of the righteous King" very quickly deterio- rated, until in the end it retained nothing more than the title indicative of its origin. \aiious causes combined to bring about this deterioration. First the hereditary nature of the office which did not of course endure that the heir should be as learned as his predecessor; then the residence of the holder of the title in the immediate neighbourhood of the court, by which he gained a favourable opportunity of having his office con- verted into a sort of ulèëbalangship, the end and aim of all Achehnese office-bearers; and lastly the rapid decay of the central power, by which various offices created during the brief period of prosperity lost the reason for their further existence. Lven in the later edicts, which always more or less idealize facts, we find the Kali Malikon Ade represented as a distinguished courtier, a sort of master of court ceremonies, to whom a fixed portion of the harbour dues was assigned. He became what was called uleëbalang pbteu, "uleëbalang of our lord" (the sultan), equal in rank to the almost independent provincial chiefs, with all the worldly pretension apper- taining to their rank, but without territory. The official title of Teuku which he bore and still bears, points unequivocally to the complete secularization of his office. h inally one of the holders of this title, making use of the special favour of the prince towards him and of the weakness of the then
Niemann geschriften,
| i) Prof. | in his | bloemlezing | uit Maleischc | I'art 2, p. 25 notices |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| that Malikul Adil is a common | title for qadhis in Malay countries. |
THE LATE TEUKU KALI MALIKÖN OF HIS NEW HOUSE.
IOO
Panglima Meuseugit Raya (the hcad of the 24 or more gampöngs on either side of the Acheh river, in the neighbourhood of the court and principal mosque) succeeded in gaining control over half the latter's jurisdiction. Since then we find the Teuku Kali at the acme of the wishes of an Achehnese official, chief of a small but important territory, and at the same time, in his capacity as a court dignitary, not without influence in the choice of a successor to the throne. We thus see that Mr. Dei Kinderen quite missed the mark in finding anything extra- ordinary in the fact that the "hereditary supreme judge" of the king- dom could neither read nor write. Teuku Kali was ulèëbalang of 12 gampöngs, and shared this ignorance with many of his equals in rank, while those who are charged with administering justice according to ïcligious law can all read and write and have most of them carried their learning much further than these rudiments. The rule that the chief kalis of the three sagis should be appointed by the sultan speedily became a dead letter, and the practical results of the aims at centralization founded on this rule proved very trifling. linVhf' 1 '1C offlce of bah raböti jalé also, in complete opposition to its character and object, became in the end hereditary; nay more, during the latter part of the century, the son, brother or nephew of a deceased title-bearer has succeeded the latter without even having to demand a sealed deed of appointment from the sultan. Such being the case, we may be surprised to find that this kali-ship did not deteriorate so much as that of Mr. Der Kinderen's "supreme judge". 1 hc kali raböti jalé of the XXII Mukims, though according to custom he acquires his office by inheritance, is as a matter of fact a man of learning. According to Achehnese custom the late kali, like his fore- fathers before him, was called after the gampöng he lived in, Teungku Tanoh Abèë '). By reason of his learning this chief esteemed himself too highly to act as a sort of acolyte of the Panglima of his sagi, and refused to appear at the call of the Panglima Pölém. This powerful uleebalang was thus constrained when need arose to seek the help of teungkus of inferior qualifications»), while his hereditary kali devoted his time to study and the instruction of his disciples.
| ulama of inferior | repute. |
|---|
1) He died in 1893.
2) I he chief of those who rendered in this way was Teungku di I.heue,
service an
IOI
In the XX\ Mukims in like nianner there flourished for a short time a tolerably learned head kali, Teungku Lam I'aya '), who died some years since. He enjoyed, at least in the later years of the sultanate, a certain precedence on otiicial occasions, and was sometimes bidden to the Dalam, probably because he lived nearest at hand. I lis son, who succeeded him under the sarac title, is said not to be particularly learned in the law, but very ready of speech. When the Dutch first came to Acheh, the chief kali of the XXVI Mukims was a man named Teungku Lam Gut, the grandfather 011 the mother s side of the present hatib (preacher) of the principal mosque at Kuta Raja. Born in Lam Gut and appointed as the successor of his father, who had some reputation for learning, he subsequently changed his abode, in consequence of his marriage, to Lam Bhu' close to the Dalam. Fiere he married his daughter to a scholar of Pidië named Chèh Marahaban, long a resident in Mecca, who was ulama and kali to the sovereign of the portJ) during the last years of the Sultanate. Teungku Lam Gut was thus able to rely in his official work on the superior knowledge of his son-in-law, for he himself though a man of sound intelligence was devoid of learning. The principle of inheritance could not of course be applied to the kali-ship in the same degree as in the case of offices controlled by adat; still it was sometimes pushed to a great extremity. Thus it by 110 means rarely occurred that in the very smallest duties of his office the kali, like many a teungku meunasah, :') had to invoke the assistance of some learned man of only second or third rank. 1 his is equally true of the ordinary kalis of the ulèëbalangship, who according to the intention of the centralizing ruler were supposed to be appointed by the chief kali, but as a matter of fact inherited theii office as a .family chattel, and were only hampered in their right of succession by the occasional interference of their ulèëbalangs. Accor- dingly we find side by side in all these offices functionaries without title and title-bearers without function.
| who was distinguished | from the kali | of that name | by the | addition of | the word | ulama | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| or alem. | |||||||
| those learned | in the law, | his real adviser | was Cheh | Marahaban | and not Teuku | Kali. |
1) Not to be confused with his contemporary, the still greater pandit Teungku Lam 1'aya,
2) Thus even in the rare cases the Sultan of Acheh had need of the advice of
3) See above p. 75.
where
I02 102
| \v e | might | to some | extent apply | to the | relation of the ulèëbalang | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| to his | kali the | expression | which | the Achehnese | use | to denote | the |
| mutual | positions | of the chief of the gampöng | ') the teungku | ||||
| meunasah, | and | represent | the ulèëbalang | as the father | and the | kali as | |
| the mother | of | the ulèëbalangship; | but with this distinction, | that | the | ||
| position | of this | " mother" | of a province | is relatively | very | much | lower |
| tlian that | of the | "mother" | of a village. °f justice | remains | mainly | in the hands | of |
| the ulèëbalangs. | It is | only however | in the direst | necessity | that | their | |
| mediation | is sought, | for these | chiefs hold | it before them | as their prin- | ||
| cipal | aim to | get as much | hard | cash as possible | for themselves, | and | |
| take | but httle | pains with cases, | however | weighty, | from which there | is | |
| not much | profit | to be | won. We | shall now | enumerate | the principal | |
| matters ulèëbalangs. | which | give rise | to blood-vengeance | or to sentences | of the | ||
| od a nd ° | ' | laughter | originating | in ordinary | quarrels, | ||
| .are as | a rule | avenged | without | recourse | any authority | by | the |
| injured | party | with the | help of his kawöm | or kindred. | If however | at | |
| the end | of the | mutual | reprisals | a considerable | debit | remains | |
| over | 011 one side, | the | matter is submitted | to the ulèëbalang, | who in | ||
| this case | simply | directs | the payment | in accordance | with religious law | ||
| of the diet or price of blood | by the offender | to the injured | party. For | ||||
| this diët | a tariff | is to be found | in the | Moslim law-books. | Where | the | |
| ulèëbalang or ulama. | is himself unlearned, | he applies | for enlightenment | to a kali | |||
| Long | continued | petty | wars only | arise out | of blood feuds in such | ||
| cases | as when | a simple | hurt is | avenged | by manslaughter, | or | the |
| recognized We | limits overstepped have already') alluded | in some to the peculiar gampöng-adat | other | such way. | |||
| wlnch is employee! | to wash | away | the insult inseparable | from the injury | |||
| done, which accrues | and which therefrom. | does not interfere | with the debt | in blood or money | |||
| We | may add | that an | insult offered | by a person | of high rank | to an | |
| ordinary | citizen | is obliterated | without | recourse | being had to meulangga, | ||
| simply | through | the so-called | cooling | (peusijuc) | ) or another | form of |
(>keitchiand
nof'justicè ThUS the administration ,11,0 u!èc-
blDog a n H dily injurieS lu,rt or mans od-money to balance
oïmeulangga
1) See p. 77 above.
2) See p. 78 above.
compensation in which all ceremonies are dispensed with. Indeed it sometimes happens that an injured villager on receiving compensation at the hands say of an ulcëbalang's son who has done him an injury, actually begs the latter for forgiveness. Injuries done to persons of position by those of inferior are never injuries to atoned for without a formal request for pardon. iankC °f hlgïl One of the lower orders who has committed some ofïfence against a chief below the rank of ulèëbalang, seeks the presence of the chief with gifts, accompanied by relatives and friends who plead in his behalf. To an ulèëbalang the offender is brought wrapped up in a cloth as though he were dead or seriously ill. Keuchi's or persons of higher rank who go into the presence of their ulèëbalang as penitent sinners are generally accompanied by a number of their fellows of like rank. Either the offender himself or one of his colleagues who out of friendship for him assumes the part ofsubstitute or scapegoat, covers his head with a white cloth, and thus habited as a corpse takes his stand before the ulcëbalang's door, while his com- panions rëiterate the cry: ampon! atnpon! For a long time the ulèëbalang feigns to take no notice, so that nothing may be wanting to the publicity of the aftair, which he deerns indispensable for the satisfaction of his honour. Finally he comes for- ward and says: "It is well", whereupon the suppliants enter the house and sit down for a short time, without however being made partakers of any hospitality. Ulèëbalangs who desired to atone by an appeal for pardon for a sin of commission or omission against the Sultan, were generally summoned to the Dalam for this purpose. Here they received from their royal master a costly platter (dalöng) on which lay an iron chain under the usual covering (a conical plaited cover sangè and a cloth = seuhab). This served as a gentle reminder that they must consider themselves as prisoners and not return home until they had received forgiveness. Thereupon followed a discussion as to the ternis of the pardon. Tovvards the ulèëbalangs of Acheh proper, however, the sultans never indulged in such highhanded methods; it was only the less important diiefs of the dependencies that would submit to such ignominy. Where the ceremony of "cooling" takes place between two persons of L>qual rank, the offender asks forgiveness of the injured party who is seated opposite, and to this end rises first from his place; bilt if the
104 injured o„e is somewha. yolm„er Qr jn ^ ^ ^
itóiative Pe"itent s° M '°-'PP™' to take the
In cases of manslaughter the dB, is seklon, aceepted, more substanüal vengeanee bang sought for. The guilty party i„ s„ch cascs usua|| fl.es fron, the highlands to the lowlands „r viee versa, and enioys the proteet.on of the gampöng whose hospitality he invokes The ulèe- balang whose subjeet the deeeased „as, after having aseertained the aets, proclaims that the offender may be slai„ by anyone into whose hands he falls.
Where the bloodguilty party dies eithe, a violent or a „ataral death, the aflair is regarded as settled. It was understood that persons guilty of manslaughter could save themselvos by flying to .he Dalan., but they were then regarded as chattels of the raja. 'i'heft A thief is according to Achehnese law n„ni,h,KU. .„ui, •r. . * UCdlU, even not caaght red-handed •>. I„ additie,, to ,he great divergenee fron, the law of Islam ,„ ,egard to the severity of ,hc „enalty, we f„„, a further confl.et w„h that law in the estimation of the punishment a, an act of pnvate vengeanee, whicb „nly ,he vietim of the theft or his representative has the right to exact. If he whose goods are stolen has caught the thief red-handed and sla.n him, he must „i accordance with the rules of evidence required y the adat, prove that the deceased has actually committed theft as otherwise he would become involved in a blood-feud. Where the thief 'S n0t 3t °nCC c;iPtured, the fact must in like manner be "proved" so as to g,ve the aggrieved party the right to slay him without be'ing exposed to the vengeanee of his kindred.
| i) Even | Teungku Tanóh | Abèë, the | learned kali | of the XXII | Mukims | ,11 i ^. | . |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| has for years | past harboured | a bila ,öb (a | man mnltv | „1 | ; | a^ove |
Muk,ms
fc d ffic ult tü rovc
| Mohammedan | rules | of evidence | As we shall | ., | > '. | P accord.ng | to |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ments | was atnong | the prer^ives | of lhj^ | Ltan^NeTe fh ! | • ™ | 'hese | punish- |
| right was | usurped | by the chief | of the sagi | óf the XXII | Mukims "h" | ° | |
| nu heed | in dealing | with such | cases to the | ' | ° ° ' | ||
| evidence this privilege. | in the nJEter | of theft. | ^0^^^!!^^ | ^ uleebalangs | have ever | ° assumed |
inflicti r Cent years ,hls W m St Pr bab y paid f
According to tlie adat the only proper method of proving the crime is for the ulèëbalang to establish the fact by personal investigation at the scene of the theft, and to identify the thief, a process known to the Achehnese as peusah ') panchuri. In the XXVI Mukims this peusah should according to the adat be carried out only by the panglima sagi 2), and in the XXV by any ulèëbalang; in some parts of the XXII Mukims the ulèëbalang ifhe reside at too great a distance may be replaced by a conclave of three imeums 3). I he elders and those learned in adat are wont to enumerate four sorts of testimony, which whether taken alone or in conjunction give the right to regard the accused as a thief. The Achehnese have a great preference for the numbtr four. They are also fond of employing in the discussion of adat-subjects terms which no one fully understands, and in regard to which every successive speaker can thus exhibit greater wisdom than his predecessor. These four traditional forms of proof are as follows: i". yad (Arab. properly = "hand") i. e. that the suspected party has been seen lurking in the neighbourhood of the house of him whose goods have been stolen; 2". kinayat (Arab. — "covered or metaphorical proof') i. e. that he has been seen to enter the house; 3". penny abct (from Arab. thabit — established, "that which establishes a fact") i. e. that he has been seen holding or touching the stolen object; and 4". halen'c tneuë (properly halal ~ "perniitted" anti mal — "goods, object of possession ') i. e. that he has been discovered with the stolen object in his possession. Other kinds of evidence are mentioned, but these are all equally remote from the original as well as the technical sense of the Arabic words; and these words themselves do not appear in any such con- nection in the Mohammedan law, with the exception of yad, which means actual possession. I11 practice however they do not confine themselves to these rather more than vague rules. I he peusah generally rests 011 the ground that the body of the slain thief has been found lying close to or in the neighbourhood of the stolen object, which token (tanda) is still further
| as certain, ascertain. | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| I have | grave doubts | of this as I received | the | information | from the present | panglima |
| of this sagi himself, | a young | man who | has little reliable | knowledge | of the ancient | adats. |
| Cf. p. | above. |
1) Ihe causative of sah (Arab. <;alih) = true, certain; the word thus means: to declare
2)
3) 87
strengthened by traces of housebreaking. It may also be supported by the fact that the thing stolen is found in the possession of another (the receiver) to whorn compensation is paid on the condition that he points out the thief; or again, the fact that it is found in the gampöng and that various circumstances point to a particular person as the thief who has escaped pursuit. In order to give some idea of the peculiar adats among the Achehnese in crimmal cases, which are characterized no less than their family life by set speeches and dramatic display, we append an example of the peusah panchuri in a case in which the thief has been killed on the spot. 1 he attendant circumstances are imaginary, but most of the formulae are invariable. Ihe body of the thief, with the objects which serve as testimony, are left undisturbed till the ulèëbalang who is notified as soon as possible, appears in the gampöng attended by some imeums and keuchi's. ' hese authorities seat themselves over against the slayer of the thief, and the people of the gampöng crowd around on all sides. The slayer is usually represented by a speechmaker of the gampöng, but he may of course speak for himself if he wish. Standing up in his place he delivers himself on this wise: "I beg forgiveness of you all, oh *Teungkus * ye that are my kings, for the reason for which 1 stand here, oh Teuku ampön, is threefold. ' " 1 he first reason is, that I desire to pay homage to you, oh Teukus, who are my kings. The second reason is, oh Teuku ampön, that I wish to relate to you that which has befallen me. The third reason is, oh Teuku ampön, that I have to inform you as follows. During the past night, I riday the 151)1 of Mo lot, I was sleeping in the meunasah. At about midnight, as well as I could guess, I was startled and awaked from sleep with a feeling of uneasiness. I took my weapons, a sikin, a reunchong and a spear, and went back into the gampöng -1), for I keep a beast there.
sagi,
| ocal custom | niay dictate. | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ustom for | the speaker | to use | the word teungku | in the commencement | of his address | |
| 5ubsequently | he d.rects | his narrative | more exclusively | to the ulèëbalang, | whom he addresses | |
| iccoiding to custom 1. p. 01 above. | as teuku | ampön. |
1) Or else, .is we saw above, the panglima or a council of three imeums, as the
2) Although al most all those present actually bear the title teuk,,, it is the traditional
3) Ihe hotises of the gampöng in contradistinction to the are here meant
meunasah
IO7
"So then, oh Teuku ampön, having come into the gampöng, I took some buffalo fódder and laid it in the manger. Then I saw that the beast did not approach. I feit for the rope; there was 110 rope to be found. Then I approached the door of the stall and found it standing open. Then I wandered hither and thither till I came upon a man leading a buffalo in a place which is only separated from my house by a single garden. "Thereupon, oh Teuku ampön, I cried out, who is that leading a buffalo? but he answered not. Then I drew my sikin and called help! help! He took his stand against me, I smote at him and there lay the leader of the buffalo dead! "As to the buflalo, oh Teuku ampön, it is my property. For the rest, as concerns the man, if the Supreme God so will, it shall be as ye, oh Teukus who are my kings, shall be pleased to decide. VVhat name shall wc call this dead man by?1) "Thus much only have I to say." After the hearing of this or a similar story, the ulèëbalang says to those present: "What is your opinion, Teukus, in regard to what this man (or this master) has related ?" A chorus of the viliagers here interrupts: "That is clear enough, it may at once be answered, oh Teuku!" The ulèëbalang however transfers this task to his proxy speaker, one of the elders, and says to the latter, "let answer be made." "How am I to answer?" he enquires. "What means this 'how,' is it not clear enough?" pursues the ulèëbalang. After this authorization the elder speaks thus: "Good then, as to what this man has related, how stands it ? Know ye that are here (this to the next of kin, neighbours etc. of the slayer) aught of it ? Teil us what ye know." The answer, given more or less in chorus, runs thus: "It is established, even as this man has related it, oh Teuku ampön, so is the knowledge of all of us." The ulèëbalang to the elder: "well, if that be so, then is this fellow (the deccased) buffalo-flesh, it is permitted us to eat it!"
i) That is to say: 1 leave it to you to decide, whether he shall be esteemed thief 01' not.
The cider: "This fellow is even as the flesh of buffaloes, it is permitted us to eat it! Let us cry aloud now all together, the name of 1 fellow 18 thief! Cry w'th one voice, let us kill the thief dead !" These last words are loudly repeated by all present, and thus the case is concluded. It might be almost expected that at this last cry d simultaneous attack would be made upon the body of the thief, but now-a-days at least this does not take place. Not till the conclusion of this ceremony can the thief be buried Before the formal pat sak the body may be moved to the extent of ciragg.ng .t a few paces along the ground, but to raise it cntirely from the earth would according to the adat have the effect of making the sentence impossible. It is obvious that proofs such as those we have enumerated are not always forthcoming 111 all the numerous cases of theft in Acheh and especially in the highland districts, yet the adat with its peculiar rules of evidence demands "tanda" or tokens, and it is an established rule that where such tokens are wanting, no crime can be taken to be proved. ün the other hand it often happens that all are morally con-
v.nced that a certain person is in the habit of stealing or has done so in a particular instance, without their being able with the best will in the world to adduce the requisite proofs. It may for example be safely asserted, in view of the habits of life of the Achehnese, that any one who after nine o'clock in the evening is found lurking in a strange gampöng where no festival is being held, has come there with cnminal intent.and generally with the object of committing theft. In such cases there prevails a custom, not indeed tbeoretically recog- nized, but in fact commonly practised, of artificially supplying the necessary tandas or proofs after the evildoer has been put to death. 1 he slayer for instance breaks a piece out of the wall of his house, and places a chest which he has himself taken out of his house near the body, or ties his buffalo to the leg of the slain man, so as to give the appearance of his having met him leading the animal away. Though all who attend at the verification {peusah) are well aware of the true origin • of the evidence, they lend their support before the uleebalang (who is often as much in the secret as themselves) to x solemnly paraded fictitious story of the theft, and the declaration This fellow is as the flesh of buffaloes, it is permitted us to eat it," iets the slayer free from all guilt.
Nay more, this facile method of peusah panchuri is frequently resorted to even vvhen there is no question of theft. Suppose for in stance that a man has dctected his daughter, who is unmarried or whose husband is away, in the act of illicit intercourse, and has slain her lover. According to Achehnese adat he would now be exposed to blood-vengeance unless he had also killed his daughter, and if he ad- mitted the true nature of the case, he would subject her to the penalty of death by strangling and drowning combined (cheuki'e ) by command of the ulèëbalang. Por a moderate consideration, however, the latter may be induced to recognize as true the "tokens" of theft brought for- ward to suit the case of the honiicide, accompanied by a story that harmonizes with the circumstances, and which is upheld by the un- animous voice of the fellow-villagers of the slayer, who are not likely to leave their comrade in the lurch. Even ordinary murders attributable to no such circumstances as the above, but merely to liatred and the desire for revenge, are sometimes settled by the peusah panchuri through the venal connivance of the ulèëbalang. For the tracing of the criminal in case of a theft established by proofs, various methods are furnished by the adat; and these, while especially applicable in case of theft, are also employed in detecting those guilty of other crimes. When strong suspicion rests 011 a particular individual, and it is desired to extort confession, recourse is had to the method called wéng or srèng ba pha siblaïh. This consists in fastening a strip of rottan round the thigh of the suspect, and tightening it by twisting the ends together while the interrogation proceeds. Various other similar tortures are also employed. When a thief chances to be captured instead of slain, his relatives are given opportunity of ransoming him. In theory the blood-price or dict has to be paid in such cases, but in practice a sum proportioned to the resources of the family is accepted. Such ransoms are especially customary in the highlands, where theft is very common. Elsewhere, for instance in the XXV Mukims, thieves are more usually put to death on the spot. I he follovving methods serve to identify the thief from among a Ordea number of persons one of whom is believed to be the guilty party. Peutasa' or peuklo minyeu' ("the boiling of oil" or "the plunging
I IO
(the hands) into oil") is an ordeal requiring for its success tliat he who boils the oil should be able to do so in the proper manner and should know by heart the necessary incantations. Then the hand of the guilty person and none other will be scalded. In like manner pumuc breiich («bolting of ravv rice") has the desired result only when the requisite incantations are uttered over the rice. I hen ït is the guilty one alone that fails to swallow the rice. Another ordeal is teumanöm ("burying something"). The ulèëbalang calls together all the suspected persons into the meunasah, and gives them three days time to restore the stolen object secretly to its owner. Should this not be done they must again assemble. Then some person skilled in magie art "enchants" a kundur-fruit [boh kundö), and this is buried where the main road enters the gampöng. The result is that the stomach of the guilty party quickly swells up or bursts. Peulich beusoc ("licking the hot iron") is also in use. This kind of ordeal is even expressly recognized in the so-called edict of Sham- sul-alam '). A simpler plan, but one less effective than these ordeals, is the summoning of all the suspects into the meunasah, where the teungku causes them one by one to swear a solemn oath of exculpation J). The usefulness of ordeals of course lies in the belief which the majority of the people have in them. Where they are made ready with the requisite circumstance and solemnity, the guilty party often confesses at once, before recourse is had to the actual trial, and even if this be not so, the demeanour of the criminal at the commencement of the ordeal generally proclaims his guilt. Knowing this, some ulèëbalangs have been wont to invite the atten- dance on such occasions of a teungku from some distant place, distin- feuished by a yreat beatd or some other such impressive characteristic; this startling apparition has often resulted in confession. In cases of petty theft it is not unusual for the thief to be kept imprisoned for some days in or near the residence of the ulèëbalang. Before being released he has to promise under oath never to steal again. lllieit inter-Next to theft illicit intercourse (Arab. sitia. Arli *,H„n* course. attention.
| undertake | upon lus | own responsihility, | but the | ordeals can only | be applied by the | ulèëbalang. |
|---|
1) See Van I.angcn, Atjehsch Staatsbestuur, p. 469.
2) Such administratie, of oaths i an affair of the gampöng, which the keuchi'
s Caü
1 11
1 hc punishments imposed by Mohammedan law for this offence sexual intercourse between two persons not in the niutual relation of man and wife or master and slave) differ in proportion as the guilty parties may or may not have at some time in their lives had sexual ntercourse in a lawful marriage. If so the punishment is stoning to ieath, if not, 100 stripes with the lash, followed (according to the shafiite school) by banishment for at least one year. I he application of this law is extremely rare in Acheh, although its urovisions are pretty generally known. This is undoubtedly due to iome extent to the great difficulty of proving illicit intercourse according :o the requirements of the Mohammedan law of evidence; it is not jermissible to apply a punishment ordained of Allah to a crime which, :lear though it be to human insight, is insufficiently proved in accord- mce with the rules of evidence prescribed by Allah's law. In has happened in some few cases that some influential supporter >f religious law has endeavoured to make an example by applying it n all its rigour to this sin so universally prevalent in Acheh. This was lone for instance by Habib Abdurrahman, and the news spread hroughout the whole country that a couple had indeed been stoned or illicit intercourse. \ hen however some ulèëbalang conceives the ame idea, there is generally found something lacking both in the >roofs which the law requires and in the complete execution of the lunishment. As a matter of fact ditm is the order of the day in Acheh, whilst ts punishment is of exceptional occurrence unless where the injured lusband takes active measures. Many chiefs carry on intrigues with he daughters of men of lower degree, and are generally able to ullify or prevent the visible consequences. The same is done by ersons who hold forbidden intercourse with women of their own tanding (generally ***balei-***i. e. widows or divorced women). Dina with ïarried women is also far from uncommon. I here are two different sorts of punishment for this offence, when- ver any cognisance is taken of it. i". Wreaking of vengeance by the injured party (the husband, father, rother or other neai relative of the party concerned), sometimes )llowed by a further punishment at the order of the ulèëbalang, if ie injured party has only half finished 'lis task according to the •quirements of the adat.
I 12
The injured party may for instance slay the violater of the honour of his house on the spot, or elsewhere afterwards, if he can prove by a tanda (such as a garment of the offender who at first escaped him) that the deed has actually been pcrpetrated. If however he does not also slay the guilty woman (she being his wife or his blood-relation) he exposes himself to blood-vengeance, unless the other party chooses to refer the matter to the ulèëbalang and the Iatter Iets the adat penalty of cheukie be executed on the woman. This is done by taking the guilty woman to the bank of a river where she is laid on her back and held down under water; a bamboo is at the same time placed athwart across her throat, and on either end of this a rakan, or follower of the ulèëbalang, stands so as to throttle her. As a rule however her family forestalls this public scandal; she is secretly put out of the way by one of her own relations, though not before her lover has preceded her to the next world. It is to be noted that it very rarely occurs, and thcn only by mis- take that the injured party slays the woman (his own wife or biood- relation) whilc letting the man escape and yet retaining some article belonging to the latter as evidence. lo fulfil the (Iemands of morality in such cases there was in ancient times a custom, described by Van Langen in his Achehnese Dictionary, p. 35, but known to the present generation by tradition only, so long has it been discontinued. This custom was as follows: the escaped offender was dressed in the peculiar garments assigned by tradition to those guilty of manslaughter, and placed 111 the nndst of a square, one side of which was formed by his own blood-relations, and the -other tl,ree by those of the slain woman and her husband. He had then to cleave a piece of wood, after which the injured side had the right to chase and kill him, unless he suc- ceeded in escaping to the line occupied by his kinsfolk. In that case he was exposed to no further persecution. But as we have said, such a state of things rarely occurs and this method of dealing with the offender has now fallen entirely into disuse.
| «) This | dress consisted | of the | beungköng mentioned | by Van I.angen | (a cloth | wrapped |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| round the | body in | a peeuliar way), | an iron bajeé | or jacket, | a set of weapons | ÏL» |
| and reunchong) | the handles | of which were furnished | with no horizontal | hilts | for the hand | |
| to grasp. | These were called | alat sigcupih | = the wcapons | of one condemned | to death. The | |
| general mean.ng | of | sigtufoh is one | who is doomed | either as bi/a gib, | or as an outlawed | |
| h.ef or by the sentenee fashionable | and were those most commonly | of a judge. For a eonsiderable | used in Acheh. | time weapons of this patten, | became |
and
11 may be seen trom what has been just said, that illicit intercoursi is usually treated in Acheh as a private rather than a public breacl of law and order. 2". 1 he ulèëbalangs are quite ready to punish the offence of dina even when no one has complained of it, provided no disagreeabli consequences result to themselves or their friends. Here again thel action is dictated not so much by a vvisli to maintain law, order anc morality as to enlarge the profits of their privy purse. Occasion for such interference especially arises when the pregnanci of an unmarried woman (the most unequivocal tanda of all) become publicly known. 1 he causer of the pregnancy is traced down and th< guilty parties reminded by the ulèëbalang that they are really liabl< to the penalty of death (by suflfocation and drowning), but at the sam< time given to understand that the affair can be settled by paymen of a ceit.iin fine, provided that the tanda disappears. The fine is gene rally paid and abortion procured at the command of the ulèëbalang or else the latter (and this often happens) compels the guilty partiei to wed one another. Artificial abortion is of the commonest occurrence in Acheh, botl in and out of wedlock, and is especially resorted to in order to destroj that tanda of illicit intercourse which is the foremost means of proo prescribed by the adat. Even where the guilty parties are unable to pay the fine, the ulèë balang seldom exacts the extreme penalty of the law. He prefers t( punish them by incorporating thern among his followers as servant: without pay [ureucng sala/i), a step which is often accompanied by; compulsory marriage between the parties. 1 he rakans, or followers of the ulèëbalang, sometunes try to catcl couples in forbidden amours, in order to hale them before the ulèë balang, who squeezes them to the limit of their paying capacity b^ threats of other punishments. Nay, reliable witnesses declare that in the highlands especially, the rakans of the chiefs, in order to increasc these fines (a share of which they receive for their trouble) have women in their service who make it their business to entrap men into quite innocent convcrsations in lonesome places. 1 he woman can easily the man to sit down by her for a moment, a thing quite feasible owing to the comparative freedom of intercourse between the sexes in Acheh. Then the rakans rush up to them, tear off a portion of the clothing 8
i 14
of both man and woman and set this aside as "tanda." Where this is confirmed by the woman's "admission" that she lias had prohibited intercourse with the accused, it becomes easy for the ulèëbalang to extort a fine from the victim of the trick. iiishments. the CaS° °f those who are cntirely without means, the adat is sometimes made to appear to have as its sole purpose the punishment of immorahty. The following are among the punishments inflicted; fifty or more strokes of the lash inflicted by the rakans of the ulèë balang, in the presence of a crowd of the fellow-villagers of the accused; holding up to public gaze for a few moments by suspension from a tree by a rope passed under the arms; exposure for a wliole day to the sun; being tied up for a whole night in a place swarming with mosquitos or close to a nest of red ants etc. lliere are 110 definite adat-rules in regard to all these punishments. lliey are applied at the whim of the ulèëbalang not only in the case of illicit intercourse but also of other favourite sins of the Achehnese, whether some sacred occasion or place has been thereby extraordinarily polluted, or where the offence has been perpetrated with outrageous shamelessness, or by persons who are specially obnoxious to the chiefs or whose misdeeds they do not feel bouiul to overlook. I'or ill-treatment of women an adat punishment now little in vogue was formerly resorted to. The offender was set on a cow-buflfalo and led round followed by a hooting and jeering crowd. The late chiefofLhö'- Kruet 011 the West Coast used to apply this punishment to all sorts of other offences, not excluding dina '). Imprisonment, generally in cliains, serves less as a punishment than to accelerate the payment of a heavy fine, or to detain the prisoner for furtlier enquiry when it is feared that he might otherwise make good his escape. All acts are rigorously punished which in the opinion of ulèëbalangs or other chiefs amount to a slight upon the honour or dignity ofthem- selves, the members of their families or their friends. Thosc who are without
| punishments | are often | elaborated | and inflicted | by the | chiefs. Thus | the present | chief of |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| leunom | used often | to cause adulterous | lovers | to be deprived | of their | virility by theobjects | |
| Of their | passion. Ife | also punished | many | transgressors | of the law | as to fasts | by having |
| tiem led buffaloes, | about the and forcing | country them to eat | on all fours grass. | for some | days with rings | in their | noses like |
1) lil Acheh and its dependencies, just as in other Mohammedan countries, arbitrary
"5
means are put to death for such offenccs, vvhilc otliers are heavily fined. io ensure the payment of the fines in such cases a peculiar method I.anggch of compulsion is employed, called langgéh umong or the "excommuni-llmuns" cation of the rice-fields." The ulèëbalang causes a stake to be fixed in the rice-field of the guilty party, with the white spathe of a young cocoanut palm fixed to its upper end. From that time forth it is forbidden the owner to till his rice-field until the ulèëbalang is pleased to remove this token. Such removal, however, does not take place until the case issettled,
i. c. until the owner as it were redeems his right of possession by a money offering. Where he is unable or disinclined to do this, the excommunication lasts sometimes for years. The ulèëbalang proceeds gradually to have the field tilled by his servants or (as a sortoffeudal service) by his subjects, or else by private contract in consideration of '/2 the nett produce (mawaïh). After some years it passes irretrie- vably into his possession. This langgéh umong takes place when the offender has been guilty of striking (be it even on strong provocation) a member of the ulèëbalang's family, or lost a weapon entrusted by the chief to his charge or the like. Wilful provocation is often given in order to increase the cases of confiscation and more than one of the ulèëbalangs has the name of being "very clever in annexing rice-fields." With the daily life of the gampöng in the narrower sense of the words the ulèëbalang has little to do. Even the meulangga described above (pp. 77 et seq.) is carried out without his intervention. He must however be consulted in certain cases of change of residence and of alienation of rice-fields. Changes of residence are opposed as much as possible by the heads change of of the gampöng, and as good as forbidden in the case of females. residence-For changes of abode on grounds recognized by the adat, e. g. in order to exercise personal supervision over a part of the paternal inheritance situated elsewhere, permission is required from the keuchi's both of the gampöng vacated and of that where it is intended to reside. Where however the cause of the removal lies in the fact that the would-be emigrant has always lived on bad terms with his fellow- villagers, his rice-field in his former gampöng remains his own property, but he is not permitted to take his house with him; this is confiscated by the ulèëbalang.
Sale of lamls.
cover₅deins!'
Souices of evenueofthe ilèëbalangs.
I 16
should rathcr have said "her house," bccause in the division of inheritances houses are as far as possible assigned to female heirs. The father of the fannly can hardly be said to "cliange his residence," sinre he either lives in the house of his wife or occupies a temporary lodging. Sale of rice-fields, sugarcane gardens or court yards ') cannot take place before the owners of the lands bounding those that are for sak- have vvaived their privilege of buying in the immovable property in question for the price ofifered by the would-be purchaser. Both sale and mortgage of real property are executed witli some ceremony in presence of the authorities of the gampöng, and also, where possible, of a large number of witnesses. On such occasions certain formahties of the Mohammedan law are also observed '*). i°/0 or over of the value of every rice-field sold must be paid to the ulèëbalang. Sl"tS ^ ^ rccovcry of debts are submitted to the ulèëbalang when al' otIlcr means of settlement are found to be fruitless. The chief requires both parties to deposit a sum equal to that in dispute. This deposit is called ha ganchéng, lit. = means of including or binding. 1 his the Achehnese regard as a tanda jih maté lam jaroc hakim = a token or pledge that the suitor hands himself over as a dead body into the hands of the judge to deal with as he will. After the decree of the ulèëbalang has been carried out, he restores the ha ganchéng, but deducts from the debt settled by his intervention a portion (some-times amounting to from one-half to one-third of the whole), by way of recompense for his trouble. So far we have sketched the functions of the ulèëbalang as militarv „j • •. .... •' acltr, administrator and judge; we shall now add, partly by way of recapitulation, and partly to complete the picture, a resumé of the principal revenues and profits arising from the office.
a. The three chief ulèëbalangs or panglima sagi used to receive a
present from the sultan 011 the latter's accession to the throne. This wedding gift (jinamcc) has in later times amounted to 3 500, but against this it became later the established rule for a newly constituted panglima sagi to pay at least an equal sum to the sultan for the letters patent by which he confirms his appointment. These three chiefs also
| sale of ploughing | cattle, | will be found | in our description | of agriculture. |
|---|
1) Houses are not included, as in Acheh these belong to the category of movable property.
2) I' urther details as to these formalities, which are also required by the adat at the
"7
received gitts 111 money from the sultan 011 the occasion of some ol the important events of their family life.
b. I- ines imposed 011 his subjects for sundry offonces or illegal
omissions. Under this hcad we may especially mention the confiscations of rice-fields.
c. Fees for the peusah panchuri (verification of thieves), sometimes
paid even though tliere is 110 question of theft, and various other profits which are the fruit of venality.
d. In some districts, one or more per cent of the value of rice-fields
sold under supervision of the ulèëbalang. Where the sale takes place without his interference, these profits fall to the imeums or to the teungkus and keuchi's, while all witnesses of the sale are treated to a feast by the vendor.
e. ion/0 of all inheritances distributed by the intervention of the
ulèëbalang (ha' praé), a small share being reserved for the teungku or kali who prepares the accounts and for the keuchi' of the gampöng. ƒ. A share of all fish caught by means of drag-nets (pukat) wherever such fisheries exist within the jurisdiction of the ulèëbalang.
g. Where tliere are navigable rivers, wasé knala, a toll of i dollar
(according to some originally samaïh = >/4 dollar, or a certain quantity of husked rice) on every vessel that sails up the river, 5°/0 on all goods imported by foreigners, and 2 to s'/Ï'VO on those imported by natives of the country. li. A portion, often very considerable, of the debts recovered by the ulèëbalang's help.
i. The adat peukan or market tax, levied by the rakans of the
ulèëbalang (011 the Last Coast by separate officials known as haria) 011 the frequenters of all markets.
j. Houses declared forfeit by reason of change of residence 011 the part
of the owners owing to continual quarrels with their fellow-villagers.
k. Untenanted rice-fields or gardens whose owners have long since
left the neighbourhood and have not since been heard of; also the heritages of strangers who have formed 110 household in Acheh and of natives of the country who have died without leaving any lawful heirs. /. Contributions (almost compulsory in character) of imeums, pang- limas, keuchi's etc. to defray the expenses of important family festivals of the ulèëbalangs and their relations.
m. The services of those who are embodied in the following of the
uleebalang eithcr by way of punishment for ofifences committed, or on account of thcir inability to pay the fines imposed upon them.
n. Unremunerated services required of their subjccts by influential
uleebalangs for the construction of their houses and strongholds or the tilling of their rice-fields. Bcsides the above, the uleebalangs lay claim to a number of other sources of profit which vary with the locality, such as imposts on the sa of firewood, bricks, cocoanuts, cocoanut oil etc., a share of all jungle-produce or plants sawn in the forests, gifts of the rice or fruits that fust ripen, a portion of all cattle slaughtered, fees for the right to collect turtles' eggs, a share of the profits of gambling, a portion of the pitrah and jakeuët etc. The uleebalang is also paid for the certifi- cates required for the issue of ordinary passports and those for the haj. Where pepper is grown, the chief gets so much a pikul as wasé. As we have already seen, a portion of the administration of justice is taken out of the hands of the uleebalangs by the imeums and keuchi's by the way of amicable settlement. It is only however by like amicable means that the latter officials can obtain payment of their dues. They dare not for instance apply the punishment of cheukic or other adat-penalties or fines, or excommunicate rice-fields, or identify thieves, or exact a deposit of ha' ganchéng in dealing with suits to recover debts, or embody men among their followers etc. At any rate, imeums who venture on such measures have already reached the rank of independent uleebalangs. Attitude of subject to
rhe Achehnese has been accustomed for centunVs
^ tr. v,v/u.-Mutiauit „:.i ui. chief. c eg ree of independence in the management of his own afiairs. He pays but little heed to the uleebalang or other authorities in matters apper- taining to his family and gampöng, and is wont to show a certain impatience of control more akin to license than to servility. Yet he approaches the representatives of territorial authority with deep sub mission. The ordinary man of humble rank makes his seumbah (the habitual native greeting) at their feet or knees or, if at a distance, by placing his hands on his head with the words seumbah ulön tuan = "your servant's respectful greeting" '). If the uleebalang wishes to be very polite, he replies seumbah keu pbteu A/ah «respectful greetings
| .) This | is the token | of respect | under the | adat. In the | ease of teungkus, | etc., it |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| is replaced | by the arab | (Ach. |
leubès salam sa/cu'ém).
ire ire for for our our Lord Lord God' God';; or or where where the the reverence reverence consists consists only only in in an an jbcisancc jbeisance made made at at his his fcet feet or or knees, knees, by by receiving receiving this this as as it it were were with with lis lis hands hands (sambot). (sambot). Many Many however however take take 110 110 noticc noticc at at all all of of the the seumbah seumbah )f jf their their dependants. dependants. The The Achehnese Achehnese are, are, comparatively comparatively speaking, speaking, among among the the least least well-well-nannered nannered of of the the inhabitants inhabitants of of the the Archipelago, Archipelago, yet yet in in their their behaviour behaviour :owards :owards their their chiefs chiefs they they pay pay regard regard to to sundry sundry formalities. formalities. If If a a man man se se sitting sitting 011 011 the the roadside roadside as as the the ulèëbalang uleebalang and and hls hls retinue retinue pass pass by by md md omits omits to to ask ask men men ah ah or or forgiveness forgiveness for for his his presence, presence, he he may may feel feel mre mre at at the the least least of of a a beating beating from from the the rakans rakans by by way way of of correction. correction. Both Both the the chiefs chiefs and and all all the the members members of of their their retinue retinue are are as as a a rule rule /ery /ery free free with with such such sharp sharp admonitions admonitions towards towards persons persons of of low low degree. degree. 1'he 1'he ordinary ordinary Achehnese, Achehnese, who who is is prone prone at at the the smallest smallest insult insult to to draw draw bis bis reunchong reunchong or or si sikin kin on 011 his his equals, equals, shows shows no no rancour rancour against against ill-ill-treatment treatment on on the the part part of of the the uleebalang ulèëbalang and and his his folk folk or or even even the the meum. meum. He He fears fears them, them, and and it it is is his his natural natural impulse impulse to to bow bow to to superior superior power power alone, alone, but but to to this this he he submits submits unconditionally. unconditionally. Impossible Impossible as as it it is is for for the the uleebalangs uleebalangs to to exercise exercise despotic despotic power, power, :hey :hey loom loom before before the the individual individual as as irresistible irresistible forces, forces, even even though though he he bas bas the the support support of of his his kawöm kawöm to to rely rely upon. upon. The The ulèëbalang uleebalang lias has a a powerful powerful and and numerous numerous kawöm kawöm united united to to him him through through interest interest and and Jtherwise; jtherwise; he he has has also also his his various various rakans, rakans, who, who, though though taken taken as as a a ivhole ivhole they they would would not not be be likely likely to to make make an an imposing imposing impression impression 011 011 1 i European, European, constitute constitute a a formidable formidable force force in in the the eyes eyes of of each each kawöm kawöm ind md gampöng. gampöng. Every Every real real or or supposed supposed shortcoming shortcoming on on the the part part of of their their subjects subjects is is heavily heavily punished punished by by these these chiefs; chiefs; but but who who can can help help the the former former to to abtain jbtain justice justice against against an an uleebalang? ulèëbalang? They They have have only only to to hope hope for for his his mercy, mercy, and and as as a a rule rule he he inspires inspires mistrust mistrust rather rather than than hope. hope. It It is is only only ivhen ivhen he he can can shelter shelter himself himself among among the the ranks ranks of of some some rival rival leader leader that that the the Achehnese Achehnese will will put put himself himself in in opposition opposition to to a a chief'). chief').
| i) During | the last three | years, that | is to say | since a scrious | attempt has | been made |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| towards the | proper government | of (Ireat | Acheh, | the uleebalangs | and their subjects | have |
| learncd to | live in peace | with each other. | They have | been taught | to submit their | disputes |
| to the decision | of the Dutch | Government, | to carry | on the administration | of justice | and the |
| control of their with civil authority. | districts | subject | to the guidance | of Dutch | officials, who are invested |
entirely
§ 8. The Rajas (Sultans) of Acheh.
. °"r 'L"C"l,,",n politica] system of the Aehehneae has mad Ath.h. lt. apparent that the-Sultan of Acheh" is far from being 1111 a„ i„di,pe„ «1UI3UCI1- cnKl*» «14-1. • i r y 1 dement therein. Yet so far back as the sn,™ of Acheh has always had her kings. In the official (Malay) documents ie 'ing is called sultan. The Achehnese, however, term him raja Acheh and also call him pbteu (= «our lord") in the third person, and in the second harab meulia, sometimes pronounced *haram lia (*lit. "may splendour be thy portion"; but the expression has obtained the force of a title and is used to signify "Your Majesty"). The affirmative answer to a question, command or remark of the sultan is dèclat') (i. e. (/aula/, prosperity or happiness). In the introduction we have already learned in a general way the true significance of these port-kings in the history of the country of wh.ch they are the nominal rulers. There is nothing to justify us in misrule in which we find the country as
| regarding | the condition | of |
|---|---|---|
| UinS | f a ast | wc |
| rule | the sccond | haIf |
t [ ° P ll"°rdered government. Even the demands made on the uleebalangs by the port-kings in the most flourishing period of t ' of the löth and first half of the i₇th century were extremely moderate and bear witness partly to the want of power on the part of these princes to control the government of the mter.or and partly to the small interest they seem to have taken in any such interference. Even the edicts ascribed by general consensus to Meukuta Alam (1607-36) confine themselves within very narrow although tl,at prince had at his command a considerable fleet and a small standing army. Besides, these documents are not evidence of a state of things that ever actually existed, but simply the expression of the wishes of the king and his councillors as to what they would see carried out. It was enough for the successive Sultans to have immunity from annoyance at the hands of the numerous potentates of the ïnterior, and this object they easily gained by the means that lay beneath their hand.
,Th' rr,i°" 0f "'C '°Wla"dS ^ ®°vcrncd dire«ly thcir the Sultan. actual domain was not very extensive J), and even this small territory
JaVaneSe f r confi
| but°n™r but ne\er | reDlacp₁''th replaces | the ^ pronoun | in any | other sense | than ^ this. ° | ™»tion or acquiescence, |
|---|
2) As 'egards this question see Van Langen'. Atjchsch Staatsbestuur pp. 405 et seq.
was in a great measure withdrawn from their direct control in the period of their decline. Some few gampöngs, peopled for the most part by strangers or servants or slaves of the sultan, remained subject to the private lordship of the rajas, but the major portion of the territory adjoining the Dalam, about 24 gampöngs in all, was administered by a Panglima as an appurtenance of the principal mosque {Meuseugit Raya). The office of Panglima Meuseugit Raya was hcreditary, and thus soon came to be distinguished from an ordinary ulèëbalangship only through the name and proximity of the Dalam. The anibitious eftbrts of Teuku Kali Malikön Adé towards the acquisition of a territory which would rnake him an ulèebalang in the full sense of the word, were crowned with success at a favourable moment, and he wrested from the weak Panglima Meuseugit Raya the half of his territory, twelve gampöngs 011 the right bank of the Acheh river. How little these two ulèëbalangs can be rccognized as simply servants of the sultan, may be judged from the fact that they occasionally made war on one another. The sultan helped first one and then the otlicr with money and munitions of war, and his followers were to be found in both the rival camps. \ hen a dispute arose as to the succession to the throne the Panglima Meuseugit Raya and the Teuku Kali Malikön Adé usually espoused opposite sides. Besides this special territory of the sultans, which quickly dwindled to such slender proportions, Achehnese tradition notices an important means adopted by the earlier sultans for strengthening their internal authority, namely the institution of wakeuëh lands '). Wakeiieh (zuakap in Javanese, Malay and Sundanese) is the Arabic Wakeuëh waqf. This last word signifïes property withdrawn in perpetuity by lands" its owner from all alienation, and devoted to some object permitted by the Moslim law. Wakeuëh is known to the Achehnese also in this sense; they use it especially to denote things the use or proceeds of which are devoted by the original owners to the purposes of a mosque,
this institution
| kindred institutions | are undoubtedly | assigned to too late | an epoch | by Van | I.angen | in his | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Atjchsch Staatsbestuur | pp. | 405 seqq. | The great antiquity | of wakeuèh | appears | from the fact | |
| that the peculiar | position of the people | of the Mukim | Lhèë or the | III Mukims | Keureukön | ||
| may be directly | traced to it, | though | the original | intention was never | attained. | Besides, | it |
| could only | at a time when | the sultans | still exerciscd | considerable | power. |
1) It is impossible to fix the exact time when was first established. Sundry
have originated
as for example gardens, the furniture of a chapel etc. Rice-fields which are made waqf for the benefit of a mosque are however usually described by another term, sara ') and are spoken of as umong sara or umbng sara meuseugit or ineusara meuseugit. But wakeuëh is much better known in the sense of a territory or a piece of land which has been placed in a peculiar legal position by the sultans. What this position originally was cannot now be easily traced, as the institution has entirely degenerated. From the information given by the Achehnese we might conclude that wakeuëh lands were those the usufruct of which the sultans had presented to some one or other of their favourites after duly compensating the owners. The epithet is also applied to the strip of ground seven great fathoms (deupa meunara) on each side of the Acheh river, reserved from ancient times to the sultan. Subjects might build or plant within this reserve but the land never became their property, and the sultans could always withdraw the right of user. This royal privilege no doubt onginated in the interest of an unimpeded exercise of their sovereignty by the kings of the port. The name tanbh raja is indeed more com- monly used than wakeuëh to describe this reservation. Then again we find this latter word applied to the inhabitants₂) of a certain district who have been relieved from sundry burdens and duties exacted from the rest, and exempted from the authority of the local chiefs, a con- dition which we find elsewhere described by the term bibeuëh 3). Another explanation given for this word assigns to it a purely
| 0 This has | nothing to do | with shar' = | «sacrcd law", | for this word | would be | pronounced |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| in Achehnese | as chara | or sara\ It | is sometimes | explained by | its meaning | of "with |
| ' '. | the rice-fields | that appertain | to or | are connected | with the | |
| mosque. It means of support." | is probably | however derived | from the | sara which | means | «provisions |
| a) In the | two ancient | epic poems | Malém | Dagang and | P6ch»t Muhamat | (see |
| p. 84 above) | we find frequent | mention | of ureueng wakeuéh | ,,iM (or „ia') raja = | «wakeuëh- | |
| men on the | side of (or | with) the king." | This appears | to mean that | a certain | district was |
| allotted them | to ve in, | within which | they enjoyed | complete independence, | while they | |
| remamed respons,ble lances. | to | the king alone | for their actions. | They were | thus a sort | of free- |
| to their descent | or their | personal importance. | For example | where a scion | of a distinguished | |
| faniily or a | pand.t of widespread | celebrity | together | with his next | of kin resided | in the |
| territory of | an ulèebalang, | it was regarded | as a nutter | of course | that the latter | should |
| exert but a | very slender | auth rity over | them, and that | he should abstain | from | pressing in |
| !(Mal. m'i ?, 01 bas). l | ' '" | subjects. These | persons were | titeueh |
3) rhe term tilWuèh is also applied persons who enjoy a kind of independence owing
a W th lhus Malay u of Acheh,
to
() e Clams W Ch he 0rdinaiily made 011 his
'23
political meaning. According to tliis 011e of the carly sultans succeeded in getting the ruling chiefs both in Acheh proper and the various dependencies to consent to a ccrtain portion of their territories (usually 3 mukims) being severed from their control. The chief or chiefs of these smaller districts were thus brought directly under the sultan's rule and withdrawn from that of the ulèëbalangs. It is said that the inhabitants of some of these wakeuëh-districts were bound to render certain services to the sultan on particular occasions. At the same time there is clear evidence that the institution of wakeuëh-districts was not due to the sultan's requiring labourers or servants. 1 heir object was to possess within the sphere of each powerful ulèëbalang a territory of their own on which they could rely to give support to their efforts at centralization. 1 he inhabitants of such a district were required to refrain from taking any part in the incessant quarrels between great and small ulèëbalangs, to stand without and above parties, and to maintain a neutral field of observation and operation for their superior lord, who could appoint as chiefs of these districts persons in whom he reposed the greatest confidence. '1 he word tvakaïèh in the Achehnese vernacular represents more than one of the ideas just alluded to. That some truth lurks in the last mentioned political explanation may be gathered from certain features of the condition of the country as the Dutch found it at the commencement of the Achehnese war. 1 he district of the "III Mukims" par cxcellenceJ), generally called Mukim Lhcc, and now officially known as the III Mukims Keureukön, belonged to none of the three sagi of Acheh. Both the sagi of the XXVI and that of the XXII Mukims claimed that this district originally belonged to them, but both allowed that it had for a long time past been withdrawn from all connection with their Panglimas. The people of the "Mukims I hree ' were also well aware of this, though tliey acknowledged that they were urcuéng Tunöng, thus admitting the cor- rectness of the assertion of the sagi of the XXII Mukims. In the wars between the two above-named sagi, the Mukims III took part with neither side. The people of the latter thus removed the
| i) Even | now this | district is usually | described | as Mukim Lhee (the | "Mukims | Three₁'), |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| whilst other | uleëbalangships | of three | are called | "the three | mukims so and so' | e. g. |
| I.hcë Mukim | Lam Rabo, | I.hèë Mukim | Kayèë Adang | etc. In like | manner the | IV mukims |
| of the XX|are always | known as Mukitn Peutt | and the | V'Il Mukims of Pidic as Mukim | Tujöh. |
mukims 1
corpses of the slain for both parties, and permitted no fighting to b< carried 011 within thcir own tcrritory. The only instance of the administration of these Mukims by a singh rulcr within living memory is that of a certain «lama named Teungku Chot Putu, who succecded in attaining to some degree of authority there in the middle of the present century. This expounder of the aw derived from his piety, learning and severity such an overwhelming influencc over the three imeums and their subjects, that although not .nvested with any political power, he acted in fact as ruler of the Mukim Lhcë. Before his appearance and after his death these mukims were self-governing, yet held in due respect the tradition of their pecuhar constitution. His son Chèh Chot Putu, though essentially a worldly man and no scholar, inherited some of the respect paid to his father, but his efforts at playing the róle of ulèëbalang of the III Mukims have not been crowned with success. 1 he name of 111 Mukims Keureukön now usually given to that dis trict, coupled with the fact that a family resided therein, one male member of which enjoyed the hereditary title of Teuku Keureukön, pomts to the efforts made by the holders of that dignity to gain the supremacy there. Here we have anothcr example of that samc degene- ration of offices in Acheh, which we have seen above ') in the case of the Teuku Kali Malikon Adé etc. Among the principal court officials in the period of prosperity of the sultanate there was a royal secretary with the title Keureukön Katibulmuluk₂) (vuig. «Katiböy mulut"). This title coukl more easily pass fiom father to son than the art of composing and writing Malay letters; and besides, the importance and extent of such correspondence dwindled with the decay of the court. The work performed in earlier times by the Keureukön Katiböy Mulut, in so far as it did not altogether fall into abeyance, was carried on by common servitors of no rank, who were called Kram Poten or " writers to our supreme lord." As however all official documents have even down to the present day been modelled on the pattern of those of the prosperous period, there were and still are often to be found at the beginning of letters and edicts of the sultans of Acheh
krui/, ul-mulk, «writcr
ine worus: nis iviajesty ordered this to be wntten by the Keureukön katibulmuluk \ e have here thus another example of an hercditary title-bearer who became an ulecbalang pbteu without work or fixed income and without territory. Since the establishment of one of their number in the Mukim Lhèë, the Keureuköns have been among those whose in- fluence was a factor to be reckoned with in that wakeuëh-district, although they have never come to be recognized as its chiefs. 1 hree of the XX\ I Mukims were in like manner free from tlie control of the Panglima Sagi-); and though it cannot be said that the sultans held supreme control there in more recent times, it still seems probable that this district also was made wakeuëh originally with the intention just indicated. The mukims Luëng Bata, Pagarayé 3) and Lam Sayun are regarded as properly belonging to the XXV Mukims, yet this trio seems also to have been formerly wakeuëh. Within the memory of man however, the only tracé of such a status lias been the independence of the chiefs of these mukims. 1 he influential and powerful imeum of Luëng Bata was indeed on many occasions the adviser and ally of the sultan, but this very relation made it necessary for the latter to liold this chief in great respect and treat him with marked distinction. We must thus regard these wakeuëh-districts of 3 mukims as being merely the relics of earlier conditions; the period during which they served to advance the political aims of the sultans was in any case of very short duration. Siinilar survivals of wakeuëh districts of tliis description are to be found in Pidië and some other dependencies, but their chiefs have long been free from the control of the sultans. It is said that there were 011 some of the islands (Pulö Wè for example) wakeuëh lands of a different class, reserved by the sultans with the view of appropriating their produce. Of the remaining methods resorted to by the sultans for the mainte-Maintenanci nance of their authority, we have already made mention of several in of,hecourt-
| suppose | that the oflice | of eonfidential | secretary | here referred | to was | in active | existence |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| down to the | most recent | times. |
1) Some waters have made a false deduction from this circumstance, and would have us
2) See \ an Langen s Atjehsch Staatsbestuur, p. 406, sub. 5.
3) From the Malay pagar ayer, the Achehnese for which is pageué ie.
I 26
the course of our description of the system of government in Acheh. I lic edicts quoted above (sce p. 5), dealing with the ceremonial ob- served at court on all solemn occasions, have given an exaggerated impression of the importance of the port-kings, which has been still further corroborated by the reports of European travellers who saw them at the zenith of their prosperity. In these edicts are set forth the names, relative rank and high-sounding titles of a considerable number of court dignitaries. In some cases they also mention the duties which these officials had to perform, though it is impossible in many instances even to guess at the truc significance of the offices they held. 1 here is no doubt that many of them served simply to enhance the glitter of the court. These gradually disappeared, leaving 110 tracé behind, when the kingdom and the power of the sultans dwindled away, and the latter were forced to share with others even that little that was left them. Some again underwent the change we have so often referred to; their titles became hereditary, and they found means on the one hand to have allotted to themselves a portion of the revenues of the port-town, and on the other to seize some favourable opportunity of changing from ulèëbalang poten into ulèëba- langs with a territory of their own. Kfforts of To the examples of Tcuku Kali Malikon Adc ') and Teuku Keureu kon₇) he courtiers.,, .... _,. o attain the Q₁₁₀*0" above in ïllustration of this revival of offices, wc may now adel ulèëbalang-onc or tWO others. ship. Icuku Nanta Seutia was originally an "ulèëbalang of our supreme lord, with which hereditary rank he was invested for exceptional services to one of the princes. Sucli a rank carried with it no more than dignity and claim to respect, but it made its holders unwished- for guests in the ulèëbalangship where they established themselves. Here they were of course free from all control (bibeueh) and in a position to make inroads on the rights of others. Nanta Seutia suc- ceeded in detaching the VI Mukims from the control of Teuku Nè', chief of the great mukim of Meura'sa, and the protests of the latter refterated down to the present day have been of no avail against this secession. [In 1896 the Nanta family having taken a prominent part in the treachery of Teuku Uma against the Dutch, the Nè' family was
1) See p. 98 above.
2) See p. 124 above.
12 7
restored to power. When the Nantas were expelled, the Dutch Govern ment appointed as Chief Teuku Raja Itam, a son of the Teuku Nè' who was ulèëbalang of Meura'sa at the beginning of the Dutch opera- tions in AchehJ. A teacher of celebrity, Feiingku Hamba Alah whose tonib in the mukim of Silang is still revered as a lioly place, exercised during lus life a powerful influence on the people of the XXVI Mukims. The panglima of that sagi, whether from respect for his learning or in order to neutralize his influence, made over to him the government of thirteen of his mukims and let him enforce Allah's law there to lus heart's content. Circumstances favoured the efforts of his descen- dants to retain this control, and thus the hereditary ulèëbalangship of the XIII Mukims I ungköb became established without any distinc- tively religious character, so that the later bearers of the title have exchanged the religious dignity of Teungku for the worldly one of leuku Imeum Tungköb. lo take one or two further examples from the dependencies, the title Teuku Hakim borne by one of the three chiefs in the upper part [>f 1 ).iyPangulèf Sidc 'f Meulaböh, who who was undoubtedly at one time an official under he chief of that place, charged with the task of making judicial en- luiries, is now in fact 110 more than headman of Puló U (vuig. Simalur). So little control had the Sultans of Acheh over the course ofevents, hat whatever may have been their purpose in establishing these /arious offices, the latter became in a short time part and parcel of he indigenous institutions of the country, or else disappeared altogether. rhe portion of the port-king's supremacy which survived longest was i kind of lordship exercised over the neighbouring seas and harbours, md tllls 's in which we must seek the true significance of the :ultanate from the very commencement. With the shortlived period >f prosperity ended all such glorious expeditions as those undertaken 11 the 17'h century against Malacca and Pahang, but the bold seafarers nul pirates of Acheh continued to make themselves dreaded along the :oasts of Sumatra and among the surrounding islands. The monopoly >f trade claimed by the great sultans could in the end no longer be
J ~ uv.ptuuciitics iiiciL uareci to refuse payment of the wasé (the sultan's share of the liarbour dues) though they managed to reduce the amounts demanded by bargaining. 1 he sunis collected by expeditions sent round for this purpose, together vvith the sadly dwindled liarbour dues of Banda Acheh, formed the principal sources of revenue of the later sultans. Much of this liowever stuck to the fingers of collectors and administrators. The Achehnese slave-traders were until quite recently the terror of Nias and the adjacent islands.
prlrogatives" In ^ .aS Wd' aS written tradition we occasional mention of the sultan's seven prerogatives. They alone had the power to inflict certain punishments, five in number, which could never be imposed by uleëbalangs, viz. the lopping oft of hands, impaling, a sort of crucifixion which consisted in the exposure to view of the dead body of the offender nipped in a cleft tree-trunk, the slicing ofif of flesh from the body of the condemned (sayab), and the pounding of the head in a rice-mortar (sröh). I he privilege of firing a cannon at sunset, and the right of being accosted with the expression du-lat') completes the tale of the seven privileges. It is to be observed that the two last-named are of little real importance, while the special powers of punishment reserved to the sultans were, it is true, seldom or never exercised by uleëbalangs, but very rarely also by the sultans themselves, if we except the occasional lopping off of the hands of thieves. I"o these seven privileges may be added the right of of coining money, to the sultans 2).
| which | was also reserved | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| e fU 1-ajas. | 1116 bligati | n laitl | 011 tlle |
tions óf the ° ° u^^balangs by some of the edicts, of reporting to the sultan the sentences imposed by tlicm, and bringing before him all suits in which strangers (including Achehnese from otlier ulèëbalangships) were concerned, always remained a dead letter. Such reports were never made, the sentences of ulèëbalangs were 011 the same footing as tliose of independent chiefs, and cases aflfecting Acheh nese not subject to tlieir jurisdiction were either decided by them in consultation with tlieir fellows, or remained unsettled and gave rise to quarrelling and stri'fe. How the law stood in the case of real foreigners from saying of the Achehnese to
| may best | be learnt | the common |
|---|---|---|
| pp. 427—435. |
1) See p. 120 above.
2) As to coin i» Acheh herc only refer
we nced to Van I.angen's Atjehsch Staatsbestuur
I 29
those tvho would injure tliem: "Do you take me for a foreigner (or a Kling) to whom anything may bc done with impunity?" Even property left by strangers who die in Acheh without having formed a Household there, falls into the hands of the ulèëbalangs! We have already clearly seen ') how little the appointment of imeums and the subdivision of the country into mukims contributed to central- ization of authority and conformity to religion. Some show of supremacy was maintained by the sarakatas already Deeds ot referred to-), letters patent of appointment or rather recognition of the aPPointmei " i liiv-or recog-
principal hereditary holders of offices or titles. At the end of this chapter will be found a translation of one of these latest products of the royal chancery, the deed of recognition of the present Panglima Meuseugit Raya by the pretender to the sultanate at Keumala. This document like all the sultans' edicts of appointment I have met with (even including those of very early date), is composed according to established models with slight occasional modifications. It dififers only
1) Pp. 83—84 above.
2) PP- 7—8 above.
9
!30
in some trifling details from the other deeds vvhich the cliiefs 011 this side of the "linie or Dutch pale ') have succeeded in obtaining by pilgrimages to Keumala. At the top of such sarakatas in the niiddle of the sheet, we find the chab sikureueng or "ninefold seal"2) whence the documents derive their common name. Ihis contains the name of the reigning sultan in the central space, and in eight circular spaces surrounding it the names of eight celebrated sultans who preceded liim, and whose blessing is thus invoked on the deed. The choice of these eight names rests with the reigning sultan; those of Eseukanda Muda (Meukuta Alam), par excellence the prince of old Acheh, and of the immediate prede- cessors of the reigning king are never omitted, but great freedom of choice is shown as regards the rest. On some of these documents there stands at the side of this seal the small rectangular private seal of the reigning prince. In the preamble, which is somewhat magniloquent and besprinkled with Arabic words and phrases, the blessing of Allah, of the 1'rophet, the saints (of whom Abdul-Qadir Jilani is specially named as the prince of mystics) and the deceased kings of blessed memory is invoked upon the KIT AIT SKAI. OR IIK I'RKSF.NT PRETILNI>ER-SI!I.TANsultaifs. decree. üf liis prede- cessors, sometimes the whole eight who appear in the seal, sometimes only two or three are invoked by name. The sultan then reminds the ulèëbalang, whom he recognizes as the successor in office of his fore-
f.ithers, of the obligations which he lays upon him. The enumeration of the duties, however, teaches us nothing in regard to the nature of
| period of | their pulicy | of "concentration" | (1884—96). | This poliey, | which has | now been | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| abandoned, | is in itself | enough | to account | for the | slow advance | of the Dutch | in their |
| conquest of | Acheh. Within | the | "linie" was | the seat | of government | and so much | of the |
| country as | had been | absolutely | reduced to | submission. | Outside | those openly | hostile |
| or of doubtful fidelity, | intersperscd | here | and there | with a few | who were | loyal to the | |
| Government. | We are reminded | of | the "pale" | in Ireland | in the ióth | century (Translator). |
1) Ihe "linie" was a line of fortresses thrown up by the Dutch in Acheh during the
2) See the plate 011 p. 129.
were
'3'
the offices, since ït is purely religious in character and almost uniform in all such sealed documents. To restore mosques which have fallen into disrepair, to build new ones, to compel his subjects to perform the public prayers and espe- cially the Friday service, and observe the fasts in the month appointed, such are the chief duties of an ulèëbalang according to the sarakatas with the chab sikureucng. I-rom this ït is abundantly clear that the sultans under whom the original models were composed had them drafted by ulamas who stood high in their favour, and whose influence in the country was not a neghgeable factor. Their employment for this purpose gratified the religious zeal of the ulamas and flattered their vanity, making them believe that they were carrying out a work of great importance; but for practical politics their labour was entirely thrown away. 1 he ulcebalangs, then, regarded these documents as nothing more than embellishments which they were glad to possess, but could do without if occasion required. The one object which the Sultans imag- med they would attain by means of these deeds of recognition, viz. some influence in the choice of the successor, was never actually reached. A new title-bearer did not report himself to the capital until the most influential men in his district had agreed on his appointment, or 111 other words satisfied themselves that he was according to the adat the lawful next of kin to the deceased ulèëbalang, and suf- fered from no moral or physical defect which rendered him unfit to hold office. In the decadent period many ulèëbalangs and other cliiefs found the lustre to be derived from the possession of the nine-fold seal not worth the trouble and the inevitable expense connected with it, such as doing homage to the sultan, gifts to officials and writers etc. They thus entered on office without any chab sikureucng, or were content with keeping in evidence the deeds of appointment executed by former sultans in favour of one or more of their forefathers. ihe position was the same, though 011 a very mucli smaller scale, as that of the Mohammedan kingdoms during the decay of the khali- fate of the Abbasides. While the latter were liardly masters in their own palace, we find in Egypt, Syria etc. one prince thrusting another from lus tlirone and robbing him of his provinces, and finally in his own good time going and demanding at Bagdad a solemn confirmation of
1 he mne-fold and the five-fold seal.
Acheh as the imperishable bride.
The power of the pang- limasofthe
the fait accompli, making it appear tliat the new state of things had been brought about at the vvill of the Khalif himself, There are sayings and stories current among the Achehnese which " show that they believed that the like had happened in their case; of these the most graphic is the following: a sultan once confirmed in his authority a chief who had risen to power through acts of injustice and deeds of violence, usurping the place of the rightful rulers. On his attention being drawn to the contempt which such an appointment would bring upon hereditary rights recognized by his predecessors in many documents, the sultan replied: "What avails the chab sikureueng (the nine-fold seal) to him who cannot show himself possessed of the chal? limong" (the five-fold seal, i. e. the hand as the symbol of power). Again when we speak of the sultanate of Acheh as it appeared in our own time, as being the ruined relic of what it once was, we must remember that this only applies to the importance of Banda Acheh as a commercial town and the external influence of the rajas, for even in past centuries the influence they exercised on the aftairs of the interior was limited to certain short periods, and left no enduring results behind. The sultanate retrograded in its relations with the interior also; but in this sense, that whereas in former times the sultan was primus inter pares as regards the ulèëbalangs, he was reduced to be a mere ward under the three great panglimas even before the end of that i7th century which began so magnificently '). These three chiefs were the guardians of Acheh, which was repres-.,. ented as a bride that continually renewed her youth; they gave her in marriage to whom they would after mutual consultation. They usually selected the bridegioom from the family of his predecessors, yet did not shrink upon occasion from the introduction of a new dynasty or even the choice of a foreigner, as we see in the case of the Sultans of Arab descent. The bridegroom had to pay to each of the chiefs a sum of 500 dollars as a wedding gift (jinamec or jeunamèc). The three guardians, the panglima sagi, did not however succeed in.,... tlle Iong 11111 111 retaining the supremacy over the federate dominions which they had possessed when this metaphorical marriage-contract was concluded. Panglima Pólém (Lord Elder Hrother) is the title which the chief of
1) See pp. 89—91 above.
'33
lh<_ aaii muKiui* nas Dorne ior many generauons past. Me is rcgardcd as the doyen of the chiefs of the sagis on account botli of the antiquity of his lineage, the bravery of the men of his sagi and its wealth. I lis sagi really numbers many more mukims than the name implies. In- crease of population has given rise to the formation of new districts, yet the traditional name of the sagi has survived. The same is true, though in a less degree, of the XXV Mukims, while the XXVI continue to correspond with their ancient name. A tradition which represents the Pöléms as sprung from the sultans is contradicted by them, and is without doubt partly legendary and partly concocted by their enemies to bring a stain upon their family. The legend is as follows: the great Meukuta Alam once suftered from a venereal disease and in order to cure it had recourse to the remedy (held in much repute among natives) of having intercourse with a healthy woman '). For tliis purpose he employed a black slave, and did actually recover from his discase. The slave however became pregnant, and as in Acheh great weight is given to descent from the mother's side, he was distressed at the prospect of having to acknow- ledge as his son the child of a black woman. Accordingly he sent her forth into the jungle, in other words into the district of the XXII Mukims. In regard to her journey there exist numerous stories which chiefly serve to account for the origin of the names of certain localities. According to the legend, the son, whose life was spared by the high- landers, became the first Panglima Pölém, chief of what is in many respects the most important sagi of Acheh. This tradition, of which there are also other versions less insultinsr o to the honour of the Pólém, does not seem to me to contain a single grain of historie truth. The title of "elder brother" probably typified the original relation between the powerftil sagi-chief and the sultan. Just in the same way we find two ulèëbalangs with the official title of "grand-fathers" («
| i) It is | a wide spread | theory among | the natives | of the | Archipelago, | that if a person |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| sufiering from recovery from | a contagious or mitigation | disease infects of the ailment. | another | with it, | he thereby | ensures to himself |
i U
relationship ("-father of the king"); it vvould indeed be very strange that such a chief should obtain the title of Maharaja while his liege lord was simply called Raja of Acheh.
TEUKU MUDA LATf.H, A COUSIN OH PANGI.1MA PÓLf.M.
The relations which prevailed between the house of Pólém and the sultans of Acheh give continual proofs of the respect commanded by the power ful chief of the highlands. Various stories are told about the father of the lately .deceased Panglima Pólém, resembling those narrated of the father of the present Teuku Nanta Seutia, chief of the VI Mukims of the XXV. On the few occasions on which they complied with the summons of the sultan to come and discuss aftairs of state, they entered the royal dwelling in foul clothing and addressed the
135
sultan as gata (the equivalent of tutoyer) remarking "we are nat won to say declatOf the Panglima Pólém it is said that he often disre garded for months all invitations to the Dalam, and finally, as a tokei of goodwill, journeyed to the Sultan's frontier and had a heavy gon<. beaten to announce liis presence, after which he returned home! Ye tliere arose in his own sagi another chief who thought himself no whi his inferior, the ulèëbalang of the VII Mukims Ba'ét. The power anc influence of these two potentates are among the most ancient ani most firmly established of all that now exist in Great Acheh. In the othei sagis the preponderance alternated between one ulèëbalang and another The panglima of the XXVI Mukims, had long been a person o small importance, as may be gathered from what follows. When tlu holder of the title died during the reign of Ibrahim Mansö Shah (1858—
70), one Teuku Muda Lampasèh was according to the adat the propei successor; he was accordingly, after reporting himself in the Dalam solemnly recognized by the sultan as panglima. Even before he had quitted the Dalam the firing of guns was hearc from the direction of the XXVI Mukims, and it appeared on enquiry that the people of that district, who objected to Teuku Muda Lampasèl on the ground that he was an opium-smoker, had installed a youngei brother of the deceased panglima as the latter's successor. This wa; Teuku ('luit Lamreuëng, father of the present panglima Teuku Nya Hanta, who is also called Teuku Lamreuëng '). The sultan knew no better way out of the difficulty than to recog- nize the second aspirant as well, so that tliere were then two panglima; in the XXVI Mukims. At the commencement of the war both chiefs fled to Keumala, bul Teuku Lamreuëng in the end re-established himself in his territory and tendered his submission to the Dutch Government. For this he wa; murdered in Pidië, whither he had gone to fetch his family, by tlu adherents of Teuku Lampasèh. His infant son escaped the same fate through the help of a faithful servant. This son was afterwards recognized by the Government as Panglima of the XXVI Mukims, while after the the death of Teuku Muda Lampasèh, the latter's son Teuku Juhan was appointed panglima at
of their
| predecessor. | See p. 92 above. |
|---|
1) Both were called benta as they had borne this rank during the panglimaship
I 36
Keumala. The journeys to Keumala undertaken by the ulèëbalangs who had tendered their submission to the government resulted in the
I
TEUKU NYA' BANTA, PANGLIMA SAGÖË OF THE XXVI MUKIMS.
recognition of Teuku Nya' Banta by the court, so that the doublé panglimaship continued to exist, but in fact Teuku Julian is not able to pose as a rival of Teuku Nya' Banta. Teuku Imeum Tungköb ') is to this day a powerful chief in the XXVI Mukims. The power of Teuku Ateue' (chief of the IV Mukims Ateue) on the other hand was according to tradition much more considerable in earlier times than it now is.
i) See p. 127 above.
l37
is calletl Teuku
| The | present | panglima | of the | XXV Mukims | Seuti; | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Ulama, | a name | which | lends weight | to the conjecture | that an earliei |
rEUKU CHUT TUNGKoB, ULÈËBALANG OF THE XIII MUKIMS TUNGKÖB.
| holder | of the office may have | distinguished | himself by his legal learning. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| His | name among | the people | is Teuku | Siah | (one of the | Achehnese | |
| forms of the | Arabic | Shaikh) | Ulama. | He lias occupied | himself but little | ||
| with | the government | of | the district, | and for | a long time | past the | |
| power | of sonie | of the other | ulèëbalangs | appears | to have | put that | of |
| their | nominal | in the shade. | The | true potentates | of this sagi are | ||
| Teuku | Nè' Peureuba | Wangsa, | chief | of the IX | Mukims, | Teuku | Nè' |
| Raja | Muda Seutia, | ulèëbalang | of the | Mukim | Meura'sa | (and earlier |
chief
also of the \ I Mukims), and 1 euku Nanta Seutia, who wrested the VI Mukims from the last mentioned chief₁). At the election of a new sultan, which was usually decided by a war between the different parties, the scale was turned not so mucli by the support of the panglimas as by that of the real wielders of power in their sagis. Thus in process of time the number of guardians af the sultanate increased, and the Achehnese authorities on adat have in noticing this change given the rein to their predilection for round numbers. Ihey speak of the "twelve ulèëbalangs, who appoint and dethrone princes; and describe them as consisting of four from each sagi -). To make up the tale of twelve, they call the head kalis of the :hree sagis ulèëbalangs, which is quite inaccurate. They of course nclude in their list the panglima sagi₃); thus two are left for each sagi who are regarded as the principal ulèëbalangs, or rather were so iccounted at the time when the tradition was placed on record. These "hief ulèëbalangs are: for the XXV Mukims, the two Nè's already several times alluded to; for the XXVI Mukims Teuku Ateue' and Feuku Tungkob, and for the XXII Mukims, Teuku Ba'ét, ulèëbalang >f the \ II Mukims, and Teuku Waki Chi' Gampöng Baröh, chief of he V Mukims. In reality this list (even if we disregard its subordination of facts o round numbers) at most represents the conditions that existed during. short period. 1 he whole twelve had not in the long run a voice in he affairs of the capital, while some of them had absolutely no sliare lierein. On the other hand there were ulèëbalangs in the sultan's enitory and the so-called wakeuëh-districts (as for instance Teuku Cali, the Panglima Meuseugit Raya, the Imeums of Luëng Bata and liade' etc.) who had much more weight in the scale tlian many of he members of the board of twelve. Speaking generally however, the uardianship exercised by the tliree sagis over the sultanate remains a iet, 110 matter who may at different periods have been accounted the lost powerful representatives of each.
| F I euku | Nanta, the | Nantas have | been declared | deposed | from the government | of the VI | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| lukims, am, son | and the native of the late | authority Teuku Nè' of Meura'sa. | in that place | is exercised | by the | young Teuku | Raja |
| ie Teuku | Chut Oh (short | for Abdöra'Sh, | i. e. Abdu ra'uf). |
1) Since the "defection' of Teuku Uma, who was married to Chut Diën, the daughter
2) See also Van I.angen's Atjehsch Staatsbestuur p. 404.
3) The panglima of the XXVI Mukims at the time when the list was recorded was
•39
At the solemn installation of a nevv sultan, his own proper ulèëbalangs installation played more or less the part of masters of ceremonies, while the kalis "„it^innc" and ulamas gave as it vvere tlieir blessing to the marriage of the raja with his country. We shall now give the most characteristic features of the ceremony of installation, as related to us by eye-witnesses of the last sultan's coronation. In the neighbourhood of the royal abode and of the bulè rö»i, in which the sultan received his guests, was a square space surrounded by a low wall. Inside this there was a platform, also square, composed as it seems of stones somewhat roughly piled together, to which access was given by a flight of steps. At the side of the platform, which was called branda scumah or pra na scitmah, was a small wooden gallery supported 011 posts. The opening in the low enclosing wall giving access to the enclosure in which the platform stood, was in the middle of its rearmost side, that is the side to which the sultan's back was turned when he took his seat 011 the branda seutnah. 1 his platform seems only to have been used for coronations and was suitably decorated 011 these occasions; at ordinary times it was neglected, so that anyone passing through the Dalam or Kuta Raja would hardly notice it. A debate lasting some weeks was first held by the three panglima sagi and other influential chiefs (in consultation, so far as they thought necessary, with the kalis and ulamas) to determine the most suitable candidate for the vacant throne. When their final decision had been sealed by the payment of the "wedding" presents to the three panglimas, a favourable day was fixed for the ceremony. During the forenoon of this day those couit dignitaries whose offices had not shared the universal downfall, were at their posts — especially the Panglima Meuseugit Raya, whose duty it was to keep order in the Dalam, and the I euku Kali Malikon Adé, who performed his functions within the space surrounding the branda seumah, with his blunderbuss hanging from his shoulder, and a white cocoanut spathe wound in his head cloth '). 1 he new sultan now took his seat on the platform, while the three head kalis of the sagis and some of the principal ulamas ranged them-
l) See pp. 50—51.
I40
acivc* ucnma nim. /\ nuge crowd vvatched the ceremony from a little distance. The first to approach were the panglima of the XXVI Mukims anc Teuku Ne', both of whom, accompanied by their attendants, advancec close to the wall within which the platform stood. One of the kalis, Teungku Lam Paya ') of the XXV Mukims, there- up°n recited a form of nomination introduced by the following word? from the Quran (IV, 62): 'Obey Allah and his Messenger and those atnong you who be clad with authority." This utterance was repeated in a loud tone by the Teuku Kali so that all the people might hear. After the conclusion of the form of nomination, the Teuku Kali called the panghma of the XXVI Mukims thrice in succession by his official title, to which the latter and his followers replied each time with a loud "dèëlat!" almost equivalent to "Yes, Your Majesty!" The panglima and his attendants then drew aside to make room for his fellow-official of the XXV Mukims; with him, and after him with the panglima of the XXII, the above ceremony was repeated, while the presence of Teuku Nè' at all three installations gave evidence of his intimate relation with the royal house. precedence ^ official order of precedence of the three sagis on ceremonial of the three occasions is always that here given, viz. XXVI, XXV, XXII. One might almost conjecture that this sequence was fixed according to the original number of mukims in each sagi, and that once so established it was always adhered to. Judging by their relative importance the order of precedence should be reversed. We may further observe that the coronation of the sovereign was and remained a contract with the three panglimas, though the choice of a sultan was governed to a great extent by entirely different influences. of'the'sultan The Dalam (usually called Kraton by the Dutch) and all that it and the contained, including the sultan himself, were since the earliest times the objects of a somewhat extraordinary reverence in the minds of the Achehnese, though this never prevented them from making a football of the sultanate at their pleasure. This feeling of reverence was founded partly on the fact that the Dalam was the centre and apparently the origin of the glory of a past almost fabulous in comparison with later
1) 1^AsAs tntonrf»rpHpnrpprecedence inir> rinl-rank ofr»f «Vilothis1kali**• <-11 •see~p. 101 above.„1**
times, and partly on the kindred fact that the Achehnese (though wrongly as we have seen) ascribe all the adats of the country to the earlier sultans. I'hese princes did indeed to some degree regulate the existing adat and endeavoured in vain to abolish a portion of it; yet what they did has suftïced to stamp all unwritten laws and customs of the country as "adat poten meureuhöm" = "the adats of our late Lords." 1 hus did the respect in which the reigning house was held develop Respect fo a sort of religious aspect, of which the following may serve as an 'hc d>na '>• illustration. On the occasion of the famous journey of Teuku Nè' of Meura'sa and his followers to the court at Keuinala, all who accom- panied him were implored by their friends and relations to bring back with them some water wherein the pretender to the sultanate had washed his feet. We may add that this young ne'er-do-well was for some time regarded by a portion of his subjects as kramat, i. e. one miraculously revealed as the chosen friend of God. As however this feeling of awe has within the memory of man ahvays been coupled with the conviction that the sole sovereign prince of the country exercised no perceptible influence on the conduct of aftairs '), and was in fact but an expensive luxury like the documents sealed with the chab sikureiïeng, all this reverence is, comparatively speaking, of very slight value from a practical point of view. 1 he rumours of the Dalam that reached the outer world were far Conduct o from pleasant. 1 he scions of royal blood (tuankus) fortunately for Acheh ^ uiankus not very numerous, were (and still are) convinced that they stood superior to the adat poten wen reu hout and all other adats which place <1 restraint upon human passion and wickedncss; they often led lives of the most savage immorality. 1 hey used to take from their subjects all that pleased their fancy, and death was a light punishment for opposition to their boundless license. 1 he daughters of the man of low degree were made the victims of their lust, and the results of such concubinage were artift- cially destroyed. 1 he people were powerless to resist the misconduct of the sultan and princes. The customary retribution for personal wrongs by the
| i) Raffles | remarks | somewhere | that the sultan | of Acheh | was revered |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| kingclom, | hut obeyed | nowhere. |
throughout his whole
wreaking of vengeance was even less available against them than against the ulèëbalangs and other chiefs '). In Kuala Batèë (Pidië) there was settled in recent times a branch of the royal family which was on bad terms with the Sultan. These tuankus had been repeatedly declared outlaws by the latter on account of piracies committed even on Achehnese nrahus and to tlie
TUAN'KU USKJJ.
of the Sultan himself. Vet none dared to assail them, being well assured that there was much danger and little honour to be gained by the slaughter of scions of the royal house. This is the family of pirates to which belong the Tuankus Usén and Abdömajét (Husain
i) See p. 119 above.
'43
and Abdulmajïd) who have now submitted to the Dutch [Government. There is no political significance in the fact that the people thus sufïfered many an injury to pass unnoticed, preferring to avoid the tuankus as much as possible. This exceedingly burdensome feudal system is simply a relic of past history. The servants of the rajas were also a terrible scourge to the people.
TUANKU MUHAMAT, SON dl' TUANKU ABDÖMAJÉT.
1 hey were generally men of ill repute — such for instance as had fled to the Dalam to escape a righteous blood-vengeance which threat- ened their lives. I he smallest shadow of an injury was eagerly seized on and represented by them as high treason, and they sometimes succeeded in inducing the raja or the members of his family to take
'44
| their view. | Wlien | their caprices | could | no longer | be patiently | submitted | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| to, it not | unfrequently | happened | that | they | were secretly | put out | of |
| the way | by the people | whom | they had | outraged. | |||
| It is thus | not surprising | that | the traditional | reverence | of the people | ||
| for the | rajas and | their race | expressed | itself | in a somewhat | peculiar | |
| manner, finding | vent | in words | and empty | forms | rather | than in deeds. |
TUANKU IBRAHIM, SON OF TUANKU AHLKÖMAJKT.
Kxamined closely, the power of the later sultans appears to have been actually confined to the limits of the Dalam, though the superficial O server nught draw another conclusion from the persistent survival of a different mode of address and of certain forms which really never had any substantial meaning. It was not only the powerful ulèëbalangs
of the sagis that made war on onc another. The lesser ulèëbalangs, who each controlled 12 gampöngs (Teuku Kali and Panglima Meuseugit Raya) did the same, though their territories marched with the Dalam, and they might more than other chiefs have been supposed to be creatures of the sultanate. Even the sultans own followers took part in these conflicts, espousing different sides. Had a sultan or a scion of the royal house, endowed with exceptional Attitude 01 strength of will and clearness of judgment, placed himself at the head !ue 1)ali?m al /• I. ^ ine out break O' tlle struggle a outrance which took place when the Dutch came to of the war-Acheh, and inspired the Achehnese people by precept and example, such a prince would without doubt have been for the invaders any- thing but a negligable quantity. Such an one could more easily than any other have succeeded in uniting mucli divided Acheh into a whole entirely hostile to the foreign foe. As it is, an ulama who preaches hol) war is able to deprive an Achehnese ulèëbalang of the allegiance of a considerable portion of his subjects; how much more could have been accomplished by a raja who was the ulamas' equal in sacred authority, and over and above this was clothed with the legendary traditions of the past greatness of Acheh ! Such a supposition, however, is not warranted by the actual state of things. Political foresight is, in these days at least, foreign to the nature of all Achehnese. A raja of Acheh in particular, who plunged mto the fray with persevering self-sacrifice in the interests of the people or their religion would be a phenomenon that the Achehnese themselves would be unable to explain except as a revelation of the boundless miraculous power of God. lo this we may add that nowhere could worse material be found for organizing a stout resistance to foreign invasion than in the lowland districts of Acheh in the immediate neighbourhood of the Dalam. There the people were "banda" or worldly-wise, and not dusön, "ignorant and countrified ' like the highlanders. They would indeed have preferred the continuance of the old regime without foreign interference, for they were inclined by their own past history haughtily to rebel against all ideas of foreign supremacy. Yet they were disposed to moderate views through abundant contact with non-Mohammedan as well as Mohammedan strangers, and were far removed from the frank belief in the invincibility of Moslim weapons in general and of those of the Achehnese in particular, which inspired the semi-savage highlanders. 10
I46
I hc bands of warriors devoted even unto deatli found but few recruit in the districts ncar the coast. Ihe people of tliis latter region would have preferred to construc out of the inevitable march of events conditions as endurable an< advantageous as possible, rather than squander life and property vvitl but little prospect of success. J wo causes, however, unitcd to prevent the majority of them fron bringing this to pass. First, the great internal division that prevailec among them and made it easily possible for a man of peaceful counsel? to be decried as a traitor by his enemies; and secondly the certainty that the people of the highlands would never consent to the bargain and slow though they were to render active support outside their own boundaries, might treat as infidels all who seemed to take the infidels part. '1 he lowlanders were accounted cowards by their highland brethren by reason of their leaning towards peace. Thus among the few in the Dalam who at first advised friendly negociations with the Gömpeuni '), there were some who wished to see this policy carried out in such a way as to keep the highlanders in ignorance of the real nature of the treaty which they hoped to con- clude, and mislead them as to the import of the hoisting of a foreign flag. As might have been expected amid the universal hatred and contempt for the infidel, which had not yet been reduced within bounds by sharp lessons, these isolated voices of worldly wisdom were speedily hushed. There was, besides, 110 single individual or body competent or authorized to adopt resolutions as to the fate of Acheh or even of the capital itsclf, since there was no guarantee that such resolutions would be binding 011 others. 1 he sultanate at once exhibited itself in all its nullity. The resistance offered was not that of an army collected and led forth by the prince or his military commanders, but was the work of unorganized bands, which combined their plans only so far as circumstances imperatively required.
| i) Gömpeuni, | the Achehnese | pronunciation | of "Compagnie," | is | used throughout | the | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| whole country | of Acheh | to signify | the Dutch | Government. | Many of the | people | believe it |
| to be the official | title of the representative | of that government | at Batavia | (Peutawi). Others | |||
| use the word | in the general | sense | of "government", | and | speak of gömpeuni | Blanda, göm | |
| peuni Inggrch (Dutch | and | English | governments). | The military | meaning | of the word | is also |
| known to the | Achehnese, | who even | use gömpeuni in the | collective sense | of "soldiers." The | ||
| ordinary word for | the latter | is sidadu. | (See | also Translator's | note on | p. 13 al>ove). |
47
Before the Dutch gained possession of the Dalam, the sultan had disappeared from the scene. During the subsequent course of the conflict, it was always separate and independent bodies of troops, led either by adat-chiefs or by some newly-arisen commanders of energetic personality, that turned their arms against the invaders through their own impulse or to advance their own interests. Thus the most powerful compulsion from without could produce no union in Acheh, utterly broken up as she was. The sole individual who succeeded during the first portion of the war in organizing the forces to a comparatively high degree was an ambitious and skilful foreigncr, Sayyid Abdurrahman Zahir by name. When Sultan Mahmut Shah died shortly after the loss of the Dalam, it was not thought necessary even in so perilous a crisis to select from among the candidates for the succession to the throne a man before all things. Ihey contented themselves with a child, Tuanku Muhamat Dawöt; and though his guardian Tuanku Asem (Hashim) was a man of royal blood most bitterly hostile to the Dutch Government, even he preferred to watch the contest with interest from a distance rather than himself to take a serious share in it, much less to enter the lists as a leader. When once the fugitive "court" had found a safe place of refuge in The Suita-Pidië territory, far removed from the theatre of the conflict, the con-natP afterthe .... taking the of dition of the sultanate became very much the same as it had been Dalam before the war, the scene alone being changed. I he young sultan, gradually emerging from childhood, soon showed that he aspired to something very different from sharing the weal or woe of his country as leader of the contest against the Gömpeuni. 1 rue to the traditions of his house, he sought and still seeks diversion in lawful and unlawful love, drink, fiddling, fights of animals, gambling and the pursuit of elephant and deer. His letters to the Achehnese chiefs still always commence with the solemn admonition continually to remember "Allah, his Messenger, the departed sovereigns and our- selves;" and this last reminder takes tangible form in the latter portion of these letters in a request to forward a certain sum of money or some costly merchandise. The ulèëbalangs and chiefs of the dependencies held only just so much intercourse with the "court" as their own inclination dictated. 1 he edicts whereby some among them are confirmed as holders of
certain ranks and dignities are just as solemn and pious in form as before, but of equally little consequencc in practice, as they simply imprint the cliab sikuveuëng on what lias been already won by inheri- tancc or by the chab limong '). The famous Teungku Tiró, vvho died in January i8gi, was not, as 1 iro. J y 7 ' has been so often represented, entrusted by the sultan with the regu- lation of religious affairs in Great Acheh. This ulama had worked up (by means which we shall describe later 011) to the position of com- mander-in-chief in the war against the Gömpeuni, and wished to arm himself to some extent against the jealousy of the adat-chiefs by an official authorization of the sultan, whereby he was placed on a level with the ulèëbalangs, or as he preferred to interpret it, over their heads. The "court" gave him, cautiously enough, a deed of appointment which in appearance made 110 inroad on the rights of the adat-chiefs, as it limited the province of the ulama to religious matters. At the same time all the parties conccrned were well aware tliat in the view of the ulamas every thing came under the liead of religion, especially antagonism to unrighteous adats, the waging of war against unbelievers, the administration of justice etc. Even after this formal appointment I eungku I iro submitted to 110 legal dictation from Keumala, nay even refused on more than one occasion to satisfy the sultans demands for money contributions. ku Uma Teuku Uma (Uinar) the celebrated chief of the West Coast who rose L mar). to great ness during the war, obtained supremacy over the vvhole of the West Coast by tact, good luck and knowledge of men. In this purely worldly ascendancy he was confirmed in just the same way as 1 eungku I iro in his so-called religious authority. I11 this case again there was a cautious mental reservation. Nothing could be refused to the man who from time to time propitiated the court by generous gifts, so in his letters-patent a large portion of the West Coast was made over to him. But when some of the hereditary cliiefs complained of this edict, it was pointed out to them tliat Teuku Uma was
| owing to a (juarrel | with | the local chiefs | to break up | his "court | at Keumala | and to | settle |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| first in one | place and then | in another. | For the last | three years | (1896—99) | i. e. since | we |
| have begun | to deal seriously | with the | government | of Great Acheh | and the | subjugation | of |
| its dependencies, | the pretender | has been | obliged to | lead a wandering | life. | He sceks | safety |
| by constantly | shifting his | abode and finds | his asylum | as a rule | in the North-coast | districts.] |
1) See 132 above. [ 1'he pretender to the sultanate was compelled some years ago
p.
11
49
described in the document as amï öblia {aniir ul-bahr) i. e. chief of the sea, and entrusted with the collection of the sultan's coast dues, but that this absolutely excluded the highest authority on land. He also both in word and deed yielded to the Sultan only as much as he chose, and looked on his sealed letters of appointment as a mere ornament that might at times give an official flavour to his pretensions. Still less did other chiefs concern themselves about Keumala. Indeed the ulèebalangs in the sultan's immediate neighbourhood used some-times to wage war against him, compelling him to have recourse to the help of others, since he himself has no troops, but only a handful of personal followers at his disposal. Keumala, the seat of the sultanate, had to be subdued by force in the first instance by the royal family '). Apart from this, the members of the royal family, though compar-The royal atively few in number, are far from living in harmony with one another, in spite of the critical position of the country. Although the ties of blood relationship are strengthened by marriage alliances (for example the Sultan has wedded a daughter of Tuanku Abdömajét), the family of Kuala Batèë is on bad terms with the court. One might be disposed to attribute this fact to the submission of that family to the Gömpeuni, but when we perceive that Tuanku Asem (Hashim) and his former ward are on terms of mutual distrust, we are forced to the conclusion that even if there were 110 Gömpeuni in the question, unpleasant relations would still have arisen with this other branch of the reign- ing house. Tuanku Asem, [died January 1897 at Padang Tiji in the Mukims VII| according to all who know him is an exception to the majority of the men of royal blood in Acheh. He speaks Malay and a little Arabic, understands something of English, and can discuss the religious books or kitabs as well as the traditions of his country. This last must however be taken cum grano salis, as Achehnese ears can be charmed with the purest nonsense 011 such topics. He is capable of fixing his attention 011 a single subject for a considerable time, is a strict observer of his chief religious duties, plays chess, and exhibits in all his utterances
Sultan
| originated | in a quarrel | about | a, one | of the dancing | boys who | appear at some | of the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ratébs (recitations) | in fenalc | garb and excite | the passions | of the Achehnese | paederasts. |
1) One of these small internal wars in which the was engaged some time since,
saJaii
'50
. cieep natred for the Gömpeuni, based on events antecedent to the Achehnese war. Like all estimates of individual worth, that which we can form respecting Tuanku Asem is relative only. The Achehnese, accustomed as he is to hear no sensible language from the lips of Mankus and to see them devote their attention to fightfng cocks and rams, women, weapons and so forth, is inclined to give a wide signi- ficance to any intelligent utterance of a member of the royal family, and to exaggerate the mental insight of the speaker. Ihose who knew Keumala, however, were well aware that Tuanku Asem did not confine himself to quarrelling with his royal ward over the latter's licentious life and neglect of his religious duties. He also exhibited much jealousy of the sultan in regard to the receipt of presents; he bargained in the pettiest spirit in his name and in con- junction with him as to the market value of royal deeds of appointment, for which the aspirants to such honours were obliged to pay cash- while his political genius, apart from its expression in highsounding learned phrases, revealed itself especially in the desire to turn every thing into hard cash for the benefit of the "court." Under the influence of Tuanku Asem correspondence was kept up on the part of the court with such men as Teungku Tiró and Teuku Uma in regard to money matters and circumstances closely affecting the friends or protégés of the Sultan, but beyond this Keumala exercised but little influence on the actions of these two individuals, who in
| their | turn rarely held consultations | with one another. | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Teungku Tin, and | t lcm | yCarS to | ag Whün | visits | to |
| : Keumala! | disposed | tü | obstacles | in |
°' Keumala by chiefs who had sub- mitted to the Dutcli Government were arranged in order to restore vith regard ' ^relations with "the court", Teungku Tiró was at first ^ the way of this plan, though botli the part,es concerned desired it. The sultan and his people were in favour of it for the sake of the prospective profits, and the chiefs because their moral attitude would thus be somewhat restored in the eyes of those of their fellows who had not yet tendered their submission to the Gömpeuni. Nor did Teungku Tiró acquiesce until the cunning Teuku Uma had frankly pointed out to him that it would be better to permit the renewal of such intercourse, in order that the court might draw revenues from the other side of the "linie," and thus make less frequent demand on them for financial support. Had it not been so, these visits would have come to nothing. Here wc have a
fresh proof of the insignificance of the court, both in relation to the affairs of the interior and to the Dutch Government. There was never
a. party at Keumala, but merely a court clique, which continued the traditions of the feeble Dalam tliat subsisted in the capital in former days. [Since the above was v ritten, circumstances have in many respects modified the part played by the pretender to the sultanate. See Preface.] § 9. Rivals of the Traditional Authorities; Political Adventurers and Representatives of Religion. In the last portion of our description of the political system of Acheh we have frequently mentioned the names of two men, Teungku Tiró and Teuku Uma, who may serve as types of their respective classes. They find no place in the ranks of ofticers of state such as the panglima sagbë, ulèëbalang, kali, imeum, keuchi and teungku vieu- tiasah, yet they are most weighty factors in the political life of the country, and are not to be overlooked in any description thereof, especially wherc wc are examining the development of political condi- tions during the past few years. This period is one of disorder, and disorder and unrest form the milieu in which people of both the classes referred to live and flourish best, though their influence makes itself feit in Acheh in times of comparative repose also. They may be called the rivals of the hereditary chiefs. The first kind require but brief mention, as they fight the ulèébalangs, 1'olitical so to speak, with their own weapons. They are ambitious men, and ai^Lntlllcls' aim more or less openly at the ulèëbalangship, the zenith of worldly greatness in the eyes of the Achehnese. They are to be found among the title-bearers without territory '), who use their position to gain themselves followers and to outshine the ulècbalang in whose district they reside, so as to compel hiin either to make them great conces- sions or to vacate the field in their favour. We have already seen examples of this kind of rivalry in the case of Teuku Nanta Seutia and Teuku Kali. No less dangerous are those adventurers who can only bring to bear a more or less illustrious descent, or as its equivalent a reputation
1) See pp. 92, 126—127 above.
'52
won upon the field of battle, and who are thus able to gain adherents in various ulèëbalangships.
forthesuccess T° CnSUrC SUCCCSS ^ rCqUire SUCh taCt aS wil1 unite men to of these ad-^eir cause; thcy must possess the gift of command, but at the same \entuieis. time rewarcj t]lcir f₀u0wers handsomely and treat them in such a way that they will prefer them to the ulèëbalangs, who are as a rule of a niggardly disposition. Inaction is for them the prelude to a fall. Nothing but a constant succession of fresh enterprises can enable them to augment their influence and keep their rakans supplied with the necessary emoluments. War is thus for them a condition of existence; until they have attained their highest aim, they are the enemies of order and repose. Not until they have actually become ulèëbalangs do they remit their labours and content themselves with mere ordinary plunder. After they have advanced to a certain degree of distinction they do not disdain political marriage alliances, where such are likely to give them a firmer footing in sorae important district. All these and similar methods have been successfully employed by Teuku Uma in the course of the past few years. Beloved by his foll- owers for his generous and kindly demeanour, he worked himself up from a mere panglima in the war against the Dutch to be the dreaded lord of al most the whole West Coast. Throughout the whole of the sphere of his influence, his appearance is the signal for the heriditary chief to retire into the background, well knowing that if he failed to do so it would soon be all over with him. To crown all he induced the sultan for a handsome consideration to impress his nine-fold seal upon his power by means of a deed appointing him "Sea-guardian of the West Coast." 'leuku Uma's success proves indeed how dangerous such rivalries may be for the hereditary chiefs, weakened as thcy generally are through their passion for spoil and money, their narrowness of mind and want of energy. Much however depends on the personal character of these chiefs. I hey have equal opportunities for winning the affections of their rakans and more means at their disposal for increasing their influence than an ambitious leader of troops. Against an energetic chief such as the imeum of Teunóm even Teuku Uma could make but little head. [An account of the subsequent adventures of Teuku Uma, since 1892, will be found in the Pieface. |
53
At tlie same time these adventurers had the unmistakable advantage of introducing a new departure from the old and superseded order of things, and the conditions which arose from the coming of the Dutch to Achch were exceptionally favourable to their objects. While the hereditary ulèëbalangs are engrossed by care for their own territories, they seize the opportunity to rally around them all the restless spirits in each district. They weigh their chances carefully before deciding to try their luck against the foreign invader. They lack but one thing, which is the special property of the second class of rivals of the adat chiefs; they cannot inspire their followers with holy zeal and self- sacrifïcing devotion. This second class requires much more extended notice; it consists Representa- of the various representatives of religion or of such as borrow a certain of rcli" prestige therefrom. So far we have learnt of the indissoluble union and indispensable coöperation of liukövi or religious law with adat, the custom of the country, as being the very basis of life in Achch. At the same time we have constantly remarked how the adat assumes the part of the mistress and the hukom that of her obedient slave. The huköm how- ever revenges herself for her subordination whenever she secs the chance; her representatives are always on the look-out for an opport unity to escape from this servile position. They do not require, like the political adventurers, to seek for adherents; these are voluntarily furnished by the anthropolatry which is as strong a feature in the religion of the Achehnese as in that of most other Mohammedan countries. In the earlier days of its existence Islam gave little weight to persons. Respect of The Believers had to do with Allah only, and althoucreed of amongst mankind appointcd instrumcnts of God, who oncc for all Islam, convcyed and interpreted his commands to humanity, these had no real part in the salvation of man. Uns was soon modified, and the change grew more pronounced as TheProphet time went on and Islam spread beyond Arabia amongst peonles of ani' hls ,-cc • descendants. (.unerent requirements and modes of thought. The reverence paid to the Prophet grew so great, that in the beginning of the present century the Wahhabites (following in the footsteps of many learned dissenters of earlier times) branded it as idolatry — but this sect was declared heretical and persecuted. The same veneration was in a measure
»
. cnaea to tne descendants of the Prophct, the sayyids and sharifs '). I he Shi ite conception of their persons as sacred 2), inviolable and entitled to the reverence of all Believers, gradually became part of the orthodox teaching. Even had it not done so, the doctrine would have become popular 111 the Archipelago, for Islam as first introduced here froni Hindustan has always shown Shi'ite tendencies. Mysticism has also flourished extensively in Islam. In such esteem ZtZ:L iS hcld that the founders of mystic societies (tanqak), their succes- sors and even the simplest teachers of mystic formulas or practices are within their own circle obeyed by their pupils and reverenced and feared by others as a sort of vice-regents of God. It was from these societies especially that there arose the walis, the "friends of Allah". That they are chosen of God above their fellow men appears from manifest tokens of a miraculous nature (kramat). lheir prayers can heal the sick, their blessing brings happiness for time and etermty and their cursc misery. These influences are believed to issue from their graves after their death; hence vows are made at and presents brought to their holy tombs. In the popular belief their mediation with Allah, who is of course too exalted to occupy himself with the small wants of his crcatures, is almost indispensable, and the request for their good offices differs' little from a prayer. In the beginning of this century, the Wahhabites protested also against this universally prevalent idolatry, but without success. Every town, nay almost every village has its patron saint, and also the tombs of other holy men, whose blessing is invoked for certain definite purposes. Under the influence of that mysticism which continually grew in popularity, and the constantly increasing vcneration paid to prophets, sayyids and sharifs, teachers and saints, the position of the pandits or ulamas has also altered somewhat from what it originally was. As kee-
| differences, | but as a general | rule | the descendants | of Mohammad's | grandson | Ilasan are |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| called sharifs | and those | of Husain | sayyids. Thus | in the Indian | Archipelago | there are say |
| yids only, yids bom in vol. 1 p. 32 | though the the country. et seq. and | name of sharif pp. 71 et seq. | is here and | there applied | to the descendants | of say- |
1) As explained by me elsewhere, the application of these titles is subject to local
2) As to the developmcnt of this veneration for sayyids and sharifs see my «Mekka"
155 holy
| pers | and spreaders | of the | knowledge | of the | law, they | have a |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| claim | to universal | reverence. | Contempt | for their | word passes almost | |
| as unbelief. | There | are among | them | whose | prayers of mediation | |
| are invoked | during | their | life time and | whose | honoured | as |
| holy | places after | their death. | Mysticism | has so completely | pervaded | |
| more | recent Mohammedanism | that most of the | in the law are | |||
| also the | representatives | of this deeper, | more intimate and | secret aspect | ||
| of religious | life. | |||||
| As | regards Acheh | in particular, | there | is nothing | special | to be said |
| as to the | reverence | paid to Mohammed. | Ilere as i | |||
| medan | countries, | it rises to the highest | pitch permitted | by the creed | ||
| of Islam, deification | which of human | in the beginning beings. | zealously | set | its face against | the |
| The | sayyids | occupy as | high a position | in Acheh | as in any | other |
| country | of the | Archipelago. | This may | be partly | due to | their not |
| experiencing | hcre | the counterpoise | of a European | government, | which | |
| elsewhere | keeps | a strict | on such | influential | persons: | the fact |
| remains | tliat they | command | a deeply-rooted | respect | and fear. | |
| Their | number | is not very great | in Acheh, | and comprises some | who, | |
| enticed | perhaps | by the great advantages | of sayyidship, | parade | a false | |
| genealogy, parts of the | a trick Archipelago. | which | meet | vvith no success in most other | ||
| Native-born | descendants | of sayyids | quickly | the | character | |
| inherited | from their | mothers. | They lose their | knowledge | of the Arabic | |
| tongue, | and though | they continue | in spite | of occasional | opposition | to |
| belong | to the dreaded | and | respected | nobility, | they | cannot in |
| the long | run compete | with their | kinsmen | who come | over from Arabia. | |
| Their | title in | earlier times | was Teungku') | Sayét | (= Sayyid). | The |
| celebrated | Sayyid | Abdurrahman | Zahir | introduced | the custom | of sub- |
| stituting | for these | two words the title | "beloved") | used | ||
| in Arabia | as an honorific designation | of Sayyids. | In conversation | the | ||
| word | used in Acheh | to express acquiescence | in or | |||
| obedience | to the | word of the Sayyid, | just as deêlat') is used to the | |||
| sultan. | Sometimes | the expression | borrowed | from |
some tombs are learned
Veneration for sacred 1 wrsi iinrT.>c i »> Acheh-
watch
would assume
religious
Habib (literally habib is at present panguleë (a variation
1) See pp. 70 seqq. above.
2) In like manner Teuku, Teungku, Tuan and other such titles are used simply to
denote concurrcnce in the speaker's last remark.
the Pidië dialect) is employed in this sense. It is the equivalent of the Malay pënghulu ') = chief or lord, a title otherwise confined in Acheh to the prophet and his disciples etc. Anj5ngn8kU The tomb at Present most highly honoured in Acheh is that of Teungku Anjöng in Gampöng Jawa. It is the last resting-place of a certain Sayyid Abu Bakar bin Husain Bil-Faqih, and lias completely outshone the more ancient tomb of Teungku di Kuala alias Abdora oh (Abdurra uf of Singkel) which enjoyed the highest reputation in former times. Among the living in like manner wc find a Habib kramat of the famous family of cAidarus 2), a half-crazy young man, the son of leungku di Bukét. The father who also enjoyed a reputation for sanctity, was in conjunction with the lately deceased raja of Idi (vuig. Edi) the first pioneer of that district. A sister of this sanctified madman is in her turn so holy that her husband after co-habiting with her once, became very ill and lias not since ventured to renew his mar- ital rights. Some members of another family of Sayyids from Mecca are settled in 1'idië and used to make occasional journeys to Keumala, wliere the young sultan treated them with the highest honour. Not by any means all of the sayyids of Acheh are theologians or pandits. Most of tliem devote themselves to trade or in later genera- tions to agriculture, but they enjoy none the less the customary reverence based on religious feeling, even where their life is far from testifying to a devotional spirit on their part. Such is often the case not only with sayyids who have found their way over from Arabia in the guise of random adventurers, but also with tliose boni in Acheh, who quickly make their own of Achehnese manners and vices. With them too these vices are usually more than ordinarily pronounced, as they are excessively spoilt from their earliest youth.
| Masjui is | quite a humble | individual, | a sort of sacristan | of | the mosque. | The headmen | of |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| large villages | are also | called pïnghulus; | but in | some states | the same title | is given | to an |
| official whose | position | somewhat | resembles that | of the ulèëbalang | in | Acheh. Such | for |
| example was | Sayyid Ali | the I'cnghulu | of Jelebu | in the Malay | Peniusula, who rcvolted against | ||
| the hereditary came under widely venerated. | Yam Tuan British protection.(Translater). | and became | the luier | of that small | independent | state before | it |
1) Pïnghulit has a wide range Malay, just as "imeum" in Achehnese. The Pïnghulu
2) A member of the same family lies buried at Luar lïatang in Iïatavia. His tomb is
in
DÉAH CONTAINING THE TOMB OF TEUNGKU ANJÖNG.
The Mohammedan law is averse to allowing women to wed with men of a rank lower than their own, and marriages of the daughters of sayyids with those who are not sayyids are everywhere of extremely rare occurrence. In Acheh hardly anyone not a sayyid would venture on such a union, as it is thought certain that the vengeance of God would overtake him even in this life. The daughters of sayyids must thus always wait until fortune sends a sayyid to their gampöng; they are then presented for his acceptance with much nvalry, nay even pressed upon him. And such daughters are not few, for the sayyids are fond of travelling and always ready to contract marriages even during a short residence in a gampöng, so that they beget a numerous progeny. In accordance with the adat the sayyids* daughters are, like other women, prolubited as a rule from leaving their own gampöngs, so that there are to be found among theni virgins of a comparatively advanced age, otherwise an unknown phenomenon in Acheh. From the Achehnese, who is a niggard to all other strangers, the sayyid meets a ready welcome, and he need take little pains, even though he holds no office and has no employment, to secure his own subsistcnce. This is supplied him by the woman he marries or the host whom he makes glad with the blessing of his presence. In practice it may be said that the Achehnese fears the sayyid more than the Creator. This is due to his believing that Allah reserves his punishments for the hereafter and is illimitably merciful in the enforce- ment of his law against the faithful, whereas the curse of the sayyids takes effect here below without any hope of mercy. No Achehnese will readily so much as lift a finger against a sayyid; one who would dare to take a sayyid's life would not hesitate to cut his own father's throat. The sayyid gives orders in his neighbour's house as if it were his own, and no one resents it. Under the protection of an energetic sayyid even a European might travel in safety throughout Acheh. Names of various sayyids appear in the list of the sultans of Acheh, and in several places members of the families of sayyids have suc- ceeded in raising themselves to the position of a kind of ulèëbalangs. None howcver has employed the great respect of the Achehnese for his descent with more political tact and more success than Sayyid Abdurrahman Zahir, usually known as Habib Abdurra/iman. In the beginning of his residence in Acheh he claimed special atten-
tion as a strict tcacher of Mohammedan law. His knowledge of the kitabs is considerable, though he would not pass for a doctor of law in Arabia, but it amply sufficed in Acheh, when coupled with a devout life, to make him the head of the religious party. The greatest pandits at the capital soon acknowledged him their master. He took the lead of his disciples in the services of prayer, and often moved his whole congregation to tears. When he talked with his intimate friends their usual topic was the moral and religious depravity of the Achehnese. He soon acquired the title of "The Habib" par excellence. It was not long before the Habib was able to rely fully on the support of all the ulamas and those who wished to gain a reputation for piety, and of a considerable portion of the credulous masses. From every side thcre poured in thousands of men and women eager were it only to kiss the Habib s hand. On such occasions eacli one brought as a gift a measure (gampét) of husked rice at the least, and some- times money presents of considerable amount. He thus won all the influence that an ambitious Achehnese ulama might attain, but rose superior to all such ulamas by virtue of the knowledge of the world, keen insight and political talent which distin- guished him from the native Achehnese, and also from the fact of his being a sayyid. So hopelessly divided are the people of Acheh that the greatest of ulamas would always find jealous rivals and thus have parties hostile to him; but the Habib as a foreigner stood outside parties, and as a sayyid was exalted above all the native Achehnese. 1 he important chiefs and satellites of the sultan with whom he came in contact supplied him with but few real friends and adherents, for these representatives of adat, unless they be unusually devout, see in an upholder of the huköm a formidable rival. Looking at the circum- stances, wc at once sec that this conservative party is riglit in this view. Whoever advances the pretension of "upholding religion" {pcukong agama) is their natural enemy, and the most serious part of the matter is that they actually lack the weapons wherewith to contend against such foes. A reformation of the institutions of the country conducted in a religious spirit would rob the ulèebalangs of everything. Even if the work were carried out with the utmost moderation in conformity with the national character of the Achehnese, still the whole administration
OI justice now in the hands of these chiefs, and which forms the main source of their revenues, would pass entirely away from their control. The recreations wherein they now delight would be prohibited, and their dignity of office would be transferred to the representatives of the new order of things. It is thus not to be wondered at that the chiefs view the advancement of the «upholders of religion" with inward vexation and alarm. \ ith alarm, because they have no means of offering a fair and open resistance to these rivals of theirs. For the Achehnese are all con- vinced, and freely admit, that their customs and institutions are full of mcfsïét (wickedness), and that some reform of their way of life is highly necessary. They also believe that it is not so much by com- nutting masièt as by defending it that a man abjures the truc faith and becomes an infidel. How then could an ulèëbalang, even if he wishes to do so for self-preservation's sake, enter the lists as a hostile champion against an expounder of the law, whose professed aiin it is to enhance the respect paid to religion? His own people, on whomhe can at the best of times place but a conditional reliance, would some of them hold aloof, while others would go over to the enemy. To rivals such as Teuku Uma, an ulèëbalang, if he be not too weak, can say keep out of my territory, you have no right to intrude here". I he pandit lias no territory, or rather his sphere is universal, and he that would hinder his work would be deemed the enemy of God. The wisest course for the ulèëbalang is therefore either to keep these troublesome rivals at a distance by strategem, or to unite them to lus own cause. This latter course succeeds best with the ordinary Achehnese ulamas, who when unburdened by worldly cares generally give pretty free latitude to the adat, and confine themselves to verbal criticism of what they find amiss. 1 he mass of the people believe in the absolute truth of the ulamas' teaching, yet transgress it continually from their youth up. The ulamas are wont to conceal their aversion to such sins so long as forbidden acts and objects are not obtruded on their notice. The Achehnese even judge these transgressions more severely in themselves than in an ulama who oversteps the bounds of the law. "He", they say "can al- ways quote some learned text (kawöy) to justify himself, but for us it is different. Honour is paid to the ulamas by the observance of cer- tain respectful forms and by pious gifts.
Where, hovvever, an ulama goes beyond these everyday limits and travels about the country to enforce reform according to the spirit of the law, the respect he inspires increases to the highest degree, unless his üfe be in gross contrast with his preaching, and his proceedings manifestly dictated by ambition only. Many Achehnese sinners sympa- thize in the fullest sense with such a revival, while the rest dare not do otherwise than pretend to assent to it. At times indeed a section of the people will range themselves in opposition to such an ulama; not hovvever under an ulèëbalang, but under another ulama who differs from the first in his interpretation of certain doctrinal points. Ihe Habib then, as we have already remarked, combined with his knowledge of the world and his sacred descent all those characteristics which in the long run render the energetic ulama in Acheh the irresistable rival of the chiefs. Under his leadership a crusade was quickly inaugurated against ram Poiicy of and cock fighting, gambling, opium smoking, paederasty and other "the Ilabi1'-" '"'et '"tercourse, while the people were strongly urged to the fulfil- ment of their principal religious duties, as for example the five daily seumayangs or services of prayer. In the prehminaries to the carrying out of his programme the Habib at once showed himself a competent politician. The opium-smokers were not tracked down to their most secret dens, but only the more public opium-houses were suppressed, and opium smoking in company as practised with various formal observances, especially on the West Coast, was rigourously punished. One or two marriage alliances with the daughters of powerful chiefs (including the widow of a sultan) strengthened the Habib's position from a wordly point of view, and soon the upholders of the hu kom recognized with joy, and the supporters of the adat with embarrassment, that all others in Acheh were but as dwarfs beside the great ulama. The Sultan found himself constrained, after discussion with the móst Thc important chiefs, to establish a new kind of court of justice (balt meuhakamah. meuhakamah) in which the Habib should decide all questions relating to religion. Here they were confronted by the peculiar difficulty that presents itself in every attempt to establish a modus vivendi between the adat and the religious law. For this law comprehends everything, and no good Mohammedan can or may suggest the advisability of replacing any portion of it by a new system. I I
In the law of Islam a small place is allotted to the adat, i. e. the different manners and customs of different places, but it does not admit of any special representatives of adat or systems of rules to carry it out. Wherc recourse is had to laws which are to a great extent based on adat or are called into being by human choice or agreement, this can, as we have seen, be only excused on the ground that the men and the conditions of the present time are too evil to be governed by the holy law. When this is once recognized, the questions to be brought before the qadhl are strictly defined, and the rest are submitted to secular judges, subject to the proviso that in all cases there shall be an appeal allowed to the sacred law; or else cach question is first submitted to the executive, which in certain cases (as for instance rights connected with marriage and inheritance) refers them to the qadhl. Thus the position of affairs thougli by no means theoretically correct, is practi- cally vvorkable. It is only in rare cases of mutinous beliaviour, oppres- sive injustice or the introduction of objectionable novelties, that the complainants resort to the qadhl crying, "the law of Allah!" In such cases the ecclesiastical judge, dreading this riule intrusion 011 his usually peaceful life, as often as not absconds in alarm till the storm blows over. Where a Mohammedan government is compelled to establish a court of justice to deal with all matters connected with the sacred law, there arises of neccssity a conflict as to the limits of the functions of such a tribunal. Here again the party of the adat must as a rule yield to that of the huköm in theory, and can only save itself by having rccouisc to cii cuitous methods, or by seeking a reason for abolishinbalt meuhakamah which the Ilabib suc- ceeded in forcing from the adat potentates; he drew almost all questions witliin the purview of this court, and thus robbed the constituted authorities, whom he had made powerless elsewhere by his reforms, of all control in this department also. ~)pposition ^ h₁- following is an example of the strategems which his enemies ie Habib". enlP^°yec' against. him. Certain highlanders were instigated to bring before him suits which, if dealt with according to the letter of the sacred law, could never have been brought to a pacific conclusion. The Habib was disposed on such occasions to resort to compromise and to set the spirit of the religious law above the letter. How would it
'63
be thcn when he, the strict reformer, was requested to dccide the question «according to the Book of Allah and the sunat of the Prophet ?" The Habib savv through the plot and found nicans to frustrate it. Seizing one or two of the pretended suitors by their heads, he said aIf ye are so anxious for the sunat of the Prophet, go ye first to your homes and apply it to your own faces, dogs that ye be". He referred to their faces being clean shaven in accordance with the Achehnese custom, but in conflict with the sunat. He wlio in Acheh Iets his beard or beard and mustache grow (as many leubès and teungkus do) is said to have adopted "the sunat of the Prophet". The Habib often resorted to such rough methods with the Acheh nese, even with their principal chiefs. If they put in an appearance much later than the time appointed, therein following the custom of the country, or sat or spoke in what an Arab would consider an im- proper manner, he would smite, kick and even spit upon them by way of correction. What enabled him to act in this high-handed way was the fact that his followers formed a united and active whole, eager for the advancement of his programme, while the opposition presented to the view a disordered and disunited mass, held together by no other motive than their anxiety to maintain the existing order of things. 1 he I labib also compelled the Achehnese to do what they were powerless to undertake on their own initiative, viz. to carry out useful objects by general coöperation. Not only did he get a new chief mosque [meuseugit raya) erected by public subscription and coöpera- tive labour, but bridges and roads were also put in hand in the same manner. Wherever internal dissensions broke out among the Achehnese the Habib was quickly on the spot with his trusty followers to compel them to keep the peace. Further proofs of his political insight are to be seen in his repeated attempts to enter on Acheh's behalf into relations with European powers, even with the Gömpeuni or Dutch Government. Circumstances made him for a time the leader of the "holy war" against the Dutch, but whenever the opportunity occurred he always showed that he would have greatly preferred some such settlement as would have resulted in peace. In this object he was hindered by mistrust on the side of the Dutch, and on the part of the Achehnese by their child-
IIKC conncience in tneir own invincibility. rlaccd thus between two fires, he finally longed for repose, which he found in accepting a pen sion and migrating to Arabia. 1 he Achehnese now generally regard him as an ambitious traitor and even suspect him of having served as ?. spy of the Gömpeuni from the very beginning. Among the proofs which they refer to in support of this theory are included just the very facts which show his superiority to the Achehnese in civilization and politica! insight. Why, they ask, did he continually urge us to refrain from deceit and trea- chery in the wai with the Infidels ? Why, when we had surrounded the Gömpeuni's fort at Krueng Raba with a much superior force under his leadership, did he promise a free retreat to the commandant and his men if they surrendered, and forbid us, if the offer were accepted, to raise a hand against the unbelievers? Evidently, they now reply, because even at that time he had a secret understanding with the Gömpeuni. They cannot comprehend that the Habib's closer insight caused him to give great weight to the impression which his actions would make upon the enemy, a matter to which the Achehnese have always been utterly indifferent. We have already seen how cleverly the Habib took advantage of that favourite method of discussion, the mupakat, in his intercourse with the Achehnese. Considering the circumstances, we must admit the success attained by Sayyid Abdurrahman Zahir in the centralization of power under his own control to have been nothing short of prodigious. We have not overstated the personal characteristics of the Habib; yet he lias been himself the first to acknowledge that with all his penetration and skill he would never have gained his end, had not his position as a sayyid furnished him with an impregnable basis of action '). 1 he fact, too, that after all that had occurred, after he had been branded by so many with the name of traitor and spy, he should still (as he did in 1884) have asked the government as a favour to permit him to return to Acheh and there play his part anew under their supervision and in' accordance with their wishes, proves indeed that this man of much experience deemed nothing impossible for a sayyid in Acheh.
I) I) [This [This ambitious ambitious sayyid sayyid died died at at Jeddah Jeddah 111 in 1896.] 1896.]
Next to the sayyids we mentioned the mystics as having borrowed Mystic a certain dcgree of authority from religion. orders. In Acheh, as vvell as in other parts of the Archipelago, much reve- rence is paid to the memory of the founders of mystic orders. We have seen how the help of these holy men and especially of Abdul-Qadir Jïlanï is invoked in the prelude of all the sultans' edicts. This sacred name also appears in the curious proceedings which in Acheh are included under the terms liké and rat eb (the equivalents of the Arabic dikr and ratib), in the sadati-pantöns etc., and also at the per formances called Rapa'i '). At these last Ahmad RifacI, that master of mysticism from whom thcy derive their name, is of course always invoked. The spiritual successors of these founders, who at present teach mystic practices and formulas, also enjoy much respect, but are not i/ery numerous. The tariqahs so popular in other parts of Sumatra do not flourish in Acheh, though sundry Achehnese hajis have enrolled :hemselves as members of a tarlqah in Mecca. We can thus here over- ook three mystic associations which form so weighty a factor in the •eligion of other parts of the Archipelago. Walis, saints of sundry descriptions, known in Acheh as wali or more isually èëlia₂), are exceedingly numerous in that country. We shall neet vvith thern again in reviewing more closely the religious life of he Achehnese. In matters political these departed saints only play a )art in so far as they are invoked by the living. The nlamas, the representatives of learning in the law are of much The ulamas. jreater weight in political life than either departed saints or living nystics. We have already touched on their position in our account of the Ilabib, who was himself numbered among their guiid anti owed 0 that fact a considerable portion of his prestige. We shall deal in a later chapter with the influence which is in irdinary times exercised by the ulamas over the spiritual life of the Vchehnese people, as well as with their lore and the method of their
| nives, sear | theii bodies | with led-hot | chains etc. | while the | bystanders | chant religious | for- |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| mlas. 'I he oly personage | wounds are supposed whose litanies | to be immediately are being | recited. | healed | by the mystic | inlluence | of the |
| ronunciation; 1 the same | but it is also way as ulama, | used as a singular also a plural | both in Arabic. | in Achehnese | and | kindred languages, |
1) These are religious performances, wherein the performers wound themselves with
2) This word is properly the plural of wali in the Arabic, au/ia, with an Achehnese
leacning. we may here rest content with observing that Mr. Der Kin deren (pp. 17—18 of his oft-quoted brochure) terribly exaggerates the decline of Mohammedan learning in Acheh. Those who wrote books on theology and lavv under the wealthy sultans in Banda Achèh, were strangers whose influence outside Acheh was at least as noticea'ble as within it. Hut there are in Acheh at the present time no less than formerly ulamas of native birth who compose works of learning and edification, sometimes in Malay and sometimes in Achehnese. At the time of the coming of the Dutch to Acheh there were numerous schools throughout the country; and it is a notorious fact that on more than one occasion the students from these schools threw themselves, practically unarmed, upon the bayonets of the Dutch troops. 1 hese were youths inflamed to fanaticism by the teaching they had imbibed in regard to the holy war and the boundless recompense here aft er awaiting the martyr to his creed, without his being called on to render further account of his actions in this world. In estimating their contempt for death, however, we must reflect upon the fact that at that time the most fearful rumours were current in Acheh as to the tortures which vvould be the lot of anyone who feil alive into the hands of the kafïrs. ÏTthT Wc have already ascertained the grounds of the ulamas' influence la,nas posi-and the facility with which they attain their power. It is however of on through •. • 11 • ic invasion ntcrest> especially in view of the present state of aftairs, to consider hannncdan" the reasons for the great improvcment in their position arising from the invasion of Acheh by a non-Mohammedan power, and'the consequent steady increase of their influence in the conduct of affairs in that country in later years.
llmandwth°e ^ circumstances attending the origin and early development of Jiy war. Islam have rendered it par excellence a militant religion, whose aim was no less than to convert all who held other beliefs or else reduce them to subjection. The teaching of the law, as it moulded itself by degrees, comprises a two fold obligation to activity in the holy war: 1". The joint and several obligation of the community at large to spread among all others by force of arms, at the bidding of their Chief, the religion or at any rate the sovereignty of the Moslims. For the fulfilment of this duty the chief of the Mohammedan community should provide by raising a standing army and enrolling volunteers; he must also decide as to the manner in which this programme is to be carried
3ut. YY here dimculties arise, this obligation may be reduced to that jf defending Moslim intercsts against the common cnemy. The breaking up of political power in Islam into many separate vingdoms had this result, that in later times no single chief could be jointed to as the universally acknowledged Ilead of the community. riius the feeling of responsibility among Mohammedans in general for :he fulfilment of this joint and several obligation has grown much more eeble. On the other hand private crusades against infidels undertaken ay petty potentates or even leaders of marauding bands find much 'avour at the present day — if only they be successful — in the eyes >f all pious Moslims; whercas such enterprises would formerly have jeen condemned as an injustifiable usurpation of the rights of the •luier of the Believers. Forcible conversion of Dayaks, Bataks and similar races by Moham- nedan chiefs is universally approved of and accounted a fulfilment of he joint and several obligation of the Jihad or holy war, as in such :ases it would be vain to await the command or authorization of the ^ord of all Believers. 2°. The personal obligation resting 011 all fighting men, nay in some :ases even on the non-combatant inhabitants of a Mohammedan country o defend their land to the utmost against the invasion of a non-Vlohammedan enemy. The feeling of Mohammedans as such against all who hold other >eliefs, a feeling which finds expression and confirmation in laws of his description, may thus indeed be termed hostile. We encounter it :ontinually in all Moslim countries, but in many of them it has greatly noderated or even entirely disappeared among the governing classes. Mitigation or extinction of such a hatred towards the infidel is isually based on extensive intercourse with those of other creeds during. long period of time, or else on long habitude to a powerful but not nsupportable government by kafirs. What usually occurs is that the najority of statesmen and those who gain a living by trade and in- lustry, gradually forget and pr.ictically set aside all the teaching of heir religion with regard to infidels; while the scholars and theologians )usy themselves with seeking out and collecting texts which transfer o the next world the sharp contrast between Moslim and kafir, and imit, in regard to sublunary matters, the abruptness of this contrast o what is called religion in the narrowest sense of the word.
Among peoples reccntly converted to Islam, on the contrary, this feeling is usually the first characteristic of Mohammedanism which sinks in to their very marrow, retaining its influence all the longer in pro- portion to the slowness of their growth in civilization and knowledee of the world. ö The requirements of Islam for the conversion of unbelievers are very small, and the new converts to that creed adopt such of its doctrines as soothe their vanity and such of its rules of conduct as are in har- mony with their own ancient customs. To these peoples, in whom the savage is as a rule not yet extinct, nothing can be more attractive than the idea that they as Mohammedans are the lords of the world and that all infidels stand far below them, while the privilege or obli- gat.on of depriving certain of the latter of life or property merely gives a new turn to their favourite pursuits of fighting and pillage «JMSt N0W am°ng the Achdinesc nonc of the moderating influences just to infidels. mentioned have ever prevailed to any important extent. They were never before subjected to a foreign supremacy, and being slow to emigrate to other lands and so extend their horizon, they were able to cherish a belief in their own supremacy. Even Mohammedan strangers such as the Arabs are often vexed by the frank conceit of the Achehnese, who will allow no discussion as to the excellence of their adats and of all their country contains, and the worthlessness of all that belongs to other countries and peoples. ' r°m thls we may easily conclude how little disposed they are to learn anything from infidels. Nor were the political relations which Acheh lias occasionally formed with foreigners as the result of her trade and for its advancement, of such a nature as to awake any consciousness of inferiority in the Achehnese people. These relations were very transient; not one of the rajas considered himself bound by the concessions of lus predecessors, while to their subjects it has always seemed impossible that infidels could possess any rights in Acheh. A temporary attitude of friendship towards foreigners was confined to the port-kings and those in their immediate neighbourhood. In edicts of the sultans we find strict prohibitions of the harbouring of kafirs by the Achehnese, the only exception to which was in favour of the Hindus, who are regarded as little better than slaves. When we considcr that it is a common saying in Acheh, in spite
of the theoretically recognized inviolability of the life and goods of Moham- medan strangers, "I am no Kling vvho can be slain unavenged", we can imagine how little regard is paid to the life and property of unbe- hevers who derive no protection either from religion or adat. The history of the Achehnese lias withheld from them the indispen- sab'e practical lesson, that Mohammedans may not in fact assail the lives and property of those of other creeds with impunity. Thus ap- pearances favoured a belief in the truth of the teaching of the old adat, which was liere in accord with religion; and we cannot wonder that the Achehnese expounders of the law, who had little sympathy with any intercourse between Mohammedans and people of other nations, should have refused absolutely to admit the use or necessity of that remedy of moderation which elsewhere mitigated the strictness of the doctrines regarding infidels. Here too, just as at Mekka, the special few who through travels in distant countnes had formed new opinions regarding the proportion existing between the power of Islam and that of the unbelieving world, kept the results of their experience a secret, as the betrayal of such a spirit would have been laid to their account as heresy or concealed infidelity. Where the people in Great-Acheh or the litoral states re- frained for a time from plunder and cheating they did so from a short- sighted conception of personal interest, and never grasped the fact that their truest interests demanded the complete abandonment of such malpractices. We only meet sporadic germs of such a notion among the inhabitants of the coasts. Infidels who let it be seen that they considered themselves on a level with the Achehnese were objects of universal abhorrence; the rest were regarded as fair game for all manner of deception and cheat ing, since neither religion nor moral or political insight laid any restraint on such conduct where the infidel was concerned. This state of things still remains almost unchanged. The fact that such is the case is not mainly attributable to the augmentation of hatred against infidels which was the necessary result of the invasion of a kafir power. Indeed this very invasion gave rise here and there to a belief in the desirability of forming alliances with other infidel powers. When all eftbrts to this end proved unsuccessful, those other infidels who would have 110 relations with the Achehnese save those of commerce, rose in the estimation of that people, while their hatred
w«a more man ever against the Dutch, who had for years
| past | been the | kafirs most detested | in Acheh. | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Ca | The | CauSe | f the | |||
| thiS | dltl0nS | S rathcr | to | be sou ht | for in | th< |
the continu-. ° continuance, with but slight change, of these con- aüitude! ' S-' fact that the Achehnese throughout their twenty years contest with the Dutch have not yet grasped the uselessness of their resistance to the kafirs. For we must always recollect that rcason, education and other similar influences gain no hoid upon the self-esteem of Mohammedans until they find tliemselves opposed to irresistable force. Such is the tendency of their doctrine and their practice entirely accords therewith. I he Achehnese constantly express their conviction that they were wrong 111 ever vacillating for a moment (as they did in the time of General van der Heijden), that Allah is manifestly on their side, and that the Dutch, infidels worn out by defeat after defeat and beset by sickness and other such troubles, must give in at last in spite of their apparently superior strength. Further, they believe that the estimate of infidels that prevailed in Acheh in ancient times is more reliable than the view taken by the people of Meura'sa, Gampöng Jawa and the like, according to wliicli the wisest course would be to submit to the first kafir power that came by. Sonie were indeed disposed to submission from the very first, and among them the people of Meura'sa are generally regarded as having taken the foremost place. Yet even these have maintained au fond their old doctrine in regard to infidels, owing to the ephemeral nature of the impression they have received during the last 20 years of the power of the Gömpeuni. They add however that they find it too troublesome to put this doctrine in practice owing to the exposed position of their territory. Such a feeling could never have maintained lts ground, ïf the Dutch Government had steadily extended its in- fluence 111 Acheh and the people of Meura'sa had continued as in the beginning to render the greatest services and enjoy the greateet advantages. forCaTienT TllC C°mmon Parlance of the people serves to illustrate the attitude deis. of the Achehnese towards the Gömpeuni. In talking to one another they only occasionally employ the name Ulanda (Hollander) the com- moner appellation being kaphê (Ach. pronunciation of kafir), which they use without the least ill-will. Furthermore, the Achehnese lias two personal pronouns, both of which express the tliird person for all
genders and numbers, jih (ji-), which is employed without distinction, and gobnjan (gen-), which betokens a certain respect for the person spoken of. Yet this honour which is paid as a matter of course to a simple keuchi is regarded as too high for Dutchmen, even for the Governor of Acheh; nay, for the Gömpeuni itself, which is regarded as the supreme ruler. The title of Tuan bcusa or great Tuan (Malay besar) which the Achehnese apply to the Governor of Acheh carries with it no respect. It is for them a foreign word ') which they occasi- onaHy use to describe high officials of the Gömpeuni, and which sounds to their ears very much as the "Great Mogul" does to ours. I'Ven the people of Meura'sa and Gampöng Jawa, who have wholly compromised themselves by complete submission, call all Dutch authoiities jih and speak without the sligliest intention to give oflfence of the regulations of the kaphé, tlius in their common talk denying to the ruling authority even a comparative degree of lawlul right. I have myself actually experienced a case where in presence of a European official who did not know the language, Achehnese who had submitted unconditionally to Dutch rule spoke of him continually as jih, and the only person in the company who made use of the more polite form geu was an Arab long settled in Acheh. 1 his state of things is largely due to the fact that the people of Meura'sa etc. do not regard our policy and laws as the outcome of common sense but as equally burdensome to friend and foe, so that even though they might in general admit the possibility of a lawful infidel authority (to which in time the title geu might be applied), the Dutch Govern ment could never become such in their eyes. In this connection how- ever it must not be forgotten that the narrow limitations of the Dutch position in Acheh gave the actively hostile party the control over the the common talk, over the views generally expressed as to the situation as well as the situation itself. Even had a favourable opinion existed in Meura'sa and other places which tendered their submission to the Dutch, it would have been speedily silenced by this hostile influence. From the very commencement, the peacefully inclined exposed them selves to the hatred of their fellow-countrymen by their attitude during the first and second expeditions. After the excursions of General van der Heijden the feeling towards them began to amend, but later
i) "(iieat in Achehnese is raya or raven
on and especially at the present time [1891—92] it lias become un- favourable in the highest degree. 1 he same is true of such of the chiefs beyond the linie or pale as have entered into relations with the Gömpeuni. As long as it is known or supposed that their conciliatory attitude merely serves as a cloak to cover deceit or a means to attain some fixed purpose, mistrust is süent. If a chief succeeds in this manner in obtaining a yearly pension, without rendering any real service to the 'kafirs', his action is esteemed most sensible. But as soon as ever he is suspected of being in earnest, he loses his good name among his country men, since it is held that in existing circumstances nothing comfiels kim to conciliation. I once heard a chief from beyond the linie who came occasionally within it, complain in the presence of a mixed company that others received yearly allowances while he got none. Hereupon some one expressed a doubt as to the value of the services he had rendered to the Göm peuni; to which he replied that he only wanted yearly pension as compensation for the evil name which his relations with the Dutcli Government had procured him. "And of a trutli" said he, "I cannot now as I formerly could, point to the superior power of the Gömpeuni as my justificationl" I his is sufficiënt to show that the hatred or at least the contempt feit for all others than Mohammedans in Acheh still prevails in the fullest force; this hatred and the respect paid to the persons who are in one way or another the representatives of religion, are the two principal elements of Mohammedanism which are engrained in the very nature of the Achehnese. The teaching of Islam in regard to the "holy war" thus finds a strong support in the charactcr of this people and in the most popular ingredients of their creed. In more civilized Mohammedan states war has grown to be governed more and more according to the principles universally acknowledged by civilized nations, and the "holy war" is merely a watchword appealed to in certain circles to excite sympathy and devotion. In Acheh on the other hand real use is made of the
| fanatical doctrine | of the jihad, which is readily exaggerated to the | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Course | detriment | of the | |
| events extre- ^ | ' | ||
| ablc to "the ulamas. | ro ress | of tlle |
of kafirs, while tliose gentier tenets which the "believer" inc s too difficult of attainment are simply set on one side. V rhe P S Achehnese war has proved extremely favour- able to the ulamas and their class.
'73
Chance willed that the conflict should begin at the identical con- juncture when the whole of Acheh was subjected to the influence of "the Habib", The adat-chiefs had at that moment once more received a sevcre lesson from the teungkus and their adherents. The absence of Habib Abdurrahman at the time of the first hostile movements of the Dutch against Acheh rendered the organisation of the Achehnese still more defective than it might otherwise have been. Yet not even he, had he been present, would have succeeded in maintaining the necessary harmony and (what was most important of all) the necessary discipline. It is questionable whether a capacity for generalship lurked among his numerous talents; but in reviewing his career wc must always recollect that this man, elevated in so many respects above the common Standard of the Achehnese, was never influenced by a belief in the power of Acheh for continued resistance. Be this as it may, he was absent at the outbreak of hostilities. The The begin contest between the Achehnese and the Gömpeuni was from the very nalgwar"""' first a national war. This followed as a matter of course from the state of popular feeling which we have just described, coupled with their universal skill in the use of arms. But it was an Achehnese national war, that is to say one in which unity of conduct and fixity of plan were entirely wanting. Many there were who sought the coveted death of martyrs to their creed, selling their lives as dearly as they could. Sometimes they fought in separate bands and sometimes they joined the standards of those adat-chiefs who took the most zealous part in the defence of the capital, such as the Imeum of Luëng Bata. 1 his Imeum |he died in the year 1901 during the military operations in Samalanga] was a rare phenomenon among the dealing with men. Like most of his fellows he sought to be foremost at fights of animals, gambling parties and sanguinary internal forays. At the same time he possessed those qualities whereby an Achehnese may rise to be an ulèëbalang though not entitled to such a position by his birth. Continually sur- rounded by boys, he complied with their demands for the repair of their kites and toys as generously as with those of his followers when they begged him to put the requisite fine edge or polish on their weapons. I11 battle and arduous toil he always encouraged the others by his own example, and at the sharing of profit or spoil he forgot no one. Dissolute though his life was when viewed from a religious
'74
" 7 "1' "\wa> unsurpassed ,n lus hatred of the infidcl, whilc not ehind the majority of his countrymen in his reverence for saints and ulamas.
:redUary°f Thc &reat defect in °f the hereditary chiefs consisted and still uefs. consists in this, that their religious and political convictions never «mpel them to action on behalf of Acheh, they vvait as long as pos- s to see whethe«- their own territory will be threatened. Even where some responded to the repeated calls for help by coming to the rescue with their followers, they were unable to hold the latter together and the auxihary force soon melted away. For it is an evil custom with most of the Achehnese chiefs when they call out their subjects for a distant expedition, to make little or no proper provision for their maintenance on the journey or in the foreign territory which is their objective. The obvious result is that even the most frugal and kafir- lating Achehnese soon abandon a contcst with superior forces under such circumstances. I Iereditary chiefs, newly creatcd panglimas and devout volunteers organized their bands of fighting men as well as they knew how but complaints were rife of the inconsiderable levies sent up by the people of 1 'die and the highlanders with all their vaunted courage. Mean- while m the Dalam old cannons were dug up out of the ground and loaded with an extraordinary collection of projectiles, which on various occasions proved more fatal to the Achehnese gunners than to the soldiers of the Gompeuni. In the beginning the trust of the Achehnese in God's help seemed "ow 3nd then to bc Justified. Where they met with reverses the representa ties of rehgion were ever ready with their explanation. «He that will carry on a holy war with assqrance of victory must begin," said they, > turning from all his iniquities." Small wonder that Allah did not always cause the arms of Acheh to be victorious since he had so much ma's iet (trangression) to visit on the people. When the Habib returned from his travels and assumed the leadership of the resistance to the ' the Ulamas P°inted with satisfaction to every additional success achieved. Ilere was one who ca,ried on the war according to the rules of the sacred books, while the adat chiefs knew nought of them and spent their spare time in forbidden pleasures. Finally there came severe lessons; in particular, the marches of the Dutch troops through the highlands established the conviction that
i75
furthcr resistance was impossible. The "sons of the upper reaches of the river" bragged no more but took to flight; the most determined opponents of the invaders retired to distant hiding-places. The Habib was only too glad to bargain for a handsome yearly allowance in con- sideration of his submission. After a short time neither the fanatical ulamas nor the ambitious guerilla leaders could any longer check the flovv of population to the lowland districts and the capital itself. Prices had risen, and there was much to be earned from the kafirs by those who laid down their arms. We must always recollect that hatred of the infidel is never, any more than any other passion or inclination, the sole ruling motive of a nation. \ ith peoples like the Achehnese, various causes have combined to make this hatred a habit, which however may be controlled by superior force and unlearnt through continued intercourse; and in this intercourse freedom of trade and some much-needed reforms in the admini- stration of justice are important factors. Every Achehnese knows and approves the proverb " Agriculture is lhe piince the prince of all (methods of) breadwinning" '). A nation holding this winning!''>d opinion and having besides no political unity would, if taken in the mass, be certainly disinclined to maintain a fruitless resistance which would kill their staple industry. Vet it may by a combination of cir- cumstances be partly incited and partly driven to take part in such opposition. As the territory invested by the Dutch presently became reduced f'-uerilla leaders. to narrower limits, the party of irreconcilables, which was now in a minority, was inspired with fresh life. Those who for the time being acted as organizers of resistance were for the most part the energetic adventurers of whom we recognize a type in Teuku Uma. The latter, as well as the members of the family of the Imeum of Luëng Rata and others saw in the prevailing confusion a chancc of essaying their fortune. We must not take a onesided view of the motives of these guerilla leaders. Without doubt a disordered state of affairs is favourable to the attainment of iheir purpose, even though it may not arise from the invasion of an infidel power. It gives them a chancc to gain
i) Pangullë hareukat metigoé.
i ;6
com T ,r dGgree
| ' | ^ " | P° | ^ as | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| g0CS | Wdl | attai a | 0f wer | |
| Iacking | even | in thdr | we must | a ys |
| Smgle | Achehnese | has |
compels the respect of the inactive hereditary chiefs. Nor is the
i:"T: : lerent <•-,wa
ch ° 7 ? any doubt of the meritorious character of the struggle with the Gömpeuni, a belief shared even by those who are least inclined to risk their lives for the cause raw material which these chiefs recruited their bands was of a very vaned description. Vagrants without visible means of sub- sistence, wno ,n ordmary circumstances supply their needs in the vvay of nee (especially highlands
| and opmm | through | theft or | in the | ancl |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Wc | thr Ugh | U,rder and | ||
| UlduCh OSe | nothln | be |
rapine c Th ^ * ^ ° ", ° g «er than to turn from their evil ways an pursuc t icir old trade under an honourable name, with the certain a pcctation of plunder or an incomparable recompense after death. An,°ng the rehg.ous student, some are always to be found who are nsp^ed by the,;- teachers with a desire to become shahlds or martyrs the fa,tl, The younger men in the gampöngs are also subject to incentives of hot the
| blood passion | for the | glory | of battle. | Where |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| mUCh | parents wantin | Ca not in | withhold | |
| C nStant | en | |||
| 1CrC tWS | thCy | arC Str |
tTen/fr^T/i, them from what all 7^ believe to be a ^ pious ^ task. "
rematV^8' ^ ^ S «rganization to of «1°, °"« S ° «»«»teni give them the chance the o o °^ — Bh ^ compel people of the gampöngs in their neighbourhood to provide for cir mam enance; but this soon creates disgust, all the more because hese troops are not as a rule distinguished by a godly life, except as champions against the infidel. Riseofthe Here it is that the ulamas i,,„„ u ulamas. <-1 • • a ^ golden opportunity for makiner
"Z7 w"i,c allowing a"credit <-•-ï
avours to cause loss to the infidels, the ulamas can-nay are bound by the text of their sacred books to point out that The
| ^ | /; | ^ "° | " | " | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S a | CffeCtiVe | Clah t0 | ge eral | ||||
| ïhefi | X1] La | nC | Jh mUSt | bC Waged | m conformit | w | |
| f | AHah 6 be | m f niade from a | haS il,dicated h ly W3r a P rti0n | in Sh Uld f thC | bC d frayed rCligiOUS | ?art taX Zaküt | of Ach |
j','f y 'th His decree. o^TZï;. holy law the sources from which ~ o? ZstT i °, ° °-^ provision their admi-the revenues which the Moslim state derives from must 'be₀™' " H ° ° (-jakeuët) must be specially set aside for this purpose. Strenuous appeals must
177
also be made for increased voluntary conti ibutions, emphasis being laid on the great revvard that hereafter awaits those who have sacrificed life or property for the holy cause. But the troops must refrain from levying contributions on the villages in whose neighbourhood they are encamped, for on such acts no blessing can rest. The manner of distribution of the spoils is also strictly defined in the law; disregard of these regulations will render the offenders liable both to defeat at the hands of their enemies and also to the visitations of God's wrath. F inally there can be no success where small bodies of troops act without central organization. There must be leaders to supervise the whole and keep a watch over the faith and all who hold thereby in the beleaguered land. 'I he Raja of Acheh is almost a negligable factor so far as the position of his country is concerned. The ulèëbalangs, the true chiefs of the country, indolently shut themselves up, each within his own landmarks, and are incapable of united action. The leaders of the bands of volunteers fall short of the conditions which must be fulfilled by commanders in the holy war. 1 hus, say the ulamas, it is on us that the duty rests of regulating the conduct of the jihad. Such and the like was the train of reasoning on which was based The "con the development of the power of Teungku Tiro and his coöperators ce"lratI°n" policy the or rivals. lheir influence grew 1 ittic by littlc, but if asked to name a beginning oi starting-point wc should say that the period of the ulamas began with 'the 'ulamas' the so-called policy of concentration of the Dutch. Hitherto they had influence- remained somewhat in the back-ground; hence forward they became the real leaders of the war. It was then that their voices were raised more audibly than before in reproach of the ulèëbalangs for their inaction and of the people of the gampöngs for setting the earthly reward above the heavenly, for being backward in the work of reform and for lending but little assistance to the fighters. "Your former pretext" said they, "of the difficulty of contending against a superior force has now proved itself a mockery." Kach energetic ulama travelled to and fro in the sphere where he poss- essed or hoped to acquire influence, proclaiming with renewed vehemence the principles of the holy war. The better to prepare for the great work, ruinous mosques were to be repaired, religious worship held in 12
| high esteem, and | the transgressions | of the people chccked. The godles: | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| pleasures | of the Achehnese | must come | to an end. | ||||
| Ihey | did not | indeed | require military | service | of | every villager | |
| but all | had to | hold themselves | ready | to lend | assistance | in | case o |
| need | to the bands | of volunteers | posted | in various | places. | They | hac |
| also to | be constantly | prepared | to | assist in | the construction | of tlu | |
| kutas | or forts occupied | by | these | bands, to | acquaint | them with any | |
| danger | that nnght | threaten, | to provide for | their | needs, and | take before | |
| the teungku their behaviour. | under | vvhose jurisdiction | they vvere, all complaints | as to | |||
| These | ulamas | are in some | respects | more interesting | to us than | the | |
| sayyids. | 1 he former | have | not it is | truc that | impregnable | character | |
| which | the latter | borrow from | their | birth, and | their prestige | depends | |
| more largely | on | the respect | which | they personally | inspire; | they are | |
| also, as being | Achehnese, | more easily | involved | in party | quarrels. | But | |
| sayyids | or other | foreigners | who are able and | willing to play a poli- | |||
| tical part | in Acheh | are only | chance | phenomena | and | not necessary | |
| components | of Achehnese | society, | of which | the ulamas | form an in- | ||
| dispensable | element. | The | notable example | of | "the Habib", | too, lias | |
| proved grows too | that strangers hot for them. | are | prone to | abandon | the cause when | the fire | |
| Teungku | 1 ïró | was | leader | from the | time of the | ||
| "concentration" | till the day | of his death. | |||||
| 1 iró, a gampöng | in Pidië, owes its reputation | partly to the | teaching | ||||
| in sacred | subjects | of which | it is the seat, and | partly | number | ||
| of distinguished | ulamas | whom | it has produced. | The latter, | ifnotdrawn | ||
| elsewhere | by marriages | with | women | of other | gampöngs, | returned | to |
| their native | place | in their | declining | years, so that | many | of them | lie |
| buried there. | To the sanctity | of their | tombs and | the constant presence | |||
| of influential | ulamas | the place | owes | the peculiar | privileged | position | |
| generally | designated | by the | word | ||||
| Ilere | the neighbouring | chiefs | have | made | over to the | ulamas | the |
| maintenance | of law and | order, | so that | the adat | has in this place | had | |
| much less sigmficance | than | elsewhere. | These | same chiefs have | made | ||
| no claim a place of refuge for such as had become i) Sec above | on the p. 122. | services of the | people, | they involved in internal feuds, and | have respected | Tiró as |
par excellence a
to the
bibeueh ').
I7Q
refrained from hostilities in the neighbourhood of its meunasah. Even members of hostile parties could meet one another there without fear of a disturbance. The most prominent ulama of the time in Tin., to distinguish him from the other teungkus in the place, was usually called Teungku Chi (the Old) and was elsewhere known simply as Teungku di Tiró or Teungku Tiro. As a rule blood relations or collaterals succeeded cach other in this position. When Teungku Tiró Muhamat Amin (the then Teungku Chi' di Tirö) died in December 1885, he was succeeded by his collateral relative Chèh Saman (Shaikh Samman) who had long been his righthand man. As the son of the deceased, although a good scholar, was still too young to take his father's place, the designation of the Teungku Tiró passed to Teungku Saman. Favoured by the progress of the war, this man gained for himself a unique position. We have already seen how the chab sikureuëng of the Sultan could do no more than set the stamp of officialdom on the power he had already won. The authority given him over religious questions in Great Acheh was just as vague as the definition of the judicial power of the Habib at the establishment of the balè meuha- kamah '), and gave equally free play to the natural course of affairs. Teungku Tiró did not concern himself about the insignificant Sultan, nor, except in so far as was absolutely necessary, about the ulèëbalangs. As the representative of religious law he could assume full powers, and none dared to show him open hostility 2). In his letters lo the Dutch Government Teungku Tiró always tried o show the superiority of the power of the ulamas. In one of his ïamphlets he expresses his astonishment that the Gömpeuni were from he very commencement so eager to obtain concessions from the -mltan. It should, he says, have been remembered that the Sultan could lo nothing without Consulting Teuku Kali, Teuku Nè' of Meura'sa, the ?anglima Meuseugit Raya and the Imeum of Luëng Bata; that these °ur wore ln thc'r turn dependent upon the decision of the three
1) See p. 161 above.
| ï ', | : " | PP enmity | against him | on the part | of some of the | cluefs |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ie,r hostility | bes,des | of a somewhat | harmiess | description | was in reality | always |
| .rected aga.nst iteiference | some panglima with their traditional | (military privileges. | leader) of the | ulama on account | of some | cxcessive |
2) ï 'h,e fe: "ses of aPParent enmity against him on the part of some of the cluefs
being
l8o
panglimas of the sagis; that the latter had no power without the acquiescence of the seven kawöms (the traditional expression ') for the Achehnese people); and that the people themselves could only act in accordance with the determination of the ulamas, who derive their know- ledge from Allah and his Apostlc. cUest*Waf 0 Jeungku Tiro knew as well as anyone that money is the life and soul, even of the holy war. He pushed on with the utmost zeal the collections of the ha sabi (>haqq sab'd) i. e. the portion of the tax callad zakat set apart for the holy war. He urged all the chiefs at least to give him money contributions towards the good cause, even ïf they would take no personal part in the conflict. Whoever appeared backward 111 this duty became exposed to the enmity of the Teungku's followers. When the adat chiefs protested, his answer was that he was desirous of giving full weight to their adat qualifications; but these he never defined, and always submitted any questions that arose to the test of the religious law. He denied that he wished to deprive them of a handsbreadth of their territory, but as the representative of religion he required of their subjects a strict obedience to the law of Allah. At that particular juncture these subjects cherished especial respect and fear for the ulamas, feelings which were not as at ordinary times counterbalanced by other circumstances. It was tlius that the Teungku succeeded without difficulty in obtaining the control of a never-empty cofifer for the purposes of the war. No ulèëbalang would have ever so much as conceived the idea of establishing such a treasure-chest, replenished by contributions from the whole of Great Acheh and a great part of the dependencies in the North, East and West Coasts. Given money, men are not lacking in Acheh. The Teungku's troops, it is truc, were formed in part of those very vagrant clements which had forinerly supplied Teuku Asan, Teuku Uma etc. with their fighting men, but each recruit was first duly "converted" by the Teungku, strictly drilled and subjected to a better discipline than suited these' so-called panglimas. Thus he raised a sort of standing army, and took care at the same time always to have a well-armed reserve of gam- pong men. At the same time he maintained his influence over the people by making constant journeys and holding at his halting-places great kanduris
i) See abovc p. 52.
IS i
or religious feasts, at which there was no lack of exhortations. Even during his life time he was revcretl by many as a saint, and in order to satisfy the demand for "ajeumat" (=r charms) he was obliged in the end to have a stamp made bearing a mystic delineation of the Pi opliet s sandal; this he impressed on slips of paper for those who demanded a blessing. We must however be on our guard against exaggerated ideas of theKnvy of the unanimity ot the Achehnese under "The Teungku's power. Teungku". It was not alone the adat-chiefs who witnessed the supremacy of this ulama with ill-concealed annoyance; among the members of his own guild also there were not wanting envious detractors. During his lifetime the opposition of the latter was much restricted, indeed hardly noticeable by the uninitiated; novv that he lias been some years dead (he died in 1891) we can easily gather how jealousy may at times have thwarted his purposes. The principal rivals of Teungku Tin') were the active Habib Samalanga [died in December 1901] and Teungku Kutakarang. The Habib of Samalanga, who originallySa
| SEAL-AMULET | OF THE | LATE Habib |
|---|---|---|
| malanga. | ||
| TEUNGKU | TIR( |
THE had his residence in the district of that name, was .1 sayyid bom in Acheh and thus of less consideration than those who came direct from Arabia. I lis learning must have been below the average and would never have excited remark had it not been for his religious nobility. He came to Great Acheh in order to take part in the direction of the jihad, especially in the XXVI Mukims. Just like leungku 1 iró in his sphere of action, he here gathered in the ha sabi and other contributions to meet the expenses of the war. In order to appear in the eyes of his followers as at least the equal and ïf possible the superior of "the Teungku", he had to distinguish himself from the latter in some particular way. This he did; his spe- cialty was tapa ') or seclusion from the world. He would remain isol-
| seldom practised | by the | Malays of | the peninsula. | When ascending | Gunong | Jerai in Këdah |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| I heard of a holy | hermit | there who | had spoken | to no human | being for five | years; but he |
| was said to | be a stranger. | Tapa for | short periods | is however | popular. (Translater). |
1) Tapa in the sense of absolute hermitical seclusion is admired and respeeted, but very
ated (kaleuët) for from seven to forty successive days in a cave at the source of the Kruëng (river) Daröy, a place which was from ancient times chosen for such devotions '). His followers had also occasionally to submit to a similar coursc of *iapa* ït was 111 fact onc of the ordinary punishments imposed by him for various offences.
th?Ptetgku°s Habib Samalanga als° differed früm TeunSku T,r" i" his opinions in respect to respecting those Achehnese who either lived within the linie or went the Acheh-thither to trade. nese within the linie. During the greater portion of the period of his activity "the Teungku" declared such persons to be little better than unbelievers, and did not raise a hand in protest when his troops robbed them of their property or even of their life. He refrained indeed from giving open orders in this spirit, since he would have had in that case to reckon with ulèë- balangs of distinction who were guilty of the same offence. Still his views were generally known, and when certain of the chiefs implored him to deter his troops from slaying their fellow-Mohammedans even though they lived or had intercourse within the linie, he used always to change the subject with some meaningless remark. It was only when Teuku Uma had convinced him that it was in many respects desirable 2) for the chiefs and notables within the linie to keep in touch with the court, that he at length changed his tactics. Causing these Keumala pilgrims to appear before him, he received them in a friendly manner, and said that under existing circumstances he would only urge them in a general way to an increase of religious zeal, and would place no obstacle in the way of their journeys to Keumala.' Habib Samalanga on the other hand consistently taught that all submission to or intercourse with the infidels was a sin, though not onc which made the offender a complete outlaw. Whoever was brought before him convicted of this sin, was condemned to isolation in the cave, there to do penance for some days and prepare himself for conversion from his heresy. After the death of Teungku Tiró, the friends of Habib Samalanga succeeded in obtaining for him from the court a nine-fold seal similar
| the name | of Teungku | Lam Guha, | having done | for | successive | years in this | cave of |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the I)aroy. |
1) A Javanese whose tomb is now an object of veneration at Ulèë I.heue is known by
2)See p. 150 above.
tapa
'83
to that which had been in the possession of the deceased ulania. Tliis chab sikuren eng could not not however raise this sayyid to the elevation which 1 eungku I iró had attained without any sucli symbol of authority. Another rival of I eungku Tirö was Teungku Kutakarang, an active Teungku and clever but peculiar man. Kutakarang. Many years ago, before the coming of the Dutch to Acheh, liis eagerness to pose as the teacher of doctrines different from those of the majority of Achehnese ulamas, made him in many circles the object of hatred or ridicule. He was always trying to entice away the disciples of others, and liis own decisions on points of law were of so strange a character that he was once banished from the capital in the sultan's name. The war gave him the opportunity, especially after the "concentra- tion" of trying his fortune afresh. At first he worked side by side with or even under the leadership of Teungku Tirö, to whom he found himself constrained novv and then to pay homage in public. In the circle of his intimates, however, he spoke contemptuously of the great man as Leubè ') Saman, criticising his rules and decisions, and certainly feit but little sorrow at the death of that honoured and dreaded ulama. 1 mb.ibly more from love of contradiction tlian from conviction, he taught that relations with those within the linie were not sinful, nay should even be encouraged. Sucli intercourse, he urged, is a source of profit to many, and moreover it gives an opportunity of inciting both Achehnese and foreign Mohammedans within the linie to disaffection; enterprizing persons can under colour of peaceful purposes strike tlieir blow within the enemy's lines, plunder and slay and then retreat in safety. Those ulamas departed from these and the like opinions whenever it served their purpose; at the least they pretended not to notice when others failed to adhere to them. It was as a rule only unimportant points of difterence in their view to which their mutual disfavour gave a stronger significance. 1 luis 1 eungku 1 iró taught that the prohibition of Moslim law against the wearing of gold or silk (a rule universally transgressed in Acheh) applied also to combatants in the holy war, and that the latter must especially refrain from that offence, as the conversion from sin which
i) See p. 71 above.
was the guarantee of their success would otherwise be incomplete. Teungku Kutakarang on the other hand decrecd that no such rules had any application to the warriors of Allah, and carried his opposition so far as to insist on their wearing gold and silk so that the Dutch, find.ng these costly objects on the bodies of the slain, might be dis- mayed by the wealth of Acheh which defied all reverses. Another pecuhar tenet of Teungku Kutakarang was that under ex.st.ng circumstances the Friday service (which is universally performed in Arabic) should in Acheh be preferably celebrated in the Achehnese tongue. Again, in opposition to Teungku Tirö, who laid great stress on good works (building of mosques, public worslup etc.), Teungku Kutakarang classed all these as mere "louse-questions", for which the "elephant" that lay in the path should not be neglected. He described as misspent all the money that Teungku Tirót lavished on kanduris and on the repair of chapcls; it should have been utilized to erect forts (kuta) all along the linie, and to fit out a fleet to harass the enemy by sea as well as land. He also teaches great forbearance for the faults of the combatants in the holy war. He tries to prove by examples from the sacred tradition and from history that much indulgence must be extended to them, as many sins are forgiven them in consideration of their noble work. Teungku Kutakarang thus caused the fighting men who lodged with him at times while reposing from their restless occupation to be treated as distinguished guests. Contrary to Achehenese custom they sat at table upon chairs, and water was set before them in glasses in place of brass drinking-vessels. hinally he was at much pains to enhance the repute of the «pepper saint', Teungku Lam Keuneu'eun, whose tomb in the gampöng of. the same name m the IX Mukims lias always been revered as sacred. He del.ghted to call himself the servant of the tomb of this Teungku, by whose miraculous power the pepper-plant originated in Acheh. Teungku Kutakarang lives in the neighbourhood of that tomb and so of course becomes the recipient of the numerous gifts dedicated thereto. ïirTafteJ ^ ° ^h.nent of Teungku Kutakarang's power properly
| C mpIete | est;ib | |
|---|---|---|
| Teungku ,ro's death. t | tlle | death |
dates from °f Teungku Tiró. The latter had no successor in he true sense of the word; his son, the wellknown guerilla leader Mat or Ma' Amin, by no means followed in his father's footsteps.
In In view view of of existing existing circumstances circumstances his his father father had had deemed deemed it it wiser wiser to to Teungku Tem train train him him up up as as a a soldier soldier than than as as a a pandit, pandit, for for which which latter latter career career he he Mat ^'at Am A 'n' possessed possessed little little capacity capacity or or inclination. inclination. He He mastered mastered however however as as much much religious religious learning learning as as every every person person of of ordinary ordinary piety piety requires requires to to know, know, and and was was always always distinguished distinguished by by the the title title teungku teungku as as being being the the son son of of the the great great ulama. ulama. As As a a matter matter of of fact, fact, however, however, he he was was a a gucrilla gucrilla chief chief and and nothing nothing else, else, and and borrowed borrowed from from the the great great authority authority which which his his father's father's name name everywhere everywhere inspired inspired an an influence influence which which raised raised him him to to the the position position of of chief chief panglima. panglima. In In this this capacity capacity he he and and his his bands bands provcd provcd a a great great burden burden to to the the people, people, and and his his life life was was in in other other respects respects also also far far from from harmonizing harmonizing with with the the teaching teaching of of his his father. father. The The story story goes goes that that during during the the last last years ycars of of the the latter latter s s life life Mat Mat Amin Amin lived lived openly openly with with another another man's man's wife, wife, and and that that Teungku Teungku Tirö, Tirö, to to give give him him a a severe severe lesson, lesson, forbade forbade him him access access to to his his presence. presence. This I his appears appears to to have have so so enraged enraged the the young young man, man, that that he he brooded brooded over over some some dcvice device to to rid rid him him of of this this tircsome tircsome father. father. When When Teungku Teungku Tirö, Tirö, while while still still in in the the full full vigour vigour of of life, life, suddenly suddenly feil feil lil, ïll, he he is is said said to to have have expressed expressed the the conviction conviction that that poison poison had had been been administered administered to to him him by by some some agent agent of of his his son. son. Notwithstanding Notwithstanding this this he he had had Mat Mat Amin Amin summoned summoned to to his his bedside bedside when when dying, dying, and and solemnly solemnly warned warned him him to to go go to to the the devout devout ulamas ulamas for for advice, advicc, and and to to forsake forsake his his evil evil vvays. vvays. He He seemed seemed however however to to realize realize how how little little cliance cliance there there was was of of his his son's son's ever ever proving proving his his truc true successor successor in in any any respect. respect. The The latter latter was was not not wont wont to to hearken hearken to to advice. advice. In I11 his his dress dress he he assumed issumed the the character character of of an an ulèebalang, ulèebalang, and and while while his his father, father, in in receiving receiving distinguished distinguished guests, guests, always always rose rose to to meet meet them, them, the the young young man man would would remain remain sitting sitting until until they tliey came came up up to to him. him. Even Even the the Achehnese Achehnese consider consider Mat Mat Amin Amin proud, proud, ignorant ignorant and and headstrong, headstrong, and and when ivhen after after his his father father s s death death he he gave gave the the rein rein more more than than ever ever to to his his evil-vil passions, passions, the the great great body body of of the the adherents adherents of of Teungku Teungku Tirö Tirö at at once )nce melted melted away away '). ').
| i) I) [Mat [Mat | Amin Amin was was killrd | killrd in in action action | in in 1896, 1896, | when when the the Dutch Dutch | troops troops | captured captured the the fortress | fortress |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| of of Aneu' Aneu' | Galöng. Galöng. Two Two other | other sons sons | of of Teungku Teungku | Tiró, Tiró, Teungku Teungku | Bèb Bèb (died (died 1900) | 1900) and and Teungku | Teungku |
| Mahidin Mahidin | or or Ma' Ma' Et, Et, | together together with with | their their kinsman kinsman | Teungku Teungku | Chót Chót Pliëng Pliëng | (died (died 1901) 1901) | much much |
| respected | for his piety | and learning | continued | to do their | utmost to maintain | the collec- | |
| tions of the satit | contributions | in | the dependencies | on the | North Coast. | Great Acheh | no |
| longer furnishes | a field | for the labour | of these | men and their | fellows.] |
resnertprl f«-»r hic A 1 : — *: i.,.
to**°r0n**. Io"ngku kutakarang then roused himself to greater activity. He inactive". c.rculated, undcr the Arabic title Tadkirat-ar-rakictin (exhortation to the inactive) an enlarged and amended cdition ofanumber ofpolitico- rehgious pamphlets which were already known within a narrower c e.' ^ herein he proclaims in the common Achehnese metre the principles we have sketched above, and seeks to rouse the people to etter organization and increased energy. In this work, of which I iave succeeded in obtaining tliree copies, the Dutch are represented as outcasts of humanity whose aim is the destruction of the countries over which they hold sway; while at the same time attention is drawn to their powerlessness in respect to Acheh. The Achehnese, he proceeds, are well able to expel the Dutch; even the very babes are best appeased by being offered a sword as a toy. Ihe country ,s rich enough in munitions of war and wants nothing but good generalship. Ihe Sultan he hardly mentions. He only employs the similitude of the marriage of the Sultans with the State of Acheh ') to give point to the remark that a bridegroom who will not lift a finger to save lus e from the stranger is unworthy of her. Ihe ulèëbalangs, he continues, hold no consultation with the ulamas as they ought to do; they think only of their own particular interests and by reason of the «louse questions" (so runs the Teungku's favourite metaphor) which cause disruption between them, they see not the "elephant" which threatens the whole nation. The people of the gampöngs are also to blame, for many of them ïmitate the inactivity of the ulèëbalangs and withdraw from all share m that most solemn of obligations, the jihad, on the pretext that this duty rests not on the individual but on the community in general. Some entrust their money contributions to the wrong hands (here he alludes to his rivals), others let themselves be won over by the money of the infidels to keep the ground clear round their line of forts. He prophesies woe to the Achehnese within the linie who have sub- mitted to the Gompeuni, so soon as the infidel shall have been driven out. All now depends on the *chab limbng* on the force of the sword. Even the ulamas corae in for a share of the blame for the slow
progress of aftairs. Sonic of them sit 011 their prayer-carpets or losc their senses over ascetic exercises — alluding to the Teungku's rival Habib Samalanga, who is not however mentioned by name. Others devote themselves to the repair of mosques far away from the scene of the war, and hold great kanduris or religioiis feasts, squandering the money subscribed for the war on purposes for which it was never intended. Here he refers to Teungku Tiró. They forget the main issue and are partly to blame for the reverses which come upon the country. I he collcction of the sabil monies should be made by conccrted arran gement, and a central treasury established (of course with Teungku Kutakarang as its administrator) in the neighbourhood of the theatre of war. 1'rovision should also be made for attacking by sea the enemy vvhom they could already meet 011 equal terms on land. This short précis of the contents of the pamphlets of Teungku Rcpose-W- Kutakarang taken in connection with our previous remarks shows that '"g ulamas- even among the ulamas there prevailed a spirif of discord. Some there are also among them who in spite of the indignant remonstrances of their more ambitious colleagues, hold themselves aloof from all this useless bickering and behave as though no jihad existed. Such for instance is Teungku Tanöh Mirah, the learned kali of the IV Mukims of the VII of the XXVI. And at the time when the Dutch still occupied a great portion of Acheh, the example of Chèh Mara- haban '), the earlier kali raja and ulama of Teuku Kali showed clearly enough that some of them would have been quite willing to change sides ïf they could only have found conclusive arguments strong enough to counterbalance the contumely attending such a step. Still, in spite of all their dissensions and lack of good guidance, it is certain that the ulamas have become more and more the masters of the situation. They have succeeded without difficulty in diverting the allegiance of the subjects of the ulèëbalangs, and have acquired more influence in their territories tlian they themselves possess. They con- stitute the party of action, the chiefs that of inaction. They stand forth in the name of Allah, the chiefs in the name of an adat which, so far as it relates to government and the administration of justicc, is very far from finding favour in the eyes of the people. Disobedience to them leads to misery in this world and the next, while the ulèëbalang
. 1) \ See c- _ _ _
p. 101 above. i
has only power to make life unpleasant to the refractory within the limits of his own district '). Next to the ulamas, chiefs such as Teuku Uma play the most im portant part, but they do not form the soul of the movement of resistance. I hey have other objects in view than the holy war, objects which they would if necessary gladly avail themselves of our help to attain. Adat-chiefs have, it is true, occasionally risen superior to their inactivity, but this was due to the fact tliat the ulamas had for years taken the lead and they thus feared to find themselves deprived of all authority. What the Dutch have had opposed to them in Acheh is not a Keumala party (such has never existed) nor disconnected bands of marauders, but a national party, so far as tliat is possible in Acheh, held together and organized by the ulama. rhese ambitious men have the greatest interest in the continuance of hostilities. Indeed their material power is based on the sabii-contn- butions which the religious law empowers them to levy. These collec- tions would abruptly cease if there were no infidels to fight against, aml their enemy could do these ulamas no greater injury than by a complete evacuation of Acheh. The adat-chiefs would then bestir them selves to recover their former position, which would be an easy task under the altered circumstances. The ulamas would have to fall back upon their studies and their teaching, and only a few of exceptional talent and energy would succeed in attaining a measure of authority as moral reformers. emëntlof8 A larS° ')0rtl°n °f thc P°PuIace would rejoice at being set free from ' popula-t'lc'r y°ke' ^or as we have repeatedly observed, their authority is tion. based as much on dread as 011 reverence. There are many who desire to pursue in peace their normal occu- pations, and especially agriculture, the "prince of all bread-winning", without being harassed by sabil-contributions or compelled to serve among the reserve of fighting men. There are many too who perceive the ambitious motives underlying the activity of the ulamas, even
| withdrcw to | a great extent | from public | life and died | in November | .895. He never came into | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| contact w.th | the Government, | but in the | last years | of his his friends succeeded in making | ||
| the Dutch | officers | that this | fanatic ulama | had been | transformed | into an ardent |
| advocate | of acknowledgment | of the supremacy | of the | Gömpeuni.] |
1) [After the .submission of Teuku Uma to the Dutch Government, Tcungku Kutakarang
life Civil bel.eve
though they believe in the truth of their preaching. Behind the ulamas there stands it is truc a national party, but by no means the whole nation. In this sense we can justly speak of the Dutch as having friends and enemies among the Achehnese. The friends are the great mass of those whose interests are largely identical with those of the invading power, wliile the enemies are unappeasable fanatics spurred 011 by the ulamas, whose power can alone be maintained by the continuance of disorder. It would of course be folly to expect to find real friends among a people who in their traditions know the Dutch only as enemies, and w ho find in the present state of aftairs no satisfactory reason for casting in their lot with them. It is certain however that a great and sub- stantial portion of the people of Acheh would rejoice at the complete destruction of the party of the ulamas, which novv holds in its hands the ïeins of power. And in such an event, these ulamas would in accordance with the teaching of their own sacred books be obliged to meet their fate with resignation, hard though it might be. Indirectly this state of things is rather well illustrated by a heroic The latcst poem now very popular in Acheh, celebrating the chief events of the Ache!>nese eP1C* war against the Dutch. We shall describe it at length in our chapter on literature. I he poet is a full-blooded Achehnese. He sang of the war with the Gompeuni to enliven the evenings and nights of the inhabitants of the gampöngs by chanting his epic for a fair recompense. It is of course not free from abuse of the Dutch; mockery and insult of every kind are heaped upon them, while the heroic deeds of the Achehnese are cxtolled beyond measure. What is most striking is the fairly objective tone pervading the poem, which is fashioned according to the more ancient models. The animation at the capital after the expeditions of the Dutch troops through the XXII Mukims and the influx of Achehnese eager for a shaie of the profits are described almost as sympathetically as the deeds of the heroes and martyrs of Acheh. There is decided humour in the description of a great kanduri (religious feast) given by Teungku liró, vvhere the assembled guests were chased away by the bullets of the Dutch soldiers at the very moment when the preparations for the repast were completed. The fanatical clements in the poem may be fairly attributed to the force of custom. Those who take pleasure in
I90
ïstening to the recital of such poems are not intractable, but are subject to the control of a party more powerful than all the conser- vative elements of their society taken together.
Appendix to chapter I.
Translation of the letters patent with the ninefold seal granted >y the / retender to the Sultanate to the Panglima Meuseugit Raya. (See pp. 129 seqq. above).
At the top of the document stands in the middle the latest chab sikureuéng, an engraving of which has been given above. It consists as we have seen (p. 129 seqq.) of one large circle sur- roun et by eight smaller ones. The large circle contains the following ïnscription:
"May Allah give good guidance unto His Majesty Sultan 'Alau'ddïn (pronounced in Ach. Alaêdin) Muhamad Daud Shah Juhan (pronounced «n Ach. Muhamat Dawöt Shah Juhan) the Blessed, the shadow of Allah ,n the world ,296" (i. e. ,879, the year of his election us Sultan). n the smaller circles surrounding this appcar the names of the tollowing Sultans.
A fUlt'm Sayyidl al-Mukammal (pron. in Ach. Sidi Meukamay) i. e. Alaedin al Qahhar (Kha) who reigned from 1530 to 1552 or 1557 or thereabouts '). Sultan Meukuta Alam i. e. Iskandar Muda 1607—36. Suttan Tajul-alam i. e. Sapiatödïn, the first sultana, 1639 or 1641 —167- Sultan Ah,nat Shah, the first prince of the present dynasty 172, or 1726—1735. ' ' •>or Sultan Juhan Shah 1735—60. Sultan Mal/nut Shah 1781 —1795. Sultan Jauhar Alam Shah 1802—24. Sultan Mansur (Mansa) Shah 1838—70. The first four of these names recur on most of the nine-fold seals
reiims nf .fe» a u u
| I) l or | our present | purpose chronological | details of the | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| are of | or importance. | We shall | mere.y | observe that | o h | f' |
| vanously | given in the | different native | authorities. | Thus some | have it tha^Sidi | M-k |
| reigned from | 1540 to | 1570 A. D. | Meukamay |
min,he^ list
O the Sultans. They are those of the rulers to whom the former pros- per.ty of Acheh and her adat-institutions are generally ascribed. The others vary according to the taste of each of the sultans, who dccide for themselves the contents of their seals '). To the right of the nine-fold chab is to be seen the small oblon- private seal of the sultan. This is regarded as more or less establishing the legahty of the large seal, and bears the words as-Sultan Mukamat JJawot S/iah.
I" the l -ft hand top corner of the document is written al-mustahiqq (pron. in Ach al-mbseutaha) the «rightful possessor" by which expres sion 1 uanku Muhamat Dawöt makes known his claims to the throne of Acheh.
Less weighty documents which are not considered worthy of the ninefold seal exhibit in its place a single seal of the sultan, an engraving o which has also been given. Round its border run the words «Allah" and His word is the truth and to him belongeth dominion" In the centre appears «This is His Majesty Sultan Alaédin Muhamat Dawöt. ah Juhan, the Blessed, Allah's shadow in the world". This seal is also ratified by the addition of the small oblong one It is used for example in the letters of recommendation given by the Sultan to his messengers, to foreign traders etc. The letters patent given to the Panglima Meusigit Raya are com- posed in a mixture of Malay and bad Arabic, of which the following is a translation: ö "In the year of the Hijrah of the Prophet (may Allah bless him and grant him peace!) one thousand thrce hundred and seven, on the 4"1 day °f the month R:ibiC al-Awwal, being Monday >), with the help of Allah the omniscient King, and with the blessing of the Prophet, the Lord of Men, and of his four companions, which be Abu Bahr, Omar, Uthman and Ah (may they be pleasing unto Allah!) and with the blessing of the glorious Pole of the world and the brilliant frame work of the skies, the immutable knower, the true Beloved 3) the lord Shaik Abdul-Qadir Jilain₄), and with the blessing of all the devout Walis
| e p ,65. | ' | '° | ° | -d- »f | iyyah, |
|---|
1) Compare also J. A. Kruijt's Atjch en ,/e Atjehcrs p. <8.
2) 28th October 1889.
3) Here and in other similar Achehnese documents stands in place of
iC ga reVerC,Ce PaUl thU teaCheri Wh f0Unded the «.ïadlv
| Of God | from | the Eastern | to the Western | portions | of the Earth, | and | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| with | the blessing | of the | miraculous | power | of all the | sultans | and |
| with | the blessing | of the | mediation | ') of his late | Majesty | Meukuta | |
| lam Iskandar | (Eseukanda) | Muda, and | with the blessing of | the mediation | |||
| of Her late mediation | Majesty of His late Majesty Alaédin Ahmat Shah, and with the blessing | Tajul-alam Sapiatödin, | and with the blessing of | the | |||
| of the mediation with the blessing of the mediation | of His late | Majesty Sultan | Alaédin | Mahmut Shah, | and | ||
| ïah ), and | with | the blessing | of the | mediation | of His late Majesty | ||
| Sultan | Alaédin | jauhar al-Alam | Shah, and | with the | blessing of His late | ||
| Majesty | Alaédin | Mansö Shah, | on all of whorn | God have Mercy, Amen! | |||
| If it | be the | will of | Allah the | Exalted, with | the blessing | of the | |
| miraculous | power | of him | who (nowj | possesses | greatness, | dominion, | |
| justice | and excellence, | along | with the | highest | and most | distinguished | |
| rank | him who ,s favoured | by the | Lord whose name | is 'your | Highest | ||
| 'O, | ' ° | *er His | Sultan | Alaédin | |||
| Muhamat | Dawot | Shah, | son of the | late Sultan | Alaédin | Mansö Shah | |
| Juhan, | the Blessed, | Allah's | shadow | in the world; | while | His Highness | |
| sat upon | the | throne in | Kuta Keumala, | His | exalted | Majesty, | the |
| ; :;;, | , | Keureukön | Katiböy | Muluk | (or | ||
| Mulut | ), bidding | him draw | up a document | with the | thunder-seal % | to | |
| be vouchsafed | unto Our | ulèëbalang, | who is called | the | Panglima | of | |
| the Meuseugit | Raya | of Banda | Acheh, | the Seat of Peace | |||
| We make | known | hereby unto all | ulèëbalangs, unto | the wakis, tandils •), | |||
| ïmeums, | katibs, | bileuës and | all subjects: |
of His late Majesty Alaédin Muhamat
t0 Wlt ur Iord and mas Majesty
, C 4 t hC WOrld Spoke linto the
poli.,1, „ „ .:-l rortune i,
" PP,24-5
| 6 | ffi | ', " | ° | " y | -11e,1 | in Malay. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| «2»!«V""*** | -«• | |||||||
| highland | districts of | the West | ^ | > | chiefs | in the | ||
| throughout | the Malay | I'eninsula and" StraKs* | sJttl' ' | "'7 |
4) As to this imaginary private secretary see above.
THF T a SthC inC f ld SCal officiall
C 1 1 m an heredltar r tltle of certain is in cornraon use
r= Ï: - - - -ZSÏSSZ sasp
'93
Wïth regard to this our Panglima, whose ancestors of old, even tc his father, have been even down to our own times panglimas of the Meuseugit Raya, we hereby appoint him to be Panglima Meuseugit Raya, to fulfil all the duties that appertain to that office, and tc follow in all his dealings the word of Allah (be He praised and glorified !j by commanding the good and forbidding the evil to all chiefs who are subject to his official orders. So is it the bounden duty of all these chiefs to hear and follow his command and prohibitions, in so far as they be in accordance with the law of our prophet Mohammad (may Allah bless him and grant him peace!), the law of the adat and the sacred institutions, even as these held good in the days of the earher sultans; on the way of righteousness, so that no injustice may befall the servants of Allah. Let orders be given henceforth duly to perform the Friday service and the five daily prayers, to build meuseugits, déahs and meunasahs, also to contribute zakat and pitrah on all things that be subject thereto, and where any is able, to accomplish the journey to Mekka to under- take the haj. Moreover we make it known by this writing, that wc have made him our deputy for all matters of pasah (divorce by judicial decree), marriage and the payment of pitrah for orphans, in respect of all our subjects who are within his jurisdiction. Thus let all who are in straits because they have no marriage-walis or who are desirous of obtaining separation resort to him that he may enquire into their case. Should the Panglima Meuseugit Raya himself be insufficiently ac- quainted with the lavvs respecting marriage, pasah and the pitrah for orphans, he may appoint some upright ulama as his deputy, so as to ensure that all be done in accordance with the law of Mohammad. Hut should this Panglima Meuseugit Raya fail to act conformably with the word of Allah, the law of Mohammad and Our institutions, then shall he forfeit his high office '). Here endeth well our word. Amen!"
| I) The | whole content | of this document, | and | especially | this last clause, | form an | absurd |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| contrast to | the actual | state of alfairs | in Acheh, | and show | the composition | of the | earlier |
| models on pp. 7—8 above). | which these | letters patent | are based | to have | been the work | of „lamas. | fSee |
'3
CHAPTER II.
ACHEHNESE AGR,CULTURE,
| CALENDARS, | FESTIVALS | AND SEASONS. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| NAVIGATION | ANI) | FISHERY. | ||
| LAWS | RELATING | TO LANI) | AND | WATER |
§ i. The Achehno-Mohammedan Divisions of Time.
The
| Arabic and | calenHar | nf | r | ,• >. |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Achehnese | b u ,es | |||
| names of months. | W thC | MalayS | and other |
.,. " "vais is the samc among the Achehnese " Mohammcdans; they adopt the lunar ° 3j4 days as a basis. They employ this same year with its unar months as a measurement of time for all the ordinary purposes hfe Some of the name, however, which they give to the months •ffer from the Arab.c and are borrowed rather from customary obser- vances belonging peculiarly to tho.se months. Many of them are also
fC,a tlC Arablc names Pronounced in the Achehnese fashion • ese are universally understood by the well-educated. We shall begin y giving a concise hst of these names with explanatory notes. ARABIC **AVADIP u.wn/.**NAMES OF MONTHS ACHEHNESE NAMES OF MONTHS.
i. AIuharrant.
Asan-Usên (called after the commemoration of Hasan and Husain on the ioth day of this month).
2. Safar.
Sapha.
3. Rabial-awwal.
Mo lót (from Maulud, the feast of the birth of Mohammad. Less commonly called Rabiny Away. 4-Rabi al-aklur. Adoe mo'löt (i. e. the younger brother ofMö'lot, since the birth of the Prophet is commemo- rated in this month also. Less commonly called Rabiöy Akhè).
'95 ARABIC NAMES OF MONTHS. ACHEHNESE NAMES OF MONTHS.
Jumada l-awwal. Mo lot Seuneulheuëh (i. e. final Mó'-löt, for this
month also is specially dcdicatcd to the com- memoration of Mohammad's birth. Women, who adhere conservatively to all that is old-fashioned in Acheh, also call this month Madika phön i. e. "the first free one"; I cannot tracé the origin of this name. Less commonly called Jamadó-away).Jumada l-akhir. Kanduri böh kayèë (i. e. "kanduri or religious
offering of fruits. Old-fashioned women speak of it as Madika Seuneulheuëh i. e. "the last free one". Less commonly called Jamadö Akhé). 7' RaJab-Kanduri Apam (i. e. "kanduri of apam-cakes"; also Rajab or Rajab).Sha'tan. Kanduri Bu (i. e. «kanduri of rice"; also Cha ban
or Sa'ban).
g. Ramadhan. Puasa (fast) or Ramalan or Ramulan.
10. Shawwal. Urbè Raya (feasting month) or Chaway.
11. Diïl-qcfdah. Meu apét ("pinched, shut in" cf. apit or hapit
in Mal. Jav. and Sund.) or Döy Kaidah.
- Du l-hidjah. Haji or Doy Hijah. 1 he days of the week bear the Arabic names, which in Achehnese l)ays 0f the are pronounced as follows: week.'
Aleuhat Sunday Seunanyan Monday Seulasa Tuesday Rabu Wednesday Hamch Thursday Jeumeu ah Friday. Sabtu Saturday. According to the Shafi'ite school of Mohammedan law, the dates of Thebe-inn- the religious festivals should not be established by calculation, but the infi of the commencement of eacli month must be fixed by observation of the new moon. If for example the month preceding the fasting month should according to the reckoning number 29 days, still the following day must not be regarded as the beginning of the fast, unless it is proved by witnesses in the manner prescribed by the law, that the new
moor, ha, been 29,h day
| actually | sccn on | the evening | following the | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| (n a) | ot | cstab | ishcd | ||
| in spitc | of aslrMomy | bc |
«hts observation „f the „,o„„ y „ „ J he ntonth mus, ^ ^ ^ tnirty clays.
tl^d^f "Vl? MO,hammcda***«f*** °«» s Arehipelago are ShaiPite,, tine o the ru'ya .s far front bcing universally observcd In many d.stnets caleulation (*/,«> „ „„.ered to, though aceording he teaelnng „r that school it should „nly be cmployed for the in.
Mece fu'l "'y Kk• " " °"ly ^ '» «» '"«»»~ «f cea and Hadramaut that the ru'ya has been more universally accepted •n Acheh the-calculation" was the method followed from the doctrt rt
| ,' | ° "'" | "' | " >' | ° °>"«i«i„g |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| I ,C | VCrCi | : C y ,C | dimC lt c d | f a |
| B SCC | ,he first we | l; mee with nlll | a rcgolation in cacl | ycar |
Darts th " " °™ «*«°° that in th.se P the atmosphere ,s „nly oceasionally clear enough to allow of the 7 T₀° " " ''V of her appearance. 1» <" «diets „f the sultan,,, direeting th» the conimcncemcnt „f the fasting „, ^ fi«d b> a counetl „f the learaed held on the last Friday „f the pre- eeding month. The date was then n.ade tnowa ,0 the people by the
to 'th " "'C |I"JV'""S C'ay' This was 1'ó'e inadn,is,ible aceording to the ruya doctrine.
"'ere u,c tn Acheh a few ulamas who are aequainted with some of e pnnciples Arab.c astronony (that „f the middle ages), which /' "" "lc 1>as"i "f thcir calculations. Hut a, a rule refercnce is only made to certain tables given in Malay book,. without a„y ,egard
.0 the „ay which these tables „ere arrived at, or the neccL.y for conec of the error, in ,,ck„nin,r to w,,ic„ ,he)r ^ ^ ^ some lapse of time.
comCpu!fngüf A bncf dcscnPtion of the nature of these tables will here suffice 3). the calendar.
O Long since in Yogya and Batavia according to Dr A R r v. o Government Almanac for 1868 n u-rm 1 n, „ ' ' Stuart, in the
| the Government | Almanac | for .868 | pp. „ | ,, ' | " ° | ? | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| nese calendar | that its | vear ilin if | , •,., | „, | common | wtth the | Acheh- |
| on the other | hand are' | different" | the Ah h | " | ° | ' The year | letters |
| found in some | Arabic | h,, I L | l l | ' ^ ' P°» | ^ith those | which | are to be |
| M».ays (Hritish | Settlement ^ | tt ^Mal | ^ '"tlacca, II | . and | * " —« which Dr. | Cohen |
3) As to the eight-year cycle of the Javanese sec I)r II r \ c
ct th; C h(:n SlUart remarks
rCmaind r of 3 6 col res d
uf N p 336),
| The years | are first | divided | into groups | of eight, | and | eacli of these | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| eight years | lias its | proper | Arabic letter | [harah | thön)|the numerical | ||
| value of this letter | is the cypher | of that year. As the order of | sequence | ||||
| of the | year-Ietters | is invariable, | we | need only | know | the letter | of |
| the preceeding, | to arrivé | at that | of the current | year; and | |||
| this the letter | may | be calculated | from the | year of the | Hijrah. | ||
| The | months | have | each tlieir letter | in like manner, | and | the | |
| numerical | value of that | letter | is the cypher | of its month. | If we add | ||
| the cypher | of a given | year | to that | of a certain | month, | the sum of | |
| the two | gives us the | elite | to the day | of the week | which | is the first | |
| day of that | month | in the year | in question. | ||||
| lo apply | this clue, | we start | with the day | of the | week | with which | |
| the cycle | or series of years | begins. Now as this day | recedes one place | ||||
| in every | 120 years according | to a necessary | adjustment | in the system, | |||
| there are | seven different | ways | of counting, | called | after | the days | of |
| the week which respectively | begin the cycles, | Ahadiyyah, | Ithnainiyyah, | ||||
| Ihalathiyyah, | Arba | iyyah, Khamsiyyah, Jum | iyyah. | Sabtiyyah. | The cycles | ||
| beginning different | with Wednesday parts of the Archipelago. | or Thursday | are now usually | employed | in | ||
| I11 Acheh The cycle | the Arba of 8 years is as follows: | iyyah | (Wednesday) | method | is that | most in use. | |
| '• Aléh • Hé 3- J' 4- Zóë 5. 6. 7- Wèë 8. Day akhé | - Day away Ba | (I) numerical (v) (o) <) (j) | value 1. » „, „ v „ „ „2. „ „ „ | 5- 3- 7-. | |||
| 1 he calculation | for finding | the letter | of a Hijrah | year | consists | in | |
| dividing | the number | representing | the year | by 8 and | counting | off the | |
| year-letters | in the above | order, | beginning | with Wèë, to the number | of | ||
| the remainder. | Thus | the year | 1309 | by | 8 leaves | 5; counting | |
| Stuart met | with in a Sumatran | almanac | (rijdschrift | v. h. Batav. | Genootschap | XX p. 209). | |
| Hut none | the Calendars | given in | the last mentioned | article | entircly | agrees with | the |
| Malay-Achehnese | calendars. | Suth an | agreement | be presumed | to be | probablc | in the |
| case of that | mentioned by Newbold, | for the Achehnese | derive | their Malay | lore pr.ncipally | ||
| from the Straits. | Newbold, | however, gives | particular | whence | this might | be decided. |
8 even without twelve
c c
c
2 v m <£•)
4.
v 5 5. v 4
divided of may 110
from Wee 5 places onwards, we reach Jim; jim is thus the ietter of that year. I o fix the year-letters on the memory they are formed into a s.ngle word with the help of vowels, thus ahjizdabuda The sequence of the month-letters is as follows: '• ) — 7-7- v = 2-
v = 2. 8. j-4.
9-s = 5- 4-» 5-10. • = 7. 5-^ =6. 11. |==i.I r. 12. 3
c ^ u. ictóung montli in the year 1300 we a c t e cypher of the year (3) to that of the fasting month, i. e the 9'1 8°f th' iycar' Which cypher ^ s- This gives 8, and we now count o * Weekda/S Winning from Wcdnesday, which gives us Wedncsday as the first day of the fasting month. The month-cyphers are also formed into a word to assist the memory,
| thus zabjth wcïabdih | za'ajén ( | fr | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| rt/' | . ' ° | *' | |||
| n a | |||||
| nthS | haVC | thirty | and | ||
| 2 | |||||
| 18 3,1 CX | StS f 0nL | I20lh | of |
1 tl 1C C>C L f eight yCar as may be easily calculated, the 5 anc 71 years have an additional intercalary day (355 i ll). The ° 7-en twenty-nine days, but in the •ntercalary years the, «h month has also 30 days. In each year there " ° " a day, but I have not been able to dis cover whether the Achehnese would correct this at the end of every 120 years by skipping a day. Téh-books. Malay handbooks are also used for thesp TI. ., mcse contain tables „tl. all the requisite data, and a„ expianatory te» to faeilitate
e.. use Amateurs of scienee are in the habit of eollecto.g „„„ or
more sueh „eat.ses m a single volume along with sundry other data for «mg lueky days, month. and hours, the good fortune that n.ay e expected to attend a proposed marriage, and the like. To these are sometimes added theological treati.ses, and the whole forms what in Java „ cal led a primion or paririmbott, and at Batavia is known as a„> f °r ff"', f 'fr°m **« C«diq. the reputed au,hor of many a trological tables) The name in Aehèh is M, a corruptie,, of the same
°< méanLT, I I?"°,",Ced « * ,he »s or.ginal the day of 24 meaninK ls medical art". Hefore proceedlng to revlew the twelve month. of the Mohammed,»
year in order to sketch in detail the principal feasts and general customs of a religious nature observed by the Achehnese, let us notice some peculiarities of their division of the day of 24 hours. In ancient legends and in proverbs we occasionally meet with allu- sions to a division of the day and night into hours or periods, which is generally understood, but lias now lost all practical significance. The day and night (separated froni one another by sunset and sunrise) vvere divided into four equal parts, each of about 3 hours duration. Such a division is called in Arabic züm, and the Mohammedans of the Archipelago have adopted it, name and all (ja»i '), jeuctri) from the Arabs. Later on the name was applied in Malayan and Javanese coun- tries to the hour of 60 minutes. This modification did not take place in Acheh where the word maintained its original meaning. The notation now most in vogue for the different parts of the day and nights corresponds essentially with that which we find, for example, in Java. Some of the names are borrowed from the religious subdivision of time into a number of waqtus (Ach. ivate'ê or wateé), the periods allotted to the obligatory prayers. Others are based 011 daily occupations, meals, etc. Ihe principal divisions, commencing from the morning, are as follows: Ban benkah inata urbë ("with the breaking forth of the sun") about 6 A. M. Sigalah ur'oë 2) ("the sun a pole high" referring to the poles used in propelling craft) ... „ 7 to 7.30 Watèé or wa'teébu ("rice-time", i.e. "meal-time") „ 9 Ploih meuneu uë ("the loosening of the ploughing gear" i. e. the time at which the plougher, who lias brokcn his fast early in the morning, goes with his buffaloes to seek repose.. „ 10 Peunab c/iöt₃) ("the approaching of the zenith"
i. e. by the sun) n l r
Chat („zenith") I2 NOON Reubah chöt ("falling from the zenith") or lettho (Ach. pronunciation of the Arabic zuhr = midday) B 12.30 P. M.
| the common | expression | for a watch | or clock. | (Translator). | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| is also said. |
1) Jam is used by the Malays not only to denote the hour of 60 minutes, but also as
2) Urbë means not only "day" but also "sun".
3) In this and the two following expressions urbë = "the sun" is understood. Chbt uroc
| Peuteungahan | leuho («the middle of the period | |
|---|---|---|
| P M | ||
| leuho | the Iast | |
| (the | b |
devoted to the obligatory noonday prayers") about 1.30-2 ( Part of the above period) Asa " eginning of the time of the casr or afternoon prayers"). Peuteungahan ««(the middle of the above period) " " <"« (thc ^st part of that period). " ' "
Mugréb') («sunset") .....' " "
cüha («evening" especially referring tothe time of the commencement of the evening nrayer. Arab. cishd) Teungoh malam («midnight"). : " 7'3° " Su/öih yang akhé («the last third ofthe night"' Arab. thulth) "
| Kukuë' tnanb' siseun («the single crowing of the | ' °~ " ° | ' |
|---|---|---|
| I 3 4 3 A> | M | |
| 3 4 4 3 | ||
| (fr m Arab | ^ |
cock") ....
Kukue tnanb' ramè (the continuous crowing of
the cocks") ....
Mure/i ("the streaks of davvn" on the horizon) " ° " or suboh (from Arab. subh = morning) orpaja °' = car,y dawn) cIosc on ? 2)
| sg | rr—• | — | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| us to that | which prècedes | it. | ^ rr -<* - | °" •'«, | »o. ...- | as with l>>' the | |
| those in the | text in so | far as they | are partlv | dr "f ° | °" ' | B resembling | |
| means all | identieal with | the». The | following | list is | ^ P " | not by any | |
| manual of the Malay languaee D | no | ,if | • | " ppendix | to Maxwell's | ||
| 1. Beltint terbang | lalat | "before the flies | are "sUr^"Tu'?^ | °"' '" | - | ||
| . /w, | ..hen | the heat | co | ||||
| 3- Mrtng | ambun «when | the dew | dries" about | 8 A M | |||
| . Tengah | naik «when | the sun is | half way | up" A. M |
8 C that f 0WS
h eVer thou h n turaI hen mcna are ln a C Pai)is ith thilt given above 2
4 9
c;3%rïXps,;Vnt:(,his —->
| ï | lltT. | in ,hc | . — | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| your feet; | noon). | ('• | -«hen your | shadow is round | |||
| 9-Birlh hart | «when | the day | changes", | afternoon. | |||
| IO. Lepas | ba ada, | and lefas | ba'ada | sa/a/t" after | f FridavM | ||
| about 1.30 | p. M. | ' | ' ay s) | prayers | (in the mosque) |
lound e
nr
s^^»«W58KSB»,
20I
Ihe popular measures of time are also similar to those employed by othermea- the Malays, Javanese etc. sures and c-i i'L limits of time. Sik leb tnata, a moment (a blink of the eyes). **Chek ranub sigapu, the time required for chewing a quid of sirih, about 5 minutes.**
Masa' bu sikay breuêh the time required for cooking a kay (cocoanut shell-full) of rice, about half an hour.
Mctsa' bu sigantang ') breuêh, the time required for cooking a gantang of rice, about an hour and a half.
Masa' bu sinaléh breuêh, the time required for cooking a naléh of rice, about 3 hours.
Sikhan uroê, half a day, about 6 hours.
Si' uroê seu/idt, lit. = "a sun dark", a whole day -).
lo distinguish "to-day" (uroê nyoé) from the days which precede and follovv it, the following expressions are in use -1).
Beuklam, the previous evening, which according to the Achehnese conception is the evening of the present day; it thus answers to our "yesterday evening". **Baroê, yesterday (daytime only).** Baroé sa> the day before yesterday, lit. "yesterday one".
| gantang | gantang | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| I) A | is now | no longer | used as a mcasure | of capacity | in Acheh; | where a | |
| is spoken of 2 | is nieant. | ||||||
| The measures | of capacity | are as | follows: | ||||
| blakay (from | blah kay, a | division | of a kav") | 1 | » | ||
| Kay (orig. | meaning cocoanut | shelH. | .. | , | |||
| (containing | unhusked | rice | to the weight | of 24 Spanish | dollars) | = | |
| (called | a bamhoo" | in Malay). | . | ,, |
are
Nie or ndic
, .. ,,,, ' blakay
rr, .. » MV ... ï chupa Lhupa \ arï Are tt Naléh ^ V' h "ahk (rum'ha ~, 11, kuncha
.... ... t „ kuvan '
as
| „d,e | si,„He | lundie). | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| he | .s seldom | ment.oned | except in conjunction | with ,/= | ,, | (or | ||
| Half a | is sometimes | spoken of | as | |||||
| (The common | Malay | measures | used in | the Straits | Settlements | are the | 4 of | |
| which =. | (about | ,, gallons); | ,6 | ,0 | ||||
| (a blmk | of the eyes) | and | (Arabic) | are also | used to deno.e | a momentary | period | |
| of time, and | the expression | the time | required | for smoking a | ||||
| eigarette, is | also in common | use. ( | ||||||
| for yesterday | and sometimes | for the | day before; and | = the | day before that | |||
| aga.n, 3 days | s.nce, | or | = to-morrow, | the day after | to morrow, and | |||
| 3 days hence. | ( |
2) There are equivalent expressions in Malay; (lit, a little round thing),
3) In Malay = yesterday; ("the preceding day") is used sometimes
ndie put. chufak gantang gantang =, naléh • na/él,s =, kuncha- ,
ktinchas = i koyan. Translater).
buntar sa kejap sa'at
sbnfat makan roko• sa-batang,
Tramlator).
malam kclmarin kelmarb, dahulu
Esok besok lusa tilat Translator).
202 *barbë sa jéh, tv,*t « ..
| the day | before | that acrain | j | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| side"). to-morrow. the day | after. to-morrow. | one | more | ||
| the | day after | that | again. |
that ( yesterday on Singoh, Lusa, Lusa raya, lo denote the day of the month, in answer to the q„estio„ "how
iZ" r:r; [p°d"m **ay *°t,vnc° -
of The m ' tHh °tC' F°r 'he first Md 'hMe"> MMI The l 77 " C'°Pl0ytd' SS V"'""" «•'••»é,buUuin* //«). The first of „ex, ,„„„th i» denoted by the expres,ion („ hen) Lr-(': V,S'bh1o subsequent day, „f that /«»«/,) I i ' 7 V""blC n,0°" //">''ctc-">>!>,.Uuen
ZTI 11 r ,s,c " "n,a °°befn °re'' »'->•»
*nyans U 'J, !' "» ** « ****
§ Achehno-Mohammedan Feasts and appointed
Times and Seasons.
ur revieiv of he year
| We „OW | enter | „pon „ | , Achehno-Mohammedan | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| and its appointed a | times and | seasons | |||
| 0 | |||||
| s | the l01 | Jay of | his month | Nom | bm |
, A,Us^ Muharram). ,„ „,e boohs „f Mohammedan law i, „ set down as sma, (that U, a me,it„,i„„,,|, „gh obligatory work) o a, „, Observ. this custom, so that this day, „hieh is named As».,* (in Ach.h
,ava —-*-— In Shi'ite Co„„,ries it is q₀itc ,„e rcvcrsc. Th„e ,hc ^ ^ of this month are devoted to all ma„„er of eeremonies, procession, *tnZ'Z r ""*fr' representat'ons> purporting to commemorate the conflict between Mohammad's grandson H„sai„ and the Umayyads These festivities c„l„,i„ate i„ the Ashura, „„ „hieh day he perkhed
rp,,r *><
| m - «»» | it | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| dhulu | bulan | „* sudah | " AChehn e | " " |
| habis | sudah). | ( Trauslator). | ' " |
or va UV A Y laSt month b lan sion for the fourth \i last month which "" " (or X 'S ar bula
on the plains of Kerbela, yet even on this a number of ceremonies follow, extending over the next three days and consecrated to the memory of his burial etc. I he dances and bonfires, the dikrs ') with their mourning for the martyrs fate, a grief which though artificially excited expresses itself in wild frenzies where the mourners gash their own bodies with knives; the theatrical representations, sometimes confounded with reality by the crowds of spectators, so that the actor who takes the part of the murderer of Husain becomes exposed to actual violence; the mad processions, particularly common in Hindustan, and which remind one more of a fair or carnival than of a funeral pageant; all this specially belongs to Persia and the Shi'ite portions of British India, and need not occupy our attention here. It is however worthy of remark that even Mohammedan peoples who follow the orthodox ritual, but whose life and thought have been sub- jected to Shi'ite influences celebrate feasts of the above description. I hey recognize no impropriety in so doing, though their teachers refrain from all participation in these ceremonies, which are to a considerable extent of pagan origin. A very noteworthy and full description of such festivals is to be found in the Qanoon-e-islam of Jaffur Shurreef (pronounced Jafar Sharif) translated into English by G. A. Herklots, (2n«l ed. Madras 1863 pp. 98—149)- It has especial interest for us, because the work of this writer relates to a non Shi'ite people, the inhabitants of the coastlands of the Southern part of British India, whence the creed of Islam would appear to have made lts first advances towards the Eastern Archipelago. The Mohammedans of the Deccan, whose manners are portrayed in this work, are Shafi'ites just like those of the Malay Archipelago, but their national ideas and customs have arisen to a great extent under strong Shi ite influences. As is clear from a comparison of Jaffur ShurreePs book with what we actually find in Netherlands-India, these adventitious additions to their creed were adopted by the Malay and Javanese converts with just as much readiness as the fundamental truths of the Shafi'ite law or of the teaching universally accepted as orthodox. Io attain the certainty that we might desire on these points a more
1) A soit of religious recitations.
deta.led1 comparative enquiry would bc requisite. But it is clear bevond a doubt that the Deccan form of Mohammedanism exercised an in- uence on that of the Indonesians superior in force to that of any o r agency. This may at once be gathered from the character of the popular religious literature, even were there no other proof. Whence come the stories which are such favourites in the Eastern Archipelago o the 1 'tanic wars and numerous love adventures of Amir Hamzah the uncle of Mohammad), the romantic adventures of Mohammad (< nul) Hanafiyyah (the son of Ali), of the hero Sam'un, Raja Badar and many more, all in conflict both with the history and the legendary ia it.on °f the Arabsr It is more particularly in British India that ' o this soit ,ut to be met with, nor is it possible that they Should have been disseminated to such an extent in any country closer to Arabia.
The absurd tales related of Husain and his companions, the martyrs «> u ela, are also of the same character as those current in India. iere too (and consequently in the Archipelago as well), Hasan, innocent as he was of all martyrdom, has been enrolled in this band of saints, and the Ashura-festival bears the names of both brothers. In difterent parts of Netherlands-India and especially on the West Coast ofSumatra (Padang, Bencoolen •) etc.) the Hasan-Husain festival "S ct L ratcd on a smaller scale, but in mucli the same manner as we
- t desenbed in the Qanoon-e-islam. It has been thought that it
was introduced along the sea-board by the sipalus (sepoys) who immi- gra ed thither dunng the English domination. It is indeed quite possible a these "atives of Hindustan may have had an influence on the mannei of ,ts observance. It is however propable, to say the least, that even previousiy to this a Hasan-Husain feast enjoyed much popularity both m Sumatra and elsewhere. Indeed how else can we account for the fact that it is celebrated to this day in Trumon in the manner customary in the Deccan, that in Acheh the month is called Asan-Usén, and that the day Ashura, of which orthodox Islam takes but but little notice, has in Java given its name Sura to the month Muharram.
I.. order to arrivé at a more definite conclusio,, „c 8l,oald require
iïx-ÏT A"u'"" (Ea-u-e-
more complete data vvith regard to the spread of the observance and of the legendary traditions attached to it. A later wave of orthodoxy, however, proceeding especially from Mecca, lias purified the Islam of the East Indies of sundry heresies, and among them of the Hasan-Husain feasts. The noisy celebration of these festivals, which may novv be witnessed year by year at Kuta Raja, are for the most part got up by the Padang people who have settled there. Some Klings and Hindus ') take part in them, but the Acheh- nese merely act as spectators. Wherever in Acheh or its dependencies many Klings or other Indian Mohammedons had settled, tab ut₂) processions always took place; but the participation of the native people in these is undoubtedly a phenomenon of the later growth. A further custom, which is really no more than an insignificant adjunct of the Hasan-Husain festivals, but which exists elsewhere as an independent usage, is the cooking of special viands on the Ashura day. In Hindustan the chosen dish seems to be that known as kluchri₃); in ( airo it is called hubub i. e. "seeds" or "grains"4). In Java the bubur sura as it is called, also consists of various grains or seeds such as jagong 01 maize, peas etc., mixed witli pieces of cocoanut and placed 011 top of the rice. A similar custom is that of dedicating particular dishes on various occasions to particular prophets or saints to the spirits of the departed in general. In Acheh this dish of porridge is called kanji₅) Achura and consists of iice, cocoanut mille, sugar and pieces of cocoanut, mixed with various fruits cut into small pieces such as papayas (bok peuté'), peas (reuteuë'), pomegranates [bbh glima), plantains, sugarcane and various edible roots. 1 he kanji Ashura is not cooked in every separate house; one or two large pots full suthce for a whole gampöng. Those who undertake the cooking receive voluntary subscriptions from their fellow-villagers.
| eonsiderable | part in the | Hasan-Husain | feasts, | pay vows to | the holy | relics paraded | round |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| on these occasions, | etc. | ||||||
| Muharram banners etc. | processions | along with | other symbolical | objects | such | as ligures | of hands |
1) According to the Qanoon-c-islam, pp. 122, 142, Hindus in Itritish India also take a
2) The symbolical coffin of the martyrs of Kerbela, which is carried about in the
3) Qanoon-c-islam, p. 144; also see the Faith of Islam by E. Sell, I.ondon 1880, p. 242.
4) I.anc, Manners and customs of ihe Modern Egyptians, 5th edn. II, p. 149.
5) Kanji is exactly the sarae as the Javanese and means pottage or porridge.
20 6 me mess ,s brought to «l,e meunasah or somctimes 'hC f'»P»"S-Pa«h the wish fal toand
| with | main | rood. AU who |
|---|---|---|
| t0 such by a | an extent prayer | as to |
gormand.ze, crally t0 such an extent as to cause and blessmg of the bubnr, „ * ™
zzi Vnr,hcr c°"°k try ,hc-• »™> < °
™-w A T,l ' °ftC" CXtendS SOmC d»J» "ayond. •b»"' is, [ ' SUn'V'' °f ",e old comniemoration of Hasa„ and Husain
bears «r„"a """ ",e ^ »»"" portance is b °" 'hcm <- n SUn', mamage Wi,h » •> c°nsummated (for ,h« ci, ci "T y SC|>ara'i0n °' ,hC dCat" °f <« f «» air,, „o clrcl|mciscd, „o rice sown or plantod out
to "ccoT'f "firtrm°",h; <«""• W) to the Aohura-month that thcro 1 l ,adat~'"l«liarly Achohno.se. It may bo Husain f, ! " 'er a"USi0n '° ,lK danMS °f « Hasan- in the Deoean ** '° '» T""~» «<<
R"U AK"' of ^ighTa " ah° * m°"'h b° "*•«< for "ndertakings
| m | bc | ,at in ,ws | m ,h | thc | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| t0 WhlCh | he | |||||
| yCar | St began | to show | itsclf | |||
| S | ,hC fce | Mohamme VCry | tllankful mis | a when This | d |
Ir 1Ï:JZ T", " °"
month of Hi 7 ' ""«rumbed in the third the t, • '-However that may be whh evï ' 77 dan world th t Safar is pregnant' last Wedned "r ' he reaches the tat ednesday of th.s month without hap. passes wholly without notice. I" Aeheh it is „lied Rniu AM >),-the fi„a| Wednesday." Many ke a bath on this day, the dweilen, on the eoast in the sea others n he „ver „r at the wel,. ,, is considered ^ bath water consecrated by eontaot with certain ver,es of the Quran. en a teungku in tlie gampong gives to all who ask slips of paper on wh.ch he has written the sevou versos of the Quran in which addresscs certa'n men with the word saMm (-blessing" „r -pcace")
divièa riTLit"' " ™"~ " """->••-<.*
| w h | ee | i h | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 37:77 | I09j | IJ0) I30 9:73 |
2) Malay Kabu pïnghahisan, Jav. Mbo wtkasan. Chap. 36:58;,.. ^ ^ ^
nese papers are thrown into sea, river or well, and the water is thereby believed to be given salutary powers. Others drink water from a platter on which these verses are in- scribed, the writing being partially dissolved in the water •). With this bathingJ) are connected other regulations in regard to the toilet such as shaving, cutting of nails etc. but the Achehnese do not pay much attention to these. Those who live near the sea-shore are especially fond of the Rabu Abéh picnics. Each brings his contribution (ripè) for the feast, which exhibits not the smallest tracé of its religious origin. These social gathenngs are called meuramièn. In Java also these picnics generally take place in seaside localities. The common people know no more than that this «Final Wednesday" is appointed for bathing, drinking charmed water and holding social gatherings and do not concern themselves at to the traditional origin of the custom. Such is also the case in Arabia 3). ' Some pious persons perform on the afternoon of the Rabu Abéh a special voluntary seumayang consisting of two or more divisions, on the ground of a tradition characterized as "weak" by the expounders of the law.
I. Mo lot [Rabi al-awwal) is in every Mohammedan country, but Feast of th,
especially in the Eastern Archipelago, a month of feasts. According to £irth "f Mo the now generally accepted tradition the I2
(banyu jhnat)
| 0 In Java | it is custom.ry | to keep | a supply | of consecrated | water | ready | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ?Tu, | ° | Wckasan for | the crowds | of people | who demand | it. | |
| utternr f ,? | ° | ' ° ° | ' | ° | and is | preceded | by the |
| utterance of | the or | intention to | perform a task | prescribed | by the | law of Allah | |
| [Among the | Malays of | Penang and | Trovinee Wellesley | the | Mand, Sa/ar | or «bathing | of |
| . a ar ,s one | of the most | popular | of festivals. | The method | of its observance | is almost | |
| ïdentiual with | that of the | Achehnese as | here described. | ( |
3) And in Malaya. (Translator).
qUeS D 3 taken n hiS ccas! n U ritual nc *(Sh"sl* ntyyat
Translalor)}.
Mohammad's death — it is in fact acceptcd as obligatory, especially in the Indian Archipelago, and entirely overshadows the so-called "great feast" of the io'h of the i2
| obHgatory"in | The Achchncse | re ard | the |
|---|---|---|---|
| Acheh. |
binding on the people of their country. To account for this they refer to a historical legend connected with a certain cannon, which before the coming of the Dutch to Acheh formed part of the defences oftheDalam. It is well known how common has been the custom amongst native peoples of giving proper names to certain cannons, which they regarded more or less as personified and even worshipped as sacred after a time. We may instance Si Penjagur at Batavia, and its consorts Si Amok in Banten and Srtonu at Surakarta, with many more. Similarly in Acheh there were many such guns with proper names, among them that mentioned above, which bore the title Lada Sic hu pa "a chupa' of pepper" '). The origin of this name, according to the popular tradition, was as follows: hyn e ° ° « y. when Acheh began to grow
| embass to | In th COmSe | f the sixtcenth | CCIlt r |
|---|---|---|---|
| Turkey. |
powerful, one of the Sultans — we know not which — thought that the time had come to bring his kingdom to the notice of the lord of all believers, the Raja Röm, i. e. the Sultan of Turkey. He caused one of his biggest ships to be laden with pepper, the principal product of the country, as an offering expressive of homage to the supreme lord. Some say that he made the journey himself; according to others he sent an embassy of wealthy chiefs. At Stambul (Eseutamböy) no one had ever heard of the existence of Acheh. So when the ambassadors arrived there, though they found it easy enough to get a lodging in return for their money, all their eftorts to induce the officials to ask an audience for them of the Sultan proved of no avail. Tlu.s they remained there a year or two, and as their means soon became exhausted, they had gradually to sell their pepper to supply themselves with the necessaries of life. In the end, as chance would have it, the Sultan while returning one Friday from the mosque to his palace, espied our Achehnese among the crowd. of respectful spectators. They attracted his attention by their peculiar dress, and he enquired whence they came and what had brought them to Constantinople.
i) With regard to this measure sec p. 201 ahove.
20Q
The desired explanation was given, and the Sultan, after venting his wrath on the officials whose foolish pride had so long denied this embassy admittance to his presence, requested the strangers to come that sa me day to his palace. The Achehnese were indeed delighted at having attained their object, out at the same time they were ashamed at having no clothin-left suitable for such a visit, and also because, out of the whole cargo of pepper which they had brought with them, only a single chupa' remained.
When admitted to the Sultan's presence, they told him about the kingdom of Acheh. They informed him that they had wished to present him vvith a cargo of pepper by way of first tribute, but were compelled to turn it into money for their needs, so that they could now only offer him a single chupa' as a sample of that product. The Sultan accepted the gift most graciously, and requested them to teil him all about affairs in Acheh, the distance of that kingdom from Stambul, the difficulties of the journey and so forth. I'inally he ordered a great cannon to be given them as a return i,a(1a present, and to this was given the name of Lada Sichupa'. In com-Sick»pa\ phance with their request he also gave them a number of skilied artisans from his kingdom to instruct their fellow-countrymen in various arts hitherto unknown to them. It is said that a number of these instructors who came from Syria, TeungUu d settled in a gampong close to the Dalam, and in remembrance of their native land gave the village the name of Bitay (Ach. pronunciation of Bèta/, an abbreviation of Pütal-makdis = Jerusalem). In Bitay may still be se en the grave of a saint, Teungku di Bitay, who according to the tradition belonged to this colony of strangers. I he Sultan of Turkey also considered it unbefitting to bind his new vassal to the regular despatch of embassies or tribute, since the great length of the journey presented too many difficulties. "Let the faithful observance," said he, "of a religious custom in your country take the place of the yearly payments which elsewhere constitute the mark of submission to a suzerain. The observance of the feast of Mohammad's birth is among the most meritorious of works of devotion. So let there be no village in Acheh where the inhabitants do not publicly hold a Mo lot feast; that shall be your tribute to the lord of the Faithful." Such is the explanation given of the fact that this festival has been '4
2IO
ayb so sinaiy observed ,n Acheh. In fermer times the headman of a gampong who did not make provision in due time for the holding of this annual feast was fined by the ulèëbalang for neglect of duty. Although the i₂th 0f this month is accepted as the birthday of the prophet and thus as the feast-day par excellence, the commemoration of the birth of Mohammad is not confined to this date. Throughout the uhole Moslem world maulids (or as they are generally called in the Ai chipelago manhuis) are held on various occasions. These are declamations by learned men in verse or rhyming prose dealing with events in the life of the Prophet, and concluding with a prayer and a feast for those assembled. Acheh is no exception to the rule; funeral feasts for example are often here enlivened by a Molm. Hut the Mó'löt, which the Achehnese regard as obligatory, must be held in all gampöngs either in the month i O lot (on or after the 12th day) or in one of the two following months It is from this that the latter derive their names «Younger Hrother of Mó'lot" and "Final Mö'löt." I he l)Iacc where the Mó'löt is celebrated is the mamasalt. The day is ixed year by ycar by the headman so as not to clash with the pursuits of the villagers. Care is taken at the same time to fix the ates so that no two gampöngs of the same name shall celebrate the Mo lot on the same day or after too short an interval, because all the people of the same mukim are invited to each feast. lhose who live in other gampöngs in the same mukim are the guests of the whole gampöng and receive a formal invitation through a messenger of the keuchi'. Such official invitations (muroh) to kanduris or religious festivals are a ways given in the form of an offering, as it is called, of ranub bate (ranub or sirih in its bate «), a copper or silver bowl lined with an ornamental piece of cloth). The baté contains, besides the sirih, only a i le betelnut, but none of the other requisites for betel-chewing Where the invitation to one of these kanduris is addressed to persons o high consideration such as tuankus (royal princes) the symbolical of the rj ° ° ° °' ^ place
| Cnted | 1,1 | m rC C Stly | S rt f | Sirih b0wl | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| lhC icial | invitation | to tlle | ||||
| 0 ' ce P- 42 above. | This custom | also prevails | among | the Malays. | They call | it |
°" kanduri Mó'löt is addressed only to
S matyirih.
21 I
the members of the governing body of the gampöng, the keuchi', teungku and elders, but all the inhabitants are regarded as being included therein. "Respectful greetings and good wishes from Teuku Keuchi' of gam pöng X and the Teungku! They desire (or request) that You will come and partake of their kanduri on such and such a day." So speaks the messenger. They receive from him the sirih and pinang, hand back the empty baté, and ansvver simply: 'it is well." The viands are provided by all the heads of families. Each of them, if his means allow, brings on the appointed day an idang to the meu' nasah. The components of such an idang will be found detailed in our description of marriagc ceremonies. The idang hntö (bridegroom's idang), the idang fcujamec (placed before guests at certain visits prescribed by adat ') and the idang Mó'löt are almost precisely identical. At times the competition between the people of the same gampöng to outshine one another in the costlincss of their idangs reaches such a pitch, that the vil lage headmen are obliged to fix a certain limit which must not be exceeded. As meat, which the Atchehnese seldom eat on ordinary occasions, is indispensable for the idang Mó'löt, the kanduri is precedcd by the slaughter of animals. Such general slaughterings take place on no other occasions except the last days of the eighth and ninth months and on a small scale at the «great" feast of the sacrifices on the ioth day of the twelfth month. Care is also taken that the sirih and its appurtenances be not wanting after the feast. Pües of sirih-leaves are heaped up high on dalöngs or trays, and between them are placed the betel-nut, gambir, tobacco etc., the whole forming what is called the r.rnub dong or «standing sirih." Ihe sirih is presented in the same form in ofifering a betrothal gift. The cost of a single idang amounts to as much as four dollars, so that the less well-to-do families club together, three, four or five at a time to provide a single idang. Bcsides those invited by the gampöng in general, each individual has his private guests, viz. all those of his relatives who live elsewhere and feel disposed to partake in the kanduri. These come without invitation, as according to the adat they are at liberty to regard the kanduri Mó'löt of a momber of their family as their own.
i) See p. 31 above and Chap. III §
W here there are many such guests to entertain, the expenses of the feast are vastly augmented for their host, since the adat directs that he should furnish for them a complete separate idang in addition to
| nis contribution | to the general feast. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| rl,c gucsts | who are | ||
| Y | f0rCn 0n maulids | al a 8 | in manlui. |
or'ttaS,™;. ' all men, assemble in the mcunasah mifbS: 7" °' " y Jaytimc. The Teungku and he leubes appear a little earlier ,han the others, as they have ,o recite he Mch, Ih.s recitation is ealled (from 4ikr) in Aehel,. Simi- y the Javanese speak of the dikir Some of the most in use have been handsomely lithogra- phed at Ca.ro by Hasan at-Tochl Ahmad and published in a single vo ume along w.th a number of other formulas used for religious pur- 1>ascs-»s collection enjoys the greatest popularity both at Mekka and throughout the whole Indian Archipelago. Two of these inaulids art ,11 rhyming prose alternating with songs of praise in verse. One of icse was composed by a certain Bukharl,') the other by Ja'far-al- arzanji. One ,s ent.rely in verse; this is also the work of the last- named writer.
All tl,ree are also in use in Acheh, that of Bukhari espccialiy at the officta kanduris. It bear, the titlo of J/„„/„/ sharafi 'l-anam (Birth of the Glory of Manktud, and is called Sarafulana,,, in Java, and OW pha anam in Acheh. The prose pieces are recited by one person, but others of those assembled may take a turn to relieve the reader. It is the same with the versified port,ons, the chanting of which in a particular fashion is very popular. About the middle of the Charapha anam comes a hymn of pra.se of moderate length which all the experts present raise in chorus
th ri^wuV ah, are the Teungku and all
| 11 | 3,1 | AchehnCSe | mcunas |
|---|---|---|---|
| ble ds | SSel W,th the chant | C ntainin | incense |
the eubes Wh,le s.nging they rise from their places, and in their
Thict hl r u r ° S ' the savoury smoke from ' "'» honour of the Apostle of God. After this hymn of praise the kanduri Mó'löt closes with a lonS which ,s to be found at the end of the Charapha
| prayer | anam | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| c ant P | pe ple | of thc | ||
| «) According | to the publication | of at-Iochl; | name to | the author. |
£, T f ° Wg have also appeared „pon the scene and where there is no room left in the mcunasah, have taken u their position in a neighbouring balè or in the surrounding houses
others assign a different
213
\ hilst the lêubès stand and chant their hymn, the others crowd around and hand them pieces of black thread in which they tie knots while continuing to chant. These knotted threads are placed round the necks of the children in the firm conviction that they constitute infallible charms. ') In Java it is customary to make the maulut-recitations the occasion for initiating certain homely industries such as knitting the first meshes of a fishing-net, commencing the hem of a garment etc., in order that the Prophet's blessing may rest upon their task. This is not done in Acheh; here the fishermen set up their nets (jetti', nyaréng or p tik at) on a triday, sitting at the entrance of the mosque while the devout pass in to take part in the weekly service. After the prayer, the people of the gampöng and their guests com- mence their onslaught 011 the good cheer that awaits them. The Java- nese custom of carrying home the remnants of the feast (under the name of bérkat = "blessing") after a religious festival is not the fashion in Acheh 2); each one takes away what is left of the idang which forms his own contribution to the feast. Wealthy persons sometimes give separate Mö'löt feasts in their own homes, but choose another day than that fixed for the kanduri of their gampöng gencrally the 12'h of the month, which is seldom chosen for the public celebration. All attend the latter, not excepting the ulèëba- langs themselves. A specially great kanduri Mb'löt is held on the actual Mö'löt day at the tomb of Teungku Anjöng in Gampöng Jawa. On this occasion one or more buftaloes are slaughtered, and besides those who assemble in the déah to partake of the feast, sundry ulamas have a share there- in, pieces of meat being sent them by the guardian of the tomb. I he superstitious belief that no work of importance should be initia- ted before the I2'1' day of Mö'löt is commonly met with in Java, but never in Acheh. The whole of this month, as well as its "younger
| the close of the | manlui | comes to the | words "and | grant unto | us for the sake | of the honour | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| in which Thou | holdest | hiin (Mohammad), acceptante (of | our good | works) | glory and | renown" | |
| at the word acceptante those | present | snatch some rice from the dishes | which stand | prepared | |||
| hard by, and | this rice | is afterwards | employed | as a reniedy | in sicknesscs | of children | etc. |
| The knotting are called by them | of threads ayapan. | as described | above also | takes place | in Java. |
1) A very common custom in Java is as follows: when the reciter of the prayer at
2) ln Pidië the guests take to their homes the remnants of the Kanduri Mö'löt, which
rother" are here regarded as specially favourable for marriage and circumcision feasts etc. As regards the succeeding months:
- Adöë Mo'lot (Rab'Cal-akhir) and
, A ^ [ Se"ne"^lc"L ' Jwnada l-azvwal), little remains to be noted beyond what we have said above. The latter, the fifth month of the
prlrence ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
leave add a few
| Before | taking | of the | Mó'lot | months, | wc must |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| PeC 8 | 1 | lVr g ArChipelag a d r fca5l give | AC ,el M S fr< dia S h i,Klicate la at wit | COn, t hc de at a | 1 is worJ us |
wlr "" Wha' ^ '' '"' ° < "»
tho« irn""'! T' !" °"'" "' "' (®"other of w ,77 "" ° "" "'') the same meanjng MM „« / T" °-"« ^ ">« npnmim
- -• iutrkah, sla,,Man „, j, and often too by the words or W,„,„ „ „ „ „ „ '«
r;:,; vommand °reiieious f ~ gi°e
rise to it are of various kinds.
fclal' r ,°f "T WC "aV° j"St ",a
- Val day of commemoration. Tliere are besides a „umber of
"r-r₁™" 7 *--»-The
| cdcbra | ""'" | fcas,s by | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| s whlch | C a rCCO | ,mC iS | heir tó g | hdd drcumdsi |
| be lost | iK t | Thc poof | must | |
| r | 1 |
we" in b r'' "'h< other evel ' t " "' »»« »»d sundry give rise to rejoicing. The same law requires that the religieus charade, of such fcasts shou d „ ^ Md
"°,°-^ " "" ™°"
In m the the b books t" of S"! the ay law) ma<,e' is in W"ere progress. a ,aS «W
These forbidden things are indeed forbidden at all tfn.es. but if such
feLThsTl 18 Tmitted ^ " Wahmah (=W*"> >*< etc.)'the loses its sacred character. The law directs in all cases and >n some even imperiously commands attendance in response to an in vitation to a wa.in.ah, but is equally express in prohibiting it where
0 O See See Onmni,Qanoon-e-islam PP- __ 164, 184—5.
the fcast is robbed of its religious character by music for instancc, or the presence of women in the company of males, or the employment for decorative purposes of representations of living beings or the like. But as the adat of the worldly in all Mohammedan countries regards these forbidden things as indispensable to every feast, various methods are resorted to for effecting a compromise. Only such leubès and ulamas are invited as are content to wink at worldly display, so long as they can satisfy their scruples by abstaining from taking a direct part in it. Sometimes both aspects of the feast are maintained, but at different times, so that the ulama may with an easy conscience sanctify the walimah by his recitation of prayer, though he well knows that the festival will presently be disgraced by proceedings inspired of the Evil One. A death also furnishes occasion for a kanduri. The holding of such a feast on the actual day of the death, though common in practice, is not altogether in conformity with the law, though it sanctions feasts being held at certain customary intervals (e. g. on the 3'', /th or 40U1 day) after the decease. These are always preceded by a recitation from the Quran or dikr. Such kanduris are viewed in the same light as those given 011 the anniversary of a saint. The reward ordained by Allah for the Quran recitation, the dikr and the giving of the religious feast, is tendered to the deceased relative or to the saint, as the case may be. If the former, it is done to promote the soul's repose of the decea sed by increasing his heavenly recompense, while the gift to the saint is made to gain his goodwill and intercession with Allah. In thepopular superstition, which is based on the earlier worship of the dead, such kanduris are considered actual offerings of food to the deceased them- selves. It is believed that they enjoy the immatcrial essence of all that is set before them. Though the sanctification by means of Quran recitations, dikrs or prayer is always regarded as an embellishment of the kanduri, and one or oiher of the three is considered indispensable at many of these feasts, kanduris are also given which have nothing of this kind to distinguish them. There may be either simply an oral "address" to the saint or departed spirit whom it is sought to propitiate, or to the spirits of the dead in general, or else the religious object of the feast may be kept in view in thought only without any ontward form. Such kanduris or sidékahs of the simplest kind are believed to pro-
2 l6
mote good „r ward „ff evil fortone. Snppose ,o„,c relative is o„ a
rr.-~new b,,siness beinB set °»». chiu bc-.„g si, for the first„me ,o school. The safe retor,, of „,e „avellcr, socces, in h= ondertabng quickness of lcaming ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ »
c piomote the devotional is
| y a rehgious | fcast | character | of which | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| when | Qne f | |||
| k W | !UC ayer n5tance Tiu sc are | ,e durill ,be s rt | S,nM ma f fas,s |
y shown by a prayer f„, prosperity (,/„•„ „ ^
evil Ts cha"^ d '° '"° ". " '"'-" °"« alarmine 'l '"T " ' E an epidemie, or aftcr an d; ri ,° of r r T ' ° ° »»<= Bot a, wc li T, T*" """" («ood-loeh feasts). ,, ' aruacy said, sul,kali, slametan and kanduri are generally eonfosed m the colloquia!, and i„ Aeheh they are all i„e,Td"d onder the single expression kanduri „r
11» name onder „hiel, these feasts are mos, generally known
offin» Leh Aral C »'
| 7 r | " | '• '»»» |
|---|---|---|
| in | ||
| ,iru | ,he r e r | |
| Share of th | a | |
| sayyu |
for the feast " * <*•" in » *»Wc sense, fcast ,s given to goests distingoished to somo extent by their
on r«:"r5 ,' r, — ° ^ ^ '° 'he « dceeased. is lso uscd in proper sense of a present with pioo, intent, when for instan e "ff ,nfm„ney or kmd i, offered to a «,, „ ^
— TKztritr r'"'T?, r
| t | M h | nin8! | in the | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S mC | e day | of | |||
| fr/U tS p | f ever | k,nd to 0 iCri e thc supervisio | m f,he | SqUC |
of fmits. Uuinada l-akhir) ovves its name to a custom comraon amongst the Achehnp«» n„, custom purchase fruit, f, ° °" month they ' ° y be found in the market. These thev
•h / aTeM'vd' T T ' " "" ° " ey are enjoyed by those of the faithful who are present in these
Teix " ° —
gotten by^ 'HT " T' ^ "» '» boen for-LI" ,AC'',Cl,"e;C themSelvCS' A« present these „ffcrings are tage of the J '' * k""d»ri «'sn oven prosperity » »» ~ I
the 'sole .oJhTl'L', *** ***•
The 9th, I0th and nth days of this month are consecrated to a saint Tuan Meu- whose tomb is to be found at Nagore on the Coromandel coast. He rasab" has also many worshippers in Acheh, seemingly through the influence of those inhabitants of Southern India who introduced here the creed of Islam. What I have observed elsewhere ') with regard to feasts of saints at Mekka, is equally true of these "saints days" in Acheh — nay through- out the whole Moslem world. «The people have no clear idea as&to what the "day" of a saint really is. They say, it is true, that it is the haul or anniversary of the death of the holy man. But some saints have more than one haul per annum, the exact day of the death of most is unknown, and from the way in which many of the saint's feasts are celebrated, it is a sure conclusion that some of the ancient pagan feasts of the people, after throwing off certain of their more characteristic heathen features disguised themselves under the names of saints to avoid the extermination which threatened them." The saint to whom we have just referred is called in his own country Kadir Wali Sahib 2). The Achehnese name for him is Mcurahsab or Meurasab n). The ioth day of the sixth month is accepted as the anniversary of his death, and the kanduri held thereon is called kanduri to' thmi luan Meurasab, i. e. "the religious feast for the expiration of the year of I uan Meurasab." Strange stories are told of Tuan Meurasab₄). He grew up in the wilderness in complete innocence, and it so happened that he saw the breasts of a woman for the first time just when he was himself suffering from a pimple on his hand. As this tiny swelling caused him so much pain, he thought that this poor woman must suffer terrible agony from such gigantic tumours on her chest. He prayed for the removal of these protuberances, and his prayer was at once answered. The woman
1) Mekka, Vol. II pp. 52—53.
2) For further information regarding this saint and the manner of his worship in the
| eccan, see | work already | pp. 160 — 163. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| o ase. It | to be | of foreign | origin, and | almost to correspond | with | Mir = Amir |
| Indian names. | There are | still families | in Acheh | which bear | the title, and | these are |
| regarded as | of | ancient chiefs. | The elephant | is called | Pb Mturah | in stories. |
| an abbreviation | of the | Indian title | Sahib. |
2) For further information regarding this saint and the manner of his worship in the
3) I. e. Mcurah Sahib. Meurah is an ancient title, occurring in the records of the kingdom
4) Qanoon-e-islam pp. 162—163.
the appears
m descendants ls
was naturally much distressed, and went and informed her relations h°w she had seen the beauty of her person suddcnly vanish on the utterance of a few words by a penitent hermit. At the entreaties of her family Meurasab offered up a second prayer, which resulted in the restoration of the lost cliarms. A further example of his miraculous power supplies an explanation of the fact that the Achehnese were readily persuaded by the foreigners who visited their country to revere this pious recluse as the protector of navigation. The captain of a ship, whose vessel was on the point of foundering owing to a leak, vowed that he would make a handsome offering in the name of Meurasab if the leak wcre stopped through his intercession. Our saint was at that moment sitting under the razor of a barber, and held, as is customary with Orientals, a small mirror in his hand to direct the operator in his work. Feeling that his aid was invoked, he fiung away his mirror. By Allah's help it made its way through air and water till it found its destination beneath the ship and stopped the leak, so that both vessel and cargo came safe to land. The vows, however, that are made to this saint in Acheh, are by no means confined to ships and sailors. His intervention is also invoked on behalf of sick children. The vow ui such cases consists in the promise of a gold or silver hand, or "the height of the child in gold" (santeut dong) in the event of recovery. Such hands or pieces of gold thread (woven as thin as possible) are given to Kling traders journeying to Madras, who undertake their transmission to Nagore '). Other vows are fulfilled at the place of abode of those who make them. Even the payment of what lias been promised to the great samts of Acheh as recompense for their intercession does not always involve a visit to their graves. Suppose for instance that the master of a vessel, while in danger at sea, lias vowed a goat to Tuen Meu rasab for his safe return, he kills the goat in his own gampöng, makes a kanduri with it and requests the teungku to recite over it the fatihah (the first chapter gf the Quran) for the benefit of the saint. The "anniversary" of the saint is occasionally celebrated in Kuta Raja
of value
| i) I'enang | Mohammedans | have | a superstition | that articles | vowed to this | saint |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| if thrown shnne at | into the Nagore. (Translator.) | sea at Penang | will be washed | up in a few months | time close | to the |
2 ig
and Trumon by a great kanduri on the ioth day of this month, but the givers of this feast are always the Klings who reside there, and the Achehnese who partake of it do so only as guests. Tuan Meurasab has thus really no place in the Achehnese calendar of festivals.
- Kanduri Apam [Rajab) holds its place in the official calendar of The ascen-
feasts, chiefly because Mohammad's celebrated "journey to heaven" is ^a° t0 supposed to have taken place on the night of (or rather the night before) the 27H1 Qf this month. For the commemoration of this night the people assemble either in the mosque or in their own houses, and a history of the mïraj as it is called (Ach. me renet) is rccited.' This recitation consists in a description of the ascension in rhyming prose and verse, similar to those of the birth and life of the Prophet. This pious custom is observed in Acheh, but not to any grcater extent than in other parts of the Indian Archipelago. In a word, its observance is confined to those who profess special devotion to religion, such as the leubès, malèms etc. It is not a national festival in any sense of the words. On the iSth 0f this month one of the three principal annual kanduris The wife is held in the déah (prayer-house) at the tomb of the great saint An g®unBku Teungku Anjong. 1 his is done in lionour of his consort, whose tomb ' stands close to his. She is commonly known as Aja ') Eseuliri i. e. "my lady the consort." She appears to have died on the i8tl> of Rajab 1235 (May 1820). She was a daughter of a Sayyid of the famous clan of 'Aidid and her real name was Fatimah bint Abdarrhaman 'Aidid. The kanduri Aja Eseutiri resembles exactly the two others that are celebrated at that sacred tomb on the I2'h of Mö'löt and the 14111 ofl'uasa. The custom from which this month derives its Achehnese name is pretty generally observed, though less markedly so in recent times. On some one day of the month of Rajab the well-known round flat cakes known as apam, made of ordinary rice-flour and cocoanut milk, are baked in every house. A number of these are brought as kanduri to the mosque or meunasah, just in the same way as the kanji Ashura. As many as a hundred of these little cakes are piled upon a dish, and to this is added a basin of sauce which is called seurawa and consists of cocoanut milk, sugar and beaten-up eggs. It is not sur- prising that the faithful frequenters of the mosque suffer from apam-
l) Aja is really an abbreviated form of Raja = prince or princess,
| indigestion | during | this month, | or that | in spite of the large share | tliat | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| falls into | the hands | of the | youthful | hordes | that lurk in the | vicinity, | |
| many | apani-cakes | have in the | end | to be thrown | away. | ||
| The | story goes | that once | on a time a certain | Achehnese, | possessed | ||
| by curiosity | as to what | befalls man in the tomb, | and | especially | as to | ||
| the investigations | of the | angels of the grave, | Munkar | and Nakir, and | |||
| the punishments | they are | supposed | to inflict, feigned | death and | was | ||
| buried | alive. He | was soon subjected | by the | two angels | to an enquiry | ||
| as to | his faith | and works, | and as | he was | found wanting | in many | |
| respects, | they began | to smite | him with their | iron clubs. | None | of the | |
| blows, | however, | reached | him. Something | that | he could | not | clearly |
| distinguish | in the darkness | of the tomb, | but which seemed | to resemble | |||
| the moon off the He contrived | in its circular blows. | form, interposed to work his way out | itself as a shield of his narrow prison and hastened | and warded | |||
| to his | relatives, | who received | him with amazement. | After | relating | his | |
| adventures | he came | to know | to what | he had | to attribute | his merciful | |
| deliverance | from flagellation | by the ghostly | clubs. At the very moment | ||||
| when | the moon-shaped | shield | was giving | him its shelter, | the members | ||
| of his | family were | in the | act of | preparing | for a kanduri | the apam | |
| cakes, | which are | in fact round | like the moon. | ||||
| I hus | it became | a certainty | that | apam-cakes | exercise | a specially | |
| favourable | influence | on the | fortunes | of the | dead. Such | is said to be | |
| the origin | of the | Achehnese | custom | of baking | apam cakes and | distri- | |
| buting | them as | kanduri | the 7 ' | month of the year | in the interest | ||
| of their | ancestors | and deceased | relatives. | ||||
| Besides | this great | general | feast two other | customs of the Achehnese | |||
| nnd their | explanation | .in this legend, | viz. i | a domestic | kanduri | apam | |
| held on the seventh | day after | the death | of any | person and | 2° a simi- | ||
| lar feast | on the | occurrence | of an | earthquake, | which | is supposed | to |
| have a deceased. | peculiarly | discomposing | effect on the | material | remains | of the | |
| We | may let | the details | of this | explanation | of the | kanduri | apam |
| pass for what they | are worth. | At the same | time it | is quite conceivable | |||
| that the | custom | had its | origin in | the worship | of the | dead j | and a |
| certain | connection | between | the shape | of the | cakes which | form | the |
| offering at least | and some not impossible. | now forgotten | notions connected | with the | moon | is |
in 1 1
OtKer apam ;anduris.
22 I
| 8 Kanduri | Bu | (S/ia ban). | Throughout | the whole | of the Indian | Ar-AU | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| chipelago | this month | is dedicated | to the commemoration | of the dead. | ' | ||
| This does not imply | grief for their loss, but rather | care for | their souls' | ||||
| repose, | which is not inconsistent | with merrymaking. | This solicitude | for | |||
| the welfare | of the | departed | exhibits | itself by | the giving of religious | ||
| feasts. | According | to the official or learned | conception | this is done | in | ||
| order to bestow | the recompense | earned | by this good | ||||
| work; actual | according savour of the good | to the popular things of the feast. | notion | it is to | let them | enjoy | the |
| Feasts | for the | given deceased | person are, as | we whall | |||
| presently see, | only held during a short | period after his death. | In Acheh | ||||
| this period | is even shorter | than elsewhere, | consisting | of only 100 days. | |||
| In Java | there are further | commemorations | on the first | two anniversa- | |||
| ries and | the ioooth | day. Under | the | influence | of Mekka | it lias even | |
| become | the custom | to celebrate | the anniversaries | of the departed | so | ||
| long as | pious children | or grandchildren | survive to cherish their memory. | ||||
| In the | end, however | long | the interval, | the | deceased | is personally | |
| forgotten, | but is included | in the ranks of "ancestors" | or "spirits of | the | |||
| departed | , occasionally | commemorated | at odd | times according | to the | ||
| fancy of individuals, | but as a rule during | a single | month | in the year | |||
| set apart | for the | purpose. '1 he choice | of the eighth | month of the | year | ||
| for this commemoration, | which in Arabia | generally | takes | place in the | |||
| seventh Islam into Acheh | month, | a further from the | corroboration Deccan '). | of the introduction | of | ||
| I he | name of | the month | Sha ban | in many | native | languages | is |
| borrowed | from this | pious custom. | In Javanese | it is called | Ruivah | or | |
| month | of all spirits, | and in Achehnese | Rice-kanduri, | since | on some | ||
| one day ted a religious feast, in which rice forms the | of this month | every | household | holds in honour principal | of the dish. | depar | |
| Rice is, indeed, | the chief comestible | in many | other kanduris | and in | Rice-kan | ||
| purely | secular feasts, | but in Acheh | the name | of "religious | rice feast" | " ' | |
| is specially | given | to the kanduris | in honour | of the dead, | whether | in | |
| the 8'h or in other | months. | Whenever | any chance | occurrence | inclines | ||
| them to | show their | ancestors | that they are | not forgotten, | the people | ||
| cook rice and | its accessories | and invite the teungku | to consecrate such | ||||
| i) Qanoon-e-islam | p. | 166: "On the | 13"' of the | month (Shaban), | either during | the day or | |
| in the evening, curries etc." | they | prepare in the | name of deceased | ancestors | and relatives | pol,100 and |
3 c soul montl1
on the deceased benefit of any
seems c
du s
| a» occasional | kanduri | with | his prayers. | This is called simply | «having | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| recitations | made | over rice" {yué beitel bu), and | the | prayer | most in use | ||
| on such ïice. | occasions This is called in Java | is called dua beuët | the prayer of totnbs, since it begins with | "prayer | to be offered over | ||
| the words | Oh | Allah, let | mercy descend | on | the dwellers | in | the |
| tombs" '). | An artistic | reciter | varies | the feast is celebrated | |||
| with unusual | elaborate | and longer | prayer, | whilst the | |||
| most ignorant | recite | in its | place the | fatihah | or first chapter | of the | |
| Quran, | which evcry | child knows | by heart. | ||||
| 1 lius each | family whatever | lias its "recitation day | best suits its convenience. | over the rice" during | the month This is done | ||
| for the | benefit of the dead | (the ureueng chi' or ancestors | as tliey are | ||||
| called) | and also | for that of the living, whose | prosperity | is according | |||
| to the | popular belief | directly | dependent | 011 the | respect | they pay to | |
| the dead. | It is said | for example | that | anyone | who had | his worldly | |
| wealth | increased | by the inheritance | man's property, | would | |||
| quickly | lose this | profit if | he neglected | to celebrate | the | ||
| with the | requisite | pomp and | circumstance | in the same | year. | ||
| I he adat | requires that | the teungku | be invited | to this | feast. | ||
| He can | either recite the prayer | himself or empower | another | to do | so. | ||
| 1 he Javanese | custom | of clearing | the graves | of ancestors | and rehabi- | ||
| htating | their exterior | during | the month | of Sha | ban is | unknown | in |
| Acheh, | where the | resting | places of the dead | are neglected | to such a | ||
| degree | that it is | difficult to find | them | in the | tliird generation. | In | |
| Acheh | too, the feasts | of all | souls are always | held at home, | while in | ||
| Java people | assemble | for this purpose | at the burial-places. | ||||
| ° | ' | y | "niglit of the middle (in the Deccan | of Sha'ban", | called | in | |
| by all | Mohammedans. | It | is supposed | that on | that particular | niglit | |
| Allah determines | the fate of mortals | during | the forthcoming | year. The | |||
| most popular | idea is that | there | is a celestial | tree of symbolic | import, | ||
| on which | every human | being | has a leaf to represent | him. This | tree is | ||
| shaken | during the | niglit preceding | the | 15* f Sha'ban, | causing | the | |
| leaves of all those | who are to die during | the coming | year | to fall. | |||
| In Arabia | many | watch through | a | or the | whole of this night, | ||
| ano offer up a prayer, | invoking | Allah's | mercy, and | beseeching | him to | ||
| 0 | xr, |
bu = L this, when éclat, by a more
kanduri bu on
of a dead kanduri bu tneunasah
c
=urheu"uUln Th Spccial sanctit of the malam beureu at in Acheh Shab-i-barat) is believed
Q part
223
blot out from his eternal book the calamities and adversity destined for the suppliant. Such a prayer is in Acheh only offered up by the special representatives of religion. Most of the adult males celebrate this night by a small and simple kanduri (kanduri beureu'ai) in the meunasah of their gampöng. Some hold during the evening a special prayer, the seumayang teuseubèh (Arab. (alat at-tasab'ih) or "service of praise''. All assemble for this service, and one of those present is chosen to act as imam. This prayer resembles in essentials all other (alats, but is distinguished by the constant repetition of a certain tasblh-formula known in Arabic as tasblh ') in praise of the Creator, in each of the four parts into which it is divided. Others perform, in place of this seumayang, what is called the seu mayang hajat, prescribed as the introduction to special supplications ad- dressed to the Deity. A seumayang hajat consists of two parts (raffah). During the malam beuren at three such prayers (thus comprising six rak"aks) are sometimes offered up. Each of these lias its particular motive, the first being for prolongation of life, the second for the necessary means of supporting life, and the third for a blissful end. This kind of seumayang is however celebrated by the women with much greater zeal than by the men. They either perform the service of praise under a female imam or the "seumayang hajat" each one for herself. The end of this 8th month, and in particular the three last days, are marked by an extraordinary activity owing to the preparations for the Puasa or hasting Month. We have seen above that it was of old the custom in Acheh to fix the beginning of the fasting month (in other words the day of the new moon following immediatcly on Shacban) by calculation. 1 he efforts of Habib Abdurrahman and other zealots to introducé the ru'ya or actual observation of the new moon as the only lawful metliod met with little sympathy. In 1'idie there has pre- vailed for many years a difference of opinion as to the determination of the commencement of the Puasa, resulting in quarrels between the various gampöngs and actual discrepancies in their calendars. The three sagis followed the usage of the capital, where the first day of Ramadhan was made known so long beforehand, that everyone
| I) Tasblh | in its shortest | form is the ejaculation | of the words | "Subhana | 'llah (iJJI | I_S^) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| "praise be to Cod" | repetition | is deemed | to atone | for sin.(Translator.) |
Q the constant of which
224
could teil in advance what the last three days of Sha'ban vvould be, whether 27—29, or 28—30. 1 he chief object of the preparations during these three days is to ensure an abundant provision for breaking the fast every evening at sunset and enjoying a final meal before earliest dawn. It is also sought to provide against being obliged to make purchases of any kind during the fasting mont₁-.. The fasters are as a matter of fact too exhausted to give the ordinary amount of attention to trade in the daytime '), so that the markets are nearly empty during these thirty days of mor- tification. Ihe two meals per diem between nightfall and daybreak vvhich form cach man s allowance in the month of 1'uasa, are made as nou- rishing as possible, as otherwise he would not have strength to fulfil the religious obligation of abstinence. At the same time the most pala- table food, such as is not in daily use at other times, is chosen in order to guard against a gradual loss of appetite and consequent in- disposition. 1 hus the stockfish which forms the staple animal food daily consumed by the Achchnese, is during the fasting month replaced by meat, which is at other seasons rarely used in most households and regarded as a luxury 2). The slaugh-Hence comes the ancient custom of buying a stock of meat in everv ;er and the _ ' three-days gampong during the three days preceding the commencement of the fasting month. On the last day before the fast, the people feast abun- dantly on the meat, and pickle the remnants with salt, vinegar etc. to form a provision calculated to last about 15 days. To satisfy this universal demand for meat, the highlanders come down with their cattle for sale to the chief town. I11 former times ') there was a regular fair in Banda Acheh during those three days, as a store had to be laid in not alone of meat, but of all othqr household necessaries as well, sufficiënt to last for a month. Both men and women in Acheh
| ment work | most unwillingly | during | this month, | while those who are beholden | to no master | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| do not work | at all. | In more populous | places, | especially | in the large | the rule | is |
| somewhat | relaxed; but | the more pious | obscrvers | of the fast wili | not swallow even their own | ||
| saliva between | earliest | dawn and sunset | in the month | of Ramadhan. | (Translator.) | ||
| back to their | mountain | fastnesses, | the Sultan fled | to Keumala, | and Handa | Acheh became | |
| the capital | of the territory | seized by the 1 >utch and the base of their operations. ( | Translator.) |
1) 1 he same may be said of the Malays of the Peninsula. Those who have fixed employ-
2) See p. 32 above.
3) liefore the war with the Dutch. When this war began, the highlanders were driven
towns,
tl PasMon lor sucn uusy scenes, so that not only the buyers and sellers, but a great part of the population of the three sagis, all in fact who coultl afiford the journey, used to come to the capital to join in the fair. As early as the middle of Shacban, the keuchi's and teungkus make their estimates for the forthcoming purchase of meat. Each inhabitant of the gampöng is asked how many dollars he intends to spend on meat, and thus they compute how many head of cattle it may be necessary to purchase. Two or three head is the general allowance per gampong. I he people of the XXII, and some of those of the XXVI Mukims are in the habit of slaughtering many cows on such occasions. Elsewhere, as in the XXV Mukims and the territory not included in the three sagis, they slaughter male buffaloes by preference, since it is believed that the use of too much cow's flesh results in a certain sickness called siawan (Malay sëriawan), the symptoms of which are cutaneous eruptions, decay of the teeth and loss of hair. One of the common folk of the gampöng is entrusted by the keuchi' with the collection of the money. He is known as the ureuëng tumunggee; after the purchases have been concluded he receives two dollars as recompense for his trouble. Before the war, however, the payment of the vendors used to be put ofif until just before the close of the fasting month, when the highlanders came down with their buffaloes for the second time. A new slaughter then took place to provide meat for the feast which marks the end of the fast, but not on as large a scale as the first. I he beasts are slaughtered by the teungku of the meunasah. Most Mohammedans, even tliough they neglect or are backward in the performance of their own religious duties, are very particular as to who it is that slaughters the animal of whose flesh they are to partake. He must be one well versed in the rules prescribed by the law in respect of the slaying of animals for food; and he must also be strict in the performance of his daily prayers and other rites enjoined by the Mohammedan religion. I hus it is that throughout a great portion of Java the modin, kalium or lëbe (the "village priest," as Europeans call him) is the only butcher. As a reward for his trouble he receives the keredan or neck of every animal he kills ').
as
| I) In | the Malay | Peninsula | the butcher | is usually | the imam | of the mosque | or a lebei; |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| recompense | he is entitled | tu the | hide | of the slaughtered | animal. | (Translater). | |
| 15 |
226
1 his is nearly identical with the portion given as recompense to the teungku in Acheh, who is allowed to appropriate three fingers breadth behind the ears. I his is called the seumeuléhan — "reward for slaughter." 1 he liide becomes the property of the meunasah. It is converted into a leathern prayer carpet or else sold, the proceeds being spent in the purchase of kettles or such other utensils as are required for the preparation of kanduris. Until the later years preceding the establishment of the Dutch in Acheh, this three-days' fair was one of the most bustling of festivals. We can conjecture from this what it must have been when the port- kings of Acheh as such were at the zenith of their glory. The direct participation of the Dalam (the Sultan's Court) in this annual market was in these latter days limited to certain traditional customs which merely kept alive a feeble reminiscence of the past. These paltry sur vivals of the old ceremonial are however the only portion of it of which we have any accurate knowledge. Ihe Sranta. On the first day of the fair, just before noon, the Sranta took place. 1 his was a proclamation with beat of goTig, in the name of the Sultan, that the annual market had begun. 1'ive or six young men of the Sultan's suite (which as we have seen was not recruited from the best class of the people) appeared in the market, where buyers and sellers had already assembled in unusually large numbers. Business was however in full swing in the market before its official inauguration, for every one knevv that the fast was close at hand, and even the exact date of the first day of the Puasa became generally known long before its official announcement. I he emissaries of the Sultan now proceeded to beat loudly and repeatedly on a great gong in the midst of the bustling crowd, and in the inteivals between the strokes one of their number, who acted as herald, cried aloud the following words "Twenty-six, twenty-five, twenty-two ')! Such is the command of our lord (the Sultan): on this day (the cattle is) brought down (from the highlands); to morrow let the beasts fight; the next day let them be slaughtered." Ihe adat permitted these royal messengers to take without payment
| i) The people | of the | three sagis | of Great-Acheh, | the XXVI, | the XXV | and the XXII |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Mukims are | here addressed, | the same | traditional | order of precedence | being | observed which |
| we have already | (p. 140 | above) noted | in connection | with the | coronation of a new | king. |
22J
on this day all that they wished of the victuals, sirih, tobacco etc. displayed on the stalls. Owing, hovvever, to the large attendance at the fair and the unusually large number of sellers, these last did not individually suffer much from the depredations of this little band of marauders. The names given to the three non-official feast days correspond exactly with the heralds proclamation. Collectively they are known as urbë mamcugang, which appears to mean "days of the inauguration of the fast"'). The first day, that is the 27th or 28th of the month, is called urbë peutron = "the day of the bringing down," the next uroc pupo' = "the day of the fighting, and the last urbë seiuneusïê = "the slaughter day." I his is also specially known as uroc ma'meugein< <-> ó
r.
We must not attach too exact a signifïcance to these names. Live stock were brought down to the town before as well as on the urbë peutron and also if necessary on the following day. The uroc pupo was not devoted to beastfights as the word might lead us to suppose. Popular as this amusement is among the Achehnese, no one had time for it on this busiest of all market days. The name was given half in jest, because this was the day of the fair 011 which most cattle were sold and thus underwent examination with a view to their purchase. This examination is named after the trial of strength of their beasts which excites such universal interest among Achehnese onlookers. The great crowding and bustle of the uroc pupo' always gave rise to street fights, generally originating in accidental affronts such as occur in all densely crowded gatherings. It is said that the highlanders, ever eager for fighting and pillage, used to seize the opportunity to appro- priate their neighbours' goods during the conflict which they had pur- posely provoked with that very object. The "day of slaughter, alone of the three, corresponds exactly with its name. On this day the teungku slaughters the beasts, the authorities of the gampöng divide the meat among the purchasers, the women co°k 't; in short, the whole community is in a state of incessant bustle. In spite of the coming privations the approach of the fasting month
| mïmïgang | hari mimigang | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| I) In | Malay the | days immediately | preceding | the fast are called | or | ||
| while the | Javanese | name them | The | Achehnese | attach n.. special | meaning | to the |
| expression | and regards | it as being | of foreign | origin. |
mlgüng.
228
is joyfully welcomed. 1 hose vvho have begun to join in the fast while still young can endure the daily abstinence without much effort, if not required to do any heavy work during this month, and if allowed to accomodate tlieir occupations to the change of living which the fast involves. 1 he nights of the Puasa in an Achehnese gampöng are full of noisy merriment, especially among the young men in their own particular spliere, the ttwitiuisuh. With this in view, these combined clubs and chapels are put into some sort of order at the end of Shacban. 1 hey are cleaned up — which they require only too much — the big lamp is brought out and hung up etc. The Fast. g. Pitasa (Ramadhan). The month, like the day, begins at sunset. We have seen ') how in old times the commencement of the day was announced in the capital of Acheh by the firing of a gun from the Dalam, and how the right of firing this shot (;nobah) was regarded as one of the high prerogatives of the sultan. Sucli was also the case with the sunset that began the fasting month; but seven shots were fired to call attention to this important epoch. On the subsequent days of the fast the customary single shot was thought sufficiënt, and served as a signal for the universal bukah (the breaking of the fast). The Mohammedan law does not brook the most trifling breach of the prescribed abstinence. The smallest particles of solid or liquid food or the smoke of tobacco or opium entering the body between the earliest dawn and sunset make the fast day null and void and render it necessary to repeat it later on. As regards the breaking of the fast, each one may follow his own inclination, but it is considered sunnat or commendable to take some food immediately after sunset, and equally so to have another meal before the break of day. This latter is called sazvó (a corruption of the Arabic sahur) by the Achehnese. 1 hat none may miss the time for preparing and eating the sawö-meal, the great drum (tambu) in the chapels is beaten at intervals from i to 3 A. M. In the days of the sultanate an additional warning was conveyed by means of a cannon-shot (called sambang'1) fired about 4 A. M. to warn the people that "a white thread might now be told from a black, as the text of the Quran lias it, i. e. that the time of the sawö had come to an end.
1) P. 128 above.
| 1 he Achehnese | now apply | this name | to the morning | and evening | by the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Dutch garrison. |
2) 1 he Achehnese now apply this name to the morning and evening guns fired by the
229
I he fast is faithfully observed by many and publicly transgressed by none. Every one is aware that heavy opiumsmokers cannot abstain. Others who find the abstinence too severe, surreptitiously consume cakes, fruits, sugarcane etc., but would be ashamed to have cooked food prepared for them They also partake unblushingly of the breakfast at sunset and of the savvo-meal. They dare not chew sirih in the daytime, since that leaves traces which cannot be all at once obliterated. In Acheh, as in Java '), there are many bad observers of the fast, who to ease their consciences fast 011 the first and last, and sometimes also on the middle day of the month. 1 he liberal view that prevails in parts of Java, that the smoking of tobacco does not aftect the fast, finds no serious supporters in Acheh-Many Achehnese, however, make endurance easier by occasionally rubbing their teeth (and perhaps their tongue too by accident!) with tobacco. In defence of this practical they point to the fact that the religious law strongly recommends the cleansing of the teeth by rubbing them with the end of a stick of some soft sort of wood 2). It differs then but little, they say, whether tobacco or some other plant be employed for this purpose. The second meal is generally taken at home, but during the fasting The men month almost all the people of the gampöng are wont to assemble at nas^t.'"r 1,1 the meunasah to await the sunset. At the appointed time they partake mon'h- ot a meal prepared from general contributions under the supervision of the teungku, and share in the seumayang tnugréb or at least remain as spectators during its performance. Even notorious opiumsmokers contribute their share and do not fail in attendance, though they do not even make a pretence of sharing in the meal through fear ofbeing laughed at. 1 hey choose a place in the balè near the meunasah, or at least refrain from entering the latter. Die customary dish for this preliminary breakfast is a porridge [kanji) made from rice and various leaves pounded fine. It is cooked by some poor old man of the gampöng, who gets from the teungku a share of the pitrah for his pains. The assembled villagers have cach
| of the drum, | the allusion | being to | the empty | space enclosed | between | the two skin | cover- |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ings at either | end of a drum. | ||||||
| in the month not signify." | of 1'uasa | *sugoé bakdng | hana pcué" = | "rubbing | (the teeth) | with tobacco | does |
1) In Java this methoil of lcceping the fast is jestingly called tulup klndang = "the closing
2) 1 his method of cleaning the teclh is called sugoc (Mal. sngi). So the Achehnese say
Ihetrawèh.
Popular conception of the fasting munt!' of piation.
a cocoanut-shell or a smal! basin to contain their share '). When the sunset prayer, during which those who take 110 part therein remain seatcd at the back 2), is finished, all return home to satisfy their hunger. After 7 P. M. the men, especially the younger ones, reassemble by ones and twos in the meunasah to celebrate the Cicha or evening prayers, and in particular to be present at the trawèh which succeeds them. The trawèh (Arab tarawU) are ordinary prayers of the kind classified as voluntary but recommended by the lavv. Most seiitnayangs, whatever their special appellations may be, differ from one another only in the number of their subdivisions (ra/fats) and some trifling distinctions in the form of the ritual. I hus the trawèh are composed of 20 subdiv isions, each pair of which is separated from the rest by a taslimah, which consists in sitting with the head turned first to the right and then to the left and invoking a blessing on all believers. Tliis as a general rule takes place at the end of the whole seumayang. The trawèh may be held only in the fasting month, 011 every evening and night between the Cicha and the morning, i. e. from about 7.30 I'. M. to 3 A. M. The usual time is immediately after the zicha or about 8 i\ M. The practice of Mohammedans in regard to the division of religious works into obligatory and meritorious differs in many particulars from the teaching of the law. Many things which the law treats as imperative obligations, as very pillars of the creed of Islam, are neglected by the great majority, whilst other observances which may be passed by without any risk of incurring divine punishment, are esteemed indis- pensable by the mass of the people. 1 hus throughout the whole Mohammedan world many persons take part with extreme zeal in the trawèh service, who unblushingly neglect daily religious duties which they are under a strict obligation to pcr- form. This popular over-estimation of the trawèh is explained by its connection with the fasting month. In like manner the fast itself lias a higher place in the popular estimation than in the law. It is indeed one of the main pillars of the Sex" creec^ I-S'am> but 'n actual practise it is improperly accepted as the
1) Some meunasahs have attached to them patches of rice-land, the gift of devout persons
who have set them apart as wakaf to meet the expenses of such frugal repasts. These are callcd umong ïè bu = "Rice-fields for nee-water."
2) Such a thing would be inconceivable in Arabia: in that country he who neglects the
galat (obligatory prayers) dares not attend a public service. Even in Java the feeling of shamc for such an act is much stronger than in Acheh,
greatest pillar of all, since hundreds who never perform a single seumayang (a duty just as obligatory as the other) are faithful observers of the fast. It is as though this one month of abstinence vvere to excuse all the neglect and transgressions of the past eleven. Thus every ob- servance that specially appertains to this month of expiation, whether it be obligatory or nierely meritorious, is eagerly carried out in the fullest possible manner. In Java also, people partake in the trawèh who never think of at- tending a Friday service, to say nothing of performing the daily seu- mayangs in mosque or lattggar (chapel). In Acheh, hovvever, the trawèh service as celebrated in the meunasah savours much of a caricature. Of all the assembled company one or two at most, generally not even one takes an active part in the prayers; they allow them to be performed by the teungku alone, who properly speaking should only act as leader. Without the slightest token of respect, all the others sit smoking or chewing sirih. At the Am in with which the teungku closes the recitation of the Quran appertaining to each subdivision (rakcah) of the seumayang, all those present join in with a yell. In like manner they take part with loud vociferation in the invocation of blessing on the Prophet which as an interlude sepa- rates the ten pairs of rakcahs of the trawèh from one another. They do not properly repeat the formulas whereby such invocations of blessing should be confirmed, but corrupt them by absurd imitations '). Ulamas and other devout persons take no share in these follies and forbid their sons taking part in them. Indeed many of the teungkus find the excessive noise unendurable, and it has happened that one of their number threatened to cease his ministrations 011 account of it. So far from regarding his admonition the boldest of the young house- holders present replied that if he did so he would receive 110 pitrah from them 011 the feast-day at the end of the fasting month. Thus we see how in Acheh some Mohammedan institutions have degenerated into unrecognizable forms. The pitrah is a tax payable at the end of the fasting month by all popular in- whose means allow of it, on behalf of themselves and all who are '"pretation of the pitrah. dependent 011 them for support. The payment is made in kind, that
Allahumma sa/li ala sayyidina Muhatnmad u
| bless our | lord Mohammed") | to which | they scieam | the response | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| instead of | c |
1) For instance the teungku says: c (O God,
sa/a/a além wcfaloyhém, salla 'Ha hu ,alaihi wasal/am.
232
is to say in grain of the sort which forms the staple foodstuff of the country. It is intended for the selfsame class of indigent folk who are supported by the zakat, and its special object is to make it easier for them to participate in the feast which succeeds the fast. A person such as the Achehnese teungku ought properly only to act, in refer- ence to the pitrah, as collector and distributor, receiving for his pains a suitable recompense payable from the pitrah itself. The trawèh is a religious exercise, recommended to all during the nights of the fasting month. Each may perform it in solitude, but its celebration by the whole community under the leadership of an imam is more meritorious. So says the law; but what is the actual practice in Acheh? There the trawèh is a religious exercise which the teungku has to perform for all, and the pitrah (which lias not properly speaking the smallest connection with it), is a contribution for the benefit of the teungku, regarded as his recompense for the performance of the trawèh! da™h.meU~ lhC traU'ch farCe is 'succcedcd by the Quran recitation. It is under- stood that the recital of the Quran in conformity with the rules of the art (provided that the declaimer be in a certain state of ritual purity), is always a pious work which Allah will bless with a great reward. All good works, however, are much intensified in merit when performed during the month of Ramadhan. To repeat it once more, this is in the popular conception par excellence the month of religion.' In this month the pious and the learned recite occasionally in the day- time a passage of the holy book, as much as they can find strength for; but the nightly recitation in the chapels is a universal custom. After the conclusion of the trawèh service in the meunasah, certain experts volunteer to recite passages from the Quran, and make it their endeavour ïf possible to bring to a conclusion (tamat) once or oftener during the month, the thirty subdivisions of the Book. 1 his most wearisome task they take by turns. Those who sit by usually have before them a copy of the Quran, so that they may prompt and correct as they listen (sima' as the Achehnese say, from the Arab. si,net or more correctly samac "hearkening"). Such public recitation, wherein one always chants while all the rest listen in silence, is^caücd tneudaröih '). In this also the teungku acts as conductor; the
i) .Tav. darus, Mal. Marus-, recitation by a number of people in chorus is called meuhatam
in Achehnese = Mal. bïrehatam.
233
rest of the reciters are vialons and /ca bes who in many cases have taken no share in the trawèh at the meunasah, preferring to celebrate it elsewhere in a more becoming manner under the leadership of an ulama. The people of the gampöng do not remain listening to the tneudaröih till much past 10 P. m., but the recitation continues till about i A. M., when the tambu begins to sound as a warning that the time for the savvö-meal is at hand. They exhibit their interest in the proceedings, hovvever, by bringing, each in turn, trays containing various sweetmeats, fruits etc., for the use of the reciters and their audience. W here a party thus assembles together to recite the Quran, it is Peutamat customary to celebrate the conclusion of the Sacred Book in somewhat dal'5'ih' festive wise. For tliis occasion there are special prayers, dikrs and ratibs, and a special meal. Feasts of this sort are held in every meu nasah on one of the nights of the fasting month subsequent to the 15lh-In deciding on the night, however, it is not so much considered whether the thirty parts of the Quran have been exactly completed, as whether the time will suit the people of the gampöng and their guests. The people of the entire mukim are not invited to this fcutamat daroih (as they are to the kanduri Mó'löt), but only those of the gam- pöngs in the immediate neighbourhood. Some days beforehand, the authorities of the gampöng begin collecting the money contributions. Goats are slaughtered and the rice with its accessories is of course provided. These viands serve not only to break the fast, but also to satisfy the appetite, so that on this evening the people do not go home for their supper. On this occasion the trawèh is succeeded not by the usual meu- daröïh but by an excessively noisy ratéb. This (the ratel) Saman, so called from Samman, the founder of a tarxqah or mystic order, who died at Medina, 1152 Hijrah), is especially popular among all native Mohammedans of the old stamp. The constant use of this ratéb lias given rise in various places to the introduction of sundry variations and additions, which without exception serve to accentuate the appalling noisiness of this religious exercise. Such is especially the case in Acheh. 1' irst of all certain formulas in praise of Allah are chanted in measured time by the assembled company. Then the time grows gradually faster and faster, the incess-
234
/ repeateu tormulas become shorter (e. g. hu Allah! hu da'ém! hul) and the voiccs rise to a shrill scream. 1 he yelling fanatics, sweating with the violence of their transport, rise up, sit down again, leap and dance and often fall down at last in sheer exhaustion — from the ecstasy arising from their contemplation of the divine, as they choose to deern it. This condition is called do ') by the Achehnese, and to tliis most clamorous form of the ratéb Saman tliey give the name of ratéb mensa cr kululiét. Any of those present who betrays a manifest reluctance to share in the general excitement is sure to be forced to join the crowd in a manner not too pleasant for himself. Indeed serious disturbances sonie- times aiise from the annoyance feit at such indiffercnce. For this reason the authorities both of the gampöng which is performing the peutamat daro/h and the others whose inhabitants have come there as guests make a point of attending on such occasions. inflictèd on^ ^ " ^ °f this sort the people of an Achehnese gampöng
| 11 a | ma crs | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| those | who | |||
| neglect meunasah. | to vourl | ., e | ., |
are very exacting. Anyone who does not sympathise in their fa- attend at the t ^jnusements is thought conceited, and his presumption is mercilessly punished. Woe to the man, especially the young man, who does nut appear pretty regularly in the meunasah to attend the trawèh farce. After having practised patience for a couple of evenings, a deputation of gampöng people sets out on its punitive mission. The very least that they do is to force him from his dwelling by keeping up a diabolical din with the tambu or great drum of the meunasah beneath his house, until he "comes down" for very shame. 1' requently, however, such arrogance is humiliated in the same manner as that of a young bridegroom, who on his arrival in his wife's gam pöng after the completion of the marriage ceremony, fails to perform with satisfactory zeal the sundry politenesses prescribed by the adat towards his new fellow-villagers. This punishment consists in smearing with human ordure the steps of his house, which he will in due course descend next morning at dawn, barefoot after the manner of all Achehnese. Failure to participate is only tolerated in the case of leubès and ulamas and their relations from respect, and of chiefs and the members of their families from fear.
the
| I) trom | the Arab. | Janq = "taste," | which is also | used among | the mystics | to denote |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| tasting of the | higher | spiritual | In Achehnese | it only | means "trance." |
enjoyments.
235
The third of the annual kanduris held in the déah of Teungku Anjöng Thekanduri in Gampöng Jawa, takes place 011 the night of (i. e. before) the 14A of °vfnj JgUngku this month. Ihe other tvvo have been already mentioned under the months Mó'löt and Kanduri Bu. This is more especially dedicated to the saint himself, vvho according to the Achehnese died on the i4tH of Ramadhan 1196 (August 1782). It is thus called kanduri Teungku Anjöng. A night of great importance according to Mohammedan teaching is the night of the qadar or "divine decree." This is the night on which, it is said, the eternal Quran was sent down by Allah to the world below, to be finally revealed to Mohammed piece by piece through the agency of the Archangel Gabriel. It is generally believed that on the day, or rather night which forms the anniversary of this great event, the whole creation feels its influ- ence. On this special night, 110 less than 011 that of the middle of Shacban, all manner of rich blessings are supposed to be dealt forth by Allah to those who keep vigil therein, wakeful and if possible engaged in pious devotions. At the present time, however, 110 one can fix the date with certainty. 1 he sole rule is the prevalent idea that the night of the qadar is one of the last five odd-numbered nights of the fasting month, i. e. the nights preceeding the 2ith, 23'!, 2511», 2711» or 29111. A weighty reason is found herein for devoting all of them to devotional exercises! 1 hese nights are in all Mohammedan countries spent by the devout in recitations from tlie Quran and other such-like devotions. Here and there we find certain superstitious practices resorted to by the people for the purpose of drawing down upon their own heads the blessings of the qadar night. In Java feasts known as tncilvviuns are given 011 these nights by princes and other persons of distinction to a multitude of guests. Among these five nights are two which in the general estimation dispute with each other the right to the name of qadar night with a greater show of probability than the other three, viz. the 21 and 27'h. 1 he 21"1 (malêm saltkur) enjoys this preference throughout a great portion of Java, a preference which displays itself principally in popular rejoicings. In Acheh it is on the night before the 27^ that the greatest animation is displayed. Before every housedoor is set a lighted lamp with seven mouths, or ueyes' as the Achehnese call them. The young amuse themselves by letting off crackers (beudc China i. e. "little
C hinese guns as they call them). ') At sunset persons of substance bring complete idangs to the meunasah, so that on this occasion the celebrants of the feast may enjoy a hearty meal instead of the pre- liminary mess of pottage with which they usually break their fast. The tradition has it, that during the qadar night 2) the very trees bow to the ground in awe in the direction of the kiblat, that is to say toward the Sacred Mosque at Mekka. This is firmly believed by the Achehnese, though with this restriction, that the phenomenon is rarely visible to the eyes of ordinary mortals. The young folk, however, inake expeditions on the night of the 27'^ "to seek trees doing obeisance" {taja mita kayec sujut); but this popular expression must not be taken as seriously meant. The jén in I he belief is also universal in Acheh that the jinn (arab. jen) are monthfaStlng chained UP during the fasting month, and thus, where hostile to man, powerless to harm him. Thus during the Puasa the fear of going about in the dark is reduced to a minimum. 1 here is 110 objection to marrying during the Puasa, but other seasons are of course preferred, since in this month the opportunities for feasting are so extremely limited. \ e have seen that the markets are, for reasons easy to explain, practically closed during the first half of the fasting month. It must be added that during the first week, marketing is absolutely pantang,
i. e. forbidden by the adat, the general opinion being that a breach of this rule entails misfortune. These pantang periods of seven days play a great part in Achehnese superstition. It is impossible to fish with luck during the seven days which follow the annual "sea-kanduri" of the pukat₃) fishermen. Anyone who wishes to undergo the treatment with the curative root of the peundang must follow a prescribed diet for 2X7 days; and similarly measured by the number 7 is the time allotted for the special diet of those who desire to practice the science of invulnerability.
Three days ^ the second half of Ramadhan the bustle of the nuirket begins fair-gradually to grow greater, and reaches its zenith in the last three days,
| other at their | expense | in this noisy | pastime. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Settlements. | The Malays | angle with | lines or catch fish | in gigantic | traps | and | |
| formed of stakes. | ( |
1) The paederasts take an especial delight in making their favourites contend with eaeh
2) In Acheh it is spaken of simply as (the 27' night).
3) Dragnet. These nets are almost exclusively used by Chinese fishermen in the Straits
tnalam dua plöh tujöh h
(b'élat jen/tal) Translator).
which form anothcr regular fair. They bear the same names as the last three days of the previous month, viz. uroë peutrön, uroë pupo and uroc seumeusië; they are also known as the uroë mavieugang') urbë rayci, since the word ma'meugang suggests the days which precede a feast. The slaughter of cattle at the end of the fast is almost as great as that before its commencement, vvhile the trade in articles of dress and the like is much brisker. On the feast day which follows the fast al' attlre themselves in new garments, and the regard of a man for his wife and children is measured by the presents which he brings Bringing home to them from the fair. This is called "bringing home meat," h°me meat' although the gift usually consists of entirely different things. Meat, a luxury seldom used, was in ancient times an indispensable adjunct of festal rejoicings in the home. The poorer women and children, whose husbands and fathers are sojourning on the Kast or West Coast as pepper-planters, feel the full bitterness of their position on a feast-day. Their friends are careful to refrain from asking them the question addressed to other women at this feast-fair, 'How much meat lias your husband brought home?"i. e "How much money has he presented you witli?" To add to the grief and shame of the unlucky ones, they are greeted with compassionate looks, and the neighbours often give the children a piece of meat from the slaughter in which they cannot participate. '1 he feast-day which concludes the fast is fixed by calculation like its commencement, and is tlius known long beforehand. A number of guns from the Dalam at sunset on the last day, used in the Sultans' time to convey the superfluous announcement that the first day of the feasting month had begun.
10. Uroë raya (Shawwal). During the night before the commencement The feast
of the feast, the children once more let off numerous "little Chinese VJ₁® cn.d of guns" (crackers). The women are busily employed with the preparation month^""2 of food, especially jeumphan 2) a kind of small cakes, which the adat
1) See p. 227 above.
| with plantam | pounded fine, | is spread | out on | a plantain-leaf. | Over | this is sifted | erated | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| cocoanut | and sugar; | is thcn | rolled or folded | into | the shape | of a cylinder or prism | ||
| and the | leaf wrapped | round it in ''y steaming | the same (setëbi) | shape. The or boiled | parcel thus (reuböïh) in a little | formed | is closed at water The | |
| Jtumphan, (Malay | which is also called of Menangkabau | timphan, tapé'). | most closely | resembles | what | the Malays call'/'Hat |
2) A jcnmfhan made as follows. Some paste made of ground glutinous rice mixed
2) A jcnmfhan is made as follows. Some paste made of ground glutinous rice mixed
the paste
ends and wel1 cookei1
strictly requires to be provided among the dainties laid before guests on the two Mohammedan feast-days. It is regarded as 'pantang' for a husband to cohabit with his wife during the night of the feast. Transgression of this prohibition is sup- posed, should pregnancy supervene, to result in the birth of a child with too many fingers or toes or some other such deformity. Guns used to be fired in the Dalam on the uroë raya from 4 A. M. till the afternoon. Early in the morning all the men go forth and take a "feast-bath" (mandé urbë raya). Besides this bath, the law strongly recommends a religious service to celebrate the feast (seumayang urbë raya). This is held in the chapels, great and small, or else without regard to place, in the morning after sunrise, and a sermon follows. In many countries this service, although not obligatory, is more strictly observed than other devotional exercises prescribed by the law. In Java, for example, most chiefs, even though they may never come near the mosque 011 a Friday, are strict in the observance of the feast*-(alat.* Such is not the case in Acheh. Those who assemble to perform the seumayang uroë raya are composed of devotees met together by chance. Chiefs and even the teungkus of meunasahs take but little share in this service. I11 this case again it is the women who combine together in various places under a female teungku to celebrate these prayers. Payment of Before arraying themselves in festal attire, the men go to pay their the pitrah. pitrah to the teungku. All whose means allows of their paying this tax without fear of stinting their families, must contribute a certain quantity of the grain which forms the staple food of the place in which they reside. They are required to pay so much per head 011 account of eacli of those for whose support they are responsible, including their wives and slaves and in some cases their children and parents as well. I he staple in Acheh is of cour.se rice, and the Arabic legal measure lias been fixed in Achehnese dry measure at 2 arès ') so heaped up so to rise in a cone at the top 5). Hardly a single duty prescribed by the law is so faithfully observed throughout the whole Mohammedan world as this. Even those who are really hard pressed by its fulfilment, are loath to neglect this contribution. Persons of distinction in Acheh
| This is called | dua are meiCun | or meu'uïeé |
|---|
1) As to this measure see also p. above.
2) or chuchi.
as wcll as in Java make it even on behalf of their attendants (rakan), though the law by no means obliges them to do so. This almost exaggerated observance of the rules as to the pitrah is attributable to the popular estimation of the fasting month as a period of expiation. It is supposed that small involuntary omissions in respect of the law of the fast are made good by the fulfilment of the pitrah. Thus the contributions are paid vvith the utmost readiness, in the hope that thereby the annual account with Allah may be duly balanced. As we have already seen, the teungku, who according to the law should only act as a salaried collector or distributor of the pitrah, as a matter of fact appropriates the proceeds himself. Thus the great mass of the people are left to imagine that the pitrah is in its entirety an obligatory payment for the teungku's benefit. Such is also the case in Java with the desa-priests and desa-chiefs as they are called by the Dutch. It is understood that the law is not content with the simple collection of the pitrah. It insists that evcry one who contributes should per- sonally or by agent give evidence of his intent to conform to what the law prescribes. The Achehnese, who does not himself know by heart any suitable formula for the expression of this intent, gets the teungku to whom he brings the rice to dictate one in his place. It usually runs somewhat as follows: «This my pitrah for two (or three etc.) persons, which the Lord has required of me for this year, I now give (or make over) to thee, Oh Teungku! '). Some add, "at they determination oh Teungku!" in which there lui ks the suggestion that the distribution of the pitrah according to the law is confidently entrusted to him; but most teungkus refuse to receive the pitrah on such conditions. They believe that the sin of unlawful distribution (or rather appropriation of almost the whole of the pitrah to their own use) would be visited 011 them, the teungkus, if the givcr expressed any such condition, whereas they liold themselves free of al' responsibility if the pitrah is given to them unconditionally. Many make the contribution in money instead of rice; this they do b°th f°r the teungku's sake, as he would otherwise be at a loss how to dispose of so much rice, and also to facilitate the transport of the pitrah itself. Ihe Shafi'ite law requires, it is true, that the pitrah should
1) Xyce pitrah lóntuan Jua (or Ihcï etc.) drié ureuéng nyang Tuhan fuwajêb dalam
thon nyoè Ion bri Qö'j keu Teungku.
be paid in kind; but then; is nothing to prevent the teungku from selling to each of his visitors as much rice as they require to pay the pitrah for themselves and their people. This rice the teungku then receives back again from the donor of the tax, and thus a few arès which he keeps in store suffice for the collection of the whole pitrah. In Java also this evasion of the law is pretty general. It enables the poor to contribute without difficulty, and at the same time gives the recipients the chance of collecting more than they otherwise could, for those who have only a few cents to offer, can purchase with these the necessary quantity of rice from the "desa-priest", even though it be worth more than they pay for it, since the seller knows that he will at once receive it back again. Congratu-No sooner is the pitrah paid, than all put on their new clothes, fill their bungköïh with an extra large supply of sirih and its accessories, and start ofif to pay the necessary visits of felicitation. The husband receives at home by way of congratulation the seumbah of his wife and children, which he acknowledges with a gesture, but without words. The mothers sometimes, in answer to the seumbah of their young children, take their heads in their hands and say "may you be happy (ba mcutuah)!" Men who meet one another on the road take each other by the hand (tnumat jaroc) in the well-known native fashion, sometimes adding the words "forgiveness for my sins" (vieuah dèësa Ion), to which the reply is "the same on my side" [di Ionpi tneunan chit). The visits prescribed by the adat are few in number. The man must at the verv least go and pay the compliments of the season with due respect to his parents and parents-in-law, while the visits of the women are as a rule limited to these tvvo. Visits even to the chief of their own gampöng are not customary unless he happens to be a person of means. The heads of the mukim (itneums) are waited 011 by all their subordinate keuchi's and teungkus, and many of the common people as well. The latter make obeisance from a respectful distance, just as in an ordinary visit. Sirih is first served to the visitors, followed by jeumphan and other sweetmeats. The drinking of cofifee on such occasions is quite a modern custom but is gradually becoming more in vogue. The ulèëbalangs are visited by few below the rank of teungkus. The latter with the keuchi's and imeums put in an appearance if they reside in the immediate neighbourhood of their chief, but neglect to
24 [
pay such a visit is not regarded as a serious breach of etiquette The prolix ceremonial with which such feasts used to be celebrated at the court in the brief period of prosperity of the port-kingship, and to which ancient documents (the sarakatas) bear witness, has been long since entirely forgotten. Within living memory the rajas of Acheh have but very rarely taken part in public worship and all that pertains to it.
On the second or third day of the month (never on the first) the ulèebalangs in the neighbourhood of the Dalam together with some ulamas of distinction used to wait on the sultan during the course of the forenoon, on which occasion they were presented with some articles of dress. These visits were distinguished from other social gatherings of the Achehnese by the absence of all oratorical display. The Teuku Kali Malikon Adé, who as master of court ceremonies was on terms of greater intimacy with the royal family than the rest, used to come and present his felicitations on the actual feast day, when he as well as the members of the Sultans family and his household servants, received a share of the royal slaughter. These visits and fricndly meetings last about five days. During these Amusement, feast-days the men indulge to an excessive degree in gambling strictlv llul'r"S 'he torbidden though it is by the law of Islam. The village authorities, who on other occasions oppose such practices, or at least prevent their taking place within the walls of the meunasah, are wont at these time. to shut their eyes to such transgressions. On the uroê raya, the first of the month, many go to visit their amily bunal-place (bhom). This is another pious custom which is held in greater honour by the women than by the men. They decorate with flowers (jeumpa, san,tanga and the bungong peukan or «market- flowers" as they are called) the head of the tomb which they wish specially to honour, and burn some incense there. The more devout al-so offer up a prayer at the sacred spot, or else recite the fatihah, the Mohammedan Lord's Prayer. The six days fast after the feast day, the observance of which is recommended in the books of the law, is kept by scarcely any one in Acheh. In Java, where the observers of such a fast are also few and far between, a small feast is often held on the 8th, pr0perly speaking in celebration of the end of this period of abstinence. This feast, breaking a fast where no fast exists, is unknown in Acheh.
The "shut-li. Metiapét (Dul-qcfdali). In various other native languages as well in" month.. i 1,,, as Achehnese, this month is known by names which signify "pinched or "shut in". The name is now generally believed ') to have originated in the fact that this month comes in between the two in which the official feasts of Islam are celebrated -). On account of this "shutting in", the 11 th month is considered unsuitable for the undertaking of any work of importance, such as a marriage or circumcision etc. The "Great 12. Haji ( Dul-ludjali). On the iolh day of this month the great sacrificial feast in connection with the Hajj is celebrated in the valley of Muna (the ancient Mina), which lies to the cast of Mekka. The books of the law recommend, though they do not imperatively prescribe, the holding of public prayers in other places some time after sunrise on this day. I hese prayers are followed by the sermon proper to the festival, and it is also considered highly meritorious to sacrifice animals. 1 he two preceding days are also regarded as specially cligible for voluntary fasts I hose who are performing the hajj, howcver, do not usually fast, as this cannot be required of them in view of the fatigues of their journey. It is a very popular view in Java, that the feast-day of this month derives its significance from this identical fast 3). And yet there are but few in Java, who submit to what is there called the antarwiyah and ngarpah, the fast on the days of tarwiyah and carafah, i. e. the 8'h and 9'h of this month. Three days ^ his two-days fast is only known in Acheh among devotecs, and little practised even by them, — the less so, as the feast is preceded by a three-days fair of the same kind as we met with in the months Kanduri Bu and Puasa. The 7H1 js ur0t; pCntrön, the 8th Uroê pupb', the 9th ufve seumeusii', and the three taken together urbc ma ineugang. In
| with the | calendar, in | a very interesting | article | in the Tijdschrift | van het | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Bat, Genootschap, | vol. XLI. | ||||||
| (Sund. ƒƒ | "pinched ' | and Sïla | = "interval*' | we find | also Longkang | — "interval" | |
| [curiously | enough this | word means | a narrow drain | or ditch | in the Malay | of Singapore. | |
| (Translator)], Ugtfna | = naked | (without any | feast), | Si lik Sawal (just as Rabi" | al-akhir is called | ||
| Silih Mtilud') | and Roivah | Ilaji (as | it were the | Rowah month | of the month | Haji, | on the |
| analogy of the month Htfsar. | Rowah proper | which | precedes the other | feasting | month, Sawal). |
1) Dr. Brandes has elucidated the original meaning of this name, which has no connection
2) In Java the month has many more names than appear in the dictionary. Besides Apit
3) Hence this day is often called Ba da Bés ar meaning (the day) after the fast of the
Mohammedan
1
this latter case there was in the Sultan's time no sranta or procla- mation by heralds. In point of animation, however, this annual fair falls far behind the o er two. On this occasion the object of the slaughter is not, as
o.re the Puasa' to suPP'y a store of cooked meat for a couple of
weeks; and the buying of new clothes, which is universal at the end of the fasting month, is not customary in the month Haji. Ihe feast day itself is also a repetition on a much smaller scale of 1C "r0C ra/a P"aSa' Very fevv inc'ecd give a thought to religious exercises. As a general rule the men take their festival-bath in the morning at the meunasah, exchange handshakes with the friends whom 7meCt °n the road' and Pay «ome festal visits, at which the leumphans are ,n due course served to them after the sirih. Some also visit their family burial-places. Sacrif'«s are offered at this feast by peso,,, of ,„cans. The law "mt a Sinf.'le head °f «'"»» tattlc (goats or shcop) may serve sacrifice for one person, while seven persons may, if they so prefer, join in offering a single head of large cattle (oxen or camels). n Acheh the genus bos is generally selected for the kurubeuen (from the Arab qurban = sacrifice). As a rule oxen and not buffaloes are chosen ,n spite of the pretty general preference for the flesh of the atter. 1his ,s connected with the very widespread belief in the Eastern Archipelago, that an animal offered as a sacrifice will hereafter serve the sacrificer as a steed upon the «plain of the resurrection" (padan? machlia). A goat is too small for this purpose, and a buffalo, accustomed as it ,s to wallow in mud and shallow water might inconvenience his rider by walking with him into a river or ditch. Whoever wishes to make sacrifice, usually hands over the animal destined for that purpose to an ulama, that nothing may be lacking to the proper ceremonial, and that he who makes the offering may thus be assured of atta.ning his purpose. The animal is killed under the ulama's super vision, and the flesh distributed among the people of the gampong Before the coming of the Dutch to Acheh, great (though in many K»ru„e„,n respects profane) kurubeuen feasts used to be held in the gampöng of feasts at
B.tay. People assembled there in crowds from the ioth to the i₃th of B"ay' the month Haji, and even for a couple of days longer. They came from the capital and the whole of the surrounding district, -nay, all the sagis lent their contributions to this noisy gathering.
We have already made acquaintance with this gampöng of Bitay ') (which belongs to the VI Mukims of the XXV), in telling the some- what legendary story of the relations opened by a Sultan of Acheh in the i6'h century with the Sultan of Turkey, and of the artisans lent by the latter to his Achehnese vassal to instruct his people. The tomb of Tuan di Bitay, who taught the Achehnese among other things the art of casting cannon, and the mosque which stands beside the grave are revered as sacred up to the present day. It is difficult to conjecture why this tomb in particular is esteemed the proper place for offering sacrifices in the month of Haji. We only know that Bitay came to be regarded as the place for these sacrifices, and that the feasts celebrated there assumed an entirely worldly character and became an offence to all devout persons. Gambling, cockfighting and sadati-games were the chief pastimes indulged in by the people who crowded thither, and the fights inseparable from such pastimes were not wanting. Thus the word kurubeucn acquired and still retains in the Achehnese vernacular the meaning of a heathenish tumult! Sacrificial cattle were also slaughtered here in large numbers. The custom in Bitay required that all beasts brought for sacrifice should be slaughtered by a descendant of the local saint, who acted as the keeper of the tomb. At the sacrifice of each animal a number of articles were presented to the slaughterer on a tray (dalóng), viz. — two raw eggs, husked and unhusked rice mixed together, the various things which are usually employed for the cooling (peusijuc) of a newly built house, or one in which a wedding has just taken place 2), a flask of perfumed oil, a little seureuma (the well-known black pow- der for the edges of the eyelids), some ba ja (blacking for the teeth), a small mirror, a comb, a razor, a sunshade and a piece of white cotton cloth four ells (ha**'ih)** in length. All these things, including the toilet requisites, were applied by the slaughterer to their proper purposes. The "cooling" of all hot, destructive influences he performed in the usual way. After shaving a little hair off the animal with the razor, he held the mirror before its eyes for a moment and then covered it with the 4 ells of white cotton cloth as with a shroud. When all this had been done, the animal was killed; the remnants of the feast and the unused
1) See p. 209 above.
2) See p. 43—44, 78, 103, etc. above.
portion of the things on the tray formeel part of the emoluments of the descendant of the sainted founder of cannon. In Java almost precisely the same objects as those we have just described as contained in the tray, are added to a sacrifice by those who adhere to old fashions. The teaching of Islam contains nothing of the kind; there must without doubt be some pre-Mohammedan ideas at the bottom of these curious preparations for a sacrifice. At present the practisers of this method have but little to adduce in explanation of it except the conception of the animal as the future steed of him who offers the sacrifice; but it is self-evident that though some of the articlcs mentioned might have a meaning in this connection, it would require strange reasoning to prove the same of others among tliem. With the exception of this busy scene at Bitay, however, the qurban feast, though called «the great Feast" in the book of the law, is in Achch and elsewhere the least significant of all. It cannot be compared in importance to the feast at the end of the fast which is officially regarded as its inferior. In the month Haji in particular (though not exclusively) certain Piasan gampongs club together to give a piasan (from ptrhiasan = ornament), a purely secular feast with a selection of popular pastimes differing according to circumstances. On such occasions a favourite amusement is the letting off of fireworks, and especially the construction of wliat is called "a firework fort" (kuta bungbng apny). This is formeel of the stem of a cocoanut tree to which are attached, at different elevations, - square horizontal wooden frames. These frames grow smaller as they approach the top and are fitted with slow burning fireworks.
§ 3. The Civil or Season Calendar.
The Achehnese are an agricultural people; «Agriculture is the kin2, „11 1 ,,
| i • | ,. | *> The | lunar |
|---|---|---|---|
| ear Agriculture |
ot all breadwinning, as their proverb has it '). Rice-growing, sugar y and cultivation, pepperplanting in the colonies of the Kast and West, as ' well as the growing of useful fruit-trees such as the cocoanut and
1) See p. 175 above.
arecapalm, — such are the occupations of the great mass of the population. It must be understood that such a peasantry can make no use of their calendar of 12 lunar revolutions for the purposes of their calling, which is most intimately connected with the changes of the seasons. Each of the months of the lunar calendar of course gradually traverses all seasons at the rate of about 11 days per annum. Notwithstanding this (and we find the same in Java), the ordinary Achehnese if asked when rice is sown, will at first reply that it must be done in, let us say, the months of Haji and Asan-Usén. He simply reflects that such was about the time in the last two years, and forgets for the moment that it was formerly otherwise. In the long run, however, lie would notice his mistake, and so he makes his calculations and plans for agricultural work without any help from the Mohammedan calendar. In most Moslim countries, indeed, there is, in addition to what we may call the ecclesiastical year, which foliows the phases of the moon, a civil year which in some way or other keeps pace with the sun. Purkish and The Turks employ the Julian solar year, while the Arabs direct rabic solar-. :ars. their attention to the 28 stations of the moon, constellations which the moon traverses in about a solar year. The Turkish system can of course only be successfully carried out in a country where there is a more or less regulated government and an official doublé calendar. Such a thing could not be thought of in Arabia, where on the other hand a calendar written in the clear heavens and exhibiting fresh phenomena every thirteen days, is in the highest degree practical. (lear nocturnal skies are however indispensable for an astronomical knowledge 011 the part of the people, so comparatively widespread as to have made the Arabic moon-stations familiar to every one concerned. In the East Indian Archipelago observation of what takes place in the firmament is usually much impeded by cloudy skies and for a great part of the year quite impossible. All that has been found written in Indonesia on the subjects of astronomy and astrology is largely borrowed from foreign sources. The true popular astronomy in this part of the world sets to work with one or two great constellations, and the know ledge of the movements of these is confined to a few individuals, who Orion in enlighten their fellow-villagers as far as is necessary. va and nis # J :ltinAchch. Orion is well-knovvn to the Javanese peasants, who in different
247
localities give to this constellation the various names of "plougli" (wéluku or welajar), "roebuck' {kidatig), "village schoolmaster" (gunt desa) and kukusan, the familiar conical basket in which rice is cooked by steaming. I-or the Achehnese, this constellation which they call "the I hree Stars ' (bmtang Ihèc) '), lias a subsidiary meaning. They say that when the fust of the three stars in the girdle of Orion shows brightest, the padi must be sown in the commencement of the time of the year recognized as seedtime. If the central one is the most brilliant, it should be sown in the middle of this period; if the most easterly, at the end. I hey also believe that a line joining the three stars exactly indicates the kiblat, or direction of Mekka, to which attention lias to be paid in the performance of prayers. This latter idea also prevails in Java. Venus is also tolcrably familiar to the Achehnese, tliough the Venus. uneducated people regard her morning and evening appearances as two distinct stars. The learned men of the gampöng know better; they call her in both cases the "group of nine stars," asserting that if one looks at Venus through a silk handkerchief (the equivalent of a telescope among Achehnese astronomers), one may clearly behold nine stars. 1 lie common folk call the morning star bui tang Timu (Eastern Star) and the evening star the star of the deer (nisa), or of the thieves (panchuri), since her uprising is the signal for both of these to go forth and seek their living. The takat simalam 2) or "sign of the night" is not, any more than the star of the deer and thieves, employed by the Achehnese in their computation of the seasons. The sa me is true of the Southern Cross, which is called "theSkate" (bintang parbc) and of some few other constellations which are distin- guished by separate names in Achehnese. The great regulator of the seasons in Acheh is, however, the Scorpion The Scorpic (bintang ka/a)-, the Pleiades, which the Achehnese call "the group of,, 0 1 the I'leiade se ven stars" (bintang tujoh) or "many men" (uretiëng le), play a sup- plementary part. We may here mention, tliough it does not tend much to the eluci-
| understood | to be comprised | in the names | kidang and | gtirtt desa. | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| had an opportunity | of having | it pointed | out to me | by an educated | Achehnese. |
1) In Java also special regard is paid to these three stars, and it is they alone that are
2) I have been unable to discover star they refer to by this name, as I have never
what
dation of our subject, the following curious piece of nomenclature. Two stars in the tail of the Scorpion, standing close to and opposite each other, which when seen with the naked eye give the impression of alternately extinguishing each other's brilliancy, are called by the Achehnese, infatuated as they are with a passion for fights between animals, by the characteristic name of puyöh meuldt, the Fighting Quails. The star which forms the tip of the Scorpion's tail is called b'oh glém or the glém fruit '), because of the conformation (called by the Achehnese bok glém from its appearance) found on the tail of a real scorpion. nungs! kCU' TllC Achehnese seasons, tlien, are regulated by the conjunctions of Kala (Scorpion) with the tnoon. These conjunctions they call keunbng (Mal. kina) i.e. "hit", «come into contact with. They have found a certain guiding principle in the number of days that always separates the new moon from the succeeding keunbng or in other words (since the Mohammedan months begin with the new moon),in the sequence of the dates on which these keunöngs take place. Let us begin by giving certain data with regard to these keunöngs and the intervals that separate tliem from the night of the new moon, borrowed not from Achehnese sources, but from particulars kindly supplied by Dr. S. Figee at Batavia₂). Dr. Figee's calculations are based on the supposition that Antares, the brightest star of the Scorpion, is that specially selected for observation, so that the coincidence of that star with the moon would be regarded as keunbng. As a matter of fact the Achehnese do not confine themselves to a single star, but speak of keunong whenever the moon appears anywhere within the Scorpion. Indeed they sometimes employ the expression, when it con- tributes to the uniformity of their series of numbers, even though the Moon and Scorpion may have already diverged to some little distance from one another. But all such differences are, as we shall see, of tiifling importance, and do not affect the computation of the seasons by more tlian a day or two on one side or the other. Computation.,.
| Of the | Between | every | two successive | there is an | interval | of | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| nöngs. | ||||||||
| 1) The together | glém-plant to form necklaces. | is,the Coix lacryma | called | jali watu | The seeds | are strung | ||
| 2) 1 am greatly they have Achehnese 3) We must right ascension | indebted frequently astronomical be understood of Antares, | to both been so good system. liere as using a star | Dr. J. P. van as to give the in the scorpion, | der Stok me in elucidating word to mean is the same as | and I)r. S. Figee my data the point that of the | for the as regards of time when moon. | help the the |
Of the keu-Between every two successive keunöngs₃) there is an interval of
in Javanese.
249
277a days, so that on an average 13.363 keunóngs occur in the course of the solar year, or in other words, most solar years contain 13, some 14 keunóngs. The interval separating the keunöng from the preceding new moon is greatest in the first month of our solar year. In the course of the foliowing months this interval decreases constantly by two or three days at a time, since the actual lunar month (from one new moon to the next) is always 2 to 3 days (29.5302—27.3333) longer than the period which elapses between two keunóngs. In November the difterence is smallest; in other words the keunóng almost coincides with the new moon, while the following keunóng just precedes it, so that the difference is then a minus quantity. \ e append a table showing the dates of the keunóngs occurring inThe keu the years 1892 and 1893, with the interval between cach of these nóngs and their lunar keunóngs and the new moon that preceded it. dates in 1892 and 1893. Dates of the keunóngs. | Interval between the keunóngs and the preceding new moon '). X892. January 25 25 days February 21 23 March 20 21 April \6 18 May 13 16 „ June 9 I4 n July 7 12 „ August 3 10 „ August 30 8 September 27 ! 6 October 24 3 November 20 i 1 1 T> December 17 { As th the 191I1 December, the difte rence should here be denoted by — 2, or if this keunöng is compared with the same new moon as its predecessor, by28.
| whole day. |
|---|
1) Fractions day are negleetedj those of over '/j a day are counted
of under '/j a as
Dates of the keunóngs.
January February March April May May June J»ly August September October November December
2;o
Interval between the keunóngs and the preceding new moon.
l893- 14 26 days 10 23 9 21 6 19 3 17 b 30 15 27 13 24 11 20 9 16 6 14 4 10 2 7 As the SA December, the difïference should here be denoted by — 1 or if this keunöng is compared with the same new moon as its predecessor, by 28.
(7th Jan0 there are 14
succeeded by a minus quantity
following circumstances. First,
and then again by a maximum, after
that the Mohammedan month begins
Both years have thus 13 keunóngs. Where the first keunóng falls on one of the first days in January, as in 1886 (ist Jan.) or 1891 in one solar year. It will be noticed that the column showing the intervals separating the new moons from the keunóngs which succeed them, exhibits a fairly uniform decrease. The greatest interval varies in different years from 24 27 and the smallest from o — 2. This minumum interval is
which the series descends as before. If we date the keunóngs according to the months of our own calen- dar, this uniformity is of course not so obvious as if we use the Mohammedan notation of time. I11 order to convert our series of inter vals into Mohammedan dates, we have only to bear in mind the two
with the visible new moon, thus one to two days later than the new moon of our almanac; secondly, that while the day of the new moon
is in the above list reckoned as — o, the Mohammedan month has no day that can be designated by a cypher, the day of its new moon being indicated by the figure i. If we recollect this we may without much chance of error employ the following rule. To find approximately the Mohamme dan dates on which keunóngs fa.11, add i to the numbers given above as representing the intervals between the new moon and the keunóng. These are the data used by the Achehnese in describing the keunóngs; they further indicate the date of each keunóng by appending it to the name of the Mohammedan month in which it occurs. Suppose we say, for instance, "It is now the month of Saplui", this merely means that it is the second month of the religious (lunar) year, and that for the present there are 110 feasts to be looked forward to except the Rabu Abéh. But if we add the words "keunóng 11", it is then pretty gene- rally understooc' that in this year the moon and Scorpion coincide 011 or about the 111'1 of Sapha. Even he who does not grasp this, still comprehends that the time for sowing padi is at hand, just as at home both townsman and peasant knows that the dog-days bring hot weather, although they may be unable to determine the actual date of that period of the year. At the same time the Achehnese allow themselves a certain latitude in computing the keunóngs, which facilitates their use. According to the list we have given, the Achehnese keunóngs in our year 1802 would in theory fall successively on the following dates in their (the Mohammedan) months: 26, 24, 22, 19, 17, 15, 13, 11, 9, 7, 4, 2. For 1893 the sequence would be: 27, 24, 22, 20, 18, ió, 14, 12, 10, 7, 5, 3. I' 1*0111 each of these series the last terms (29 and 30 respectively) are omitted, since these keunóngs fall within the same lunar months as their predecessors and are at the same time entirely invisible, as the moon does not appear at the end of the month. Thus the Achehnese omit this 13H1 keunöng in their computation, going on the theory that there is but one keunóng in each month, but that once in the year two keunóngs are separated by an interval doublé as long as that which ordinary separates these conjunctions. This specially long interval is called keunóng tanggile, an expression the origin of which is 110 longer known. Some connect it with tanggilaig the armadillo, asserting that this animal can only be cauglit during the period in question.
252
It is evident that the appellations of the remaining 12 keunóngs taken from the exact dates on which they fall in the lunar calendar, will differ üttle from year to year, though they will not be wholly identical. Thus the keunóng which in 1892 would be described as 26, would properly be called 27 in 1893 and so on. As the keunóngs are not by any means always capable of actual observation on account of the clouded state of the sky, the need is feit of a more fixed and regular arrangement, and one which can be easily remembered. For example, where actual observation is impossible there must be some means of knowing that it is now keunóng 21, because it was keunóng 23 in the preceding month.
neIekeAun6eng ^ therefore aSSUme ~ with full knowledge of the in. series. accuracy they are committing — that the figure representing the lunar date of each keunóng is less by exactly two than that of its predecessor. 1 hey invariably begin their series of keunóngs with 23, so that all keunóngs, according to their mode of expression fall on uneven dates. Of this they sometimes give a peculiar explanation. They assume that C hristian and other non-Mohammedan peoples also reckon by keunóngs, and that their keunóngs always fall on odd dates. Some choice must be made, and as neither of the two conduces to accuracy, the Achehnese have chosen the uneven, both because the sacred tradition recommends all true Moslims to distinguish themselves as far as possible in all matters from the unbelievers, and also because Allah is regarded as having a special preference for odd numbers '). lhe inaccuracy of this keunóng series (23, 21, 19, 17, 15, 13, n> 9> 7> 5> 3. ') hardly at all impairs the true purpose of the reckoning by keunóngs, i. e. the knowledge of the seasons. It even often happens that the keunóng is actually observed on a date which is theoretically incorrect, owing to the fact that the whole constellation is made the basis of the observation, instead of Antares or some other special star within it. And when the moon does not enter the Scorpion at all on the accepted date, but passes some little distance from it, this is ascri- bed to the errors consequent on the adoption of a series which dimi- nishes in too uniform a manner. They are thus content with the average agreement between what they actually observe in the heavens and their
| I) There | of Islam | «Allah | is uneven | (for he is One) | and he loveth |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the uneven". |
is a sacred tradition
keunóng series '). These periods can be distinguished by the numerals of their lunar dates and each of them constantly falls in the same season of the year. To every lunar year there are almost precisely 13 keunóngs. Thus by neglecting the invisible one, which would properly be called 28, 29 or 30, and which falls in the great interval between keunóngs 1 and 23, we get exactly one keunóng for each lunar month. This makes the calculation extremely easy, but it is obvious that as we advance we shall in time arrivé at a month in which the keunóng we obtain by observation falls on a different date from that which the series would lead us to expect. It is in fact at the end not of a lunar, but a solar year, that the keunóngs revert to nearly the same interval of time separating them from the preceding new moon. By continually counting ofi the Achehnese keunóng series with the months of the lunar year, we neglect the difference between the average number of keunóngs contained in a solar year (13.363) and the number contained in a lunar year (13 exactly). Thus about once in three years, — as often in fact as the keunóng phenomenon exhibits itself 14 times in a solar year, we must count one keunóng more than usual so as not to come into conflict with the calendar of the solar year which we find written on the heavens in terms of keunóngs. This necessary correction is made by the Achehnese in a purely Adjustmern empirical manner, for they have, at present at least, no proper basis of calculation whatever, — indeed they do not even understand the real meaning of the keunóng-calculation 2). They notice of course at certain times, that the keunóngs of their series move faster than the real ones. As the observed sequence also fails in other rcspects to correspond exactly with the principles on which their series is based, they can fix no stated time at which the divergence of the two beco- mes excessive and calls for correction; one observes it earlier, another later.
| heavens would | be as follows: | 28, 26, | 23, 21. 18, | 16, 13, 11, | 8, 6, 3, 1. | We have seen |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| that the series | does not | constant | for every | year, and if one | particular | star be taken |
| as the basis correct for | of the calculation, any one given | the series year. | supplied | by my informant | will never | be absolutely |
| tion of the | keunóng computation | is | actually based | on a different | year from | the ordinary |
| lunar year, sed it to be | entirely failed one composed | to grasp the of 360 days. | fact thas this | was really | the solar year, | and suppo- |
1) One of my informants told me that the series based on actual observation of the
2) The most expert of my informants, who clearly understood that the customary correc
remain
254
For instance, the fact tliat the pcriod knovvn as keunóng 13 does not properly terminate till the 15th Gf the month would not be held to justify a correction if there were an approximate conjunction of the moon and Scorpion on, say, the i₄tl>. But if it were seen that the heavens themselves persistently belied the sequence of the keunóng dates by two days or even more, then two consecutive months would be counted as keunóng 9 or keunóng 7 as the case might be, and the sequence would thus be rcctified. Thus the expression keunóng 23, as employed by the Achehnese, almost corresponds to our January, keunóng 21 to our 1-ebruary and so on. Each of these names suggests to them the recurrence of certain definite natural phenomena which are wont to exlubit themselves during the keunóng in question, of definite tasks of agriculture or navigation whose performance is limited to that time, and of certain feasts which are held therein. **The Acheh-**We shall now give as a specimen the list of keunónjrs for our vear ncse keunóng y _ ° J calendar for *"93 (^'ie Mohammedan 1310—11) according to Achchnese nomencla- ture, adding in each case the European and Mohammedan month in which the keunóng falls. It should be carefully bornc in mind that the correspondence of the European months witli the keunóngs as liere given holds good in other years as well, but that the Mohammedan months move one place lower down about every 3 years, the variation being corrected by applying the same keunóng to two successive months. We shall also add notes illustrative of the ideas of the Achehnese in regard to the various keunóngs. One or two of these require closer explanation which we shall give presently when dealing with the sub- jects of agriculture and fishery. I he Achehnese lore 011 the subject of the keunóngs of course holds good for all years alike. i893 ( 1310—11 of the Hijrah)
I. (keunóng dua plok lh.ee (23'! Jumada '1-akhir 1310) r: 12th January. 1 adi which lias not yet fully ripened at this keunóng is in danger, for a dry 1.. S. E. wind (etagen timu padang) usually blows during the niglits of keunóng 23, causing the husks to burst open and shaking out the grain. Although this keunóng belongs to the musém timu (N. E. Monsoon), when it is dangerous to sail from the capital to the
N. or E. coast, it contains a period of from 5 to 7 days during which the voyage can be undertaken without risk, a sort of interval in the N. E. Monsoon.
255
II. Keunong dua plok sa (2i*t Rajab 1310) — 8th February. In tliis keunong the padi-harvest generally takes place and the kanduri blang ("religious feast of the field") is held. This is also the time for the sowing or planting of intermediate crops (such as tobacco, vegetables etc.). In this or the following keunong begins the musém ludih blang ("season of the freedom of the land" i. e. when it is allowed to lie fallow); it is thus the end of the viusétn pichc or kot blang (the season when the land is "cooped" or closed). III. Keunong sikureuëng blaih (19^ Shacban 1310) = 8
V. Keunong limbng blaih (15th Shawwal 1310) = 2"Keunong Ihèë blaih (13H1 Dul-qacdah 1310) — 29A May₁). Fhis is the month in which ploughing is universally commenced. It marks the termination of the musém luaih blang (cf. II above) and the beginning of the musém pichë' or kot blang which lasts about 8 months.
VII. Keunong siblaïh (111,1 Dul-hidjah 1310) = 2f>th June. I11 this month or in one of the two which succeed it, the padi is sown. As we have seen above (p. 247) there are some
| to the year | 18935 in 1892 | this happened | in August. |
|---|
1) It is understood that the occurrence of two keunóngs iu the month
of May is peculiar
who make their choice of the first, second or third part of thi seedtime dependent on the relative brightness of the three star composing Orions belt (bintang Ihec). Just as the N. E. wind slumbers for 5—7 days in keunong 23 so does the S. VV. wind in this; during these days it is safe t( sail from the capital to the West Coast. VIII. Keunong sikureuëng (9H1 Muharram 1311) = 23biëng-köng wö, the people say. IX. Keunong tujnh (7H1 Safar 1311) = 20^ August. Sugar-cane planted in this month is supposed to give the same results as we have noted above in the case of keunong 17. Dogs ram bic at this period (ascë meuseutèt). The sun at noon reaches his greatest altitude for the second time (seunang ma/a urbë).
X. Keunong limbng (5th Rablc al-awwal 1311)= i6th September. In this keunong the musém timu (N. E. Monsoon) commences, and the second division of the seine-fishers (v. sub IV above) celebrate their kunduvi la r>t 01* sea kanduri.
XI. Keunong Uur (3Keunong sa (i*t Jumada '1-awwal) = 11 th November. 1 his keunong owes its sole recognition to the fact that it must necessarily follow on keunong 3 in order to maintain the tegular sequence. It is not observable, since sun and moon then botli stand in the Scorpion. The heavy rains commence in this keunong; a very popular comparison is that of any terrifying noise witli the rain of the keunöng sa (ban ujeuën keunong sa). I11 December the conjunction of Scorpion and the moon takes place just before the new moon (7th Dcc.; new moon, 8th Dec.). It is thus incapable of observation, and is besides separated by another keunöng (keunong sa) from the preceding new moon. It is thus excluded from the Achehnese reckoning. It is either cntirely disregarded, the period from the first of Jumada '1-awwal (or of some other month in other years) to the 23
257
11 odiicQ Keunong tanggtU (see p. 251 above). It forms part of the rainy season. As a subsidiary object of astromical or meteorological observation the Achehnese employ the Pleiades, the "group of seven stars" which they say now consists of six only, since one of the seven feil from the sky in olden times. There is a well-known Malay pantun which runs as follows: "Seven stars, six only now remain. "One lias fallen into Manjapahit. "Athirst is my body as though I had fever, "Increased still more by (other) sickness" '). These "Seven Stars" or "Many peopie" are well adapted occasionally to replace the Scorpion, as their place in the heavens is directly opposite that constellation and they are thus often visible when obser vation of Kala is rendered impossible through the scorpion being below the horizon, or difficult owing to a partially clouded sky. When the Pleiades set at about the same time as the sun, this is according to the Achehnese a sign of bad weather at sea. This happens in keunong 15, that is to say in May. When this constellation rises very early in the morning (as is the case in the beginning of July, i. e. about keunong 1 1 or 9), then the favourable time for the sowing of the padi lias begun. The conclusion of seedtime on the other hand is denoted by the Pleiades having already at early dawn reached an altitude which is defined as follows: if one who, at about 5 A. M„ points exactly in the direction of the Pleiades, lias to raise his arm so high that the bracelets rattle on his wrist, tlien seedtime is over. The Prophet of old forbade the heathen Arabs to say, "we have got rain from this or that constellation," as there lurks in this saying a depreciation of God's omnipotence. In like manner pious Achehnese are wont to admonish their fellow-countrymen against regarding the keunöngs as the cause of drought and rain. For all that they recognize that it is Allah's established custom to cause a definite state of the
0 Bintang tujoh tinggal anam Jat oh sabiji di Manjapahit. Aus tuboh sarasa de mam Lagi tambah déngan pényakit. 1 he last two lines, which contain the poet's meaning, form the complaint of a languish- ing lover.
>7
258
weather to recur after a definite number of keunóngs, and they generally guidc thcir conduct accordingly. 1 hcre is a very widespread belief that if it begins to rain in any month before the keunóng, such rain will not prove continuous, but will pass off in mere showers. Should it however rain heavily on the day after the keunóng (ujeucn ateüéh keuneunong "the rain above the conjunction ) then it is said that it will continue the whole month through.
§ 4- Agriculture, Tenths and Sugarcane Planting.
i hc seasons \ e have now become acquainted with the Achehnese year as in connection 4 J **with agricul-**nieasured by seasons. This we shall now pass once more in review in order to examine its relations with Achehnese agriculture. With this in view, let us commence with keunóng 21, (February of our year) when the rice harvest generally ends and the musém luaili blang begins. luai^blang"1 ^'iat 's k now 11 'n Acheh as blang is a network of adjoining ricc- fields, all those for instance which belong to one gampöng; — the open fields as we might call them. Lands which used to form rice-fields, but which have gradually been rendered too brackish for culti- vation by the invasion of salt water, are also called "blang." On the other hand, sawahs ') situated in swampy land are called simply paya (— "the swamp") or bucng in the specially swampy district known as the VII Mukims Huëng₂). In the lowlands, where the whole country has been reclaimed by man, uncultivated fields or plains are seldom to be seen, but in the highlands there are many such. These are called fadang, and belong ''ke the blang to definite gampöngs, though the rights which those who live in their vicinity can exercise in them, are not confined to a single gampöng, but extend over the whole mukim. The rice-fields (umbng) of the inhabitants of a given eampone are
| Public riglit | ||
|---|---|---|
| to the blang. | ,.,,. | ,. |
° r b thus usually to be found 111 the blang of that gampöng. When the rice-harvest is over, however, the whole blang becomes for the time more or less the commön property of the gampöng, and every one may let
| is the | Malay word | for rice-fields | used in the | Southern | palts of | the Peninsula | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| (Johor, is u | Malacca etc.) | and also in | Java. In Penang, | Province | Wellesley, | Kedah | etc. the word |
2) also means the terracing of sawahs made on the slopes of hills.
IJ Sawah
bündang(Translator). Bueng
his cattle loose to graze there. The ovvner of an umöng may indeed employ this land for intermediary crops and protect his plantations by running a fence round them. Should he neglect this last precaution, no attention will be paid to complaints on his part against persons whose cattle have destroyed his property. On the other hand the rule is very strict in regard to the depreda- tions of cattle from the moment the padi is sown until the harvest is complete. If an animal trespasses during that period on a ricefield, the owner of the latter lias the right to get rid of it without giving any warning, not by slaughtering it in the ritual manner, which would make it fit for food, but by running it through with a spear or cutting off one of ïts hoofs or the like. This happens pretty frequently and thus everyone must look carefully after his covvs and bullocks and buffaloes for the 8 months, more or less, during which "the land is closed'' musem pichc or kot blang. This harsh rule protects the padifields, which would otherwise be exposed to constant danger through carelessness or malice. (lardens and other tilled enclosures do not require sucli protection. If an animal is so wild as to cause actual damage to the fences, then the person aggrieved must first warn its owner. The latter can then easily take measures to prevent a repetition of the trespass; but should fail to do so, he too must expect that some angry cultivator will one day render the offending animal harmiess for good and all. 1 he musem luaih blang, the period of the year when the land stands Superstiti- open to men and cattle, is also the appointed time for the setting up u.nsincoiinec- of tomb-stones (pula bateë), for the burning of lime (tot gapu) and in 'a^ricu'uur!^ the highlands for the piercing of the ears of young girls (tob glunyuëng). It is generally believed that the rice of a whole field would be spoilt if tombstones were erected on the graves of departed relatives, or lime burnt in its neighbourhood, during the period between seedtime and harvest. It is also thouglit that the holes in the ears would never attain the width desired by the Achehnese women, if made during the time when the ground is "//arrow", or 'closed". In the beginning of the musém luaih blang every gampöng holds on The ticld- a day fixed by its authorities, its kanduri blang or field-feast. This kanduri- rehgious feast is intended to assure the continuance of the prosperity of the common land which lias just yielded its harvest. 1 he viands for this feast, sucli as rice, meat etc, are brought together
260
by voluntary contributions \ripe) on the part of the inhabitants of the gampöng. The men generally assemble in the fields in the afternoon; a malem consecrates with a prayer the kanduri, which then proceeds without further preliminaries. kan'duiT''^61 Besides rice cultivation, the "king of all breadwinning", pepper-planting is also honoured in Acheh by annual kanduris. The Achehnese account for the origin of pepper by a legend similar to that which is current among the Arabs in regard to cofiee. Some goats' dung sown by a saint grew up into the first trees which bore the delicious pro duct of Mokha; while the first pepper-plants grew from the seeds of kapok ') (panjoë) planted by an Achehnese saint. It is supposed to be for this reason that tliey are propagated by the planting of cuttings instead of sowing. In honour of this saint, called Teungku Lam Peuneu eun from the gampöng in the IX Mukims where his tomb is, the kanduri bungbng lada is annually celebrated on the Kast and West Coasts when the pepper blossoms. This however is not made the occasion of a public gathering, the feast being held separately in the house of each pepper-planter. Both for this reason and also because the pepper-plants do not all blossom at the same time, the period of these kanduris lasts as long as three months. The constituents of the feast are glutinous rice and its accessories. In a single house as much as a naleh 2) of this rice is prepared. ntermediary lo return to the muscm luaih blang. It is of course durin£ this period crops. ii. that the growing of intermediary crops takes place. These consist chiefly of jagöng (maize), vegetables and sugarcane. This last, if grown on a large scale, is planted in gardens to make sugar and molasses (meulisan). During the four months while the "land is open" the cane lias not time to reach its full growth. Thus canes planted in the rice-fields are cut, in whatever stage of growth tliey may be, just before the ploughing time, and consumed in their unmanufactured state. Ploughing. Keunóngs 15, 13 and 11, but especially the last two, are the time for the ploughing {meit u'c) of the rice-fields. A rectangular rice-field surrounded on all sides by little banks (ateuëng) is called umbng; it consists of one or more (though rarely
| contain a substance | resembling | cotton, | which is much | used in stuftïng | pillows etc. | The seeds |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| rescmble pepper | in size | and colour. ( |
1) Known to the Malays of the Peninsula as or The pods of this tree
2) See p. 201 above.
kabu-kabu kükabu.
Translator).
2ÖI
more than two) yo* A yö', which is also used to signify the yoke of a ploughing buffalo, is the surface measure generally used for rice-fields, but its precise area is not accurately defined. It is assumed that a yö' is really a piece of land requiring a naléli of seed, but if an umóng is smaller, so much as even to take only half a naléh, it is still called umóng siyö'= one yö' of rice-land. Measurements of 18 different yö's taken in the territory of the XXVI Mukims gave results varying from about 1800 to about 3500 square metres. I he padi-lands in Acheh proper, where not in swampy ground, are Dependence almost all what is called in J Java sawah tadahan, i. e. they J are fed bv j °• rice-nelus «h?i wet on rainwater which they catch and liold by means of the little banks lhe rain- which surround them '). Rivers and streams are very rarely used for ricecultivation in Acheh, though they generally are in Pidië. Ploughing is accompanied by 110 religious ceremony. All that is done Lucky days. is to select a favourable day for commencing the work; the 6'h, i2^1 22'id and 26>h of the month are considered the best. The 6ttl is especially lucky, unless it happens to fall on a Friday, which day it is pantang, or strictly forbidden by the adat, to devote to agricultural labour. On the West Coast Wednesday is pantang for pepper-planting as well as rice-cultivation. The ploughing of an umóng usually takes about 10 days, since after the first turning up of the ground it is allowed to rest for some days to kill the vveeds that have been uprooted. The Achehnese plough (laugay) (see pag. 262) lias an extremely long handle (gó) and a very short plough- share (ma/a). The buffalo is harnessed to it by means of a yoke (yö') which is connected witli the plough on the left side by a pole of arèn-wood (é/i), and on the right by a rope (talóë linggang or dham). The cries of objurgation and encouragement which the ploughman addresses to his buffalo are exceedingly loud and frequent, so that any one standing some little distance off might imagine them to proceed from a crowd. The method of sowing the padi is not the same in all places. The tabu Throughout a large part of the country the method known as tabu or duü'' tabu du'e is followed. This practically amounts to sowing out the seed (bijch) at once 011 the field, instead of in a nursery in the first instance.
| size which | varies to suit | the convenienee | of the owner. | There is here | however | a hard and | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| fast land | measure I sq. orlong | (= about | iacre) = 400 | sq. jumbas | = 400 X 144 | sq. feet. | |
| The orlong | and jumba are also | used as lineal | measures. | (Translator). |
1) It is the same in the Malay peninsula, where the banks (batas) surround fields of a
2Ó2
The following reasons are given for the more general popularity of this method. The erop being entirely dependent on the rain, there
PLOUGH (LANGAY) DRAWN BY A BUFFALO.
wou ld be the danger of the seedlings in the nursery dying just as they were ready to be planted out, if the rain delayed too long. The con- tinued absence of rain is less fatal to seedlings which do not require transplantation. It is further said that the padi in the tabu fields thrives as a rule much better than that which is first sown in the nursery even under favourable circumstances. In regard to this however we must not forget that where the Achehnese employ the nursery system, they plough the fields in a much more slovenly manner than they do in the case of the tabu lands. Under the tabu system more seed is required than in the nursery process; the proportion is according to the Achehnese 16—20: 12. Tabu ') 1'terally means to 'strew', "scatter abroad," and refers to the sowing of the erop, which takes place immediately after the ploughing.
1) Mal tabor «to scatter," "strew." (Translater).
The rules which govern its initiation are the same as in the case of the latter. 1 he work is begun — as all matters of importance should be in accordance with the tradition — with a béseumélah (= Arab. bismillah, "In the name of Allah"). The first handful of seed is scattered in a westerly direction, the point toward which the faithful turn their faces at the time of praycr. Alter the seed is strewn, the earth is raked over it with a largc wooden rake (chreuëh). This implement lias no liandle in the ccntre. A piece of wood is fixed vertically to either end and the tips of these two pieces are united by a tliird placed horizontally. This last is called the liandle (go), and is held by the driver, the rake being drawn by a butïulo harnessed to it in the same way as to the plough. Rice sown according to the tabu system is called fadé teunabu (scattered Pad' or 'atlier padi obtained through scattering) or padé dut ("sitting padi, i. e. sucli as does not require transplanting). About two or tliree months after sowing, the sprouting padi must be thinned out (l/iaïh, seumeulaïh) where it is too thick, and supplemented where it is sown too thin. I his task falls in or about keunóngs 5 and 3. I11 this method of sowing the extirpation of weeds (euuipbë) is botli tedious and trying. The ground is already dry at the time of the sowing and first sprouting of the seed, and so quickly becomes quite hard, rendering it impossible to get rid of the weeds without first turning up the soil in which they grow with a tukoy (a kind of small pachul or changkul). Ihe second method, which is adopted in a portion of the highlands, The pul; and occasionally in the lowlands, in the IV Mukims and with certain s}'stcm* modifications in swampy districts such as the VII Mukims Buëng, consist of two parts. I hese are 1". the preparation of a nursery bed (l/ieuë), ') in which the seed (bijè/i) is strewn (tabu) to obtain seedlings or padé seuneulöng. The padi obtained in this way is called padé peunula or planted padi in opposition to the above-named padé teunabu or sown padi.
| Malay | sln:ai. The method | lieve described | is that | ahvays | resorted to by the | Malays | in |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| wet rice cultivation. | Ihey | clear the | weeds out with | an implement | called | a tajak, | which |
| resembles a golfer s | lofting | iron with the | iron part | enormously | exaggerated | and the handle | |
| made shorter | and stouter. | The weeds | are left on | the ground | to rot and | form a kind | of |
| manure. Ihe ground at intervals | plants when of about | taken from the sümai are dibbled 6 inches. | (Translator). | with | the hand iato water-covered |
J)
Where the ground is swampy this method is generally followed, since if the seed vvere scattered in the swamp it would never mature! It is also adopted for convenience sake by some of those whose rice- fields are entirely dependent on the rain. In so doing they run the risk of the rain delaying its coming longer than usual, so that the padi cannot be transplanted from the nursery to the field at the proper time and is thus lost altogether. Accordingly they prepare their nurseries as late as possible. If all goes well, the subsequent task of weeding proves very easy; the weeds are simply pulled out with the hand (uruë/i) from the soft ground. They are thus saved the tedious work of the eumpoé. Others are compelled to adopt the seuneulong system owing to their being prevented by the force of circumstances from sowing (tabu) a long time before the rainy season. The sowing in the nursery is done in the same way as that in the field. Ihe interval between this sowing and the planting out depends of course on the rate of growth of the seedlings and the presence of water on the umong or rice-field. They endeavour if possible to plant out 011 the 44'h day after the sowing. With this we may compare the "removal of the oven" {bbih dapu) 44 days after child-birth and the setting up of the tombstone 44 days after death; indeed a special value is universally attached to that number. At l le commencement of the planting out of the padi, due regard
| ustoms | ' | |
|---|---|---|
| C d | 15 Pa d t0 | the su ersti |
tingout ' P ti°us usage of the peusijue or cooling, which hc padi. forms among the Achehnese the accompaniment of a whole host of important acts and undertakings. For the cooling of the umóng they employ leafy fronds of the pineung (betel-nut palm) and the plants called manè tnanoc and sisijiic '), which are tied together and soaked m flour and water [teupong taweuë), to besprinkle the centre of the rice-field. After this is done, the green besom is planted right in the middle of the umong. Some omit the sprinkling of flour and water, and simply plant the bundie of boughs in the centre. Both methods alike are known as puphön padé, the commencement or inauguration of the padi. They then begin planting from the centre outwards, after having
are
| I) 1 he naleueng | samtS and | bayam tuba, | employed | in other | ceremonies | of "cooling," |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| not used for | the rice-field. | Further notes | on cooling | will be found | in Chap. | 111 § 1. |
first of all uttered the indispensable biseumèlah ("In the name of Allah"). As they plant they follow the direction of the wind. The newly planted padi is supposed in this way to acquire the requisite slant, which is regarded as a guarantee of its shooting up straight and strong later on. The pula-season falls in keunóngs 5 and 3, or sometimes, when the rain is unusually late, in keunóng 1. but
| A custom | the meaning | of which | lias been | wholly | forgotten, | The inóng |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| which is still pretty | generally | followed, | is that | of planting | in a clump ' |
in the umong a handful of the seedlings remaining over in the nursery after the planting out is completed. This is called inötig fadé. The word inöng in modern Achehnese means "«roman," "female," but sundry expressions in the folk lore indicate that it must have also had in ancient times the signification of "mother." In all large herds of buffaloes or oxen and flocks of goats or poultry, there is usually one, tamer than the rest, which acts as leader of the flock. This is called the inong and is never sold or slaughtered, for that would bring ill-luck to the rest '). If a gold-washer finds in a stream a nugget somewhat resembling a living creature in shape, he keeps it as inong vieüih, convinced that it will bring him luck in his subsequent quest for gold. So also with those who prepare the famous healing draught made from the root of the peundang; when a piece of root of similar form is found it is called by them inong peundang. In like manner the inongpadé though it is of course unable to attain its proper grovvth owing to its being planted together in a clump, probably had the same significance for the growth of the padi, though it has now gradually faded from the popular mind. One is involuntarily reminded of the indung pare or "rice-mother" of the Sundanese, a truss of ripe padi taken at harvest time and fastened together in a peculiar way. It is placed in the padi-store underneath all the other trusses with sundry traditional ceremonies, and is not removed from its place till the lapse of time has made it undisting- uishable from the rest 2). ün swampy ground the tabu-system cannot be applied, and a nursery Kice in must be made in a somewhat drier spot close by. When time presses, swa">Py J 17 ground. the system is modified as follows. The seed is wetted and spread out
is called inong ffianb" tnano inong*
| being given to one | that has begun to lay. | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| of a great | tribe," |
1) Among fowls, one such as the above the 1} name
2) In ancient Achehnese poems a hero is sometimes in the sense of
called inong uchief'
266
on mats or plantain leaves, which are also kept wet, and in this way ït sprouts in two or thrce days. This sprouting seed is then spread out [raleuë or lar cue) on a comparatively dry piece of the swampy ground, which is called Iheiic lareuc or spreading nursery. To promote quick growth, a little water is occasionally let into the nursery, and as soon as the plants are big enough they are planted out in the swamp.
I.adangs. Ladangs (hill plantations) are opened in the forests of the highlands and especially of the East and West Coasts, in order to make the ground suitable for pepper-planting by a years rice-cultivation. Besides padi and pepper, sugarcane, champli (chilis), onions, etc. are planted m these ladangs. The padi-planting is here done by means of dibbling (tajo, teumajo) '). The trees are first felled and burned, and al' r00ts so b'g as to cause obstruction are cleared out in a rough and ready manner. Ihen, as soon as the ground lias been somewhat softened by the first rains, deep dibble-holes are made, some seed is thrown into each of them, and the padi is thinned out later if it grows too tliick. feemie. of A watch is kept all day long against various kinds of rice-birds (tulo, mine). Scarecrows rudely representing the human form (ureueng- "reueng or penyaköt) *) are hung up in the fields, or a cord is stretched and dry plantain leaves (on krusöng) hung on it and kept in motion by constant pulls.
Other enemies of the ripening rice are the field mouse (tikïïik) and the foul-smelling insect called geusöng{ walang sangit). Charms written 011 paper (ajeumat) are used as a defence against both the above; the papers are inserted in a hollow bamboo (bulö/i), which is fixed in the middle of the umóng. The prayers employed for these charms are called tangkay tiko/h and tcingkay geusbtig. Before the war, wild pig were rarely to be seen in the lowlands, owing to the absence of cover. In the highlands 011 the other hand, a
Malays
| them fuga/ ( Trans la /or). | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| fastened crosswise, | the longer | or upright | one being | into the ground. | On | this cross |
| some tattered | clothes are | hung and an old | hat placed | 011 top; the | whole when seen | at a |
| distance rudely | resembles | a man with | his arms extended. | Another | device is two hollow | |
| bambus or better | still, two empty | kerosine | tins hung | together on a post. | A cord fastened | |
| to one of these | and leading | to the hut | where the watcher | sits, enables | him to rattle | them |
| together, and | the birds are | scarcd away | by the noise. (Translater). |
1) Ihe plant hill-padi in the samc way. The process of dibbling is called by
2) '1 he commonest form of searecrow used by the Malays is composed of two sticks
driven
strict watch had to be maintained against these destructive intruders. The various kinds of caterpillars (ulat padé) which prey on padi do but little harm in the opinion of the Achehnese, provided that the rice is planted at the proper time. Against these there is no known remedy. If the padi looks sickly, abe'ê or ashes of burnt cow-dung is spread once or twice over the umóng. As we have seen, superstition plays its customary part in the rice-cultivation of the Achehnese; by no means, however, so important a part as in Java, where a description of the padi-planting constitutes a perfect treasury of folklore. Nyi Sri is not even known by name. We can at most point to the defunct custom of the inong padé as a ru diment of the ideas on which the worship of the rice-goddess in Java is based. To this we must add a custom prevailing in the highlands; when the rice is on the point of ripening (dara, marriageable, or rab bunténg, all but pregnant), various kinds of sweet meats are laid on the little bunds or banks surrounding the rice-plots. Apart from these trifles, the system of rice-cultivation in Acheh as compared with that in Java may be called, if not rational, at least rationalistic. The various tasks connected with the cultivation of rice are in the The la- lowlands performed by men only; in Pidië, Daya and some parts ofbourers- the highlands the planting out (pula) is left to the women, who work for a small daily wage (formerly i gupang=i21/, ets.). Persons of wealth and distinction, who possess many umóngs, invite crowds of people to assist them in the planting out, reaping anti threshing of the padi, and give them a good meal for their pains. This is called men- seuraya, and through such voluntary aid great tasks are easily com- pleted in a single day. Simpler folk get in their harvest with the help only of their own Theharvest households and a friend or two; the latter accept similar assistance in return. The padi when cut is collected in trusses (gasay) '), contain- ing as inuch as can be held in the open hand, each truss being tied up with padi-straw (ba padé). When the reaping is finished, the trusses are gathered on high ground close by, where there are some trees to give shade. Here they are formed into sheaves (puy) of a man's height,
| i) Gasay | properly | means what | one hand | (comp. | Jav. gangsa/ | can hold. | It lias |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| also meaning | of "odd,' | "not even." |
= five)
the trusses being spread out so as to form a circle, with their heads containing the gram meeting in the centre. During the days occupied in gathering the padi into sheaves. it has time to get a slight preli- minary drying. After this, mats are spread, on which is placed a certain quantity of padi to be threshed {Ikb, properly = "to stamp"). The threshing is done vvith the feet; in order to tread with greater force, the thresher supports himself on two sticks as he walks slowly over the mat. I he gram, when sufficiently threshed, is piled in a heap and then cleansed by rubbing between the hands (tinteuëng, teuminteucng), by which process the stalks, chaff and clirt are separated from the grain. Ihose who help to tread the corn usually receive as their sole reward a little tape, a fermented liquor prepared from rice. Ihe second cleansing of the unhusked rice is done with the help of the wind. When there is a good breeze, an euutpang (sack of plaited leaves) full of padi-grain is lifted on high and the grain strewn out so that the empty husks and particles of dirt are blown away. This operation is called peukruy or peuangèn. It takes place in or close by the padi-field, unless there happens to be no wind for a long time after the threshing, in which case it is done in the gampöng, the padi beng left for the time being uncleaned, and brought home in this state. d,Stiond AftCr tHC Cleansin2 the harvested grain is measured (sukat), and those >f the jakeuët. w'10 faithfully observe their religious duties set apart one-tenth of the whole asjakeuët(Ara.b.zakat). According to the law, which is pretty literaliy interpreted by the Shafi'ite school 011 this point, this tax should be distributed among 8 classes of persons. Let us now see what the practice is in Acheh in this respect. 1. 1 he amils of the books of the law, who are charged with the collection and distribution of the jakeuët, must receive no fixed share, but merely a fair recompense for their trouble. The amils are in Acheh represented by the teungkus of the meunasahs. The adat, however, confers on them no right to collect the jakeuët by force, so that measures of compulsion are resorted to only in districts where some ulama or other representative of religion has for the time being gained the upper hand, or where the chiefs retain a share of the j.ikeuët for themselves. As a rule the teungku waits for the share that is brought to his house, or has his portion fetched home from the rice-field if notice has been given him of the completion of the harvest.
A good teungku will, alter getting a handsome allowance for himself, willingly bestow a portion on claimants of the other classes mentioned below, on their presenting themselves before him; but as to this there is no fixed rule and many teungkus retain the whole for their own use. 2°. The poor and 30. the needy, or those in actual want, either come to the field themselves or visit the owners of the rice later 011 in the year and prefer their claims with becoming modesty. From the teungku they have little to hope for. In Acheh as in other Mohammedan countries, the devout poor only are regarded as having any real claim. Few such are to be found among vagrant beggars; while the teungkus and ulamas, who do as a rule observe their religious duties, can generally make themselves out to be "needy" in some sense or other. They are alvvays ready to advance this qualification, as it brings them a share of rice and other tliings. Thus "poor" and "needy" in this sense is usually synonymous with ulama or teungku.
Debtors who are unable to pay a debt incurred for a permissible
sr rather a meritorious purpose, seldom enjoy any share in thejakeuët 11 Acheh. The social conditions which might have given rise to such 1 separate class according to the spirit of the Mohammedan law, are :oo rare to be of any account ').Poor travellers (Ach. meusapi from the Arabic musafir) occa-
iionally get something from the jakeuët, either from the teungku in vhose meunasah they find temporary lodging or from people of the jampöngs who still have some padi left over, from which the tenth uis not yet been deducted. The numerous hajjis from Krinchi (Korinchi) vho in earlier times wandered from place to place in Acheh, were ïotable recipients of this dole. 6°. Assistance to slaves in their endeavours to purchase their freedom ïas seldom been given from the jakeuët in Acheh. Such an object is lifficult to fulfil where there is 110 organized collection and admin- stration of the tax, and besides the Achehnese have never been in he habit of entering into contracts of manumission with their slaves. 7n. Converts to Islam (Ach. miialah from the Arabic muallaf) are icver refused a share in the jakeuët if they present themselves as
| their nativc | places in | order to pursuc | their | studies, | are called | gharirn, | which properly |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| means debtors | in this special | sense. |
1) In some parts of Sumatra the students in religious schools, who have had to leave
claimants; indeed they go about begging through the whole country after the harvest. Such begging tours used to be the chief means of subsistence of the deserters from the Dutch forces in Acheh '). 8". The employment of part of the jakeuët for the "holy war" is called the " way of God" (sabll Allah). Where it cannot be so employed it should, according to some authorities, be devoted to works of uni- versal benefit to Mohammedans. This manner of employing it has (as we have seen when dealing with the political situation)2) played a prominent part during the last twenty vears. For the past ten years (1882—92) in particular, this portion of the jakeuët has been the mainstay of the constantly increasing power of the ulama party. According to the letter of the Shafi'ite law, the jakeuët, after deduc- tion of a suitable recompense for the first-mentioned class (the collectors and distributors), should be distributed in equal shares among the remaining classes, with this proviso, that a class not represented in the country should be regarded as non-existent. It is easy to conceive that such a method of distribution would present almost insurmountable difficulties 110 matter how well it were administered. We have only to think of the distinction between the classes of the "poor ' and the "needy," which is 110 more than legal hair-splitting, or the "travellers" and "debtors," who are creatures of chance and very unevenly distributed. Nowadays there is hardly any Mohammedan country in which this tax is systematically collected and equally distributed. The nations of Islam are subjected to all kinds of secular taxes which the religious law brands under the name of maks as impious institutions and which, in conflict with doctrine, have made the jakeuët appear as a voiuntary free offering. Ihus a Mohammedan, when he unstintingly sets apart his tenths of corn and gives them to one or other of the classes of persons who are cntitled to them under the religious law, is regarded as specially devout. As a rule it is the expounders of the law or so-called "priests" that profit most by such gifts. In the Archipelago there is one special
| person and | property, for | to slay or | plunder a convert | is regarded | as an act | of surpassing | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| wickedness. bring in their | For this reason taxes. | the sultans | and chiefs | used to employ | converts | to collect | and |
1) In addition to this privilege, the mu'alahs enjoy in Acheh great immunity both of
2) See above p. 176 et seq.
27 I
class of "priests" that enjoys most of the advantages of the zakat, owing to their original position as official administrators of the tax. From being its managers they have come to be practically its mono- polizers. It becomes thus quite easy to understand how the Achehnese ulamas succeeded in the course of the last few years in collecting as the share for the holy war (prang sabi) not merely the seventh part or as niuch more as was set free by the absence of the other classes, but the major part of the whole tax, and in founding with this war fund a priestly imperium in imperio. 'I he jakeuët of other objects liable to taxation under the law lias
| Jakeuot | of |
|---|---|
| C v andize. | 1 |
never been contributed with anything approaching to regularity, though ^ % f" /' much more in later times under the powerful incentive of the ulamas, merch than was formerly the case. Very few among the Achehnese are content to keep a considerable sum of gold or silver unproductive for a whole year at a time, out of respect for the prohibition of usury in the Mohammedan law. There are various devices for evading the spirit of the prohibition while out- wardly conforming to its letter; but there are besides no small number of people in Acheh, as well as in Arabia, who are ready to neglect the letter also. Some are however constrained by circumstances to retain sums of gold or silver money in their chests for as long as a year at a time. 1 hese sums should properly be liable to a jakeuët of 2 '/2%. Persons of means always have considerable quantities of gold and silver ornaments in their possession, which are also subject to the jakeuët. Not all of these by any means pay even a fraction of the tax, while tliose whose conscience is less elastic content themselves with disbursing a yearly sum which is far from representing the amount due '). Pay ment of the jakeuët 011 merchandize is just as rare as on gold and silver, while the tax on cattle is entirely disregarded in practice. The stamping or threshing of the padi generally takes place in Further Acheh directly after the harvest. Thus we do not find here as in lava '5eatment of .... J ' the harvested
| ... | . | ' the | harvested | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| r ce | ||||||||
| wont to deduct | under the | preiext of payment | of the | tax, a certain | sum from | the gold and | ||
| silver belonging | to their | subjects, and | held by them | for over | a year as pledges | or | ||
| (see | p. 116). This | sum however | they always | place in their | own pockets. |
1) Some chicfs who never pay jakeuët on their own stock of the prccious metais, are
padi-barns with piled-up sheaves, but little store houses under or close r'ce-
ha' fanchéng
272
beside the dvvelling-house'), in which the unhusked rice (padé) is keptJ). Husked nee (breuéh = Mal. bras) is kept inside the house in a sack (eumpang), but only enough for 3 or 4 days' use is so stored. When the rice is scooped out of the bag with the cocoanut-shcll used as a measure (kay), a little is always left in the shell and poured back each time so that the eumpang may never be entirely empty. This is the only one of all the numerous superstitions connected with the store of rice 3) observed by the people of Java, of which any tracé can be found in Acheh. \ hen the supply of breuch is exhausted, the fresh padi required is taken from the storehouse (kröng or brandang). It is first dried in the sun (adèë) and then thrown into the rice mortar (leusöng)4), a hollowed block of wood, in which stands the pestle (alèe), from which projects a horizontal lever (jeungki). 1 he husks are pounded off by setting this lever in motion at its further end so as to make the pestle rise and fall in the mortar. 1 he husked rice is then sifted by means of the winnowing basket (jeu te) r') the light husks falling out as it is toosed r'). I' °r making flour a smaller leusöng is used, with a hand pestle (aleé), and the fine flour is sifted through a sieve (ayd). In 1'idië and some of the dependencies of Acheh, especially it would seem in districts where irrigation canals had been constructed at the bellest of the rulers in ancient times, a rice tax (wast padé) was formerly levied for the Sultan. I his tax consisted of an amount of padi equal
1) See ante p. 36.
| are miniature | houses | raised on short | posts, the | made | of neatly | woven bertam. |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Such storehouses | are called | jelumpang. | (Translator). | |||
| the persons | by whora | it may be | taken out. Women | who do this | for instance | must wear |
| their lower | garment | only, and must | not do so during | menstruction. | There are also certain | |
| definite formulas | to be repeated | during | the act, etc. | etc. | ||
| (the jeungki | inentioned | above, Mal. | gandar) worked | with the foot, | the fulcrum | being nearer |
| to the far | end of the | lever so as to give greater | force to the | blow. Over | the far end of | |
| the lever | is placed a frame-work | consisting | of two | uprights and | a cross piece. | By this the |
| worker steadies | himself | while he alternately | steps | on and off the | lever, causing | it to rise |
| and fall. ( Translator). three sagis | 1 he Chinese of Acheh (see | in the Straits p. 2 above). | have universally | adopted this | nicthod of cleaning | rice. |
| ó) The and fro. | winnowing | is done by | alternately shaking | the basket | up and | down and to |
2) The Malay custom is the same as the Achehnese in this respect. Their padi-stores
3) Such as the rules prescribing fixed days for taking the rice out of the lumbung, and
4) The Malays use a similar mortar and pestle (iïsong and a/n) with a see-saw lever
5) I his is the winnowing-basket to which the Achehnese compare the shape of the
2) The Malay custom is the same as the Achehnese in this respect. Their padi-stores
walls being
LU inai usea as seeu in the area on which it was collected (lam sinaléh bijèh sinaleh padc). Besides the pepper-planting, which is carried 011 more in the depen-Sugar-canc dencies than in Acheh proper, there is also considerable sugar-canc cultivation-cultivation. The form of refreshment most generally sought by those who frequent the market in Acheh is the juice which they suck from the sugar-cane, or drink after it lias been extracted therefrom by means of a very primitive sort of press. The expression for «a douceur" 111 Acheh is «money to buy cane-juice" (ngon bloê ié tcubcë). The giver of a feast to which many onlookers come in addition to the guests, occasionally distributes pieces of sugarcane among them, and the traveller uses it to refresh lumself whcn onajourney. Sugar (sa/ca) or the molasses (meulisau) made from inferior cane is an indispensable ingrediënt in all kinds of dainties and sweetmeats. Ihe cane (teubèc) is, as wc have seen, planted 011 the umóngs as a second erop, only to be cut when half-grown and used without further preparation. The truc cane cultivation takes place in separate gardens enclosed with fences. !• 10111 keunóng 23 (January) begins the preparation of the ground with the plough; the planting season commences at keunóng 19, but occasionally in other months also, just after the rice-harvest. Hut 110 planting is done in keunóngs 17—7, since the cane if planted tlicn tuins out srb/i, i. e. yields blossom but 110 juice. For planting purposes, the canes are divided into scctions with two limbs (atot) liaving thus three "articulations." They attain their full growth 111 about a ycar. They are then cut down, and sugar is manufactured from them in the very primitive Achehnese sugar mills, which are similar to those found in Bantën, the highlands of Padang and other places '). The owners of sugarcane plantations do not all possess sugar-mills Sugar mills (wéng), but borrow them, or rather the parts of which they are com- posed, from onc another. When not in use they are kept under the house with all the other lumber. The borrower or owner takes these separate portions to liis cane- plantation, and there puts the mill together in a hut (jambö) constructed expressly for the purpose.
| 1 | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 18 |
1) The Malays of the Peninsula use a similar which they call
machine, kilam' pïnvUit (Translator). •
2/4
1 hc structurc of the machine is as follows. On a massive wooden basis are placed (sidc by side) two upright circular shafts (lueng).
SUGAR-CANE MIIX (\VKNO).
These are held in position by two horizontal bars {blida) fixed at a ceitain elevation. I hc extremities of these bars are supported 011 upright pillars (tamch blida). Above the bars both shafts are provided witli teeth which bitc on onc another so as to impart tlic rotatory motion of the onc to the other. Onc of the shafts (the tvéng agam) or "male" wéng is longcr than the otlier {weng inong), the "fcmale", so as to allow of the curved beam ('wbë-woc) bcing attachcd to the formcr. I his beam, which bends downwards, is pulled round and round by a buffalo, and must of course hang clcar of the othcr shaft as the lattcr would otherwise impede its movement. At the point where the canes are introduced between the two shafts so as to squeeze out the juice, are two parallel strips of wood placed horizontally round the shafts. These are called the comb (sut'i), and seivc to keep the canes, which are pushcd in between them, straight
in their passage between the shafts. As the cane is squeezed between the revolving shafts the juice falls into a channel (chara) in the base between the shafts, and passes thence into an earthenware pot (pasn). I r°m the juice thus obtained the sugar or molasses is made by boihng. Molasses is chiefly manufactured in the XXII Mukims, the VII Mukims Buëng and the IV Mukims, since in these places the cane is of inferior quality. I hc cane-gardens are manured with cow-dung. The same preventive is adopted against disease in the cane as against disease in the padi viz. sprcading burnt cow-dung (abèc) over the field. Aren sugar {saka jo) is also made in Acheh and cotnmands a higher price than cane-sugar; but the manufacture of sugar from the sap of the cocoa-nut tree seems to be unknown.
S 5. Navigation and Fisheries.
Before deahng with the occupation, acquisition and transfer of land, we shall first make a few remarks on the subject of navigation and fishery.' In our synopsis of the keunóngs we saw that the voyage from the capital to the West Coast may be made without danger in Achehnese vessels (prahos and sampans) from keunóng 5 — 17, and to the North and East Coast during the rest of the year, i. e. from keunóng 17-5; also that there occur intervals of from 5 to 7 days in the prevalence of the N. E. and S. W. monsoons. Steamers now run to the principal ports at all seasons, but in former times the Achehnese sailors and traders used to set a high value on the knowledge of the exact times when these intervals take place. They assert that there are certain signs by which they can be ascertained cach year, but that there are °nly a few who possess the requisite knowledge. The interval in keunóng 11 was considered as especially advant- ageous to those who could predict its coming beforehand. In the rantós, the wild and inhospitable districts on the West Coast which separate the larger settlements from one another and are the field of the pepper- planters' labours, nothing could be obtained during the S. W. monsoon. Whoever succeeded in conveying thither a cargo of pots and pans (kanèt-blangbng) clothing, salt, sugar and molasses, was certain to return home with a handsome profit. The interval in the N. E. monsoon was
2 76
of lcss impoitance, since thcrc is a better supply of all necessaries 011 the North and East Coasts. Fishing goes on all the year round, and in the lowlands many sup port life by this employment. Principal A distinction is drawn between eungkïït darat "land-fish," which live kinds of fish.. m the swamps and the padi-fields when covered with water, eungkot kruëng, fish found in rivers and salt water creeks, and eungköt hiöt or sea-fish. Some kinds of fish belong to two of these classes, as they are sometimes to be found in the sea, and sometimes in the creeks and rivers. In fresh-water rivers {kruëng ie tabeuë) there is but little fishing, owing to the rapidity of the streani; for the fisherman of Acheh proper kruëng gencrally means kruëng ië masén or salt water crcek. Varietics of The means by which their capture is effected differ with the seasons ïshing tackle. of the year and also with the haunts and habits of the different fish. The "landfish" ') are caught with a rod (kawé) or fish-trap {bubëë)).* In the rice-fields these traps are placed in the openings in the bunds. I hey are fastened in a horizontal position to a vertical stake (jeuneulbng) fixed in the ground. Inside the trap are set at intervals a number of little subsidiary traps consisting of circular rows of thin strips of bamboo. 1 hese stand wide open near the moutli (babah) of the trap, but close in together at its closed end (punggöng). These obstacles open readily as the fish enter and then resume their former position by their own elasticity and bar their exit. A simpier sort of fishing trap is the geuneugbn 3), identical with that of which Newbold *) says: " 1' ish are often taken in shallows and marshes by means of a conical basket epen at the top and bottotn. The broad end is placed suddenly on the mud vvhere they are supposed to lie; the hand introduced at the narrow upper part of the cone and the ensnared fish taken out." Fishponds (tnón eungkbt) are also made in the rice-fields. Deep holes are dug out, and in these are placed bits of wood, twigs, leaves etc. to attract the fish thither. Then the entrance is blocked, the pond is baled out and the fish extracted.
baché, scungketruit, seupat,
| 1 | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| in the same | way. ( |
1) The following are some of the names of the "land-fish":,
2) This is the same as the commonest form of Malay fishing-trap, the bubu^ and is used
3) The Malay
4) liiitish settlements in the Straits of Malacca II : i8S.
sungïè\ anen seusiah, gro.
Translalor). sïrkap.
277
In the salt-water creeks and rivers [) (especially the former) the casting net (jeuë) and the nyarèng are employee!. The latter is a square net, with which a piece of water is barricaded as it were with a wall, so that the fish get entangled in its meshes as they try to pass through. Birds are caught in the same manner in the open country, and the net used to catch them bears the same name. To ensure a good catcli with the nets, two men are sometimes posted one at eacli side of the stream to drive the fish from some distance oft. I he two hold between them a long rattan or pliant trailer which they move up and down in the water, and the fish, frightened at the noise, dart away towards the net. Driving of tliis sort is called meuurèt. Small seines (pukat) are also employed for catching fish in the creeks and rivers. In shoal water both in the swamps and in the creeks and rivers, fish are sometimes caught with purse-nets, some of larger size called nyab and some smaller, ali, the latter being used especially to catch cray- fish, crabs and prawns. These ali are let down to the number of fifty at a time; they sink to the bottom by means of the lead with which they are weighted in the centre, but remain under the control of the fisherman by means of a rope, to which a float is attached. 1 he neu/wuns₂) and Ihovis fulfil the same functions in the creeks and rivers as the fish-ponds in the rice-fields. 1 he ncuhetin is a kind of pond made by piercing the bund that runs alongside a creek or river by a pipe (g>~<»ig-grong) and receiving the water that pours through tliis in a pit excavated for the purpose. This is then made an attractive abode for fish by placing in it bitsofwood, leaves etc. The neuheun is protected from the raids of net-fishers by planting thorny bushes or bamboo stakes in them and also by keeping watch over them at night. The fish is caught with a casting-net. The Ihom is formed by collecting a mass of heavy timber in a deep portion of the river when the water is low, and surrounding it with stakes driven into the river-bed in order to prevent it from being
| geureuda|ik,in tanda | (cnrtain | fish are known | by the generic | name | of ikan), | mirah ma/a, | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| /angkirdng, ikan | /imbn, ki/ang, | chabéh, ikan | kawé/, grbt-gro/. The | ttdeuéng (prawn), | as well | ||
| as the small | kinds | among those | just enumerated, | are caught | with | the casting-net | or fish- |
| trap. With | the latter | are also caught | the deu/, udenëug | keu/eb, sridéng | and ui | boh. | |
| means that | in which | the process | of stopping | or catching | is performed. |
1) The following are some of the kruëng-fish: Uantu\ mulöïh, raptueng, kadra, grapeè,
2) This is an abhreviation teuneuheun from /heun = to stop, to catch, and thus properly
278
ccuricu dway Dy the strcam. lhe fish naturally collect on the upper
side of this dam. After a month or two the time comes for emptying the Ihom (pbh Ihom). When the water is low the space occupied by the timber is enclosed with jang. One piece (kra) of jang consists of a screen of split bamboos (kta) from 22'/2 feet to 45 feet in lengtli, the bamboos being fastened together much in the same way as "chicks" or sun-screens used in this country. This wall of jangs fastened together so as to cover the required space, is fixed lound stakes set in the river bed, so that the bamboo screen stands upright to a height of from 4' 6" to 9'. The dam of timber within the space thus enclosed is then removed, and the fish so hemmed in are caught with nets [jciic, nyab). Jangs are also used for catching fish in aluës, the branches or back- waters of creeks or rivers which are separated from the latter by comparatively dry spots when the water is low. While the water is still high, the aluë is marked off on both sides with rows of jangs, the junction of the alue with the river being enclosed by a jang (ntbng jang) set between the extremities of these side walls and almost circular 111 shape, with one opening leading into the aluë. When the water subsides, the fish in the *alm-*are debarred from returning to the river (or creek) by the accustomed way; the only door that is open to them leads riglit into the circular jang, but on passing through this opening they are caged in and can find 110 means of exit. The fishermen then pull the fish out of this cage with the hand or with scoop-nets. 1 he places where this method of fishing is practised are usually marked by banks thrown up 011 either side. The implements used for fishing in the sea bear the same names as those employed in the kruëngs, but of course difler somewhat from the latter in size and make. Fishing from boats (ja/os or prahus) lying at anclior is carried 011 by means of an ordinary sea-line 2) (kawé la'ót) without a float (lampöng) aut furnished with a lead (bateil kawé). lhe towing-line (kawe hui' or kawé tunda) is towed behind vessels iailing swiftly before the wind. For this a bunch of white chicken's eathers :i) is used as an artificial bait. These are fastened round the line
purpose of a "lucky
279
above the liook (matei kawc) in such a way that they can move back- wards and forwards. Some kinds of fish mistake tliis bunch of feathers for food, and when thcy bitc tlicy find themselves caught fast on the hook through the motion of the prahö, almost before they have dis- covered their mistake. Another kind is the kawé ranggöng'), a line composed of two parts united by an implement (ranggöng) made of hom, and used for fishing when at anchor. 1 he sea fisli-trap (bubeë la of) is almost hemispherical in form, witli a closed bottoni and an opening in the side. Small fish can swim in and out through the interstices of the side. Iliey seek refuge in the trap froni the large fish which pursue tliem, but the latter follow tliem in through the opening. I luis the small ones escape, but the big ones remain behind, since the aperture, as in all such traps, gives them no chance of getting out once thcy have entered. Ihe casting-net *{jeu'c)*J) is used for fishing for prawns [mieiicng) close to the shore and sevcral species of fish, such as the azcö from which dried fish or kareng is made, and the budueng, sumbbc and tangkiröng. 1 he budueng and stunböc are also caught witli the nyarèng as well as the ikan //tam and the tneunèng. At sea of course the nyaréng cannot be employed, as in the creeks and rivers, as a wall wherewith to obstruct a portion of the waterway for the fish. These nets are simply thrown loosely into the water and hauled in and examined after a few moments to see if any of the denizens of the deep may have become entangled in the meshes. In the pursuit of the various kinds of fishery which we have so far described there is no lack of peculiar customs, many of which are
| (mano' mcutuah). | The | experts (connoisseurs | in cockfighting) distinguish | these by the shape | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| of the scales | on their feet. | ||||||
| Fo" further 1892 liijlage | information I, N°. 12. | as to the kawc | hui see | Notulen Jlat. | Genootschap | for i» | March |
| 1'adang De geschiedenis | van prinses | lia/kis by I). Certh | van | Wijk, p. 70, NO. 46. | |||
| a circular | with very | fine meshes | and is weighted | all round | the edges | with small pieces | |
| of lead. The fisher | folds | the net neatly | into a small | compass, | and then, | holding it in one | |
| hand, throws | it forward | with great | dexterity so that | it spreads | in the air and falls evenly | ||
| on the water. | The weighted | edges | sink slowly down | leaving | the middle | in the form of a | |
| bag. This | drawn | in and the | prawns etc. | removed from the net. It is a very prctty | |||
| sight to see a skilful | jala-fisher | manipulate | lus net. | (Translator). |
1) See Notulen Ka tav. Genootschap for ist March 1892 Bijlage I, N'«. 12, and as regards
2) The eall their casting net ja/a (etymologically the equivalent of jeuc). It is
Malays net
is gently
purely superstitions. Superstition, however, plays a much more important part in the fishing with the pukat or scine-net. I ishing with the pukat in the open sea (tnupayang) is only carried on for a small part of the ycar. It requires the coöperation of two sampans, and it is only the j«;v-fish ') that is caught in this manner. Various kinds of fish, great and small, are however caught inshore with the pukat. One end of the net is made fast on shore while the other is taken out to sea in a sampan and then brought ashore again, the object being to make a big haul of fish with the gigantic bags forming the centre of the net which are thus dragged through a con- siderable tract of water. 'I he men (awa') who form the crew of a sampan 2)are subject to the orders of a master (pawang), who is also usually the owner of the vessel and its belongings. Pukat-fishing presupposes great skill and especially sundry sorts of èleumec (= ilmu) or knowledge of magie lore, principally consisting of formulas which must be recited at the proper time in order to resist malignant influences by sea and to attract the fish. Just as in hunting the secrets of the forest must be known to the pawang rusa, the indispensable "master" of every deer-drive, who is alone able to exorcise wood-spirits, to take hees' nests froni the trees unharmed, etc., so must the pawang pukat know all the influences that prevail beneath the sea, and be armed against them so far as may be neccssary. Some of the rules which have to be observed are universally known, as for instance that which forbids fishing with the pukat on a Friday under any pretext. Other methods of catching fish may be practised with impunity on this day, but pukat-fishing is prohibited as strictly as ploughing '). Ihus on Fridays the pawang and his crew inay be seen lounging about in their best clothes. 1 here are besides a numbcr of words which cannot be uttered with out danger at sea. This holds good for other fishermen as wcll as the
| fish: kase, | rapeueng., | kadra, gereupök, | mirah | mata, gabuë, | rambeuë., brué' | mata, some |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| kinds of yee, ttunga, grapte, | beureulang, | brachuëng, | bubara, tuih, | parol, taudö', | sisé\ ikan | |
| tanda, ambu-ambu, or dried fish | alti-a/u, is made. | taleuëng, | biléh. Of the last-named | sort (as of the awd) | karen - | |
| Batavian Society; | sce Notulen | Katar. | Genootschap for March | ist 1892. Bijlage | I, Nos 1 & 2. |
1) The following are besides those already mentioned, some of the cliief kinds of sea-
2) A model of a sampan pukat with its belongings is to be found in the museum of the
3) Vide sup. p. 261.
puKat-nsners, and in some degree for all scafaring men. Such unwritten pantangs have a very widespread range. In Java there are many such which are observed in the chase of wild animals. In the neigh- bourhood of the ancient Galuh there are places where the Mohammedan confession of faith must not be uttered while fishing, for fear of dis- turbing the spirits of the ancient heathen kingdom! Even in Hadramaut the chase is the subject of a certain amount of heathenish lore '), in which prohibitions of forms of speech play a great part, so that a huntsman or even the friend of one is regardcd as a person of ill repute. Among the fishermen on the North coast of Java whole lists of words can be collected which are prohibited at sea and have to be replaced by others. This is also the case to some extent among the scafaring folk of Acheh. For instance, those at sea must not call a mountain by its proper name, gunong, lest waves as high as mountains should overwhelm their vessel; the euphemism employed is tanoh manyang high ground. Gaja/i, the elephant, is called byhis nicknamepb matrak'1). If the fisherman wishes to say that something is "ready," he must not use the ordinary word "Iheuëh," because this lias also the meaning of "free' or "loose," and its use might give the imprisoned fish a chancc of escaping; accordingly the less dangerous synonym leungka is employed. If he wants to speak of a rope being cast off, he uses in place of Iheu'ch its synonym leupaih; so too lob "to pass under something by stooping", and several other words have to be replaced by synonyms or paraphrases by those who are fishing or on a voyage. T° tllls sort of universal lore must be added the special pukat mysteries. I he atv a's obey the pawang not only because they are his hired servants, but also because he alone possesses this special knowledge. 1 he pawang and his crew are too busy with the management of their boat and nets to spare time to bring the fish to market them-
- \ TL.. i ....
| the chase, | must not perform the morning | prayers obligatory | on all Mohammedans, | for fear | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| misfortune | should befall them or they should | at least be unlucky | in their pursuit of game. | |||
| 1 he | Malays when | at sea will | tolerate no allusion | to the elephant. | They | have other |
| curious | pantang rules, | the meaning | and origin of which is no longer | known; | for instance | |
| it is forbidden | to cast charred wood | into the sea, and the washings | of any vessel | used for | ||
| cooking | must first be | poured into | another vessel | before they | are thrown | overboard. |
| Sce also Clifford's ( Translater). | In Court | and Kampong | pp. | and Skcat's Malay Magie p. | 314 15. |
1) Thus it is a prevalent superstition in that country that huntsman when starting for
2)
147—48
282
selves. Thus they are obligcd to have recourse to middlemen, and these fish-buyers are called mugè. Fish-dealers on a small scale divide among them the catch of one sampan if it be a big one, for they are their own coolies, and thus cannot carry more than a single basket a-piece. Ihose vvho deal on a larger scale have lesser dealers under them, and give cacli of them for sale a portion of the catch of the one or two sampans vvith which they have a fixed agreement. As soon as the catch lias been landed, the pawang discusses the price of the fish with his contract buyer. The latter tells him that the market is at present greatly overcrowded, and that he therefore dares not promise more than such and such a price, which is as a matter of fact far below the expectations of the master of the fishing-boat. He can at any time determine his contract with the mugè, but this profits him nothing, for he wants to sell his fish at once while fresh and must employ his usual dealer or else enter into protracted negoci- ations with a new one. The pawangs have learnt by experience that there is 110 advantage in such changes, as it simply means getting out of the frying-pan into the fire. Accordingly, most pawangs spend a considerable portion of their time on land in squabbling with their buyers, the more so as they know that the verbal agreement as to price, which they make immediately after landing, is by no means always final. The dealer should properly retain as his commission the differen.ee between the price agreed on and what he succeeds in making by driving hard bargains in the market. When he returns from the market, however, he often declares that the sum agreed on is too high, and compels the pawang to content himself with much less: ' addinsr o that he has not earned a single ping for himself. Just as the pawang deals with a hcad mugè or fish-dealer, so the latter contracts with sub-dealers, but he does not let himself be cheated so much by them since he is of the same trade. Distribution The mugès are not the only doubtful friends who view with an interested eye the industry of the pawang and his crew and await their coming with impatience on shore. A numbcr of onlookers from the gampöngs along the coast come down to meet them, and unless the catch has been too paltry, these have a right in accordance with the adat to a present of fish. Nor is it merely respect for the adat that causes the pawangs to distribute these presents. 1 hey know that if they did not observe this
custom, many an evil eyc would rest on their vcsscl and their pukat, with the result tliat much ill-luck would attend their next venture, for many of the onlookers would exhaust all their magie arts to cause the fish to be driven out to sea, the nets to be torn and the like. So the pawang lias secret hostility to dread from the general mass Share ..fthe of the onlookers if he does not keep them in good humour; but from chiefs' the rakans or followers of the territorial chiefs he must expect open eninity, should he fail to set apart for them a gift suitable to their rank. Woe to the pawang who falls short in this respect! He must expect a punishment like that visited on the planter who has incurred the displeasure of his ulèëbalang and whose land is placed under a ban (langgch) ') by the latter. His sampan and pukat are placed under the ban for a month or sometimes even for an unlimited period, and he thus finds himself deprived of his livelihood, and can only get the ban removed by appeasing the ulèëbalang with a money present, which may in fact be called a fine. Where his sin of omission is trifling, so as merely to cause the wife of the ulèëbalang to complain to her lord that his conti ibution of fish is so small as to disappoint her house- keeping expectations, he is punished indirectly. A couple of rakans go down to the market, and having ascertained which of the buyers has in his charge the fish of the defaulting pawang, take from him so much as they consider "fair. 1 he buyer is then justified in paying to the pawang less than he had promised him. Hovv oppressive this tax may be to the pawang may be scen, for instance, at Ulèë Lheuë (Olehheh), where the pukat-fishermen have to deal with at least three chiefs, the ulèëbalang Teuku Nè, his banta 2) Teuku Sandang and Raja Itam, a son of a deceased Teuku Nè. These three always enforce their demands for fish and punish defaulters with the ban. 1 here are, besides, other smaller dignitaries whom the pawang cannot continually overlook without being punished in the end. I he pawangs have occasionally trade disputes with one another, which chiefly arise from their fishing in each others' neighbourhood. 1 hese are generally settled by the headman of the pawang guild, him self also a pawang, who bears the title of panglima and ovves his office to the choice of his fellows of the guild with the approval of the territorial chief. The sphere of action of a panglima is called HM (= Malay
1) Sec p. 115 above.
2) See p. 92 above.
Mok), which properly means "bay"; these "bays" are separated from one another by boundary marks. At ordinary times the only meaning of this division is that the pawangs of a given lliö' use that portion of the foreshore for laying up and repairing their sampans, and as the basis for their fishing trips. The right to catch fish in the water facing that strip of coast is open to the pawangs of other Ihö's just as much as to them, nor is it regarded as an offence for one of these others to land in their territory. The boundary however has its chief significance at the kanduri la'öt, which each lhö' holds annually to invoke God's blessing on the labours of its pawangs J The kanduri The time chosen for this kanduri (which is supposed to bring to the pukat-fishers the same good luck as the kanduri blang ') does to the planters) is that when the fishery enjoys a compulsory holiday owing to the rough weather i. e. the changes of the N. E. and S. W. monsoon. Thus the foreshore at Ulèe Lheuë is divided for the pukat fishermen into two lhö's, one of which gives its religious feast in keunóng 17 at the beginning of the S. W. Monsoon (about April), and the other in keunóng 5, at the beginning of the N. E. Monsoon (about September). 1 he pawangs of the lhö' bear the expenses of the feast, which is on a considerable scale, but they can claim a contribution of about four dollars from each of their contract buyers. 1 he day for the feast is fixed by the panglima, who invites to it .til the pawangs and their crews, the ulèëbalang and the gampöng authorities (keuchi's, teungkus and ureuëng tulia) of his mukim. Ihat the feast is luxurious according to Achehnese ideas may be judged from the fact that a buffalo is always slaughtercd for it. Before proceeding to attack the good cheer which iü spread 011 the shorc of the lhö which gives the feast, the latter is consecrated by like (Arab. t/ikr), the repetition of psalms of praise (sculaweuït) in honour of the li opliet, or Jiatam, i. e. the recitation in chorus of portions of the Quran by the teungkus and leubès present. During the seven days following the kanduri, it is high festival for the fish in that lhö'; for in this weck neither the pawangs belonging to that " bay nor their colleagues from neighbouring parts may fish in the waters fronting that division 2).
| § 6. Rights | on Land and Water. | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| lo supplement | what precedes, | we shall now | make a few remarks 011 | |||
| the origin, transfer | and forfeiture | of the possession | of land and certain | |||
| rights over | waters containing fish. | |||||
| Kcal | primary | jungle (rimba) | suitable | for clearing | is scarcely | to be |
| niet with | anywhere | in the | lowlands, | though there | is plenty | of it in |
| the highlands. | llere | jungle | produce of every | kind, timber, | damar, gëtah, | |
| rattan, | wild fruits, | honey | etc., may | by all alike free and | ||
| without | any supervision; | nor is it | to | the inhabitants | of the | |
| surrounding | country, | since | the rimba | is attached | to 110 particular | |
| gampöng | or mukim. | The | chase is also entirely | free. The | only tax | |
| the usual | impost | levied by the | ulèëbalang | at the | river mouth | (kuala) |
| which all must pass, 011 the products collected | in the jungle and brought | |||||
| down | for export. | \Y liere however | a strip | of virgin forest | more closely | |
| adjoins | a definite | tract of inhabited | the | highland | chiefs take | |
| toll of | the jungle | products | gathered | in their territory, | the tax | being |
| levied previous | to sale. | |||||
| Special | rights | to all that | the rimba | contains | arise only | through |
| clearing; | a fact which | plainly shows | the country | is too extensive | ||
| for lts inhabitants. | The opening | of cleared | plantations | [ladang) gives | ||
| rise to rights | of occupation, | the duration | of which | is measured | by that | |
| of the existence | of the ladangs, | which | varies greatly | according | to cir- | |
| cumstances. | On these | roughly | cleared | rice and | maize are planted | |
| foi fiom | one to | three years; | vegetables | of various | kinds, | betel-nut, |
| cocoanut | trees or otlier | fruit trees for a much | longer | period. | ||
| llic sole | restriction | 011 clearing | consists | in this, | that whoever | wishes |
| to open | ladangs, | gardens | ( | wet rice-fields (umong) | in the | |
| iminediate | neighbourhood | of land which already | lias an owner or occupier, | |||
| must first | obtain | the permission | of the chief of the territory | to which | ||
| this land | belongs. | \ here a number | of persons | wish to join in under- | ||
| taking | a considerable | clearing, | tliey must obtain | the permission | of the | |
| chief in | whose country | they | wish to settle, | but | this permission | refers |
| more to of the forest land. | their immigration | into his territory | than | to their | occupation | |
| 1 lie right | to a | given ladang | is lost | as soon | as all tracés | of the |
| clearing | have disappeared, | just as it originated | when the ground | was | ||
| first marked | out f01 clearing. |
be collected limited is
country, Rights over that ladanCs-
lands
Rice-fields and gardens always bclong to onc particular gampöng, and thus it is to the gampöng authorities that recourse is had in the lirst instance to maintain the rights of the owners and to compel them to observe their obligations. Thepadang. Where, as in the Tunöng, the land lias not been taken entirely into cultivation, there is annexed to each gampöng, in addition to the **blang* or area composed of umóngs or padi-fields, another area (padang) 011 which there is no cultivation. All the inhabitants of a mukim have a right to open umöngs on an unoccupied padang, situated within that mukim, which umöngs thenceforward become their property; but this privilege is seldom availed of. It is more usual to open gardens on the padang, but this gives a right to what is planted only and not to the ground itself. The only padang in the neighbourhood of the capital was a small tract near Panté Pira'. Elsewhere in the lowlands it is rarely to be met with. Wakeuëh Ownership of the trees etc. planted, exclusive of ownership of the lands.. 1 ground, is not confined to the padangs; it is also to be met with in the case of what are called wakeuëh lands, for instance those which extend to the depth of seven great fathoms (deupa meunara) 011 either side of the river, and which used to be at the disposal of the raja '). 1'01 feiture All right to possession of land is lost by abandonment or complete of acquired 1 rights over neglect, sucli as causes all traces of clearing to disappear. This of course happens most often in the case of ladangs, but seldom in tluit of wet rice-fields, gardens or courtyards. With respect to the last three even the theory of forfeiture is not entirely accepted by the people. So long as it is remembered that the umöng of X or the lampöïh of Y lay in a certain place, the common folk are generally inclined to recognize unconditionally the rights of X or Y or their successors in title when- ever they choose to assert them. It is especially the covetous ulèëbalangs who in their own interest declare such lands forfeit after they have been for a long time without a master. In like manner they greedily annex the heritages of strangers on the pretext of the difficulty involved in seeking out the heirs, or
| stands with | outstretched. | The | deupa meunara | is measured | from the middle | finger |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| of the right above the head. | hand to the | sole of the | foot, the right | arm lieing | raised to its full stretch |
1) All ordinary deupa is the distance from tip to tip of the middle fingers when a man
the arms
28 7
pilfer the goods inhcrited by absent persons under the pretence of administering the estates. As we have already seen, these chiefs also find in the langgéh innong '), or banning of rice-fields, a welcome method of quietly acquiring possession of many a desirable piece of land. I he liglits exercised by their occupiers over ladangs, umóngs, lam- poihs and courtyards (tanóh rumóh, sometimes also used as lampöïh or gardens) are expressed by the term viilé₂) {milk) which is borrowed from the Arabic. Just like all other ownership, that of the various sorts of land we have mcntioned passes at the owner's death to his heirs. We shall see in a later cliapter wliat departures from the Mohammedan law are exhibited by the Achehnese law of inheritance. The fact that in distri- buting estates, the umóngs are, where possible, given to the sons and the liouses to the daughters is not in itself in conflict witli the Mo hammedan law. Wills (wasict) are seldom made₃). The Achehnese who feels his death approaching generally acquaints those present witli his last wishes 111 regard to the distribution of his property among his heirs, the place where he desires to be buried and so fortli. This is called putueusan (from peusan 4) and these last "behests" are generally observed out of piety, although tliey have 110 binding effect under Mohammedan law. The right of the owner to devote one-third of his property to the advantage of objects or persons other than the heirs appointed by law, is universally recognized but seldom practised in Acheli. Equally seldom exercised is the right of withdrawing lands or other property from common use and making them wakeu,-h (Arab. waqf), of the usufruct or income being devoted to some purpose permitted by the Mohammedan law. The rice-fields whose revenues are devoted to the upkeep of the mosques belong to this class; tliey are called umong sara or meusara (see p. 122) and their foundation is in part ascribed to the old sultans.
1) See pp. 115 above.
2) Af,Vit in Malay has the samc sense. In the Straits settlements, where English land
Transfer of rights'
Succession.
The making wa,'f'
| in Malay | has the samc | sense. In the Straits | settlements, | where | English | land | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| aw prevai s | to a great | extent, it is used | in the sense | of "occupancy", and no rule of English | |||
| law is more | readily | undcrstood by | the Malays | than that by which | twclvc | years | adverse |
| possession | (mi/ti) confers | an indefeasible | title upon | the occupier. | {Trans/ator). |
3) ' his is also the case among the Malays. (Translator).
4) Malay pesan, which means to "direct" or "convey a bchcst" to another. {Trans/ator).
288
Besides the above, the latter dedicated certain rice-fields as waqf to meet the expenses of the annual kanduris of Teungku Anjöng, and also, it would seem, for the maintenance of some of the smaller chapels. Generally, however, the Achehnese limit themselves as regards the making of waqf to copies of the Quran and other religious books (kitabs) for chapels and schools and earthenware utensils and the like for mosques and meunasahs, to be used in the kanduris held therein. Sale of ladangs is compaiatively rare, owing to their remote situation, but it is otherwise in regard to wet rice-fields, gardens and courtyards. According to the adat, however, lands of these three descriptions may always be acquired by the owners of the adjoining lands for the price offered by anöther, a right not conferred by the Shafi'ite law. hor this reason the owner of such lands in Acheh is bound to notify his immediate neighbours of his intention to sell, nor may he complete the sale without their consent. Where two or more of the adjoining owners wish to exercise their right of acquisition, they must come to an arrangement witli each other; this seems seldom to present any difficulty. 1 he sale is attended with some ceremony, the form of it being borrowed in part from the Mohammedan law, and in part from the adat. Some ten persons from the gampongs of the purchaser and seller witness the fornial offer and acceptance, and each receives for his trouble some tobacco-leaves (baköng). 1 he vendor first announces the sale, though it properly speaking still lacks its legal confirmation. "I have sold", he says, "my rice-field in district X to so-and-so for $ 100; let this be known to all present '). With this introduction he proceeds to make the offer {peusamböt): "I sell you the rice-field Y for the sum of $ 100.—i)." The purchaser replies by the acceptance (sambot) "I buy from you this rice-field for the sum of one hundred dollars -1)." Sale Of cattle. The same formalities take place at the sale of cattle. The seller of the cow or buttalo holds the leading-rope, which passes through the animal's nostrils, close up to the latter, whilst the purchaser grasps it lowcr down. The formula of the peusamböt and samböt is the same
| of an ordinary | yö' (requiring | one naléh | of seed padi) | was under | native | rule 100 dollars; |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| but in the highlands | trcble | the area might | be bought | for this | price. |
1) Umong diblang X ka lön-publoè keu goh nyoë yum sireutoih reunggét.
2) I.dli-publoc keu droenen umong Y deungon yum sireutoih reunggét.
3) Lon-hloé ba' droeneu yum sireutoih reunggit. In the lowlands the lowest
umong pricc
the r f, TC '-'' y° ° for
| WC | jUSt | deSCribed | ViZ l sel | u this | buffaI |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | S | bUy fr m | y U tWs | buffa for | the |
of 40 Ml ° " T ' ^ ° °'° Price 40 dollars. In repeat.ng these words great care is taken to let the pronoun you precede the mention of the buffalo or cow, since the reverse sequencc is regarded as highly inkoper. The same applies to the formula used 111 the purchase of land.
a f,r«hêr 'c bUffa'° f"r s BS"CUUm f"" e CC ma°" n'0n>' """"f" of S » „rt a, " the bri, ,,omc o,, animal. Lead.ng him the foot of ^ „f ^ ^ ^ ^ ££" ie inniates to etch him down a chi„u') full of water aod a handfui ', X" ' ' huskcd and ""hosked ricc (irauh p,„!;•). Af,e, „ in„ ZT«, T' "T °f A"ah!"'' f-'l.»ar5 tl,c wa,o, „vor ' "7 ïcad and ,hM ^P""^ 11,c latter with the raw ricc still o„°bll 'alC °„f anlps Ia"d Can"0t a bC Said '° ,bc i" Achch, _ public as spendtI|rift hc man who a]
action i„„ r„\k.ownor 1„i,ari ,,f i,is i"=t|her,cricebreal".need-upfiddofh.s-This
amounts mdeed to an attack on the-king of aIl brcadwinning"
(pan guitc hareukat).
Letting {peiisiwa) of rice-field, „cd') be rare i„ the lowla.uk, „r bat very common ,he highland» and i„ P„,ó Breuch (Bras) where «"* the cultivated ground is too extensivc for the population. The rent is usually pa ld 111 husked rice {breuch). Gardens used also to bc let in the Iowlands, and in this case money was used. A high rent for a good sugar-cane garden with the necessary cuttings for planting was 20 dollars per annum. 1 he letting of houses is entirely at variance with the social institu- .ons of the Achehnese, on whicli we shall enlarge further in our chapter on family hfe. Shops and stalls {kau/t) are indeed let for hire, but hese are only frequented by the traders on market-days, and at other times serve merely as storehouses for goods ready for sale. Huffaloes and cows are also let out for hire, the usual rate being Hiring out about 3 gunchas of unhusked rice {padé) per annum. of «ui?
1) The chinu is a ladle made of a cocmnnt al,»ll xv. r • the lay.ng Qf certam evil spir.ts supposed to cause sickness.
2) Lnder native rule, b,-fore the eonquest by the Dutch. (Translater).
2QO
Contracts for hire are concluded without any formalities, since tliey are not far-reaching in their consequences. rhe mawaïh-A form of contract in very common use is the tnawa'ih. By this one contract... party binds himself to work the rice-field of another with his own buffalo, plough etc., in consideration of receiving one-half of the erop, or to support his cattle etc., on condition tliat one-half the young that they produce shall become his property. Such contracts are also very common in Java. Mawaïh is thus synonymous with meudua laba i. e. equal division of profits. Should special circumstances give rise to an agreement for division on other terms, this is no longer called mawaïh, but expressed thus for example; meugbë umong X bagi Ihèè — "to work the field of X for one-third of the erop." J/tfjiwA-contracts are more especially resorted to by the owners of umóngs situated at a great distance from one another, as for instance the ulèebalangs, who cause the umóngs which tliey appropriate to be cultivated in this way unless tliey are powerful enough to get the work done by feudal service. There are some chiefs who year after year call out the people of one gampöng to plough for them, of another to do the planting, and of a tliird to gather in the harvest '). He who hands over his field to be tilled under a mawa'ih contract (pumawaïh) troubles himself no further about it till the erop is cut. Tlien he witnesses the measuring out of the padi either personally or by agent and removes the half that falls to his share. Mortgages. From the above-quoted adverse view of the Achehnese in regard to the sale of rice-fields it may readily be seen that they are better managers of property, and have more comprehension of the value of accumulating capital tlian the Javanese. Indeed parsimony may be said to be more a national characteristic of the former people than extra- vagance. This does not prevent many from temporarily converting their rice-fields into money under the pressure of adversity of various kinds,
| i) [During | the existence | of the "linie" | (circ 1885—96) | the | state of things | in the | neigh- |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| bourhood | of this boundary | was entirely | abnormal. | The owners | of padi-lands | along | this |
| line readily | made over | th ;ir fields to | the cultivators | 011 the condition | that | the latter | should |
| work them | for three | entirely | for their own | profit; it | was not till | the 4th year | that |
| the owner | reccived a fifth share. | But | since the "linie" has been | done away with, and the | whole | ||
| of Great | Acheh brought | under the direct | control | of the Dutch | government, the old relations | ||
| between landlord | and | have gradually | revivived, | though | the let£.ble | value of the | land |
| is now less | than in former | times, in consequence | of the long | war.] |
years
tenant
1 the Pass'°" f°r gambling rife among the chiefs and other persons of rank d.ss.pates the fruits of the most parsimonious management. Under such circumstances they have recourse to mortgages [peugala). rhe humane but unpractical doctrine of Mohammedan law tl.at the mortgagee may draw no profit whatever from the mortgage, but must rest content with the assurance of receiving back in full the sum he ends, ,s just as httlc observed in Acheh as in other Moslim countries. c gala or mortgage contracts ') are entirely controllcd by the adat. 1 he objects most commonly pledged in Acheh are wet rice-fields gardens, keudes (shops), boats, golden ornaments, weapons, fishing-nets and the like. Houses and cattle are rarely mortgaged. 1 he old adat requires a pledge to be given to the money-lender of doublé the value of the sum lent. Should the object pledged be lost t irough the fault of the mortgagee, the latter is obliged to pay to the inortgagor a sum equal to the amount of the loan. Hesides this very ample security for his capital, the money lender 3 o e"JOyS the use of the thing pledged. Where it consists of weapons or personal ornaments he adorns therewith his own person or those of
h.s wife and chddren. The unpleasantness of ruffling it in the finery of others, wh.ch must soon be restored to its owner, is not feit in the shghtest degree by the Achehnese. He reflects that if he did not get these things in this way, he would have to buy them for himself, and t ie fact that he .s able to do so is sufficiently evinced by his having ent money to others. So far from concealing the source from whence he denved such ornaments and weapons, he plumes himself o„ ha ving command over the most costly possessions of others. A shop taken in mortgage is often let to a third party. Money is lent on vessels only by seafaring men, who use the pledges themselvcs Umóngs and lampöïhs are either cultivated by the mortgagee entirely or his own benefit, or else given out by him in mawaïh contracts. y are always mortgaged when follow after the harvest, and given back by the mortgagee at the same season, i. e. in the case of'rice-fields always in the musém luaïh blang '). Permission of the owners of
the adjoining lands is not required, but as these mortgages are some- times sustained for a very long time, the contract is concluded in the
to ma
| The objecl pledged = gala | or geunala. |
|---|
1) To take on mortgage-gala • ke a habit or occupation of so doing = „la
2) See p. 258 et seq.
"
same ceremonial manner as contracts for the sale of lands. It not un- frequently liappens that a mortgaged piece of land remains so long in the hands of a single family that it comes to bc regarded as its property, and the original transaction is in all good faith forgotten. This results in tedious lawsuits between the heirs of the original ovvners and those of the moneylenders. riedging of Fruit-trees etc., held without any right of ownership over the ground fruit-trees.,. . on whien they stand, — as for example when they grow on a padang or comnion or on the wakeuëh strip on each side of the river — may also be the subject of a contract of mortgage. The man who takes sucli gardens in pledge has of course no right to remove the trees. Rights over We have seen that the riglits of the owner of an umóng are limited grou'mls. during the nuiscm hiaih blang by the fact that everyone is free to graze his cattle thereon. In addition to this privilege, everyone has a right to fish in any umóng in that "open" season, both with fish-traps and the fishing-rod. Even in the muscm piché' blang, during which the access of cattle to the rice-fields is so strictly forbidden, fishing with the rod on the umóng of others is allowed, but not the setting of fish-traps. Fish-ponds (won) made by the owner 011 his own land are excepted from this permission, and it is likewise forbidden to catch fish with any other implement than rod and line in neuheuns or lhöms which others have constructed on the banks of crecks or rivers. Mortgaging of such ponds or staked enclosures seems not to be customary, though they pass into the hands of others by sale and succession. It even occurs at times that a man sells his rice-field, yet retains his ownership of the fish-pond he has made there. There remains 011e further point of interest with regard to the money- lending system of Acheh. The Achehnese contract of mortgage compre- hends within itself a transgression of the rule of law prohibiting all usury (riba), a rule unconditionally insisted on in the teaching of Islam and much emphasized by every school. The popular conscience, how- ever, finds this form of transgressing the commandment less repulsive than the direct covenant for interest on a sum of money lent. The receipt of goods in pledge does not excite even an outward show of aversion; pledging is in fact permitted, nor is this the only respect in which the adat of the country has somewhat modified the huköm in practice. But where it is said of anyone that he "makes dollars yield interest" (peulaba reunggêt, pubungong reungget, or pajö/i bungong
1L""££<• t) then every hearer knows that the expression conveys a reproach, although such usury is by no means exceptional in Acheh. It is a slur on the character of the man of whom it is said, much as though he were accuscd of being an opium-smoker or a drunkard. 1 he ingenuity of mankind in the invention of means of evading the law finds full exemplification in the Achehnese practice of seeking innocent names for actions condemned by their religion. I he Achehnese dollars (piastres) taken by traders to Penang to buy goods '), yield them in that port a profitable premium varying between i and 5 /„, 4 /,, is reckoned by them as the average premium or basi as they call it. 1 he moneylender who advances capital to the trader for a trip such as this stipulates for half this basi, so that there remains. for the trader the other half, plus whatever he may make by his venture. I he basis adopted for such contracts is the rate of basi prevailing when the loan is made. This rate can always be easily ascertained from the traders or seafaring people who have last come over from Penang. hus the moneylender is protected from loss, and the trader runs very httle risk, as the rate seldom falls much in the time required for the voyage to Penang, and he no sooner reaches that port than he at once proceeds to change his money. This method of raising money is called matdua basi = "dividing the premium into equal portions". The account is balanced every three months, so that, taking the premium at its average rate, the money lender gets 4X2 = 8%, per annum for his money. Sometimes when the basi is very low, the moneylender bargains for the whole, so that the trader has to consider whether he can make a profit with such ' dear money. Such contracts are, 011 account of the usury {riba) which they imply, condemned by the Mohammedan law equally with the Achehnese system of mortgage, nay even just as much as undisguised borrowing with a covenanted rate of interest. Yet the former process is in the popular estimation quite different from "making dollars yield interest", and the pliant consciences of the Achehnese are thus appeased. VVorse still, the name of lending in consideration of a part or the whole of the basi is used simply as a euphemism for ordinary usury, without any money-changing or journeys to Penang. For instance the
1) These dollars find their way back to Acheh in exchange for pepper and bctelnuts.
lender says to the borrower, UI lend you 100 dollars in consideration of 6 dollars premium (basi) after 3 months"; or still better to maintain the appearance of a sharing of the premium he says, "the basi will in three months amount to 12 dollars, half of vvhich will be your share and the other half mine". In loans with a covenant for interest the moneylender generally requires a pledge 111 addition. The object of the pledge or mortgage m such cases is not so nnich to draw a profit for this short period from the object pledged, as to have security for the repayment of the capital with interest. The moneylenders are thus content with a pledge equal in value to capital plus interest, and so do not require one of doublé the value of the sum lent, as in ordinary mortgages.
CHAPTER III.
DOMESTIC 1,1 FE AN1) LAW.
g i. Proposal, Betrothal and Marriage.
(lirls marry in Acheh at an carlier age than perhaps in any other Child-mar-Mohammedan country of the Eastern Arcliipelago. "agc' We meet indeed in all such countries cases of what is called in Java kawin gantung, where children are united in wedlock in form only, hut the actual consummation of their marriage (Jav. nênio aké) is deferred to a maturer age. Examples of this occur in Acheh also; it is then said that the husband "is only married and does not yet frequent the house" '). In Acheh, however, girls of 8 to 10, nay even of 7 years of age are actually handed over to their husbands, even where the lattcr are grown up or elderly men. So universal is this custom, that parents whose daughter at the age of 8—10 years does not occasionally share her husband's bed are greatly concerned thereat, unless there are spe- special reasons for her not doing so. Such a reason would be, for instance, that the girl is the daughter I'ossible of a sayyid and thus may wed none other than a sayyid. As these marring"/ '"óf Mohammedan nobility are not very numerously represented in Acheh, women- and as it is an exceptional occurrence for a girl to leave her parents' gampöng to follow her husband, her high birth may sometimes compel a girl to wait for years for a husband, or even to become an old maid, a class that is, apart from such cases, almost unknown in the Native world. Or else it may happen that the daughter of some chief of note is formally married to the son of another chief, but the great distance of their homes from one another, and perhaps also small local
1) Kawén mantbng, ha na woë.
2g6
wars may delay for years the "homc-coming" of the husband. These, howevcr, are manifestly exceptional cases. The Achehnese declare that these early marriages are conducive to the preservation of feminine strength and beauty, though observation vvould lead us to form a contrary opinion '). the Achehnese regard as the marriageable
| practtces' | for | « | |
|---|---|---|---|
| ti When | a irl rcacheS | what | |
| promoting | ge | ||
| the marriage | *.u tildt there | a. t must bc | some |
a without having yet had a single suitor for her hand it is believed of girls. supernatural agency at work. It is lookcd upon as certain that she must have in some part of her body something malang or unpropitious, which stands in the way of her success. The numerical value of the initial letter of her name is assumed as the basis of a calculation for indicating the part of her body which is to blame. When this lias been ascertained, the girl is placed on a heap of husked rice (breuéh) and the spot indicated is slightly pricked with a golden needie, so as to draw a little blood. This blood is gathered up by means of a wad of tree-cotton (gapeuêh) which is then placed in an egg» I«rt of the contents of which have been removed to make room for it. A little of the girl's hair apd some parings of her nails are enclosed in a young cocoanut leaf, and finally all these things are thrown into the running water of the nearest river or strcam. Uns is one of the most usual methods of doing away with the malang (boih malang). There are also other ways, such as for example the throwing away of an old garment of the unlucky one into a river or at a place where three or four ways meet (simpang). The old women are the most trusted advisers in such cases. :iaiClpoVsition 1 hc Achchcsc adat is <-'ntire agreement with the rule of Moham- ;f man and medan law that a woman must not marry a man of social position inferior to lier own. The pride of the Achehnese also withholds them from marrying their daughters to foreigners, unless they are of Arab blood, or have been long settled in the country and have attained some position. To other strangers they only give women who have some slave blood in their veins.
An exception to this rule is made in favour of devout hajis from
I) Cases in which young wives suffer serious physical injury are rare, since great cir-
cumspeenon ,s enjoined on the husband by the adat and public opinion. On the other foUow " °r Stra"gCrS WCd Achehnese vir8ins» painful results often
java, anü cspecially those from Krinchi, who in earlier times often made a long stay in Acheh or settled there pcrmanently. But the better class of Achehnese have always objected and still object to giving their daughters in marriage to the Klings (Kléng), who are spe- cially known as "strangers" {ureuëng dagang). Only such Klings as have amassed some wealth as traders or have the reputation of religious learning are allowed to wed the daughters of Achehnese of consideration. Ihe doctrine of Islam, that there exists no such thing as a mésal liance for a man, is also liberally applied; yet men set a high value on alliances which connect them with good families. Both for the honour of it, and also for political reasons, an ulèëbalang always tries to obtain the daughter of one of his equals in rank as a wife for his son. The tuanku prefers to choose his consort from ainong his own relatives or the families of the great ulèëbalangs. Most marriages of chiefs and of their nearest relatives are regulated by purely political considerations. At present they are not as a rule concluded without the consent of the Dutch Government. The best way of allaying a feud between two clans consists in bringing about a marriage between a man of the one and a girl of the other. Women who are far beneath their husbands in position generally take the second, third or fourth place in the ranks of his spouses. A young man usually marries for the first time at the age of from Proposalof 16 to 20 ycars. The proposal comes from his side; the custom prevalent marri:,Bc- in West Java, according to which the father of a young girl seeks out a suitable son-in-law, is regarded as incorrect by the Achehnese. "The well does not look for the bucket", they say '). After numerous confidential discussions between the parents of both parties the first official (though in form also confidential) step is taken through a go-between cal led seulangkê 5). Although to outward seeming the seulangkc simply renders hireling service, for which he is allowed by the adat a recoinpense of one dollar for every bungkay (25 dollars) of the dowry, the post is one
| This | proverb cannot | bc taken | as in itself | proving the rarity | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Of such | a case, for | in lava, wherc | a proposal | of marriage | on the woman's side | is not |
| uncommon, | it st.11 called | = «the | mort.r seeking | the pestle"; and | ||
| even the | people of Minangkabau, | among «hom | the rule is for | the relations | of the woman | |
| to seek | her a husband, | have a saying | = «the | arèn-trec seeking | ||
| the ladder | . Hut 111 Acheh | this practicc | is really | exceptional. |
2) His visit to the girl's parents to make the proposal is called
1) 1 fantam man mi/a tima. ls lumpang angu/ati «lu
anau mauchari jangjang
meusculeungeuy.
much sought after even by persons of some consideration. It is a position of trust, and in formcr times the seulangké had to take the place of the bridegroom when the latter broke his promise. For this reason he must be the equal of the bridegroom (lintó) in rank and position. He should further have that knowledge of the world and polish which bestows on an Achehnese the title of ureuëng tuha (= "cider : sce p. 75 above). He must be completely master of the proper forms of social intercourse, and particularly of intimate intercourse such as this, and must be in a word an accomplished person. ck/omlns₁! Bef0r° tHe seulaHSki begins his task, the requisite appeal to lucky omens must be made. Long before the formal proposal, a sort of cal- culation is made which is supposed to show whether a blessing can rest on the union; for example the numerical value of the initial letters of the names of both are added together and divided by a certain number, and the remainder left over after this division shows whether it is wise to commence the negociations or not '). Ihere are some however who prefer to place their trust in Allah and omit all calculations of this sort 2). 1 he day f°r the visit of the seulangké is also carefully computed by counting off against the days of the month the four following words: langkah (a pace), raseuki (breadwinning), peuteumucn (meeting), and mawot (death). Dates on which the words raseuki or peuteumucn (the latter for preference) fall are considered favourable •1). On all ceremonial occasions the Achehnese has recourse to eloquence, and time has gradually reduced to crystallized forms the "speeches" to which domestic and social life gives rise. Thus the seulangké says to the father of the girl whose hand is sought₄): "Your servant has directed his steps towaids you, because leuku N. has requested him so to do. He begs you to be so good as to take his child (son) as your slave". The answer runs as follows: k1hat would not be fitting, seeing that we be but humble folk. 1 he seulangké now presses his suit more closely,
| working them | out is | The common | name | for a memorandum | book containing | notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| on these and | similar subjects and much | (Jav. practised | ) is by pious men | (Arab. V^>); | see p. 198 | above. |
| those most blaih. | in use are | the Malay | kutika lima, | kutika tujöh, bintang | tujöh or | bintang dua |
1) Ihe books or tables used for these calculations are called (Arab. J&j; the act of
2) I lus wilful neglect of calculations generally in vogue is called in Java or
3) 1 liese time-tables or methods of computation are known as sur at kutika or ka li ka;
phav muphay. frimbon tih bïlo gudcl b ingang (santris).
-99
anti in the end the father replies: „We are willing to agree to all that ) ou have said, but as you know the saying holds good of us, reaching the goal yet not wholly attaining it, coming close up yet nol actually touch mg it (i. e. we are of a trutli too lowly in rank, and our dealing in the matter will leave much to be desired); therefore your servant knows not how to reply" '). After this, the symbolic language is dropped, and a preliminary ar-Betrothal rangement made. Hie seulangké now returns to those who sent him, glfts' makes lus report of the negociations and invites the parents of the youth to accompany him to sec the keuchï and teungku of the gampöng where the girl resides, in order to fix a day for the mé tanda kbng narit, i. e. the bringing of a token that the agrecment lias been ratified — a betrothal gift in fact. lhe parents of the young man have of course, before taking the Marriage an first step, asked the permission of the teungku and keuchï of their own 'T^ir)ö°f, the gampong for the proposed marriage, and the parents of the girl on their part do the same with their local authorities after the seulangké lias paid them lus first visit. Marriage is in fact by no means a mere family matter, but at least as much an affair of the whole gampöng. Ihus the keuchï lias power to prevent a proposed marriage from Authority of taking place. The headman of the girl's gampöng will seldom refuse thckeuchi'in i •. ij i *" connection consent. He lias no reason to object to her marrying a man of with mar- the same gampöng and is even less likely to raise difficulties to her Hage' taking a husband from elsewhere. In the latter case the children of the marriage may be regarded as trees planted by a stranger, of vvliich the owner of the garden lias the exclusive enjoyment and profit. It is °nly where the keuchi' himself or one of his relations or cliiefs lias his eye on the girl, that he sets himself to baffle the parents when they suggest disposing otherwise of her hand, and so tries to compass his private ends. I he usual form of the dialogue of the parents of the girl with the keuchï is as follows: "X (the seulangké) lias just come, bringing a message from Teuku N. (the father of the young man) asking for our cliild for him (n.b., the father). Wliat is now the Teuku's (= your) good pleasure?" He replies, «What part have I in the matter? be it as it seems good to you, whose child it concerns".
i) hor of the Malays see
| a description | of the | betrothal | ceremonies | of the Peninsula, |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Magie | pp. 364—368. | ( Translater). |
at s Malay
n the other hand it often happens that a keuchï opposes the mar riage schemes of a young man, especially when the object of his affections resides in another gampöng. The authonty of the keuchï in such matters is considerable, as he is practically regarded as being, in a general sense, the representative of the interests of the gampöng. No one disputes his fiat when he, as headman of a sparsely populated gampöng, forbids a youth to s'eek his spouse outside its limits, since the children of the marriage would thus be lost to his own gampöng. Here we see a further instance in which the keuchï, in conformity with the popular saying, is actually the "father" of the gampöng, and keeps his "children" i!i the right path.
Th0 best day for the me tanda kong uarit is in its turn carefully ascertained by computation. The favourite day for this ceremony is that of the full moon, the 141)1 Qf the month. To what an extent marriage is an afifair of the gampöng may further be gathered from the fact that it is not a relative of the would-be bridegroom, but the keuchï, the teungku, certain elders and the go- between wlio undertake the presentation of the gift of betrothal. The latter is, indeed, received in the house of the bride and in her name, but those who actually receive it are the authorities of her gampöng! Besides the betrothal-gift they bring what is called the ranub don or "standing sirih". This consist of a dalöng or large round food-tray with a detachable wooden upright standing in its midst. Round the latter are placed long rows of sirih-leaves tastefully arranged in the hollow base. The rows are piled up all round from the lowest laycr upwards, and on the top are laid betelnuts, and boiled eggs gaily coloured. As soon as the suitor's envoys have entered the house where the
g.rl lives, there ensues one of those stereotyped discussions, as prolix as they are droll, which always accompany important domestic occur- rences in the domestic life of the Achehnese ').
| o umatra | and m Java. | A good example | of those | employed in Menangkal.au | may l»e found | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the essay | on the adats | in use at the | appointment | of a pangulu | andiko in | the district | of |
| kapau Uthographed | at | Padang in ,890 | at the house | of R. Edw. | van Muien. | But even | in |
| Java, « here | the adat has | suffered so | much from the | great power | of the chiefs and | a foreign | |
| iu, | stereotyped | oratory at every | village | wedding. These | "speeches" | ||
| somet.mcs | furn.sh important | historieal | and ethnographical | material, | for crystallizcd | fonns | of |
| fjenerally | live | longcr than the | adats on | they are | founded |
1) These prolix discourscs on weighty occasions are also to be met with in othcr parts
Ml there are floods of kmd which
The entrance (or "going upstairs" as the Achehnese call it) takes place at the invitation of an eloquent elder of the bride's gampöng. The ranub dong is brought forward by way of preliminary, and sirih is offered to the guests. Thereupon an elder of the bridegroom's gampöng speaks as follows: "Teuku keuchi', Teungku and elders of this gampöng, our visit to you is on account of a little word which your servant desires to address to you. Our wish is to present N. (the suitor) to you as your slave. How then, do ye accept or not?" The answer, given by one of the elders of the girl's gampöng, runs as follows: \ our servant esteems your words as a command, but as far as this matter is cortcerned, I know naught of it, you had better apply to X" (indicating a fellow-elder). 1 he first speaker then turns to X, and repeats his question, but the other gives him the same evasive answer. This reference to others and pretence of ignorance sometimes goes on for a considerable time in the most serious way. Wlien the farce is thought to have lasted long enough, the person last addressed replies: "There is no objection to the purpose conveyed by your words, which we esteem as a command; but whose child is this bridegroom N. ? Who was his grandfather and who his great-grandfather" ? As soon as the genealogy of the suitor lias been set forth up to a certain point for the benefit of those present, the matter is considered settled. One of the elders of the suitor's gampöng now produces the ianda or token of good faith, a valuable gold ring or hair ornament {bungong prent) or the like, and hands it to the keuchi' with the words "Let this serve as a token". The ranub dong or "standing sirih" is thereupon brought up and presented to the fellow-villagers of the maiden with the words: "Behold one or two sirih-leavcs which wc have brought to offer you". The meeting concludes with a feast. lM-om this time forth the pair are one another's betrothed. Should l$.-eakinK of the engagement be broken off later through the man's fault the tanda troth-l>li«ht- remains in the possession of the bride; but where the blame is on lier side it is returned. When, however, the father of the bride breaks lus word without reasonable cause, he must also pay a fine, generally a pretty heavy one, to the ulèëbalang. In Acheh, just as in other parts of the Archipelago, 110 father allows his daughter to become betrothed so long as she has an elder sister .itill unbespoken, unless the latter happens to be blind or insane. Nay
| even | in such a | case it is | usually sought | to provide | the | unfortunate |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| one with | a husband, | though | the ordinary | requirements | as | to rank and |
| position | are not | insisted | on in such | instances. | ||
| f pa- | P | between | the son-in-law | and | the bride's | parents |
| ' Acheh, | a relation | which | be regarded | as | a rudiment | of earlier |
| ' " | °nditions, | commences | from the | time of the | betrothal. | Neither |
| the engaged | man | himself nor | his parents | may at | any time | during the |
| continuance | of the | betrothal | cross the | threshold | of the girl's | parents. |
| Nothing this rule. | short of | a death in | the family | can create | an exception | to |
| AH intercourse | the | son-in-law | and his parents-in-law | is, even | ||
| after | regarded | as improper | and | restricted | to the unavoidable. | |
| 1 his | which | still prevails | in some | parts of Java, | but | seems to |
| be gradually | dying | out in that | island, | subsists in | full force | in Acheh. |
| Son-in-law | and father-in-law | shun one | another's | presence | like the | |
| plague, | and when | chance brings | them together, | pass | with averted | faces. |
| Sliould | it be impossible | to avoid | communicating | with | each | other, they |
| do so eacli address | the in turn. | friendly interposition | of a third | person, whom | tliey | |
| Such | a situation | might at first | sight appear | to be | untenable, | for the |
| Achehnese | daughter | really never | quits her | parents' | roof. According | to |
| their means, | the latter | eitlier | vacate a portion | of their | house | in favour |
| of each | daughter | marries, | or supply | the lack | of room | by adding |
| on to the | main building | or putting | up nevv houses | in the same enclosure. | ||
| \ et when | the son-in-law | visits | his wife | or "comes | home" | as it is |
| called '), | he takes | notice of her | family | even though | he remains | for |
| months | or even years at | a time | within the | same enclosure. | To | facilitate |
| this discreet | behaviour, | which | is strictly | prescribed | by the adat, | after |
| every absence | whether | long or short, | he | notifies his return | by coughing | |
| loud and | long, so as | to give | the inmates | time to | get out of | the way |
| and leave | his part | of the house | free | for himself | and his | wife and |
| children. | In a respectable | family | this coughing | is the | only audible | in- |
| terchange husband. | of thought | between | the parents | of the | woman | and lier |
| Well-to-do | parents | often have | a house | built for | a daughter | who is |
| approaching i) | the marriageable see p. 295 above. | age. Others | furnish | an outfit, | which is |
of course latfón'oa The eculiar rdation rcnts-in-law n must la»-. "0nS in social c
between marriage, notion,
through
that no
described on the principlc of pars pro toto by the expression cliob tika bantay = "the sewing of mats and cushions". The engagement lasts sometimes only a month, but sometimes longer, even as much as a year. The day for the marriage is fixed by the seulangké in consultation with the parents of the bride. Mo'lot (Rabï' al-awwal), Ado'c Mo'lót (Rabi al-akhir) and Kanduri BH (Sha'ban) are regarded as lucky months, and the 6'h, I4th and 22nd of the month as propitious days. The all-important day is preeeded by thrce evenings of feasting in the house of the bride {dara bard); these derive their name from the custom of staining the hands and feet of the bride with gacha (= henna, the Arab. /tinna)'). The guests are nominally supposed to assist at the per formance of this portion of the bride's toilet. The gacha evenings are called phtrn gacha, dua gacha and Uur gacha₂), i.e. the first, second and third gacha. In point of fact ït is not the guest, but a woman professionally skilied in the art, who applies the dark-red stain so much admired to the hands and feet of the bride. At least one old woman of the family, the grandmother for instance, takes an active part in this performance! in order that a greater blussing may rest thereon. Many women are invited, and partake of the evening meal in the bride's house, which is decorated to suit the occasion. They spend a merry evening pleasantly varied by the recital of liikayats or stories, till about midnight, when they retire. None of the bridegroom's people may partake in these festivities, even thougli the two families are related to one another. Nor are any feasts held in the bridgroom's house 011 these nights. Well-to-do people convert one or more of these thrce nights into a festival for all the inhabitants of the gampöng by organizing a piasan. Ihis word (Mal. perhiasan) signif.es a feast of a secular description characterized by various popular amusements, and generally enlivened by fireworks and illuminations. Among the most popular amusements 011 such occasions are what are known as Rap ai 3). Of these the most favourite performance is the hanging of red-hot chains on the bare
Hrhinei. (Translator).
| cal led | after this very | practice | of staining | the bride's | hands and | feet. See my |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| \ Ol. II p. 165. |
1) Ihe Malays have the same custom, which they call
2) At Mecca also ore of the festive gatherings to which a marriage gives occasion
3) Sec below Vol. II Chapter III, § 3.
is tjmna Mekka 3
body. Ihc ratéb sadati and pulet are also very popular. The people of the gampöng take care that the players are entertained at the expense of the farrnly who give the feast, while they themselves enjoy both the good cheer and the show that accompanies it. dThe.ndam-The three nights of feasting are only distinguished from one another by the arbitrary changes in the form of the amusements. The day foliowing the third gacha-night is called the andam-éiy** {uröë men'andam), since the bride's toilette, of which the andam (i. e. the shaving off of a portion of her hair) constitutes the part esteemed as of the highest importance, is completed thereon. From two to four days beforehand the people of the gampöng issue invitations to guests both male and female to attend this ceremony. They assemble at this kanduri at uncertain times; the concourse lasts from carly in the morning till about 3 P.M. They are received by the gampöng-folk; the women go to the samoc liköt, while the men take their place in the srambc reunyeun. Food is placed before each of the guests immediately 011 his arrival. 'resems from No guest comes with empty hands. They hand over their respective ne guests. • /•. iiit gifts, one a dollar, another a goat, and so 011, to the elder who acts as master of the ceremonies (peutimang jameè or peutimang bnet). Where the bride is the daughter of an ulèëbalang, even buffaloes are presented. Where a married couple attends the feast, the man and his wife bring separate gifts '). 1 hose invited as guests are for the most part, besides intimate friends, the relations of the bride and more distant kindred of the bridegroom. lhe adat contains a curious rule in regard to the return gifts to be made to those of the two last-mentioned classes. To such of them as belong to a generation younger than that of the bride'), a sum of money must be paid at their departure equal to doublé the value of the gifts which they have brought. The andam must be performed before midday; 110 blessing rests on it unless it take place while the sun is still ascending {uroc c). Though
teumcuntu?. nyumiang
| Sundanese | as | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| )The bridegroom's relations,even | though they be really senior | to the bride in age, are regarded | ||||||
| as junior | to her «hen | they are | younger | than the | bridegroom. | It is usual | for husband | and |
| wife each | to address | the others | relations | in the same | way as | that other | would do. Thus | an |
| elderly | man may | be heard calling | a mere | boy abang (elder | brother), | if the latter | be the | |
| elder brother | of the speaker's | wife. |
1) This offering of gifts is called In Javanese it is known as in
nyambung. 2
WOrk is actuaI'y done by an expert, all the vvomen assembled in the sramoë liköt nominally take part in it, and the professional hair- dresser must nowise ncglect to invite at least the most important guests to share in the andam, the invariable ansvver being, however₁): "It matters not; I leave the task to you". Before the commencement of the andam the necessary steps must be taken to avert evil influences, and means employed to ensure what is technically called "cooling". As we know, in the native languages of the E. Archipelago all happiness, peace, rest and vvell-being are united under the concept of "coolness"' while the words "hot" and 'heat" typify all the povvers of evil. Thus when a person has either just endured the attack of a "hot" influence or has luckily contrived to escape it, the adat prescribes methods of "cooling" in order to confirm him in the well-being which he has recovered or escaped losing. The same methods are also adopted for charming away evil things and baneful influences, the removal of which |s regarded as an imperative necessity. For instance, the completion ofa house, and vanous domestic festivities, are made the occasion for a process of "cooling"; so also with a ship when newly built or after the holding of a kanduri on board; and before the padi is planted out the ground must be purified from "hot" or dangerous influences. In Acheh this cooling 2) is called peusijuc (making cool). The most "Cooling'1 effective method of cooling consists in besprinkling the person or thing to be cooled with teupöng taweuë₃), i. e. water mixed with a little nce-flour; also the strewing over the object of a little husked and unhusked nee mingled together (breuch padé). The besprinkling with teupöng taweuë is performed with the help o certain small plants'). Among the plants which always appear in t ns improvised holy-water sprinkler are included the sisijuë' (a name which ,n itself implies cooling) and the manè'-manöë >) to which
peu'é, idin
ofi'.™ rct-"°r" *"'f°*v *"*mr)-"h • ^ "'g!' PP-" "m,m" 'm°°S
20
uLLci-nui staiKS or nciieueng sainüo ) are adcied on ccrtain occasions. Tlius before the young padi is planted out, a besom composed of small plants of manP-manoë and sisijuë' and a betel-nut stalk, is set up in the midst of the rice-fïeld, after being first dipped in teupöng taweuë and used to sprinkle the centre of the field-). On the 44H1 day after a birth, marriage or death, the bidan (midwife) or an old "wise woman" comes and besprinkles the topmost portion of all the posts of the house with mattè'-manüc or sisijuc. A boy who has completed the recitation of the Quran is "cooled" in the same way by his guru or teacher. So too, one who has just returned from a long journey, or been saved from shipwreck, or fallen into the water and narrowly escaped drowning, or a child which has fallen from the steps of the house, etc., is "cooled" by an old woman of the family. In the case of human beings, the cooling with flour and water is followed by what is called peusunténg₃), i. e. the smearing of a little 'm kunyét (glutinous rice made yellow with turmeric) behind both ears. In some cases this last only is done, and a child that has fallen from the stairs is simply smeared behind the ears with a little clay from the ground 011 which it falls. All these coolings, except when recognized experts are employed, should be performed by old women; otherwise the good result is very doubtful. To return to the ceremony of shaving the bride's hair *{andam) ). The -equisites for the andam and the cooling that precedes it are placed eady on two trays (talam). On one is husked and on the other un- ïusked rice (breuëh and pad/), 011 each stands a bowl of teupöng taweuë ind a small besom composed of a sisijuë' plant, a viane -manoë plant md some naleuëng sambo, a kind of grass the flowers of which look
| of "cooling". | The plants | so used are however | really | of different | sorts, l»ut the same | name |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| is given to all | alike in different | localities. | All have | tliis in common, | that the shape | of the |
| leaves bears as jampang See | a rough resemblance and used as cattle-fodder. p. above. | to a duck's | foot. | |||
| The | general meaning | of the word, | like that | of its equivalent | in Malay, | is "smearing |
| or inserting | behind the ears", | and is used | to describe | the custom | so much in vogue among | |
| the youth | of Acheh of wearing flowers | stuck behind | their ears. | It is also used | however in | |
| a technical | sense to denote | the smearing | with | yellow rice for purposcs | of cooling. | [The |
| Malay word | bêrsunting | means according | *o Marsden | the wearing | of flowers | or other orna- |
| ments 011 the | head or behind | the ears. | (Trans/ator).| | |||
| Cf. Skeat's | Malay | Magie p. | et seq. |
1) This is, according to l)r. 1'. van Romburgh, the Eleusinc India. It is known in Java
2) 264
3)
4) 353
as though they vvcrc plaited. On one of the trays is also placcd a young cocoa-nut opened by cutting it through the centre in an indented me, the two halves being then neatly fitted i„to one another, a razor, a pair o scissors, a bowl of perfumed oil, a similar bowl with some dned sandal-wood (kleuutM) and a Iittle seureuma (called kuhl by the Arabs; used by women to blacken their cyelashes and the'edges of their eyelids), and two eggs.
| an firS, 5Pr ,eS | ,C a ient | W h |
|---|---|---|
| breuch-pade |
J,"rs°'da m.T /,'^ " "' " *** '"«»
Iittle over hc, body and smears her forehoad
w.th some cocoanut water fron, the cocoanut „hiel, is placed ready or the^PUrpose Before commcucing her task, she repeats the formula | ca,bed by Islam for the inauguratiou of all matte,, of importante
tho „ame of Allah!" The scattering of the (rrf. Ml.' « seven being ')=
| performed | time., each | solemnly | countod | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| fan;, | tujmmh, s0 | count | g and | is als in |
*fan;, tujmmh,* This count||,g is als, j** on other „ccas.ons, »„ch as the „ „f cl,arms, .c br.de „ thns prepared for the aotoal ceremony of the U, to the time „f marriage the hair is drawn back „ tightly as pos- h°"CVer' hair. are eombed forward from ear t„ ear and shaven to the depth „f aboat a fingersbreadth along this [ine. he marrred „oman continue, to wear her hair ia this mannc, unti, e ha, some chddrcn; she thu.-andams" for .several years. Hu, ,he properly „ called i, ,ha, from „Inch the great feast before a a,r,age derivcs ,ts name, and is performed by an expert. The latter rece.ves as her recompense among „11,er thing, the reuman,s of husked "nllusked nee and eggs lef, over after the Voeling". Sn soon as the pr„pcr has been eompleted by the applicatie,, °f hc "bove-mentioued eosmelies (perfumed oil, and 8UeStS a^embled in the sramt.-lii-ö,, who up ,o h,s have been merely „nlookor.s, proeeed ,„ assis, iu the work on hand, one after another the
| they apply | behiud | the ear, | „f the bride | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| c ow pcusunthig. | glutinous | ricc whic | l | wc | lim |
supplementary-eooling" „f y „. ubovc under the name of The bride aeknowledges this oken „f fneudly interes, by au „bcisancc and at the sa.ne time receives the gifts presented to her by these guests W, SC they
| "' | «h-ghter» | fa 11 ,ick very | of,en make | a vow tha, | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| I) Cf. the | notes in the | Tijdschrift | voor Binnenlandse!, | Bestuur | Vol 7 p | |
| counting up | to seven as an | introduetion | ,0 invoeations | „f ods | or spirit! in | Z2 |
22I as to ,hc B
30S
will have a geundrang or drum to play at the andam festival should they recover and live to be married. In such cases the geundrang with its indispensable accompaniment of two flutes (srnnè) is played in the back verandah during the actual operation of shaving, and afterwards the musicians complete thcir per formance in the front part of the courtyard {leuën). They have a special tune called lagèë men andam for such occasions. 'lhe toilet Let us now sketch briefly the toilette in which the bride is dressed af the bride.. after the andam. As upper garment she lias a bajec or jacket richly laced with gold thread, over the sleeves of which sundry kinds of bracelets are tightly fastened. 1 hese comprise the puntu and ikay on the upper arm, the sangga near the elbow, a bangle (gleu'èng) on either arm, pushed up to near the elbow, round the middle of each fore-arm a saiL'è, and a puchci' on each wrist. All the ten fingers are adorned with two or more rings each. Over the jacket is thrown a long cloth, the ija simpla . It is folded in four and passed round the waist, and the two ends are brought up crosswise over the breast and allowed to hang down behind over the shoulders. Around the neck tliere is first suspended a golden chain (ganchcng) to which are attached horizontally one below the otlier three half moons of gold eacli set with precious stones and fincly wrought at the edges. Above this comes an euntuc or collar, usually composed of golden knots of the same kind as those which are to be found attached to the corners of an Achehnese sirih-bag (boh cliru). In the ears are the great earrings (subang) which give such unbecoming width to the holes in the ears of the Achehnese women. The silken trousers (silneuë or lueu'è) are not as a rule even partially covered with a loin-clotli (ija pinggang). Such a garment is indeed in dispensable for the adults of both sexes in Acheh and serves as a token that the wearer is a Mohammedan; but the bride is usually of im- mature age, and neither propriety nor religion demand so much of children. On either foot the bride wears a knitichöng or ankiet of silver or suasa (an alloy of gold and tin), which is hollow and lias tinkling silver bells inside it. On the forehead rests a patam dhoc (forehead-plate) which curvcs gracefully down to the cheeks; on the right and left sides of this are fixed golden bosses (anting) from which Iittle chains furnished with bells hang down to the level of the ears. One or two golden bungöng
jcumpa (champaka-blossoms) are stuck into the hair above the forehead, while on the back of the head are worn both the golden bungbng ***/"au-***and the real flowers known as bungbng peukan or market-flowers, un,, on threads. Over the left ear a golden bungbng suntèng ') niay sometimes bc seen projecting. Round her waist the bride wears a girdle, vvith a broad square golden clasp (peundéng) set vvith precious stones in front, the belt itself con- sisting of a silver cliain. Dressed out in this heavy attire, loaded with costly ornaments, the nde now awaits the all-important evening vvith some of her next of kin to bear her company. The proceedings in the house of the bridegroom are of a simpler c escription. 1 he malam gacha or night of the gacha is not celebrated at all. On the andam day a feast is given, but only to such of the bridegroom's relations as have to travel some distance to share in the ceremony of the evening. Here too the relatives bring gifts *(tcnmeuHtuc* the presentation of which is governed by the same adats as in the bride's case.
The bridegroom arrays himself wedding
| also | in rich | attire for the |
|---|---|---|
| (bajec), ija kröng {tamp,i meuïh) | striped silk trousers, Lam Gugöb | |
| {tangkuln). | (talbe kïieng) | |
| reunchong; | siwaih. | {bungkïïih), |
ceremony. He usually wears a white jacket and a loin-cloth of the sort known as from the place of .ts fabrication, all richly laced with gold thread. On lus head is placed a cap with a gold crown surrounded with a purple handkerchief In his waistband on the left side .s thrust a dagger, differing somewhat in appearance from the ordinary Achenese this is called 1 he handkerchief tied up so as to form a bag which contains all the requisites for betel-chewing, an indispensable adjunct in the eyes of every Achehnese, is borne behind the bridegroom by one of his comrades. \ here the parents of the bridegroom have taken the geundran* VOU-on his behalf (and this happens just as frequently in his case at m the bride's), certain ornaments which properly belong to women only are added to his costume, such as bracelets and ankiets and flowers fastened in the folds of the handkerchief which is wound round his head. The drum and the two flutes do not begin to play until the evening.
i) ^ee the explanation of pcusunténg on p. 306 above.
| 1 hc music | is continucd | during | the procession | to the | house of the | bride |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| or even | P i°n later. | is called | mampleue ') | and | commences | at 9 |
| Ml that | we have | so far described | appertains | to the | Achehnese | adat |
| and the | same is truc | of the | and | the subsequent | proceeding | |
| at the house | of the | bride. At | the same | time it is regarded | as a | matte |
| of course | that no | meeting | can take | place between | the | bride an< |
| bridegroom | until the | requirements | of the | Mohammedan | law are fulfilled | |
| 1. e. until | the marriage | contract | lias been | executed | in the | prescribe< |
| form. This | ceremonial | is seldom | deferred | until | the coming | of th< |
| bridegroom | to the | bride's house; | it generally | takes | places | during thi |
| couise of | the wedding | day, or even | a day or two before, in | the meunasat | ||
| of the bride's | gampöng, | or in the | house | of some neighbouring | malém. | |
| O11 a | later page | we shall | describe the | peculiarities | of the | marriagi |
| contract | and add | some remarks | with | reference to | the dowry, | the fi |
| nancial | results of | marriage, etc. | For the | present let | us simply | assum. |
| that the | requirements | of the | huköm (religious | law) | have been | satisfied |
| and that 1 he fellow-villagers and | adat can | thus take relatives of the bridegroom | free course. | have now assemblee | ||
| in k reat | numbers. | After the | man | has paid respect | to his | parent: |
| and brethren | by a | farewell obeisance, | he | is led down | the steps | of tin |
| house by | some of the | "elders". | As soon | as his feet | touch the | grount |
| at the foot | of the | steps, one | of the elders | exclaims | Allahumma | (all |
| ala sayyidina | Mtthammad", | "O God! | let thy | blessing rest | on (b< | |
| gracious | to) our Lord | Mohammad." | All | the bystanders | shout | aloud ii |
| chorus salawalééé! | These formulas | are repeated | three | times). | ||
| The bridegroom | is now placed | in the | midst of his fellow-villagers | |||
| He is frequently | attended | by | some of his nearest | relatives, but | seldon | |
| by the | nearest of | all, and never | by his | father, as | this would | conflici |
| with the | relations | which subsist | between | parents-in-law. | The | processior |
| is headed | by the | musicians, | wlio have | here again | a special | tune foi |
| This | word is identical | with the | Malay memplai, which | is borrowed | from | the Tamil |
| hut it is | never used* (like | the original | word) in the sense | of "bride" | or "bridegroom". | I |
| is used in | Acheh to indicate | the procession | alone. | The expression | ja' cuntat mampleue i | |
| indeed eraployed | in the | sense of to escort | the bridegroom | on his way to the bride's | house | |
| but to the cession". prayer for him | Achehnese (the Prophet). | these words | the notion | of joining | the "bridegroom's | pro |
2) Salawalé is the Achehnese pronunciation of the Arabic gallu alaih = utter the $alat
This grcat rocess i\m mampleue
its r young u c i. e. 2
1)
convey c
3'!
the occasion. 1 his tune is changed when the party enters the gampöng road or rather the path which leads past the entrances of the enclosures within the gampöng. Amid re-iterated cries of salawalééé! they at length arrivé at the enclosure of the bride s parents, where the people of the latters' gampöng stand drawn up in rows ready to receive the guests. The new corners form up in line opposite to their hosts but the bridegroom is kept entirely in the background and as it were concealed from view. 1 here now begins another curious colloquy. An elder of the bride's Colloquy gampöng asks: "Are ye all come, oh Teukus (i. e. gentlemen)", and hoItTand the those addressed reply in chorus, "We are here to serve your will". Suests-Ihe questioner résumés, "Have ye all directed your steps hither, oh Teukus?" which question receives the same reply as the last, and finally the chorus of guests give a like answer to the question "Have ye all walked hither, oh Teukus?" The three questions are then repeated in turn by all the principal personages of the bride's gampöng. When this child's-play lias lasted long enough in the opinion of the master of the ceremonies, it is thought time to otter sirih and its accessories to the guests, who all this time remain outside the house. I his civility is introduced by an elder of the bride s party in the following words: \ oui servant desires to speak a few words, for which he invokes the permission of you all, oh Teukus. 15e it known unto you then, ïllustrious Teukus, that my brothers here desire, if Allah the Exalted so will, to go into your midst (i. e. in order to present the sirih); should they in so doing crowd or incoinmode you through predestined fate (God forbid that they should do so on purpose), then, oh Teukus, we humbly crave your forgiveness". An elder among the guests replies as follows in behalf of all: "Good, be it according to the words of the Teuku (the last speaker) to us all.' What says the leukur He says that his people wish to come amongst us. As regards crowding or pushing that is pre-ordained by God, if it be not done with the feet, we shall gladly submit to it J). It matters not; we agiee with great pleasure (lit. "on our head") that the Teukus come among us".
Achehnese in con-
| nections which | would sound | incorrect | to Arab | ears. |
|---|
1) This Arabic formula "/'// sha'llah" is vcry frequently used by the
2) This sentence is expressed in the Achehnese rhythm (sanja').
3'2
ranks now break up for a moment. The people of the bride's gampöng go through the polite form of ofifering the guests sirih and betel-nut, and in the meantime thcy greet one another in more familiar fashion and speak the language of ordinary mortals. When tliis interval lias lasted long enough the files close up again. The colloquy that now begins consists practually in a series of pressing invitations to come in ( come up, the Achehnese says, sincc his house stands on posts), and polite excuses on the part of the guests, who declare themselves con tent with their place in the front part of the enclosure. All this politeness is for the most part expressed in the form of pantons. The Achehnese pantons have this in common with the Malay, tliat the first two lines are not in any way connected in point of sense with the second pair, but serve chiefly to supply rhyming words. For an Achehnese who li.is some knowledge of the pantons most commonly used, the repetition of the first strophe at once suggests the meaning of that which succeeds it. The verses of the Achehnese pantons are also generally in sauja', that is to say, each consists of four parts of which the two middle anes rhyme with each other, while the last word of each verse rhymes with the last word of the next '). Let us now see how the reciters help to shorten the evening of the wedding; we shall call the elder of the bride's party A and the elder af the bridegroom's gampöng B.
A. Well then o Teuku! I have something more to teil thee, even
is the elders are wont to say: A dove flies afar. A young quail twists in its flight. I offer you sirih, Teuku, pray accept it, Aozv may I proceed to disclose to you what is in viy heart. P>. A perkutut's cage in a garden of flowers, A casting-net in a bamboo case. It is uo harm that you should disclose it, I am ivillmg to hear that which is in your heart.
A. A mountain-bird with red feet, 0 E-g- B"sa Mculayu | pisang tcufch \ — basa Achch | pisang teuchucha | Bi' Ié teuku | mtululeh-lagch | — salch-satch | matam ka juta. | **Here Uufeh rhymes with Achch and lagch with *saleh-*also teuchuchaalso *teuchucha* with juta.*
313 Bramöë-leaves form his food. Come nearer, Teukus, up to the stairs of the house, \ ash your feet and step into the front veratidah.
B. A langsat-tree on a grave, Iliey cut it down and fashion it into supports for a fly-wheel. Teuku, watt for a moment, Allow me to consult with my comrades.
A. In the inner room is a bag for glutinous rice, In the central passage an earthenware jar for sugar. Rest, o 1 'euku, be it but for a moment; Should it be lotiger, it zvill give me pleasure (lit. "on my head").
B. A braleuen-trec in the midst of the front enclosure, It casts ïts shadow even 011 to the seat above the stairs. We come here but once in a long time, only one single time ').
I.et us be received in the front courtyard, that sufficeth.
A. A scare to frighten squirrels in the garden of Lubö', Men tap the arèn-palm and take the sap. ) ou have come hither frotn (name of the guests' gampöng) It is now but a small distant e from whcre you are to the sitting-mat.
B. On the Padang 5) grows keutumbét (a plant used as a vegetable), Sirahét-fruits tied up in the corner of the garment. Once in a long time, barely one single time, So far (as to where we now stand) is enough, this sufficeth.
A. In the field of 1 ama' is petroleum, I11 1 ante Teungóh ("Middle Bank") is perfumed oil. Stand no longer on the ground, Teuku, Ascend into the house and sit upon the si/tin^ mat.
B. Let us go the sea-shore to catch the cuttle-fish, Let us bring it home and salt it. l'or this evenittg let us even remain on the ground, Late> on zee can take our places on the sitting-mat.
A. A maja-tree in the midst of the garden, Ihereon may we hang the sirih-bags of the guests who arrivé. ) ou have just come from yonder, from afar, Step forward now to the sitting-mat.
| Close to | the Meuseugit | Raya. |
|---|
1) We who are not familiar acquaintances have no claim to be received
within the house.
2)
B. A keutapang-tree in the midst of the country. Jati-trees in the forest. ) 'onder gentleman (the bridegroom's father) hath charged us to come
hither • Bul as far as here (where we stand) sufficeth.
A. The buah-nona-tree in the midst of the moon. If a branch falls therefroni it forebodes an earthquake, Stand no longer in the front courtyard, Teukus, Perhaps rain iuill come and your clothes be wet.
B. Glumpang-trees vvith abundant shadow 011 the border of the field, 1 omegranate-trees at the silit its then return to the cntrance of your gtwipong-patJi,* '1 kat we may put up our umbrellas, and (hen our clothes shall not
get wet.
A. \ hat is that pöng-pöng ') sound in the gampong? I hey are busy pounding the flour for a (wedding) feast. II ithdt uw not, lenkus, to the cntrance of the gampong, For therc a cocoanut holloived (by squirrels) may fall itpon your hcads.
H. A wag-tail on an apöng-tree, A beo's nest in a jati-tree. We bear respectful greetings from our fellow-villagers, Now that wc have come hither by the gampöng-path -), let us return
home again.
A. A brujóë s nest ') in a panjoe-tree 4), A wood-peckers nest in a virginal cocoa-palm. 1 ou shall not return, Teukus, Until you Jirst come and sit on the mat.
B. Under the house is an earthenware lamp, \ ithin the house is a lamp of brass. IVe have come over the earth, liow can we ascend into the house, we should soil the mat!
A. Kresh and salt water mingle in the sea, 1 his water overspreads the swamps.
h.ven though it be soiled that matters not (to the owner),
in the lensöng
| ï) i Iic sound | of the nce-pounder | or mortav. |
|---|
2) I. e., nou- that we have conducted the bridegroom to your gampöng, our task is completed.
3) The bird called
4) A sort of wild eotton-tree.
mïrbah in Malay.
Me will replace it with a new one after the wedding feast.
B. In Lam Barö sugarcane is planted, In the III Mukims keutila (katela) is sown by dibbling. II it/i due respect, Tcuku, Here it bcfits us to remain, this sufficeth. And so forth. The concluding pantöns are as follows:
A. An asan-tree grovvs in the market. Under the asan-tree is a space for the panta-gamc ') Frotu early morning it has come to be late in the night, 'lhe ricc is prcpared for you on the plat ter s.
B. In the midst of the fore-courtyard they are drying the padi, They are cleaving wood under the sculasa (the sitting-place at the
top of the steps leading up to the house). II cll then 'leuku, asccnd yoursclf Jirst, To set in order what is sti/l lacking.
A. A baju is sewn with a fine needie, Clothes are woven in the III Mukims. For two or three days past all has been rcady, 'lhe people who are giving the wedding-feast have provided everything.
B. (io to the shore, go and angle for fish; A prahu at sea with two masts. J ou, Tcuku, go Jirst, and we shall follow, Such is the custom at wedding feasts.
A. Dark-coloured glutinous rice is made into eumpiëng-) lhe bamboo is cut down to make a ladder to the platform bencath
:he roof. ) our servant then goes Jirst up the s/air, .lil of you, Teukus, will give hint leave to do so! After the guests have entered, and before they have all taken their ieats, the orator of the bride's gampong says: lhe young buloh-bamboo stands and thrives, Let us cut ofif ten pieces (for bobbins) to wind silk upon. A ow, 'Teukus, wipe away the perspiration, And take your rest on the sitting-mats. lhe bridegroom however does not accompany the others into the
with a sort of lump sugar or jujubes {gula larf).
3 '6
lousc; while the gucsts who have escorted him thither are enjoying the.r s.rih m the front verandah, he stands as it were concealed with a few who remain to hold him company. A fresh dialogue between the orators representing the two gampöngs introducés his entrance. furThe" A-Wdl then' where are ye all, Teukus? groom. B. and his companions in chorus: Here are your servants'
A. Now then, by the will of Allah the Exalted, you, Teukus, have
partaken of the sirih which your servant lus set before you; I will now let you knovv what lies upon my heart.
B. We 11 then, Teuku! now as regards the sirih that you have laid
c c us' your servants have enjoyed it by Allah's will. You wish now to teil us of that which lies upon your heart. Do so then, Teuku! e hearken with joy (lit. "on our head").
A. Well then, Teuku, we have yet another word to say. We shall
nou implore you all, Teukus, using the words of the weavers of tales 'h A pa iko -) with red shoulders, A wagtail flies, making the world shake. kespectful greetings from grandmother peunganjö -1) S/te lays on us the task of demanding the bridegroom at your hands, oh Teukus!
B. What saidst thou, Teuku? A pa ikö etc. (as above). Now we too have a word to say, that you, Teuku, may impart to
the elders. "Nou said: UA pa' ikö with red shoulders". But it lias flown away to Blang Pangóë 4). 'leuku convey our greetings to grandmother peunganjö, Say, leuku, that there is no bridegroom among us.
A. Well, Teukus, I have already told grandmother peunganjö of
this, and what was her reply?
| and composed | wholly or | in part in | rhyme, which | is usually | character | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| and singles | out some special | person | or thing for | ridicule. It is however | used | to designate |
| o compositions all the wedding | also, ceremonies. | which cannot | be referred | to the headings | of | and |
1) properly means a story hamled down l»y word of mouth
2) A yellow bird oftcn kept in cages.
3) 1 he given to the old women who act as the attendants of the bride throughout
4) A gampöng in the XXVI Mukims.
r 'reueng mturuhê. Haba ruhi of a laughter-moving
kikayats, fantons na lams.
name
31/ Molasses in a cup, A rambutan-fruit with a red skin. Say not that he is not here, he whom you have come to bring. II hat way is tJiis to jest?
B. Well, Ieukus, what say my comrades here? 11 is planted, and stakes are placed to prop it, Kundur is PIanted, and let creep along the gro'und. The reason why we said «no" to grandmother peunganjö, Is that we l'uow not the appearance of the bridegroom. As we are all stupid and confused, be so good as to describe his
appearance.
A. Well then, Teuku, I have enquired of grandmother peunganjö,
anc sie says that the bridegroom's appearance is described in the ten iollowing headings: In the first place, says she, his hands are dark, lor they have been stained with hinna for three days past. Secondly his clothing is laced with gold thread, Which follows the pattern of the cloudy firmament. 1 hirdly, he .s shaven ') (andam) upon the forehead, which was done before the sun attained the zenith 2). 1' ourthly, she describes him as clad in a white baju, With golden buttons as it were heaped together over the breast. r ifthly lie wears a battle-sword 3) with octagonal handle, On which the smith has worked for thirty days. Sixthly he wears a handkerchief on which is embroidered gold thread in the shape of a twisted cord, While flowers hang from it and a„ uit! chamara (nn old-fashioncd gold ornament) is fixed therein. Seventhly, a cap with a golden crown, Ronnd Which are eight «maller crowns, set w.th preei,,,,» s,„„es. tighthly, I may mention the sirih-bag, 1'rom whose four corners hang the golden acorns. ,ala-.„aU').
| Ninthly, | when ye eame, | ye cried | aloud with one voice, | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| tok,: 1S | four | clans e |
1) See p. 304 above.
2) See p. 304 above.
3) A pattern of sikin now as rare in Aeheh as it is eagerly
4) Sec p. 310 above.
". 'ght familie,, sixteen relativcs, thirty.
sought after. b
31»
two individuals in all counting friends and acquaintances, liave consulted togethcr (to make him a bridegroom). He it is, whose hand the Teungku held in the presence of two witnesses. Make him over to all of us now, O Teuku! As the saying goes: Thatch made of sugarcane-leaves at three mas the thousand '). The agreevient lias already been entered into, let it be carricd out to night.
- Wcll then, Teuku, according to your request we give him over
to you, if Allah so will₂): keep his feet from straying, follow his in- clinations in what is right, help him in his difficulties and check him if he transgresses 3).
A. God willing, we do so with joy (lit. 'on our head"). The bridegroom is now sought out, and led up the stairs of the
house by his companions. He stops half-way, however, to be besprinkled with husked and unhusked rice *(breueh-padê) ) by an cider of the bride's gampöng, who sits at the top of the steps. The elder, while he throws the contents of the small bowl or bate by handfuls in the face of the bridegroom (who protects himself with a fan) pronounces the following blessing: Blessing in-"O Allah, bless our Lord Mohammad and the family of our Lord voked on the Mohammad bridegroom. Kar be the curse, far be the calamity, let there be good fortune, let there be peace, may you have prosperity, may you have happiness, may children and grandchildren be given you, in numbers as the mibó- bushes in swampy land, may you beget three children in the year and marry two of them every year, may your children succeed eacli other at long intervals" (ironically said, as 'appears from what follows), "while the elder sister is still only able to lie on her back, may the younger be boni; may you have children in trusses like padi in swampy land; may you have children like a plant that ever shoots up afresh, may it be even as a bamboo with many joints".
| Even in the letters | of appointment | of the sultans | with | the nine-fold | seal ('chab sikureueng) | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the saine | precepts | are enjoined | on the subjects | in respect | of a newly | appointed | (or rather |
| confinned) | chief, | or of a servant | (kadani) | of the Sultan, | or other | officials. |
1) One mas (maïli) == dollar.
2) See note on p. 311 above.
3) These four injunctions are always given to one into whose charge another is committed.
4) This cermony is called seupeuc' breiich-padé.
3 '9
In Java the bridegroom, bcforc entering the house of the bride, must The entrance perform vanous symbolical acts, such as trampling an egg to pieces °f the bri stepping with the bride over a bufifalo-yoke (pasangan) etc.; the Br0°m' br.de also washes the feet of her future spouse. Wc must leave to conjecture how much of this may have been customary in Achch i„ earlier times; at present the only observance of this sort is the placing at the entrance of the inner room (jurèe) where the bride awaits the bridegroom, a dish filled with water, in which are placed an egg and some leaves of the "cooling" plant known as sisi/uë''); in this the bridegroom is expected to dip his feet for a moment as he enters the room. 1 he bride sits in the jurèe on a tilam (a heavy thick mattress) covcred with a cloth and bespread with costly sitting-mats. Two piles ofcushions [bantay meusadeuë) stand on the mat against the wall. The young man's place is prepared at the bride's right side. She is attended by some peimganjns, old women from bot], gampöngs who are interested in the marriage. Of these mistresses of the ceremonies one acts as directress, and also attends the bridegroom for the first few days when walkin" through the house and courtyard of his parents-in-law, to familiarize him with the place and to serve him. The bridegroom is conducted to the door of the jureé by an elder and there handed over to the care of the pcunganjüs. In some districts it is customary for one of these women to pretend to hold the door of the room shut from within. The other who Ieads the young man now advises him to surrender to the woman who guards the door his rainchmg % the dagger which forms an indispensable adjunct of the equipment of the Achehnese man. In order to cover the bride's shame, one of the peunganjös constantly o ds a fan before hcr face so as to prevent the bridegroom from looking at her. He takes his seat by her side, and now begin what are for bot'' them the most disagreeable moments of their wedding. Guests and fellow-villagers are now permitted to stare at them withoun-estraint through the door and the interstices of the walls. members bridegroom's family (sometimes even
| Certain | female | of the |
|---|---|---|
| i) Cf. p. 305 | above. | |
| inlroduced | fo, ,b. pu,p„ | I,,, |
t lh ^
- i rtli Mw '
his mother) attended by a number of women from thcir gampong, are now admitted, but not till after the bridegroom has entered the jurèé. They are, however, received in the back verandah (sramöë liköt), the proper abode of the women. There they receive a formal greeting, but without pantöns, so that the reception is over in a moment '), especially as they are offered 110 sirih. They then go straightway into the jurèë, where their presence somewhat strengthens the bridegroom's courage. The bride now gives the first token of wifely obedience in the form of a long obeisance {seumbah) at the knees of her spouse, a token of homage which he accepts with a gracious gesture (samböt). At this point the adat prescribes his presenting her with a sum of money (say 10 dollars), which one of the peunganjös receives and puts in its proper place. 1 he wed-Meantime food is placcd before the guests, and on sucli occasions ding feast. ...,,,, the idangs must bc very complete. I he adat Iays down fixed rules for the arrangement of these idangs, especially in connection with wedding feasts. The same rules hold good for the idangs of the Feast of the Birthday of Mohammad, and for what are called „guest-meals", i. e. feasts offered to specially honoured guests₂). These, however, are not in any sense of religious character, nor are they, like kanduris, marked by the recitation of selections from the Quran or litanies with final prayer. On ordinary occasions an idang consists of two dalongs or presentation trays, of which one contains the rice, and the other 4 or 5 bowls of meat or fish together with gulc (called sayur in Java) and sambay (Mal. sambal). Such an idang is intended for 4 or 5 persons. The feast-idangs just mentioned are formed in a more complex manner. In the one dalöng there are first placed a number of bowls with meat and vegetables in their gravy (gulc). This lower layer is covered with pisang-leaves, 011 which are set a large number of small dishes (chipc duit) of fish, meat, eggs etc., and sambay. These layers are piled up to as many as nine deep, each being separated from the next by
| kar/loc ulön-tuan | — | we are here | at your service". | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| casions, as connections | for instance by marriage. | on one | of the rare | visits paid | to one another | by those | who are |
1) Na nat keunoé tuan dumnaf = "are ye all there, ladies?"; and the reply is: na
2) Such formal entertainment is called peujameé, and takes place on certain special oc
w
IDANGS FOR A FEAST.
322
plantain-leaves. Round the vvhole is placed a cylindrical piece of tin or other metal called glöng, which serves to prevent the dishes from falling when the dalöng is moved about. The whole stands beneath a handsomely worked cover in the shape of a great truncated cone, the summit of which is sunk inwards so as to rescmble a crater '). Over this again is spread a costly cloth covering known as scuhab. '1 he second dalöng contains simply rice, but is also provided with the pro- tecting cylinder namcd glöng, the cover (sangè) and the cloth (senhab). To complete a feast at which idangs are used, after the rice and its accessories which we have just described, two more dalongs are brought forward, one filled with glutinous rice 2) and a sweet, savoury soi t of plantain sauce 3), and the other with sundry sweetmeats 4). If there are no persons of importance among the guests, two complete idangs wil! suffice, one being set in the front or stair verandah for the women. Should the food run short, more rice etc. is simply added. Hut distinguished guests often have a separate idang a-piece or between two of them, while the numerous attendants (rakans) who invariably accompany them, are given everyday fare. At a wedding-feast, as 011 all ordinary occasions, the male guests are served first: the women must wait till their lords have finishen] 5). The bridal pair have also food served them, and are even requested to eat out of the same dish °), but their share of the feast is of course merely nominal. After partaking of this pretended meal, the young pair are smeared behind the ears with yellow glutinous rice '), the bride by the bïsans (the relatives of her husbatul), the bridegroom by the pcunganjïts s) of the bride. On this occasion the bride receives from eacli of the bisans a gift in money, about one or two dollars.
| formed of pandan-leaves | and | are adorned | on the outside | with coloured | threads | and on the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| inside with | goldleaf. The | common hemispherical | covers made | elsewhcrc are called | sangè | |
| gampdng to distinguish is almost synonymous -with | them | from these the Javanese | beautiful sangè Daya. jajan pasar. | |||
| called bisati. This | name is at other | times | only used | to express | between the | |
| two pairs of parents | whose | children have | married one another. |
1) These covers are called sange, The handsomest are manufacturcd in Daya; they are
2) Bu leukat'. see p. 31 above.
3) Pisang pcungat, the Javanese kola\
4) These peunajdh, a word really meaning "food", but which in the colloquial
5) All, botli men and women, who join in escorting the bridegroom are for this evening
6) This is called meurab bu = to eat rice close together".
7) See p. 306 above.
8) See p. 316 above.
are called
the connection
u
This night is seldom enlivened by celebrations; piasans (a word wluch signifies much the same as is expressed by fmtasia in the jargon of the Levant) take place frequently on the three preceding evenings, but not on the wedding-night itself. There is more than enough to do however, for the time vvears on to morning before the completion of a the ceremonies etc., vvhich we have described. Achehnesc weddings of course exhibit some small local differences. We have assumed, too, that the bride and bridegroom belong to two different gampöngs, which is often though by „o means always the case. ere they are of the same gampöng, their fellow-villagers divide emselves as ,t were into two parties, one headed by the teungku the other by the keuchi', and all the formalities are gone through as though two gampöngs were interested i„ the event. Speaking generally ïowcver, the above desenption holds good for the whole of Great Acheh. At the conclusion of the fea
| feilt >w-vil lagers, | returns once | more | to his | house. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 8 T | n0thi g | f te | OCCl,rS | bUt tOWardS | S ' | First days married Iife |
,'m " ° "°' ni ht about
- - •, ic bi idegroom again goes to liis wife's house (wöï), attired as
on the previous evening, but now escorted by a small number of peunganjos, half of whom are men and half women. A bedstead is now set „p i„ the jurce or inner chamber, furnishcd with a mosquito-net and a vast pile ofcushions ') with eostiy embroidery In the centre of the is a thiek square sitting-mattress (Mam dut), for one persen, intended for the bridegroom's use, and at. short distance from ,t a sitting-mat for the bride, who thns sits o„ this oecasion „„ a lower level than her spouse. Some of the peunganjos who accompanicd thc bridegroom, reinforcod by one or two of their fcllow officials fron, the party of „,e bride. now prepare to conduct the young man to the jurèë. The bride is at thC baCk verandah i she is supposed to wash the feet of the bridegroom on his entering the jurèë, but as a matter of fact she is reheved of this task by one of the old women, and her share in to a timid from a distance.
| this ceremony | is confined | glance |
|---|---|---|
| AS S | as the | |
| i) hantay | suson = hI | rescmbling btd 1 s tp |
_ _ °™ bridegroom has taken his place on thc tilam, thc
pilcd Up cushions somewhat our bolsters in shane The
Tts,r:z«, r"h : ll,nr-•
pin.™, „ui,, JJZZ ''"' " " °f c°""° °n,, n*
324
bride is led in, still in full drcss. Once more she makes a deep obeisance before her husband, after which he gives her a small money present — say a dollar. A repast in the farm of an idang is thereupon brought into the jurèë but as a rule remains almost untouched. As soon as it lias been removed the bride retires to the back among the women, while the bridegroom joins the male guests and the fellow-villagers of the bride in the front verandah. Meantimc thcy both cliange their heavy clothing for the simpler garments in which the Achehnese are wont to sleep, for the social concourse in the verandahs soon ceases, and the leading peunganjn comes to summon the bridegroom. She leads him into the jurèë and up to the curtained bed. Here another peunganjo (of the bride's party) hastens to unroll the sleeping-mat, which lias up till now purposely been left rolled up 011 the mattress [tilam ék), to give the aged dame the chance of earning lier dollar "for the unrolling of the mat" '). The bride is now constrained, not without a considerable amount of scolding and persuasion on the part of lier mother and the pennganjós, to enter the room and join her husband. One or two patnganjös keep watch in the jurèë, in order now and then by a friendly word to encourage the pair to greater mutual confidence. They try especially to induce the bride and bridegroom to lie with their faccs turned towards one another, though in Acheh they do not go as far as in Java, where the desired position is sometimes effected by the assistance of old women, friends of the newly-married couple 2). The 3I11 Acheh the first three are those most strictly observed after a wedding. On the tliird, fifth and seventh days after marriage, the family of the bride offers the bridegroom and his peunganjös a formal feast 3) sucli as tliat described above. Ihe wliole of'the first seven days are however more or less festal
1) Upah Uiïètig tika.
2) They sometimes thus admonish the bride: "Turn not your back to your husband,
for that is a sin", be tapculikot lakbè, dèesa.*
3) *Peujantcë* see p. 320 above.
325
| ... | mme | ana Dridegroom | are daily | dressed | out in | their | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| wedding | toilette. | Early in the morning | the bridegroom | must | rcpair | to | |
| the meunasah | of the | bride's gampöng, | where, as we have seen, | all the | |||
| young | men of the village are congregated. | He is escorted | by a number | ||||
| of his | male | behind | him an unusually | large and | |||
| well furnished seperately, and | sirih-bag. hand him the great | He | now greet sirih-bag (bungköïh). He must also walk | each | of these | young | men |
| through | the gampöng | from time to time, and | wherever he | sees a number | |||
| of men sitting | together, | must hasten | up to them | and proffer sirih. | |||
| Should | he fail in these | civilities towards | his new fellow-villagers, | the | |||
| young | folk punish | him by | the steps | of the bride's | house | ||
| with ordure') | by | night, the | intention | being | that the | bridegroom | |
| should | step on the | unclean | when first | leaving | the house | in the | |
| morning. | As a rule, | however, | he is forewarned | in time and | escapes | ||
| this disagreeable | material consequence | of his shortcomings; | it is con- | ||||
| sidered | a sufficiënt revenge | to make | him ashamed. | ||||
| About | is completed | and he returns | again | ||||
| to the bride and he spends | house of his parents-in-law, the in his own gampöng. | to enjoy | his morning | meal | with the however, | ||
| During | these first | seven nights | the young | married | pair always | sleep | |
| under the | surveillance | of a | the extreme | youth | of | ||
| the bride | render | as | and | wife difficult in the | earliest | ||
| days, and | even where | this would | cause | no hindrance, | the Achehnese | ||
| are averse | to such | intimacy in | the beginning, and | call it «adopting | |||
| the .nstitutions | of the Arabs" »). | In other | Mohammedan | countries also, | |||
| as in Java marital | for example, rites early in wedlock. | we find | this | same dislike | of the full use of | ||
| All that | the husband | bestows | on his wife before she is thrown | on | |||
| him for | her support | is called biaya, and the custom | requires | that | he | ||
| should give | her no biaya until the seventh | evening after | marriage | This | |||
| first biaya may | be | in kind₃); | it then | consists of such things | as fish, |
peunganjös, who bear must
smearing thing
9 A. M. this peregrination peunganjös in the jurcc. The rest of the day,
peunganjö. Should living husband great
It Ï rZLTirr °btain£d T" H 'hC tCChniCal eX,,rCSSi°n for this Piment, o atteÏd the noL, T " f°r inS'anCe Where a yUU"e ma" nc«,ecls constantly
| o atteÏd | the noL | , T | " ° | ' | "e " | « constantly |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 234 above | '"«'eh-rec.at.ons | the meunasah | the fasting | mon,h..See |
2) Peut? hu kom ar ad.
3) I his is called biaya masa' (lit. "ripe ' or "cooked").
during ,»
piantains and other fruits, sirih, pinang, tobacco and gambir. It is however more usual for the husband to give money '), and the amount varies from six to eight dollars multiplied by the number of bungkays of gold in his wedding-gift. At the same time he gives her a complete suit of clothing known as seunalên (from salén — uto change" said of garments). This last gift is reciprocated by the bride on the seventh day (i. e. the day chat succccds the seventh night) by a gift of equal value in money or clothing to the bridegroom; this is also called seunalên. Where it consists of clothes, the adat prescribes that the bridegroom should at once don tliem and go back thus arrayed to his parents' house. **The "cool-**Not until after the morning meal on this seventh day is the wedding- ing". feast (,keureuja) regarded as concluded. It follows, therefore, that at this point the bridal pair require a "cooling" -). For this purpose they both sit down at the entrance of the jurèë with their legs stretched out straight in front of them. Boughs of the cooling plants already enumerated ') are dipped in flour and water (teupöng taweuë), and their feet are be- sprinkled therewith. The bridegroom alone is smeared behind the ears with yellow glutinous rice; this is done by a peunganjö of the bride. Meantime the mother, aunts and sisters of the bride assemble in the passage (rambat) of the house to take leave of the bridegroom on his depaiture for home. He anticipates their greeting by a deep obeisance, in return for which they give him money presents of an amount equal to those which he lias presented to the bride during the first seven evenings as a recompense for her seumbah 4). All these tedious ceremonies of the first seven days are sometimes simplified by being performed one after another on the first or third day 5). The eighth The wedding is now at an end, and after these seven busy days there succeeds a compulsory day of rest for the bridegroom. On the eighth day it is understood that he must not visit the bride (woc)•
1) Biaya tneuntah (lit. "unripe" or uraw").
2) Sce p. 305 above.
**3) Sec pp. 305—6 above. Thus both undergo the peusijuè* the bridegroom alone the peusunténg.*
4) See p. 324 above. These gifts of the young husband are called seuneumbah.
5) The saying is, uroë Ihce geufeutujdh = "they have made the third day into the
seventh". The converse of this may be observed in Java, where the ilamütans prescribed by the adat for the 3d, 5th and 7th months of pregnancy, often resolve theinselves into a single feast held in the 7th month.
327
whoso transgrcsses tliis rule of adat is sure, according to popular super- stition, to be devoured by crocodilcs (buya kab). On the ninth day the husband as a rule comes to his ncw home, but unaccompanied by the companions who on the previous occasion carried the great sirih-bag behind him. On this occasion, too, there is no ceremonial idang prepared for his reception. After the io'h or I2th night the bridegroom retires for a time to his Biaya. parents' house, to give his parents-in-law needful repose and an op- portunity to gossip over the events of the wedding feast. An "cider" is sent to him, generally at the new moon, on behalf of the parents of his spouse, to press him to return to his vvife. The young man yields to the invitation, and now brings with him the first real biaya for his wife; this is understood to mean a monthly present of money brought by the husband to the wife, so long as shc continues (in conformity with certain rules which we shall presently notice) to be maintained by her parents. This monthly allowance amounts on the average to about four dollars. I his visit of the husband usually lasts about cight days, and is separated from the next by an interval of about fourteen days. He continues going backwards and forwards in this way for about six months; not till then does he become a habitual inmate of his wife's house '), if his original home is in a gampöng close at hand. Where the paternal homes of the young couple lie at a great distance from one another, it will depend entirely 011 circumstances whether the man continues to be a mere occasional visitor to his wife's house or entirely exchanges the abode of his parents for that of his wife. After they have commenced to live as man and wife, the husband Gift of the gives to the woman who lias sacrificed her maiden state to him three to his gifts, fashioned of gold or silver according to the circumstances of the giver. These comprise a waist-belt (/albe kïïêng), which consist of a golden chain closing in front with a clasp made of gold or suasa (a compound of gold and tin), a wrist-chain (talbë jaroé) worn like a bracelet, and a finger-ring (cunchicn). At a distribution of effects in consequence of divorce or the death of one of the pair, these objects remain the property of the woman, whilst all other personal ornaments,
called prurnoh of the
| i) 1 hus | the wife | is very | properly | = po rumoh, | the "mistress |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| house". |
328
tne excePtlon of raiment in he most limited sense of the word, are always regarded as the husband's property and dealt with ac- cordingly. As the reader will have remarked, it is the adat which has so fur al most exclusively controllcd an Achehnese marriage as we have described it; we have laid more stress on the customary element than upon the rules of law. Most of these customs are, it is truc, looked on as indispensable by the Achehnese where the bride is a virgin, even though the bridegroom has been already several times married and is of a considerable age. At the same time exceptions may be made by agreement of both parties, nor will anyone dispute the lcgality of the marriage on the ground of neglect to perform some of the ceremonies above described.
J5TÏSÏ rU' °°W Achehnese marriage customs which are
legal conse-of 'mportance from a legal point of view. The principal are: in. Ihe power of the keuchi' (headman of the gampöng) to prevent a marriage on grounds connected with the interests of the gampöng; *2* '1 he betrothal-gift (tanda kong narit) and its legal consequences. 3 • 1 he adat-law under which the woman can never be required by her husband to leave her home with him, nay is even prohibited from do.ng so. The only exception to this rule is where both her family and the authorities of her native place consent to lier departure. This usually happens only (at the instance of course of the husband) where the woman's family is very inferior in rank or social position to that of the man, so that the customary gifts etc. on his part are not fully reciprocated on hers. In such cases the marriage is said "to be without adat" (hatta adat). 4°. '1 he gift after consummation of the marriage and the rules which govern it. Anyone who is not entirely a stranger to Mohammedan law will not need to be reminded that these four matters are, to use a much-abused term, among the "departures" ') from the law of Islam which characterize the native race. By-and-bye, when we proceed to examine the chief results of marriage as affecting the children born thereof, and the property of the married couple, we shall find that here also the social life of the Achehnese
1) The word in the original Dutch is «afwijkingen" (Tra,,sla tor).
329
is controlled by "ancient popular customs in conflict with Islam in this sense, tliat they suggest a custoniary lavv existing in the con- sciousness of the people" '). Before passing to this subject, however, we must gain some knowledge of the marriage contract as it exists in Acheh. Our assuming this important negociation as already complete lias not in any way affected our description of the wedding ceremonial; the less so, as the contract is generally concluded at a different time and place from tliat of the actual meeting of the bride and bridegroom.
8 2. The Marriage Contract.
It is impossible to describe the marriage contract in Acheh with the Nature of desired accuracy without first giving some details as to the rules of the marriage contract Mohammedan law on this subject, and the «denart.in.» fmm tu;, iunder Mo-* which prevail throughout a great portion of the E. Indian Archipelago! These rules of law have, it is true, been dealt with by Mr. L. W.
C. Van den Berg in his «Principles of Mohammedan Law"2), but very imperfectly, some of his principal facts being erroneous, and the ne- cessary notes on the actual practice in the E. Indies entirely wanting. In lus recent essay on the "departures" from these laws in actual practice in Java and Madura, the same writer has made it clear ••) that
4,88, with
| .) Ordinance | of ,ke, | ,h March | respect to the administration offustice amonr | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the native | population of | Great Acheh,, with | au explanatory | memorandum | bt Mr | T H | |
| Der Kinderen, ) beginselen | Batavia 1881, van het Mohammedaansche | p. 17. | recht". | ' | |||
| Jn | "" | j >>"'•'»»< ^or | de Taal- | Land- | en Volkenkunde | ||
| i\ ederlandsch-Indtc, | at the Hague, | for the | year ,892, | p. 4 et seq. | This essay | is | |
| made b h | f ' | ° "° | « | "-PPl^ented | by the | notes' | |
| eviJence oflil"' | ' y "''' ^ | '° ^ ° | ' | «"intentiowd | |||
| evidence of | h.s .gnorance. | It ,s now | clear | that these | notes really | contain | hardly |
| tracé of | what is peculiarly | characteristic | of the | practice in Java | and Madura. | To | quote |
| ingle instance; | in Batavia | marriages | are never | concluded | by the pangulus | as | such |
| recourse be.ng | had to a contrivance | called | tahklm | in the books | of the law, | but all mention | |
| eiveV bv th- ' | •l" f h "' | " ' ' | W""l<»"- | The information | |||
| g en by the | wnter of th.s | essay now for | the first | time in regard | to the very | characteristic | |
| hidedY | f | ' ' | " " | "««'"tion does not appear in the | |||
| th.rd edition | of he "Beg.nselen") | compri.es | nothing | more than | what we find | in the printed | |
| lZed°bv | T | ' ' | ' " l | ° absolutely | incorrect. | The | part |
| played by | pangulu at | a marriage | in Java and | Madura (p. | S t seq.) | is ignored | by |
7 n 2 K inkli k 45 g 455) 1>aSed n V4 US Wrilin s miUcd his last abundantly
,L 8 0, tlHS CSSay and Van de!erg S tJ3
(P 485! hC VCry ame f thU
15 an<1 S hUS Ver> i COm llete and f,en a 45 c
33°
he has not during his long residence in these regions given even a passing noticc to many of the most characteristic of these phenomena. We thus preface our remarks 011 the actual Achehnese marriage contract, not by a complete description of the Mohammedan contract, but by so much thereof as is absolutely necessary to show what portions of the Achehnese contract are peculiar to that country, and to rectify by the light of authoritative Mohammedan works the errors disseminated by Van den Berg. The marriage contract is, according to the Shafi'ite law-books, an agrecment in which the man and his vvife appear as the parties, the latter being represented by her wah. The subject of the contract is sexual intercourse and all that is connected with it; in return for tliis advantage, which is assured to the man by the contract, he binds hmiself to pay a dowry, which may be either then and there fixed by the contract, or else settled later on according to the wife's position and the local custom. He also undertakes to supply his wife with suitable food, clothing, lodging and attendance, or if he should wed other wives, not to devote more of his time to tliem than to her, ex- cept with her consent, etc. At the making of the contract there must be present two witnesses who fulfil the required standards of capacity, religion and morality. 1 he "acceptance" of the bridegroom must follow directly on the "offer" of the wali, and a settled form of words must be employed for both „offer" and „acceptance". Neglect of any of these rules renders the contract null and void.
| V an den Berg. | In short, | tliis essay | shows that | Van den ISerg has | nevcr | studicd on the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| spot the subjects | he treats | of, and that | the printcd | works containing | comments | thereon by |
| sundry lay | writers were | never even opened | by him | until after | his return to Europe. | |
| 1 he woman | is not the | subject of | the contract | into which | her guardian | enters on her |
| behalf, as \an | den Berg states | in his | Afwijkingen^ | ccrtain Shafi'ite | teachers | allegc that the |
| subject is | the woman, | others the man | and wife, | but tliey always | add, that | it is not their |
| persons, but | the enjoyment | of connubial | bliss that | is intended | to be signified. | That the |
| woman is a | party to the | contract appears | most clearly | from the | fact that she herself | may |
| piefer before | the judge. independently | and without | the intermediary | of a wali, any | claims | |
| arising from | the marriage, | such as the claim | to maintenance, | to suitable | lodging | or even to |
| divorce. The | duty of the | wali is to maintain | the | honour of the family, | and | to take care |
| that the woman | does not | contract | an undesirable | marriage | «_sJ, | |
| as the law-books | have | it), and thus | the contract | is concluded | through his intermediary. | |
| After completing | this task | he has nothing | more to say to the marriage | and | to the woman | |
| who contracts | it, till such | time as she | desires to marry | again. |
33'
| No conditions | of any sort | must appear | in the | contract. | Should this | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| rule be | transgressed, | the whole | would | be invalid, | if the | conditions |
| contained | anything | at variance | with the | essence of | Mohammedan | mar |
| riage, but | the contract | would | hold good, | the conditions ') alone | being | |
| invalid, if | the latter | did not | conflict with | essence | of the wedded | state. |
| Some | viz. | those in | the ascending | line, | the riglit | to give |
| a girl in | marriage | without | her consent, | if she | a maiden. | The law |
| recomme'nds, | however, | that | her consent | be asked, | and the | compulsory |
| riglit ceases not how. | on her | declaring | that she | has lost her virginity, | it matters | |
| I he right | of compulsion | is only given | to these | walis because | it is | |
| thought | that they | are better | able to promote | lier | actual interests, and | |
| because | her maiden | shyness | has yet to | be overcome. | ||
| Where | the girl | is no longer | a maiden | her consent | is essential; | indeed |
| the mature | unmaried | woman | has the | right to demand | to | be married, |
| provided her marrying. | that a suitor | presents | himself | whom the | law would | allow of |
| We thus | see how | foreign | to the dictum | of the | law is the | idea that |
| the woman | is the | subject | of the contract. | Males | under age | can also |
| be married it to be Ihe following are proper walis of law-books. | by their for their | walis with good. | their own a woman according to the Shafi'ite The | consent, | when the latter | see |
| i. 1 he | nearest | male relative | in the | ascending | line (the father, | or if |
| he be deceased | the | father's | father, etc.). | |||
| 2". Brothers, first | those who | are the | children | the same | parents as | |
| the women, | then step-brothers | on the | father's side. | |||
| 3". Male | descendants | in | the male | line of those | included | under 2 |
| above, it | being understood | that a | nearer degree | excludes a | more | distant |
| one, and | that in | each degree | a descendant | of | a full brother | of the |
| woman takes precedence | of those of | her step-brother on the | father's | side. | ||
| 4". The | brothers | of the father, | subject | to the same | rule as | 2". |
| I) In the | books of | Mohammedan | law certain | "conditions" are | citcd as pcrmissible, | but |
| these are in | fact closer | definitions | of the subject | of the contract, | as for instance | that the |
| brule should | be a virgin. | In such cases | separation {faskh) | is allowable | if the contrary | prove |
| to be true. | \ hat we might | call conditions | in the | rcal sense of the | word are | admissible |
| under the | law of Islam; | the I.aw | is supposed | to regulate all | the results of marriage | for |
| a ' ' | P «ishes | to surrender | any of his or | her rights, | he or she | |
| can do so in | practice, but | cannot forego | them in the | contract. |
walis, have be
Wali
of n
not aI ke and lf one of the arties
332
me male descendants in male line of those included in 40., following the same rule as 30. 1 lus list of collateral relatives 011 the father's side may be continued by the reader at his pleasure from the rules just given. Only where the bride has no agnates who fulfil the requirements of the law '), uiother class presents itself, which we need only cursorily mention since it now no longer exists owing to the abolition of slavery, viz. 6". The male patron (liberator) of the woman, and in case of his decease his agnates in the order in which they inherit. In each special case the vvali indicated by the law is he who stands closest to the woman in accordance with the above classification. A more nearly related class is replaced by one more distant only where the former does not exist or where its members are morally and phy- sically incapable of discharging the functions of wali. Thus for example the grandfather takes the place of the father when the latter is dead or insane, and the stepbrother 011 the father's side of the full brother when the latter is incorrigibly godless or unbelieving. Where, however, a wali of the next class is absent 2) or is unwilling to be a party to an unexceptionable marriage desired by a woman of mature age, the succeeding class does not take its place, but that which we shall here call the 7"1 viz.:
1 he C1 vil Authority₅). By this we must understand in the first
place the head of the Mohammedan Community or those who govern Moslim countries as his representatives. As a rule, however, the duty of acting as wali for women who have none, or whose proper guardians are absent or unwilling to act, devolves upon the qadhls or their deputies, sometimes on separate officials specially appointed to deal with marriage contracts (jLsuC^! èyi* lyX*) •>).
| least at the | moment of | making the contract) | of an upright | life (W/), as | opposcd | to the | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| unsanctified | state branded | by the Law | with the name | of fasiq. | |||
| renders reference | to the judge | necessary | is about 84 iniles | KSLWI. | |||
| — 1 o her | that hatli no | wali the civil | authority is wali". | ||||
| callcd kuwasa | kakim; | this name is never | applied | to the authority | o' those | who conclude | |
| otiei mauiages, | as \ an | den Herg would | have us suppose | (p. | 459). In Java | a distinction | |
| is drawn | the wali | nasab or wali | bafa (wali | by blood-relationship) | and the | wali | |
| nakim or kahm. The | part | played by the | panghulu | in the celebration | of a marriage |
1) lhe walt must be of the Moslim faith, of full age, of sound understanding and (at
2) The minimum distance of the wali's dwelling-place from that of the woman which
3) According to the precept handed down by the Prophct xJ, ...ILil jli J. ^.
4) 1 he power to give in marriage who have no wali at their disposal, is in Java
women
bctween or naib
. \v hen a man and a woman having no wali at her disposal desire Tahkim. to wed one another, tliey may by mutual consent select as wali another than the official charged with this duty, provided that other entirely fulfils the requirements that the Law makes of the qadhi. 1 he function of a wali thus selected is designated by the same name as that of an arbitrator in a dispute: hakam. The authorization to undertake the duty (given by the man or woman) is known as tahkim. W here there is no lawful authority according to Mohammedan ideas, or no official lawfully charged with the wali-ship of women who are without a wali, the tahkim is the only way of uniting a couple desirous of marriage. But in the case of this make-shift wali the requirement of suitability for the office of qadhi is no longer insisted on, and anyone may be appointed hakam who shows himself moderately fitted to perform the duties in the prescribed manner. In Batavia all such contracts of marriage are concluded in this way, since it is assumed that there cannot be in that town any legally ap pointed official to take the wali's place. The incapacity of pangulus in this respect is not based on their appointment by a government of infidels (in fact the Mohammedan books of the law recognize the legality of the appointment of a qadhi by a de facto kafir authority) but from the nullity of their appointment by written decree; since Islam ac- knowledges the appointment of officials as valid only when verbal. In other parts of Java this is less strictly insisted on, and the pangulu of a division is recognised as endued with the kuwasa kakim. Thus a wal. may be either an agnate of the bride, or the represen- tative of the civil authority, or one appointed to discharge the duties of tahkim by the man and woman themselves. The second party to the contract is the bridegroom, or if he be a minor, his guardian. Lvery wali, however, and every bridegroom and guardian may T1 smpower another to conclude the contract is his stead, as wakll. This —% X- >nly occasionally happens in the case of the bridegroom; the wali on KME °ther hand u almost tnvariably represented by a wakil, even though be actually present at the making of the contract. The reason of nis is not far to seek. lo conclude a valid contract of marriage, those conccrned must have
| f" f. " | . " | "y P"' of the | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| W n Sab | 0t rCgarde<1 | in a | Archipelago | as a special, | not | to sne.k | |
| f "s bemg an | md.spensable, | ministration; | it is general.y | understood | tl at | h sim, ly Tkcs | |
| ver as an expert | substitute | the task of | the wali. |
1 Y
334 uus
| ~ u~. | .. «.uuwicuge | oi | ine ruies | winch | control such | contracts. | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Otherwise, | should | questions | arise later on, there vvould be some danger | ||||
| of being | unable | to prove | the existence | of the | marriage, | or of | the |
| contract | which preceded | it being found | to be invalid. | ||||
| I his | difficulty | is least in | the case of the | bridegroom; | he has only | ||
| to express | 111 a few words his "acceptance" of | the "offer" made | by the | ||||
| vvali, and | these | may | be and | generally | are, dictated | to him at | |
| the moment | when | he has | to utter | them. Yet it happens | not unfre- | ||
| quently | as the writer | knows by actual experience — | that this ceremony | ||||
| has to | be repeated | all over | again | as often | as three | or four times, | |
| owing from his repeating | to the bridegroom's | them inaccurately. | not following | the words quickly | enough | or | |
| If the | wali, however, | were left to take | his chance, | a contract | would | ||
| seldom | be correctly | made. | He is strongly | recommended, | though | not | |
| imperatively | commanded | by | the Law, | to begin the ceremony | with a | ||
| short discourse | on | marriage, | preferably | in Arabic. | After | this he must | |
| express his | intentions at | some length, | adhering strictly to | ||||
| legal forms | of expression. | One | would not | be beyond | the | mark | in as- |
| serting | that in Arabia | as well as other | Mohammedan | countries, | hardly | ||
| one wali | in a thousand | could be found, | wlio would be able | to discharge | |||
| this duty | without | extraneous | help. | ||||
| ,, | . then,. | in all Mohammedan | . | countries, | certain | persons | who |
| their | help | such occasions | and | supply | the deficiencies | in the | |
| (necessarily | scanty) | legal knowledge | of the | general public. | As | the | |
| validity | of the contract | they | enter | into can only | be disputed | before | |
| the qadhT, it follows as a matter | of course | that | these registrars, | if we | |||
| may so | call them, stand | under | the supervision | of the qadhl; | in some | ||
| countries | he actually | appoints, | in others | only | recognizes | them. | The |
| names | they bear Medina | vary with "licentiates | the locality; for the | in making | Mekka they of marriages" | are called ), | in |
| Egypt | and in Acheh | pangulus') | or their | subordinates | |||
| These | officials discharge | their duties | in one | of two | ways. They |
words
the established
Mohammedan We find, iflicial mar-, 1 lage makers. on
inumlik '), in J fiqVi, in Java naib or district {këtip etc.) teungku meunasah.
| of the district | pangulus | in Java, | see my Mekka, | Vol. II p. 160 et | seq. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| license from | the qadhï. |
1) In regard to these mumliks and the "absolute" identity of their functions with those
2) L\ic s yL<. After undergoing an examination they reeeive a
3) It is these and not the pangulus of the larger "divisions" who conclude ordinary
s lC o
either dictatc to the wali and the bridegroom what they have to say or else have themselves empowered by the wali and enter into the marriage contract as his wakil. This last method, which is adopted throughout the whole of the E. Indian Archipelago, is also the one most generally resorted to in other Mohammedan countries, as for example in Arabia. This is indeed what we should naturally expect, for under the first-named system there is much greater risk of the whole affair being upset by the inadvertence of one or other of the parties. Under the more usual method, on the other hand, the authorization of the official deputy by the wali (a proper formula for which the latter dictates, to make it easy for the former) ') is given before the marriage contract is concluded, so that this official wakil lias to devote lus attention to the bridegroom only. On the latter he impresses beforehand his comparatively simple duties. "So soon" (tlius runs his lesson), "so soon as ever I have given utterance to the offer I shall pull your thumb" (which the official holds fast during the ceremony for this purpose) and then you must immediately repeat the words which I dictate". Such is also the practice in Java; the formulas used 011 such occasions vary locally in sundry particulars, but are everywhere the same in esscntials. Mr. van den Berg, who clearly made his first acquaintance with these matters quite recently₂) from Winter's brochure and the dictionaries of de Wilde and Coolsma, draws therefrom the entirely
marriages in Java, even in the ehiefs towns of the divisions which are of course at the same tune the cap.tals of their own distriets («distrik kota"). Very often the ofticial mariaee- maker is a mmor mosque-officer, for suitable persons are found among the personnel of the mosques, and the naib has often other work to do. It is only the marriages of «omen who have no wal. whieh are always concluded !,y the pangulu or some one appointed by him who exerc.scs the kuwasa kakim; but occasionally where the l.ride is of very good familv' an ordinary marriage is concluded by the pc.ngulu in person. .) In making this authorization, however, the wali is not restricted to any particular formula- hc may make .t by s.mply replying in the affirmative to a question of the registrar
2) Uns ,S quite manifest from the third edition of his Beginselen which came out in .88, thCrU, 8tat" (P; '45) that the bridegroom and the wali may empower another to re-
present them, but fails to notc that this is almost invariably done in the wali's case \Cain on p. ,49 we find a further error: «ƒ„ Netherlands-India and prol,al,ly (sic) *in other Mohammedan countries as veil, this takes place in presence of a priest>\ who receives for his Pams some small recompens,, and who recites a passage from the Koran or a p ra ver» In lus latest essay Van den lierg revokes this absurdity, it is but he substitutes a new onê in .ts place when he says: He (the «priest» in Java) does not invoke a Messingen the ruige, but he joins the couple ,n marriage, fust as the Registrar does with usThis is not so; in Java as m other Mohammedan countries the official as wakïl or agent olTers the woman to the br.degroom, in the name of the wali who has empowered him
unwarrantable conclusion that the presence of the so-callcd "priests" or other officials at Mohammedan marriages has in other countries "an absolutely (sic) different significance from what it has in Java and Madura" '). This results from his having failed to grasp the meaning of the wali's autliorization. The persons who have entrusted to them the task or special commission to conclude marriage contracts in their division or district have naturally no liking for competition, being human enough to feel a strong inclination to monopolize the profits arising from the making of marriage contracts. This finds support in the wish of the authorities to protect the law governing domestic life from becoming a prey to confusion. If everyone who, rightly or wrongly, had the reputation of being a suitable person to manage the preliminaries of marriages, was allowed to act in such matters, there would be much more confusion in the Mohammedan lawsuits arising from the relations between married people than is now actually the case. Thus we find every precaution taken to avoid such a state of things s). In Java the district pangulus have an easy task in this respect. First of all they have hardly any to compete with them in the inland districts, and in the next place the official makers of marriages have the support of the chiefs, who would regard it as an act of usurpation on the parts of a kyahi or doctor of Mohammedan law to conclude a marriage contract. At places on the coast and especially at Batavia the conclusion of contracts by "amateurs" in this line is of very com- mon occurrence, and no one thinks of questioning their legality 3). If we ask why this so scldom takes place inland we reccive the unanimous reply that 110 one dares to assume the responsibility for fear of being
| ean see that | the function | of this agent | of the wali is entirely | distinct from | the exercise | of | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the kuwasa | kakim, which | Van den | lierg has identified | therewith. | |||
| or official | marriagi-maker) | deelares the | marriage | to have heen eoncluded, | the farties are not | ||
| man and | 1wife, even | thottgh the formalities | by which | their | willingness | to wed is declared | |
| are complete | in every | other respect". | Such marriages | have in fact been | often declared | valid | |
| by the Mohammedan | courts in Java, | in which | those who | are interested | in a seperation | ||
| are allowed | to sit. [Recent | legislation | in Java | has now (by | ordinances | passed in in | 1895 |
| and 1898) | confirmed | and protected | that adat by which | marriage | contracts | are concluded | by |
| permanent | district pangulus. | Those | who aid in | the making | of a Mohammedan | marriage | |
| without | proper authority, | are punished, | but the marriage | itself | is not declared | unlawful, | as |
| this would | conflict with | the religious | laws and customs | of the | natives]. |
1) See p. 459 of his essay above quoted on the "Afwijkingen". Even the uninitiated
2) See niy Mekka, Vol. II p. 161.
3) Here again Van den lierg has gone quite astray. "Unlesshe says he {the "priest"
u
337
| ™ e,..eu | an attempt | to | ,ob the pangulus | „f | p | es. Thee | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| would | however »ver„„,e„t | be „„ hwW deelared | means the district | of frustrating pangulus | such to be exelusively | -amateurs", | |
| empowered | to act | as attornies | of the | walis. | |||
| In all | Mohammedan | lands, | however, | in the inland | parts | of Java | just |
| as much | as m Arabia, | we find | to the | rule of invoking | the | ||
| services | of apppomted | or | licensed makers | of marriages. | For instance | ||
| where | a recogn.zed | expounder | of the | law gives | in marriage | a vvoman | |
| whose | wah he himself | is, | or where | he is empowered | by | a «end | of |
| ".OW" | ' | nks | of raising | any objection. | Nor | ||
| agam would | any maSe n | Mohammedan thC gr lmd | Court thEt | ever protest miniSter | against f rdigi0n WaS | the validity preSCnt | |
| What | is true of the | office | of wali applies | also | to that of witness. | A | |
| marriage | is not valid | unless | ït has been | concluded | in the | presence | of |
| two witnesses | who | in the opinion | of the | judges | on whose | verdict | the |
| disputed | vahdlty depend», | satisfy | the requisite | standards | |||
| and morahty. | There | cao thus | be „„ better | means | „f gaarding | against | |
| danger | th„ respect, | than | by selecting | witnesses | who have | been | for |
| good and | all deelared | to be suitahlc | by | the judgc | „r his representative. | ||
| In point | of fact | we find | in many | Mohammedan | countries, | as | an |
| appendage | to cvery | qadhl's | court, a number | „f | professional | witnesses | |
| cal led adl | ), who | lend thcir | assistance | for a moderate | fee | in marriage | |
| and other | eontraets. | This also | holds | trne, | of | the | |
| mhan Arehipelago. | Herc the | district pangulu, | or | whatcver | other name | ||
| the maker | of the | marriage contract | may | be knowu | by, causes | one | or |
| w„ of the | officers | of the mosqoe | to attend | marriages, | and these | obtain | |
| tor their | services a share | of their | chief's | fecs. | |||
| The above | refutation | of | errors which, | clumsy | as they | are, have | |
| persisted | owing to | the appearance | of authority | wit], | which | they were | |
| enunciated, Achelinese | puts us marriage | in a position contract. | to | begin our | description | of the | |
| It is usually | concluded | in the | chapel which | also serves as | the meeting- | „„„„ | |
| house and | caravanserai | „f the | gampong, | the | one „r | two davs | |
| " | or wedding | which | has been | dcscribed above. |
P thcir rivUeg Un SS ,hc G
exceptions
aCt 35 Wah no one thi
t°heLT ° ° "° ' ° "
The witncsscs- as to suitability
'™ Cf rC
,w-- ---- 22
Where it does not take place beforehand and the ceremony is made part of the wedding itself, the contract is concluded in the front verandah (sramoé rcunyeun) before the bridcgroom is invited into the juree. The teungku Whcn the wali by relationship is available, and is both able and and "waki'r'. w'"'ng to lend his help, the teungku of the meunasah ') manages the affair in exactly the same way as is done by the district pangulu in Java. This is likewise the case when the woman has been married before and has no wali at her disposal. Of such a woman it is popularly said: "she has the right to be her own wali"2); and though this saying is not lcgally exact, it expresses clearly enough for all intents and purposes the fact that she has the right to join with her intended husband in appointing a hakam. The latter should in this case properly possess the qualifications required of a qadhl, for there are regularly appointed qadhïs in Acheh₃). As however the qualifications for the office of qadhï are not very narrowly scrutinized in Acheh, it follows as a matter of course that much latitude is allowcd to the woman's subsi- diary wali appointed by tahkim. While however, the theory of religious law leaves the choice of this liakam entirely free, the Achehnese adat limits it strictly to the teungku. Amateur marriage-makers such as are commonly found at Batavia would be heavily fined by the ulèëbalang in Acheh. Where a virgin has no wali by relationship at her disposal, she must not be married by the teungku, but must, as we shall see directly, go to the kali. Let us however first give a closer description of the two sorts of contracts which are concluded by the teungku. The forma-Before the bridegroom enters the meunasah, the wali of the maiden or woman who is to be given in marriage appoints the teungku his attorney in some such words as these: UI appoint you, oh Teungku, to be my wakïl, to give my daughter (or sister etc.) in marriage to the bridegroom, who will (immediately) come hither" 4). The answer is "incha alah", i. e. "If it so please God!"
| and his keuchi' | shane | indeed in | the introductory | negociations | and the | procession | to the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| gampöng of contract. | the bride, | ;hould such | take place, | but bear no | part in the concluding | of the | |
| lintö teuka. | The teungku | as a rule | dictates this | formula to the | wali word for word. | If the |
1) I. e. of the bride's gampöng. The teungku meunasah of the bridegroom's gampüng
2) Ka jcuèt jidong wali keu droë ji/i.
3) See p. 332 above.
4) Wakila/i ulön tuan ia' Teungku neupeunikah ontu' ('seëdara) ulSn tuan si N. ng'on
VVhen the bridegroom enters the meunasah with a small following from his own gampöng, his companions open a bundie which they have brought with them, and in which are rolled up two handsome sleeping mats and a number of costly cushions. These represent the future bridal couch, and are spread for the bridegroom to sit on during the making of the contract. Close by is placed a bowl (mundam) of water, wherewith the teungku and the bridegroom rinse their mouths before commencing the ceremony. As the name of Allah is to be invoked, it is not fitting that any remnants of food, tobacco or such should defile the instrument to be used in glorifying God. bridegroom also place in the foreground a The marriag
| 1 he attendants | of the | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| {bate) | ë!ft | |||
| (jmauièe | jmamèë | jinamcc | ||
| S | ||||
| ulec | (sikatöc [ureuëng | mcuïh) peuteungahan), | 4 (ureuèng |
platter {bate) containing the sum of money given as a wedding-present ë!ft" ). The ') is seldom mentioned in the contract, since it is in every case pretty closely defined by the adat. The for the daughters of princes of the blood (tuankus) amounts to oo dollars, or according to the old-fashioned mode of expression, "a kati (l'/ lb.) of gold"; for those of persons of distinction ) .such as ulèëbalangs, imeums and others who are their equals in rank or wealth, 100 dollars or 4 bungkays») of gold; for those of middle rank such as keuchi's, teungkus, wakis and the like, 50 dollars or 2 bungkays of gold, and for the lesser folk 25 dollars or 1 bungkay. He who marries a poor woman need only give one or two tahés (tahils) or even less. The jinamecs here spoken of have reference only to marriage with a maiden; 111 other cases they depend mainly on mutual consent. As a rule the dowry is paid at the conclusion of the contract₃). In
of
| wali happens | to be one | of the immediate | next | kin of the | bride, as for | instanee her |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| father or brother, | the adat | forbids him | to be present | at the concluding | of | the contract |
| (see p 302), | and thus the | aulhorization | is given | in | some other | place. Indeed |
| happens | even where | the relationship | is much | more distant. | ||
| .) This word | sheds a remarkable | light | on the history | of the Achehnese marriage. Derived | ||
| as .t is f.ora | jamee = guest, | it can only | be construed | to mcan, | in its original | sense, the |
| g.f or recompense | given | by a guest | to him who | his hospitality | towards | him. In |
| sp.te of the | great change | unquestionably | wrought | by Islam in the | Achehnese | conception |
| o marriage, | there still remains, | as we | have seen, much | that is based | upon the | idea of the |
| husband as | guest in the | house of his | wife (frumoh- | see p. 327 | above). | |
| but at 20 only | in gambling | and in the | pepper trade. | A tahé = { th | of a bungkay, so | that' |
| in marriage | it is | equivalent to | 5 dollars. | |||
| to regard the | dowry as a | debt, which | remains unpaid | until separation | or the death | of one |
2) A bungkay of gold is reckoned at 25 dollars for the purpose of marriage contracts,
3) This is entirely different from the custom in Java, in many parts of which it is usual
bcforehand often
extends
a
contracts
some cases half the sum is at once repaid to the bridegroom, but this is merely formal, as the bride receives this half again in the form of a present when she pays her fïrst visit to her parents in law after the wedding In addition to the bridal couch and the dowry, the attendants of the bridegroom bring with them two sets of "standing sirih" {ranub dong) of the same kind as those already described '). In some districts (as for instance the Mukims Biïêng) this is replaced by a sweetmeat in the form of network, called halua pulöt. Both of these are intended for distribution among the onlookers. Two leubès₃) from the bride's gampöng, chosen by the teungku, serve as witnesses. They begin by carefully verifying the amount of the dowry on the bate or platter. 1 he bridegroom now takes his place opposite the teungku, behind whom sit the two witnesses and the crowd of onlookers. After they have duly rinsed their mouths, the teungku pronounces in Arabic his J'/iutbah (Ach. köteubah). This, though not actually prescribed as indis- pensable, is strongly recommended by the Law to the wali or his substitute 4). As a rule he greatly abbreviates this task, using only the words: "In the name of Allah! unto Allah be the praise, and blessing and peace upon the Messenger of Allah. I exhort ye, oh servants of Allah, and myself to the fear of Allah ! 3). The teungku now clasps the right hand of the bridegroom in his own and says "When I shake (your hand) you must immediately make answer °)! Thereupon he makes the "offer" in some such words as these '): "I unite you in marriage with N., daughter (or sister etc.) of
| of the pair. | In most | parts of the | province of Preanger | it is considered | to be patnali, | or | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| forbidden of a divorce. O 7 | by the adat gumpöng linto; see | for the woman below. | to receive | any portion | of the | dowry even | in case |
| are called | santris in | Java. It is | noticeable that | witnesses | are selected | in Acheh | in the |
| same way as in Java | and other parts | of the Archipelago. | (See | p. 337 above). | |||
| kötcubaJi, | which treats | of marriage | as an institution | ordained | of hcaven. | ||
| jiwakilah | uba' u/dn (ngon | jinamcè. .. | bungkay), | — Lon-trimbng | nikah ji | (ngon jinamcé ji... | |
| bungkay). | The portions | in parentheses | are often | omitted. |
2) P. 300. It is also called "marriage sirih'' (ranub nikah).
3) Persons who understand and observe to some extent the precepts of religion. These
4) See p. 71 above.'
5) I.earned tcungkus (who are indeed few and far between) know by heart a longer
6) *"oh ka lön-yb taseiCöt lé.
7) 1 he Achehnese is: lön-peunikah gata ngon Si N., ancu (sc'èdara) Si X., nyang ka
a>
1
34'
X, who has empowcred me to do so (under bargain of a dowry of so many bungkay)." He novv pulls the bridegroom's hand as a signal and the latter then immcdiately repeats after him the following words I accept her hand (against a dowry of so many bungkay)." The teungku then recites the fatihah (the first surah of the Ouran) during which all hold their hands before their faces as is customary during prayer. After this comes a general offering up of praise to God, and finally the teungku repeats another prayer generally used in marriages, beginning with the words "Oh Allah! make union between these two, even as thou didst unite the water and the earth" etc. All present express by their "amens" their sympathy in this prayer for blessing, and then the bridegroom thanks them all by a seumbah or respectful obeisance. The order of proceedings is almost exactly similar when the teungku Tahkïm. appears not as the substitute of a wali, but as deputed bv tahkwi by a woman who has no wali ') and her intended husband. Here the authorization of the teungku by the wali is replaced by the woman's tahkïm; and in the "offer" he adds after the bride's name the words "who has empowered me" or "who has entrusted herself to my charge by tahkïm,"2) no mention being made of her wali. The expedient of the tahkïm is very frequently resorted to in Acheh, although almost every ulèëbalangship has its "kali" (qadhi), and in other Mohammedan countries where such is the case, recourse is had to the qadhï or the minor official invested by him with the wali-ship of women who have no wali. The reason is not far to seek The ulèëbalangships are not indeed very large, but the bad state of the roads and the general insecurity prevailing in Acheh would render it very burdensome to the people to be obliged to go to the residence of the kali for the celebration of every one of the numerous marriages of this description. In Java the facilities are greater, and the pangulu of a division receives all women who are without a wali at the chief centre of the province. The adat in Acheh is much stricter than in Java in regard to the
| 0 It | must be remembered | that | the wali's | absence is legally | accepted | whenever | he who |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| is entitled | from his | relat,onship | to the bride | to fulfit this | function | resides at some | little |
| istance (in which | from the br.de s takhtm | home, resorted to) are of very common | or is unwilling | to lend occurrence. | his assistence. | Cases of this | kind |
2) Nyang ka jiwakilah drbïji btï ulön or „yang ka jipeutahkim droeji ba" ulon.
ls
342
part to be played in the concluding of marriage contracts by the authorities of the gampöng, and by the kalis in marriages of the kind which we shall presently proceed to describe. A marriage would not indeed be pronounced invalid in Acheh any more than in Java, on the ground that it was concluded without the coöperation of the heads of the gampöng (in Java of the district pangulu). Hut while in the latter countiy the maker of the marriage would escape with a mere censure '), all concerned would be heavily fïned in Acheh. The keuchi' and teungku are zealous in maintaining their authority and the profits which they derive from its exercise. In this they are supported both by their overlords the ulèëbalangs, and by the people of the gampöngs, whose rights and claims they maintain against invasion. I he part played by the keuchi' in the preparations for the marriage is, as we have already seen, of great importance; his authority is also required for the concluding of the contract. In this the teungku, the "mother" of the gampöng, is the active agent, since he alone is acquainted with the requisite formalities₂), but he would not venture to carry out his task without the presence and authority of "father" keuchi'. And although the teungku is the person who actually enters into the contract {peukatib 3), peunikah or peukawén) it is to the keuchi' alone that the adat allots a fixed sum as recompense. This fee is called ha katib, ha nikah or ha' chupéng, specch-maker's money, marriage-money or *chupéng-*money, chupéng being the little metal plate which young girls wear to cover their persons. The ha'katib. The ha' katib amounts to one mas (samaih) as it is still called, i. e. '/4 of a dollar. The teungku is paid so much as the parties concerned see fit to give him. He can adduce no right founded on adat, but 011 the other hand he has this advantage, that his fee, though not definitely fixed, is made to correspond with the requirements of the occasion. He usually receives one dollar, sometimes more; half of this sum he makes over to the leubès who stand by him as witnesses.
. \ re: .1. __i
| in Java and | Madura amateur | marriage | makers are | now punished | by fine], | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| of soir.e his presence. | more experienced | fellow-villager, | who | acts only at | the teungku's | request | and in |
| enunciation | of the köteubah, | which | the law requires | from | the wali. In | Arabia the | person |
| authorized | by the wali is said | to conclude | the contract | (JuUjl |
1) [Since the above was written the Government has interfered in this matter, and both
1) Many teungkus do not possess the requisite knowledge; these call in the assistance
2) The action of the registrar is called peukatib because its most difficult part is the
Under the Mohammedan law there is no reason why the marriage of a maiden of full age who lias no wali should not be performed through the mediation of the same official who acts for a divorced woman or a widovv under similar circumstances. In both cases it is the custom in most Mohammedan countries to have recourse to the qadhi or the official charged with like functions, even where the law admits of resorting to tahkim under certain conditions. In Acheh the tahkim is habitually applied in the latter case, subject to the choice of a hakarn being limited to the tentigku of the woman's gampöng, so that we might naturally expect to find the same method adopted for the marriage of a maiden of full age. Iliis however seldom happens, the intervention of the kali being The kali as deemed necessary in such cases. This is undoubtedly due to the fact mTrrlage con-f that in Acheh the great majority of maidens are given in marriage rac^s before they arrivé at the age of puberty, and the help of the kali is indispensable in view of the peculiar manner in which most of these marriage contracts are concluded among the Achehnese. There is thus also a tendency to invoke the assistance of the kali in the absence of a wali in those rare instances where a girl is married for the first time after reaching maturity. It must be borne in mind that according to the Shafi'ite law it is only the agnates in the ascending line that have the right to give a maiden in marriage without her consent. Thus where such ascendant relatives are wanting the marriage of a maiden is impossible under the Shafi'ite ritual, since the refusal or consent of a minor has 110 force. In Acheh, however, there is a universal and deeply-rooted prejudice against allowing a maiden to remain unmarried till she attains her majority. 1 his we have already noticed in the beginning of our des- cription of the marriage ceremony, but to guard against error we must here supplement this by observing that Mohammedan law not only places no impediment in the way of contracts of marriage between children, but even expressly permits girls under age to be handed over to their husbands when, as the saying is, "they can endure the married state" '). This last contingency is considered by Mohammedans in all
Tuhfah
| I) This | expression | is to be found | in the | (Vol. | VI p. 442 | of the marginally |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| noted edition | of as-Sharwani | of Cairo, | A. II. 1305): | gU-SfO | , 17 ^ | |
| and further | on »>~j | £=>-^5 | «JUX-Clj | J c^ob | U |
J
countries to arise at a vcry carly age, and in Acheh one secs childrcn whom we should deern of an' age to be taken on the knee, making purchases in the market in the capacity of matrons! Now as many of these girls have, whilst still unmarried, lost their fathers and grandfathers who are their proper walis, the Shafi'ite ritual conflicts with the Achehnese adat on this point. Means have however been found to reconcilc this difficulty.
n3ahaiffi°f R ^ diffiCUlt t0 giVC a dear exPIanation of this expediënt without
once more digressing from our subject. As a matter of fact the Shafi'ite
school permits its disciples to follow some other ritual in certain isolated
cases. Such partial following of another school is called taqtid') i. e.,
clothing with authority. In Java, for instance, taqtid is commonly
resorted to in order to fix the qiblah (the direction in which the
devout must turn when praying) since the rules of the Shafi'ite school are too strict to be carried out in actual practice. It is also customarily employed in the fulfilment of neglected religious duties on behalf of deceased persons. We should have looked to find in Van den Berg's Beginselen a discussion of this subject to which we might here refer, but we seek in vain for even the bare mention of the question. Taqlid. We shall only mention here so much of the law as to this sort of taqlld as is indispensable to our subject, for a full description would detain us too long -); we therefore merely quote such opinions of the teachers as are followed in actual practice at the present time.
| "And the | married state | may not be entered | into | with her who cannot | yet endure | if for |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| this there | is required the | testimony of four | women." | In Java also the | "handing | over" of a |
| girl to a | husband before | she is of | mature age | enough, | for in the | opinion of |
| the Mohammedan capacity to endure | teachers the married | the usual state. | signs of puberty | are not | necessary to constitute | a |
| school and | its founder; | for example, | the recognition | of the imam as-Shafi'i | by the Shafi'ites | |
| is eminently | taqlid. But | in its technical | use the | word is more especially | applied | to the |
| adoption in exceptional | cases of the | ritual of another | imam. So it is said | in answer | to the | |
| question why | such and | such a Shafi'ite | does a certain | thing which | is at variance | with the |
| teaching of | his school, | such as drinking | fermented | liquors (other | than wine): | "he resorts |
| to the taqlïd" | (that of Abu | Hanïfah | in the case in point). | |||
| derably from | one another | in details. | The best exposition | of the subject | is to be found | in |
| the above-mentioned | edition | of the Tuhfah | vol. VIII | pp. 3,5 t seq. | The question | is akin |
| to that as to whether | the | laynian (1. e. he | who is not endowed | authority | as a teacher) | |
| has a madhab | or not; | on this latter | point also | the Shafi'ite | are | divided. In |
| regard to | this we must | recollect that | as measured | by theoretical | lr.w, all or almost | all |
| Mohammedans | of the present | time, even | the so-called | doctors, are | only laymen |
1) This word is also used by the disciples of any given school with reference to that
2) The of the taqlid is somewhat complicated and difler consi-
is common
doctrine the authorities
e with authorities
| The | doctrine | is, then, | that every | Mohammedan | is authorized | in a |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| given | question | to follow | a different | school | to that to | which he is |
| supposed | to belong, | provided | he | do so vvith | full knowledge | that |
| this other | interpretation | is supported | by an imam | of equal | authority | |
| with him | whom | he himself | follows, | and that | with all | |
| the rules | controlling | the | question in point | in that | other | since, |
| were | it othervvise, | inconsistencies | would arise | from following | partly | |
| one school | and | partly another. | Some | add to this a further | condition | |
| forbidding most agreeable. | the selection | from | every | school of what | seems | easiest and |
| According | to | the prevailing | opinion, | hovvever, each | individual | may |
| make | use of this | permission | 011 his own | behalf | only; for instance, | the |
| judge | and the | mufti must | confine | themselves | to their own | school in |
| their | verdiets or | interpretations | of | the law, | since these | affect not |
| themselves | but others. | It is indeed | allowed | that | the ideal | |
| find him | portrayed | in the | books of the | law, should | be guided | e'ntirely |
| in his pronouncements by | the Quran, | by tradition and by | what according | |||
| to his | (the | is derived | from both | these sources | by the | |
| consensus | of the | infallible | community | of Islam. It | is, however, admitted | |
| without | hesitation | that it | was only | in the first | two centuries | after |
| Mohammad | that | there were | any who | came up to this Standard, | and | |
| that now-a-days | such a phenomenon | would be esteemed | a miracle. | It | ||
| is now | admitted | as a fact | that no teacher, | no matter | how | great he |
| be, can | do more | than simply | interpret | the law-books | of his school. | |
| Besides | this it is | matter of | common | knowledge | that the | qadhïs are |
| very seldom | chosen | from the | ranks of the | most | learned. The | existing |
| qadlus might | at best | be described | as "make-shifts" '), | |||
| but the | great majority | of them | do not | even come | up to the definition | |
| of this | term found | in the | books of | the law. They | are in fact | quite |
| ïll-litted | to their | task, and | are appointed | by | authorities | for the |
| sake of | maintaining | social | order, but | are of course | not allowed | to go |
| outside | the limits | of their own | school | of doctrine. | ||
| To return | to our | main | subject; where | Achehnese | girls | are under |
| age and | their walis | in the | ascending | line are | dead or absent, | their |
| being given school. | in marriage | is | facilitated | by the | of the | Hanafite maid'/ns' |
| ) rhat | is to say, such | as only | partially fulfil | the requirements | which the | Law makes |
he is acquainted school,
qadhl, as we qadhts) view
qadhx ad-dharürah, the iian.fite law ?s to th tenets i.
In the first place the order of sequence of the walis in the school of Abu Hanïfah dift'ers from that of the Shafi'ites. In the former the descending line takes precedence of those men- tioned in the list given on pp. 331—33 above, so that the son ifoffull age has the first right to be wali of his mother '). Otherwise the series is the same as we have described it so far as the agnates are concerned, but after these come in the first place the mother (who under Shafi'- ite law car. never be a wali), and then the relations on the mother's side in order corresponding to the degree of consanguinity. After these comes the patron and finally the civil authority 2). Among the Hanafites moreover, a woman of full age can never be given in marriage without her consent even though she be a virgin₃); on the other hand all walis have the right to give a virgin who is under age in marriage without her consent. 1 he only distinction that they make between the walis in the ascending line and others consists in tliis, that when the former have exercised the said right of compulsion, the marriage contract receives absolutely binding force, whereas in the case of a forced marriage being arranged by one of the other walis of the woman, the latter, as soon as she is of full age and becomes aware of the circumstances, has the right to demand faskh (separation)4). The same holds good as regards boys under age who have been married by their guardians, but in their case the compulsory power even of the walis in the ascending line is simply conditional. Under the Hanafite law we also find an absent wali replaced by his successor in the list, and not directly by the civil authority as is the case with the Shafi'ites. In Acheh it is the universal custom to apply in these matters, so far as appears desirable, the teukeulit, as the Achehnese pronounce taqtid. In regard to this it is a somewhat singular fact that not only do the kalis of Acheh recognize this adat (though they ought properly
| after the honour | of his family; | and this is recognized | by the | Mohammcdan | teachers them | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| selves: but | actual guardianship | of the son over | his | mother is of course | unknown. | ||
| recommended. | The Hanafites | consider | even the marriage | of a woman | of full age without | a | |
| wali permissible and thus brings | and only dishonour | admit a right on her family. | of protest | when the | woman marries | beneath | her |
1) It will be observed that the function of the wali as such consists simply in looking
2) As to this see the Sharh al-wiqayah (Kasan 1881) p. 124.
3) 1 his is permitted among the Shafi'ites, the asking of the woman's consent being only
4) Sharh al-wiqayah pp. 122—23.
speaking to keep entirely clear of adat and follow the Shafi'ite law only m the exercise of their office) but it is even obligatory to invoke their help in order to conclude a marriage contract vvhich is unlawful under the Shafi'ite, though permitted by the Hanafite law. This rule has ap- parently been adopted through mistrust of the knowledge of the teungkus, and through fear that if the matter were left entirely in their hands many marriage contracts would be entered into which would prove completely at variance with the Law. There could of course be no suggestion of entrusting such duties to "laymen," which in theory would be the proper course. must further be borne in mind that in these numerous cases of Hanafite marriages of virgins, no one thinks of expecting from the bridegroom and the wali, even with the kali to assist them, a full knowledge of all the rules controlling marriage under the Hanafite teaching, although the law, as we have seen, makes this a condition in regard to the taqtid. It is enough simply to keep up appearances, and to follow, however faultily, the outward form. The wali and the bridegroom go to the kali with the girl and the authorities of her gampöng (the kettchï, the teungku and the two leubès who serve as witnesses) in order to bale meudeuhab as it is ca ed (.. e. to change the madhab or school of doctrine under his guidance.
The circumstances of the case, viz. that the girl has no walis in the Formalities ascent ing line or that they live at too great a distance to act in the oftl!®"chjïn£- but desire to give her in marriage according to custom are madhab." first communicated to the kali. He replies somewhat as follows: «According to our imam (as-Shafii) it is not permissible to give this maid marriage in the absence of her father and grandfather; this can only be done according to the teaching of the imam Abu Hanifah" \ ïereupon the wali and bridegroom reply: «We will follow your decision, oh Teungku!"»). This is really quite improper, as in case of faqhd there should be no mention of following the decision of a third person.
bridegroom a formula which
| _ | ° | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| ThC kaH | n W | diGtateS | to both | wali and |
| i) Or the | bridegrooms | guardian | if he be | under age |
3) Juin nyang hukSm Teungku.
.XiX-'srjï» —"»»**....
34S
is understood to authorize them to have recourse to the taqlld for the matter in hand. 1 his runs as follows: "we embrace the authority of the Hanafite Imam, this is our belief; I agree with the Hanafite imam in this question, tliat it is permissible to give in marriage a child under age who has neither father nor grandfather; I am convinced of the force of the Hanafite arguments" '). After this mock taqlld the kali is empowered by the wali in the same way as the teungku in other cases. The marriage ceremony is then completed, and as soon as the girl's family ") are of opinion that she is fit to share her husband's bed, she is handed over to him or
r.ither he is brought to live with her. I he common people who have recourse to this takeulit in actual practice, have no knowledge of the niceties of the question. It is enough for them to know that a special method known as bale meudeuhab, which is stamped with the approval of the ulamas of Acheh, and in which the kali is regarded as an indispensable guide, has to be adopted in order to marry young girls who have no walis in the ascending line and that this guide must rcceive 4 dollars for his trouble. It may even be doubted whether the majority of kalis, whose incomes are augmented to no inconsiderable degree by this balé' meudeuhab, have any real knowledge of its origin. Indeed some kalis find them- selves compelled (like the teungkus) owing to their ignorance to have their task performed for them by some helpful friend who is well versed in the law. As we have seen above, the kali is also resorted to 011 the less common occasions when a virgin of full age whose wali is absent or who has no wali, is given in marriage.
The ta'ltq As Acheh forms a part of the East Indian Archipelago, our remarks adat wantint 4.1 •, , in Acheh. on tllc marriage contract would be incomplete if we failed to notice one negative peculiarity, namely the complete absence in Acheh of a very characteristic adat which prevails among the vast majority of Moslims in these regions. Here again a slight digression is necessary in the absence of any reliable authority on the subject.
1) Geutanyuë tatamong ha' imeum Hanapi, mcuribë ta'e'tikeuèt: uldnteu iköt imeum Hanapi
ha' masaalah nyoë, mc'è peukawin ancu' nyang chut, nyang ha na ku ngon ja; uldnteu ï- t ikcu'èt kuat da li Hanapi.
2) The opinion of four women prescribed by the Law, is not insisted on in such cases,
that of the mothei' or perhaps the elder sister being accepted as sufficiënt.
The relation of vvife to husband is finally fixcd in all its details by the Mohammedan Iaw, and, as we have seen, there must be no conditions made on either side in the marriage contract, a fortiori none that would in any way modify this relation. The position of the vvife as defined by the fiqh or law of Islam is in many ways a very un- favourable one, and this not merely as measured by European standards; yet in many Mohammedan countries there prevails in practice an inter- pretation of the law much more favourable to the woman. This is based on the pre-existing social conditions which Islam found established on its first introduction, and which it was unable to exterminate. Such are for example the obligations of the husband in regard to Difficulty ex- the provision of maintenance, lodging, clothing etc. for his wife. These perienced are indeed closely defined by the Law, but it furnishes no sufficiënt practical means for the enforcement of these rights. In fact, if the man deserts his wife, and fails to provide her with the necessaries of life etc., she lias no right to demand a divorce ') until she can prove that her husband is uicapable of providing for her maintenance. In the absence of such proof she can only invoke the interference of the civil authonty to compel her husband to fulfil his obligations, a course which, as might be supposed, is in most cases of little avail. VVhere the woman has succeeded, no matter in what way, in providing for her own support, and where no money has been paid by the husband in response to the judge's order, every claim on her part for compen- sation for the deficiency as a rule falls to the ground.
In the East Indian Archipelago₂), a method to which the Moham- ....
medan law itself gives the impulse has been resorted to in order to K^Mn" prevent the husband from leaving his wife to life-long misery by deser- 5£Arehipe" tion and neglect of his duties towards her. According to the law a conditional talaq (divorce) may be pronounced or as the saying is, the talaq may be «suspended" (ta'lïg). The numerous ways in which this can be done are most minutely defined in the books of the law. The essence of the matter is that if the husband has
| OU must | be borne | in mind that | for ,he man | on the other | hand the mere | expression |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Of his wish | ,s sufficiënt | to d.solve | the marriage | without any | reason, | and that the |
| woman who | ,s abandoned | by her | husband without | any severing | of ,he lawful | bond of |
| marriage oceup.es | a m.serable | position | in Mohammedan | society | ||
| Arehipelago" | " | ° | ^ |
2) The same custom exists in the Straits Settlements, and in all probability be
further
would ParlS indUStan IS,am W#i i,lt,0duCed int the
35°
said: ttIf such and such a thing happen, my wife is divorced," the actual thing referred to need only take place, in order to make the talaq a determinate fact. This tatïq can be used for sundry purposes. Sometimes a Moham- medan employs it by vvay of an oath, saying for example to someone who doubts the truth of his words: "If I lie in this, my wife N. is divorced." Or he uses it as a threat to his wife in case of disobedience, as tlius, "if you enter tliat house again, you are divorced." He may, howcver also employ the ta'lïq to improve the position of his wife, as for instance by saying, "If I beat you, or leave you for a month without support, or forsake you for a year, then you are divorced." The husband cannot indeed be constrained to such a taliq and his voluntary declaration is necessary to bestow such privileges on his wife. At the same time, if a man asks the hand of a woman in marriage, and first undertakes, at the request of the father or wali, to make such a ta'lïq in her favour immediately after the conclusion of the wedding contract, the bridegroom considers himself so to speak morally bound by such promise. No one, it is true, would raise any legal objections if after the contract was completcd he were to declare tliat he thought better of his intentions in rcgard to the tallq, but by so doing he would entirely forfeit the confidence of his acquaintance. Such predeclared and morally compulsory ta'liqs are to be met with everywhere. In the Indian Archipelago they are by no means rare; the husband for instance, in conformity with an agreement with his parents-in-law, declares immediately after the marriage ceremony, that his wife may regard herself as divorced by him if he marries a second, or gives her no house of lier own to live in, etc. Here again, as might be expected, the great majority of bridegrooms reqtiire the assistance of the official who concludes the marriage contract for the proper expression of the formula; he dictates the words one after another to the bridegroom. This is not peculiar to Indonesia, and is also to be found in Acheh. But throughout the whole of Java ') and the greater part of the other
| i) In Van | den Iierg's | Beginselen | not only do we | lïnd no single | word about | this most |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| important adat, | but even | the possibility | of a "conditional | talaq" | is only barely | alluded |
3Si Mohammedan possessions of Holland, the adat has always within human memory required every man who marries to pronounce a ta'lïg immediately after the conclusion of the contract. The form of this is subject to local variations, but its general drift is everywhere the same viz tliat the wife may regard herself as divorced if her husband orsakes her and betakes himself to some other part of the country for seven months, or beyond the sea for a year (in some places two ') or if he fa.ls to maintain her for a given period (e. g. one month) *)
(P-157). In 1888, when I verbally informed Mr. Van den liertr that I W1 h, IJ
Ba.avta by refernng to an alh.sion to it application in an for fatwa (veto f^r
3S ;=r',h;
courÏ Since**^then** ^ "" °f ^ ^ ^ the registers of the M^haZedan
0 ^ eXplanationi h<=
| would | have known | thafamone | LT^ " |
|---|---|---|---|
| courts | are those | whieh spring | from |
%8&BS3SSaB&&
better data fro^ any BataviJ-7e," 'f™3''0"; He miKht ^ave coUected
« Me-on the applieation of that 5 £ ï£Z
- se to which th.s fatwa eonveys the reply, and whieh is printed under the title iüL.
rou a.ij ju, ^is> oLu-^-1 «,*
J *r * ^* ^**
| ~ ^ | o" | t-^ |
|---|---|---|
| . | ' |
>£XZZ??j£- »• «• —
352
•r maltreats her ') or exoludes her entirely from his bed ') and other similar conditions 3). To the series of conditions uon whieh the talaq is suspended" the two following₄) are always attached: "if the woman is not a consenting party thereto and places the matter in the hands of the constituted authorities." The omission of these two conditions would lead to the greatest difficulties. The Mohammedan law will not allow the word talaq to be made light of; when the talaq lias been once pronounced or a condition on whieh it "hangs" fulfilled, the marriage is dissolved ipso facto without any judicial decree and all further co- habitation of the pair is from that moment regarded as adultery. The talfiq must be proved by two witnesses, if one of the parties concerned denies its having been pronounced; but it lias full force with all its consequences for both parties as soon as ever it has been uttered by the husband. Suppose the husband then to have created a ta'lïq of the kind we refer to and to have done one of the acts therein enumerated, the marriage would be then and there dissolved, irrespective of the wishes of the woman, who would perhaps be glad enough to leave things as tlicy were. Extraordinary complications would arise if the man's act were to be decisive and the woman to have no voice in the matter. There would be a complete want of control, and amid the prevailing ignorance of the great mass of the people, many a married couple might form an entirely wrong opinion as to whether a given "condition ' had been fulfilled or not. The addition of the two final conditions just mentioned gets rid of all these difficulties, since they make the corn- pletion of the divorce dependent on the consent of the woman and a
| draw blood, | or pulling | out her hair, | or smashing | to pieces her | loom, the silent | witness | of |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| many a forbidden | intrigue. | ||||||
| woman in | case of impotence | on the | man's part, | Van den | Berg is wrong | in concluding | |
| that the man | is bound | to give "marital | rights" | (see his essay | quoted | above, p. | 482). |
| All Mohammedan | law-books | teacli | the opposite; | it is only | the woman who | is bound | to |
| surrender | her person. | Divorce owing | to impotence | only takes | place because | the | object |
| to be attained | by marriage | (that is, | according | to the law-books, | sexual | union) is | there- |
| by rendered continue. | impossible, | so that there | is no longer | any reason | why the | marriage should | |
| neglect the | obligatory prayers | or fasts | or drink arak | or gamble" | etc. etc. |
1) The nature of the assault is sometimes defined, as for instance striking her so as to
2) Although the marriage can be dissolved by the judge {fatkit) at the instance of the
3) In some districts we find conditions whose object is simply religious, e. g. "If I
4) Absurd as it may appear, neither of these are mentioned by Van den llerg.
353 declaration bcforc the iudp"c who mncf nf wno must of course enquire into the case in the first instance. The judge bcfore whom the declaration is made gives no verdict (for which indeed there is no necessity) but declares the facts viz whether or no the divorce is brought into force by mcans of the decla- rat.on made in h.s presence coupled vvith the fulfilment of the other condition as evidenced by the woman's statement. As appears from the above explanation, this adat in favour of the Intentionnl woman is a most reasonable one since if the lavv were applied in its adoption °' P-ity»), the right of demanding separation {faskh) on the grounds ~ mentioned would be entirely denied to the woman. Thus where Vin den Berg, in the essay referred to (pp. 486-7) notices as «peculiar" the w,de use made of the ta'llq, and characterizes it as «a somewhat useless exped.ent for dissolving marriages", we are constrained to qualify as most peculiar the writer's want of familiarity both with the essential nature of this native adat and with the rules ofMohammedan aw as to tahq and faskh. This adat is universally esteemed by native teachers and laymen as a social blessing, in view of the thoughtlessness with which marriages are entered into, the indifference of many hus- ands to their wives and their proneness to abandon them, as well as
| t ie large numbers of those who lead a roving | life '). | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| all kinds | of declarations, | but is used^n | Javauese | and Sundanese | as uTe | '° | ' >' |
| the declaration | of a woman | that a taUi, condition | has been fuiflied | and | thaÏshe T" | ||
| marr.age dissolved. | The | ta'llq-formula | usually runs | as follow | • | * | |
| (here follow | the conditions; | ||||||
| s | |||||||
| Ihere | are indeed | Mohammedon | courts which | mvp | |||
| husband has | failed in his | obligations, | but such verdiefs | arebasedLTÏn | the | ||
| of the judges, | and not | on any rights | conferred | by adat, far | less onM | liÏ1 | |
| courts also | wrongly apply no, | the name draw from this | to proof use of the | of the term any negatiJe | which h onÏu | ' " | ° |
| to the adat | of the ta'llq. certain | parts | of In Jogjakarta | (where Si," | 'V* | ||
| in its proper | sense very | rare) the word ,J | J | ||||
| where called | or district | pangulu. | " | ||||
| (o ,> tr.mony | with a settled | intention | of being | sguilty y "i of wilful wuim | deser," desertion | of, their | w ^ v*»«" |
1) 1 his declaration is called rapa' a word whiili in i_i;,
3) The that «the majority (of the Javanese) even of the lower classes dn,,
Slgn f
trimanê rabi k,„a, rapa' mar^kZ^Z^T'' '"'ï talaq kula siji ma ring rabi kula N. '' ' wangka run tuk
2) r,,i-i • >
that
fasa/i talaq
naib 18 e
fact \/o ma ij ullL
M
| b«, .&»•> | Z | ZZZ:T'°'"? | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| occur. Even | Arabic teachers, | who | are otherwise | always inclined | to fr | l«ently |
| exhibit a great | regard for | the «condition.1 separation" | and | do tl Zt Z | ^ | |
| 23 |
occur. Even Arabic teachers, who are otherwise always inclined to fr frecl«ently
Meantime such a taliq whether made witli or without previous parley between the bridegroom and his parents-in-law, must under Mohammedan law always be a voluntary act on the part of the former, as otherwise it would be invalid. Yet it must be understood that in the large field vvhere the adat prevails of conditional divorce after every marriage, the chance concurrence of the wishes of ail married couples cannot be regarded as the cause of this custom. As a matter of fact, where this adat holds good, it is usually compulsion or "persuasion" bordering on compulsion that carries the day. In olden times in Java, not only in the kingdom of Mataram, but also in such places as Chirbon and Banten, the ta'llq was ordained by the rulers of the country. The tradition of the Javanese that this adat, which extends so far beyond the limits of Java, was an invention of their great sultan (Sultan Agëng) is of course to say the least of it open to doubt. Still this ta'llq was everywhere known as "the promise ordained of the Prince" {janjining ratu or jattji dalérn) and is still so called even outside the Native States. It is indeed customary for the official who concludes the marriage contract to enquire of the bridegroom "do you accept the janjining ratu but this question is purely formal, since a reply in the negative is unheard of. In addition to this main departure from Mohammedan law, another unorthodox custom (which seems formerly to have been universal) still prevails in many districts, viz. that the words of the tatxq are only uttered by the official marriage-maker, who of course speaks in the second person '), and the bridegroom instead of repeating the words in the first person simply answers "yes". According to the law this defect in form renders the whole transaction void, yet the adat regards it as valid. In the provinces directly subject to the Dutch government there is of course in theory no such thing as compulsion in regard to the ta'llq. lïoth this freedom and the increasing study of the Mohammedan law cause the proper legal form for this voluntary declaration to be more largely employed in these provinces; but as a matter of fact the formula is dictated to the bridegroom in such a way that lie is left to supposc in his ignorance that it forms an indispensable part óf the
| i) He ought | propcrly | speaking | to dictatc | the words | to the bridegroom | in the first | person. | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| This has of Mekka in such | late become matters. | customary | in most | localities | owing to the | increasing | influence | of |
355
marriage contract. The ordinary villager, or indeed any native who has not studied, knows naught of the rules of the Law in regard to the contract. He places himself entirely in the hands of the official who concludes it; when for example, the latter, after the ratification of the contract proper, says to him: "You will now surely repeat the ta lïq according to the good adat which all men follow", few bridegrooms would so much as conceive the possibility of refusing this request. Some, part pedantic, part overscrupulous pangulus have of late abandoned this admirable adat, but in every place where I ascertained the non-existence of the custom (and I have always made a special task of investigating such cases) I have met persons who could still remember when the janjining ratu or ta'lè' was universally practised. In the Residency of Batavia and also in Malay countries, where sub mission to the princes and their representatives is much less slavish than m Java, the free voluntary declaration is always observed in form, but the advice of the official marriage-maker combined with the Iayman's ignorance of the law gives rise to a kind of restraining force that serves to maintain the adat. We now sce clearly that this ta'lïq-adat, so far from being exceptional, is deeply rooted in the necessity for rendering the position of the married woman more favourable than it is under the Mohammedan law, while yet avoiding as far as possible all conflict with that law. However open to dispute may be our conjecture that this adat was introduced by the pioneers of Islam in the East Indies, we may rest assured that the almost universal acceptance of the custom was due in each instance to the fact that it harmonized with the requirements of the people. I say almost universal acceptance, and in doing so I intend not only to draw attention to the exceptions which are everywhere made in favour of persons of rank or teachers of the law, in whose case malevolent desertion or ill-treatment of a wife is not supposed possible, but also to put in strong relief the fact that the adat is entirely lacking in some good Mohammedan countries of the Archipelago. The most unequi vocal confirmation of our explanation of the acceptance KeaSons for of this adat is to be found in the fact that it supplies a satisfactory lhe abs<;nce reason for the absence of the ta'llq from among the essential adjuncts custom'"' in of marriages in some countries. This will be at once recognized, on 2l the mere mention of their names by every one who has any knowledge p,aces" of the social system of the two principal countries which are without
the tallq-adat; Acheh and the Menangkabau territories'). In both of these the woman is, so far as lodging and maintenance are concerned, practically independent of her husband, since she continues to form an integral part of the family vvherein she was born. An Achehnese woman whose husband has gone as a pepper-planter to the East or West Coast and gives no sign of his existence for years, may indeed feel unhappy; but as she lives in her own house either together with jr 'n the immediate neighbourhood of her own family, she is seldom :onstrained to demand a dissolution of marriage by faskh. In the same •vay there exists no necessity for facilitating by conditional divorce, •uch dissolution of wedlock which as we have seen is most difficult to >btain by faskh.
§ 3- Early days of married life. Polygamy and Concubinage. Financial relations of Husband and Wife.
We may now proceed to mention certain adats which are observed during the period immediately following the completion of the marriage. \V e shall at the same time find an opportunity for discussing the results of marriage as regards the property of husband and wife. m!r"CnS meU" ^-^er f'lc wedding, some months, indeed sometimes as much as a year or so, will pass before the family of the bridegroom takes any further notice of the bride. The latter does not make her first visit to her parents-in-law, until her husband's mother comes to "fetch her away" (tucng tneunaro)1). The elder woman brings with her a number of female companions from her own gampöng and a money present for the young wife. The guests are entertained at the bride's house at a formal feast with idangs •1). 1 his visit however is not sufficiënt according to the adat to consti- tute an invitation. Some time later the request must be repeated by a woman sent by the husband's mother. The messenger thus addresses the mother of the bride: "The reason why I have directed my
| (Ja/a baro means | «the | bride"); | cf. mtuncuri | (present) | = bcuneuri | from bri, | "to give." |
|---|
1) Ilere the ta liq has begun to be employed in some places 011 the coast.
2) The word tuïng means to "fetch away," and meunarö is formed from marS = ba, 3
3) See pp. 320, 324 above.
357
imner to you is in order that I may fetch away this Si Nya' '). The invitation is politely accepted, but a considerable time is allowed to elapse before it is acted upon. I' inally, after due notice of the visit has been given the bride repairs to the gampöng of her husband ») accompanied by a crowd of female relat.ves and fellow-villagers. She takes with her from 6 to as many as 20 idangs)* of sweetmeats, which gift is paid for by the bridegroom's mother at the fixed rate of, dollar per idang. This return gift is, owever, intended for the more advanced in years of the women who attend the bride. The welcoming {saPa) of these guests is attended with a certain Feast and amount of ceremony, but is by no means so tediously protracted as ."ha°dwash- at the wedding. Ik-re too we find idangs of the sort which we have ' seen In usc at the pcujamec. At the conclusion of the feast there takes place a ceremony (probably a survival from ancient times) which bears the name of "handwashing", though there is in fact no washing of ïands. 1 he mother of the bridegroom rubs some yellow glutinous rice e nnd the ears of the bride (peusunténg see p. 306). The bride then greets her with the usual respectful obeisance [seumbah) and receives as a gift in return for this greeting a peculiar ring (cunchtcn gil?), which ,s worn on the thumb •). Sometimes a money present is given instead, and ,n those districts where it is the custom for the bridegroom to g.ve back half the dowry after the wedding, the bride receives this alf ) usually with an additional sum superadded — on this occasion. he ancient adat also prescribes that the bride when returning home should receive as a parting gift from her mother-in-law a cow-buffalo Sh0uld Pr°Perly speaking not be slaughtered, but kept as a keubeue peunulang)* for breeding purposes only, as a special blessing
| . vtzzsti""""" | » | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| h«L"; | - | --«c- | ||||
| feasts ,s, as | have already | seen, composed | of two. | |||
| strips'ofleiah | ° ^ | " | ° ° | " | P ^ "« ">in | |
| ) Pcunulang | is the special | term applied | to all that | children receive | from their | pa.ents |
| e.r support | It .s thus | opposed to | pesaka or inherited | property, | but is taken | i„to |
| account on | of the | latter so thit | ,..1, | u • | ||
| the others, gets | less ptusaka. | ° f """ "S | than |
3) The idang of sweetmeats (ponajoh) consists of only a single daling; the idanc for
5) ee p. above.
s*-""*s
we A C nSiStS 3 ,UCCeSSi0 f kn bS baUs hdd a art lil s 340 6 a division n, m 1C e /a
i, supposed to rest upon it. It ofte, happen», however that the bofia i, only handed over to the yonng woman fra fonna, and afterwards politely returned to the givcr. In case of second mamages the ada o the keubeiü peunulang does not apply. The woman herself always stays three complete days in the h of her parents-in-law. During this time she is the recipiënt o constarrt visits from her new connections, who come to offer presents of mh and eggs '). All these gifts she brings home with her. Her ftllow villagers who form her escort return home on the first day. The husband. although usually present in his native gampSng dunng these days, takes no share of any kind in the festivities. On her return journey *), the wife is escorted by a crowd of people from the gampöng of her husband, and a procession of her own fel ow- villagers comes out to welcome her back. These mcunari ceremonies always takc place even where both man and wife have been married before, and the samc may be sa.d of most adat connected with the first sc.cn days of the marriagc. In the case last referred to however there is less merry-making, and even though bride bc a young maiden, the circumstance of her husband being o a more advaneed age nsually imparts a calmcr tone to the fMt.vit.es. Aftcr this first visit of the bride to her parents-m-law she goes to ,co them bot seldom. It is only at the two great Mohammedan feasts that the adat reqoires her to go and make her rcspcctf.,1 salotat.ons for «hiel. she rcccives a fnrther present of money. When Ihe ha, been aboot three year, married, she is absolved from the nccessity of presenting herself on these occasions, and in any case receives no more money presents. The parents and other of the married pair also visit
| blood-relations | ||
|---|---|---|
| ... | r»r | 1 * „1, mir» |
| 0 |
one another very rarely. It is only important events in the families .ïonflic marria^cs. wnicn r\rracinn on eiuici ïther siuc, espeuiany-"r— J-,-,, i • to such visits. Nor do the visitors come m a Doay out ^ « »» own time. Each brings a present of a dollar or two oy way u. «.u- tribution to defray the expenses of the ceremonies. Ihose who receive such visits, on the other hand, are bound to entertain their gues s
0 The technieal name for these visits is ,V M ranub = going to offer sirih. The sirih
iS 2) TWs is ÏÏh-X-r:: = «returning from the meunarV (see note on p. 35^)*
in the best possible style (,peujamèë) with the traditional idangs ). Let us here interpolate one word as to the practical significance in Mygamy.n the social life of Acheh of the polygamy vvhich is permitted by the creed of Islam. As might be supposed, those who make most use of the custom of plurality &of wives are to be found among the scions of royal blood {tuankus), the uleèbalangs and other lesser chiefs who rank next in dignity to these, and the religieus teachers or others who stand in the odour of sanctity or learning, and to whom many are willing to unite their daughters, were it only as their second, third or fourth wives. This is all the more true of the principal chiefs, since the distin- guished marriage alliances they seek are as a rule only to be found at a great distance from their own homes or territory. Hence as the wife does not follow the husband and the latter may not absent lümselftoo long from the sphere of his authority, the married life of such couples consists of short scenes with long intervals. Many of these chiefs, it is true, console themselves for their constant loneliness by illegitimate intri'gues, but many others attain their purpose by contracting one or more marriages of inclination over and above their mariages de raison. When their choice falls on women of the lowest class, such marriages are frequently dissolved later on by divorce on the ground of satiety, though as wc shall see, separations of this sort are otherwise less common in Acheh than in many other countries of the Malayan Archipelago. The great and wealthy, it is true, had till a short time ago, and Concubinagc. indeed still have to a considerable extent the opportunity of sexual intercourse with female slaves, especially those of Nias, who are re- markable for their beauty and are not too expensive. lhese were and are so used, but comparatively speaking, to a very moderate extent. The Mohammedan law places the children begotten by a free man of a slave on a full equality with those bom of his free wives. In order however to sec this theory actually adopted in practice, we must seek a centre of Mohammedan civilization such as Cairo, or towns with a very mixed population such as Mecca or Medina. In Acheh (as also in the inland parts of Arabia), this custom is only partially observed. The legal privileges are the same, but the social position is different, and it is never forgotten that a man has slave blood in his veins.
i) See pp. 320, 324 above
Even where two free wives of the same husband differ somewhat in rank and birth, this difference has its effect on the social position of their children. Hence it is that the propagation of the race is so much, and we might almost add, so openly and shamelessly interfered with by causing of abortion or preventive checks. It is especially those who cannot refrain from intercourse with their female slaves who make an extensive use of such methods. This does not alter the fact that the fear of failure in the efficacy of the drugs used withholds the majority from that concubinage with their slaves which is lawful according to the creed of Islam. Where such concubinage takes place, the slave is called gunde, and the legitimate results of the union are controlled by the Mohammedan law. The name gunde is however often also applied, though incor- rectly, to i°. Women of very humble origin, who become (generally for only a short time) the wives of men of position such as uleèbalangs or tuankus. 2°. Women who are kept in unlawful concubinage, over and above the lawful number of four. Few Tuankus, however, regard themselves as so far exalted above all consideration for law and morals as to admit of their forming such openly illicit connections. Children born of such unions, albeit not recognized or legitimized under any hu kom or adat, are still, under the name of aneu gunde, esteemed part of the family of their natural father, so long as he himself sets the example of so regarding them. Persons of humbler rank sometimes indulge in plurality of wives when their means admit of such a luxury and the journeys to and fro between the abodes of their spouses do not prove too burdensome. As a rule, however, they do not choose two wives in the same gam- pöng, and thus the quarrels between rival consorts of the same husband are reduced to a minimum. A great number of Achehnese, however, are practically monogamists. They only marry a second wife after the death of the first, or where incessant domestic quarrels necessitate a divorce. Various causes are assigned in explanation of this phenomenon, each of which perhaps lends its share towards producing it. In the first place there is the husband's position in regard to his wife and her family, to whom he is as a rule under very great obli-
gations. This prevents hini from doing what might be disagreeable to them, and his taking a second wife would in most cases be unwelcome to the family of the first. Secondly, there is the facility for forming illegitimate connections, which though strongly condemned by the law and also in theory by the adat, do not in point of fact do any injury to the social position of the Achehnese who indulges in sucli intrigues in moderation. Finally the paederastic habits of the Achehnese, and (as many think) the use of opium '), cause the majority of them to set a lower value on intercourse with the opposite sex than is usual among other native populations. The financial consequences of marriage for the husband have so far Financial results of mar- received only a passing notice. riage. The obligations which the Mohammedan law imposes upon a man in respect of his wife are nearly all of a financial nature 2). He has to pay the dowry, which is fixed either by mutual consent or in accordance with the bride's position; as we have seen, the Achehnese jmami'c is regulated according to the rules laid down by the law. The husband is also bound to supply his wife with food, clothing» lodging and service in conformity with her social position, anti has on the other hand the right to require of her within fitting limits, obedience and fulfilment of conjugal duties, but not to burden her with domestic cares or occupations. These rules serve as a basis for the settlement of differences between married people when brought before the qadhï, but the married state is in fact controlled by quite different principles in all Mohammedan countries, and that without any conflict with the law. The latter in fact leaves the husband and wife entirely free to give validity to just so many of their privileges as they choose. For instance, it is a universal adat that the wife should assume the duties of housekeeper, and both the universality of this custom and the want of acquaintance of the people with the details of the law causes this to be regarded almost as an obligation. Marriages of wealthy wives with men of little
| North-East | coasts, it is not | at all so prevalent | in Acheh | l'roper as is usually | supposed. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| required | to pay regular | visits to his wife where | he has | more than one. | In the latter | case | |
| the claims | of the wives | are relative | only and | not absolute, | i. e. he is bound | to spend | as |
| much time with | one as he does | with | the other. |
1) I must here observc that while opium-smoking is very common on the West and
2) The man is never bound to connubial intercourse (see p. 352 above); and is only
or no propcrty whom thcir learning, birth or other qualifïcations render eligible parits are also of vcry frequent occurrence. No wife vvould think of enforcing against such a husband her rights to maintenance etc., much less such maintenance as befits lier position; indeed they much more often support the man. Iwen where the means of both are more on a par, such financial obligations are seldom taken into account. There is thus in this respect a great and generally prevalent difference between the teaching of the law and the reality. Ihe nature of this difference exhibits a special character in each country, to be explained from past history and from the social conditions of the present time. In Acheh, where the adat assumes the mastery even in questions of domestic law, and the adat-judge is generally the suprème arbitrator, these peculiar departures from the law have not only a greater degree of stability, but also serve — albeit in conflict with the huköm — as a Standard in the settlement of disputes. The Achehnese adat sets the husband free during a certain period from all obligation to maintain his wife. The length of this period depends on the amount of the dowry, irrespective of whether it is 111 fact paid in full, or only half, or even not at all '). 1' or every bungkay of gold (25 dollars) of the marriage gift, the bride is made dependent for a full year on the support of her parents. All that the man gives her during this period is regarded as a free gift, even though these gifts are themselves to some extent regulated by the adat. These presents consist first of all in the monthly biaya 2) of 3 01 4 dollars or more, which may be almost considered as boarding expenses for the 10 to 15 days in each month which the young man spends in the house of his wife. In the next place he has to "bring home meat" 3) as it is called, at the two great Mohammedan feasts, anti espcciall^ that at the end of the fasting month. In our description of the feasts we have seen that it is an established adat in Acheh to form small societies for the slaughter of buffaloes before these feast days, and the ancient custom required the young man to bring home to his wife a handsome share of the meat from the slaughter in his own gampöng.
(especially by persons of position) handed
| the conclusion | of the contract. |
|---|
1) The dowry is not infrequently back after
2) See p. 327 above.
3) cf. p. 237.
Puvioé siè;
363
This gift of meat gradually gave place ') to other gifts of a fixed value. Where the dowry amounts to one bungkay of gold, it is con- sidered proper for the husband to present to his wife 6 dollars as a feast-gift the first time; on later occasions 5 dollars or so is sufficiënt. For a dowry of 2 bungkays these feast-gifts may amount to 8 or 10 dollars respectively and so on. lo this are often added garments and ornaments made of the precious metais. I he old appellation is howevcr still retained, and though it is quite well understood that a wife lias received from her husband money only as a feast-gift, the question is asked all the same "How much meat lias he brought home to your {padion jipuwoë sic?). Here again it must be borne in mind that only gifts of a transitory description (such as meat or the biaya and other money presents) become the property of the woman, while in regard to personal orna ments she can only regard as her own what she receives 011 the 71'1 day after her marriage ~), and the present made in token of the loss of her virginity 3). On the feast-days the husband also receives a return present from his wife, the first time a suit of clothes, which he proceeds forthwith to don; in later years his parents-in-law present him with a dollar or so by way of feast-gift. On such occasions the parents-in-law appear as it were by chance in the passage when their son-in-law is about to leave the house, and he seizes the opportunity to make his obeisance (seumbah) in all haste, for we know how shy the Achehnese is of any encounter with the parents of his wife! The period during which the wife still remains a charge upon her janjijinamci parents is called janji jinamèë 4). While it lasts, there subsists between the pair a peculiar relation which is entirely in conflict with Moluim- medan law. This law allows unconditionally to the husband a certain definite portion of the goods of his wife on her decease, and vice versa. In Acheh this right of inheritance does not become effective till after the
| janji jinamèë | has | ceased. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| are not too | far off from | those of their | wivcs bring | presents | of meat as well | as of money. |
| depends upon | the amount | of the |
1) These gifts of meat are not howevcr entirely discontinued. Most men whose gampöngs
2) See p. 326 above.
3) See p. 327 above.
4) This properly means "the dowry period agreed on" since the length of this period
jinamc'c.
3rM
Ha' balèë Should his wife die during this period, the husband in Acheh has ballü. a right to only one of two things; he either gets back half of the dowry '), which sum is known as ha balèë"1), or he waives this right and chooses rather to marry a sister or other near relative of the deceased. In the latter event the jinamèë is mentioned at the marriage but never paid. Marriages of this kind are known as pulang balèë₃). A wife who becomes a widow during the janji jinamèë, has just as little claim to her legitimate portion, but receives in its place a sum of money equal to half of her dowry, while in certain cases to which we shall presently allude, the walis of her husband offer her a suitor for her hand, preferably of the same family. It is only where the hus band is very rich, and leaves behind him few relatives and those very distant ones, that the widow gets her proper share. It is also understood that if a woman dies during the jinamèë period, the expenses of the laying out of the dead body, the funeral feasts etc., must be borne by her parents, but propriety requires that the widower should politely request his parents-in-law to allow him to bear the cost of one of the kanduris, as for instance that held on the seventh day after the death. Sometimes the father of the deceased privately warns his son-in-law not to expend too much money this in way, asany hopes he may cherish of a share in the subsequent distribution of property will be disappointed, and he will get no more than the ha balèë. Yet often even in such cases the husband gives as costly a feast as he can. Peungklèh. As soon as the year or years of the janji jinamèë are over, the woman is committed to the sole charge of her husband. If she is an orphan, this is done without much formality, but with great ceremony if her father or mother be still living. The parents "put her forth" (peungklèh₄) in the presence of all the authorities of the gampöng and other notabilities as witnesses, and mark the occasion by a public
| remaining | half and afterwards | receives | it back | as ha? balie. | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| both widow | and widower. | ||||||
| death, of | the right of | wedding | her elder sister | without | paying a dowry" | and | vice versa, |
| maté patang | baleë ngoti adbë. Cases | of both | such marriages | occur. | |||
| technical | term for the | action of the | parents | or next of kin | in this matter. | After | the con- |
| clusion of | the ceremony | it is said | of the woman | that she ka mcungkleh, | i. e. is put forth | ||
| and placed | under the | protcction of her husband. |
1) If the dowry has been only paid in half (see p. 340 above), the widower pays the
2) Ha' is the Arab. haqq = right, that which appertains to a person, and baleë means
3) It is said: maté adbë, pit lang baleë tigon a = "to make use, after the younger sister's
4) Peungklèh, which properly means to set apart, to give up control of," is the
u
feast (kanduri) consccratcd with prayers. In the set speech in which the father abandons all direct interference with the concerns of his daughter for the remainder of her married life, he sums up all that she lias received from him, so that no unpleasantness may arise on any >ubsequent distribution of her property. Either he or another in his lame delivers himself somewhat as follows: — "The reason why I riave summoned you hither, Teuku Keuchi', Teungku and all ye elders, s that I have now "put forth" my daughter N; be this known unto lil of you, O elders. What I have given her is as follows: a pair of inklets 6 bungkay in weight, one yö' of rice land, a pair of earrings, :his house and all its equipment. This is what I wished to inform you }f, bc it known unto you all." The keuchi' replies in the name of the issembled company: "We have heard it." Just as all that the husband brings to the home of the pair, even I.aba siha- n the forin of presents to his wife, remains with few exceptions his lulkrlt' wil property, so the wife retains an indisputable right of ownership Dver all that she can show to have been brought thither by her. In districts where it is the custom for the wife to assist the husband in lis employment, the property accumulated during the marriage by heir respective toil is in the event of a divorce divided in equal ihares between the man and the woman or their respective heirs. Where one of the two dies, the survivor obtains in addition to this ialf share his lawful portion of the heritable property, to which the )ther half of their common earnings is regarded as belonging. Thus we ind in Acheh the same peculiarity that exists in Java and Madura ind most Malayan countries, viz. that where the woman is the
| i) Van den | Berg mentions | this adat | in his essay | on the | Afwijkingen | pp. 474 | et seq. In |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| regard to | this subject | fewer | of the gross | blunders | into which | he elsewhere | falls, |
| but here | again he gives | us nothing | but what he has derived | from books | without | a tracé | |
| of "notes | personally made | by him." | Ife might | for instance | have discovered | by personal | |
| enquiry that | the exceptions | he mentions | (Bantën | and a number | of other | places) | are really |
| no exceptions | at all 5 the only | reason | why the saguna-sakaya | or common | earnings | are not | |
| divided in | these districts | is that they | have no | existence, | since the | women there | do not |
| assist their | husbands in their | work. I Ie might | also | have found | out that | the division | in the |
| proportion | of 2 to I, | though of frequent | occurrence, | is by no means | universal, | since in | |
| rnany places | it is the | custom to enquire first | into the circumstances, | and then | to decide | ||
| what is the | just proportion | which each | has earncd. | In Madiun | for instance, | division | into |
| equal parts | is very customary. | O11 page | 477 Van | den Berg | makes the curious | deduction | |
| that this possessions | adat is spccially such as Southern | Javanese, Celebes." | bccause it | is also to be met with | in outlying | I)utch |
he makes
fellow-worker of her husband, there gradually grows up a
,) Hareukat eam onS*an'employment," «also used as a verb in the sensem
| «also used | as a verb | in the sensem | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| «to go fovth | to seek | one's fortune. | uliar | way in plantam |
| a |
peC leaves. Fishermen, Jsi °,T'JiT £.E
367
§ 4- Divorce.
Beforc proceeding to describe the most usual methods of divorce in Compulsory Vcheh, wc should point out that marriages to which the man, or both nan and woman, are compelled (in conflict with the Mohammedan aw), are of much less common occurrence in Acheh than in Java '), /•et do occasionally occur in the former country. Most chiefs prefer to punish pregnancy in the unmarricd by im- josing a money fine and directing that abortion be caused, rather than >y compulsory marriage; but there are nevertheless some who employ he latter method. Cases also occur herc (just as in Bantën) where the nan is compelled to marry the woman on her complaining to the chief >f his overtures to illicit intercoursc and producing as evidence (tanda), ike Potiphar's wife, a fragment of a garment worn by him. Separation is rare in Acheh as compared with other Mohammedan Faskh. :ountries. We have seen that the woman, even when abandoned by ïer husband for years together, does not readily resort to a demand "or pasah {faskh) or judicial separation, for she seldom wants for odging or the means of support. Where, however, such a demand is nade before the kali, he, like the pangulus in some parts of Java, jrants the pasah rather more readily than is consonant with the strict nterpretation of the Mohammedan law. Still the Achehnese kali cannot pronounce faskh without the special permission of the ulèëbalang, and where the latter forbids its exercise in a particular case, the faskh Joes not take effect, even though all the conditions required by the religious law may be fulfilled. The ordinary divorce (Ach. talen? from the Arab. talaq) of the woman Tals
| intercourse, | are much | nore frequent | than would | appear to | be the case | from Van den | lierg's |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| oft quoted | essay (p. | 466). '1 hey | take place | when the night | watch on | their rounds | find a |
| pair on terms | of too | great intimacy. | Chiefs | compel their | followers, | pangulus | the inha- |
| bitants of their | districts, | to marry | a pregnant | woman simply | on her | unsupported | assurance |
| as to who | her seducer | is. The woman | is generally | divorced | after a short | time, | but in the |
| meantime this | expedient | has provided | the yet | unborn child | with a father. |
1) In Java such marriages, especially between persons who have been detected in illicit
cases from breaking the marriage tie for the many tnning rcasons which in other places, as in Java for instance, give rise to such separations. Neithcr momentary anger nor the cooling down of first love, but violent and irreconcilable difïferenccs between the pair form the cause of most cases of taleu'e which occur in Acheh. The law, as we know, prescribes after a single talaq a period (ciddah) during which the woman may not marry, and during which the husband may, if he please, reconsider his decision '). 1 his latter privi lege the man enjoys only after the first and second time he has pronounced divorce against a given wife; the third divorce is irrevo- cable. After a first and second divorce, if the man has not made timely use of his right of recall (ruju ) a new marriage can still be concluded between the pair by mutual consent. When divorce has been pronounced three times against the same woman by her husband, this method of reunion becomes impossible, and they can only remarry if the wife has meantime been wedded to another man and separated again from him. In districts where the talaq is extensively resorted to, it frequently happens that both parties desire reunion even after three divorces. In such cases a middleman is employed, who for a certain fee enters into a marriage with the divorced woman, and then at once divorces her again to give his principal the chance of remarrying her. This device, however, can be made use of twice only, for after 3X3 divorces the marriage is irrevocably and for ever dissolved. As may easily be supposed from the comparative rarity of divorce in Acheh, the lay-folk are but little conversant with the rules con- trolling this subject, of which only a few of the main principles have been sketched above. In Java on the other hand, most of the people are tolerably familiar, through experience amongst their own surround- ings, both with what we have described above and with many other similar technicalities as well. As a result of the fact that the talaq as applied in Acheh is not an
woman ciddah
| the first of which | may be | that during | which the talaq | was pronounced, | thus | comprising | at |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| least three lasts till about | for others 40 days after | it is three childbirth. In all Mohammedan countries of the F. Indian Archipe- | full months. | In the case | of a pregnant | woman | it |
| lago it has been | usual to fix the | of all non-pregnant | women at | three months | and ten days, | ||
| through fear of errors | arising | from ignorance or | miscalculation on | the part | of the women. Of late | ||
| however, Arabic | influence | has causcd an | increasing | to adhere | to the letter of | the law. |
1) For a who has periods the amounts to three seasons of sexual purity,
periods;
'•iddah
tendcncy
<-.xFI CSMUII OI M-temper, DUI tne mcans used to terminate a position which has become impossible, the permission given by the law to pronounce three talaqs all at the same time and thus make the sepa- ration at once irrevocable seems to have] been made «se of from the earliest times. Thus arose the idea popular in Acheh, that a divorce is necessarily composed of three parts. 1 here are two different ways of pronouncing the talaq in Acheh. Some take three fragments of ripe betelnut ') (l/iec kra' pineung masa) and hand them over one by one with a kind of dignified angcr to the wife with the vvords "one *taleuë* two taleuc's, three taleuc's, thou art to me but as a sister in this world and the next₂)." Thereupon they give notice of the dissolution of the marriage to the tenngku. The idea of divorce is thus intimately connected in the minds of women with these three pieces of betelnut. When particularly angry with her husband a woman will ask him to give her "the three bits of betelnut." Others, however, betake themselves to the teungku of a neighbouring gampöng, and charge him with the task of giving notice in writing in their name to the authorities of the gampong that they have pronounced the threefold This notification, called ' is addressed
| talaq. | sur at taleu'é | |
|---|---|---|
| (rujii) | lapc | surat. |
| 1 |
to "the Teungku, the Keuchi' and elders of the gampöng." It is wrapped in a cover of fine cloth costing about two dollars, called Recall is thus as u rule excluded under this method. It occa-Recall. sionally happens that a man says in anger to his wife: "I divorce you-)," adding no further words, and afterwards repents of what he has done. In such a case most are aware that a remedy exists, since the three pieces of betelnut have not been employed, but as a rule they have to go in the first place to an ulama to ask him to explain in what that remedy consists. After enquiry, he declarcs that in the case in question only one talaq has "fallen *)," and that what has been done
| of paper etc. | may be used | as tokens, | and not fragments | of betelnut | only. (Translat»)). | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| idea being | that the three | talaqs are as it were suspended | over | the woman's | hcad, | and that | |
| one or more | of them | may fall at a given | time. | Another very common | notion is that | the | |
| man originally | "possesses" | three talaqs | of his | and that | as often | as he pronounces | |
| one of these, | he "gives" | it to her. From | this we can | readily | understand | the prevailing idea | |
| that the woman that are in his | can, with possession. | her husband's | consent, | purchase from him one | of the three talaqs |
1) The Malays have the same custom, but with them any small objects, such as pieces
2) Silaleuè\ dua taleuë\ tht'è taleuegata sah seèdara Jdnya akhérat.
3) A'a kutaleuë\ ia kupeulheuih or gata ka chré ng'on Ion.
4) In most of the languages of the Archipelago the words used indicate "falling," the
wife,
37°
may thercforc be set aside, but adds that the reconciliation should bc by giving a feast to a number of devout poor peitjamcc
| consecrated | ( | |
|---|---|---|
| paki), | ||
| The iddah. | ruju. |
and this is generally done. The Hddali is just as little understood by the laity as the It is known indeed that a woman cannot marry again immediately after a divorce, but as a rule she seldom wants to do so. Where there is any doubt, the teungku's advice is again sought and hc decides that according to the adat of Acheh three months and ten days must be allowed to elapse except in case of pregnancy '). The use of interme- diaries to make reunion possible is practically nonexistent and is known only to such as liave studied the kitabs or books of the law. Where the ground of divorce is incompatability of temper, it is almost always the woman who urges her husband to the final step of giving the three ***taleuê*** If he is slow to yield, she imprisons him in the house, generally in the inner room, until he meets her wishes by giving her the "three pieces of betclnut." He might easily set himself free from this temporary confinement, but most men are ashamed of the diabolical outcry raised on such occasions by their wives, who sum up all their evil characteristics, rcal or imaginary, in the most unflattering form in the hearing of the whole gampöng. Khul. Should the measures of compulsion adopted by the woman prove fruitless, she may have recourse to the remcdy known in the Arabic law-books as *khul* which consists in the purchase of the talaq by the wife from her husband₂). In such a contract even a single talaq is irrevocable ®), as is implied in the very idea of purchase. In Acheh this
| and 10 days. | This is quite | in accordance | with | Mohammedan | law. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| is not a gencral | practice. (Translator). | ||||||
| Afwijkingen | appears a | note, wherein | he expresses | surprise | al Wintcr's | applying the | term |
| khuf to | the temporary | divorce of | a wife brought | into | practice by the | princes of Java, | |
| when they | wish to wed a concubine | with child. | If he employed | the ordinary single divorce, | |||
| the prince, | who always | has four | wives, would | not be able | at oncc to marry | another, | but |
| would have | to await the co'nclusion | of the 'iddah | and the period | (ruju ) | allowed for recall. | ||
| On the other | hand if hc gave | his | wife a three-fold | divorce, | although he might | then | imme |
| diately wed | another, he could | not | remarry the | divorced one | later on, as he wishes | to do. | |
| He therefore | selects the | khul' method | as the | only one | which combines | the power | of |
| eventual ïcmariiage | with | immediate | separation. | Some teachers | even hold | that the khul | can |
| takc place | more than | three times | without preventing | a renewal | of the marriage, | and the | |
| princes of the | Native States | adhere | to this dictum. |
1) After the de alk of the husband an iddah is also observed in Acheh lastin^ 4 months
2) Called Mus talak by the Malays. It is occasionally resorted to in the Peninsula, but
3) This again seems not to have been understood by Van den Berg. On p. 4S4 of his
c
37'
is knovvn as the "redemption of a divorce" (ieubötk taleue), and it usually costs doublé the amount of the jinameé. Cases of such bouglit divorce are however rare and only to be met with among the lovver classes. The comparative rarity of the talaq, the fact that the woman is Position o mistress of the house (prumbh), the efforts of the men to obtain wives 'he W°man' of social standing not inferior to their own, all this and rnuch more besides testifies to the position of the woman in Achehnese society, a fairly high one for a Mohammedan country. This is indeed what we should expect to find in a country where the throne was occupied for more than half a century (1641 —1699) by four successive female rulers. Even now there are instances of female government in the dependen- cies '), and it is the rule rather than the exception to find the wives of ulèëbalangs and other chiefs exercising a very considerable influence on all their actions. It is very common for the wife of a chief to wield her husband's authority in his absence, and a case occurred not long ago on the East Coast, where a woman of the ruling class, with her hair hanging loose, took actual part in a civil war. Great fieedom of action, some knowledge of afifairs (within the limits of the ordinary Achehnese horizon) and a sound understanding are to be met with even among women who do not belong to the ruling families. The women are also the hereditary guardians of old-fashioned words and expressions, the meanings of proverbial sayings and so forth. When enquiring into such matters I have been often told by Achehnese that they must refer to their wives or mothers, and 1 can say that the latter seldom failed to supply the desired information.
§ 5- Pregnancy and Birth. Early years of childhood.
Before proceeding to consider the relations of child to parent in Acheh, i>rc„n UKV let us say a few words as to the birth of the child and the early days of his life. At some time between the 4H1 and 6'h months of pregnancy, the
| Aardrijks. | Genootschap, | 2" Series | Vol. VI (longcr | articles) | p. 38. |
|---|
1) See the essay of Van I.angen, entitled Atjek's Westkust, in Tijdschr. Kon. Nederl.
adat prescribes a formal visit of the husband s mother to her daughter- in-law. The former is accompanied on such occasions by about ten other women. This ceremony is called "bringing rice" (ja me bu ovja ba bu) or where persons of wealth and position are spoken of, "bringing a great pot of rice" [ja' me dangdang) '). Of humbler folk it is said that they "bring a naléh-)." As a matter of fact well-to-do people take with them a large pot (kanèt) of boiled rice, another of goats'-flesh and a great tray (datöng) of fruit, to the total value of about 25 dollars, or else they save themselves the trouble by giving "the dangdang un- cooked" *(dangdang meuntah)*3), i. e. the actual sum of money named above. Those of humbler rank confine their gift to a katéng₄) of cooked rice and a bowl of meat, or to bu kulah 5) and some additional dishes. The mother-in-law rcmains for two or three nights under her daughter- in-law's roof, but it is only 011 the day of her arrival that she is en- tertained in the way wc have described (peujamïê)°). At her departure she is presented with some tobacco or clothing material as a return gift. A second visit of the same description and of similar duration is paid by the mother-in-law about a month after the mi bu, and is known as ba meulineum. On this occasion she brings with her sundry kinds of sweetmeats (peunajnh) and fruits. Pan tang I" Acheh, no less than in Java, the pregnant woman must pay niks. particular regard to certain mysterious rules (pan tang), carelessness in the observance of which is supposed to be attended with evil results both to herself and her child 7). For instance, she must not sit at the top of the steps leading up to the house (ba ulèë reunyeun), lest her
| Naléh is | a measure (see | p. above) | for raw | rice whether | husked or | unhusked. |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Haskets (katéng) sometimes used for carrying | are manufacturcd | of rattan cooked rice. | or bili, to liold | exaclly | a naléh. These | are also |
| We thus find | the expressions | dangdang | ma sa' | and dangdang | meuntah, on | the same |
| analogy as biaya See note | masa' and above. | meuntah (see | pp. 3 5 | above). | ||
| See as to this boiled rice is packed See p. | the note in leaves. above. | to p. The | name is | taken from the manner | in | which the |
| Very similar | superstitions | prevail among | the Malays | of the | In | addition to |
| those here mentioned, | a pregnant | woman | must always | carry a knife or other | iron implement | |
| when she walks | abroad, | must let | no one walk | behind her. | It is also | regarded as |
| extremely dangerous | to pass | beneath the | tree known | as chtrmai | or the pisang | batu or |
| banggala. This under a ladder. | reminds one (Translator). | of the superstitious | objection | English | people have | to walking |
1) A pot (kanèt) of a very large size when used for cooking rice is called kan'ct dangdang.
2) 201
3)
2
4) 2
5) 366.
6) 320
7) Peninsula.
and
373
labour bc difficult, nor must she be allovved to see monkeys for fear the child should resemble them. If her husband goes out for the evening (outside the gampöng) he must not return direct to the house, but must first go and sit for a time in some other place, as for instance the meunasah. Should he neglect this rule, the dreaded burong'), the Achehnese pontianak (of which more anon) will most likely follow him into the house. Superstitions of this sort are very numerous. In Java the husband is forbidden to slaughter animals₂) during his wife's pregnancy, for fear the child should come into the world mutilated; but in Acheh disregard of this prohibition is supposed only to affect the meat, causing it to have a nauseous smell (hanyï). 1 he relations and friends of the woman also pay her occasional visits at this period, bringing her dishes of food ***{mè bu)*** but these visits are not so ceremonious as that of her mother-in-law. Women in this condition are much given to organizing picnic-parties (tneuramiën). I hey go with a crowd of friends to the scashore or some other suitable place out in the country, or else to a mosque. There they pass the day in gossip and enjoy a feast, the food being either cooked on the spot or brought ready prepared from home. In the seventh month the mother of the woman summons the midwife and makes a preliminary engagement of her services. "Should God will," she says "that my daughter should fall ill, I leave it all in your hands." After this the midwife pays 110 more visits till the confinement, unless she considers occasional massage (uröt) necessary. All expenses of the first confinement fall on the parents of the The cunf woman. The husband may evince his good will by contributing some nement- fish, oil and tobacco towards the housekeeping, but he gives no money save in the form of fees or presents. The confinement generally takes place in the back verandah (sramoë liköt). At the beginning of labour the woman simply lies down 011 the plank floor, or on a mat if the flooring bc of bamboo. Fastened to the ceiling above her head is a rope which she employs to raise her self slightly during labour; she leans against another woman and holds
| defined by | traditional | custom. | On the like | pretext almost | all pantang | prohibitions | may be |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| occasionally | transgressed. |
1) A bogey inimical to pregnant women.
2) An exception is made in cases when such slaughter is required for special purposes
fast by the rope. Hence the expression for a woman in childbirth, ureiïèng mat taloc = "she that holds the rope₁)." Meanwhile the husband waits in the jureé or in the front verandah, but when the confinement is difficult his help is sometimes invoked. The custom in Acheh in this respect resembles that in vogue in Java 2). He must step backwards and forwards (lingkeuc) seven times over his wife's body, and blow hard through his fist on a spot (>mböt-mböt) just above her forehead. He must also recite a certain prayer (du a or tangkay seulusök) over a bowl of water which the woman then drinks; this is supposed to make her delivery more speedy. This incantation is just as meaningless as most others of the kind, but the general in- tention is clear enough — to open that which is closed, and to clear away all hindrance 3). Should the i'c seulusök be of no avail, a teungku whose prayers are known to be efficacious is called upon to charm some water with his incantations. For the rest, matters are left to nature. Deaths in childbirth seem to be of cornmon occurrence.
i.ucky chil-Great expectations are cherished in regard to children born feet foremost (jaheuë) and these born with a caul (meusaröng). The first are supposed to have an incomparable natural gift for massage (urïit), and their prayers and their spittle are thought to have great curative pro- perties. Those born with a caul are believed to be invulnerable (keubay 4). To ascertain whether tliey are likely to possess this gift in a high degree, a cocoanut is placed in the fold of the caul (sarong) and left to sprout. If it bursts through the skin of the caul it is a bad omen, but if it is constrained by the covering to assume a crooked growth, then it is certain that neither lead nor steel will ever threaten the infant's life. The caul is kept, and at the circumcision of the child it is roasted and given him to eat.
| taken by the | nearest running | water or | with the line | of the split | bamboos which | form the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| llooring. In Acheh | no attention | is paid | to her position. | |||
| any sins she | may have committed | against | her husband. | Such | faults are supposed | to be |
| condoncd by | this symbolical | trampling | uuder foot of | the wife by | the husband, | who should |
| touch her body dabitur, intrudere. | lightly with | his feet as | he steps over | it. (Translator). | ||
| cfticacy of a child's | caul as | a charm against | death by | drowning. | (Translator). |
1) In Java the woman is so placed that her position corresponds with the direction
2) And in Malaya. The Malays explain this custom as an atonement by the woman for
3) Atsi pater nulla talia carmina noscit, satis est ei penem in aquam, quae mulieri
4) This reminds us of the wellknown superstition among English sailors as to the
jt\s in Java, ine placenta is rcgardeü as tlie younger brother or sister iheyounger (adöë ') of the new-born child 2), but the estimation of the liquor amnii eènui).' ' ^ as the elder brother is unknown in Acheh. The child, still united to its adöë, is placed for the time being on The oven. a fine large betel-nut spathe. The woman, after being cleansed and treated with sundry oils ') which her mother holds in readiness, is laid upon a bench or platform (prataih). After the woman has recovered a little, an oven is placed beneath this platform, and in tliis a fire is kept up continually for forty-four days 4). The idea is that the almost insupportable heat and smoke will counteract the collection of damp in the woman's body and assist in quickly restoring her figure to its former shape. During this period it is said of the woman that she is "engaged in drying herself over the fire" {madeiicngShe is then called tireucng didapu i. e. "one that lies close to the hearth." The woman suffers dreadfully under this process, and tosses hither and thither to save her skin from being scorched. She is not allowed to quench her thirst with water, but must be content with a little tea. She gets nothing to cool her parched mouth except some sugar- cane and pineapple which she is allowed to cliew. Of late a less severe treatment of women after childbirth has begun to be adopted in imi- tation of the Javanese. As an instance of "pantang" during this period of drying₀), the woman
| younger brother | was not | brought to the | birth." | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| The | Malays have | this notion | too; when | an infant | smiles it is said | to be "thinking | |
| of its younger | brother" | (at/ck). The | Malays do | not keep the | placenta; | they put it in a jar | |
| and bury serves as a token | it in the ground of the child's | and plant age. (Translate»). | a cocoanut | over it. | The tree | that grows | from this |
| Minyeu" or minyeu' As to the signifance of a period of | kay'ee futch kontb. | (kayu putehj, | minyeu' days after birth, marriage, death etc., | dbythun | (olive oil) and | minyeu' sribugtina see pp. | |
| syllable eum. | Dadeuëng = | "to dry | over the fire." | (transitive). | As to this custom | cf. G. 11. | |
| Niemann in | the Hij dragen | van het | A'oninkl. | /nst. voor dc TaalLand- | en Volkenkunde | ||
| van Nederl.-Indiè for | p. | ||||||
| [The Malay | is bttdiang. | The Malays | only apply | the "oven" | at intervals | as a rule, and | |
| the intensity | of the heat is gradually | diminished. | The wood | used for fuel | must contain | no | |
| poison; the | kind most | generally employed | is a variety | of mangrove | known in the | Malay | |
| Peninsula as api-api. | Rambutanwood | is also used | occasionally. | (Translator). | |||
| who tend the fire | must | be most careful | not to break | the burning | brands, | as to do so would | |
| be likely to cause | sickness | to the child. | (Translator). |
1) Hence the saying Si N. maté meukamat at/bii — "N. (the woman) (lied because the
5) This is an abbreviated form derived from dadeuëng with the addition of the inserted
6) The Malays have a curious pantang-rule as to the wood used for the oven; those
2)
3)
4) 44 264, 324.
1892, 36.
3 76
must eat rice from a bowl and not off a plate. It is thought that neglect of this rule would cause her body to swell in an unbecoming manner after childbirth. After the mother has been laid on the prataïh, the infant is attended to. The navel-cord is, as in Java, cut with a piece of sharp bamboo ') (teumèn the Jav. ivVlad), and to ward off evil influences the midvvife spits (,seumbö) upon the child from her mouth a slaver composed of chewed sirih, turmeric (kunyèt), betel-nut, gambir and lime. The midvvife then wraps the child in some strips of cloth and hands it over to the father. If it is a boy, the latter repeats in his right ear the adan or bang (the formula used as a summons to the five daily prayers), and in his left the karnat or final exhortation before the per formance of a religious exercise. In the case of a girl he limits himself to the last. The intention of this pious custom is to make the child hear, immediately after its birth, the Mohammedan confession of faith, which occurs frequently in both these formulas. Where the father is incapable of performing this office, the services of a teungku are engaged. At the same time the father gives a fee of one or two dollars to the midwife, who after her first attendance on the child also receives a money present from the woman 2) and another from her mother-in-law. A first born child [aneu phön) is presented by his father with a couple of dollars, which he puts under the infant's sleeping-place, to be spent by the mother's parents for the child's advantage. The child is now laid beside its mother on the prataih, and care is taken to spread some raw rice beneath its pillows. This is one of the numerous devices employed both about the prataih and all through the house, to avert the dreaded buröng (pontianak). Pieces of wood of a variety with a malodorous bark₃) supposed to frighten away the buröng, are laid all round the platform. Over the mother's head is hung, bell-wise, the hollow half-shell of a cocoanut, suspended by a cord passing through its top. To the end of this cord, inside the bell, is fastened a duröë rungköm, the thom of a large tree which bears small sour-sweet fruits. The stairway or ladder leading up to the house is protected against
v
bn/öfi, » T_ T 1 1 •, C il 1 1 1 C 1 : „ A „1,
| :) The | the only | variety of | thornless bamboo | found | in Acheh. | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| to half a dollar, | but those | who are fairly | well off give | two dollars. |
2) This present is called hoh fusat or lapé' pusat. Among the humbler folk it amounts
3) For instance the kaye'é meuïh-meuih, also called maih-maïh.
tlic attacks ot tne ourong by means 01 a strip 01 rattan siung round the steps on one side; this is first consecrated by a tangkay or incantation. Sometimes an arèn-rope (talöë jo) to which the buröng is equally averse, is used in place of this. Seven or thrice that number of filaments of the arèn-bark {puréh jö'), charmed in a similar vvay, are also placed under the pillows or sleeping-mat of the mother, or else fixed in the ground beneath the stairs. The buröng (like the kunti of the Sundanese) is generally believed to be much afraid of palm-leaf fibres (Mal. lidï) and old fishing-nets, yet these are not used in Acheh as charms '). Under the stairs and also under the guha (the hole in the floor of the back verandah, which serves as a latrine for sick people and young children) some thorny twigs of pandan (duröë seukè) are laid on the ground to scare away buröng. The buröng'1) of Achehnese superstition has much in common with the kunti or kuntianak of the Sundanese and the sundel bolong₃) which is an object of dread in certain parts of Java. Like the latter the buröng is conceived of as having the form of a woman with a great hole in her back, showing the vital organs. It is supposed that many of them are the spirits of women who have led an unchaste life and corne to an unhappy end in consequence. It is also believed that the number of this malignant race of spirits is added to by the ghosts of women slain by a buröng in chiklbed, and who tlicn become buröngs them- selves. The means resorted to for protection against the buröng are also to a great extent the same as those employed to drive away the kunti. The incantations used to exorcise the buröng are essentially identical with the jampe or japa customary in Java. Recourse is also had to abuse of the buröng, and she is driven away by being shown that her
| in Achehnese | is chichém, | and their expression | for | the spirit inimical | to women | in childbed | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| has no connection | in the | mind of the Achehnese | with the Malay | word. | |||
| The Malays | also believe | in the pontianak|but | even more dreaded | is the | pcnanggalan^ | a | |
| sort of second | self of | certain living | persons who | have the mysterious | power | of detaching | |
| their heads | and pulling | out their entrails | so as to hang | loose | in front. These | dread | beings |
| are supposed | to visit at night | houses | where women | in childbed | lie, so the | midwives | often |
| fasten strips en trance of the pétianggalan. | of mëngkuang | below the steps ( Translator). | to catch | in the protruding | entrails | and bar | the |
1) In the West of Java on the other hand, they are universally so employed.
2) The word is exactly identical in sound with the Malay buröng = "bird." But bird"
3)Compare also the Arabian Umm af-fibyan or qartnah (see my Mekka" Vol. II pp. 123—24).
tt
u
enemies know her name and origin and that they have a greater mastery of charms than she. [.eubè **Peu-**As might be supposed, however, the buröng has some characteristics aba. which are peculiarly Achehnese. Sundry strange tales are told by the Achehnese as to her origin. These exhibit local differences, but agree in some respects, especially in the assertion that one Leubè ') Peureuba, who in his lifetime was a hatib or Friday preacher in a mosque, played a principal part in connection therewith. This man had an intrigue with a certain woman, and his passion for her was so great that one Friday he was still dallying with her when the time for the weekly service arrived. He betook himself in all haste to the mosque, and omitted the bath of purification which is indispensable after sexual intercourse for the efficacy of a galat or prayer. He also forgot to return to his mistress her earrings, which for a jest he had hidden on the bara or main beam of the house. When he had mounted the pulpit and commenced the service in the customary manner, leaning on his great staff, his paramour entered the mosque and enquired of him "where are my earrings?" In reply he recited the Arabic words from the service bar ra 'rra'üf arrahim₂), indicating the bara as the place where the earrings were hidden. The woman asked him other questions all of which he answered by frag- ments of the Arabic service, whose sound recallcd Achehnese words -1). This unholy by-play ended in the hatib Peureuba suddenly falling from the pulpit and being killed by the iron point of his own preacher's staff. According to one view he now became the buröng, parent of all subsequent buröngs, some of whom were derived from deceased women of loose morals, and others from those who feil a prey to buröngs during pregnancy or at child-birth. Others narrate that his mistress was killed by the congrcgation immediately after her lover's fall, and
1) Sce p. 71 above.
| service. | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| rice-sieve | and its roots | as big as rice-pounders?" | whereupon he | gave her the | name of the | |
| tree birah | by reciting | the Arabic | formula birahniatika | ya arhant | arrahimïn = | by thy |
| mercy, o | most Merciful | of the merciful." | In reply | to her question | what are | the plants |
| which stand | in a row?" | he recited the | words: wakhtilaf | al-aili | (day | and night |
| succeeding | one another") | the first of which | suggests | kcutila, a kind | of vegetable. |
2) epithets of God, used in praise of him in the beginning of the
3) Thus she is said to have asked him: "What is that tree whose leaves are as big as a
u tf wan-nahar a
that her spirit became the forerunner of the buröngs. The first notion, though open to the objection that it makes the feminine buröng spring from a man, finds support in the tangkay buröng (charms against the buröng) where the latter is often thus addressed "I knovv who thou art; thou art Hatib Peureuba" and "thou hast not taken thy bath of purification." In addition to this story of the origin of all the buröngs, each of the more celebrated of these spirits has a history of its own, though there is a general resemblance between the various legends. In Lam Bada (XXVI Mukims) may be secn the grave of a famous buröng woman, named Tuan Siti or Póchut Siti. She was of good line- age, but having allowed herself to be seduced and having become pregnant was in the end treacherously drowned by her lover while on a pleasure trip to which he had invited her. Most dreaded of all, however, at the present time is the buröng Srabi or Seurabi, whose tomb is situated in gampong Tanjöng (mukim of Pagarayé) close to the capital of Acheh. She is also known as buröng Tanjöng. The proper name of the woman who after death was changed into this monster, appears to have been Rabiah (abbreviated in Srabi Si Rabi). She is said to have been the daughter of a religious teacher, but in spite of the pious lessons and strict discipline of her father she was seduced into an intrigue. When she had been some time pregnant her lover induced her to fly with him to the West Coast. They dropped down the river in a boat, but before they reached the open sea, the man slew his paramour and casting her body into the water, pursued his journey to the West alone. lier body was found near the gampong Kajeê Jatoé (just about where the hospital at Kuta Raja now stands), and was pulled out of the water by the people of that gampong. When they found it was the body of a woman belonging to Tanjöng, they brought her thither and she was buried there. Meantime the unhappy woman had been transformed into a buröng, which rested not until she had overtaken and slain her murderer. After having thus appcased her passion for revenge, she seized a man in the gampong of Kayèë Jatóë, but 011 his reminding her that his people had rescued the body of Rabiah or Srabi from the waves and made her burial possible, she let him go, and at the same time swore never to molest a woman of that gampong. All the more violent however were her
onslaughts on pregnant women and those in childbed in other gampöngs. Likc the Sundanese kuntt, the buröng sometimes announces her presence by a shrill scream, a sustained nasal iiii')! Hut she is most to be feared when she creeps upon her victim without any such warning. This she does more especially when a pregnant woman heedlessly ventures out of doors after sunset, or when her husband or some other inmate of the house after having been out for the evening comes in directly without taking the proper precautions s). Occasional loss of consciousness and delirium are regardea as un- mistakeable symptoms of possession by a buröng. As the women from their earliest youth hear countless stories about these evil spirits and are convinced that possession by them is the greatest danger that threatens them during pregnancy or shortly after confinement, it is not astonishing that their ravings while delirious appear like utterances from the mouth of the buröng. Like the zars 3) which are wont to "possess" the women of Mekka, the Achehnese buröngs have certain desires which they express to the comprehension of expert enquirers through the lips of the victims whom they have bercft of their senses. 1 hese experts do not confine themselves simply to repeating a tangkay or exorcising incantation; they must first know what buröng it is they have to do with. 1 hey thus enquire whence they come and what are their intentions and wishes. The last question is generally that first answered, and the rest may be deduced from the reply. Where the delirious patiënt through the interpretation of the expert expresses a desire for *nturöng-*leaves (the leaves of the plant known as kclor, which are used as a vegetable), for dried bufïfalo s flesh (balu) and salted ducks' eggs (boh ite jruc), it is then regarded as certain that it is the dreaded Buröng Tanjöng that has to be contended with. As long as the woman lies over the fire (madeuëng), that is to say for the space of 44 days after childbirth, some anxiety is feit in regard to the buröng, but most of all during the first 10 days, and especially on the 3yth and 10'h days₄). During this period care is taken
| the Zei/schrift | der Deutschen | Morgenliind-Gcstllschaft, | Vol. XI. 1|pp. 480 | and 701. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| after a marriage | or a death. |
1) Thus the making of such a sound is called by the Achehnese meu'i'i lagci buröng.
2) See p. 373 above.
3) See my Mekka, vol. II, pp. 124 et seq.: also M. J. de Goeje and Th. Nöldeke
4) These are, it will be noted, the very days which are considered as of importance
in
3gl
to avoid all needless mention of the buröng within hearing of the patiënt, while all the precautions mentioned above are taken to guard against its approach. Should the buröug have entered into the woman ("ka tainong buröng"), Vowstothe buröng. a man who is acquainted with the proper incantations is called in; on the dangerous days this is done in any case as a measure of prevention. Sometimes the mother of the sick woman makes a vow to visit the tomb of the evil spirit in case of her daughter's recovery. She promises uto go and fulfil her vow at the tomb of her grandmother," [ja' pcu-Iheuch kaöy ba jeurat ne), thus euphemistically describing the ill- omened buröng. Such a vow is performed in the company of a large party of friends after the 44th day. Goats or fowls are killed as the occasion may require, and a feast is given. Flowers ') are also offered at the tomb, together with a piece of white cloth to serve as a covering₂) for one of the tombstones. At the same time a piece of one of the white coverings already sur- rounding the tombstone is brought away, and strips of this are worn as charms round the neck and wrists of the mother and child, until they wear out. The circumstance that these spirits which torment women in child- birth have definite names, and especially the fact that they have tombs which are revered in the same manner as those of departed saints is peculiar to Acheh, at least in contradistinction to Java. During this first critical period of ten days there must always be a lamp burning by the patient's side, and some one must keep watch beside her. To facilitate this task the women from the neighbourhood come in off and on at night. Where the company is numerous they often while away the time by reciting popular stories (hikayat). When the buröng reveals itself these women of course evince much sympathy, which they express chiefly by conversing through the medium of the patiënt with the invisible being. "Who art thou ?" they ask for example. "That shall I not teil." — "YVherefore comest thou hither?" — "I am taking a walk." — "What
| one who is drying" | (intrans.) |
|---|
1) Böh bungong, identical with the Javanese ngümbang.
2) Saldb batcè.
3) ba* ureu'éng madeuëng as it is called, i. e. "to the night with
dom go and spend
382
dost thou seek for, what dost thou desire?" — "Fishes' heads, muröng leaves, dried flesh, ducks' eggs ')." The answers given by the buröng to the leubè who comes to withstand her with his incantations (tangkay) are regarded as of greater conse- quence. It is thought a very good sign when the patiënt grows quiet aftcr the exorciser has said emphatically to the buröng aget thee gone to thy home" ija' wöe). Should this be of no avail, the expert then employs sundry phrases to drive the buröng out of the inner room, through the passage, down the steps and out on to the gampöng-path (jttröng); tliis is called bringing down the buröngJ) {peutrön buröng). But woe to the victim if in reply to all his admonitions the spirit replies through the lips of the delirious patiënt: "I will not go down unless I bring (the sick one) along with me" (meting hana kupeutrön, han kutrön). Then all hope is lost. The chawat. One of the duties of the midwife is to prepare, 011 the first or second day after the birth, what is known as the chawat. This word generally denotes a fold of cloth twisted round the middle and between the legs so as to convey the impression of a short pair of trousers. In the sick-chamber, however, the chawat denotes a long bag in which are placed the indispensable "44 herbs" 4), pounded fine and mixed with various simples. This is placed in situ and fastened with a band at back and front to the ordinary girdle "'). This chawat is renewed once or twice during convalescence, and 011 each occasion the nurse receives a fee of about a dollar. The placenta, or "younger brother" (adoé) of the infant, is mixed with some salt and ashes from the kitchen, and folded up in a piece of cloth. It is then placed behind the cooking place, probably in order that it may dry quickly. In Java there are many superstitious notions about this adi ari-ari, as it is there called. It is thought for example that the placenta returns to its place after the confinement, and is
1) Soë ga/a? — Han kupetigah. — Fnbuët keunbë? — Kuj(C-ja\ — Pcuè taja1 mita^
As wc have
| pcttë tameunapsuP | — Ute'è eungkdt, gtife on muröng, sië balu, boh itP jruë| | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| seen these | objects | are those | desired by | ||
| Where | is in an | Achehnese | house, | which is raised | the expression |
| "below" is the equivalent | of our out-of-doors." | ||||
| A common | form of curse | against | a pregnant | woman is thus: | |
| may the buröng medical art. | bring you See p. | down below." above. |
4). These will be again referred to in connection with Achehnese
seen these last-named objects are those desired by Srabi Tanjöng.
2) the speaker on posts,
tt
3) ba buröng peutrön keu =
u Awcu'èh peuët plöh peuët
5) Taloë kPiëng. 30
thus the sa me at every birth, and that it is a source of danger to its cider brother (the babe) at the time of his birth. None of these ideas are current in Acheh. Much less weight is attached in Acheh than in Java to the severance of the umbilicus '). When the cord is cut, a little gold-dust is sprinkled in the navel to prolong the life of the child, and the severed portion is wrapped in a piece of cloth and placed above the cooking- place, where it remains till it disappears of its own accord J). No feast is given on the occasion of its severance '). On the seventh day after the child's birth there takes place the ceremony The peu of the peuchichab (lit. — to give to taste), which is generally accompan- ied by the first shaving of the child's head. Like other ceremonies₄) of the kind, it may be postponed for a day or two, but it is officially understood to take place on the 7^ day. The presence of the teungku of the gampöng and some leubès is indispensable at the great kanduri or religious feast given on this occasion, not only for the sake of the prayers with which the feast must be consecrated, but also because it is generally thought to be essential to the sanctity of a feast, that it should be partaken of by some indigent persons who are distinguished from the mass by their knowledge and practice of religion. \ here the peuchichab feast is celebrated on a fairly large scale, the male and female relations of the father and mother are invited in any case, and generally also a number of people from the gampöngs of both. I he guests arrivé at about 8 A. M., and are welcomcd without any prolix ceremonies. Some of the relatives bring a money present (say a dollar each) for the child; the father's mother gives new mats, pillows, clothes and a little swinging bed which serves as a cradle (ayön)r') and is supported by a rope covered with cloth. The male guests give
| in Java, seems | to be quite | unknown | in Acheh. | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| supported midwife. | (u'i-alas) with (Translator). | a strip | of silver, which | afterwards | becomes | the property | of the |
| corners and ( Translater). | by these | it is hung | from a beam | of the house | and swings | casily | to and fro. |
1) Art sröt pus at is the expression used to denote this occurrence.
2) The use of the separated portion as a charm or medicament for the child, so common
3) 1 he Malays cut the navel-cord with a bamhoo knife; wliile being severed it is often
4) See p. 326 above.
5) Malay buayan. The Malay cradle is of basket-work; cords are attached to the four
biaya peukan (tnings oougnt :n uie mdiKci;, »uui « .iu.<.c, sirih and fish. Food is served to the assembled guests, but not in so formal a mannor as at the peujatnic'). An uiting of glutinous ricc with its accessories and some fruits are set aside for the midwife. After the feast all the guests depart except the immediate relatives and the teungku and his attendants. The bidan (midwife) after shaving the child's head, lays it in all its finery on a small mattress (kasö) covered with a number of costly cloths, and then brings it in and hands it over in the first place to the teungku. At the same time she sets before the latter a tray containing a bowl of dates, another of cocoanut milk and the savoury paste known as klcumba, in the midst of which a chëmpaka flower stands erect. The teungku takes a small piece of date, mixes it with the santan (cocoanut milk) and rubs it on the child's lips after invoking the name of Allah. Both the teungku and after him the relatives of the infant also "give him to taste" a sort of pap (Ach. cheunichah-, Mal. and Jav. rujak) made of a compost of raw fruits pounded very fine. It is from this compulsory introduction to human customs as to food that the whole ceremony is called peuchichab. 2) rhc "haki-The Mohammedan law recommends an offering of two shcep or goats for a male, and one for a female child, by preference on the seventh day after birth, but if this be impossible then at some later date — even when the child is quite grown up. This sacrifice is called caqlqah, and is not only known but actually practised in Acheh under the name of hakikah. In Acheh, no less than in other parts of the E. Indian Archipelago, the people of Mekka have done their best to foster the doctrine that it is an extremely meritorious act to offer this sacrifice for the child in the holy city. The Mekka folk thus of course reap the profits on the sale of the goats, and at the same time enjoy thcir share of the meat. Many Achehnese are however aware that the hakikah is more properly offered at home. The choice of some later occasion for this sacrifice, and not the seventh day after birth is also common in Acheh.
1) See p. 320 above.
2) This feast is also observcd by the Malays, in much the same way as here described.
| The child's | hair is not shaved, | but small | pieces snipped | off pro forma. | Well-to-do | people |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| often fasten | small diamond-shaped | pieces | of gold or | silver in the child's | hair, | and these |
| are presented | to teachers | others of repute | at the discretion | of the father. | (Translator). |
2) This feast is also observcd by the Malays, in much the same way as here described.
and
The giving of the name, for which the seventli day is also recom mended by the law of Islam, generally takes place in Acheh at tin end of the period of convalescence, and is not attendcd by mucl ceremony. The teungku is called to the house or the child sent t< him. He consults a Malay manual which gives the names most suitabli for a child born on a given day of the week and month throughou the year. Before the name is fixed, the child is usually called Si Chu or Nya Chut both meaning "the little one," or else Si Chuïng ') o Si AJièb, both of which words have a somewhat unsavoury significance or, if a boy, it may be called Si Gam (mannikin), or if a girl, Si hiotn (little woman). Such names, universal and indistinctive as they are remain in many cases the only ones by which those that bear then are known all their life long. Many dispense with the Arabic name: given by the teungku s skilied advice, and have in their places name: borrowed from some object of daily use or mere nicknames indicatinj some bodily characteristic or defect. After the ioth day begin the visits of congratulation. Female acquaint ances drop in at odd times and bring some little gift for the mothei or the child. These presents are called neumè ("things brought"). Thost intended for the child consist especially of the little sweet banan; known as pisang seumatu or the sourish pisang klat, both of whicl may be eaten by sucking infants without causing indigestion. Banana: are given to newborn children as early as the seventh day after birth and it is the universal custom in Acheh to habituate the infant a> much as possible from the very beginning to eat regular food in additior to the mother's milk. The gifts of the visitors to the mother usually consist of fresh fruit; such as oranges of various sorts (bbh kvuct viamch, bbh gifi), plates ol yellovv glutinous rice, etc. From the second day after its birth the child is twice a day, at about 7 A. M. and 5 I'. M., bespued (seumbö) by an old woman with
| instance | in Java, | children's | names are | very often | borrowed | from such ideas | or from the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| names | of the sexual | organs. | Thus we find | in Java | tolé or kon/oti, | li (contracted | from pïli) |
| which | signify the | male organ; | htp or | kulttp = uncircumcised, | for boys, | and ruk (from | |
| Inruk) | or me' from | témï (= pudendum | muliebre) | for girls. [Kulup | is a very | common name | |
| among ( Trans/ator). | Malays; they | do not | however | seem to employ | any of the | others mentioned | above. |
| 25 |
1) Chuéng properly mcans the smell of urine. In othcr parts of the Archipelago, as for
a slaver composed of the same ingredients which in Java serve as a protection against the evil influences which threaten the infant: sirih, turmeric (kunyet), sweet-flag (jeureungië, Jav. dringo), cheuko (Jav. khicliur, Mal. chêkur) and brown onions. Sometinies a chewed pap of the same articles is laid on the spot above the child's forehead (mböt-mböt). After the whole bodv lias thus been overspread, the infant is dressed in a sort of swadding-cloth (tja teutnpèë) and over this are thickly wound strips of cloth till he is closely packed (geudöng). Discases of The indispositions most dreadcd for the child are beuteng and sakct droë. The former is a swelling of the abdomen which is especially common in the first two months and is generally fatal. As a measure of preventicn chewed turmeric (kunyet) or ashes from the cooking-place (abl-ë dapti] are laid on the navel "that no wind may enter in" ') as they say. The sakét droëJ) (sakit dtrï) appears to derive its name from the idea that every child brings into the world in himself (droë) the tendency to this disease; it is supposed to depend entirely on the supernatural powers ®) whether the malady will be developed or suppressed. A European physician would probably divide into several distinct ailments what the Achchnese understand by this single appellation. Fever is said to be often the first symptom of the sakét droë, but at a later period the hands are clenched and the eyes staring, while the patiënt moans continually. Hinggu or asa foetida roasted and applied to the forehead and chin is believed to act as a preventive. Remedies are seldom employed for this disease; the tangkay or incantation is alone of avail. It is thought indispensable that a child suffering from this ailment should always be laid 011 its stomach and it is sometimes placed in this position on a manure-heap, in the hope that this treat- ment may be of some service 4)! The sakét droë is especially feared during the first year of the child's existence, and during this period children are kept carefully indoors
1) Be1 tambng angen.
2) This discase is also called peunyakét manya1 = the suckling s sickness.
| refers to | the supernatural | powers | supposed | to inhabit | the air. Another | disease | also so |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| classified above the osculo pueri | is peunyakét navel followed adfert. | gajahan, by loss | the symptoms of consciousness. | of which | are a fecling | of oppression | just |
2) This discase is also called peunyakét manya = the suckling s sickness.
3) Such diseases are called penny aket dunanyang — diseases from above, which name
4) Sacpe quoque mater, alios modos frustra experta, indicem in pudendum suum intrusum
u
3 «7
sakét droë having been imperfectly exorcised. Such for instance are epileptic attacks, for which the mother resorts to the same peculiar remedy which she employs in the case of the sakét droë; another is a sort of derangement called pungb buy (pigs' madness), in which the patiënt, besides exhibiting certain symptoms which recall the movements of wild pigs, shows a strong inclination to jump into the water '). The spirits whose malign influence causes the development of the sakét droë are known as hantu buru. They inhabit the woods, so that the class of persons best acquainted with the proper incantations for neutralizing their influence are the professional deerhunters (pawang rusa), and tliose who bring honey-combs from the forests (ureuëng pet unoë). These liold all wood-craft in fee, and their help is invoked both on the appearance of symptoms of the peunyakét droë and for sundry other discases as well. Another disease of children is thought to bc causcd by loss of the seumangat or of one or more of the seumangat. The popular psy- chology is not entirely agreed on the question as to whether man lias one or seven of these souls. Wlien a child is badly frightened at some unwonted occurrence, such as a fire, and subsequently continues nervous, it is regarded as certain that the seumangat has been driven out, and that something must be done to call it back again. This task is undertaken by a skilied old woman, who receives as her fee some husked and unhusked rice [breuëh padë), two cggs, a piece of white cloth and some keumeu. This last is unhusked rice'opened by roasting, a form of food which we shall have occasion to refer to later in our description of small-pox. She burns incense and recites pantons by the hour, varying these occasionally by an appeal to the seumangat to return. Finally she enquires of the assenibled women:
| I) Mal. | g.la Mn; | but the disease | so called | by the Malays | is not confined | to children | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| and the name | is taken | rather from | the grunting | sound emitted | by the | patiënt than | from |
| movements | recalling | those of wild | pigs. Other | diseases of | children so | classified | by the |
| Malays are | süraiuan, | a soreness | of the tongue, | the chief | cure for which | is Chinese | ink |
| rubbed on | the part Trans/a/or}. | affcctcd and | sawen, a form | of fevcr | accompanied | by giddiness | and |
deliriutTi. (
"Have you not seen those sparks? They are the seumangats which have now returned." And fortunately for the credit of the expert, there are always one or two vvomen who are kind enough to answer in the affirmative. Grown-up people speak of the loss of their seumangat only figura- tively, to express great astonishment or confusion. The common ex pression kru seumangat! used to one who has borne himself too politely or submissively towards the speaker, seems to contain the rudiment of a notion of this soul with its occasional departures from the body as a bird which may be summoned back by the word kru, which is used to call fowls home. Kml of the After the 44 momentous days ') have passed, there takes place what men penod. known as ^he "removal of the oven" (b'oih dapu); this however as a rule really occurs on the 4ist or 4311 day, as a day of even number is considered less lucky. A kanduri is given to a number of teungkus and leubès, at which feast there must be plenty of apam or cakes in addition to the rice and its accessories. One of the guests consecrates the fast by the funeral prayer, in which the mercy of Allah is invoked for all the dead and for the living as well. A number of women are invited to attend the ceremony, but these take no share in the kanduri. Those whose means allow of it give at the same time a Rapa i, the religious play so popular among the Achehnese. The midwife removes the dapu or oven and pushes it beneath the house, where the platform on which the mother has rested during her confinement is also deposited. The woman is then given a bath, which is called the "bath of 44" (i. e. 44 days). If we may believe the old legends, women of rank in earlier times had this bath served fiom 44 jars -). The water for the bath is mixed with the juice of sour oranges (boh kriïct). I11 ordinary cases the midwife can then take her departure. She nuist first, however, "cool" (peusiju'e) the house. I'or this purpose she employs the means with which wc have already₃) become familiar,
| at days, and | this is the | time observed | in Java. | As we have | seen however | the period | of |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| forty days customarily | observed | in othcr | countries | is often | replaced by | forty-four, | which |
| latter number | plays a prominent | part in | Achehnese | superstitiën. | |||
| Compare | the bath of | the woman | in Java | in the | month of | her pregnancy, | the |
| water for which See pp. | is if possible 43—44 above. | taken from | seven | wells. |
1) The Mohammedan law sets down the average period of purification after childbirth
2) 7th
3)
i. c. flour and water which is sprinkled on the places to be "cooled" with an improvised besom formed of twigs or whole plants of sisijuë' and matiè -manbë and stalks of naleuëng sambö '). With this, after solemnly invoking Allah's name, she besprinkles all the 16 or 24 posts which support the Achehnese house, beginning with those called raja and putroê, to which superstition assigns a special importancc. At lier departure the midwife receives, in addition to the sum estimated by her as the equivalent of the various drugs etc. which she has prepared for the motlier and infant, a douceur in money for her trouble (peunayah) and a complete outfit of garments 2) (seunalén). I11 Java it is customary for the woman or her husband to ask forgiveness of the midwife for all the trouble they have put her to, but in Acheh this lakei• men ah 3), as it is called, is made by the woman's mother. I hroughout the whole of the Indian Archipelago it is regarded as The peutrön a momentous cpocli in the life of the child when he first comes into contact with his motlier eartli. All who have not entirely abjured the old ideas, are careful not to let the child lie or sit upon the ground until sucli contact lias been duly prepared for by a number of cere monies, of which a religious feast forms an important part; for the eartli, which contains so many blessings, holds within it also niucli that is evil. Acheh is no exception to this rule. The ceremony which in Java is called nurunkeun (Sund.) or mudun lêmah (Jav.), is in Acheh known as
penti on i. e. causing to descend,' referring to the child's being brought out of the house 4). I his may take place a couple of months after its birth, but preference is given to a month of uneven number, as for example the 3^, 5th or 7A month of the child's age. Up to this time the clnld must on 110 account be brought outside the house. In Acheh, however, not nearly so much is made of this or othcr important epochs in life, as in ceremony-loving Java. I11 the former country such events are chiefly marked by the giving of a big kanduri in the house, a goat or buftalo being slaughtered and the occasion
| shawl (ija sawa|Mal. and Jav. | slendang). | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| is nothing." | |||||||
| for entering | the house | is c' ' to climb | up, and | for going | out of doors, | to descend. |
1) See pp. 305—306 above.
2) A pair uf trousers (silueuè or lueuë), an undergarment (ija pinggang), and a sort of
3) 1 hc invariablc rcply to this, as to all othcr prayers for forgiveness, is hana peuë — "it
4) Owing to the fact that the Achehnese houses stand high off the ground, the word
trön =
sanctihed by the prayer ol the omcial teungku. I nis last ïnueea noicis good of all feast of any importance; no leubè and few ulamas of con- sideration would venture to appear at such a feast and honour it with thcir prayer except on the special invitation of the teungku of the meunasah. This fcast is also frcquently embellishcd by a Rapa'i representation, when the givers are persons of means. When the kanduri is over, some women, including the midwife, who is always invitcd on such occasions, fetch the child from the house and take it to the tomb of a saint (kubu kramat). Such tombs are to be found in the neighbourhood of almost every gampöng. They take with tliem as an offering for the dead some flowers and incense, and a piece of white cloth to renew or add to the coverings of the tomb- stones (salöb batèë). At the grave the child's head is solemnly washed (srah ulee) either by the keeper of the tomb or by the women them- selves, and thus the ceremony is brought to a close. Vows. All such events in the family life form the occasions for vows. 1 hese are sometimes made without any special motive, but particularly in cases of sickness or misfortune, in the hope of furthering the well-being of him in whose behalf the feast is given. The Rapa'i representations just mentioned may form the subject of such a kaöy or vow. It is also a common custom for the father or mother to vow at the sickbcd of a child which has not yet been "brought down," that in the event of its recovery they will not merely bring it to the nearest holy tomb to inaugurate its first contact with the earth, but will take it on a pilgrimage to the resting-place of one of the great saints of Acheh, such as the renowned Teungku di Kuala Abdöra'öh, the saint of Singkel, or the holy Sayyid Teungku Anjóng buried in Gampöng Java. In such cases the child is escorted to the sacred spot by a great pro cession of men and women, and cattle are slaughtered and a feast given at the tomb. Where the vow includes the expression of an intention to head the procession with geundrang, the two drums or geundrang and the flute (srunè) are marched in front. It sometimes happens that when the time of the peutron arrivés, the means of fulfilling the vow are momentarily lacking. Then the "descent" of the child takes place simply in the manner described above, and the fulfil- nient of the vow remains a debt to be discharged as soon as possible.
WOMEN RESTING IN THE GREAT MOSQUE (MEUSEUGIT RAYA) OF KUTA RAJA, ON THEIR WAY TO A SAINT'S TOMB WHERE THEY ARE ABOUT TO FULFIL THEIR VOWS. THE GIRLS ON WHOSE BEHALF THE VOWS WERE MADE, ARE STANDING IN THE FOREGROUND.
The non-fulfilment of a vow is regarded as apt to be attcnded by disastrous consequences. For instance if a child suffers from persistent ulcers on its head, ears or eyes, or is slow in rccovering from an illness, or suffers for an unusual length of time from the effects of circumcision, people say: "That child has a bimaran" '), which means either that a vow lias been made in its behalf and remains unfulfilled, or that one of those feasts or ceremonies which are generally the subjects of vows should be held for its benefit. In this last case recourse is had to certain mysterious tests in order to ascertain what should be done. For instance the child is watched in its sleep and asked what it is that it really needs. The names of the usual ceremonies etc. are slowly repeated one after another, and it is assumed that the one desired is that at the mention of which the sleeping infant seems most at rest. Sometimes the same method is resorted to in order to ascertain the nature of an unfulfilled vow. It may happen, for instance, that the child's mother has died, and the wise man or woman who is consulted in regard to the illness of the babe may say that there seems to be bimaran in the case, and that probably the mother had made a vow but had not communicated it to others. Under such circumstances nothing seems left but to try and discover the terms of the vow by the means of divination described abovc. The most usual kinds of bimaran are the procession to the tomb witli geundrangs which we have so often referred to, or the presentation to the child of a peculiar garment of many colours 3) (ija planggï) which now-a-days at least is not worn except in case of vows or bimaran 4). We shall here enumerate some of the vows most commonly made in Acheh especially by parents in behalf of their sick childrcn. Two of them we have already noticed, the vows to celebrate withgeundrang music or with a Rapa'i performance the first occurrence of importance
| being which | afilicts the | child with sickness. | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| with a golden | hair ornament, | called | ulc'è cheumara, | consisting | of an oblong | gold | plate on |
| the underside | of which | is fixed | a chain to | which is attached | a hook | to fasten | it to the |
| hair. The | woman places | it in her | back hair, | but conceals | the golden | plate, as it is not | |
| the custom | for grown | up women | to wear such | ornaments. | The idea | is that the demands | |
| of the spirit | which caused | disease | in the hair, | or of the hair | itself, are | thus satisfied. |
1) Aaen' nyan kadang na bimaran.
2) The idea is that the thing in question is desired by a jen (jinn) or other supernatural
3) There is a specimen ip the museum of the lïatavian Society.
4) When a woman's hair falls out this also is thought to be bimaran; she is then supplied
in uiu ine ui ine cniia. 1 ne inings voweci nave aiways some connection with religion, or else are such as have been shown by tradition or personal experience to act as charms against evil spirits. Where a parent in desperation promises to perform an act which has never before formed the subject of a vow, and the wished-for recovery supervenes, the means that has proved so successful is resorted to by many others '), and one more is added to the list of vows. In addition to the Rapa'i, the following are some of the vows which ire regarded as of a religious nature. "If you recover, I will take you to seven mosques." The fulfilment consists in taking the child round to seven different mosques and washing its head with water from the reservoir (kulam) of eacli. "I shall have the whole Quran recited". A couple of dollars are given to a leubè, who then performs this pious task. "I shall take you to 44 saints." This visiting of holy tombs is again coupled with the washing of the head (sra/i it/ïi;) of the convalescent child. UI shall give a kanduri of seven head of buffalo." These are then purchased at the great slaughter preceding the commencement of the fasting month [ma meugang) and given as a present to the teungku of the village. "I shall bathe you with water that has washed the feet of His Majesty. ' To fulfil this vow, it was customary to beg of the Sultan's servants 'a little of the water that had washed the feet of their royal master', and the latter would generally oblige the suppliants by putting his hand into a jar of water presented for the purpose. Kither in fulfilment of a vow, or simply to avert evil infiuences, a child's head is often washed near the pulpit of a great mosque, or else some flowers and perhaps a little copper money are laid on the pulpit at the Friday service. Sometimes the child is given to drink some water, in which a congregation of not less than 44 persons all have dipped their hands at the commencement of the Friday service. Besides the geundrang music, the following are some of the purely superstitious vows classified as puja or efficacious against evil spirits: aIf you recover, I shall go and beg in seven shops®)." Thereupon
| against the | jens. | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| doors against | poor folk | who come | to beg for such | a purpose. |
1) Of such a thing it is said ka gen puja i. e. it has been successfully used as a chavm
2) Such a vow can only be fulfilled by well-to-do people; most shops would close their
they boy for some trifle or other in the keudès (shops) where thcy deal, saying tliat they do so in fulfilment of a vovv, and generally receive a piece of gold thread, which is afterwards sewn on the head cloth {tangkuit)) if the child is a boy, and 011 the kerchief (ija sawa') if it is a girl. "I shall slaughter a sheep in the midst of the courtyard." When the fulfilment of this vow is accompanied by an invitation to reciters of the Quran, it assumes a religious character '). The Achehnese mother rocks (ayon) her child to sleep in a kind of swing, consisting of a rope of which the two extremities are fastened to the ceiling while it is kept apart below by a bar of wood placed horizontally. Under this bar is fastened a handkerchief or cloth so disposed that the child can lie in it with comfort. The mother sings the child to sleep (peulalt) with native lullabies 2). The child's age is described in Acheh as in the adjacent countries by allusion to the movements it is capable of making. Thus they distinguish between the stages of "lying 011 the back" (meulinteuïng) "turning 011 the side" (balc), "lying on face and hands*" (dugbm),* «sitting" (diic), "crawling" (meuaeuy), "standing" (dong), "walking" (ja) and "running" (pinnig) -1). lo practise the child in its movements a rounded stick is planted in the ground; to this is attached a section of bamboo, so placed that its hollow end covers the point of the stick, round which it easily revolves. To the bamboo is fastened a wooden handle, the end of which is given to the child to hold, so that thus supported he can toddie round the stick. This instrument is called wéng₄).
| meting ka puléh | kah = if you recover' | is to be understood | as preoeding | each one. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Kuja' mi' kah ttijdh Kujuè beu'èt si se mi tamat. | boh meuseugit. | |||||
| KujeC me kah ba Kukanduri | peuèt tujdh boh uleë keubeuè. | eëlia. | ||||
| Kuptimano'è Kuja' geit made tujdh | kah ngon ié srah gaki boh kende. | poteu. | ||||
| h'ttsië kamhtg | saboh ditetingoh | lenen. | ||||
| The singing | of these songs | (in Java | /é/a-le'la, among | the Sundanesp | //eng-uengkung) | is |
| called in Achehnese in a more or less modified | meudödi | from the sound in the cradle-songs. | dodi (Mal. | du-duy) | which constantly | occurs |
| The question | asked of parents | by those | who seek | to know a child's | age is: | whatcan |
| your child do (peu'è thee anetC gata) | \ to which | the reply | is: ka thee dttë|meuaeuy | etc. | ||
| [Also used brella-top." ( Translator).'] | by the Malays | of the Peninsula, | and called | by them | kepala poyong | — "urn- |
1) The Achehnese formulas for the above mentioned vows are as under. The condition
4) This is also in general use in Java: Sund. kurilingan, Jav. leredan or gritan.
l
1 plöh peuèt
2)
9 form
3) u
1
In the case of girls circumcision follows very soon after the peutrön. Circumcision It is performed vvith great secrecy. Even the father does not know ° 8" 5' when his daughter is circumcised. The haste vvith which this operation is got over is attributed to the fear lest the girl so soon as she can speak should mention it in her childish innocence. Not a semblance of festivity attends the ceremony; some yellow glutinous rice is simply brought to the teungku and he repeats the fatihah over it a single time. In presenting it to him the women say: "we have here a small offering in honour of the Prophet" (na liajat bachut keu Pangulèë), without further elucidation. The teungkus receive such little gifts almost daily with a request for a fatihah or a prayer. The secrecy observed in this matter is much greater in Acheh than in Java. In the latter country there is not indeed a feast given to celebrate the circumcision of girls, but there is on the other hand no concealment where they are circumcised at the feasts given to celebrate the performance of the same rate upon their brothers or cousins. The midwife acts as surgeon. The "piercing of the ears" (tob glunyuëng) ') of girls is performed in Piercing of their 6th or 7th ycar. 1,10 ear"Iobes- 1 his ceremony is restricted to the "open season of the year*" (juusém* htdih blatig) as it is believed that if it is done during the "narrovv" or "closed" season (ninsêm piche blang) the holes in the ears will have a tendency to contract. Neglect to fulfïl a vow made with reference to the feast of ear-boring is considered likely to result in the complete splitting of the ear-lobe. It is only the very poor vvho have this operation performed at home, inviting but few guests to witness the ceremony. It is more usual to take the girl in procession to a neighbouring holy tomb, so that the saint's blessing may rest upon the act. This is done even vvhen the mother has made no vow with reference to the piercing of her daughter's ears. But it seldom happens that the mother has not made some such kdoy or vow, the most customary being that the ceremony shall take place at the tomb of some famous saint, such as Teungku Anjöng or Teungku di Kuala. On such an occasion both men and women of the gampöng are invited in great numbers, and a procession is formed to the sacred
| i) Mal. | Mrtindek | The Malays | often bore | the ears | before |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| its first year. | (Trans la tor). |
telinga. the child has completed
spot, escorted if possible by the gampöng authorities (kenchï and teungku) and with the two traditional drums (geundrang) and a flute (srune) leading the van. After the leubès have recited some passages from the Quran followed by the customary prayers, an animal is slaughtered and a kanduri held. The woman whose task it is to bore the ears begins with the usual precautions against evil influences. Invoking the name of Allah, she scatters breuéh padé (husked and unhusked rice) over the child, and besprinkles her vvith a besom formed of the three "cooling" plants '), vvhich she dips in flour and water (leupóng taweuii). Finally both she and the other old women vvho are present at the ceremony rub yellovv glutinous rice behind the ears (peusunténg) of the young maiden. The expert then bores the holes vvith a thorn or a golden needie. Every time of life has its special amusements, which play no incon- siderable part in the bringing up of the young. These vvill be described in a subsequent chapter. Wc shall also discuss later the elementary instruction of child ren, but one or two points which rather concern the attitude of the parents in respect to such teaching may fitly be dealt with here. At the age of about 6 or 7 the boys are brought by their father,
| Instruction | ||
|---|---|---|
| <>ui.>n. | ant | r s]jy |
| 2 |
111 the j gj [ their mother, to the school vvhere they are taught to recite the Quran ). This instruction is given chiefly by women, though some men vvho have not been able to find a more lucrative means of livelihood also act as ureuëng pumubeu'ét, as these teachers are called. Wednesday is generally chosen as the day for bringing the children to the schoolmaster or mistress. As a gift for the teacher, they bring a large dish of glutinous rice vvith grated cocoanut and red sugar 3) on top. The parent addresses the teacher somewhat as follows₄): "I come to hand over my child to you. Teach it and spare not the rod; so you make it not lame or blind, let the rest be at your discretion." From this time forth the child attends school pretty regularly until
1) See page 305 above.
2) This "bringing to school" is called cutitat beu'ét i. e. to take to be taught recitation,
| and the | teachers, not only | of Quran | recitation, | but also of higher | forms of knowledge, | are | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| called ureuëng la én ba' nyan | pumubeu'ét, hu kom d/ oenen. | i. e. the | pe *sons vvho cause (the | pupils) | to recite or read. |
2) This "bringing to school" is called cutitat beu'ét i. e. to take to be taught recitation,
3) This dish is called bu leukat ngon u mirah.
4) Aneu' Ion Ion ja' jö keu dro'éneu, neupubeuèt, neupbh, tnttbe c hap ie d'eungon buta,
1 1
the tamat, i. e. until it has completed the recitation of the whole Quran to its teacher's satisfaction. Some teachers give notice to the parents when the task is half finished, whereupon the latter are con- sidered bound to send the teacher a dish of yellovv glutinous rice (bu kunyèt) with little cakes of rice-flour (këtan) and cheuneuruët, a sort of gelatinous network of the same kind of rice, or grated cocoanut and sugar (u mirah), for the "cooling" of the Quran, as they express it. When the teacher's task is entirely finished, the adat prescribes that the guru should subject the pupil to a final "cooling." As we have repeatedly observed, every important act or occurrence, according to the popular belief, sets in motion "hot" (i. e. dangerous) influences, against which precautions are necessary. Thus husked and unhusked rice (ibreuëh padé) are sent to the teacher to scatter over his pupil, and flour and water, together with the plants') which serve as sprinklers, so that he may perform therewith the usual ceremonies. Besides this, he gives his pupil a bath. This is called "the bathing (of the pupil) on account of the completion (of the recitation)" — pumanbë tamat — and is recompensed by certain gifts, viz. a large dish of yellow glutinous rice, (whence may be taken at the same time what is required for the peusuntêng), a piece of white cloth, an under-garment, a kerchief and from two to ten dollars in money. The ceremony takes place in the house of the teacher, in presence of the father and a few guests. Well-to-do people, however, invite the teungku (for this title is applied to instructors in the Quran both male and female) to their house, and give a great kanduri to which, besides the teungku, a number of people from the gampöng, and in particular the keuchi and many leubès are invited. A teungku, whether the teacher or another, but in any case a man, directs the peutamat, the making of the tamat or completion, in the front verandah where the guests sit. As a matter of fact, however, this ceremony only serves to set a seal on the already finished task; for the custom that prevails elsewhere, as in Java for instance, of making the pupil give a sample of his proficiency, is unknown in Acheh. When the pupil is a boy, he sits arrayed in his best clothes along with the others in the front verandah, with an open Quran before him,
i) See p. 305 above.
UUI LCIRVV-.> 11 PAI I ui TUT PI AUU MUIJJIY USLCUS LVJ A. number of leubès chanting certain chapters (Surah 93—114) from the sacred book. When they reach the ii2th Surah, all present join in and close the ceremony with one of the prayers specially used for concluding every recitation from the Quran (meuhatam). If it be a girl, she sits inside the house with an open Quran before her, for it is always considered unbefitting for men and vvomen to sit togetlier during such religious ceremonies. When the reading is finished, the paraphernalia of "cooling" are brought into the house, always by a woman. Owing to the early marriages of Achehnese maidens, it often happens that a girl becomes a bride long before this elementary instruction is at an end. When such a young wife is with child, the ceremony of peutamat is performed in all haste, for fear of her dying before she has com- pletely chanted the word of Allah. Either simultaneously with, or immediately after their instruction in the Quran, the children learn how to fulfil the principal duties prescribed for every grown-up person by the creed of Islam, and especially the ritual washings and prayers (seumayang). This knowledge they gain either by actual practice or from the pages of a Malay hand-book. 'ircumcision In the case of boys the peutamat is usually followed by the circumcision (kbh boh or peusunat), either immediately or after the lapse of a couple of days. In contradistinction to the practice in the great majority of Mohammedan countries, this ceremony is often unattended by festivities of any kind, so that even near relations and neighbours are sometimes ignorant that the operation has been performed. Under the Mohammedan law circumcision is a duty but not a chief obligation or "pillar" of religion. Popular feeling, however, attachés great importance to this rite, regarding it more or less as the outvvard form of adoption into the Mohammedan community. In Acheh, how ever, this special significance is given to circumcision only in case of unbelievers who embrace Islam and not for the children of Moham medan parents. It is the vows (/i-a'öj') which in many cases lend distinction to the ceremony of circumcision. IR accordance with such vows, Rapa'i per formances are sometimes given on one or more nights, but oftener still the parents bind themselves to visit a holy tomb (in some cases accom- panied with gcundrang music) one or two days before the performance
of the rite. A great procession is organized; the boy is dressed jnst like a bride, except that he wears the high Achehnese kupiah or cap, round which is folded a tangkulo" (head-cloth) '). Sometimes he is set on horseback and rides to the holy place. His head is vvashed (srah ulèc), at the foot of the tomb, and a great kanduri is given. If one of the boy's ancestors happens to have been in his lifetime a very learned or distinguished person, the grave of the latter is first visited, and the procession then moves on to the tomb of the saint. I ersons of vvealth and rank inaugurate the circumcision with other festivities, which ovving to their purely secular character cannot form the subject of a vow, such as the ratèb sadati, pulèt or a piasan. Tlie bath which in Java is regarded as an indispensable prelude to circumcision is not made compulsory in Acheh. The boy is simply cleansed prior to the operation. He is placed on a mat which is strewn with ashes from the cooking-place covered with plantain leaves, or up°n a krikay, a small tray standing on a foot and tlius serving as a table. 1 he implements used in the operation are a purêh (a piece of the bark fibre of the arèn palm, of which native pens are also made), chalk to make a line to guide the operator, a forceps and a razor i). As a rule the only styptic used is a prayer (dua peudbng darah), that employed being the first part of a formula used to exorcise the buröng, or some other such tangkay or charm, in which occurs the word teutab (motionless or fixed) and the words that rhyme therewith from the nith chapter of the Quran. This symbolizes the checking or stopping of something — as the blood in the case in point. Ihe injured part is simply wrapped in a white rag, and it is not till the following day that it is covered (after being first washed with warm water) with a healing drug composed of gambir and tamarind-
| books of | Mohammedan | law. In | Acheh however | the name | scurtuban | is only given | to the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| urban of | Arab pattem | surrounded | by a kerchief | twisted | in the Arabian | fashion. | Only a |
| ew distinguished | teungkus | wear the | seureuban. | There is no proper | term | for the Achehnese | |
| >hape, consisting s described | of a as kupiah | high kupiah pa/ét tangkulö|and a small | tangkuli' | wound round | its lower cdge: | it | |
| inivcrsal | in the Native | States of Java, | and the removal | of a triangular | patch from the | end | |
| >f the prepuce | which | is sometimes | resorted | to, are unknown | in | Acheh. The | absolute |
| :ircumcision | is becoming | more common | in Java | of later years. |
1) This kupiah with the kerchief surrounding it really forms a turban as defined in the
2) I he operation is absolute circumcision and not incision merely. Incision, which is
4OO
bark grated fine. This treatment is rcpeated daily till the patiënt is convalescent '). Meantime, as in Java, a strict dietary is observed. No vegetables must be eaten, and no fish except the eungköt cluiét and the stockfish [keumamaik) from the Maldives, with dry rice, eumpieng₂) and the like. Fruits and pungent herbs are forbidden, and as it is thought dangerous for the patient's feet to come into contact with human ordure or the dung of fowls or horses, they are wrapped in cloths as a precaution. The cure is generally complete in from 7 to 10 days. The operator (tnudém, probably from the Arabic mu addin, which is in Java also entirely wrested from its proper meaning) obtains as a recompense for his trouble a quantity of husked and unhusked rice {breuéh-padé), a piece of white cotton cloth, a dish of yellow glutinous rice and one dollar. Boys are generally circumcised at from 9 to 10 years of age. A well-to-do father often has one or two poor lads circumcised along with his son, but the same peculiar significance is not attached to this as to what is known as béla in Java. The filing of the teeth (köh gigoc) does not take place with women till after their marriage, as it is thought proper to leave the decision of this matter to the husband; in the case öf boys it is done in their 12H1 or 13U1 year. Many omit this form of mutilation altogether, either because their teeth are not naturally too large or ugly, or from religious motives. So far from giving this custom a devotional origin, as some Javanese do by alleging that it is in conformity with the example of the 1'rophet, whose teeth are said to have been shaped as though filed from the time of his birth, or according to others, after having been injured in the battle of Uhud, the Achehnese regard it simply as a personal cmbcllishment; and some of their ulamas are opposed to it as being self-mutilation. The filer of teeth (an operation usually performed by women) uses for her work a whetstone (batcc chane). The better to keep the patient's mouth open, a piece of betel-nut is thrust between the molars 011 one side. The teeth to be operated on, i. e. the four front teeth {gigoc dikeuc) and the two "dog's teeth" [gigoc ascë) of the upper jaw, are rubbed with white onions before the operation, "to make them soft."
| tasak). | See Skeat's | Malay Magie, | p. 360. | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| a sieve. |
1) The Malays use a dressing formed of fine elay mixed with the yolk of eggs (ubat
2) This consists of rice which is first roasted and then pounded fine and passed through
40I
Aftcr thcy have been ground down to the desired length, the line of the teeth is filed until all unevenness disappears. This filing is known as asah. Baja (soot) is then laid 011 the surface so formed as a curative. Baja Kléng (Kling) is to be found with the medicine-sellers, but many make the baja themselves by catching the soot off a burning cocoanut-shell on a wet knife or other steel weapon. 1 he people of 1'idië file their teeth in such a manner as to make it appear as if they projected outwards, and end by making them entirely black, as the Javanese used to do in earlier times. Some fops and women of light reputation use baja every day to blacken the space between each pair of teeth ').
S 6. The Parents as Bringers-up of their children.
As we the woman Shareofthe
| have already seen, | after marriage continues | to |
|---|---|---|
| fat ler an t | ||
| brought up in the house | mother, in which the father | g>»g "P f Cl d |
live in her own house or that of her parents. Thus the children are fat!ler.an',t
- -. motherin the
as a rule of their brin is in a certain sense a stranger. In a certain sense, for though some " """ "'' Achehnese institutions bear clear traces of an earlier "matriarchate," thcy are still traces and nothing more. In Acheh 110 one would dream of prohibiting the father from seriously concerning himself in the bringing up of his children, and reserving that right for the mother's brother, as is done in the highlands of Padang. As we have already seen, the wife s family are only too anxious to leave the ground free to the husband, and it is not till after years of wedded bliss that the ban which severs the latter from his wife's people is gradually removed to some extent. Thus the father has as great a share as he pleases to take in the bringing up of his children. ()n the whole, however, it may be asserted without hesitation that the children grow up more under the protection of the mother and her relations tlian that of the father. The latter has many reasons which cause him to be repeatedly absent from home for long periods. When, for instance, he has more than one wife, his spouses are gene-
| i) I he | operation | of tooth-filing | is equally | popular | among the | Malays of the | Peninsula. A |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| full description | of the | Malayan | tooth-liling | ceremony | will l>c found | in Skeat's | |
| P-355 ' | l-( | ||||||
| 26 |
Afalav Mivic e sei Trauslator).
rally established in different gampöngs, and the man divides his time between them, not indeed according to the strict rules of the Moham- medan law in respect of the kasm '), but as suits his own liking. Rut he also spends much of his time with his own family, or travels about visiting friends or on business etc. There are also the pepper-planters, scamen, fishermen etc., who often remain absent from their wives' homes for years at a time. The attitude of the married couple in the matter of their childrens bringing up is shown most characteristically bv the adats observed when one of the two happens to die. Fatherless If the father dies, such of the children as have reached a discrimin- hildren. ating age (say 7 to 10 years) usually remain with the mother, or if the latter marries again they are free to choose whether thcy will take up their abode with her or with the family of their deceased father. Where there are children below this age, the adat requires the male relations (wali) of the deceased to interest themselves pro for ma in their destiny. They must, however, before taking the first step, perform the task, so important in native estimation, of setting up tombstones [pitla hatlr) 011 the grave of their deceased relative; otherwise they have no right to interfere. When this duty lias been fulfilled, they depute the keuchi' of the gampöng to go to the widow and demand the young children at her hands. The mother always replies that she admits that they have a right to the children, but earnestly begs that she may not be separated from them till her death. I he keuchi is then again deputed to enquire whether the mother can assure befitting support for the fatherless infants. A woman of means ex- hibits on such occasions a sum of money, or some article of value, or a house (where the child is a girl), with the assurance that these things are destined to defray the cost of bringing up the children. Others give tokens of good intent in proportion to their means, and the walis rest content with these assurances. Apart from the question as to whether this formal demand is or is not a rudiment of an older in-
| l) This | rule of luw imposes | no special | obligations | on the | husband as to the | frcqucncy | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| of his visits | to his wives | or the length | of time | which he must | spend in | their company, | |
| but it expressely | givcs | to all the wives | of one | husband a claim | to | of right* | in |
| this respect, the latter's | so that he consent. | may not spend | more of his | time with | one than anothcr | cxccpt | by |
-\jHiihty
stitution of Achehnese family life, which has now fallen into disusc, it may bc asserted conclusively that both the demand and the enquiry as to means of support are now mere formalities. These are, however, never omitted by the walis of the deceased, because otherwise public opinion would condemn them as completely indifferent to the fate of children closely related to them. When the widow re-marries, new formalities are observed. The adat Disposalof is for the walis of a deceased person to offer his widow a new marri-the fat,herIess . on the re- age subject to her consent. Sometimes one of the walis offers himself marr>age of as the dead man's successor; or another suitor is sought, who is the mother' regarded as a suitable person to act as father to the surviving children m the future '). If this suitor is accepted, the childrens' interests are considered to be as well assured as where the widow does not marry again. She has of course full liberty to contract another marriage. If she makes use of this freedom, the walis of the deceased lie in wait for and "steal pro fortnii the latter's child, which cannot yet choose for itself. After a day or so, the new husband, attended by an elder from the mother's gampöng, comes and politely begs for the restoration of the child. This request is generally granted; the walis however remain on the watch, as becomes careful guardians, and if the step-father proves to be a good-for-naught, they demand back the pledge which they have entrusted to him. Where the woman dies leaving a young child, its surrender is Motherles* demanded in like manner, but of course in the father's name. As a chiIdren- rille it is only entrusted to him if his wife's mother be already dead. Should the latter be still living, she begs to be allowcd to retain the child. I his request may be made in one or other of two ways. She may reply, when called on to surrender it, "give me the child in life and death"2), and if this wisli is acceded to, the father or his wali have no right to demand the body of the child in the event of its death. Sometimes however the grandmother says "Give it to me during life; should it die I shall return it to your hands" :l). Great importance is indeed attached to the disposal of the body Contestfor the disposal . of the kodies i; We have already seen (p. 364 above) tliat if the woman dies before the meungklèh °f the dead.
| i; We | have already | seen (p. 364 | above) tliat | if the woman | dies before | °f the dead. |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| or "putting | forth," her | family ofler | a new wife | in her place | to the widower. |
2) Neubri keu Ion udéb mate.
3) Neubri keu ton uJeb, coh maté pulnng keu droéncu.
and the question as to where it shall be buried, whether in the blióni or family burying-place of the mother's family, where it will not perhaps enjoy the company of any of its walis, or in that of its father, where most of them repose. This question is regarded as of equal importance when the husband dies before the wife. The death of course very frequently occurs in the house of the wife. The walis of the husband in such a case are unwilling to leave the disposal of the body to the woman, since she will probably marry again later on, and her first husband would thus lie buried among strangers. This objection is not raised if the couple have already lost a child by death and have buried it in the b/iöm of its mother's family. If however the man dies in his own original gampong, the walis assume the entire disposal of his body, which is only just brought for a moment, before burial, into the inner room (jurcc) of the wife's house. For this service she rewards the bearers with a present. A characteristic specimen of Achehnese prolixity is furnished by the negociations which take place bet ween the gampong of the husband and that of the wife in respect to the dead body of their first child (ancu phnti). It may be inferred that at an earlier period of Achehnese civilization more substantial reasotis existed for such a contest for the possession of the bodies of the dead than is the case at present. All this speech-making now seems rather objectless, and suggests a petrified adat Like all other important domestic events, the burial of the dead i? treated as a public afl'air of the gampong. The authorities of the luis- band's gampong proceed in a body to that of the wife, and there liold with the chiefs and elders a colloquy, of which the following may serve as a model. The prelude forms a sort of theatrical dialoguc between two speakers of the husband s gampong. I his takes placi after their arrival in the gampong of the wife, and in presence of tin authorities there assembled. We shall call the speakers A and H; tlu latter speaks in the name of all his fellow-villagers.
A. Well now, where are ye all, my brethren ? We have arrived ai
our destination. Time moves on (lit. the sun advances), and we si doing nothing.-Of walking a single step; of speech a single word; i is now your turn to speak, my brethren.
- Well then, Teuku, as concerns us your younger brethren, wha
saidst thou? "Of walking a step, of speech a word." With us it is evei
as on the 301'1 day of the month '), darkness from cve to morn. Let the vvhole matter as it stands be dealt with by you, our elder brother. W herefore ? Because, as the elders say "where the sun shines, the brightness of the nioon is overpowered." Our hopes are thus fixed on you alone.
A. Good then, if you are all resolvcd to leave it in my hands, I am
ready and willing to be of service. I act with leave of all of you; withhold me then from error, follow me in the truth, help me in all difficulties and stop me if I go beyond the mark -).
- With all joy, if Allah so will. As soon as this farce of appointing A as spokesman of the husband's
gampöng is played out, he proceeds to address the fellow-villagers of the wife. The man wjjo replies in their behalf we shall designate as C.
A. Well now, where are ye all, my brethren 3) ? I desired to address
one single word to you; how are your thoughts to us-ward?
C.Well,O Teuku,give us a moment's time (to deliberate upon ouranswer). After an interval of a minute or two:
C. Well then, where art thou, O Teuku, our brother? We have
slumbcred for a moment, we have delayed a little, but be not vexed thereat, C) Teuku! Now by Allah s will we are here present, one or two at least; to all that you will now say we shall respectfully hearken (lit. take it on our head).
A. Where are you, Teuku ?
C. I am here at your service.
A. Well then, if Allah the Exalted so will, though it be somewhat
clumsy and crooked, somewhat rumpled and creased 4), it is profitable for a piece of goods to be speedily disposed of '). We are in any case people of Acheh, our words are those of Acheh '').
| the darkened | moon." | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| appears also | in the formal orations | to which | the adat of Menangkabau | gives rise. Specimens | |||
| of these | are to be found | in the | work printed | by Edw. | Van Muien | in 1890, "Adat | man- |
| (///•/kin pangulu | ttndiko | tarpakai | dala/n nan | salaras Kapati." | This | is far from | being the |
| sole point the Achehnese. | of rescmblance | bet ween | the cloquence | of the | Menangkabau | people | and that of |
| The meaning | is "it is well | to proceed | to business | without | delay." | ||
| fashion. Their | conccption | of brevity | is somewhat | original. |
1) I. e. "you require us to speak, luit we are too stupid; our understandiag is as dull as
2) Cf. p. 318 above.
3) I he constant repetition of this «juestion, though the persons addressed are present,
4) This is a formula uscd to introducé an apology.
5) The words from "though it be" to "speedily disposed of" are in Achehnese verse.
6) The meaning is that the matter will be dealt with short and sharp in the Achehnese
C. That is certain.
A. To the matter in hand then: X (hcre is named, not the father
but his brother or some member of his family, or a fellovv-villager) who is a relative of the dead child, and we, who have directed our steps hither to you all, oh Teukus, have somewhat to beg of you. I hcre is a saying that for begging three things are needed, which are only complete with the addition of a fourth; first a staff, secondly a beggar's sack, thirdly the hands held up (in supplication); these three are com- pleted by the praycr itself. To the matter in hand; once 011 a time in days gone by we had a cutting of a plant (i. e. the man who lias marricd a woman of that gampong); later on we gave it to all of you, Teukus. Ye planted it and the plant brought forth a fruit; tliis fruit (the body) we now come to beg of you, oh Teukus. If it sufficeth not that we should beg once, we do so ten times. Be it insipid or be it savoury, be it sour or be it sweet, let it be thought fitting to give tliis fruit to us your servants to taste.
C. Where are ye all, oh Teukus?
A. We are hcre at your service.
C. What said ye but now? As to the fruit which the teuku requires
of us, let your wish be fulfilled if God so will. Yet do we now ask and beg of you all, oh Teukus! Behold, tliis plant was indeed given us by you, it was indeed your own possession. For the future, then we beg of you to leave tliis fruit to her who lias tended the garden (the motherj. Should the tree again bear fruit in the years to come, that fruit, oh Teukus, shall be yours. Even should you not come to fetch it, we shall bring it to you. But as for tliis, we invoke your love and compassion, Teukus, let tliis remain with us; sweet or sour, let us taste it first. When we have once tasted, and know if it be well- flavoured or insipid, then shall it be given to all of you to taste, oh Teukus.
A. Well, Teuku, I have now taken counsel with my brothers here
present, and what say they to us ? The first fruit, say they, properly belongs to the people of the place '). As you know well, oh Teukus, those that tap the arèn-tree and draw the sap, take the first that flows forth and pour it on the root of the tree.
i) The husband and his family are here meant.
C. It is even as you say, of a surety! It is that which we now asl
and beg of your love and compassion; if Allah so will, wc beg thi: first sap as a healing balm.
A. Well, if you speak in tb is wise, nothing remains for us to say
But even so, there is still a trifle on our part. Ye have not accedec to the request we made but now, oh Teukus; this time you mus' without fail grant the prayer we address to you all, as token of goot will to us your brethren. If one visit the sick, what then ? One bring: a cluster of pisangs as a gift. Here however he (i. e. the rclative o the father whom we have referred to as X) lias come to visit one wht lias this world already behind liim and the otlier world before liim tlius it were but fitting, oh Teukus, to grant us our request, namel) (that he should contribute) a plank for the head of the coffin, a singh piece (lit. a fold) of cloth (for the shroud). May you see fit that IK who lias this world behind him and the next before him should brinj. this with him to the tomb.
C. Well, Teuku, what saidst thou just now? Didst thou desire tc
give to him who lias this world behind him and the otlier world befort him a plank for the head of his coffin and a single piece of cloth? A; far as we can see, you have brought, not a single plank for the heat of the coffin, but a shipload of tiniber. What saidst thou besides? A piece of cloth ? As far as we can see you have brought, not a singlt fold of cloth, but a whole kudi (20 pieces), so seemeth it.
A. Well then, Teuku, if it is one for you, it is ten for us (i. e., wt
are all the more content), and if it is ten for you, it is a hundred for us. After this colloquy the body of the ane/i' pliön (first-born cliild remains in the gampong of the mother, as all concerned were wel] aware would be the case before ever the farce commenced. We require 110 further examples to make it clear that the childrcn of a fairly happy marriage receive the greater part of their upbringing from the mother and her family, even when the union is severed by deatli. 'I he father is indeed the recognized guardian and educator, but he is not always at home; and thougli the members of his family show an interest in the lot of the young childrcn whom he leaves behind, sucli interest as a rule expresses itself in merc formalities. Exceptions are not rare; the father lias the power to take his childrcn to himself and have tliosc t)f one wife brought up by another, and
his rights in this respect are admittedly in entire agreement with the Mohammedan law, and are sometimes actually excercised, yet they remain exceptions and no more. ('hildren of It is different in the case of dissolution of marriasie, whether bv li. >1 ved irriagc. divorce (taleue) or judicial separation (pasah). We have already seen that these are of comparatively rare occurrence and almost always entail an irreconcilable breach of the peace between the pair '). It naturally follow.s that both parties insist on their rights to the utter- most, and in these cases the adat of Acheh gives the husband some- what more extended privileges than the Mohammedan law. It is the almost universal rule that after such separations the childrcn are taken away by the man, or where the marriage is dissolvetl in his absence, by his walis. It often happens that the mother claims certain rights which would seem very strange to European mothers. If her own unweaned child were left to her charge one might suppose that no true mother would shirk the task of nursing it. Yet the Moslim law does not oblige the mother to stickie the child, and if she choose to do so, gives her a right to a recompense for her services as wet-nurse. In Acheh, after the child of a divorced woman lias been weaned, the mother often refuses to hand it over to the family of its father until her wages as wet-nurse have been paid. This she looks upon as a sort of revenge for her compulsory separation from her cliiltl.
5? 7. Sicknesses, their Origin and Cure.
Causes of Before proceeding to describe the most important customs observed on the occurence of a death in an Achehnese family, and the results to the survivors, it may not be out of place to make a few obser- vations in regard to the sicknesses which cause death. Our purpose in this is not, of course, to enlighten medical men as to the diseases
| dissolved | on quite | trivial pretexts, | and the | divorced couple | and their families | remain | on |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| good terms | with 011c another | after | the separation. | Among | the Sundanese, | when a man puts | |
| away his | wife and | yet remains | on excellent | terms with | her and her people, | the situation | |
| is described (lit. relationship). | as Pomiok | dtiriat | panjatig baraya | — a short | marriage, but a long | friendship" |
1) This is cntirely different from the custom prevailing in Java, where marriages are
u
| prevalent | in Acheh, | but to | give a sketch | of the | lore of the | Achehnese | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| with respect | to sickness, | a lore | which | indeed | constitutes | a large | part |
| of their | philosophy | of life. | In this | we must | involuntarily | touch | on |
| some of the | methods | and means | for | effecting cures, | though | Achehnese | |
| medical | art as such | will be | treated of in another | chapter. | |||
| Those | of our readers | who | are not | unacquainted | with | the Native | |
| world, are | aware | that the | question | is not one | of microbes, | but | of |
| spirits which | threaten | man | with all manner | of evils '). | We | have already | |
| made acquintance | with the | treacherous | burötig₂) | and | the nameless | ||
| beings who | punish | with sickness | the | non-fulfilment | of a puja | vow "). | |
| Those | who wade | through | creeks | or rivers, | or bathe in these | or in Spirits | |
| the sea, | or accidentally | fall | into the | water, are | exposed to | the attacks | |
| of sundry | enemies. | Sometimes | such an | one disappears | without | a tracé, | |
| swallowed | up by | a baleucm | bende or | bidé *). What | these | are like | may |
| best be | judged from | a tale | respecting | their origin. | There | is a certain | |
| formula | of witchcraft, | known | to few, | and serving | as a means | to | gain |
| forbidden | ends. If | one recites | this | sitting on | a buffalo-skin, | it closes | |
| round him | to open | no more, | and he dwells | for the | future | in the mouth | |
| of a river, up) man | changed and beast. | to a baleu'cm bcudé and | eagerly | bent | on swallowing | ||
| In swamps, | creeks | and | rivers there | also dweil | the | sanè, invisible | |
| spirits which | house | more especially | in dead | wood | floating | and drifting | |
| in the | water. Their | agency | is feit | in the form | of pains | in the | legs, |
| supposed into contact | generally with | to supervcne them. | two | days after | the sufferer | lias | come |
| Seafaring | men often | make | acquaintance | to their | sorrow | with another | |
| kind of jen °), ( Translator'). | the | eunteè ie '), which | sometimes | appear as glittering lire- | |||
| that meaning. | The people | of Menangkabau | give | to a similar | malignant spirit | the name | of |
| ula biday | or baday, the eonnection | of ideas being | the formidable | size of the snake | of that | ||
| name, which | they compare | with the | biday, a rattan | mat of great | lengtli used for drying padi. | ||
| swallowed | him." Instead | of uct^ sambn | or samiïè | may also be | used 5 both | these words | refer |
| to being carried | ofif or | put out of the | way by evil spirits. | ||||
| Malays fasten ( Translator). | to its summit | twigs of the | kabong | palm. See | Skeats' Malay | Magie | p. 279 |
1) For an account of the Malay spirits, demons etc., sec Skeat's Malay Magie Chap. IV.
2) Sec p. 376 a1)ovc. 3) Sec p. 392 above.
4) Baleucm means a bag or sack. Beudé might mcan "gun" but the variant bidè lias not
5) Of one who thus disappears it is said: ka jï'uèt lé balcue m bende = "the b. b. has
6) The Malay hantu aycr. To prevent this spirit from alighting on the mast, the
7) Literalty track or tracé (Malay bckas) upon the water." It thus means the traces or
ho
!5
U
tt
'
.
flies, sometimes as men with no covcring on thcir hcads. Their influence causes the vessel to becomc water-logged. To exorcise them, strips of arèn-fibre are tied to the step of the mast and the mast itself, and if they persist in approaching the crew strike at them. Sailors are strictly forbidden to take off thcir caps on board ship after dark; should one do so inadvertently, his companions fall on him and beat him until he covers his hcad. The geunteut, which takes the form of a gigantic black man, some times flings his victim head over heels from the shore into the sea. As a rule, however, the geunteuts appear elsewhere, as for instance on the main roads, where they pounce upon the lonely wayfarer and hurry him avvay; those who seek him find him eventually sitting ap- parently lifeless in a tree or a clump of bamboos '). The clearers of the forest are persecuted by some of the beings mentioned above, but still more by the lurking denizens of the trees. The great heavy trees with hard timber (sucli as the seumant<> and the penna) are regarded as "hauntcd trees" (kayec men jen) which bring sickness 011 all who meddle with them. There is one discase "coming from above" (pennyaket ditnanyang) which usually shows itself at midnight or midday. lts symptoms are loss of consciousness, stiffness of the body, and a rigid closing of the teeth. It is called meurambuy and is ascribed to the hostile influence of the rambalnys. These spirits resembic apes, but have the power of flight through the air. They are always accompanied by a flock of shrilly scrcaming gire birds. Old women never hear these birds without cxclaiming "Keep far away!"2). The form of the rambaluys, however is not the samc at all times and places; in fact there is a distinction made between sea-, world-
| residue left by the | dead, | i. c. a kind of ghost. So too the expression mala cunUc (lit. — | "trace"- | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| or rcnlnant-eyes | ) to the | pairs of glittering | objects | like stars or fire-tlies which are supposed | |||
| to l>e seen | at times in the | dark in the | inner room (jurië) | of an | Achehnese | house. | It is in |
| this room | that the dead | are washed, | and they | are supposed | to leave | these mysterious | |
| glittering | eyes beliind them | as the traces | of thcir | cxistence as human | beings. | Pcople | avoid |
| sitting in the evenings | of an | old house, | as many | dead bodies | must have been | ||
| washed there especially the Ach. | and many children, in a similar word for far." | of these dread manner. | mata cunte'è are likcly | to appear. |
1) In Java spirits called gVndrttwa and wéwê are supposed to torment human beings, and
2) The word they use is jawöli (Ach. pronunciation of the Malay jatili), and never jföh^
a,,
in the jurec
u
and ground-rambaluys') and to these last is ascribed, among other diseases, that of beri-beri. The word meurambuy or vieurampot is also applied, however, in other cases of sudden illness without discoverable cause, such as dysentery; botli words may be approximately rendered "blown upon," and that which lias blovvn 011 the patiënt may equally well be a jén dweiling in the leaf or branch of a tree which the victim has accidentally brushed against, as a rambaluy of the kind above described. The evil thing which is thus "blown upon" a person may be "blown away" again by magie art; this is done in the house of the patiënt, and almost every old woman can act as an expert in this peurampbt as it is called. For this seven things are required: a chinu, or water-dipper made of a cocoanut-shell, a spoon (aweue) of the same material, a reungkan or rough mat of cocoanut or other palm leaves on which pots just removed from the fire are set, a red betel-nut leaf, a kala-leaf (Malay kantan), a worn-out pair of trousers and a rice winnowing-basket (jeu te). These seven objects are each waved 2) seven times in the above order over the head of the sufferer who has been breathed on by the jén, with the solemn counting already described₃) up to the number seven, which is long drawn out thus, tujCmio/i! After the waving the articles employed are all thrown out of doors. During this operation the patiënt has to sit opposite the open door of the house, so that nothing may inter- vene betwecn him and the doorway. liefore the waving of the jeiïec certain expert matrons besprinkle him with water poured through this, the last of the seven objects named. A certain climbing liane in the jungle called leumbé or Itimbé is a favourite haunt of spirits hostile to man. This does not prevent its fruits, round in shape and as hard as wood, which drift down the rivers, from being used as balls by the children in some of their games. Hut anyone who encounters on his way one of these creepers full-grown and shooting freely, maintains a respectful distance. Specimens that have as it were slung themselves across a stream inspire special alarm. In the wood of these climbing plants are to be found knots or callo-
| pp. 418 et seq. {Trans | la tor}. |
|---|
1) Rambaluy la?dt^ dönya or tanoh.
2) Cf. the description of the wave-oflering" the Malays
3) Sec p. 307 above.
u among in Skcats Malay Magie,
—
sities sometimes six feet in girth and known as guchi, ovving to their resemblance in shape to the Achehnese watcrtubs or guc/üs. Where thrcc such gnchis are ^bserved at short intervals in the branch of such a creeper, its bcing haunted is considered as beyond all doubt. rhe influence of the leumbé is most clearly to be seen in regard to the water of the mountain streams on which they exert their spell. Most of those who drink such water get goitre (chugbng) '). This disease is very common in some parts of Pidië, especially in the neigh- bourhood of Keumala; and also in part of the highlands of the auri- ferous district of Woyla on the West Coast. Most of the sufiferers are women. The malady is ascribed with absolute conviction by the Achehnese to the drinking of the water of certain definite strcamlcts '-) 'n those districts, and it is the influence of the leumbé which is believed to render their waters so dangerous. Some cases of goitre are referred by the Achehnese to another cause, namely sucking the fresh *puntbc-*fruit ofl the kernei (jujuct) instead of removing it piecemeal with the hand -1). Nightmare. What we call nightmare is in Achch ascribed to certain spirits called beuub 4), which set up a pressure 011 or under the breast (geuntèn), sometimes to such an extent as to cause death. Ghosis. At times the wayfarer secs something in his path resembling a dead body wrapped in its shroud. This is a buröng punjöt, the phantom of a woman who has died in childbirth, and who has been buried with out the winding sheet being loosened beforc closing the tomb. The ghosts of other dead pcople also walk 011 account of a like omission₅), but the only influence that man has to fear from them is fright or stupcfaction. Much the samc may be said of the tuleuëng dong ("standing bones"), walking skeletons looking like our own pictures of "Death"; also of the jén iipuy which appear in the form of men walking in the distance with burning torches, and are most often to be observed in
1) Mal. b'engoh or bëgong. The remedy used l»y the Malays is nila **(indigo). (***Translater).*
2) Cf. Wilken'sTranslater).*
2) Cf. Wilken's *Struma cn Cretinisme in den Indischcn Archipel, in the** Bijdr. van het
| Koninklijk | v. d. Taal-, | Land-en | Volkenkunde | van Nederlandseh-Indic | for the year | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1890, p. 420. | ||||||
| external resemblance | to the full pouch of an ape. | |||||
| In Java the dead are believed | to "walk" | if their shrouds are not unfastencd atburial. | ||||
| They appear uehuli = loosen! | especially in | the first 40 | days after | death, crying | chuh\ chuli/" | i. e. |
2) Cf. Wilken's Struma cn Cretinisme in den Indischcn Archipel, in the Bijdr. van het
3) A swelling on the lower jaw is called chugbng bue, i. e. monkey's chugbng from its
4) The Malay hantu kopek. (Translator).
Jnst.
5)
U
nightly perambulations among the padi-fields, and of the blo, our ••bogey mail" with which children are frightened, and whose terrifying aspect is compared with that of the Bengalis with their gigantic turbans. More dangerous than this last-named class of ghosts are the wraiths of persons who have met their deaths by violence. These seize and grip their victim unobserved '), the result being that he feels as though he were wounded and grows feverish, and in his delirium speaks of some person whose fate has been the same as that of the dcad whose ghost haunts liim. Like all other tormenting spirits they them- selves best know the antidote against the malady which they cause. Thus those whose duty it was in the Sultans' time to execute death sentences with the sword or by strangling, were wont to ask their victims what the remedy would be in case they should attack people after their death The condemned was generally good-natured enough to recommend some leaf or herb as a cure for the sicknesses which he might engender, so that the executioner derived from his employment the additional advantage of being able later on (not of course without a fee) to cure those possessed in this peculiar way. ^ furthei remedy against various kinds of possession is the drinking of water in which prehistorie stonc implements, or as the Achehncse call them, thunder-teeth {gigöë glanteuï: cf. the Javanese huntu glap))* have lain for a time. It sometimes happens that a person who has just paid a visit to a gravc is seized with a colic, or sits down and behaves as though doting. He is then said to be seumapa, meaning that a dead person has addressed or greeted him. This must of course have happened without his knowing it, and such a contact of his coarse carthly nature with the subtler one which appertains to the realms of the dead, is sure to be attended with evil consequences. In such cases the suffercr is bespued with charmed sirih spittle, a universally recognized remedy for many ailments in Acheh. Should this red spittle turn yellowish in hue on his body, the conjecture that he is seumapa becomes a certainty.
1) Au jimat lé tireueng gcupuli (geuchang, geucheukic') or ka tcukenong ureuatg gcufoh
etc., was said of such a victim.
2) Pciïe ubat ka da tig tamat-mat gob.
3) Cf. the Malay latu /i ah lint ar**. Skcat (***ATalay ATagic* p. 276) describes how they are
grated into water and used as medieine by the Malays. (Translater).
Uthers contract maladies through transgressing the stnet commands of their parents or teachers, or in consequence of a curse pronounced against them by the latter. The resulting condition is called keun'ong srapa ureneng clii or gurc'c '). Poisoning Nor is it spirits only that have to be dreaded. The happiness of witchciaft. man 'n Acheh is just as mach a prey to his fellow men, and these too have control of remedies the action of which is held to be a mystery. Such powers of witchciaft, employed to bring misfortune to another, are called hekenmat₂); the most terrible kinds, against which no remedy prevails, are known as hékcumat dönya. The whole of this destructive science is included under the name of "magie" (sihé, Arab. sihr). All poisons may be classed under the head of hekenmat. Just as a remedy derives most of its force from the prayer uttered over it, so a poison owes its activity chiefly to the magie incantations pronounced over it, or to the witchciaft required for its preparation. Its force may in like manner be broken by an expert with the aid of certain definite prayers (tangkay). Certain sorts of toadstool (kulat) are very much dreaded. The pre paration of these for malicious uses forms a special branch of mystic craft. The scoundrels who practise the art are called ureueng meuknlat. The most powerful kulat of this description is called kulat Lam Teuba from the name of the locality where it is to be found in the greatest abundance, and the poison-makers of Lam Teuba are also regarded as the best. Much skill is required to seek out the right kinds, to "charm" (rajah) them in the desired sense, and to work the charm when prepared. Tlius to cause an enemy a wound on the leg they transfix a toad-stool with a needle, and then secretly mix a portion of it with his food. Other manipulations are employed to engender passion for a lover, hatred against a spouse, madness or even death. As an antidote to the ills which result from kulat₃) there is 110 better remedy than kulat; but it is a remedy most difficult to procure. The expert kulat-seekers use for their purpose only such toad-stools as grow near each other in pairs and satisfy certain other requirements and the other the
| of the | craft. üf | each pair one is the prince | (raja) |
|---|
1) Literally "smitten by the curse of parents" or "of the teacher."
2) From the Arab meaning philosophy."
3) It is said of the victim: X ka keunung kulat.
"knowledge,
4'5
princess (putroc). Tlie raja is the worker of evil, and this the poisoner gives to his customers to work the destruction of their enemies. The putroc, which provides the genuine antidote, is carefully secreted by the poison-maker. Should he have no scruple about defrauding his customers, he hands over the putroc to the victim for a handsome fee, j nst as he supplied his enemy with the raja. The simpler methods of witchcraft are of the same kind as in Java. 1 he name of the victim is written (together with a formula suitingthe object to be attained) upon an egg or a particular kind of fruit. This is then buried with stringent formalities. The result is that the victim, as the case may be, falls sick, dies, loses his wife through faithlessness or his house by fire, or suffers whatever other misfortune his enemy may have wished him. The employment of such methods is called j/tung. Another plan is to bury in a path by which the victim is in the habit of passing, a section of bulöh (thornless bamboo) fdled with hair, nails and other such things. Such an implement of destruction, the employment of which is called tï'nung in Java, is named by the Achehnese tcunanbm, which properly means "something buried ')." Kven diseases which are of daily occurrence, and the natural cause of which must be obvious even to an Achehnese, he refers by prefer- ence to some such causes as those of which we have just given examples. None the less he lias recourse in the first instance to the usual remedies for diseases such as sijiïc-scu uévi ("cold-heat") and dcumavi, both of which are sorts or stages of fever, biö/i (dysentery), burïit (inguinal hernia), sabön (gonorrhea) and skin-diseases such as kudc and kurab. As in Java, the invisible powers again play an important part in Small-pox regard to small-pox and cholera, though the Achehnese conceptions ani' 1 ',lllera- difter greatly in details from those of Java. Cholera is called by the name ta'cun, derived from the Arabic, and signifying pestilence or epidemie, or mutah-chirét (vomiting and diar- rhoea) from its two prominent symptoms. These diseases are supposed to originate in the battles waged with one another by the jens (Arab. juin). These beings, which exhibit themselves in sundry forms, and can upon occasion render themselves invisible, and which are unhampered by the laws of gravity in their
i) The verb uscd to denote the application of such a charin is teumanom, "to bury.'
flight through air, earth and water, are like the human race divided into Moslims and unbelievers. Thus among them too there subsists a holy war. The Mohammedan jéns when pursued by their enemies with arrows invisible to the human eye, take refuge among human beings without making any distinction between the heathen and their fellow- believers. Thus many men are smitten by the arrows of the heathen jéns, and it is these which are the cause of cholera. In Acheh, as in the otiier Mohammedan countries of the Archipelago, the inhabitants of a gampöng where an epidemie prevails combine to give "religious feasts to allay the calamity," (kanduri tula da/a), either in the chapel or at the entrance to the gampöng (babah ret). At such times many dream that some one asks them for a white or yellow apam-cake, and the dreamers omit not 011 the following day to offer the two things so asked for to a teungku, as they fear that omission to do so will render them a prey to the disease. Public processions, at which Arabic formulas of prayer are chantcd, are then the order of the day; when these arrivé at the entrance of the gampöng, they intone the bang or adan, the familiar summons to prayer. Small-pox [plazua) is ascribed to an aged dame of the spirit world, who bears the name of Pb Ni. She throws sinall objects like grains of corn 011 men's bodics, thus giving rise to the ulccrs of small-pox. Hesides the native therapeutics, which we do not propose to describe liere, most of the remedies adopted consist in measures to secure tlie favour of Yb Ni. By way of an offering to this small-pox spirit, grains of keumenng or keiimcu are hung up, strung on a thread and alternating with the white flowers which are usually exposed for sale in the market (bungong peukan). Keumenng is made by placing unhusked rice in a pot, prefer- ably one which is old and cracked (neuleuë') and shaking it violently till the grains spring open and the husk separates itself of its own accord. To hasten the development of the ulcers, keutneung and a pomegranate are given as kanduri to a teungku. The flowers in full bloom and tlie "buist" rice are supposed to have the effect of causing the small-pox ulcers 'to comc to a head and burst ').
to a leube a
| i) If | a relation | or fellow-lodger | is on a journey, | it is customary | to bring |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| present | of keumenng | with a bunch | of pisang abin (a kind | of plantain), | a pomegranate |
| some "market flowers." of the traveller. | The leube thereupon | offers up a prayer | (diCa sculumat) for the safety |
and
41/
Ihe sick person is also wrapped in a cloth stained ycliow with turmeric (,kunyet). Ihe things that are pantang or tabooed in such cases are of the same description as in Java. Tlie invalid must not be need- lessly exposed to view, and thus a curtain is stretched in front of tlie bed. VVithin earshot of the patiënt the small-pox ulcers are spoken of only as "flowers" (bnngbng kayec), and those who wish to enquire whether they have fully developed employ the word kaya — "ricli." The answer to this question must be only "rich" or "middling" but liever "poor." Words such as "dead" (maté), "blind" (buta), "crooked" (iheukb ), "much (lc) must not be uttered in the presence of the sick person. Nothing is fried in oil for fear the pock-marks sliould prove black '). I liere are also other curious methods of preventing and resisting Combatting epidemics. On Puló Breuëh (Bras) is an old karicng-tvcz which according of e',illumics- to popular superstition lias the power of enchaining epidemics and letting them loose upon the people at will. This tree is called Ja'-) Karicng. Once a year the inhabitants of the island hold there a great kanduri, offering up flowers and incense, and take sea-baths close by. During the course of this feast many forbidden intrigues are set 011 foot and indulged in. Were this festival not observed, it is thought that the coming year would surely be marked by pestilence. Another preventive of epidemics, employed so to speak oflicially in Acheh in earlier times, was the "setting afloat of a tandtang" (boih lanchang). Lanchangs 011 a small scale are set afloat in case of individual illnesses. Ihe process is as follows: — a rectangular piece is cut from a betelnut spathe, folded and stitched tight 011 three sides, and kept open by means of a cross-piece attached to its upper edges, so that it ïouglily resembles a boat; a sort of mast is also fixed in it. I11 this little vessel are placed various sweetmeats (peunajoh), sirih, a live hen, two raw eggs, boiled glutinous rice, flowers and a piece of white cotton. It is tlien taken to the river or the padi-fields, in which last case it is deposited at a spot where three or four ways meet (simpang Ihéë or peuct). All this is carried out under the orders of a woman skilied in
| >) With | the Malays | it is pantang | or tabooed | for those | in attendance | on | the small-pox |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| patiënt | to wear a baju | or upper | garment, | or to talk | loudly | or quarrel | in the house. |
| Cocoanut-leaves of the infection. | or other These | green fronds are called | are hung gigawar. (Translator). | in front | of the house | to wam | passers-by |
| 27 |
2) Ja is the generic term for "ancestors." See above p. 49 et seq.
medicinal art {ma ubat) who herself conveys the lanchang to its destination, She first causes the patiënt to eat some of the sweetnieats; the other objects are moved backwards and forwards over the patiënt s head with solemn reckoning ending in a long-drawn tujöödöh! ') (scven), and then placed in the boat. Formerly, when an epidemie prevailed, the Sultan would command a great lanchang₁) built of wood or bamboo and furnished with a quantity of rir.e and meat. A pretended human sacrifice to the sea was also made; some poor man who was willing to play the part ofvictini for a few dollars was placed on board the boat and set off to drift down the Acheh rivcr and out of the kuala. At the river s mouth he would manage to regain the shore, leaving the rice and meat to their strife with the waves.
§ 8. Death and the disposal of the Dead.
The death-If a sick person lies staring with fixed eyes (mumandang), and still more if he is seen gasping for breath with mouth open {meiiungkab), the Achehnese say that the sukreuct') or death-struggle has begun, and that all hope is vain. In moments of consciousness the dying person, in order to alleviate his battle with death, is wont to ask the members of his family who are present for forgiveness for his sins against tliem. They will then reply "It is naught" or "Forgiveness rests with our Lord Allah"4). It is considered as of prime necessity for one of those present to prepare the dying man for the trials that await him after death by reminding him of the confession of faith: " 1 here is 110 god but Allah.
| is observed; | see also p. 307. | In the | ceremony | of counting | here described | as well as in | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| those referred facing him. | to above, | nothing must | intervene | between | the patiënt | and the open | door |
| same word | lanchang is used | to denotc | the boat; | in the south | it is called | jong. The | hantu |
| or evil spirit Skcat's Malay is said of one | which causes Magie pp. who is at | the epidemie 433—6. the last gasp. | is supposed | to | sail away in | the boat. | Sec also |
1) Sec the description of the petirc.tnpot (p. 411) in which the samerepetition of numbers
2) This custom also exists in the Malay peninsula, in the northern part of which the
3) The Arab. (sakarat in Jav.), "death-struggle,'" "death-anguish. Tenngoh suhrcn'èt
4) Ilana peu'è or men ah ba* polen Al ah.
No sooncr is a dead man laid in his grave, than hc is visited by the uigels Munkar and Nakïr (Ach. Mbngkarönwanangkï), terrible of aspect ind prepared if hc fails to answer thcir questions to chastise him jrievously as a foretaste of what he lias to expect after the resurrec- :ion. These questions relate to the faith, and only he who has died n that true faith can reply to them. I hc Mohammedans belicve that it is during the vcry last moments )( man's life that the Devil makes especial eft'orts to lead him astray rom his belief; and thus the dying when cmbarking on thcir journey o eternity are continually put in mind of that confcssion of faith, which s regarded as containing an epitome of all religious trutli. Uns last service rendered to man 011 the boundary between life and leath is called peuntat or peifenntat (propcrly = "to conduct," "show he way to"). 1 liere must be 110 weeping in the presence of the dying, but the \chehnese adat requires that when death supervcnes all present should vail aloud in chorus. Like the Arabian (iali '), tliis cry of lamentation ilso serves as an announcement of the death to the neighbours. As may be seen in the Moslim law-books four duties are specially •njoincd on the survivors in the case of a deceased Mohammedan. 1". The washing of the body. 2°. lts envelopment in the shroud. 3". 1 he ritual service for the benefit of the dead. 4°. The burial. All four must be in accordance with the detailed rules given in the )ooks of the law. As a matter of fact these rules are pretty faithfully observcd among he Moslims of the Indian Archipelago, though here as everywhere :lse they are modified and added to in details by the adat of the :ountry 2). I11 Acheh, before fulfilling any of the above obligations, they first if all wash the face of the deceased. This is always done with water rom a chinu (ladle made of a cocoanut-shell), which is probably used ui this solemn occasion as being the most primitive and old-fashioned
1) See my Mekka vol. II, p. 188.
2) As to the ccremonial ohservances after death among the Malays of the Peninsula
which are practically identical with those here described, sec Skeat's Malay Magie, pp. 397—405' ( Translator).
vessel attainable, just as the bamboo knife is de rigueur tor the scvenng of the navel-cord '). The washing The eyes of the dead are then closed, a band is wound round the of the cuipse. j.Q]<0Cp the javvs together, and the body is laid 011 a bedstead (prata'ih)-, shortly before death tlie sufferer is generally laid on the floor of the back verandah to give him space and coolness. Finally the corpse is enveloped in a costly garment, and all present sit down and await the coming of those whose task it is to wash the body. Where a death occurs at night, the watching of course lasts till the morning; in such a case the dead is armed against malignant jens with a small knife laid beneath his pillows, and watch is kept by his corpse, while a lamp burns close by. The chief object of this watch is to prevent the body from being touched by a cat, for the Achehnese, like the people of Java, believe that such contact would result in a ghostly resurrection, not a return to life, but a terrifying imitation thereof₂). In the case of men the washing is performed by the teungku of the meitnasah, who brings one or two helpers with him; for women an expert of the same sex is sumrnoned. The body is now placed in the jurec. In this room, as we have seen, provision is made at the time of building the house for the washing of the dead, by making an opening in the floor for the water to flow ofif by. The mats are taken up and the corpse is placed over the aperture in the floor, supported by two plantain sterns laid at right angles to the opening so as to leave sufficiënt space under the body. When the deceased leaves grown-up sons, the eldest squats at the head of the dead body and supports it with his hands, while a younger brother does the same for the feet. Where there are no sons, other relatives often pay this token of respect. In the case of persons of high rank or great religious teachers, the plantain sterns are replaced by the outstretched legs of relations or friends of the deceased, who sit in rows opposite one another on eacli side of the body, and esteem it an honour to support it during the last purification ').
1) Water from a chi/in [ie mcuchimi) is also required for the baptism of a newly-pur-
ehased ploughing bufïalo, and wc have already seen the use made of the chinu in the "waving" (peiiranipot).
2) The Malays lay a betel-nut scisson (kachip besi) or a small knife on the breast of
the corpse. This "contact with iron" is supposed to counteract the evil inlhience {badï) *of the cat. See Skeat's Malay Magie, p. 39® {Tram'hitor}.**
3) Cf. Skeat's Malay Magie, pp. 399—400.
We shall spare our readers a detailed description of the washing, noting only the fact that, in addition to water, soap (preferably that brought back by pilgrims from Mecca) or lime-juice [bbh kriïct) is used as a detergent, while leaves of the bada ') and the sijalöh 2) are squeezed into the water used for one of the six ablutions. After the cleansing in the literal sense of the word comes the ceremonial ablution, for which the teungku in accordance with the law first pronounces the niet (= "intention"). Though not obligatory and only recommended by the law, it is the universal custom for the survivors to follow up the washing of the dead body (pumanoë manyèt) by the small ceremonial ablution which generally serves to restore the Standard of purity required for a ritual service. This peutuëng ië seumayang serves as it were to prepare the dead for the service presently to be held for his benefit. During the service the body is placed in front of those who perform it. For those who are not yet circumcised the pumanoë manyèt and the peutuëng ië seumayang are replaced by the tiambm i. e. the wiping of certain parts of the body with pure sand. This is permitted by the law in the case of those who cannot be, or can only partly be cleansed with water. To dry the corpse it is entircly enveloped in a great towel {tja Shrouding peukréng). Meanwhile the shroud lies ready on the bedstead (*prata'ih). l1"-*u"l',e' If the deceased is a man, a large cloth called the turban (seureuban) is laid beneath his head, and round the upper part of the body is wound a piece of cloth with an opening through which the head protrudes; this cloth is called the bajeë. For the bodies of women this under- garment does not appear to be used in Acheh, though it is in Java. Over this comes the kaphan proper or winding-sheet, forming usually three but some times five or even seven layers; this covers the whole body. 1'oor persons use bilt one kaphan. Before these cloths are wrapped round the body, the face is covered and all orifices closed with wadding, over which is spread a little camphor. The hands are laid one above the other (ptiwa, properly to place the one within the other) in the manner prescribed for the living in prayer. The dress formed by the folded cloth is fastened over the head, beneath the feet, and in five
1) Mal. bidara.
2) Mal. nalu.
422
othcr parts of the body, with bands of the same white material of which the kaphan is made. Before these bands are finally tied about the head and neck, an opportunity is given to the relatives to take their last leave of the dead. 1'hc coffin. The use of coffins is, as we know, exceptional among Mohammedans '). It is desired that the last resting-place of the dead should be the earth in its literal sense. Hence where coffins are used, as in the Native States of Java, somc earth is generally placed below the body. As a rule Mohammedan graves are made in one of the two following forms, according to the nature of the soil. One way is to dig a great square hole in the ground and then to hollow out in one of its sides a space which forms the real tomb (Arab. la/id, Mal. lahat), in which the body is laid, so that the earth which is afterwards thrown into the grave covers it at one side only and not above. Or else, where the soil is too loose to make such a primitive vault even with the aid of one or two planks, a deep trench (Arab. shiqq) is dug in the bottom of the square hole from end to end and serves as the resting place of the body. The winding-sheet is loosened in the grave, and the head is partly exposed so as to allow the left check to come into contact with the soil. In Acheh it is only slaves and the vcry poor who are buried in this fashion, customary as it is in other parts of the Archipelago, including Java. For others a wooden coffin (kreunda) is made. The construction of the kreunda is seen to by the authorities of the gampöng. It is smaller at the foot than at the head and is provided with a loose lid. The bottom is made, not of planks, but of rattan or the midribs of cocoanut leaves (peuleupeuc), fastened together with rattan, in order to facilitate the contact of the body with the earth. Bui-Lal. It is considered as of great importance that he who lays the body 011 the bier before leaving the house should be a connection by marriage deceasedl
| of the | ), | such as | a son-in-law | or brother-in-law. | Ile | places | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the karanda | (= Ach. kreunda). | a plain | oblong | plank box, and | the Zong, described | by Skeat | |
| (Malay Magie p. 399) as consisting | of two planks | which | form a sort | of gable with | closed | ||
| ends, or of a three | sided | box with | the sides buiging | out, | both er.ds open, | and | no bottom. |
| In the case is used, while | of the papan sa-kiping in the case of the | long, the body lies 011 a mat. (Translator). | a wicker-work | covering | ('lerang-lcrang) of split | bambus | |
| or grandchildren | left by | th • deceased | they are sometimes | made to walk | beneath | the bier | |
| before it is carried | to the | burying-placc. | (Translator). |
1) The coffins of three different sorts, the papan sa-kiping (a simple plank),
2) This custom does not prcvail among the Malays; but where there are many children
Malays employ
423
the body 011 the lid of the coffin, since the latter is borne to the tomb on the heads of two men, a method of transport known as seuon, the way in which heavy objects are always carried by the Achehnese. Thus if the body were allowed to rest on the bottom of the bier, composed as it is of loose lattice work, it would come into contact with the heads of the bearers. Round the bier is fastened with bands of white cotton a mat or carpet ') which is afterwards handed over to the meunasah or gampöng-chapel by the heirs of the deceased. Over this are spread five or six handsome cloths, such as those worn by a bride. The bier is solemnly borne down the steps of the house by a crowd of the fellow-villagers of the deceased. YVlien they are half-way down, an old man or woman scatters over them from above breuch-pade (husked and unhusked rice), and some copper money, calling three times upon the name of Allah. The coffin is then set down in the front part of the enclosure, close to .a mat which lies spread ready for those who wish to take part in the burial service. In Aclieli, as in Java, this service (scuinayatig manyit) presents a sad The funeral contrast to the intention of the Mohammedan law. According to the h(-'WL'- latter it is almost the same as an ordinary (alat such as every Moham medan is supposed to perform five times a day. It differs indeed in a number of special details from this daily service, but as the law urges all to take part in these services for the benefit of thcir fellow-believers, it assumes that such differences in details are generally known. As a matter of fact, however, tliere are but very few who are acquainted with these rules. Every funeral is attended by a large number of persons who scarcely ever perform thcir obligatory prayers, and who would yet be ashamed to exhibit their ignorance in public. Thus they generally leave the performance of the whole ceremony in the hands of hired experts. In an Achehnese village the teungku is naturally the person first chosen, and he is not unfrequently the sole performer of the service, thougli wlien funds perinit, some leubl's are also summoned. It is only where the deceased are devout persons or religious teachers that a number of people come and join in the seuniayang tnanyct of their
i) This covcring is known as lapé^ hreunda.
own accord, and the ricli make a show of thcir wealtli on such occasions by engaging the services of a large numbcr of leubcs. \ hen the short funeral service is over, each of those who have taken part 111 ït receives as seudeukah or gift of piety, a strip of white stuff, or if the deceased be of high position, a piece of the more ex- pensive patanilam. Each of the fellow-villagers of the departcd, who come to offer their condolences (kumunjtmg) is given a present of from five to fifteen cents. Visits of The kumunjïmg begins immediately after the death and lasts as Ion" :onuolcnce., b as seven days. ihe men who come to pay these visits are gcnerally received in the space beneath the house (yul> mbh), while the women pay their tribute of sympathy within the house itself. ()n these occasions the usual display of oratory is conspicuous by its absence; in Acheh the native is most chary of his words both in congratulation and condolence. 1 here is however one absurd custom which forms part of the condolences of women. \ hen a friend comes to express her sympathy, a female relation of the deceased or in her absence a stranger who is good enough to act as her deputy, lias to "make the visitor wail" (ptimöë or pubac). 1 his she does by herself crying loudly as she embraces her guest, \ hereupon the latter also sheds some theatrical tears and gives vent to a sound as of sobbing '). After this they act as though nothing had occurred and eat and drink vvhat is set before them. As may be imagined where are so many visitors, the strength of the kinswoman who does the wailing eventually becomes exhausted, and when a new guest arrivés, there often ensues a discussion in the back verandah as to who shall undertake tlie duty. 1 he coffin is, as we have already stated, borne to the tomb on the
| i) | "to weep and | "to lament | must | be distinguished | from | i. c. | the |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| mentioning | of the deceased's | name | with endearing | epithets | or description | of his virtues, | |
| e. g. "my | heart, the | of mine | eyc" | This | is done | by a | |
| woman on | the death of a child, | brother | or sister, | or of lier parents, | but not | of her husband, | |
| as this is | prohibitcd by feminine | modesty. | On the | West Coast | espceially we | meet with | the |
| adat known | as | , looked on with | strong disfavour | by | the pious. Some five | or six | |
| days after | a death, men, | women and | girls assembic | together | in the house, | the walls | of |
| which are | partly removed. | The women | and girls | perform a dance | i 1 which | they raise | one |
| leg repcatedly. | This is | accompanied | by the recitation | of pantöns | which are | oftcn vcry | far |
| from decent | in their purport. | The performers | keep | by them ready-made | sirih | quids, which | |
| they distribute | to their | among | the male | audience. |
Moe lm i nicuitynba'
apple (boh atéku, bijch mataku).
tnuphd
favourites
heads of two men, and if the deceased be a person of position, one or two umbrellas are held open over it. There is a characteristic custom observed where the deceased is a member of the family of an ulèebalang or of some one whose rank or wealth entitle him to like consideration. On either side of the way to be taken by the funeral cortege, from the steps of the house through the courtyard and gampöng to where the road enters the surrounding fields, lengths of white cotton are suspended on poles. At intervals of about every four haïh (ells) in the length of the stuff a slight tear is made. These two fences of cotton are called tutiic or "the bridge" '). As soon as the procession is set in motion, the people of the gam pöng, as they pass, tear the cotton off in pieces of four ells in length, and each takes all he can, the consequence often being a free fight. In Arabic the interment is called jincizali -) and this is corrupted by the Achehnese into jcunadah, but has with them taken 011 an entirely different signification from its Arabic original. If a child dies unmarried, and also sometimes in case of the death of young married people or women in child-birth, the custom is to bear the body to the grave in a sort of ark, the frame of which is made of wood or bamboo, entirely surrounded by a cloth covering, over which are scattered flowers such as betelnut blossom, chëmpaka, mëlati etc. This ark, which is usually prepared by the women, is called jainadah 3); after the burial it is laid 011 the top of the grave. As soon as the funeral procession has left the house, the whole wardrobe of the deceased (reitliab) is laid 011 the bedstead and flowers are scattered over it. It remains in this position for forty-four or one hundred days. On the floor beneath the prataih must always be placed a vessel (mundam) full of water to slake the thirst of the spirit (aruah) of the deceased. Thus in Acheh, jvist as in Java, the dead man is
| of the Peninsula | "bridge" | is also "////•" in Malaceaand Singapore it isjembatan (Translator).] | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| the dead ( Translater). | body of a Raja, | in contradistinction | to the corpsc | of an | ordinary | person (jnaiaf). | |
| The | same name | is given to | the tabut, which | is carried | round in procession | by the | |
| Klings and | the people | of I'adang | during the | Hasan-Husain | fcast, and | also to a similar | |
| coffer which | is uscd | to send yellow | glutinous | riee, with a certain | amount | of pomp, | as a |
| present oa | the occasion | of the circumcision | of the son of a rclative | or friend. |
1) Tutuë is a dialectic variation of titi a bridge." [In the Malay of the northern part
2) Aeeording to Skeat (Malay Magie, p. 397), the name jenaja or jïf/iazah is given to
u
3)
popularly believed to be, in a cortain sense, present in the house for a definite period after his death. 1 he Javanese custom of placing by the bedside from day to day one or more dishes of the favourite food of the deceased, does not prevail in Acheh. \ e find hcre, however, an adaptation of this custom, \iz. the serving of these favourite dishes at the funeral feasts or kanduris. I his is also gradually gaining ground in Java. 1 he reuhab is sometimes given away in alms after the funeral, but more often sold by the greedy heirs. During this period of one hundred days, the wife, children, brothers and sisters of the deceased must refrain from staining their feet red with gac/in (Arab. hinna). I he burial itself takes place as follows: the vvrappings of the coffin are unfastened, and it is placed on the cdge of the grave '), within which two men stand prepared to receive it. Sometimes, but not always, the bang or adan (call to prayer) is recited inside the grave. The kreunda is then set in the midst of the grave, now of course with the bottom downwards, in such a position tliat the head of the deceased points towards the North. The bands which are fastened round the kaphan are then loosened, and a teungku is requested to say whether the body is in the desired position, i. e. with the face towards Mecca (kiblat). Sandbags are placed by way of cushions to support the neck and the middle of the body. ;rave. The depth of the grave is such to bring its cdge on a level with the gravedigger's brcast. The length and breadth are supposed to be four haï/i (ell or cubit, the distance from the elbow to the tip of the middle finger)2), but in fact it is more spacious than this, as otherwise it would be difficult for the men standing inside to lay down the bier. When this has been done, some earth is handed down to those inside by others from above to cover the coffin. This is done slowly and carefully, for if by mishap a clod of earth should fall noisily 011 the coffin it is regarded as ua token that others will follow" (tanda seumeutct)
tutte
| but still stands | empty. | After the | burial it is called | /, which is the commoner expression | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| also used | to denote | the graves | of the unbelievcrs, | or | which | is more refned. | |
| as we have | already seen, | indicates | the burial-place | of a family | or the | members | of a clan. |
| true, so may | the four | cubits of earth | liever | receive 111e (if 1 lie)!" |
1) The grave is called (properly an excavatcd hole) after it has been prepared
2) Hence the common oath: = 'What 1 say is
jettra kttbu, Bhöm,
ba' bi' jitrimong li bumuë pcuït haih, bit
427
i. e. tliat there will soon be another death in the sanie house. Such an occurrence excites special horror in times of epidemie. When once the coffin is covered, the grave is filled without more ado, and the earth is then gradually trodden flat. The graves of persons of rank are always raised somewhat higher than those of humbler folk, and the tumulus formed above the grave is somewhat rounded off. As temporary grave-marks (uisan), live ricinus-plants (nawaih) are placed at the head and foot of the grave; these plants are later on replaced by two tomb-stones. Finally the grave is besprinkled from head to foot from a water-pot filled with water mixed with a little powdered sandalwood, and which is brought from the house with the body; while at the head of the grave is spread a mat, on which the teungku takes his seat in the midst of those who have followed the body to the tomb. We have seen above tliat the dying are fortified by the peuntat The iculeu (see p. 419) against the inquisition of the angels of the tomb. The law, k"1- which in this respect is universally observed, requires tliat the deceased should be once more reminded when laid in the grave of what he needs for tliat enquiry. The object of the talqin formula (Ach. teulevkin) is chiefly to let the newly buried hear the confession of faith once more before taking leave of him. Fearful indeed are the punishments dealt out even in the narrow limits of the grave to the unhappy wight whose answers (which always harmonize with his manner of life on earth) are deemed unsatisfactory by his dread inquisitors. Those who have sharp ears sometimes hear the tormented wretches shrieking in their graves, so tliat it is considered undesi.able to live in the neighbourhood of the tombs of great evildoers or tyrants. The grandfather of the present Teuku Nè' (chief of Meura'sa), who under the title of Teuku Ulèë Lhcuë was the right hand man of the old Teuku Ne (the second prcdecessor of the present chief), lives in the memory of the people as an atrocious tyrant. When buried he shrieked (geutneuchie) so dreadfully in his tomb tliat the people of the neighbourhood after being continually robbed of sleep, secretly exhumed his body and cast it into the sea. Such at least is the story. The teungku usually reads the teuleukin ') from a book, together
| (ber-tckku) | to listen | to the | talkin. Skeat's | Malay | Magie, | p. 406. (Translater}. |
|---|
1) The Malays believe that the corpse revives momcntarily and raises itself on its elbow
- ith the proper prayer fi>r the repose of tlie departed soul. All those resent then perform ratêb, i. e. repeat a hundred tiines or more la 'aha il/d 'Udh = athere is no God but Allah," and the teungku repeats nother prayer, the dn'a kitbu or funeral prayer. After partaking of he plantains brought for their refreshment, the company returns to he house of mourning, where there awaits them a kanduri of rice and :s accessories, called the "kanduri of those returning from the grave '). As a fee for his tculeukin the teungku receives by fixed custom iinaïh, i. e. | of a dollar, but the growing demands of the time have radually increased the amount of this gift to nearly a dollar. Most eople lay by during their lifetime the money destined for this purpose !ia' teuleuhn), and do not touch it under any cireumstances; hence ie proverbial saying when some one has lost his all by theft or ccident, "they have taken avvay with them even my teuleukin-money 2)." 1 he teungku is also given the ja peukréng, the great piece of cloth pread for a few moments as a "towel" over the body after the blution. 1 his is often replaced by an unused piece of white cotton, ut the name ija peukréng is retained. Lastly he profits by the custom of the Achehnesc of cmploying ihhls for the benefit of the dead. Tahlil is the meritorious act of jciting the words ld ildha illd 'l/d/i "there is 110 god but Allah." iccording to the Moslim doctrine, one can perform for the benefit of ie dead good works which are not obligatory, thus making over to iem the reward which God has appointed for such works. On this otion is also based the common form of saint-worsliip, namely the istribution of money, giving of feasts and the like at the tomb of a lint. The recompense for such pions acts is made over to the saint, ot that he has need of it, but to secure his goodwill. This amounts 3 a request to the departed one to use his good offices as far as he an to win the fulfilment at God's hands of a definite wish on the art of the suppliant. To the ordinary uncanonized dead, on the other hand, the recom- ense of good works is devoted without any such egotistical purpose, 3 increase their "provision for the journey to the other world." The nstom in Acheh requires that special tahlils should be recited in such
1) Kanduri urettëng wuc dijen rat; the name surtanah given to this feast in other parts
of the K. Indian Archipelago is unknown in Acheh.
2) *Lön ha'-heC teuleukin ka abéh jicïio*
cases, and as it is important that this task should be performed by suitable persons, it is generally assigned to experts such as leubès or ulamas. The usual tariff is $ 4. for 100.000 tahlils. On the day of the death this sum is handed over to the teungku of the gampöng, who retains say a quarter of a dollar for himself, and divides the rest among a number of leubès and ulamas, informing them of the purpose in hand. It is also not unusual for near relatives of the deceased to give in addition money presents to certain devout and learned men, requesting them to undertake the recital of such and such a number of tahlils for the benefit of the departed one. Another pious work, the "merit" of which is in all Mohammedan lands devoted to the service of the dead, is the recitation of portions of the Quran. Hence in many districts professional reciters may be seen in the burial-grounds waiting for clients who employ them for a small sum to add to the heavenly recompense of their deceased relatives. I11 Acheh it is customary to have a portion of the Quran chanted (1beuct dijeurat) for this purpose every morning and afternoon during the first ten days after a death. This is done either at the grave, or if that be too remote, in the house where the death took place. Rich people liire a number of persons for this purpose, but as a general rule it is performed by one only. This one is again the teungku, who has a sort of adat-claim to be so employed; he may however depute another in his place. The fee for these ten days is about two dollars, besides two meals daily, for after each recitation the reciters come and seek refreshment in the house. Where this recitation takes place at the grave, a mundatn of water is poured over the tomb at the conclusion of each portion, just as after the interment. The following days, counting from that of the death, are kept in Kanduris foi commemoration thereof; the 3*', 7111, 5111, ioth30''',, 40th or 44'^, ioo111 and |jje ac"d" the anniversary of the death '). The loooth day is not observed in Acheh. On the first four (3^, 5''», 7»' and ioth) of these days, the fellow- villagers are invited to a kanduri of yellow glutinous rice. The meal is usually preceded by meuhatam, i. e. the recitation of a portion of
| great kanduri | falls 011 the | Friday, the | on the | Sunday following, and | so on, | counting | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| l>y the number | of nights | that the corpse | has lain in | the grave. |
1) The day of burial eounts as the first day. If the funeral is on a Tuesday, the first
second
the Qurfin concluding with the *hatavi-*prayer vvhich properly serves to mark the termination of a complete recitation of the Quran. For this purpose tnukadams (little books, each of which contains one of the thirty divisions or jriih of the Quran) are distributed among the more learned of the guests as they enter the house. The names of these kanduris follow the serial numbers of the days on vvhich they are held: kanduri urbc Uier, limong, tufih and siplöh. The daring levity of the Achehnese lias given popularity to the foll- owing saying: Uro'é Ihcc — mubèc, Urbc limbtig — keum 'ong, Urbc ti/juk — beureutöïh, Urbi' siplöh — ka ulat pajöh. "The third day (the body) smells, the fifth it swells, the seventh it bursts, the tenth the vvorms have devoured it." On the other days mentioned all that is done is to give very small kanduris (kanduri beu'ct bu) to some needy folk, or to have the Quran recited in the evening by a few leubcs, who are supplied with food either before or after the performance of this task. On the 71'1 day the kanduri must consist in part at least of apam-cakes; the reason for this lias been given in our description of the calendar of feasts under the head of the seventh month. On the 44A day the female members of the family go and visit the grave. They take with them water to pour on the tomb, flowers as an offering and plantains to be eaten on the spot. They also rencler service to the deceased by Quran recitations if there are among them one or more female teungkus or women of religious learning. ombstones. The same day is sometimes chosen for the pula batcc or "planting of the stones," i. e. the actual tombstones, in place of the ricinus-plants which are put down as marks after the burial. It often happens, how- ever, that this is postponed for a considerable time owing to temporary lack of the funds required for the ceremony, or because the season muscm piche blang forbids the "planting of the stones." Nor is that forbidden in the "close season" only. While the padi is being sown in the nurseries, 110 tombstones may be set up, even though the land is then "open." And this is 110 mere adat-rule that may be transgressed at will, likc so many others; did anyone venture to do such a thing, the keucliï would at once interpose his prohibition, as
otherwise all the padi in the neighbourhood might fail as the result of the transgression. The tombstones are imported from neighbouring islands, such as Puló Wè, and sold for one or two dollars a set. The stones brought from these islands are oval or globular in shape, and pairs are made of those vvhich match best. In former times the vvealtliier folk used to have chiselled tombstones, and employed for this purpose a porous and easily workable kind of stone from Puló Batèë ') (Stone Island) opposite Ulèe Lheuë (Olehleh). Till quite recently the people of Meura'sa possessed great skill in cutting these stones, so that the batee Meura'sa were in great demand throughout all Acheh. 1 he tombstones were given a different shape according as they were intended for men or for vvomen (nisan agam and inong). Those for men, for instance, were prisms with four, six or eight angles 2). Sometimes, too, they narrowed towards the base, so that the lovver surface was smaller than the upper, while the side surfaces resembled reversed trapezia. Foot pieces and ornamental tops of various forms relieved the unwieldiness of their appearance, and the whole surface was cut in fine patterns ") of leaf-work, the words of the confession of faith being sometimes engraved on the stone. I-or women the side-surfaces of the stones were made narrow, the back and front broad; as the Achehnese express it, the stones are "flat' or "thin." On both sides, where the crown joined the trunk, were widely projecting spiral ornaments suggesting ears, and called subang (earrings) by the Achehnese. Sometimes the two stones were connected by a long flat one which overspreads the whole surface of the tomb from head to foot. This is called batee badan (body stone). '1 he pula batee and all that is connected with it is attended to by the walis of the deceased, or if the latter is a married vvoman, by her husband. Should he conclude a new marriage or demand back the ha.'' balèè 4)
(kettnalcuëng)
| Achehnese | houses. | It is easy to work | hut not durable. | Hewn | tomb-stones | are now largely | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| imported | from Penang. | ||||||
| Skeat (clouds) a claim | and to //<;' | p. 408), (pomegranates). | believes that | these were evolved | from a phallic | cmbleni. |
1) This soit of stone was also used to fortn the pediment of the posts of
3) Two of the handsomest patterns, which are also employed in silk-weaving, are called
4) See p. 364 above, where we have sliown under what circumstances the husband lias
2) (Afiitay Magie,
(Translator.)
awan g/ima
balei.
from his paients-in-law bcforc the "planting of the tombstones" lias been attended to either by him or her father, he is branded as a man with no sense of honour. In like manner, as we have seen '), the relatives of a deceased man cannot press their claims to interfere with the up-bringing of the children against the widow until they have seen to the erection of the pitla batie. The setting up of the stones is accompanied by a religious feast {,kanduri). Some give this at home, others on a larger scale at the place of burial. Yellow glutinous rice is indispensable, and it is also thought desirable to slay a goat. The tcungkti of the gampong acts as "planter." He first effects the indispensable "cooling" by scattering braiëh-padé (husked and unhusked rice) over both stones and besprinkling them with flour and water with the besom already alluded to₂), formed from the three kinds of "cooling" plants. This ceremony is introduced with a bismillah ( in the name of Allah). The teungku then sets up the tombstones and consecrates the feast with a prayer, if the viands furnished for the occasion appear to him worth the trouble. Little care is taken to keep the graves from being overgrown, so tliat few Achehnese can teil the exact spot where their ancestors are buried. After a generation or two no one troubles about them any longer. Visits to the tombs are only paid on the occasion of great feasts 3). A bride visits the tombs of her parents and grandparents 011 the eve of her marriage, but the bridegroom seldom does so. Before circumcision such a pilgrimage is made only in the rare cases where a great deal is made of the affair, and where the boy's father happens to have been a great teacher or a distinguished chief. The Javanese idea of asking the permission of the dead ancestors for such important acts is quite strange to the Achehnese. A widow who cherishes her husband's memory and has the necessary means at her command, usually takes upon herself voluntarily many of the expenses occasioned by his death. Should she be unable or unwilling to do so, the Mohammedan law is then followed. This law prescribes that before proceeding to the distribution of the property, all debts of the deceased, including his funeral expenses, should be paid off and satisfied.
1) Sce p. 402.
2) See p. 305.
3) See pp. 241 and 243 above.
At the same time it is incumbent on the widow to keep her hus- band s relatives in mind of the kanduris that have to be given etc. and to fix in consultation with them the amount to be thus laid out, as otherwise the relatives would be certain subsequently to refuse to allow these expenses to be charged upon the inheritance. 1 he interest displayed by the relations of a married man in the proper disposal of his remains after death often leaves much to be desired, where it is known that the heritage is insufficiënt, or nearly so, to cover the expenses connected with burial. In such cases the affair is left entirely in the hands of the widow or her family. Stinginessin such matters is characteristic of the Achehnese, in strong contradistinction with the Javanese, who are only too ready to throw away their money even on funerals. It often happens in Acheh that a man dies on the North, East Announ- or West Coast, or at least at a great distance away from his wife and children or his parents. It is than an adat-duty for those in whose house the death occurs to notify it to the wife or parents of the deceased. This is donc by bringing to them his ija bajeé'), i. e. his clothes. It is however not absolutely necessary to produce one of each kind of garment worn; a single lower garment will suffice. In presenting the bundie containing the garments to the survivors, the bringer says "this is the token of the departed" (iiyoè alamat ureueng mate). In the case of persons of position, the ija must be as voluminous as possible, and folded up in another ija of costly material. 1 his official notice is usually long preceded by the news or rumour of the death. I his however does not prevent the "arrival of the clothes" {ka to' ija bajee as it is called), from giving rise to a perfunctory loud wailing followed by condolence (kumunjmg) of friends and neighbours with its attendant ceremonial. The customary manner of rcferring to the dead is based on the confusion (comraon also among our own people) of the souls or the immortal part of men with angels. They say for instance mala ik at ayah ion (lit. "the angel my father") = my late father. In Java in like manner the dead is glorified as a dweller in paradise by the
| l) The | Achehnese language | possesses | no generic | term for | clothes; | fcuhayan | betokens |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| only ornaments | of precious | metal. Thus | the combination | of two | principal articles of dress | ||
| {ija = lower | garment and bajer - | coat) | is employed | to designate | clothing | generally. | |
| 28 |
addition of the terms swarga or jënat, uscd rcspectively according as the person spoken of is of high or lovv rank. In some cases aruah — "spirit" is used in place of vialaikat. This is done where reference is made to an occurrence during the lifetime of the deceascd (e. g. ada yoli na aruah A = "when A. was still living"), or when someone relates how they have seen him in a dream ').
§ 9. Distribution of Effects.
"The day". The division of property is not arranged till the principal funeral ceremonies are over, i. e. till "the day lias come" (ka tö' uröe), by which is meant the 441'1 or the iooth day after the death. Interferencc It is only where the inheritance is very paltry that its administration iileebalang. '!,e is left entirely J in the hands of the family. J In all otlier cases the ulèëbalang interposes. The official grounds for his intervention are as follows: 1". That the interests of minors are involved. 2". That one of the heirs is discontented with the distribution made, and consequently files a suit before the ulèëbalang. 3". That the amount of the property is too large to justify its ad ministration being left in the hands of the heirs, who are probably ignorant persons. The real reason however is that the ulèëbalang, when he takes the matter in hand, cuts off IO°/0 of the property for himself as lui praé = uthat which is due for the fixing of portions of in heritance"). The tcungku and keuchï of the gampong go with the interested parties to the ulèëbalang. An account is given to the latter of the heritable assets; gold and other valuables, including money, are actually shown him, and the total value of the property in dollars is estimated. After this the debts are reckoned up and arrangements made for their liquidation. These liabilities include, as we have seen, in addition to the debts contracted by the deceased during his lifetime, all his
| journey, the | Achehnese | place | his name | the words | teusrd* maneh, | may | he |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| choke gently," | as it is thought | that to mention | his name | would | result in his being chokcd. |
1) In speaking of one who is absent, as for instance a friend or relative who is on a
always before u
funeral expenses, unless these are voluntarily settled, as for example by his widow. Besides this there is the debt "to Allah." This includes in particular the expenses of a deputy haji (baday). These are deducted from the efitects after death, where the deceased luis been in a position to perform the haj during his life time, but lias availed himself of the permission given by the Shafi'ite school to postpone indefinitely the fulfilment of this duty '). Another sort of debt to Allah requires to be described at greater length, the more so as this custom is also very prevalent in Java, and lias not, so far as I am aware, been mentioned in any extant work 2). 1 liere are comparatively few Mohammedans who do not leave at Penalty tlicir death a considerable deficit of ritual prayers (falat, Ach. scuuiayang) ^neg'ièctcd" five of which every full-grown man lias to perform daily. prayers. Now it is a ruling doctrine of the Shafi'ite school that this arrear can only be cleared off by penance and punishment in heil, or by the nierciful forgiveness of Allah, and that neglect to perform this purely "bodily" obligation cannot be made good by gifts to the poor. In opposition to this there are some Shafi'ite teachers 3) of authority who hold the view that this latter metliod may be availed of. They direct that the (alats neglected by the deceased should be counted up as carefully as possible, and that for every one of these a mudd of the grain of the country (rice in Sumatra and Java), should be given to the poor, the burden being borne by the inheritance. Others again teach that if the deceased leaves some property his ic*'a/is* are bound to make up (qadha) the galats omitted by him, or to appoint others to do so as their deputies, paying them if need be for tlieir services. '1 hose who hold the first of these two views expressly require the distribution of the dole to be made in the staple grain of the country, just as is prescribed in the case of the pitrah. The Haiiafites, who are also in favour of the doctrine of the distribution of food among the poor, raise no objection to the grain being replaced by its value in money. It may easily be imagined that many teachers favour the practice
| this either | in his Afohammcdaansch | Kccht or in his essay | on the Afwijkingen. | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| edition with | the marginal | notes of as-Sharwanï, | Cairo 1305 | II. |
1) See my "Mekka", Vol. II, p. 310.
2) It is perhaps superfluous to observe that Mr. L. W. C. Van den Berg never mentions
3) For all the necessary information on this point see the Tuhfah Vol. III
p. 231—2,
bascd 011 such views, since it is all to their advantagc. For it is tliey themselves who are the poor and needy among whom is distributed the corn or its value in money, and who unite with a religious life a real or pretended lack of means. The performance of galats by deputy is also a source of profit to tliem, since the walis seldom or never take this task upon themselves, and require substitutes who are known to be capable of performing the galat in such a way as to satisfy all the requirements of the law. In Java, on the death of persons of substance who do not belong to the category of the "santri" (devout persons), one of the three following methods is adopted as a rille in some districts, and as an exception in others: i". Counting up the galats, which should have been performed by the deceased during his lifetime and employing one or more santris (especially members of the kaum servants of the mosque) to make up the deficiency. 2°. Faying the indemnity (fulyah) at the rate of i mudd of rice for the poor per galat. As however it seldom happens tliat people have the requisite quantity of rice in store, they resort to the expedient of purchasing a sack of rice which is good for say 100 galats from one of the recipients of the dole, and giving it to another. This is repeated over and over again, so tliat in point of fact the "poor" (i. e. the people of the kaum) do actually receive the money. 3°. Distributing the value of the rice in direct money payments. This is done under the express taqlul') of the Hanafite school. Thcre is another expedient resorted to in order to cloak the fact that it is only the rich who can make use of the :;ystem of fidyah or the vicarious performance of galats. This expedient lias been improvised evidently not so much to satisfy the consciences of those of moderate means, as to multiply the chances of the officials of the mosques and other devotees to increase their sources of income. The sum due in money for the performance of galats may easily amount to some hundreds or thousands of guilders. Should full payment be insisted on, it is probable that many would show a preference for the "ruling" Shafi'ite doctrine, according to which all such paying off of galats is superfluous or even impossible; the requirements of the law may not
i) See above pp. 344 et seq.
be made the subject of traffic. Hut there is nothing to prevent the greedy votaries of fidyah or galat-fees from coming to an agreement with the heirs somewhat in the following fashion. "Your relative," they may say, "lias left galats to be made good to the value of two thousand guilders, but in view of the interests of his heirs it will be diftïcult to set apart more than two hundred for this purpose. Give now this sum of 200 guilders to one of us as fidyah or recompense for the wiping off of one tenth of the debt due to Allah, and we promise that this amount will be accepted in due form for the purpose named, but will in fact be immcdiately handed back again. This we shall repeat ten times, and the debt will tlius be paid through our co-operation. All we ask for ourselves is the 200 guilders, tliat the oldcst and wisest among us may distribute it as is right and just." This is the ordinary way in which the fidyah or fee for vicarious performance of galats is paid off in the districts of Java wliere the custom prevails. After every deatli of a person of substantial means who does not belong to the "upper classes," the farce we have just sketched takes place '). In Acheh there are plenty of people who at their death leave behind them great arrears of uncompleted ritual prayers. Here too the U'ubès and ulamas are not a whit less grasping than in Java, and are tlius equally strongly inclined to upliold the unauthorized view taken by some Shafi'ite authorities. On the otlier hand the covetous- ness of the heirs is just as great, and in many cases they declare that the matter is incapable of calculation, and that tliough the deceased neglected his cliief religious obligations for years, he has left 110 account of his omissions. Nevertheless it sometimes occurs in Acheh also that padia/i (as it called by the Achehnese) for neglected prayers and fasts is paid out of the estate as an imperative debt, especially wliere the amount due can be fairly accurately fixed. As the namepadiah (Ar. fidyah ransorn) implies, the idea involved is tliat of a compensation without resorting
| an Arab | who had been | invited | to a funeral | feast, witnessed | for the first | time in his | life |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| this mcthod | of distributing | the fidyah. | Ile saw | the purse containing | the money | passed | from |
| hand to | hand with | the usual formal | gift, acceptance | and | return. It came | to him | in his |
| turn, but | after he had | duly accepted | the money, | he absolutely | refused to restore | it, in spite | |
| of all rcpresentations | based on the | adat. The | chance of profit | proved too | strong for | him! |
1) Sometimes the pla.y has a less agreeable ending. I know of a case in Bantën, where
4 38
to taejlid, so that the custom is to give a quantity of rice, which is repurchased repeatedly from its recipient. Cases of farming out the galats are also to be met with, but these are likewise called padiah in the vernacular. Achehno-Mo-After all debts have been deducted from the total sum at which the hammedan,,. law ofinheri-estate is valued, the uleëbalang directs the kali or some otlier ulama tanLL" whose services are available, to reckon up the portions of the various heirs. Hcnce it follows that the Mohammedan law mainly controls the distribution; most of the departures from this law introduced by the adat of Acheh have already been described. Such are the deduction from the estate in some districts of one-half of the atra sihareukat (common earnings of man and wife) for the benefit of the survivor of the two (sec pp. above); the rule that raiment or ornaments given by the man to his wife form, with few exceptions, part of the husband's estate (pp. 327-8); that married people do not inherit from one another unless the jattji jeunameé has expired before one of the two dies (p. 363); and that presents of parents to their children (pcunulang) are subse- quently taken into account at the distribution of the parents' estate (P* 357)- 1° this it may be added that the adat requires for various reasons that houses and their enclosures should as a rule be assigned to the daughters, and rice-fields and weapons to the sons. Wliere the portion falling to eacli is fixed in dollars, the supervision of the just distribution of movable and immovable property among the various claimants rests 011 the teungku of the gampöng as the deputy of the uleëbalang. The latter, as we have seen, takes io°/0 as ha' pra'é, to the disgust of the ulamas and kalis, whose covetousness only allows them to approve of this application of the adat when it turns to their own advantage. The uleëbalang gives part of his share by way of a present to the kcuchï
| to the kali or ulama, and | and teungku. | |
|---|---|---|
| Co 11 trui of | ||
| the property | • | /-, |
| of fatherless infants. | ls usua |
1 he property of infant children who have lost their father by deatli 11111 1 Uy handed over to the custody of the mother. The walis of the deceased, however, show pro forma their interest in the childrens' concerns by requesting the widow, on the 44A or ioo'h day after his death, to exhibit to them all the property which belongs of right to the children. This pretended interference is simply to save them from being subse- quently charged with neglecting the interests of their young relations, and enabling them to say "we have satisfied ourselves fully as to their means."
Where the mothcr also dies, the administration of the orphans' property is left to their father's brothers, unless the ulèëbalang has no confidence in them, in which case he takes the matter into his own hands. 1 his he does only too often, when the property is largc enough to excite liis greed. I he same often happens in regard to the estates of absent persons, while those of foreigners who die in Acheh frequently disappear into the bait al-mal (state treasury) which means really tliat it finds its way into the pockets of the ulèëbalangs. Such a system of administration furnishes, as may easily bc sup- posed a fruitful source of abuses. Of these the very least is that the ulèëbalang trades with the money under his control and renders little or no account of the profits. As a rule, however, the settlement with the claimants, even when these have attained their majority, is cndlessly deferred, and in the protacted "deliberations" as to its disposal, fresh slices are constantly cut oft" from the principal. Should the ulèë balang die before the settlement takes place, his son or whoever else succeeds him professes to know nothing of the matter and to have found 110 notes or reliable witnesses in regard to the administration, and thus excuses himself from making any payment whatever.
96° 95 15 (Eastern Longitu
Subdivisions: A Territory of Kuta Ra BTerritory not belong three sagis of Ache
GREAT ACHEH
(ACHEH PROPER)
and the neighbouring littoral states.
Scale 1: 300,000
K.Acheh
EBatée PBunta UMasam MukaExplanations and abbreviations Ulee Lheué Steamtrammay G. Gunong Lbars na) Carriage roadG' Gle ITar Light military road. A Alné burah Ulee Lnengam GERAYAKeutapmang Dug Footpath Kr Krueng. I Pesang
| I Pesang Poenè chat. | ||
|---|---|---|
| 530 | Chot |
--- - Boundary of Diristons K. Kuala .Utenen ha Boundarg of Subdirisions L. Lam dheu Paga121 ----. Boundarg of Native Province M Meunasah
8Lhb.Nga
Lay of---- DAARO Boundary of Confederation U. l'jong. Krueng RabaSUBDIVISION8 Mititary Post. P Pulo Naga lmbang Pn Peukan Gampong hiteng G
K.Ba Reubah
Banggalang Bay of Ritieng Leupuigiy LEGPUENG do K Leupuëng Pantón Pn/Pidtr r SotKBeurabò l' Pulot AND Telheng Lajjundy K.Gigieng Potcach
U.Seudu
KLheue -1. Teh P Batéé Mangē Thoth Niih
Madgha
SOUTHER KleLeubeué
FEDÉR Bab ngle
EXPLANATORY TABLE.
a. KEUNALEUENG = base-blocks resting on the TEUNAMBA' or
raised ground, which is about 30 centimetres above the level of the surrounding ground.
b. TAMÈH = posts supporting main and auxiliary roofs.
e. TÖy = lower transverse girders the ends of which are fixed in slots cut in the posts.
d. Rō' = lower lengthwise girders similarly fixed.
e. LHUE == floor-joists.
f. GRATAN = supplementary girders placed on the lower transverse girders to carry the floor-joists, which are of less thickness than the lower lengthwise girders.
g. BARA PANYANG = wall-plates fixed to the top of the principal posts, of which the two centre ones carry the ceiling-joists.
h. BARA LINTEUÈNG ceiling-joists, which also serve as tie-beams for the top-rafters.
j. TITIMAMA = ceiling-joists. Ceilings are only found in some of the Achehnese houses.
k. DIRI = king-posts to which are fastened the rafters of the main roof, which are notched over each other at the top. The lower ends of these posts, like those of the rafters, rest on broad supporting beams.
z. TULEUENG RUENG = the ridge. When the thatch (BOEBÖNG) of sago palm-leaves (ön meureuya) or nipah-leaves has been set in its place and another covering (TAMPōNG) of woven cocoanut leaves (BLEUÉT) has been placed on the top of the ridge, the whole ridge is called DUÉ, the ornamental top of the ridge being styled ULÈE DUE.
m. GEUNEUNTON GASEUE = the long ridge-pole to keep the rafters in position.
Hier bevindt zich een uitklapvel
Boek:
Sign. van het origineel: I02. B i^.ao j Signatuur microvorm: 1060:2. ^ Moedernegatief opslagnummer: Q o ya
Uitklapvel:
Aantal: 3 Moedernegatief opslagnummer: c^oo Positie in boek: acM*/ »v> bO^M